Express RTRTViewer

JMAG Version 22.
2
User's Manual
JMAG-Express, JMAG-RT, JMAG-RT Viewer
JSOL Corporation
Issue date of 1st Edition: August 2023
 COPYRIGHTS
Copyright © 2023 JSOL Corporation All Rights Reserved.
• Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
• No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or any means electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording for any purpose other than the purchaser’s personal use without the written per-
mission of JSOL Corporation.
JMAG Division
JSOL Corporation
Tokyo/ KUDAN-KAIKAN TERRACE 11th Floor, 1-6-5 Kudanminami, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 102-0074, Japan
Phone: +81(03)6261-7361 Phone (Support): +81(03)6261-7362 FAX: +81(03)5210-1142
Osaka/ Tosabori Daibiru Bldg. 2-2-4 Tosabori, Nishi-ku, Osaka 550-0001, Japan
Phone: +81(06)4803-5820 FAX: +81(06)6225-3517
Email: jmag-support@sci.jsol.co.jp URL: https://www.jmag-international.com/
 Trademarks
• JMAG and JMAG-RT are registered trademarks of JSOL Corporation.
• Abaqus, CATIA, SIMULIA and SOLIDWORKS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Dassault Systemes or its subsidiaries in
the United States and/or other countries.
• AMD and AMD Opteron is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
• Amesim, LMS Virtual.Lab, NX, Parasolid, Siemens, Simcenter, Simcenter 3D, Solid Edge, and STAR-CCM+ are trademarks or reg-
istered trademarks of Siemens Industry Software Inc., or its subsidiaries or affiliates, in the United States and in other countries.
• CAPRI CAE Gateway is a registered trademark of CADNexus Inc. in the United States and other countries.
• Creo and Pro/ENGINEER are registered trademarks of PTC, inc.
• DXF and Inventor are trademark or registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
• Excel, Microsoft, Visual C++, Windows, and Windows 10 are either registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
• Flexera Software and FLEXlm are registered trademarks of Flexera Software LLC in the United States and other countries.
• Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other
countries.
• LabVIEW is a registered trademark of National Instruments Corporation.
• Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States and other countries.
• LSF is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.
• MATLAB and Simulink are registered trademarks of The MathWorks, Inc.
• MSC NASTRAN is a trademark of MSC Software Corporation.
• NASTRAN is a registered trademark of the National Aeronautics and Space Administration.
• NX Nastran is an enhanced proprietary version developed and maintained by Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software Inc.
• NVIDIA is a trademark or registered trademark of NVIDIA Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• OpenOffice.org and Apache OpenOffice are registered trademarks of the Apache Software Foundation.
• PSIM is a registered trademark of Powersim Inc.
• ROMAX is a trademark of Romax Technology, LTD.
• Tecplot is a registered trademark of Tecplot, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
• Trademark information for PowerCore, owned by ThyssenKrupp Electrical Steel GmbH.
• All other product and company names are trademarks, registered trademarks, or service marks of their respective companies, organiza-
tions, or holders.
• This document does not include the letters ® and TM.
CONTENTS
About This Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
JMAG-Express 21.2
JMAG-Express 21.2 Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

About JMAG-Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
JMAG-Express Types and Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Types of Motors Supported by JMAG-Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Functions of JMAG-Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Motor Design Using a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Motor Design Using the Sizing Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Motor Characteristic Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Parametric Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
License Required to Use JMAG-Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Starting JMAG-Express 21.2 and JMAG-Express 21.2 Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Starting and Quitting JMAG-Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Starting from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Quitting JMAG-Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Template Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
JMAG-Express Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
[Language]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
[Maximum Number of Jobs (Licenses)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
[Number of Cores per Job]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
[Save Folder for JMAG-Designer Project] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
[Execution Method] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
[Appearance]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Getting Started with JMAG-Express 21.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Creating Templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Creating Custom Templates (Working with Geometry Editor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Using a Created Template in Another Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Designing Motors From Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Creating Models From Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Inputting Motor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Deriving Motor Size Using the Sizing Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Saving the Model / Creating New Templates Based on Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Evaluating the Performance of Designed Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Executing Characteristics Evaluation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3
JMAG Version 22.2 User's Manual
Adding Evaluation Items and Re-Executing Characteristics Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Executing Characteristics Evaluation with Changed Design Parameters (Parametric Evaluation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Checking Evaluation Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Comparing Results of Multiple Cases Using Response Graphs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Exporting Specifications and Evaluation Results to Reports for the Active Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Executing High-Accuracy FEA for Designed Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Sending Designed Motor Models to JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Design Parameters in JMAG-Express 21.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

[Requirement] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
[Dimensions] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
[Materials] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
[Winding] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
[Drive] Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Evaluation Results in JMAG-Express 21.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Evaluation Results of Brushless Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Design Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Maps (Three-axis Graph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Contour Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Flux Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Evaluation Results of Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Design Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Maps (Three-axis Graph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Contour Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Flux Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
JMAG-Express 21.2 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Basic Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Brushless Motor (IPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Brushless Motor (SPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/IPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/SPM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Contents of JPROJ File Exported from JMAG-Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Length Unit and Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Study Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Analysis Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Mesh Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4
CONTENTS
Response Table Creation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Efficiency Map Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
JMAG-Express Classic
JMAG-Express Classic Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

About JMAG-Express Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Types of Motors Supported by JMAG-Express Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Functions of JMAG-Express Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Motor Design Using a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Motor Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Parametric Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
JMAG-RT Model Creation (Exporting Evaluation Results for Control Circuit Simulation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Temperature Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Efficiency Map Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
JMAG-Express Classic Data Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Verifying the Path for the User-defined Template Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Duplicating Selected Data and Using on Another Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Importing/Exporting Designed Motors as a Geometry Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Basic Operation of JMAG-Express Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Starting JMAG-Express Classic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Starting from the Windows Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Starting from JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Startup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Template Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Template Editor Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
[File] Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
[Edit] Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
[View] Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
[Template] Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
[Sizing] Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
[Characteristics] Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
[Tool] Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
[Help] Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
JMAG-Express Classic Design Parameters and Template Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Common Design Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
[Requirement] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
[Dimensions] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
[Materials] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
[Winding] Tab (Shared). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
[Thermal] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
[Correction] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Design Parameters for a Brushless Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
5
[Winding] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

[Drive] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Design Parameters for an Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
[Winding] Tab (Multi-phase Induction Motor (Three-phase/Six-phase/Nine-phase)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
[Winding] Tab (Single-phase Induction Motor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
[Drive] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Design Parameters for a Switched Reluctance Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
[Winding] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
[Drive] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Design Parameters for a Brush Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
[Winding] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
[Drive] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Design Parameters for an Externally Excited Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
[Winding] Tab, [Field Coil] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
[Drive] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Design Parameters for a Wound-field AC Synchronous Machine and Claw Pole Alternator . . . . . . . 205
[Winding] Tab, [Field Coil] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
[Drive] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Design Parameters for a Universal Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
[Winding] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
[Drive] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Parameters During Creating and Editing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
[Model] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
[Constraint] Tab (Constraint/Feature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
[Preview] Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Designing Motor Using JMAG-Express Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Selecting Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Designing the Motor Using a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Enter Motor Specifications to the Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Change the Template of the Stator or Rotor While Entering the Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Register the Entered Specifications into the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Simulate the Specifications Previously Entered in the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Export the Entered Specifications to a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Import the Specifications Entered Previously from the File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Calculating Recommended Specifications Using the Sizing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Parameters That Fluctuate Using the Sizing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Creating a Motor Model Using the Sizing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Advanced Preparations for the Sizing Function (User-defined Template is Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Registering Geometry Parameter Set (User-defined Templates is Used). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Evaluating Motor Characteristics in JMAG-Express Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Running a Characteristics Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Checking Evaluation Results (Operations in the [Characteristics] Tab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
List of Evaluation Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Running Parametric Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Performing an Evaluation Taking Into Account Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
6
CONTENTS
Evaluating Motor Performance Using Maps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

About Maps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Motor Control Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Physical Quantities Used For Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Exporting Evaluation Results for Control Circuit Simulation (JMAG-RT Models). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Supported Control Circuit Simulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Process of Control Circuit Simulation Using JMAG-Express Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Using Data Created in JMAG-Express Classic in Other Software Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Exporting Designed Motors to a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Calculating Designed Motors in JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Sending Designed Motors to JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Procedures for Using JMAG-Express Classic as a Stand-alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Procedures for Starting JMAG-Express Classic from JMAG-Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Notes on Using Data Exported from JMAG-Express Classic with JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Study Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Using Data Created in Third-party Software in JMAG-Express Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Evaluating Geometries Created in commercial CAD software with JMAG-Express Classic . . . . . . . . 290
Notes Regarding the Use of This Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Notes for Creating Geometries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Creating a Template Using the Geometry Created with the Geometry Editor and commercial CAD
software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Notes for Creating Geometries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Cut Out the Partial Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Manually Create the Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Managing the Database and Editing Templates in JMAG-Express Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Editing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Modifying Basic Information of a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Editing the Template Geometry Using the JMAG-Designer Geometry Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Managing Data Registered in the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Exporting Data from the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Importing Data into the Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Deleting Data from the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
JMAG-Express Classic Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Default Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Brushless Motor (IPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Brushless Motor (SPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/IPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/SPM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
7
Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Single-phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Switched Reluctance Motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Brush Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Externally Excited Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Wound-Field AC Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Claw Pole Alternator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Universal Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Access/Shortcut Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Template Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Editor Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
JMAG-RT
JMAG-RT Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

About JMAG-RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Applications Supported by JMAG-RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Programs and Licenses for Creating JMAG-RT Models with JMAG-RT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Creating JMAG-RT Models with JMAG-RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Starting JMAG-RT Library Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Starting from the Windows [Start] Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Starting from JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Screen Configuration of JMAG-RT Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
[RT Model Library] Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Creating JMAG-RT Model Using FEA Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Create a FEM model in JMAG-Designer and export it to a JCF file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Load the JCF file into the JMAG-RT Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Set the parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Perform a FEA using JMAG-RT (Creation of a JMAG-RT Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Check and edit the contents of the JMAG-RT model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Copy the JMAG-RT model to the working folder of the circuit simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Run a control circuit simulation using the JMAG-RT model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Creating JMAG-RT Model from a CSV File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Input CSV File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Using the Data Added to the RT Model Library on Another Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Adding, or Partially Replacing with, New Results Data in a JMAG-RT Model (Recalculation to Improve
Accuracy). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Changing the Input File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Resolution Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Applying Correction to Result Values of JMAG-RT Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
8
CONTENTS
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Physical Quantity That Can be Corrected and Correction Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Format of Correction File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Adding Loss Data to a JMAG-RT Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Loss Table File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Exporting Results Data from a JMAG-RT Model to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Results Data Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Creating a Model for JMAG-RT Using the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Creating a Parameter File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Running Analysis Using Third-Party Job Schedulers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Call Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Notes on Simultaneous Analysis Execution from the Command Line (for Errors Caused by Jstage2 Files) . . . . . 425
Updating JMAG-RT Model Created by JMAG-Designer Version 10.4 or Earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Settings and Notes for Creating JMAG-RT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

PM Synchronous Motor and Synchronous Reluctance Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Notes on Using the PM Synchronous Motor Model Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Notes on Using the Synchronous Reluctance Motor Model Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating an FEM Model with JMAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
PMSM/SynRM JMAG-RT Model Type (LdLq, Spatial Harmonic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
JMAG-RT Library Manager Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Stepping Motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Notes on Using the Stepping Motor Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Linear Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Linear Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
SR Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Notes on Using the SR Motor Model Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Notes on Using the Induction Motor Model Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Wound-Field Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Notes on Using the Wound-Field Synchronous Motor Model Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
9
Generic Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

Concerning Generic Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Overview of Simulations Using JMAG-RT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

Types of JMAG-RT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Programs That Can Create JMAG-RT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Circuit Simulators That Can Use JMAG-RT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Using JMAG-RT Models in JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Running a Control Circuit Simulation Using JMAG-RT Models in JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Running an Integrated Analysis Study. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Running a Magnetic Field Analysis Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Using JMAG-RT Models in a Commercial Circuit Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

Using JMAG-RT Models in MATLAB/Simulink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Simulink Programs Required to Use JMAG-RT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Providing the Execution Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Types of Block Related to the JMAG-RT Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Adding Blocks to the Simulink Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
JMAG-RT Model Blocks: PM Synchronous Motor and Synchronous Reluctance Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Stepping Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Linear Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Linear Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
JMAG-RT Model Blocks: SR Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Induction Motor (Data Created by JMAG-Express) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Wound-Field Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Generic Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
JMAG-RT Loss Map Model Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
Adding User-specified Circuits to JMAG-RT Model Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Using JMAG-RT Models in PSIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
PSIM Programs Required to Use JMAG-RT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Providing the Execution Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Types of MagCoupler-RT Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Adding MagCoupler-RT Blocks to the PSIM Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Input/Output Nodes of a MagCoupler-RT Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
General RT Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Other MagCoupler-RT Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
Using JMAG-RT Models in Your Programs in C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
Providing the Execution Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
Procedure of Simulations Using Programs in C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Flowchart of the Program in C Using JMAGRT_DLL.dll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Creating a C Language Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Sample C Language Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
10
CONTENTS
Functions in JMAGRT_DLL.dll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728

Function Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
Creating Executable Files for Your Programs in C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Files to be Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Creation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Debug Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
JMAG-RT Viewer
JMAG-RT Viewer Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

JMAG-RT Viewer Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Displaying JMAG-RT Model Basic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Displaying FEA Result Value Maps Using JMAG-RT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Displaying Maps of Efficiency Map Analysis Studies in JMAG-RT Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Creating and Displaying Torque-Speed Curves and Efficiency Maps Using JMAG-RT models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Applying Skew to JMAG-RT Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
Adding Equivalent Iron Loss Resistance Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
Exporting MAT Files for MATLAB/Simulink FEM-Parameterized Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
License for JMAG-RT Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
Conversion to New Format (when JMAG-Designer 10.4 or earlier was used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
Conversion Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
When Using Data Created with JMAG-Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
Using JMAG-RT Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751

Starting JMAG-RT Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
Running from the Windows Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
Starting from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
Screen Configuration of JMAG-RT Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
Main Window of JMAG-RT Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
Detailed Settings for the Option Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
Map View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
Menu of JMAG-RT Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
Menu of the Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
Menu of the Map View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Importing a JMAG-RT Model (RTT File) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Operation from the Menu Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Operation by Drag and Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Checking Basic Information of the JMAG-RT Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
[Title] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
[Loss Map Info] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
[Comment] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
Displaying JMAG-RT Model FEA Result Value Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Viewable Result Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
Displaying Maps of JMAG-Efficiency Map Analysis Studies in JMAG-RT Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Applying Corrections to JMAG-RT Model FEA Result Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
11
Physical Quantity That Can be Corrected and Correction Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

Format of Correction File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
Applying Skew to JMAG-RT Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
Adding Equivalent Iron Loss Resistance Tables to JMAG-RT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
Electric Current Point Sequence File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
Exporting MAT Files for MATLAB/Simulink FEM-Parameterized Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
Procedure for Using MAT Files in Simulink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
Settings for Creating Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
Parameters for PM Synchronous Motor and Synchronous Reluctance Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
Parameters for Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
Saving Settings for Creating Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps to Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
Loading Settings for Creating Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps from Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
Displaying Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps in Map View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Changing Speed Curves/Maps Displayed in Map View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
Output Items for PM Synchronous Motor and Synchronous Reluctance Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
Output Items for Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
Exporting Speed Curve/Map Reports and Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
Exporting Speed Curve and Map Data Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
Exporting Speed Curve Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
Exporting Map Data Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
Motor Control Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
Algorithm for Calculating Revolution Speed - Torque Characteristics and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
Algorithm for Calculating Efficiency Maps and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
Notes Regarding Motor Control and Limitations of Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Running from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
Properties That Can be Set from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
Setting the License Check (License Waiting Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
12
About This Edition
“JMAG User’s Manual JMAG-Express, JMAG-RT, JMAG-RT Viewer” explains the screen composition, operation
procedure, and parameters in the following programs.
• JMAG-Express 21.2
• JMAG-Express Classic
• JMAG-RT
• JMAG-RT Viewer
MEMO JMAG user's manual is divided into contents.
• “JMAG Installation Manual”.
• “JMAG User's Manual Screen Configuration Edition”
• “JMAG User's Manual Operations Edition”
• “JMAG User's Manual Parameter Explanation Edition”
• “JMAG User's Manual JMAG-Express, JMAG-RT, JMAG-RT Viewer Edition”
• “JMAG User's Manual Coupled Analysis Edition”
• “JMAG User's Manual Files Edition”
• “JMAG User's Manual Licenses”
• “JMAG User's Manual Scripts Edition” and “Script Help”.
• “JMAG User's Manual Analysis Guide”
• “JMAG User's Manual Iron Loss Formulas”
13
14
JMAG-Express 21.2
JMAG-Express 21.2 Overviews
 Topics in This Chapter

• About JMAG-Express (page 18)
• JMAG-Express Types and Comparison (page 19)
• Types of Motors Supported by JMAG-Express (page 21)
• Functions of JMAG-Express (page 22)
• License Required to Use JMAG-Express (page 24)
17
JMAG-Express
About JMAG-Express
For a product to be released, there are a series of procedures as shown below, regardless of slight dif-
ferences in purpose or type.
JMAG provides various tools for virtual evaluation of performance in terms of steps in the product
design of electric machinery. JMAG-Express is meant to be used in the preliminary design stage of
motors.
Generally, the following functions are installed in JMAG-Express.
• Motor design using a template:
Templates that standardize motor geometries, materials, circuits, and drive conditions are
installed in JMAG-Express for each type of motor. Users can design motors easily by selecting
any of these templates and inputting the values of the specifications.
Templates with user original geometries can also be created from the geometries created by CAD
software.
• Characteristic evaluation of designed motors:
Analyze the designed motors by the finite element method. The results can be checked in tables,
graphs, and maps.
18
JMAG-Express Types and Comparison

There following are the types of JMAG-Express.
• JMAG-Express:
This is installed in JMAG-Designer Version 20.2 or later.
• JMAG-Express Classic (former JMAG-Express):
This is installed in JMAG-Designer Version 20.1 or earlier.
• JMAG-Express Online:
Web application. This is provided free of charge on the JMAG website.
The following is the function comparison table:
Function JMAG-Express JMAG-Express Classic JMAG-Express Online

Paid/Free The use of this tool is included in the JMAG pre/ Free.
post license contract. This tool requires the
registration.
Supported motors Brushless motors (3- Brushless motors (3- Brushless motors (3-
phase, 6-phase), induc- phase, 6-phase, 9- phase, 6-phase, 9-
tion motors (3-phase) phase), induction phase), induction
motors (single, 3-phase, motors (single, 3-phase,
6-phase, 9-phase), 6-phase, 9-phase),
switched reluctance switched reluctance
motor, brush motors, motor, brush motors,
externally excited syn- externally excited syn-
chronous machine, chronous machine,
wound-field AC syn- wound-field AC syn-
chronous machine, claw chronous machine, claw
pole alternators, univer- pole alternators
sal motors
Motor design using a
Supported
template
Creating user-defined Use Geometry Editor. Mainly uses JMAG- Not supported.
template Express and supplemen- Can only import tem-
tary uses Geometry Edi- plates created by other
tor. JMAG-Express.
Sizing function Supported
Using material data pro-
vided by material manu- Supported Not supported
factures
Defining custom mate-
Not supported Supported
rial
Using custom material Supported
Correction for magneti-
zation properties of the Supported Not supported
material
19
JMAG-Express
Function JMAG-Express JMAG-Express Classic JMAG-Express Online

Characteristic evalua- The following analyses Evaluation using the Evaluation using the
tion of motors can be performed using JMAG-Express solver. JMAG-Express solver.
the magnetic field analy- For high accuracy analy- For high accuracy analy-
sis solver in JMAG: ses, export models to ses, use JCF files
efficiency map, no-load, JMAG-Designer. exported from JMAG-
load, induced voltage, Express Online, in
demagnetization JMAG-Designer.
To perform analyses
other than the above,
export the model to
JMAG-Designer.
Parametric evaluation Supported
Creating JMAG-RT Not supported.
model However, JMAG-RT
models can be exported Supported
from JMAG-Designer
efficiency map analysis
studies.
Temperature evaluation Not supported Supported
Creating efficiency map Supported
20
Types of Motors Supported by JMAG-Express

JMAG-Express can handle the following motors.
• Brushless Motor (IPM) • Induction Motor

• Brushless Motor (SPM)
• Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/IPM)
• Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/SPM)
Brushless motor (IPM, SPM, outer rotor/IPM, outer rotor/SPM), induction motor
 Brushless Motor (IPM)

This is an embedded magnet brushless motor with salient poles. It is composed of a coil-wound sta-
tor and a magnet-mounted inner rotor. The motor rotates synchronously with the armature and
field system. Three-phase and six-phase are supported.
 Brushless Motor (SPM)

This is a surface PM brushless motor. It is composed of a coil-wound stator and a magnet-mounted
inner rotor. The motor rotates synchronously with the armature and field system. Three-phase and
six-phase are supported.
 Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/IPM)

tor and a magnet-mounted outer rotor. The motor rotates synchronously with the armature and
field system. Three-phase and six-phase are supported.
 Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/SPM)

outer rotor. The motor rotates synchronously with the armature and field system. Three-phase and
six-phase are supported.
 Induction Motor
This is a squirrel cage induction motor. It is composed of a coil-wound stator and a cage-mounted
rotor. Three-phase is supported.
21
JMAG-Express
Functions of JMAG-Express
The following functions can be used in JMAG-Express.
• Motor Design Using a Template (page 22)
• Motor Design Using the Sizing Function (page 22)
• Motor Characteristic Evaluation (page 23)
• Parametric Evaluation (page 23)
 Function correspondence table for each motor
O: Supported, -: Not supported
Induced Voltage Evaluation

Machine Characteristics
Parametric Evaluation
Demagnetization
using a template
Cogging Torque
Torque Ripple
Motor design
Motor Sizing
Evaluation
Evaluation
Evaluation
Evaluation
Brushless motor (IPM, SPM, 3-phase        
Outer Rotor/IPM, Outer Rotor/ 6-phase        
SPM) 9-phase - - - - - - - -
Induction motor 3-phase    -  - - 
6-phase - - - - - - - -
9-phase - - - - - - - -
Motor Design Using a Template

Templates that standardize motor geometries, materials, windings, drive conditions are installed in
JMAG-Express. Motors can be designed by entering motor specifications into the model that is cre-
ated from the template.
For details, see “Designing Motors From Templates” on page 59.
MEMO A template installed in JMAG-Express by default is referred to as a basic template, and a tem-
plate created by users is referred to as a user-defined template.
Motor Design Using the Sizing Function

Sizing is a function for outputting the values of the main specifications which fulfill the desired
value of the specified rated output. After approximate specifications are determined by the sizing
function, a target motor can be easily designed by adjusting each design parameter.
For details, see “Deriving Motor Size Using the Sizing Function” on page 60.
22
Motor Characteristic Evaluation

The machine characteristics and no-load/load characteristics of motors are obtained by FEA. The
analysis results can be checked in tables, graphs, and maps.
For details, see “Executing Characteristics Evaluation” on page 63.
Multiple cases with changed values of anyone design parameter (dimensions, materials, windings,
drive conditions) are created and collectively evaluated. The response to the design parameter can be
checked.
For details, see “Executing Characteristics Evaluation with Changed Design Parameters (Paramet-
ric Evaluation)” on page 68.
23
JMAG-Express
License Required to Use JMAG-Express

• Notes (page 24)
• Licenses (page 24)
Notes
• The following three licenses are used when JMAG-Express is started:
• JMAG-Express
• JMAG-Designer
• JMAG-Modeller
Licenses
License Description
JMAG-Express JMAG-Express pre/post license.
Even if multiple JMAG-Express are run in the same machine and with the
same user account, only one JMAG-Express license is consumed.
JMAG-Express_FR License for simple evaluation.
JMAG-Express_FR licenses are required to run the following characteris-
tics evaluation:
[Machine Characteristics] (efficiency map analysis studies (reduced order
model))
Note the following:
• With one JMAG-Express_FR license, one machine characteristics can be
evaluated.
For example, when two JMAG-Express are started on one machine and
machine characteristics are evaluated for both, two JMAG-Express_FR
licenses are required.
• Loss calculation included in machine characteristics evaluations are also
run in JMAG-Express_FR.
JW_MAG_DPL 2D magnetic field transient analysis license.
When the following characteristic evaluations are performed, the
JW_MAG_DPL license is required:
[Cogging Torque], [Torque Ripple], [Induced Voltage], [Demagnetiza-
tion]
JW_TOOL_LOSS Iron loss analysis license.
When the following characteristic evaluations are performed, the
JW_TOOL_LOSS license is required:
[Torque Ripple]
24
License Description
JW_MAG_SMP Parallel computing license.
When the following characteristic evaluations are performed with the
shared memory multiprocessing function (SMP), the JW_MAG_SMP
license is required:
[Cogging Torque], [Torque Ripple], [Induced Voltage], [Demagnetiza-
tion]
[Cores of Shared Memory Multiprocessing (SMP)] in the JMAG-Express
[Options] dialog determines whether SMP is used or not.
JMAG-Modeller The Geometry Editor license.
This license is required in the following cases:
• Starting JMAG-Express
• Operating Geometry Editor:
When a template including a motor shape created by yourself is used in
JMAG-Express, the motor shape needs to be added to the geometry
library of Geometry Editor.
Also, when Geometry Editor is opened with the [Register CAD data]
menu command in JMAG-Express, the JMAG-Modeller license is
required.
JMAG-Designer JMAG-Designer pre/post license.
This license is required in the following cases:
• Starting JMAG-Express
• Displaying contour plots of characteristic evaluation with JMAG-Express
• Sending motor models from JMAG-Express to JMAG-Designer
• Operating the motor models sent from JMAG-Express to JMAG-
Designer in JMAG-Designer
Note the following:
• Even if multiple JMAG-Express are run in the same machine and with
the same user account, only one JMAG-Designer license is consumed.
25
JMAG-Express
26
Starting JMAG-Express 21.2 and JMAG-Express 21.2
Screen Configuration
This chapter explains how to start JMAG-Express, the screen structure, menu commands, and buttons.

• Starting and Quitting JMAG-Express (page 28)
• Starting from the Command Line (page 28)
• Quitting JMAG-Express (page 28)
• Screen Configuration (page 29)
• Template Window (page 29)
• Main Window (page 31)
• JMAG-Express Options (page 41)
27
JMAG-Express
Starting and Quitting JMAG-Express

• Quitting JMAG-Express (page 28)
Starting from the Command Line
 Windows (using command)
1. Execute the command to start JMAG-Express

If the JMAG-Express installation folder is set to INSDIR, execute the following command
(INSDIR=C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\ExpressX, etc.).
cd $INSDIR
expressx.exe
File paths with spaces need to be enclosed with double quotation marks (").
cd "C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer\ExpressX"
expressx.exe
 Linux (using command)
1. Execute the command to start JMAG-Express.

If the JMAG-Express installation directory is set to INSDIR, execute the following command
(INSDIR=C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\ExpressX, etc.).
cd $INSDIR
./expressx
Quitting JMAG-Express
Perform one of the following operations.
• Click [Close] on the [File] tab of the main window.
• Click [X] displayed in the upper-right corner of the window.
28
Starting JMAG-Express 21.2 and JMAG-Express 21.2 Screen Configuration
This section describes each of the screen configurations in JMAG-Express.
Template Window
Select a template to use in the template window.
Template Window
 The left side of the window

List/Command Description
[Recent Templates] Names of recently used templates are displayed under [Recent Templates].
• To create a new model from the displayed template, click the name of the
template. The main window will open and the model will be displayed.
• To remove a displayed template from the list, right-click the name of the
template and select [Delete from List].
[Recent Files] Names of JXD files recently imported to JMAG-Express are displayed
under [Recent Files].
Hover the mouse pointer over a file name to display the file path in a pop-
up window.
Click a file name to display a model created from the template in the file of
the main window.
MEMO The JXD file can be exported from the JMAG-Express main win-
dow. This file has information on input parameter values of designed
motors.
[Open Other Files] Creates a new model by importing a template from a JXD file.
Click [Open Other Files] to display the [Import Template File] dialog.
Select a JMAG-Express template file (.jxd) to import and click [Open]. A
model created from the template in the file is displayed in the main win-
dow.
29
JMAG-Express
List/Command Description
[Import Geometry Imports motor geometry file sets (.jmdl, .png, .xml) exported from Geom-
Library] etry Editor, to JMAG-Express.
Click [Import Geometry Library] to display the [Import Libraries] dialog.
Specify a folder where the motor geometry file sets are located and click
[Select Folder].
• All motor geometries located in the specified folder are imported to
JMAG-Express.
• When the specified folder has a file with the same name as the template,
the file overwrites the JMAG-Express template.
MEMO Custom geometries to be imported to JMAG-Express must satisfy
several conditions. For details, see “Preparing Rotor and Stator Geome-
tries with Geometry Editor” on page 47.
[Register CAD Data] Starts Geometry Editor.
[Options] Opens the [Options] dialog. The following settings can be changed in the
[Options] dialog:
• Display language in JMAG-Express
• Maximum number of jobs for an efficiency map analysis study (reduced
order model)
• Maximum number of jobs for a magnetic field transient analysis study
• Job parallelism for an efficiency map analysis study (reduced order
model)
• Cores of shared memory multiprocessing (SMP) for a magnetic field
transient analysis study
• Machine settings used for batch execution
• Display settings in the main window [Model Diagram] tab (background
colors, dimension line thickness, etc.)
See “JMAG-Express Options” on page 41.
[Help] Displays JMAG-Express help.
[About] Displays the version information of JMAG-Express in the [About] dialog.
 The right side of the window

Templates are displayed for each motor on the right side of the window.
30
Command Description
[Model Combination] Rotor templates and stator templates are used in combination.
Click [Model Combination] to display the [Build New Combination] dia-
log.
The preinstalled templates are displayed in [Rotor] and [Stator]. Geome-
tries imported from the geometry library in Geometry Editor are also dis-
played.
Select each template to be used from [Rotor] and [Stator] and click [OK].
A model created from the template is displayed in the main window.
MEMO For details on preinstalled templates, see “Basic Templates” on
page 120.
[Basic Templates] Uses preinstalled templates including both rotors and stators.
Click [Basic Templates] to display the [Basic Template] dialog. Click a
template you want to use. A model created from the template is displayed
in the main window.
MEMO For details on preinstalled templates, see “Basic Templates” on
page 120.
[User-Defined Templates] Uses templates added by users.
Click [User-Defined Templates] to display the [User Templates] dialog.
This dialog displays templates saved in the internal storage of the machine
you are using.
• To create a new model from the displayed template, select the template
and click [Open]. The main window will open and the model will be dis-
played.
• To delete the displayed template from the internal storage, select the tem-
plate and click [Delete].
MEMO To add user-defined templates, use the [Register User-Defined
Template] command in the main window [File] tab.
Main Window
Motor specifications are entered and characteristics evaluation is run in the main window.
31
JMAG-Express
Main Window
The main window consists of multiple tabs.

• The [File], [Home], and [View] tabs at the top of the main window:
JMAG-Express menu commands and buttons are displayed in these tabs.
• The [Requirement], [Dimension], [Material], [Winding], and [Drive] tabs on the lower left of
the main window:
Motor design parameters are displayed in these tabs.
• The [Model Diagram], [Winding Diagram], and [Slot Diagram] tabs on the lower right side of
the main window:
The model appearance and winding condition determined from design parameters in each tab of
the lower left side of the main window are displayed in these tabs.
• The [Characteristics] tab on the lower right side of the main window:
The results of design parameters and characteristics evaluation (tables, graphs, maps) are dis-
played in this tab.
• The [Response] tab at the bottom right of the main window:
This tab displays a group of design cases and response graphs.
[File] Tab
Command Description
[Template Selection] Closes the main window and opens the template window.
If the design parameter value of the model being displayed has been
changed and this command is executed, a message asking whether to save
the model or not is displayed.
• Click [Yes] to display the [Export Template File] dialog. Specify the
name and destination of the file and click [Save].
• If you click [No], the model being edited is discarded.
[Open] Creates a new model by importing a template from the JXD file.
Click [Open Other Files] to display the [Import Template File] dialog.
Select the JMAG-Express template file you want to import and click
[Open]. Models created from the templates in this file are displayed in the
main window.
32
Command Description
[Register User-Defined Saves the model displayed in the main window as a template in the internal
Template] storage of your machine.
Click [Register User-Defined Template] to display the [Register User-
Defined Template] dialog. Enter a name for the template, and click [Save].
If a template with the same name as you entered already exists in the stor-
age, a message asking if you want to overwrite the old template with the
new template will be displayed.
MEMO To use a template saved in storage, click [User-Defined Template]
on the template window. Double-click the template name displayed in the
[User-Defined Template] dialog to display the model created from the
template in the main window.
[Export Template File] Exports the model displayed in the main window as a JXD file.
Click [Export Template File] to display the [Export Template File] dialog.
Specify the name and destination of the file you want to export and click
[Save]. The JXD file is exported to the specified location.
MEMO The exported JXD-file can be imported into JMAG-Express. To
import the JXD file to JMAG-Express, execute one of the following com-
mands.
• [Open Other Files] in the template window
• [Open] the [File] tab in the main window
[Export JMAG-Designer Exports the model displayed in the main window as a JPROJ file.
Project File] Click [Export JMAG-Designer Project File] to display the [Export Project]
dialog. Specify the name and destination of the file you want to export and
click [Save]. The JPROJ file is exported to the specified location.
For information about what is exported to a JPROJ file, see “Contents of
JPROJ File Exported from JMAG-Express” on page 124 for reference.
MEMO The exported JPROJ file can be imported into JMAG-Designer
Version 20.1 and later versions.
MEMO The exported JPROJ file will contain studies for each evaluation
item. It is not affected by the evaluation item settings in the [Home] tab of
the main window.
[Export Report] Exports the design parameters and evaluation results of the model dis-
played in the main window to a file (.pdf or.csv).
Click [Export Report] to display the [Export Report] dialog. Specify the
name, type, and destination of the file you want to export and click [Save].
The file is exported to the specified location.
MEMO Evaluation results are exported when the characteristics of the
model have already been evaluated.
[Close] Exits JMAG-Express.
33
JMAG-Express
Command Description
[Options] Opens the [Options] dialog. The following settings can be changed in the
[Options] dialog.
• Display language in JMAG-Express
• Maximum number of jobs for an efficiency map analysis study (reduced
order model)
• Maximum number of jobs for a magnetic field transient analysis study
• Job parallelism for an efficiency map analysis study (reduced order
model)
• Cores of shared memory multiprocessing (SMP) for a magnetic field
transient analysis study
• Machine settings used for batch execution
• Display settings in the main window [Model Diagram] tab (background
See “JMAG-Express Options” on page 41.
[Help] Displays JMAG-Express help.
[About] Displays the version information of JMAG-Express in the [About] dialog.
[Home] Tab
To change the button displayed on the screen, click the down arrow  and select a button from the
drop-down menu.
Category Buttons/option Description

[Undo] [Undo] Reverses the previous operation.
[Redo] Reruns the undone operation.
[Sizing] [Sizing] Opens the [Sizing] dialog.
The sizing function makes Express calculate the proposed
valued of design parameters such as dimension, materials and
windings for user specified target values such as rated output.
For details see “Deriving Motor Size Using the Sizing Func-
tion” on page 60.
34

[Evaluate] Evaluation items Executing the subsequent [Evaluate], [Add Result] or [Para-
metric] will run the analysis of the selected evaluation items.
• [Machine Characteristics]:
When this evaluation item is selected, the efficiency map
analysis study (reduced order model) is executed.
• [Cogging Torque], [Torque Ripple], [Induced Voltage],
[Demagnetization]:
When these evaluation items are selected, a 2D transient
analysis is run.
Evaluation items differ depending on motor type. For details
see “Executing Characteristics Evaluation” on page 63.
[Evaluate], [Evaluate These buttons run analysis of the model displayed on the
(Batch Execution)] main window.
• [Evaluate]:
Runs the analysis in the foreground. JMAG-Express can-
not be operated while analysis is running in the fore-
ground.
• [Evaluate (Batch Execution)]:
Uses JMAG-Scheduler to run analysis in the background.
JMAG-Express can be operated while analysis is running
in the background.
For details see “Executing Characteristics Evaluation” on
page 63.
[Add Result], [Add These buttons become active when a new evaluation item is
Result (Batch Execu- selected for models with evaluation results.
tion)] These buttons run analysis for the added evaluation item and
adds the results the model.
• [Add Result]:
Runs the added analysis in the foreground. JMAG-Express
cannot be operated while analysis is running in the fore-
ground.
• [Add Result (Batch Execution)]:
Uses JMAG-Scheduler to run analysis in the background.
JMAG-Express can be operated while analysis is running
in the background.
For details see “Adding Evaluation Items and Re-Executing
Characteristics Evaluation” on page 67.
35
JMAG-Express

[Parametric], [Para- These buttons become active in the following situations:
metric (Batch Execu- • When you click the text box displayed in the [Geometry]
tion)] tab, [Materials] tab, [Windings] tab, or [Drive] tab.
• When you click the yellow cell in the characteristics table
of the [Characteristics] tab.
These buttons run multiple analysis with 1 or more design
variables.
• [Parametric]:
Runs parametric analysis in the foreground. JMAG-
Express cannot be operated while analysis is running in the
foreground.
• [Parametric (Batch Execution)]:
Uses JMAG-Scheduler to run parametric analysis in the
background. JMAG-Express can be operated while analysis
is running in the background.
See “Executing Characteristics Evaluation with Changed
Design Parameters (Parametric Evaluation)” on page 68.
[Check New Result] Loads results of analysis run in the background to JMAG-
Express.
Make sure to execute this button after executing [Evaluate
(Batch Execution)], [Add Result (Batch Execution)], or
[Parametric (Batch Execution)].
[Report] [Graph] Opens the [Graph] dialog.
The following settings can be made with this dialog:
• Select the result diagram (graph, map) displayed in the
[Characteristics] tab.
• Change the order of result diagram (graph, map) displayed
in the [Characteristics] tab.
[Add Case Group] Creates a new case group from the design case selected in the
design table in the [Characteristics] tab.
You can check the created case group in the [Response] tab.
For details see “Comparing Results of Multiple Cases Using
Response Graphs” on page 77.
[Add Response Graph] Creates a response graph for the selected case group.
For details see “Comparing Results of Multiple Cases Using
Response Graphs” on page 77.
36

[Tools] [Open in JMAG- • [Open in JMAG-Designer]:
Designer] , [Send Exports the model displayed in the main window as a
to Path] JPROJ file, start JMAG-Designer and open the JPROJ file.
MEMO Run the analysis from the JMAG-Designer
menu command.
MEMO When a model that is evaluated for characteris-
tics in JMAG-Express is sent to JMAG-Designer, the
JPROJ file with the evaluation results will open.
• [Send to Path]:
Exports the model displayed in the main window to the
specified folder as a JPROJ file, then start JMAG-Designer
and open the JPROJ file.
The [Export Project] dialog is displayed. Specify the name
and destination of the export file and click [Save]. The
JPROJ file is displayed in JMAG-Designer after it is
exported to the specified location.
MEMO Run the analysis from the JMAG-Designer
menu command.
MEMO When a model that is evaluated for characteris-
tics in JMAG-Express is sent to JMAG-Designer, the
JPROJ file with the evaluation results will open.
[Help] [Help] Opens JMAG-Express Help.
[View] Tab
Category Command Description

[Report] [Fit Window] Displays the entire geometry in the [Motor Diagram] tab.
[Zoom] Zooms in or out on the geometry displayed in the

[Model Diagram] tab.
While [Zoom] is pressed, clicking the left mouse button
and dragging upward zooms in on the geometry. Drag-
ging downward zooms out from the geometry.
[Zoom To Area] Zooms in or out the specified area on the [Model Draw-
ing] tab.
While [Zoom To Area] is pressed, hold down the left
mouse button and drag diagonally to display a rectangle.
When the left mouse button is released, the area of the
rectangle will be enlarged.
[Move] (panning) Moves the model view in the [Model Diagram] tab.
While [Move] is pressed, clicking the left mouse button
and dragging will move the geometry to the direction it is
dragged.
[Requirement], [Dimensions], [Materials], [Winding], and [Drive] Tabs

In the [Requirement] tab, set the performance target values for the motor (page 84).
37
JMAG-Express
In the [Dimensions] tab, set the dimension values for the motor (page 85).
In the [Material] tab, set the material for each part of the motor (page 90).
In the [Winding] tab, set the coil pitch and wire connection information (page 96).
In the [Drive] tab, set the drive circuit and driving current (page 102).
[Motor Diagram] tab

In the [Motor Diagram] tab, the motor geometry determined from the values of each variable in the
[Dimensions] tab is shown.
• The magnetization direction of the magnet is displayed when the rotor magnet is selected in the
[Materials] tab.
• The winding direction is displayed when the [Winding] tab is displayed. Use the button on the
top right to show/hide the winding direction of each phase.
MEMO If there is an inconsistency in the geometry, each part of the motor in the [Motor Diagram] tab
will not be highlighted.
[Winding Diagram] tab

In the [Winding Diagram] tab, the slot number passed by the coil of each phase and the connection
of each phase are shown.
• Alphabets show the phases.
• The numbers are the slot numbers.
• When a coil passes through a slot from bottom to top, the slot number will be displayed in the
[UP SLOT] column. If a coil passes through a slot from top to bottom, the slot number will be
displayed in the [DOWN SLOT] column.
MEMO The positions of the phase and slot on the model can be checked in the [Motor Diagram] tab.
[Slot Diagram] tab

In the [Slot Diagram] tab, the placement of the coil in the slot is shown.
• Alphabets show the phases.
• The numbers are the slot numbers.
• Use the button on the top right to show/hide the coil of each phase.
MEMO The positions of the phase and slot on the model can be checked in the [Motor Diagram] tab.
[Characteristics] tab
The [Characteristics] tab is divided into 3 frames and displayed as the design comparisons, perfor-
mances, and design sheet.
Design comparisons In this frame, the history of the characterization is displayed in a table for-
mat.
Performances In this frame, the results (graphs and maps) are displayed after the charac-
terization.
Design sheet In this frame, the design parameters and their values set in the [Dimen-
sions] tab, [Material] tab, [Winding] tab, and [Drive] tab are displayed.
38
Design comparisons
Performances
Design sheet
See “Checking Evaluation Results” on page 70.
[Response] Tab
The [Response] tab is divided into 3 frames and displayed as the case group table, the response value
graph and the case setting table.
Case group table This frame displays a list of the groups of design cases that have been added
to the model.
Response graph This frame displays the response graphs that have been added to the model.
Response graphs can be created for each case group.
Case setting table This frame displays information for each proposed design case that has
been added to the group selected in the Case Groups table. The following
information is displayed.
• Design variable value:
When there is a parameter that uses different values depending on the
case within the group, that parameter value is displayed.
• Comments given to cases:
Comments can be given to each case in the design table of the [Charac-
teristics] tab. The comments are displayed in the case setting table.
39
JMAG-Express
Case group table
Response graph
Case setting table
For details see “Comparing Results of Multiple Cases Using Response Graphs” on page 77.
40
JMAG-Express Options
When the [Options] menu command of JMAG-Express is executed, the [Options] dialog is dis-
played. The following settings can be set in the [Options] dialog:
Setting Description
[Language] Setting for display language in JMAG-Express
[Maximum Number of Setting for maximum number of jobs for an efficiency map analysis study
Jobs (Licenses)] (reduced order model) and magnetic field transient analysis. This setting
controls the maximum number of licenses.
[Number of Cores per Setting for number of parallel jobs of an efficiency map analysis study
Job] (reduced order model) and cores of shared memory multiprocessing (SMP)
of magnetic field transient analysis.
[Save Folder for JMAG- Setting folder for saving a project file when sending a model to JMAG-
Designer Project] Designer.
[Execution Method] Setting for the machine used for batch execution.
[Appearance] Display settings of the main window [Model Diagram] tab (background
The settings are applied to JMAG-Express when [OK] is clicked in the [Options] dialog.
[Language]
Select the language used in the user interface for JMAG-Express.
The language for the user interface is automatically determined based on the language of the operat-
ing system when [System Default] is selected.
[Maximum Number of Jobs (Licenses)]

This setting is for characteristic evaluation. For details on characteristic evaluation, see “Executing
Parameter Description
[Machine Characteristics When machine characteristics are evaluated from JMAG-Express, an effi-
(Consume JMAG- ciency map analysis study (reduced order model) is created, and this is sub-
Express_FR License Fea- mitted to JMAG-Designer or JMAG-Scheduler as a job.
ture)] For the efficiency map analysis study (reduced order model) run from
JMAG-Express, the Express_FR license is used.
In [Machine Characteristics (Consume JMAG-Express_FR License Fea-
ture)], enter the maximum value of the Express-FR license available in
JMAG-Express being used.
The default value of [Machine Characteristics (Consume JMAG-
Express_FR License Feature)] is 1. The maximum value is 10.
41
JMAG-Express
[Except for Machine When characteristics other than machine characteristics are evaluated by
Characteristics (Consume JMAG-Express, a magnetic field transient analysis study is created in the
JW_MAG_DPL License background, and this is submitted to JMAG-Designer or JMAG-Scheduler
Feature)] as a job.
For the magnetic field transient analysis study to run from JMAG-Express,
the JW_MAG_DPL license is used. In [Except for Machine Characteristics
(Consume JW_MAG_DPL License Feature)], enter the maximum value
of the JW_MAG_DPL license available in JMAG-Express currently in use.
The default value of [Except for Machine Characteristics (Consume
JW_MAG_DPL License Feature)] is 1. The maximum value is 8.
Note the following:

• When a characterization is run in batch, JMAG-Scheduler manages the characterization jobs.
The settings for the number of simultaneous jobs in JMAG-Express and JMAG-Scheduler are
separate, and the number of simultaneous jobs set in JMAG-Express does not affect the settings
for the number of simultaneous jobs in JMAG-Scheduler.
To limit the number of simultaneous jobs when running a characterization in batch, set the
number of simultaneous jobs in JMAG-Scheduler.
[Number of Cores per Job]

This setting is for characteristic evaluation. For details on characteristic evaluation, see “Executing
[Parallel Jobs of Machine When machine characteristics are evaluated from JMAG-Express, an effi-
Characteristics] ciency map analysis study (reduced order model) is created, and this is sub-
mitted to JMAG-Designer or JMAG-Scheduler as a job.
In the efficiency map analysis study (reduced order model), computations
at multiple calculation points are run in one study. To parallelize the com-
putation at each calculation point, change values of [Parallel Jobs of
Machine Characteristics].
The default value or maximum value of [Parallel Jobs of Machine Charac-
teristics] is 6.
[Cores of Shared Memory When characteristics other than machine characteristics are evaluated from
Multiprocessing (SMP) JMAG-Express, a magnetic field transient analysis study is created, this is
except for Machine Char- submitted to JMAG-Designer or JMAG-Scheduler as a job.
acteristics] In the magnetic field transient analysis study, computation processing can
be parallelized on per-thread basis by using shared memory multiprocess-
ing function (SMP). To parallelize computation processing, change values
of [Cores of Shared Memory Multiprocessing (SMP) except for Machine
Characteristics].
The default value of [Cores of Shared Memory Multiprocessing (SMP)
except for Machine Characteristics] is 1 (non-parallel). The maximum
value is 8.
42
[Save Folder for JMAG-Designer Project]

When [Open in JMAG-Designer] is run in the main window, the JPROJ file of the model being dis-
played is exported. Then JMAG-Designer is started and the exported project file is displayed.
In [Save Folder for JMAG-Designer Project], the folder path to which the JPROJ file is exported is dis-
played. The default is as follows.
C:Users\(user name)\Documents\JMAG\JMAG-ExpressX\project
When changing from the default, click the button to open the [Save Folder for JMAG-Designer
Project] dialog and specify a folder.
[Execution Method]
This setting is for batch execution of characteristic evaluation. For details on characteristic evalua-
tion, see “Executing Characteristics Evaluation” on page 63.
[Machine Name (Server Select the machine to run jobs when a batch job is running characteristic
Name)] evaluation.
• [Local Execution]:
Runs JMAG-Express jobs using the current machine.
• Remote machine:
Runs JMAG-Express jobs using a previously registered remote machine.
Remote machine settings are made in the JMAG-Designer [Preferences]
dialog, see the JMAG-Designer Help.
• Job scheduler server:
Runs JMAG-Express jobs using computation nodes managed by a previ-
ously registered job scheduler system.
To use the JMAG-RemoteSystem provided by JMAG, see “JMAG Instal-
lation Manual”.
The settings for using the commercial job scheduler system are made in
the JMAG-Designer [Preferences] dialog, see the JMAG-Designer Help.
[CPU Group] If you selected a JMAG-RemoteSystem server in [Machine Name (Server
Name)], select the CPU node group to be used to execute jobs.
[Appearance]
Settings related to the display of the [Motor Diagram] tab on the main window.
43
JMAG-Express
[Use Gradient Back- To apply a gradient background to the [Motor Diagram] tab, select [Use
ground] Gradient Background]. For a single color background, clear [Use Gradient
Background].
Click the color button displayed to the right of [Background Color]/[Top

Color]/[Bottom Color] to display a color palette. Specify the color used for
display.
[Color] and [Line Width] Specify the color and width of the model outline (1 to 5).
for [Model Outline]
[Fill Region] Clear [Fill Region] when displaying a region with the same color as the
background with no fill.
[Color] and [Line Width] Specify the color and thickness (1 to 5) of the dimension line displayed on
for [Dimension Line the [Model Diagram] tab.
(Highlight)]
44
Getting Started with JMAG-Express 21.2
JMAG-Express is intended to be used according to the following workflow. This chapter describes the operation
procedure in accordance with this flow.
• (1) Creating a template (page 47):
By default, the templates installed in JMAG-Express are called basic templates. Original templates created by
users are called user-defined templates.
This step is not required when using the basic template. The geometry library function in Geometry Editor
is used for user-original motor geometry templates in JMAG-Express.
• (2) Designing the motor from the template (page 59):
Create a model from the template and specify the motor specifications (geometry, material, winding, drive
condition, and performance targets).
The sizing function can also be used for JMAG-Express to calculate the proposed motor specification of the
performance target.
• (3) Evaluating the characteristics of the designed motor (page 63):
Run an FEA from JMAG-Express. You can check the results in tables, graphs, or maps. Complete the initial
design proposal model by repeatedly modifying and characterizing the design parameter values.
• (4) Run a high accuracy FEA of the designed motor (page 81):
To validate the initial design proposal and determine the details of the specifications, send the initial design
proposal models to JMAG-Designer to run a high accuracy FEA.

• Creating Templates (page 47)
• Creating Custom Templates (Working with Geometry Editor) (page 47)
• Preparing Rotor and Stator Geometries with Geometry Editor (page 47)
• Importing Rotor and Stator Geometries from Geometry Editor to JMAG-Express (page 54)
• Checking Imported Rotor and Stator Geometries and Matching to JMAG-Express Template Function
(page 54)
• Creating New Templates by Combining a Rotor Template and Stator Template (page 57)
• Using a Created Template in Another Machine (page 57)
• Designing Motors From Templates (page 59)
• Creating Models From Templates (page 59)
• Inputting Motor Specifications (page 60)
• Deriving Motor Size Using the Sizing Function (page 60)
• Saving the Model / Creating New Templates Based on Input Specifications (page 62)
• Evaluating the Performance of Designed Motors (page 63)
• Executing Characteristics Evaluation (page 63)
• Adding Evaluation Items and Re-Executing Characteristics Evaluation (page 67)
• Executing Characteristics Evaluation with Changed Design Parameters (Parametric Evaluation) (page 68)
45
JMAG-Express
• Checking Evaluation Results (page 70)

• Design Comparisons (page 71)
• Performances (page 72)
• Design Sheet (page 76)
• Comparing Results of Multiple Cases Using Response Graphs (page 77)
• Exporting Specifications and Evaluation Results to Reports for the Active Case (page 79)
• Executing High-Accuracy FEA for Designed Motors (page 81)
• Sending Designed Motor Models to JMAG-Designer (page 81)
46
Creating Templates
By default, the templates installed in JMAG-Express are called basic templates. Original templates
created by users are called user-defined templates.
This section describes how to create a user-defined template.
• Creating Custom Templates (Working with Geometry Editor) (page 47)
• Using a Created Template in Another Machine (page 57)
MEMO The steps described here are not required when using the basic template. Proceed to “Designing
Motors From Templates” on page 59.
Creating Custom Templates (Working with Geometry Editor)

Use Geometry Editor to create a user-original motor geometry template.
To create a template using a motor geometry created in commercial CAD software, you must first
load the motor geometry to Geometry Editor and set some of the settings.
• Preparing Rotor and Stator Geometries with Geometry Editor (page 47)
• Importing Rotor and Stator Geometries from Geometry Editor to JMAG-Express (page 54)
• Checking Imported Rotor and Stator Geometries and Matching to JMAG-Express Template
Function (page 54)
• Creating New Templates by Combining a Rotor Template and Stator Template (page 57)
Preparing Rotor and Stator Geometries with Geometry Editor

1. Start Geometry Editor from JMAG-Designer.
MEMO You can also start Geometry Editor by executing [Register CAD Data] on the JMAG-
Express template window.
2. Prepare a 2D motor geometry for use with JMAG-Express templates.
Prepare the motor geometry in one of the following ways:
• Create a geometry from scratch with Geometry Editor.
• Create a geometry based on the geometry added to the Geometry Editor library.
• Import the motor geometry created with commercial CAD software to Geometry Editor.
Note the following when using either method:
• Prepare a 2D geometry.
• Align the center of rotation with the origin of the global coordinate system.
• Align the first periodic boundary edge with the X-axis of the global coordinate system. Create
the geometry in the counterclockwise direction based on the X-axis.
47
JMAG-Express
• Include only the rotor or stator geometry for one assembly (create a separate assembly for the
rotor template geometry and stator template geometry).
MEMO To create a template that includes both the rotor geometry and stator geometry, execute
[Register User-Defined Template] in the [File] tab of the JMAG-Express main window. For
details, see “Creating New Templates by Combining a Rotor Template and Stator Template” on
page 57.
• Prepare a geometry, in the smallest unit of geometry pattern.
The smallest unit of geometry pattern for rotor geometry is the geometry for one pole. For
stator geometry, it is for one slot.
Geometries in the smallest units (left: rotor, right: stator)
In addition, extend geometries by one pole by setting the region pattern feature ([Region
Radial Pattern]/[Region Mirror Copy]) in the one slot geometries created for the stator.
Geometry extension from area of one slot to area of one pole
If a geometry greater than or equal to the smallest unit has been created, use the conversion
function in Geometry Editor ([Convert to Linear Pattern Feature]/[Convert to Circular Pat-
tern Feature]/[Convert to Mirror Copy Feature]). This function allows you to extract the
smallest units of a geometry pattern from the geometry and apply region pattern features to
them. For details, see the “Parameter Explanation Edition.”
• When changing the dimension value of the motor geometry in JMAG-Express, set con-
straints to the geometry. Assign a variable to dimension value for constraints that define
dimension value (distance/angle).
However, if you do not plan to change the dimension value of motor geometry in JMAG-
Express, the constraint settings are not required.
MEMO Refer to the setting added to motor geometry in the [Geometry Library] tab of Geome-
try Editor as an example of settings for the smallest units of geometry and constraints in geometry
pattern.
48
• When using equations (variables) for dimensional parameters, clear [Register to Designer]
when creating equations in the [Edit Equation] dialog.
To create a geometry based on motor geometry added to the geometry library:

The rotor geometry and stator geometry used as the JMAG-Express basic template are located
under the [Motor] folder in the Geometry Editor [Geometry Library] tab.
Select rotor or stator geometry in the [Geometry Library] tab and drag and drop it to the graph-
ics window. Edit the geometry after it is added to the assembly.
The following is an example of editing the stator core (IPM-rotor basic geometry):
(1) Delete the stator core region.
(2) Draw holes in the sketch.
(3) After drawing, re-create the region.
(4) Modify the region pattern features and set settings that were causing errors due to deleting
the region.
To use geometries created by CAD software:

Import geometries from a DXF file or SAT file.
To import the file, select [File] > [Open] from the Geometry Editor menu bar. Specify the file
you want to import and click [Open].
After importing, delete any unwanted information on the template, such as the borders in the
drawing.
3. Create settings for the JMAG-Express template in the motor geometry.
Create the following settings for motor geometry to be imported to JMAG-Express:
• Set (mandatory)
• Name of parts (optional)
• Geometry parameter set list (optional)
i. Geometry sets are created to allow JMAG-Express to determine periodic boundary

and magnetization directions.
The following geometry sets are required for the geometry used in the template:
49
JMAG-Express
Set name Set type Purpose

Periodic_Boundary Edge set Periodic boundary edges.
The edges of this set are treated as the first peri-
odic boundary face.
Create edge sets of the same name for both the
rotor geometry and stator geometry.
Magnet_Direction Direction set The magnetization direction of the magnet.
When [Parallel Pattern (Circular Any Direc-
tion)] is selected in [Magnetization Pattern] of a
magnet, the magnet’s magnetization vector is
determined by this direction set.
The orientation of the direction vector also
affects the magnetization direction of the mag-
net. Carefully check the orientation previewed
in the graphics window.
When there are multiple magnet parts for one
rotor and when the magnetization direction is
changed for each magnet part, create multiple
direction sets. ([Magnet_Direction], [Mag-
net.2_Direction], etc.)
Magnet_RadialDi- Point set The radial magnetization direction of the mag-
rection net.
When [Radial Pattern (Circular Any Radial
Center)] is selected in [Magnetization Pattern]
of a magnet, the magnet’s magnetization vector
is determined by this direction set.
When there are multiple magnet parts for one
rotor and when the magnetization direction is
changed for each magnet part, create multiple
direction sets ([Magnet_RadialDirection],
[Magnet.2_RadialDirection], etc.).
Coil.1, Coil.2 Region set Coil layers 1 and 2.
A region in the [Coil.1] set is determined as
being layer 1. A region in the [Coil.2] set is
determined as being layer 2.
Bar.1 Region set For induction motor only.
This set of region is treated as a rotor bar.
50
Sample of set
The following is the procedure for setting the [Periodic_Boundary] set:

(1) On the graphics window of Geometry Editor, right-click an edge and select [Edge Set].
(2) Enter “Periodic_Boundary” in [Name] of the [Edge Set] setting panel.
(3) Check settings by clicking the edge name displayed in [Edge].
(4) Click [OK].
ii. Change the parts names and region names of the motor geometry to match the
name of parts used in JMAG-Express.
This setting is not mandatory. However, creating this setting makes operations easier when
using the template that contains the created motor geometry for the first time.
We recommend that you change the name so that the part can at least be distinguished by its
name, even if it does not completely match the part name used in JMAG-Express.
Part names used in JMAG-Express (region names in Geometry Editor) are as follows:
Sketch name/region name Supplement

Stator/Core -
Stator/Coil -
Rotor/Core -
Rotor/Magnet Used with brushless motors.
If the rotor has more than one magnet, add
“.(number)” to the name of the second magnet
and subsequent magnets.
E.g. “Rotor/Magnet.2”
Rotor/Bar Used in induction motor.
Examples
51
JMAG-Express
iii. If there is a possibility that you may use the sizing function in JMAG-Express, add the
geometry parameter set list to motor geometry.
Sizing is a function for JMAG-Express to calculate proposed design parameters, such as
dimensions, material, and windings, for a user-specified target, such as rated power.
The geometry parameter set list is the correspondence table for the key geometry parameter
value and other geometry parameter values. The geometry parameter set list is also used to
prevent geometry from breaking down when key geometry parameter values such as the num-
ber of poles and number of slots are parametrically changed during sizing.
Geometry parameter set list
For sizing function, see “Deriving Motor Size Using the Sizing Function” on page 60. For
geometry parameter set list, see the “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
4. Add the created motor geometry in the geometry library.
i. Right-click [Assembly] in the [Model Manager] tree, and select [Add to Geometry
Library].
The [Add to geometry library] dialog is displayed.
ii. Enter the explanation to be added to the geometry in [Explanation].
The [Model Number] setting is optional.
iii. Click [Select].
The [Select Tags] dialog is displayed. Select the tags to be added to the geometries in this dia-
log.
In JMAG-Express, templates are categorized for each type of motor. The tag attached to the
geometry is used to determine the categories. For example, a geometry tagged with three
labels “IPM Inner Rotor” is imported into JMAG-Express as a rotor template for brushless
motors (IPMs).
52
Note that geometries that are not set according to the rules will not be displayed in JMAG-
Express.
The following are the tagging rules:
Motor type Rotor/Stator Tags (includes spaces for delimiters)
Brushless motor Rotor IPM Inner Rotor
(IPM) Stator Outer Stator
Brushless motor Rotor SPM Inner Rotor
(SPM) Stator Outer Stator
Brushless motor Rotor IPM Outer Rotor
(Outer rotor/IPM) Stator Inner Stator
Brushless motor Rotor SPM Outer Rotor
(Outer rotor/SPM) Stator Inner Stator
Induction motor Rotor IM Rotor
Stator Outer Stator
iv. Select [JMAG-Express Tags] and select the type of the created motor geometry from
the [Type] list.
Tags for JMAG-Express are displayed in the list. The selected tag differs depending on the
type.
v. Click [OK].
Tags are added to the [Tag] box of the [Add to Geometry Library] dialog according to the set-
tings in the [Select Tag] dialog.
vi. Click [OK].
The created geometry is added to the geometry library.
5. Export the motor geometry added in the geometry library to a file.
i. Right-click the motor geometry added in [Geometry Library] and select [Export
Library].
The [Export Library] dialog is displayed.
ii. Select the folder you want to export the motor geometry to.
53
JMAG-Express
iii. Click [Select Folder].

Three files with the same name as the motor geometry are exported to the specified folder.
• (Motor Geometry Name).jmdl:

Geometry data file for Geometry Editor.
• (Motor Geometry Name).xml:
Tag info attached to the motor geometry is output,
• (Motor Geometry Name).png:
Image of the geometry. This image is displayed as an example when selecting a template in
JMAG-Express.
This set of three files is one motor geometry for JMAG-Express.
You can rename the file after exporting, but make sure to use the same name for all three files.
Importing Rotor and Stator Geometries from Geometry Editor to JMAG-Express
1. Start JMAG-Express
The template window is displayed.
2. Click [Import Geometry Library].
The [Import Libraries] dialog is displayed.
MEMO [Import Geometry Library] is also displayed in the [File] tab of the JMAG-Express main
window.
3. Specify a folder where JMAG-Express motor geometry file sets (.jmdl, .xml, .png) are
saved.
4. Click [Select Folder].
The file for the JMAG-Express motor geometry is imported.
MEMO The same as the custom geometries in the geometry library, the motor geometries imported
to JMAG-Express are organized into folders by version under the JMAG user folder and saved as
JMAG model files (.jmdl).
Checking Imported Rotor and Stator Geometries and Matching to JMAG-Express Template
Function
Check whether a motor geometry is properly imported to JMAG-Express, and match the created
motor geometry to a fixed name used in the JMAG-Express template function.
1. Start JMAG-Express.
54
2. Check whether the motor geometry is properly imported to JMAG-Express.

i. In the template window, click [Model Combination] of the motor where the
imported motor geometry is categorized.
The [Build New Combination] dialog is displayed.
ii. Check whether the imported motor geometry is displayed in [Rotor] or [Stator].
If the imported motor geometry is not displayed, the tag attached to the motor geometry is
incorrect. See “Preparing Rotor and Stator Geometries with Geometry Editor” on page 47,
and reset the tag to run [Import Library] again.
3. Match parts and settings in between the motor geometry and JMAG-Express to com-
plete the template.
i. Select the imported motor geometry in either or both [Rotor] and [Stator] of the
[Build New Combination] dialog.
ii. Click [OK].
The [Match Names] dialog is displayed.
iii. In the [Part ID Settings] setting panel, match motor geometry parts to part names
used in JMAG-Express.
The part names used in JMAG-Express are displayed in the [Name] column of the [Tem-
plate] table. The JMAG-Express part names and the matched motor geometry part names are
displayed in the [Link Item] column. If there are any parts with the same name as JMAG-
Express part names in motor geometries, they are automatically matched.
The motor geometry part names that cannot be matched are displayed in the [Model] list.
Match all parts displayed in the [Template] table.
• To match JMAG-Express part names to motor geometry parts, select a row of parts that
are not matched from the [Template] table, and also select parts from the [Model] list.
Then click [Set].
• To remove links, select a row to remove from the [Template] table and select [Remove
Link].
55
JMAG-Express
• When the numbers of magnet parts in JMAG-Express and the motor geometry are differ-
ent, click [Add Magnet] or [Remove Magnet] to match the number of magnet parts.
For example, you need to match the number of magnet parts when the magnet parts are
divided into several pieces to change magnetization directions for each magnet part.
• To change motor geometry part names or check parts, click [Edit Rotor] or [Edit Stator].
JMAG-Designer Geometry Editor starts and displays rotor geometries or stator geome-
tries.
When the part name is changed, right-click [Assembly] of the Geometry Editor [Model
Manager] tree and select [Add to Geometry Library]. Then save it with the same name
and tag as the rotor geometry or stator geometry being set. After saving, the contents dis-
played in the [Model] list of the JMAG-Express [Match Names] dialog are updated.
iv. After settings are completed in the [Part ID Settings] setting panel, click [Next].
The [Part ID Settings] setting panel switches to the [Set Settings] setting panel.
v. Link the motor geometry sets to JMAG-Express reference sets in the [Sets Settings]
setting panel.
The set names referenced by JMAG-Express are displayed in the [Name] column of the
[Template] table.
The displayed set names differ depending on motor types.
• Periodic_Boundary (edge set settings, determining periodic boundary)
• Coil.1, Coil.2 (solid/region set settings, determine coil layer 1 and 2)
• Bar.1 (solid/region set settings, determine rotor bars for induction motor)
The motor geometry set names linked to JMAG-Express reference sets are displayed in the
[Link Item] column. If motor geometry sets and JMAG-Express reference sets are set with the
same name, they are automatically linked.
The set names of motor geometries that cannot be linked are displayed in the [Model] list.
Link all reference sets displayed in the [Template] table.
The procedure for linking items and using buttons is the same as for the [Part ID Settings]
setting panel.
vi. After completing the settings in the [Sets Matching] setting panel, click [Next].
Click [Next] and the [Sets Settings] setting panel switches to the [Reference (Vector/Point)
Settings] setting panel.
vii.Link the motor geometry sets to JMAG-Express reference sets in the [Reference (Vec-
tor/Point) Settings] setting panel.
Set names referenced by JMAG-Express are displayed in the [Name] column of the [Tem-
plate] table.
The displayed set names differ depending on motor type.
• Magnet_Direction (direction set settings, reference direction of [Parallel] magnetization
patterns for magnets)
The procedure for linking items and using buttons are the same as for the [Part ID Settings]
setting panel and the [Set Settings] setting panel.
56
viii.After completing the settings in the [Reference (Vector/Point) Settings] setting

panel, click [OK].
Click [OK] to complete the procedure of linking items.
By following these steps, the creation of templates for original rotor or stator geometries (cre-
ating user-defined rotor templates and user-defined stator templates) is completed.
Creating New Templates by Combining a Rotor Template and Stator Template

Combine any rotor template and stator template to create a template including both the rotor and
stator.
1. Create a model from a template.

i. Start JMAG-Express.
ii. Click [Model Combination].
The [Build New Combination] dialog is displayed.
iii. Select a rotor template to be used from [Rotor] and a stator template to be used
from [Stator].
iv. Click [OK].
A model created from the selected templates is displayed in the main window.
2. Enter a design parameter value in each tab of the main window.
The values entered here are the default values of the templates to be saved.
3. Save the model as a new template.
i. Click the [File] tab.
ii. Click [Register User-Defined Template].
The [Register User-Defined Template] dialog is displayed.
iii. Enter a name for a template to be newly created and click [Save].
The new template is saved in the storage of the machine you are currently using.
4. Use the new template.
ii. Click [Template Selection].
iii. Click [User-Defined Templates].
Template names including both a rotor and stator saved in the storage are displayed.
iv. Double-click template names to be used.
A model created from the selected templates is displayed in the main window.
Using a Created Template in Another Machine

1. Create a model based on a template created in JMAG-Express.
i. Start JMAG-Express.
57
JMAG-Express
ii. Click [User-Defined Template].

The [User-Defined Template] dialog is displayed.
iii. Click the template name to be used.
The main window is displayed.
2. Export JXD files from a model.
A JXD file is a file format for saving JMAG-Express templates.
ii. Click [Export Template File].
The [Export Template File] dialog is displayed.
iii. Specify a template file name and destination, and then click [Save].
The model is exported to a JXD file.
3. Import the JXD file to JMAG-Express in another machine.
i. Move to another machine and start JMAG-Express.
ii. Click [Open Other Files].
The [Import Template File] dialog is displayed.
iii. Specify the JXD file exported in step 2 and click [Open].
The main window opens to display the model created from the imported JXD file.
For procedure to add a model as a template, see “Saving the Model / Creating New Tem-
plates Based on Input Specifications” on page 62.
58
Designing Motors From Templates

Create models from templates, and enter the motor specifications (geometry, materials, windings,
drive conditions, and performance targets). The proposed motor specifications for performance tar-
gets can also be calculated in JMAG-Express by using the sizing function.
• Creating Models From Templates (page 59)
• Inputting Motor Specifications (page 60)
• Deriving Motor Size Using the Sizing Function (page 60)
• Saving the Model / Creating New Templates Based on Input Specifications (page 62)
Creating Models From Templates

1. Start JMAG-Express.
2. Click any of the following links in the template window.
• [Model Combination]:
Select both a rotor template and a stator template separately to use.
Click [Model Combination] to display the [Build New Combination] dialog. Select tem-
plates to use from [Rotor] and [Stator], and click [OK].
When newly added user-defined rotor templates or stator templates are selected with [Rotor]
or [Stator], the [Match Names] dialog is displayed. For these circumstances, see the descrip-
tion for “Checking Imported Rotor and Stator Geometries and Matching to JMAG-Express
Template Function” on page 54.
• [Basic Templates]:
Use templates including both rotors and stators. Click [Basic Templates] to display the [Basic
Templates] dialog. Click the name of a template to use.
• [User-Defined Templates]:
Use templates saved in the internal storage of the machine currently being used. Click [User-
Defined Templates] to display the [User Templates] dialog. Click the name of a template to
use.
The main window [Home] tab opens, and the model created from the template is displayed.
3. Customize the work environment as necessary.
In the [Model Diagram] tab of the main window, model diagrams and windings are rendered
based on the design parameters in the [Dimension] tab and the [Winding] tab. The background
color of the main window, and the thickness of model outlines, etc., can be changed.
i. Click the main window [File] tab to open the tab.
ii. Click [Options].
The [Options] dialog is displayed.
iii. Change each [Appearance] parameter.
For details on the [Options] dialog, see “Template Window” on page 29.
• [Use Gradation Background]
• [Model Outline] [Color] and [Line Width]
• [Fill Region]
• [Dimension Line (Highlight)] [Color] and [Line Width]
59
JMAG-Express
iv. Click [OK].

The [Options] dialog closes, and settings are reflected in the [Model Diagram] tab.
Inputting Motor Specifications

Motor design parameters are displayed in each tab in the lower left of the main window [Home] tab.
Click each tab to open those tabs, and specify the parameters displayed.
Tab Description
[Requirement] tab Set targets in this tab when evaluating characteristics. Values specified here
are also rendered in result graphs.
See “[Requirement] Tab” on page 84.
[Dimensions] tab Set motor dimensions in this tab. Diagrams are rendered in the [Model
Diagram] tab based on the values specified in this tab.
See “[Dimensions] Tab” on page 85.
[Material] tab Set the materials of each part in this tab. Custom materials and the data of
actual existing materials provided by material manufacturers can also be
used.
See “[Materials] Tab” on page 90.
[Winding] tab Set windings in this tab. Diagrams are rendered in the [Model Diagram]
tab, the [Winding Diagram] tab, and the [Slot Diagram] tab based on the
values specified in this tab.
See “[Winding] Tab” on page 96.
[Drive] tab Set the drive circuit to use when evaluating characteristics.
See “[Drive] Tab” on page 102.
Deriving Motor Size Using the Sizing Function

The sizing function is for calculating proposed design parameters such as dimensions, materials, and
windings, etc., in JMAG-Express for user-specified targets, such as rated power.
Proposals are reflected in the design parameters in each of the following tabs; [Dimension], [Mate-
rial], [Winding], and [Drive].
After determining approximate specifications by using the sizing function, adjust each design
parameter to design motors that satisfy target performance.
 Notes
• When using the sizing function for models created from user-defined templates, settings for the
geometry parameter set list must be configured. For details on the geometry parameter set list,
see “Parameters Explanation Edition”.
 Parameters That Fluctuate Using the Sizing Function

The following values and design parameters are updated by using the sizing function.
60
Tab Parameters
[Dimensions] tab • All dimensions
• Number of slots
• Number of poles
• Number of secondary conductor (induction motor only)
[Materials] tab • Magnet (brushless motor only)
• Cage (induction motor only)
When [Magnet] or [Cage] is specified in the [Sizing] dialog, the settings are
not updated even if the sizing function is used.
[Winding] tab • Phase resistance
• Number of turns
• Layers
• Coil pitch
• Winding scheme (distributed winding/concentrated winding):
When [Winding] is specified in the [Sizing] dialog, the settings are not
updated even if the sizing function is used.
[Drive] tab • Drive circuit:
Maximum voltage, maximum current
 Creating a Motor Model Using the Sizing Function
1. Click [Sizing] on the [Home] tab of the main window.

The [Sizing] dialog is displayed.
2. Specify the target performance of the motor.
[Rated Power, kw] of [Target value] is a required item. Enter a value in the range 0.01kW to
100000kW in the text box.
[Maximum Torque, Nm], [Rated Revolution Speed, rpm], [Maximum Revolution Speed, rpm]
are optional items. Select the checkboxes of the items used in the sizing function and specify the
values.
3. Specify design parameters to be fixed during sizing.
Select the flags for the design parameters to be fixed, and enter a value in the text box or select an
item from the list. Values specified here will be retained after sizing is applied.
• [Output Power Density, kW/kg]
• [Magnetic Flux Density, Wb]
• [Number of Poles]
• [Number of Slots]
• [Number of Bars] (induction motor only)
• [Power Supply Voltage (RMS), V]
• [Maximum Current (RMS), A]
• [Maximum Outer Diameter of Motor, mm]
• [Maximum Motor Height, mm]:
Enter the height of the stator core. Do not include the height of the coil winding end.
61
JMAG-Express
• [Winding] (brushless motor only):

Select either [Distributed Winding] or [Concentrated Winding] in which [Distributed
Winding] is selected when this setting is not specified.
• [Magnet] (brushless motor only):
Select [Neodymium] or [Ferrite] in which [Neodymium] is selected when this setting is not
specified.
• [Cage] (induction motor only):
Select [Copper] or [Aluminium] in which [Copper] is selected when this setting is not speci-
fied.
4. Click [Apply].
The motor dimensions and other recommended parameters are set based on the setting specified
in [Desired Rated Power].
By default, the motor outer diameter and the motor stack height are set at a ratio of 1:1.
MEMO If the combination of the number of slots and poles specified in the [Sizing] dialog is invalid,
the number of slots will be adjusted.
MEMO By applying the values calculated using the sizing function, a message will be displayed
prompting the user to apply recommended values in the case of inconsistencies occurring in required
values such as the voltage constant or torque constant.
MEMO When the geometry cannot be updated using the number of slots, poles and the secondary
conductors calculated with the sizing function, values closest to the recommended values which can
be used to update the geometry are applied.
When this occurs, a message is displayed showing the recommended number of slots, poles, and sec-
ondary conductors. These values can be manually set in the [Dimensions] tab, and the geometry
parameters causing inconsistencies can be manually adjusted.
5. Make appropriate changes to the design parameters based on the recommended speci-
fications calculated using sizing to complete the specifications.
Saving the Model / Creating New Templates Based on Input Specifications

After following the procedures described below, the parameter values, evaluation results, and case
group settings for all design proposal cases added to the model will be saved as a new template.
1. Add a model as a new template.

i. Click the main window [File] tab.
ii. Click [Register User-Defined Template].
The [Register User-Defined Template] dialog is displayed.
iii. Enter a template name, and click [Save].
Templates are saved to the internal storage of the machine currently being used.
When templates are saved with names that are the same as names for templates that already
exist in storage, older templates are overwritten with the new templates.
2. Check that the model is added as a template.
i. Select [Template Selection] in the main window [File] tab.
ii. Click [User-Defined Template] of the same motor type as that selected in Step 1.
The [User Templates] dialog opens, and templates added to internal storage are displayed.
62
Evaluating the Performance of Designed Motors

Execute FEA for the motor model designed with JMAG-Express, and check the results.
• Executing Characteristics Evaluation (page 63)
• Adding Evaluation Items and Re-Executing Characteristics Evaluation (page 67)
• Executing Characteristics Evaluation with Changed Design Parameters (Parametric Evaluation)
(page 68)
• Checking Evaluation Results (page 70)
• Exporting Specifications and Evaluation Results to Reports for the Active Case (page 79)
Executing Characteristics Evaluation
 Evaluation Items
The required license differs depending on the evaluation item; see “License Required to Use JMAG-
Express” on page 24.
For details of the results, see “Evaluation Results in JMAG-Express 21.2” on page 105.
Evaluation Items Motor Type Description

[Machine Charac- Brushless motor, Runs an efficiency map analysis study (reduce order model
teristics] induction motor mode) to generate maps of efficiency and loss.
MEMO A transient analysis is performed for brushless
motors, and a frequency domain analysis is performed for
induction motors.
[Torque Ripple] Brushless motor, Runs a load analysis at an operating point to obtain the
induction motor torque ripple and air gap magnetic flux density.
• By default, the evaluation is performed at the operating
point where the mechanical power obtained by the
[Machine Characteristics] evaluation is the maximum. To
evaluate at a specified operating point, you need to make
settings in the [Drive] tab.
• For induction motors, the Steady-state Approximate Tran-
sient Analysis function of JMAG-Designer is used.
63
JMAG-Express

• JMAG-Express performs computations in long time incre-
ments so that evaluations can be completed in the shortest
possible calculation time.
To evaluate a torque ripple waveform with a higher time
resolution, perform the following operations:
(1) Export JPROJ files from JMAG-Express to JMAG-
Designer. For details, see “Sending Designed Motor Mod-
els to JMAG-Designer” on page 81.
(2) In JMAG-Designer, open the [Study Properties] dialog
for the [Study: <Magnetic Field><Load>] study and make
the following settings:
• Select [Restart (Transient Response Analysis)] in the
[Restart Control] tab, and specify the SAV file for the
load analysis. The SAV file for load analysis is located in
the following folder (X, Y, and Z at the end of the folder
name can be any number).
(jfiles folder in the same hierarchy as the JPROJ file in
(1))/project_X/Load~Y/CaseZ
• In the [Step Control] tab, select [Time Point Sequence]
for [Time Point Sequence].
Open the [Edit Point Sequence] dialog and enter the cal-
culated step time in the table. You can see the calculated
step times in the result table or the Graph Manager.
In addition, in the same table, enter the time of the addi-
tional step to be calculated. The time increments should
be finer than those of the already calculated steps.
• In the [Step Control] tab, increase the value of [Number
of Steps] as necessary.
(3) Restart the computation of the [Study: <Magnetic
Field><Load>] study.
[Cogging Torque] Brushless motor Runs a no-load analysis to obtain the cogging torque and air
gap magnetic flux density.
[Induced Voltage] Runs an induced voltage analysis to obtain the induced volt-
age waveform.
• The following evaluation result values are output:
• Induced voltage waveform:
For star-connection, the U-phase voltage waveform is
output, and for delta-connection, the voltage waveform
between U and V phases is output.
64

[Demagnetization] Brushless motor Runs a demagnetization analysis to obtain the demagnetiza-
tion of the magnet at an operating point.
• The following evaluation result values are output:
• Induced voltage waveform after demagnetization:
For star-connection, the U-phase voltage waveform is
output, and for delta-connection, the voltage waveform
To compare the U-phase induced voltage waveform
before and after demagnetization, run both the [Induced
Voltage] evaluation and the [Demagnetization] evalua-
tion.
• Permeance coefficient distribution
• Demagnetization ratio distribution
• By default, the evaluation is performed at the operating
point where the mechanical power obtained by the
[Machine Characteristics] evaluation is the maximum. To
evaluate at a specified operating point, you need to make
settings in the [Drive] tab.
 Notes
• You can interrupt a characteristic evaluation. However, an interrupted characteristic evaluation
cannot be resumed.
• Batch execution for characteristics evaluation can be performed in remote machines managed by
JMAG-RemoteSystem and remote machines connected via SSH. The remote machine to be
used for characteristics evaluation can be set in the JMAG-Express [Options] dialog.
Note that JMAG-RemoteSystem and SSH connection cannot be set in JMAG-Express. Refer to
the “JMAG Installation Manual” for setting JMAG-RemoteSystem. For SSH connection, create
settings in the JMAG-Designer [Preference] dialog.
• If you exit JMAG-Express before loading the results of a characterization run in batch mode
using remote machines, the results that were not loaded will be deleted.
 Procedures
1. Select evaluation items.

i. Select the checkboxes of items to be executed from the evaluation items displayed in
the [Evaluate] of the main window [Home] tab.
The following evaluation items can be selected:
• [Machine Characteristics] (brushless motor, induction motor)
• [Cogging Torque] (brushless motor, induction motor)
• [Torque Ripple] (brushless motor)
• [Induced Voltage] (brushless motor)
• [Demagnetization] (brushless motor)
2. To parallelize computations by characteristics evaluation and perform batch execution
for characteristics evaluation, set the parameters in the [Options] dialog.
i. Click the main window [File] tab to open.
65
JMAG-Express
ii. Click [Options].

The [Options] dialog is displayed. For details on this dialog, see “JMAG-Express Options” on
page 41.
iii. Change the number of jobs or computations run in parallel.
[Maximum Number of Jobs (Licenses)]:
Number of jobs run in parallel.
• [Machine Characteristics (Consume JMAG-Express_FR License Feature)]:
Parallel number of characteristics evaluation jobs for machine characteristics.
• [Machine Characteristics (Consume JW_MAG_DPL License Feature)]:
Parallel number of characteristics evaluation jobs for cogging torque, torque ripple,
induced voltage, and demagnetization.
[Number of Cores per Job]:
Number of computations in a single job run in parallel.
• [Parallel Jobs of Machine Characteristics]:
Parallel number of computations to evaluate machine characteristics.
• [Cores of Shared Memory Multiprocessing (SMP) except for Machine Characteristics]:
Parallel number of computations to evaluate cogging torque, torque ripple, induced volt-
age, and demagnetization.
iv. Set remote machines to be used for batch execution.
[Execution]:
• [Machine (Server)]:
Select the JMAG-RemoteSystem server and remote machines connected via SSH.
Select [Local Execution] when executing in local machines.
• [CPU Group]:
Select the CPU group when selecting a server in [Machine (Server)].
v. Click [OK].
The [Options] dialog closes and the settings are saved.
vi. Click the [Return] icon .

The main window [Home] tab is displayed.
3. Execute characteristics evaluation.
i. Click [Evaluate] or [Evaluate (Batch Execution)] in the main window [Home] tab.
To change buttons displayed in the window, click the down arrow  and select the buttons
from the drop down menu.
• When [Evaluate] is clicked, the progress bar is displayed while characteristics evaluation is
running. JMAG-Express cannot be operated during characteristics evaluation.
To cancel characteristics evaluation, click [Cancel].
When the evaluation is finished, the main window [Characteristics] tab is displayed,
showing the specification values and evaluation results.
66
• When [Evaluate (Batch Execution)] is clicked, JMAG-Scheduler starts in the background

and characteristics evaluation jobs are added. Then JMAG-Scheduler runs the characteris-
tics evaluation jobs.
To check the progress of characteristics evaluation, open the JMAG-Scheduler window
while it is running. For example, on a Windows machine, clicking on the JMAG-Sched-
uler indicator icon displayed in the task bar will open the JMAG-Scheduler window.
To cancel characteristics evaluation, right-click the characteristics evaluation job displayed in

the JMAG-Scheduler job list and click [Cancel Job] .
4. When executing characteristics evaluation in batch mode, click JMAG-Express [Check
New Results] after the characteristics evaluation jobs are finished in JMAG-Sched-
uler.
The batch execution results of characteristics evaluation are loaded to JMAG-Express.
MEMO If you exit JMAG-Express or re-select a template while there are results that are not loaded to
JMAG-Express, the message “There are batch jobs which are not loaded. The jobs will be lost after
termination. Terminate anyway?” is displayed. To keep the results that are not loaded, click [Cancel]
and execute [Check New Results].
5. Check the evaluation results.
MEMO When [Register User-Defined Template] and [Export Template File] in the [File] menu are
executed, the evaluation results are also saved with the model.
Adding Evaluation Items and Re-Executing Characteristics Evaluation

When there are evaluation items that are not calculated in the existing design case, additional calcu-
lations can be run.
1. Add evaluation items.

i. Select any of the checkboxes from the checkboxes for the evaluation items displayed
in [Evaluation] of the main window [Home] tab.
When a new evaluation item is selected, [Add Result] or [Add Result (Batch Execution)]
becomes active.
ii. In the design table of the [Characteristics] tab, select the checkboxes of the design
case where you want to add evaluation items.
67
JMAG-Express
2. Re-execute characteristics evaluation.

i. Click [Add Result] or [Add Result (Batch Execution)] in the main window [Home] tab.
To change buttons displayed in the window, click the down arrow  and select the buttons
from the drop down menu.
• When [Add Result] is clicked, the progress bar is displayed while characteristics evaluation
is running. JMAG-Express cannot be operated during characteristics evaluation.
• When [Add Result (Batch Execution)] is clicked, JMAG-Scheduler starts in the back-
ground and characteristics evaluation jobs are added. Then JMAG-Scheduler runs the
characteristics evaluation jobs.
The procedure of canceling characteristics evaluation when [Add Result] is clicked is the same
as when [Evaluate] is clicked. When [Add Result (Batch Execution)] is clicked, the proce-
dures for checking job progress and canceling are the same as when [Evaluate (Batch Execu-
tion)] is clicked. See “Executing Characteristics Evaluation” on page 63.
3. When executing characteristics evaluation in batch mode, click JMAG-Express [Check
New Results] after the characteristics evaluation jobs are finished in JMAG-Sched-
uler.
The executed characteristics evaluation batch job results are loaded to JMAG-Express.
Executing Characteristics Evaluation with Changed Design Parameters

(Parametric Evaluation)
Execute characteristics evaluation with a change in one design parameter value and obtain the sensi-
tivity of the design parameter. The design parameters that are given multiple values here are referred
to as design variables.
1. Select [Parametric] when executing parametric evaluation in JMAG-Express.

Select [Parametric (Batch Execution)] when executing parametric evaluation in batch
mode.
68
To change buttons displayed in the window, click the down arrow  and select the buttons from
the drop down menu.
This setting changes the button ([Evaluate] or [Evaluate (Batch Execution)]) that is displayed by
default in the [Parametric Settings] dialog described below.
2. Select a design parameter to use as design variables.
The cells with the values of the design parameters that can be used as design variables are filled in
yellow in the design sheet in the [Characteristics] tab.
i. In the design sheet, click the yellow-filled cell.

The [Parametric Settings] dialog is displayed.
The [Parametric Settings] dialog can also be opened from the following procedure.
• Click the text boxes and lists of the design parameters displayed in the [Dimension] tab,
the [Material] tab, and the [Winding] tab, then click [Parametric] .
3. Enter a value to add to the selected design parameter.
i. Select a method of specifying the value of the design parameter to be evaluated.
• [(design parameter) Range] is a method to specify values to be evaluated at equal intervals
based on the divisions of a range determined from a start value and an end value.
• [Table] is a method to directly specify values to be evaluated. When a material of parts is
used as a design variable, [Table] is automatically selected.
Also select [Table] when using multiple design variables.
ii. When selecting [(design parameter) Range], enter values in each text box for [Start],
[End], and [Divisions].
For example, when [Start] is “0”, [End] is “30”, and [Divisions] is “3”, the values to evaluate
will be “0, 10, 20, 30”.
iii. When selecting [Table], select materials to use from the list in each cell when design
parameters are materials. For other design parameters, enter values in each cell.
One row is for one design plan (one case).
Right-clicking while cells are selected will display [Copy] and [Paste].
69
JMAG-Express
4. To add design parameters to use as design variables, add the design parameters from
[Select Multiple Parameters] first, and then enter the design parameter values.
The [Select Multiple Parameter] button will become active when [Table] is selected.
i. Click [Select Multiple Parameters].
The [Select Parameter] dialog is displayed.
In this dialog, all parameters that can be used as design parameters are displayed according to
each tab displaying the parameters.
ii. Select the checkboxes of design parameters to be used as design variables.
To cancel the design parameters being used as design variables, clear the checkboxes of the
design parameters.
iii. Click [OK].
The [Select Parameter] dialog closes.
The table in the [Parametric Settings] dialog displays the columns of the new design parame-
ters that are to be used as the design variables.
iv. Set values for the added columns.
If an error occurs with the set value, a design case for the row including the value is not cre-
ated.
Example:
When there is a discrepancy in the settings for shape dimension and duplication errors etc.
occur.
5. Execute parametric evaluation.
i. Click [Evaluate] or [Evaluate (Batch Execution)] in the [Parametric Settings] dialog.
• When [Evaluate] is clicked, the progress bar is displayed while characteristics evaluation is
running. JMAG-Express cannot be operated during characteristics evaluation.
• When [Evaluate (Batch Execution)] is clicked, JMAG-Scheduler starts in the background
and characteristics evaluation jobs are added. Then JMAG-Scheduler runs the characteris-
tics evaluation jobs.
The procedure of canceling characteristics evaluation when [Evaluate] is clicked is the same as
when [Evaluate] is clicked on the toolbar. When [Parametric (Batch Execution)] is clicked,
the procedures for checking job progress and canceling are the same as when the [Evaluate
(Batch Execution)] is clicked. See “Executing Characteristics Evaluation” on page 63.
See “Checking Evaluation Results” on page 70 and “Comparing Results of Multiple Cases
Using Response Graphs” on page 77.
Checking Evaluation Results

Evaluation results can be checked in the main window [Characteristics] tab.
The [Characteristics] tab is divided into three frames. These display design comparison table, evalu-
ation results, and design sheets.
70
Design comparisons
Performances
Design sheet
• Design Comparisons (page 71)

• Performances (page 72)
• Design Sheet (page 76)
Design Comparisons
This frame displays the history of characteristics evaluation for each design. One row is for one
design (one case).
Design variables Evaluation results
 Design table columns

Column Description
[Status] Each icon in this column corresponds to an evaluation item. The icon col-
ors indicate as follows:
• Green: The result of the evaluation item is output.
• Yellow: The computation of the evaluation item is running or the result
of the evaluation item is not loaded to JMAG-Express,
• Red: The computation of the evaluation item is terminated with an error.
• Hover the mouse pointer over the icon to pop-up the details of the error.
• Gray: The evaluation item has not been calculated.
71
JMAG-Express
Column Description
[Graph] A checkbox and color icon are displayed in the cell of this column.
• Checkbox
• Design cases with selected checkboxes are displayed in the result graph.
• Design cases with selected checkboxes are subject to characteristics
evaluation. For design cases with cleared checkboxes, even if [Evaluate]
or [Add Result] is selected, characteristics evaluation is not executed.
• Color icon:
The color of the line used for the design case in the result graph. This
cannot be changed.
You can choose a flag to be set as a mark for a design case. Click the flag
[Flag]
displayed in each cell to switch the flag on and off.
Design cases to be displayed in the result graph can be sorted by flags. See
the explanation on [Filter by Flag] described later.
[Comment] Any comment can be entered by clicking a cell in this column.
Design variable ([GAP], When design parameters have different values depending on the design
[RD1] etc.) cases, the column of the value of that design parameter is displayed.
In addition to parameters with values that you directly changed, parameters
associated to those that have been changed are also displayed.
Evaluation result See “Evaluation Results in JMAG-Express 21.2” on page 105.
 Context menu in the design comparisons

Menu command Description
[Filter by Check] This command is displayed when right-clicking [Graph] on the title.
This command shows only the results of the selected design cases.
[Filter by Flag] This command is displayed when right-clicking [Flag] on the title.
This command shows only the results of the design cases with flags.
[Reset Filter] This command is displayed when right-clicking [Graph] or [Flag] on the
title.
This command resets the filter and shows the results of all design cases.
[Apply Selected Case] Applies the settings of the selected design case to the current case.
[Check on]/[Check off ] These commands are displayed when right-clicking on a cell in the [Graph]
column.
You can select or clear the checkboxes for multiple cases at once. Select
cases to apply the command.
• [Selected Cases]
• [Marked Cases]
• [All Cases]
[Copy] Copies the values of the selected cells.
[Copy All] Copies the values of all the cells of the selected design cases.
[Delete Selected Cases] Deletes the selected design cases from the table.
Performances
The result graphs, result maps, contour plots, and flux lines are displayed in this frame.
72
 To change the display items and display order:
Click [Graph] above [Report], and the [Graph Layout] dialog is displayed. The result items that
are checked in this dialog will be displayed on JMAG-Express in the order they are displayed in this
dialog.
• Clear the checkmarks of the result items that no longer need to be displayed.
• Select a result item and click [Up] or [Down] to move the order of the result item up or
down one line.
Click [Close] to update the display in JMAG-Express.
 Result graphs
• A line showing the operating range in a graph for an evaluation result is displayed when specify-
ing target values in the [Requirement] tab.
• The value of each point on a graph is displayed on a table when clicking on each result graph.
Right-click a table and specify [Copy All] to copy the entire contents in a table onto calculation
software.
• Each evaluation result is displayed with the color shown in the [Graph] cell in the table for the
design case.
• When one design case is selected in the design comparisons, a marker will appear on the graph
line for that design case.
Command Icons
Icon Description
[Zoom] Drag on the graph after click this icon to enlarge the graph.
[Pan] Drag on the graph after click this icon to move the graph curves while
changing the display of the axes.
[Zoom In] Each time this icon is clicked, the graph is zoomed in.
[Zoom Out] Each time this icon is clicked, the graph is zoomed out.
[Fit] Click this icon to adjust the size so that the entire graph is displayed.
[Toggle Spike Lines] After clicking this icon, hover the mouse pointer over the graph line to dis-
play the auxiliary line.
[Show Closest Data on When you place the mouse pointer on the graph line after clicking this
Hover] icon, the X-axis value and Y-axis value at the position pointed by the mouse
will be popped up.
73
JMAG-Express
Icon Description
[Compare Data on When you place the mouse pointer on the graph after clicking this icon,
Hover] the Y-axis value at the X-axis value at the position pointed by the mouse
will be popped up. If multiple graph lines are displayed, the Y-axis values
for all lines will pop up.
[Display Graph Value] Click this icon to display the graph data table in the [Graph Value] dialog.
Right-clicking a cell in the data table copies the data in that cell.
[Edit Graph Property] Click this icon to display the [Axis Property] dialog.
In this dialog, you can specify the following parameters for each axis.
• [Label]
• [Scaling]
• [Precision]
• [Default Min]/[Default Max]
Click [OK] to reflect the settings in the graph.
74
 Result maps
Command Icons
Icon Description
[Map Property] Click this icon to display the [Map Property] dialog.
In this dialog, you can specify the following parameters.
• [Label]
• [X-axis]/[Y-axis (Left)]/[Y-axis (Right)]
• [Label]
• [Precision]
• [Default Min]/[Default Max]
• [Major Tick Marks]/[Minor Tick Marks]
These parameters can only be specified for the [X-axis] and [Y-axis
(Left)].
• [Grid Line]
• [Colors]
• [Gradient]
• [Smooth] or [Color Bands]
• [Levels]:
The number of bands to display for the color bands.
• [Labels]:
The number of labels to display for the scale bar.
• [Show Isolines]
• [Show Isolines Labels]
• [Isoline Label Precision]
Click [OK] to reflect the settings in the map.
[Expanded View] Click this icon to start JMAG-Designer and display the selected map in the
JMAG-Designer.
 Contour and magnetic flux diagrams

Contour and magnetic flux diagrams for the step specified by the step slider bar will be displayed.
75
JMAG-Express
From left: contour (shaded), contour (isolines), flux lines
Command Icons
Icon Description
[Contour Property] Click this icon to display the [Map Property] dialog.
• [Contour Type] ([Shaded] or [Isolines])
• [Scaling]
• [Scaling] ([Linear] or [Logarithmic])
• [Range] ([Autoscale] or [Fixed Range])
• [Scale Bar Digits Notation] ([Auto], [Scientific], or [Decimal])
When [Scientific] is selected, type the number of digits of the mantissa to
display (ex.: the “234567” portion of “1.234567E + 8” is a mantissa).
When [Decimal] is selected, type the number of digits after the decimal
point to display.
• [Colors]
• [Gradient]
• [Smooth] or [Color Bands]
• [Levels]:
The number of bands to display for the color bands.
• [Labels]:
The number of labels to display for the scale bar.
Click [OK] to reflect the settings in the diagram.
[Flux Line Property] Click this icon to display the [Flux Line Property] dialog.
In this dialog, you can specify the following parameters.
• [Number of Lines] or [Fixed Flux, Wb]:
When [Number of Lines] is selected, specify the maximum number of
lines to be displayed.
When [Fixed Flux, Wb] is selected, specify the amount of magnetic flux
between lines. This value determines the number of lines to be displayed.
• [Line Color]
Click [OK] to reflect the settings in the diagram.
Click this icon to start JMAG-Designer and display the selected contour or
[Expanded View]
flux diagram in the JMAG-Designer.
Design Sheet
In this frame, the design parameters and their values in the [Dimensions] tab, [Material] tab,
[Winding] tab, and [Drive] tab.
76
For design parameters that can be used as design variables in the parametric analysis, the cells with
the values of the design parameters are filled in yellow.
Comparing Results of Multiple Cases Using Response Graphs

Groups of design cases can be created and response graphs for these groups can be created. Use the
response graphs when executing parametric evaluations.
Response graph (X-axis: case number, Y-axis: [Machine Constant] torque)

One point is one design case
 Notes
• The created case groups cannot be edited.
• Settings of the created response graphs cannot be edited.
 Procedures
1. Create a case group.

i. In the design table of the [Characteristics] tab, select the checkboxes of the design
cases that you want to group.
77
JMAG-Express
ii. Click [Add Case Group] .

iii. Click the [Response] tab.
The newly added case groups are displayed in the case group table of the [Response] tab.
Case group table
Response graph
Case setting table
Comments and flags can be added to case groups.

Clicking on one group in the case group table will display the design variable values and com-
ments included in the group of the case setting table.
To delete the case group, right-click the cell of the case group that you want to delete. Select
[Delete Selected Case Groups].
2. Create a response graph for the case group.
i. In the case group table of the [Response] tab, select the case group to be used for
creating a response graph.
ii. Click [Add Response Graph] .

The [Create Response Graph] dialog is displayed.
iii. Set the parameters to create the response graph.
[Title]:
The title of a response graph.
[X-Axis], [Y-Axis]:
Specify the vertical and horizontal axes of the graph.
• [Evaluation Type]:
[Case Number] is also selected in addition to evaluation items such as [Machine Charac-
78
teristics] and [Cogging Torque]. When [Case Number] is selected, only the parameter for
[Evaluation Type] needs to be set.
• [Type]:
Items displayed in the [Type] list are different depending on the selected evaluation items.
When [Machine Characteristics] is selected, select [Point on NT Curve] or [Operating
Point].
When other evaluation items are selected, select one of the following: [RMS], [Integral
Average], [Maximum], [Minimum], [Range], or [Ripple Rate].
• [Result Type]:
Items displayed in the [Result Type] list are different depending on the selected evaluation
items. For the result of each evaluation item, see “Evaluation Results in JMAG-Express
21.2” on page 105.
• [Speed], [Torque]:
When [Machine Characteristics] is selected for [Evaluation Type] and [Point on NT
Curve] is selected for [Type], enter the value for [Speed]. This value determines the speed
at one point on the NT curve.
When [Machine Characteristics] is selected for [Evaluation Type] and [Operating Point] is
selected for [Type], enter values for [Speed] and [Torque]. These values determine the
operating points.
MEMO When the result of the selected evaluation type and the results of the specified speed
and torque are not in the design case, points for the design case are not output to the response
graph.
iv. Click [OK].
The [Create Response Graph] dialog closes.
The created response graph is displayed in the [Response] tab.
The same operation as the result graph displayed in the [Characteristics] tab can be used for
the response graph. See “Performances” on page 72.
To cancel a response graph, click the [Delete Graph] icon.
MEMO When [Resister User-Defined Template] and [Export Template File] in the [File] menu
are executed, the case group setting and response graph are saved with the model.
Exporting Specifications and Evaluation Results to Reports for the Active Case
The specifications of designed motors can be exported to PDF files and CSV files. For motors where
evaluations have already been executed, evaluation results can be exported also.
 Notes
• The design parameter values for the design case displayed in JMAG-Express can be output to
PDF and CSV files.
• The content of design sheets in the main window [Characteristics] tab is output to both PDF
files and CSV files.
• The results (graphs and maps) displayed in the [Characteristics] tab and [Response] tab are out-
put to the PDF file. The data table of the graphs are not output.
79
JMAG-Express
• The data table of the graphs displayed in the [Characteristics] and [Response] tabs are output to
the CSV file. The graphs and figures are not output.
 Running procedure
1. Click the main window [File] tab to open the tab.

2. Click [Export Report].
The [Export Report] dialog is displayed.
3. Specify a name, type, and destination for the file to export.
4. Click [Save].
The file is exported to the specified location.
80
Executing High-Accuracy FEA for Designed Motors

Send designed motor models to JMAG-Designer to execute high-accuracy FEA.
• Sending Designed Motor Models to JMAG-Designer (page 81)
Sending Designed Motor Models to JMAG-Designer
 Notes
• The location where the JPROJ file is exported when [Open in JMAG-Designer] is executed can
be specified in the [Options] dialog.
If the location where the JPROJ file is exported is not specified in the [Options] dialog, the
JPROJ file will be exported to the location specified by JMAG-Express. The following is an
example for a Windows 10 machine; the date and time of the export are used for the JPROJ file
name.
C:\Users\(login user name)\Documents\JMAG\JMAG-
ExpressX\projects\(yyyymmdd_hhmmss).jproj
 Running procedure
1. If the motor model has multiple design cases, select the checkboxes for the design cases
to be sent to JMAG-Designer.
2. Click [Open in JMAG-Designer] or [Send to Path] in the main window [Home] tab.
Use the arrow icon  to switch between [Open in JMAG-Designer] and [Send to Path].
• When [Open in JMAG-Designer] is clicked, the motor model JPROJ file is exported to the
folder specified in the [Option] dialog in JMAG-Express. After the motor model JPROJ file is
exported, JMAG-Designer starts and the JPROJ file opens.
A processing icon is displayed above [Open in JMAG-Designer] while the file is being
exported. In JMAG-Express, other operations can be performed while the icon is displayed.
• When [Send to Path] is clicked, the [Export Project] dialog is displayed. Specify the name and
destination of the JPROJ file to be exported, and click [Save]. After the JPROJ file has been
saved to the specified location, JMAG-Designer starts, and the exported JPROJ file is opened
in JMAG-Designer.
Motor models to be imported into JMAG-Designer:

• When multiple design cases with different numbers of poles or slots are exported to JMAG-
Designer, multiple motor models are imported into JMAG-Designer.
• The studies corresponding to each evaluation item are added to the motor models imported
into JMAG-Designer.
Depending on the parameters that have been changed in JMAG-Express, multiple studies
may be added for a single evaluation item. In such cases, “(period) + (number)” is added to
the end of the study name (e.g., NoLoad.2).
81
JMAG-Express
• Design cases in JMAG-Express are managed in the [Case Control] of each study.
To check the cases that have been added to each study, right-click the [Case Control] of each
study in the [Project Manager] tree and select [Show Cases].
• The evaluation results for each design case are also exported from JMAG-Express to JMAG-
Designer.
For details on the specifications of JPROJ files exported from JMAG-Express, see “Contents of
JPROJ File Exported from JMAG-Express” on page 124.
82
Design Parameters in JMAG-Express 21.2
This chapter describes the motor design parameters specified in JMAG-Express.

• [Requirement] Tab (page 84)
• [Dimensions] Tab (page 85)
• [Materials] Tab (page 90)
• [Winding] Tab (page 96)
• [Drive] Tab (page 102)
83
JMAG-Express
[Requirement] Tab
In the [Requirement] tab in the main window, set the performance target values for the motor.
• Parameters (page 84)
Parameters
 [Targeted Value]
After setting the target values and executing the motor characterization, a line indicating the opera-
tional range of the motor will be displayed in the performance graph.
When [Rated output, kw] is specified
Select the checkboxes of the items that will be used as target values from those shown below, and
enter a value in the text box.
[Rated Power, kw] In the [Rated Revolution Speed, rpm], enter the target revolution speed during
[Maximum Torque, maximum torque.
Nm] The relational equation of rated output, maximum torque, and rated revolu-
[Rated Revolution tion speed is the following:
Speed, rpm] (Rated output (W))
= (Maximum torque (N x m)) × 2p × (Rated revolution speed (rpm) /60)
When the specified values do not satisfy this formula, a warning message is
shown.
[Maximum Revolu- When [Maximum Revolution Speed, rpm] is selected, this value is carried over
tion Speed, rpm] to the maximum revolution speed of the line showing the range of possible
operation.
84
[Dimensions] Tab
In the [Dimensions] tab in the main window, set the dimension values for the motor.
The variables (geometry parameters) are displayed in a tree. When the text box for each variable is
activated, a dimension line for that variable is shown in the [Motor Diagram] tab.
• Notes (page 85)

Notes
• When interference occurs in geometry and regions cannot be created, the locations experiencing
problems are highlighted in red. Use [Undo] or correct values that were changed immediately
prior.
Parameters
 [All]
Variables (geometry parameters) that affect the entire model are displayed below [All].
85
JMAG-Express
Variables (geometry Description

parameters)
[POLES: Number of Only even numbers can be entered.
Poles]
[SLOTS: Number of -
Slots]
[OUTD: Outer Diame- This is a variable for enlarging or shrinking the entire model in the radial
ter] direction. Change the value of this variable to update the values of all vari-
ables except for this variable.
Configure the following settings in Geometry Editor when there is a desire
to use this variable in user-defined templates.
• Set the diameter constraint which determines the outer diameter of the
outer rotor or outer stator.
[GAP: Gap Length] The gap width between the rotor and the stator.
Change this value to enlarge/shrink the rotor outer diameter for the inner
rotor, and the rotor inner diameter for the outer rotor only by the value
specified.
When inconsistencies occur in geometry as a result of changing this value,
the size of the necessary structural items (stators or rotors) is adjusted auto-
matically.
Configure the following settings in Geometry Editor when there is a desire
to use this variable in user-defined templates.
• For inner rotors, set the diameter constraint which determines the rotor
outer diameter, and the diameter constraint which determines the stator
inner diameter.
• For outer rotors, set the diameter constraint which determines the rotor
inner diameter, and the diameter constraint which determines the stator
outer diameter.
[Gap Type] • When [Fix] is selected, the gap length of the stator inner diameter and
rotor outer diameter is fixed for the inner rotor.
For the outer rotor, the gap length of the rotor inner diameter and the
stator outer diameter is fixed.
For the inner rotor, when the stator inner diameter is changed the rotor
outer diameter is updated, and when the rotor outer diameter is changed
the stator inner diameter is updated. The same applies to the outer rotor.
• When [Free] is selected, the gap length will shrink/expand along with
changes made to other variables.
[BARS: Number of Bars] Variable for induction motor.
[HEIGHT: Stack Height] Height of a stator core.
86
 [Rotor] and [Stator]

The variables (geometry parameters) displayed in [Stator] and [Rotor] differ depending on the tem-
plate.
 [Cage]
The [Cage] is displayed in the [Dimension] tab for induction motors.
In the [Cage], parameters are displayed to determine the resistance between the rotor bars. You can
either specify the resistance directly or by specifying the end ring cross-sectional area.
Parameters Description
[Input Type] Select from the following:
• [Resistance]:
Applies specified resistance values to both the end ring upper side and
lower side.
• [Upper/Lower Resistances]:
Applies differing resistance values to the end ring upper side and lower
side.
Select [Upper/Lower Resistances] and [Upper/Lower Sections] when the
end ring upper side and lower side differ in cross-section geometry.
• [Section]:
Applies resistance values calculated from the specified end ring cross-sec-
tion area to both the end ring upper side and lower side.
• [Upper/Lower Sections]:
Resistance values calculated from the end ring cross-section areas speci-
fied separately for the upper side and lower side are applied to the upper
side and lower side respectively.
For details on calculation methods for resistance values from end ring
cross-section areas, see “The calculation formula for resistance values in-
between the rotor bar from the end ring cross-section area” on page
89.
[Upper Ring Resistance], When [Resistance] is selected for [Input Type], specify the resistance values
[Lower Ring Resistance] to apply to both the end ring upper side and lower side via [Upper Ring
Resistance].
When [Upper/Lower Resistances] is selected for [Input Type], specify the
resistance values to apply to the upper side end ring via [Upper Ring Resis-
tance], and specify the resistance values to apply to the lower side end ring
via [Lower Ring Resistance].
[Upper Ring Section Select one of the following when [Section] or [Upper/Lower Sections] is
Type], [Lower Ring Sec- selected for [Input Type].
tion Type] • [Rectangle]:
Determines the end ring cross-section area by specifying the end ring
height and width.
• [Trapezoid]:
Determines the end ring cross-section area by specifying the end ring
height as well as the width of the upper side and lower side.
• [Section Area]:
Directly specifies the end ring cross-section area.
[Upper Ring Height], Specify the height of end ring when [Rectangle] or [Trapezoid] is
[Lower Ring Height] selected in [Upper Ring Section Type] or [Lower Ring Section Type].
87
JMAG-Express
[Upper Ring Width], Specify the width of end ring when [Rectangle] is selected in [Upper
[Lower Ring Width] Ring Section Type] or [Lower Ring Section Type].
[Upper Ring Top Width], Specify the width of the top and bottom sides of the end ring cross-sec-
[Upper Ring Bottom tion when [Trapezoid] is selected in [Upper Ring Section Type] or
Width], [Lower Ring Top [Lower Ring Section Type].
Width], [Lower Ring Bot-
tom Width]
Upper side [Upper Ring Top Width]
[Upper RingHeight]
Lower side
[Upper Ring Bottom Width]
[Upper Ring Top Width], [Upper Ring Bottom Width], [Upper Ring Height]
[Upper Ring Offset], Displayed when [Section] or [Upper/Lower Section] is selected in
[Lower Ring Offset] [Input Type].
Specify how much the center position of the end ring is offset from the
center position of the bar. The arithmetic mean value of the vertex coor-
dinates of the bar region is used as the center position of the bar.
• With the default value set to 0, the center positions of the end ring and
bar are the same.
• Entering a positive value moves the center position of the end ring away
from the model center.
• Entering a negative value moves the center position of the end ring
towards the model center.
This parameter is used when calculating the circumference of the end
ring.
88
Bar
End ring Center position of end ring
[Offset] [Offset]
Center
Center position of bar

Left: [Offset] is “0”,
Center: A positive value is entered in [Offset] (moves away from the center),
Right: A negative value is entered in [Offset] (moves towards the center)
[Upper Ring Area], Displayed when [Section Area] is selected in [Upper Ring Section Type]
[Lower Ring Area] or [Lower Ring Section Type]. Enter the cross-sectional area of the end
ring.
[Upper Ring Area Fac- Displayed when [Section] or [Upper/Lower Section] is selected in
tor], [Lower Ring Area [Input Type].
Factor] When the cross-section area of the end ring is set to 100%, specify the per-
centage of the area that has current running through it.
(Effective cross-section area of end ring)
= (End ring cross-section area) x (Effective cross-section area)/100
The calculation formula for resistance values in-between the rotor bar from the end ring
cross-section area
(Resistance value in between rotor bar) = (end ring circumference)/
(effective cross-section area of end ring) x (electric conductivity of cage) x (number of rotor bars)
Circumference of the end ring, (end ring circumference) = (center position of bar + offset from
m the center position of the bar) x 2π
Effective cross-section area of (effective cross-section area of end ring) = (cross-section area of
end ring, m^2 end ring) x (effective cross-section area)/100
The electric conductivity of The value of [Electric Conductivity] in the [Material] tab is used.
cage
Number of rotor bars The value in [BARS: Number of Bars] of the [Dimension] tab is
used.
89
JMAG-Express
[Materials] Tab
In the [Material] tab in the main window, set the material for each part of the motor.
• Notes (page 90)
Notes
• Custom materials cannot be created in JMAG-Express.
Parameters
 [Part]
Select parts to set materials from the list. Selecting a part will highlight that part in the [Model Dia-
gram] tab.
 [Category]
Select categories in which materials to use are categorized. Selections displayed under [Category] will
vary depending on the part.
Part Type Description

Core and magnet Material data provided by Material data of the actual product provided by the
material manufacturers material manufacturer.
Core [JSOL - Steel_Sheets] Sample data provided by JSOL.
[Custom Steel] Material data of soft magnetic material created by
the user on JMAG-Designer.
When this type is selected, in the [Product] list,
user-defined soft magnetic materials that meet the
following conditions will be displayed.
• In the [Magnetic Properties] tab, the [Magnetic
Property Type] is [B-H Curve].
• In the [Loss] tab, the [Iron Loss Type] is either [Iron
Loss Equation] or [Iron Loss Table]. In the case of
[Iron Loss Table], the setting method for each coef-
ficient and multiplier is [Constant].
• In the [Loss] tab, [Anisotropy Type] is [Isotropic].
• In the [Loss] tab, [Residual Strain Hysteresis Loss
Correction (Region)] and [Residual Strain Loss
Correction (Edge/Face)] are cleared.
90
Part Type Description

Magnet [JSOL - Ferrite Mag- Sample data provided by JSOL.
net], [JSOL-Nd-Fe- The numbered section for magnet names is
B_Magnet] numeric values for residual magnetic flux density.
For example, the residual magnetic flux density for
“Ferrite_br02” is 0.2 (T).
[Custom Magnet] Material data of permanent magnet created by the
user on JMAG-Designer.
When this type is selected, in the [Product] list,
user-defined magnets that meet one of the follow-
ing conditions will be displayed.
• [Magnetic Property Type] is [Nonlinear (Revers-
ible)].
• [Magnetic Property Type] is [Nonlinear (Revers-
ible/Temperature dependent)].
• [Magnetic Property Type] is [Nonlinear (Irrevers-
ible/Thermal demagnetization/Demagnetizing
field) (Bilinear Approximation)].
Coil and bar [Copper] A density of 8960 (kg/m3) and electrical conductivity
of 64500000 (S/m) are applied to the part.
[Aluminum] A density of 2699 (kg/m3) and electrical conductivity
of 40000000 (S/m) are applied to the part.
 [Product]
In [Product], the materials that are categorized in the material category selected in [Category] will be
displayed. Select the material to be applied to the part from among the displayed materials.
• For [Nonlinear (Reversible/Temperature dependent)] magnets, “(Temperature Dependent)” is dis-
played at the end of the material name.
• For [Nonlinear (Irreversible/Thermal demagnetization/Demagnetizing field) (Bilinear Approxima-
tion)] magnets, “(Irreversible, Temperature Dependent)” is displayed at the end of the material
name.
• For details on material data provided by material manufacturers, please contact the material
manufacturers directly. See “Parameters Explanation Edition” for material manufacturer contact
details.
 [Temperature, deg C]
This parameter is displayed when the following magnets are applied to the part.
• [Nonlinear (Reversible/Temperature dependent)] magnets:
When this magnet is used, select a temperature from the [Temperature] list. The B-H curve at
the selected temperature will be used for the analysis.
• [Nonlinear (Irreversible/Thermal demagnetization/Demagnetizing field) (Bilinear Approximation)]
magnets:
When this magnet is used, enter the temperature in the [Temperature] box. During the analysis,
a B-H curve at the specified temperature will be generated and the B-H curve will be used in the
analysis.
91
JMAG-Express
 [B-H Curve]
When soft magnetic materials or magnets are selected for [Product], the B-H curves of those materi-
als are displayed.
• B-H curve numerical value data cannot be checked in JMAG-Express.
 [Correction Factor] for cores

[Lamination Factor, “Lamination Factor” is the percentage of steel in a laminated core. Specify the
%] lamination factor when accounting for magnetic degradation in gaps between
steel sheets. During the analysis, the thickness is calculated for both the lami-
nated core and insulation (air layer) for an electromagnetic steel sheet based on
the lamination factor.
Insulation (air layer) Laminated core
Example: laminated steel sheet (95% lamination factor)

When a lamination factor is set for a non-oriented electromagnetic steel sheet,
the magnetic properties in the lamination direction and the in-plane direction
for each analysis step are determined as follows:
• Magnetic properties in the lamination direction:
Calculates the magnetic resistance when a laminated core and air are con-
nected in series, and then converts it into permeability.
• Magnetic properties in the in-plane direction:
Calculates the magnetic resistance when a laminated core and air are con-
nected in parallel, and then converts it into permeability.
92
[Saturation, %] A correction value can be multiplied by the size of saturation magnetization.
This function can be used for making fine adjustments in the difference
between magnetic properties used for the calculation and magnetic properties
for the actual machine.
Magnetic Properties Correction
Note the following:

• Enter a positive real number larger than zero for the correction value in the
[Saturation, %] box.
• The permeability is multiplied by the correction value when linear magnetic
property is used.
• The saturation magnetization is multiplied by the correction value when
nonlinear magnetic property is used.
• The value for magnetic flux density B is updated depending on the rela-
tional equation for magnetic flux density B , magnetic field H , and magneti-
zation M in the B-H curve. The value for magnetization M is updated in
the B-M curve.
• Extrapolation processing for the B-H curve is performed on the B-H curve
corrected via [Saturation, %].
 [Correction Factor] for magnets

[Residual Flux Density, For residual magnetic flux density, the B-H curve is moved in the B-axis
%] direction only for the amount of the correction value.
The following calculation formula is for residual magnetic flux density after
correction:
Km = (value set in [Residual Flux Density] under [Magnetic Properties
Correction])/100
Value after correction = (Magnetization Ms for each point in a B-H
curve) x Km
[Coercive Force, %] For coercive force, the B-H curve is moved in the B-axis direction only for
the amount of the correction value.
The following calculation formula is for coercive force after correction:
Kh = (value set in [Coercive Force] under [Magnetic Properties Correc-
tion])/100
Value after correction = (Coercive force iHc calculated from a B-H
curve) x Kh
93
JMAG-Express
Linear magnetization properties
Nonlinear magnetization properties
 [Magnetization Pattern]
Select a magnetization pattern for the magnet when magnet is selected in [Type].
When magnetization pattern is selected, the magnetization direction of the magnet is previewed in
the [Model Diagram] tab.
Type Description
[Parallel] When [Parallel] is selected for [Magnetization Pattern], either [[Parallel
Pattern (Circular Direction)] or [Parallel Pattern (Circular Any Direction)]
is used for evaluation in JMAG-Designer. Which one is used depends on
the arrangement of the magnets.
Left: [Parallel Pattern (Circular Direction)],

Right: [Parallel Pattern (Circular Any Direction)]
To use [Parallel Pattern (Circular Any Direction)] in the user defined tem-
plate, create a direction set (Magnet_Direction) when creating a motor
shape in Geometry Editor. The magnetization direction vector is deter-
mined by this direction set.
94
Type Description
[Radial] When [Radial] is selected for [Magnetization Pattern], either [Radial Pat-
tern (Circular Direction)] or [Radial Pattern (Circular Any Radial Center)]
is used for evaluation in JMAG-Designer. Which one is used depends on
the shape of the magnet.
Left: [Radial Pattern (Circular Direction)],

Right: [Radial Pattern (Circular Any Radial Center)]
To use [Radial Pattern (Circular Any Radial Center)] in the user defined
template, create direction set (Magnet_RadialDirection) when creating a
motor shape in Geometry Editor. The radial magnetization vector is deter-
mined by this direction set.
[Polar Anisotropy] When [Polar Anisotropy] is selected in [Magnetization Pattern], [Polar
Anisotropic Pattern (Circular Direction)] is used for evaluation in JMAG-
Designer.
When [Polar Anisotropy] is selected, input the radius from the center of
the magnetic pole in the [Radius] box.
Center of
magnetic pole
[Radius]
[Polar Anisotropic Pattern (Circular Direction)]
95
JMAG-Express
[Winding] Tab
In the [Winding] tab, set the coil pitch and wire connection information.
• Notes (page 96)
MEMO Windings determined from settings in the [Winding] tab can be checked via diagrams in the
[Model Diagram] tab, the [Winding Diagram] tab, and the [Slot Diagram] tab.
Notes
• The unit for CAD parameter values ([Wire Diameter] and [Wire Width], etc.) specified in the
[Winding] tab is Millimeters (mm).
Parameters
 [Number of phases]
Motor type Description
Brushless motor [3] or [6] can be selected.
Induction motor [Number of phases] is not displayed in the [Winding] tab because it is
fixed to 3-phase.
 [Connect Method]
Select either [Star] or [Delta].
Left: star connection, right: delta connection
 [Parallel Number]
In [Parallel Number], the divisors for the number of coils are displayed. For example, if the number
of slots is 24, “1, 2, 4, 8” is displayed. When [Parallel Number] is set, the series number is automat-
ically determined.
• When [Turns/Wire Size], [Turns/Slot-Fill Factor], or [Wire Size/Slot-Fill Factor] for [Input
Item] under [Coil Property] is selected, the phase resistance is calculated taking into account
whether the coils are in series or parallel.
[Coil Property]
Specify details of the coil such as the number of turns, the size and geometry of the wire cross-sec-
tion, and insulating film. The phase resistance or coil resistance is calculated based on these parame-
ters and used for the evaluation.
96
Phase resistance can also be specified directly.
 [Input Item]
Select the type of parameter to specify.
Since there is a correlation among the number of turns, wire size, and slot fill factor (ratio of the wire
cross-section area against the slot cross-section), specifying two of the three parameters determines
the remaining parameter.
Type Description
[Turns/Wire Size] Specify the number of turns of the coil, as well as the geometry and size of
the wire cross-section.
The slot fill factor is calculated based on these parameters and the following
formula.
(Slot fill factor) = (Wire cross-section area + Insulation film area) x
(Number of turns)/(Slot area - Insulation sheet area)
[Turns/Slot Fill Factor] Specify the number of turns of the coil and ratio of the wire cross-section
area to the slot cross-section.
The cross-section area of the wire is calculated based on these parameters
and the following formula.
(Wire cross-section area; including film thickness) = (Slot area - Insula-
tion sheet area) x (Slot fill factor)/(Number of turns)
Before selecting [Turns/Slot Fill Factor] in [Input Item], select the type of
geometry of the wire cross-section in the [Setting Type]. Also, enter the
ratio of the width and height of the rectangular wire when selecting the
[Rectangle Wire Dimension].
The diameter of the round wire or width and height of the rectangle wire is
calculated based on the wire cross-section area including the film thickness.
The ratio of the width and height of the rectangle wire uses the value that
has been calculated.
[Wire Size/Slot Fill Fac- Specify the geometry and size of the wire cross-section and the ratio of the
tor] area of wire cross-sectional area to the slot-section area.
The number of turns of the coil is calculated based on these parameters and
the following formula.
(Turns) = (Slot area) x (Slot fill factor)/(Wire cross-section area + Insula-
tion film area)
[Phase Resistance] Specify the resistance of the entire coil per phase. In addition to [Phase
Resistance], it also specifies [Number of Turns] and [Slot Fill Factor].
Note the following:

• Phase resistance R phase is calculated based on the following formula when either [Turns/Wire
Size], [Turns/Slot Fill Factor], or [Wire Size/Slot Fill Factor] is selected.
1 L phase × Kl × N turn × N coil
R phase = --- × ------------------------------------------------------------------
σ S wire
σ : Electric conductivity of materials (S/m),
L phase : Length (m) per coil,
Kl : Correction factor for the length of the coil,
97
JMAG-Express
N coil : Number of coils (for multiple phase motor, number of coils per phase),
N turn : Number of turns (turn) (for multiple phase motor, number of turns per phase),
S wire : cross-section area (m2) for one wire
• The slot area is determined by the area of the coil region.
Coil region 2
Coil region 1
Coil region of the stator
 [Number of Turns, Turn]

Specify [Number of Turns] when either [Turns/Wire Size], [Turns/Slot Fill Factor], or [Phase Resis-
tance] is selected in [Input Item].
Enter the number of turns per coil. For example, one phase is configured from two teeth, and when
there are 50 turns wound per phase, enter “25” in the [Number of Turns].
Number of turns
to specify
Eg. DC motor with 6-slots and 4-poles
 [Setting Type], [Wire Diameter, mm], [Wire Width, mm], [Wire Height, mm]
Specify [Setting Type] when either [Turns/Wire Size] or [Wire Size/Slot Fill Factor] is selected in the
[Input Item].
Select [Round Wire Dimension] or [Rectangle Wire Dimension] as the wire cross-section geometry.
Furthermore, enter [Wire Diameter, mm] when [Round Wire Dimension] is selected and [Wire
Width, mm] and [Wire Height, mm] when [Rectangle Wire Dimension] is selected.
 [Film Thickness, mm], [Number of Strands], [Insulation Thickness]

Specify these parameters when either [Turns/Wire Size], [Turns/Slot Fill Factor], or [Wire Size/Slot
Fill Factor] is selected in [Input Item].
[Film Thickness] Enter thickness for insulation that wraps the wire.
[Number of Strands] When winding a wire in parallel, enter the number of wires to put in paral-
lel.
[Insulation Thickness] Enter insulation thickness to prevent contact with the slot and wire. This
parameter is used to calculate the slot fill factor.
98
 [Slot-Fill Factor, %]
Specify [Slot-Fill Factor, %] when either [Turns/Slot Fill Factor], [Wire Size/Slot Fill Factor] or
[Phase Resistance] is selected in the [Input Item].
Enter the value defined with the following formula as the [Slot Fill Factor] when selecting either
[Turns/Slot Fill Factor] or [Wire Size/Slot Fill Factor].
(Slot fill factor) = (Wire cross-section area + Insulation film area) x (Number of turns)/(Slot area
- Insulation sheet area)
Enter the value defined with the following formula as the [Slot Fill Factor] when [Phase Resistance]
is selected.
(Slot fill factor) = (Wire cross-section area) x (Number of turns)/(Slot area - Insulation sheet area)
• The slot area is determined by the coil area.
• One layer corresponds to one coil bundle, and the insulation sheet is considered for each layer.
The definition of the insulation sheet is shown in the figure below.
Left: single-layer winding, right: dual-layer winding
 [Max Slot-Fill Factor, %]

Specify [Max Slot-Fill Factor] when either [Turns/Wire Size], [Turns/Slot Fill Factor], or [Wire Size/
Slot Fill Factor] is selected in [Input Item].
Enter the maximum value of the slot fill factor. When the value of [Slot Fill Factor, %] has exceeded
[Max Slot-Fill Factor, %], a warning will be displayed.
 [Correction Factor]
Specify [Correction Factor] when either [Turns/Wire Size], [Turns/Slot Fill Factor], or [Wire Size/
Slot Fill Factor] is selected in [Input Item].
Enter the multiplier for the coil length.
 [Phase Resistance, ohm]

Specify [Phase Resistance] when [Phase Resistance] is selected in [Input Item].
Enter the resistance of the entire coil per phase (the resistance of the area enclosed with dotted lines
in the diagram below).
99
JMAG-Express
Resistance of coil
 [Layers]
Select [1] or [2] as the number of the coil side which passes through each slot.
Left: single-layer winding, right: double-layer winding
If you select [1], one coil side is housed in one slot. If you select [2], two coil sides are housed in one
slot.
The number of layers is accounted for when either [Turns/Wire Size], [Turns/Slot Fill Factor], or
[Wire Size/Slot Fill Factor] is selected in [Input Item] during the calculation of phase resistance.
The number of layers is automatically fixed to “2” when [Automatic (Concentrated Winding)] is
selected as the coil winding method in the [Winding] group box.
[Winding]
The winding condition is displayed in the [Motor Diagram] tab once the coil winding is set.
 [Winding Scheme]
Method Description
[Automatic] Determines the winding based on the coil pitch. Enter a value in the [Coil
Pitch] box.
[Automatic (Concentrated In this winding method, the coil pitch is 1 and the number of layers is 2.
Winding)]
[Manual] Determines the winding according to the winding table. Select a phase
from [Edit Phase], then enter a value in each cell of the winding
table.When [6] is selected for [Number of phases], [Manual] is automati-
cally selected for [Winding Scheme].
 [Coil Pitch]
Enter the number of slots spanned by one coil in [Coil Pitch]. For example, enter “4” for the coil of
the diagram below.
100
 [Edit Phase], winding table

Specify [Edit Phase] and the winding table when [Manual] is selected as the setting method of the
winding of the coil.
First, select a phase in [Edit Phase]. Next, enter the ID of the slot where each coil enters and exits in
the winding table. The slot ID is assigned in a counter-clockwise direction.
• Specify the ID of the slot where a coil penetrates upward vertically to the graphics window in the
[Go] column.
• Specify the ID of the slot where a coil penetrates downward vertically to the graphics window in
the [Return] column.
Example
101
JMAG-Express
[Drive] Tab
In the [Drive] tab of the main window, set the drive circuit and driving current.
• Notes (page 102)
Notes
• For induction motors, the control method cannot be selected.
Parameters
 [Drive Circuit]
The parameters and options under [Drive Circuit] are used when [Machine Characteristics] is
selected as the evaluation item. For each parameter and option, see the explanation in the “Efficiency
Map” chapter of the “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
[Motor Control] This parameter is displayed for brushless motors.
Select one of the following:
• [Max Power/Efficiency]:
While varying the current amplitude/current phase, the point where the
efficiency is maximized is searched.
• [Max Torque/Current (MTPA)]:
For a given current, the current phase is controlled so that the torque
stays maximized.
• [Max Torque/Current + Field Weakening]:
When the terminal voltages are all lower than the maximum voltage, for
a given current the current phase is controlled so that the torque stays
maximized. When any terminal voltage rises above the maximum volt-
age, by flux-weakening control the current phase is advanced until the
terminal voltage falls below the maximum voltage.
• [Unity Power Factor]:
The current is controlled so that the power factor remains at 1.
MEMO [Unity Power Factor] is not supported for a six-phase motor.
• [Id = 0]:
The d-axis is controlled so that it remains at 0, that is, the phase current
remains at 0 deg.
[Maximum Voltage, V] Input the maximum value of the fundamental line voltage supplied from
the inverter to the motor.
When the amplitude of the phase voltage of the motor is Vph, the motor is
controlled in a range where √3 × Vph <= Vmax for a star connection. For a
delta connection, the motor is controlled in a range where Vph <= Vmax.
Enter a value greater than zero.
102
[Maximum Current, A] Input the maximum amplitude of the line current supplied from the
inverter to the motor.
When the amplitude of the phase current of the motor is Iph, the motor is
controlled in a range where Iph <= Imax for a star connection. For a delta
connection, the motor is controlled in a range where Iph × √3 <= Imax.
[Maximum Rotating This parameter determines the evaluation range. The range from 0 rpm to
Speed, rpm] the value of [Maximum Rotating Speed, rpm] is calculated and displayed
on the N-T graph.
[Mechanical Loss Factor, When taking into account the mechanical loss proportional to the speed,
W/k rpm] enter a correction factor.
[Add Approximate PWM • Cleared (default):
Iron Losses] Does not calculate PWM iron loss.
• Selected:
Calculates approximate PWM iron losses and adds PWM iron losses to
total losses and iron losses. Specify [DC Bus Voltage] and [Carrier Fre-
quency] described later.
MEMO The calculated PWM iron losses are reflected in the loss map, but
not in the design comparisons.
[Add Approximate PWM • Cleared (default):
Magnet Eddy Current Does not calculate permanent magnet eddy current loss.
Losses] • Selected:
Approximately calculates permanent magnet eddy current losses and
adds them to total losses. Specify [DC Bus Voltage] and [Carrier Fre-
quency] described later.
IMPORTANT This option is intended for use with IPM motors
that contain rectangular magnets; if you use this option for SPM
motors or motors that contain curved magnets, the calculation may
not be sufficiently accurate.
MEMO The calculated permanent magnet eddy current loss is reflected in
the loss map, but not in the design comparisons.
MEMO The electrical conductivity of the magnet is used in the approxi-
mate calculation of the magnet eddy current loss by JMAG-Express. If you
want to change the value of the electrical conductivity of the magnet used
in this calculation, run an efficiency map analysis study in JMAG-
Designer.
For information on how to send model data to JMAG-Designer, see
“Sending Designed Motor Models to JMAG-Designer” on page 81.
[DC Bus Voltage, V] This parameter is used when [Add Approximate PWM Iron Losses] or
[Add Approximate PWM Magnet Eddy Current Losses] is selected.
This value is used to find the modulation index of the PWM.
The modulation index is the ratio of fundamental wave amplitude and car-
rier wave amplitude.
[Carrier Frequency Hz] This parameter is used when [Add Approximate PWM Iron Losses] or
[Add Approximate PWM Magnet Eddy Current Losses] is selected.
Enter the PWM carrier frequency.
103
JMAG-Express
 [Operating Point]
If [Torque Ripple] or [Demagnetization] is selected as the evaluation item, transient analysis at an
operating point will be performed. Here, determine the operating point to be used for the analysis.
[Use Operating Point at • Selected (default):
Maximum Power] Transient analysis is performed using the operating point with the maxi-
mum mechanical power obtained from the machine characteristics anal-
ysis.
If the model has already output the results of the machine characteristics
analysis, the results will be used. If the model does not have the results of
the machine characteristics analysis, the machine characteristics analysis
will be performed before the transient analysis, even if [Machine Charac-
teristics] is cleared in the evaluation item.
• Cleared:
Transient analysis will be performed using the specified operating points.
Parameters for determin- When [Use Operating Point at Maximum Power] is cleared, specify the fol-
ing the operating point lowing parameters. The operating point determined by these parameters
will be used for the analysis.
• Brushless motors:
[Current, A], [Phase, deg], [Speed, rpm]
• Induction motors:
[Current, A], [Speed, rpm], [Slip]
The values of [Speed, rpm] and [Slip] will also be used to step control set-
tings when [Cogging Torque], [Torque Ripple], [Induced Voltage], or
[Demagnetization] is selected as the evaluation item.
MEMO Each value of the operating point used in the analysis is displayed in the title of the contour plot
or flux line diagram.
104
Evaluation Results in JMAG-Express 21.2
This chapter details the values obtained as a result of motor characterization using JMAG-Express.
In the following table, “evaluation item” means each checkbox in the [Evaluate] group on the [Home] tab of the
main window. For example, the result of the row displaying “[Machine Characteristics]” in the “Evaluation
Item” column is output when [Machine Characteristics] is selected.
MEMO In the step control, you can change the analysis step of the contour plots and flux lines.

• Evaluation Results of Brushless Motor (page 107)
• Evaluation Results of Induction Motor (page 114)
105
JMAG-Express
Notes
 Accuracy of evaluation results
Evaluation results are calculated numerically using the finite element method. For this reason, the
accuracy of the evaluation results will depend on the mesh of the calculation model.
In JMAG-Express, depending on the evaluation items, calculations are performed once mesh set-
tings are configured as described in “Contents of JPROJ File Exported from JMAG-Express” on
page 124.
Perform the following operations to check the mesh that is used in calculations.
(1) Export JPROJ files from JMAG-Express to JMAG-Designer. For details, see “Sending
Designed Motor Models to JMAG-Designer” on page 81.
(2) Select the study corresponding to the evaluation items in JMAG-Designer, then click [View
Mesh] .
The sensitivity of the mesh for the evaluation results can be investigated by changing the mesh set-
tings in JMAG-Designer and running additional analysis. If the results change significantly due to
changes made to the mesh settings, run analysis with a finer mesh and higher accuracy in JMAG-
Designer, then re-evaluate the results.
The following is an example of how to make the mesh finer.
• Increase the slide mesh [Circumferential Divisions] and [Radial Divisions] values.
• Set a smaller element size for parts.
106
Evaluation Results of Brushless Motor

• Design Table (page 107)
• Graphs (page 110)
• Maps (Three-axis Graph) (page 111)
• Contour Plots (page 112)
• Flux Lines (page 113)
Design Table
Physical quantity Description
Current (A) The amplitude value of the line current.
The value at the operating point that results in the maximum output. Or, the
value specified in the [Operating Point] group box in the [Drive] tab.
Phase (deg) The current phase value.
Speed (r/min) Rotational speed.
Torque (Nm) The average electromagnetic torque output from the Torque condition set for the
rotor.
MEMO Stator copper loss accounted for in electromagnetic torque.
Voltage (V) Peak Line-to-Line voltage between U- and V- phases.
This value is calculated from the magnetic flux and coil resistance.
dI dφ
V = IR + L ----- + ------
dt dt
V : voltage (V)
I : coil current (RMS value) (A)
R : coil resistance (ohm)
L : leakage inductance of the coil (H)
dφ
φ : magnetic flux (Wb). φ is calculated at a single speed, but ------ varies with
dt
speed.
Fundamental volt- The amplitude of the fundamental harmonic detected using the discrete Fourier
age (V) transform
107
JMAG-Express

Vd, Vq (V) d-axis and q-axis voltages.
This value is calculated from the coil flux linkage and current.
V d = RI d – ωφ q
V q = RI q + ωφ d
V d , V q : d-axis and q-axis voltages (V)

I d , I q : amplitude of d-axis and q-axis currents (A). The values specified in the
[Create Response Table] dialog.
ω = 2πf : angular frequency (rad/s) ( f : frequency (Hz))
φ d , φ q : flux linkage of d-axis and q-axis coils (Wb)
Power factor The ratio of active power to apparent power.

This value is calculated using the following equation.
( Vd I d + Vq I q )
pf = ------------------------------------------------------------
2 2 2 2
( ( Vd + Vq ) ( Id + Iq ) )
pf : power factor
I d , I q : amplitude of d-axis and q-axis currents (A)
Total loss (W) Sum of iron loss, copper loss, and circuit loss
Iron loss (W) Iron loss value from the Iron Loss condition (sum of hysteresis loss and eddy cur-
rent loss)
Hysteresis loss Hysteresis loss from the Iron Loss condition
(iron loss) (W)
Eddy current loss Eddy current loss of laminated steel sheet from the Iron Loss condition
(iron loss) (W)
Copper loss (W) Loss that occurs in windings.
This is calculated using coil resistance and currents.
W copper = 3 I 2 R
W copper : copper loss (W)

108

d-axis flux, q-axis d-axis and q-axis coil flux linkage.
flux (Wb) The time-series data of d-axis and q-axis coil flux linkage is obtained by perform-
ing a Park transformation on the time series data of one electrical angle period of
the U-phase, V-phase, and W-phase coil flux linkage calculated from FEA. The
average values of the time series data of the d-axis and q-axis coil flux linkage are
displayed as result values.
Park transformation details are as follows:
 
2 2
  cos Θ cos  Θ – --- π cos  Θ + --- π  φu 
 φd   3   3   
  = K× ×  φv 
 φq  2 2  
  – sin Θ – sin  Θ – --- π – sin  Θ + --- π  φw 
3 3  
φ d , φ q : coil flux linkage of d-axis and q-axis (Wb)
K : transform factor.
• K = 2 ⁄ 3 : relative conversion
Θ : rotor electrical angle (rad)
Θ = θ deg × π ⁄ 180 θ deg = θ e + θ e0
θ deg : rotor electrical angle (deg)
θ e : input electrical angle (deg)
θ e0 : initial electrical angle (deg)
φ u , φ v , φ w : U-, V-, and W-phase coil flux linkage (Wb)
Ld, Lq (H) d-axis and q-axis inductances.

Static inductances calculated using the following equation.
L ds = (φ d – φ magnet d ) ⁄ I d L qs = (φ q – φ magnet q ) ⁄ I q
L ds , L qs : d-axis and q-axis static inductance (H). For six-phase motors, the
mutual inductance value is included.
φ d , φ q : d-axis and q-axis total magnetic flux (Wb). The flux linkage in the FEM
coil at the specified current calculated from the magnetic field analysis.
φ magnet d , φ magnet q : d-axis and q-axis magnet magnetic flux (Wb). The flux
linkage for the FEM coil when the current is zero.
I d , I q : d-axis and q-axis current in the coil (A). The value specified in the [Cre-
ate Response Table] dialog.
Magnet flux (d- The amplitude value of the primary component of magnet magnetic flux.
axis) (Wb) This value is obtained by converting the flux linkage of the U-, V-, and W-phase
into the dq-axis and averaging the d-axis flux.
Magnet flux (d- Output for dual three-phase windings or six-phase windings.
axis-1) (Wb) This is the amplitude value of the primary component of magnet magnetic flux.
This value is obtained by converting the flux linkage of the first winding (U-V-W)
into the dq-axis and averaging the d-axis flux.
109
JMAG-Express

Magnet flux (q- The amplitude value of the primary component of magnet magnetic flux.
axis) (Wb) This value is obtained by converting the flux linkage of the U-, V-, and W-phase
into the dq-axis and averaging the q-axis flux.
Phase offset (deg) The electrical angle difference between the d-axis of the rotor and the U-phase coil
axis at the initial position of the rotor.
Each operating point is defined by setting “[Phase offset] value + current phase”
for the phase of U-phase specified by the Three-phase Current Source component.
This value is calculated from a no-load analysis.
Graphs
Evaluation item Result Description
[Mechanical Charac- N-T X-axis: speed (rpm), Y-axis: torque (Nm)
teristics] N-Output power X-axis: speed (rpm), Y-axis: output power (W)
N-Id X-axis: speed (rpm), Y-axis: d-axis current (A)
N-Iq X-axis: speed (rpm), Y-axis: q-axis current (A)
N-Iam X-axis: speed (rpm), Y-axis: current amplitude (A)
[Cogging Torque] Cogging torque X-axis: electric rotational angle (deg), Y-axis: torque
(Nm).
History graph of torque for no-load analysis.
Air gap magnetic flux X-axis: position (electrical angle) (deg), Y-axis: mag-
density (no load) netic flux density (T)
[Torque Ripple] Torque ripple X-axis: electric rotational angle (deg), Y-axis: torque
(Nm).
History graph of torque for load analysis.
density (load) netic flux density (T)
[Induced Voltage] Induced voltage X-axis: electric rotational angle (deg), Y-axis: voltage
(V)
• For star connection, U-phase induced voltage wave-
form is output.
• For delta connection, the induced voltage waveform
[Demagnetization] Induced voltage after X-axis: electric rotational angle (deg), Y-axis: voltage
demagnetization (V)
• For star connection, U-phase induced voltage wave-
form is output.
• For delta connection, the induced voltage waveform
110
Maps (Three-axis Graph)

[Mechanical Char- Efficiency X-axis: speed (rpm), Y1-axis: torque (Nm), Y2-axis: efficiency
acteristics] (%)
Efficiency:
Efficiency is calculated using the following formula. Shaft
torque does not include loss.
• For motor mode:
ω×T
Efficiency = 100 × ---------------------------------
ω × T + Loss
Efficiency : efficiency (%), ω : angular velocity (rad/s), T :
torque (Nm), Loss : total loss (W)
• For generator mode:
ω × T – Loss
Efficiency = 100 × ---------------------------------
ω×T
Power factor X-axis: speed (rpm), Y1-axis: torque (Nm), Y2-axis: power factor
(%)
Power factor:
The ratio of active power to apparent power. This value is calcu-
lated using the following equation.
( Vd I d + Vq I q )
pf = ------------------------------------------------------------
2 2 2 2
( ( Vd + Vq ) ( Id + Iq ) )
pf : power factor
I d , I q : amplitude of d-axis and q-axis currents (A)
111
JMAG-Express

Copper loss X-axis: speed (rpm), Y1-axis: torque (Nm), Y2-axis: copper loss
(W)
Copper loss:
The loss that occurs in windings. This is calculated using coil
resistance and currents.
W copper = 3 I 2 R

Iron loss (total) X-axis: speed (rpm), Y1-axis: torque (Nm), Y2-axis: iron loss
(W)
Iron loss:
Sum of hysteresis loss and eddy current loss.
Voltage (ampli- X-axis: speed (rpm), Y1-axis: torque (Nm), Y2-axis: voltage
tude) amplitude (V)
Voltage amplitude:
Peak Line-to-Line voltage between U- and V- phases. This value
is calculated from the magnetic flux and coil resistance.
dI dφ
V = IR + L ----- + ------
dt dt
V : voltage (V)
L : leakage inductance of the coil (H)
φ : magnetic flux (Wb). φ is calculated at a single speed, but
dφ
------ varies with speed.
dt
Current (ampli- X-axis: speed (rpm), Y1-axis: torque (Nm), Y2-axis: current
tude) amplitude (A)
Contour Plots

[Cogging Torque] Magnetic flux density (no load)
(T)
[Torque Ripple] Magnetic flux density (load) (T)
Iron loss density (load) (W/m3)
[Demagnetization] Permeance coefficient
Demagnetization ratio (com- The value is based on the no-load static
pared to reference step)(%) state of the first step.
112
Flux Lines

[Cogging Torque] Magnetic flux line (no load)
(Wb)
[Torque Ripple] Magnetic flux line (load) (Wb)
113
JMAG-Express
Evaluation Results of Induction Motor

• Graphs (page 116)
• Maps (Three-axis Graph) (page 116)
Design Table
Current (A) The amplitude value of the line current.
Slip (Hz) The value at the operating point that results in the maximum output. Or, the
Speed (r/min) Rotational speed.
Torque (Nm) The shaft torque at the operating point calculated from the equivalent circuit.
MEMO Stator copper loss and iron loss are account for in shaft torque. Other
losses (AC copper loss, mechanical loss, circuit loss) are not accounted for.
Voltage (V) The amplitude value of phase voltage calculated from the equivalent circuit
Power factor The ratio of active power to apparent power
Total loss (W) Sum of the rotor copper loss, stator copper loss, iron loss, stray load loss, and cir-
cuit loss
Iron loss (W) The iron loss calculated from the equivalent circuit
Stator copper loss Stator winding loss.
(W) This is calculated using the coil resistance and the current.
W copper = 3 I 2 R
I : coil current (A)

Rotor copper loss Rotor cage loss.
(W) This is calculated using the secondary resistance and the secondary current.
W copper = 3 I 2 R
W copper : secondary copper loss (W)
I : secondary current (A)

R : secondary resistance (ohm)
Stray load loss (W) The stray load loss calculated from the equivalent circuit.
The difference in loss between a 5% sliding load and no load. Here, this loss
refers to iron loss and secondary harmonic copper loss. Stray load loss is mod-
eled with a resistor connected in series with the secondary load resistor.
Rotor resistance Rotor cage equivalent resistance which is transferred to the stator
(ohm)
114

L1 (stator leakage Stator winding leakage inductance.
inductance) (H) An equivalent circuit parameter.
X 1 = ωL 1
X 1 : primary leakage reactance (ohm)

L 1 : stator leakage inductance (H)
L2 (rotor leakage Rotor cage leakage inductance that is transferred to the stator.
X 2 = ωL 2
X 2 : secondary leakage reactance (ohm)

L 2 : rotor leakage inductance (H)
Lm (magnetizing Equivalent magnetizing inductance.

G0 (exciting con- An equivalent circuit parameter.
ductance) (S)
T-type equivalent circuit for an induction motor
X1: Primary leakage reactance (ohm)

X2: Secondary leakage reactance (ohm)
R1: Primary resistance (ohm)
R2: Secondary resistance (ohm)
Rst: Stray load loss resistance (ohm)
Lm: Magnetizing inductance (H)
G0: Exciting conductance (S)
S: Slip
115
JMAG-Express
Graphs
[Mechanical Charac- N-T X-axis: speed (rpm), Y-axis: torque (Nm)
teristics] N-Output power X-axis: speed (rpm), Y-axis: Output power (W)
N-Slip X-axis: speed (rpm), Y-axis: slip
N-Iam X-axis: speed (rpm), Y-axis: current amplitude (A)
[Torque Ripple] Torque ripple X-axis: electric rotational angle (deg), Y-axis: torque
(Nm).
History graph of torque for load analysis.
density (load) netic flux density (T)
Maps (Three-axis Graph)

[Mechanical Char- Efficiency X-axis: speed (rpm), Y1-axis: torque (Nm), Y2-axis: efficiency
acteristics] (%)
Efficiency:
Efficiency is calculated using the following formula. Shaft
torque does not include loss.
• For motor mode:
ω×T
Efficiency = 100 × ---------------------------------
ω × T + Loss
• For generator mode:
ω × T – Loss
Efficiency = 100 × ---------------------------------
ω×T
Power factor X-axis: speed (rpm), Y1-axis: torque (Nm), Y2-axis: power factor
(%)
Power factor:
The ratio of active power to apparent power.
116

Copper loss X-axis: speed (rpm), Y1-axis: torque (Nm), Y2-axis: copper loss
(W)
Copper loss:
The total value of the stator copper loss and the rotor cage loss.
Stator copper loss is calculated using the coil resistance and the
current.
W copper = 3 I 2 R
I : coil current (A)

Rotor cage loss is calculated using the secondary resistance and
the secondary current.
W copper = 3 I 2 R
W copper : secondary copper loss (W)
I : secondary current (A)

R : secondary resistance (ohm)
Iron loss X-axis: speed (rpm), Y1-axis: torque (Nm), Y2-axis: iron loss cal-
culated from the equivalent circuit (W)
Voltage X-axis: speed (rpm), Y1-axis: torque (Nm), Y2-axis: amplitude
value of phase voltage calculated from the equivalent circuit (V)
Current X-axis: speed (rpm), Y1-axis: torque (Nm), Y2-axis: amplitude
value of phase current (A)
X1: Primary leakage reactance (ohm) Rst: Stray load loss resistance (ohm)
X2: Secondary leakage reactance (ohm) Lm: Magnetizing inductance (H)
R1: Primary resistance (ohm) G0: Exciting conductance (S)
R2: Secondary resistance (ohm) S: Slip
117
JMAG-Express
Contour Plots
[Torque Ripple] Magnetic flux density (load) (T)
Iron loss density (load) (W/m3) Stator iron loss.
Current density (A/m2)
Flux Lines
[Torque Ripple] Magnetic flux line (load) (Wb)
118
JMAG-Express 21.2 Appendix
This chapter describes the basic template of JMAG-Express, the specifications of the output JPROJ file, and the
shortcut keys.

• Basic Templates (page 120)
• Contents of JPROJ File Exported from JMAG-Express (page 124)
• Keyboard Shortcuts (page 130)
119
JMAG-Express
Basic Templates
This section shows the templates that are preinstalled in JMAG-Express. Some of the basic templates
include both rotor and stator geometries, some include only rotor geometries, and some include
only stator geometries.
• Brushless Motor (IPM) (page 120)
• Brushless Motor (SPM) (page 121)
• Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/IPM) (page 121)
• Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/SPM) (page 122)
• Induction Motor (page 122)
MEMO The same geometry as the motor geometry used in the basic template of JMAG-Express is reg-
istered in the [Geometry Library] tab of Geometry Editor.
Brushless Motor (IPM)
 Motor templates (rotor and stator)

PM_I_D_I PMSM/inner rotor/distributed winding/IPM
PM_I_D_IV PMSM/inner rotor/distributed winding/IPM; magnets are arranged with
V-shaped.
 Rotor templates
rip_000 IPM Rotor, Basic
rip_001 Standard
rip_003 Spoke
rip_004 Hexagon barrier. Operating 2 points on an edge
rip_005 V standard
rip_006 Crescent
rip_007 Twin crescent
rip_008 Bisection
rip_009 Bisection. Two-layer
rip_010 Bisection. Three-layer
rip_011 Disposed in center of the flux barrier
rip_012 Connected inner slit
rip_013 Inverted triangle
rip_014 V-type. Two-layer
 Stator templates
so_000 Stator core basic geometry
so_001 Parallel sided teeth, Arc bottom, Teeth width, Core back width
so_002 Teeth top angle, Arc bottom, Teeth width, Core back width
so_003 Fixed teeth angle, Arc bottom, Teeth width, Core back width
so_004 Straight teeth, Arc bottom, Teeth angle, Core back width
so_005 Straight teeth, Flat bottom, Slot width, Core back width
120
so_006 Crevice, Flat bottom, Slot width, Core back width

so_007 Crevice, Flat bottom, Slot width, Coil width
so_008 Parallel tooth opening, Round bottom, Teeth width, Core back width
so_009 Parallel tooth opening, Round bottom, Slot width, Core back width
so_010 Slotless, Coil clearance, Core back width
so_011 Parallel tooth opening, Arc bottom, Slot angle, Slot depth
so_012 Parallel tooth opening, Flat bottom, Slot angle, Slot depth
so_013 Parallel tooth opening, Round bottom, Teeth width, Slot depth
so_014 Straight teeth, Arc bottom, Slot angle, Slot depth
so_015 Straight teeth, Flat bottom, Slot angle, Slot depth
so_016 Straight teeth, Round bottom, Teeth width, Slot depth
Brushless Motor (SPM)

PM_I_D_S2 PMSM/inner rotor/distributed winding/SPM
PM_I_D_S3 PMSM/inner rotor/distributed winding/SPM; magnet is a half cylinder.
PM_I_D_S6 PMSM/inner rotor/distributed winding/SPM; magnet’s width is even.
PM_I_D_S7 PMSM/inner rotor/distributed winding/SPM; magnet’s angle is constant.
PM_I_D_S8 PMSM/inner rotor/distributed winding/SPM; magnet’s width is even, and
the axis diameter is variable.
PM_I_D_S9 PMSM/inner rotor/distributed winding/SPM; magnet is a half cylinder,
and the axis diameter is variable.
 Rotor templates
rsp_001 Ring
rsp_002 Constant angle
rsp_003 Constant width
rsp_004 Constant spacing
rsp_006 Constant width. Semi-circular
rsp_007 Constant width. Decay
The same stator templates can be used for brushless motors (IPMs); see “Brushless Motor (IPM)”
on page 120.
Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/IPM)

PM_O_C_I PMSM/outer rotor/concentrated winding/IPM
 Rotor templates
rip_101 Standard
121
JMAG-Express
rip_103 Spoke
rip_106 Crescent
si_001 Parallel sided teeth, Arc bottom, Teeth width, Core back width
si_002 Parallel sided teeth, Flat bottom, Teeth width, Core back width
si_003 Teeth top angle, Arc bottom, Teeth width, Core back width
si_004 Teeth top angle, Flat bottom, Teeth width, Core back width
si_006 Straight teeth, Arc bottom, Teeth width, Core back width
si_007 Straight teeth, Flat bottom, Teeth width, Core back width
si_008 Straight teeth, Arc bottom, Slot width, Core back width
si_011 Parallel tooth opening, Arc bottom, Slot angle, Slot depth
si_012 Parallel tooth opening, Flat bottom, Slot angle, Slot depth
si_013 Parallel tooth opening, Round bottom, Teeth width, Slot depth
si_014 Straight teeth, Arc bottom, Slot angle, Slot depth
si_015 Straight teeth, Flat bottom, Slot angle, Slot depth
si_016 Straight teeth, Round bottom, Teeth width, Slot depth
Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/SPM)

PM_O_C_S PMSM/outer rotor/concentrated winding/SPM
PM_O_C_S4 PMSM/outer rotor/concentrated winding/SPM; magnet’s width is even.
PM_O_C_S5 PMSM/outer rotor/concentrated winding/SPM; magnet’s angle is con-
stant.
 Rotor templates
rsp_101 Ring
rsp_106 Crescent
rsp_107 Constant width, Decay
The same stator templates can be used for brushless motors (Outer Rotor/IPMs); see “Brushless
Motor (Outer Rotor/IPM)” on page 121.
Induction Motor

IM_I_D_SC Induction motor/inner rotor/distributed winding/cage
122
 Rotor templates
rim_001 Round bar
rim_002 Oval bar
rim_003 Rectangular bar
rim_004 Sector bar
rim_005 Trapezoidal bar
rim_006 Parallel sided teeth
rim_007 Diamond bar. Inside of bar with sharp
rim_008 Diamond bar. Inside of bar with arc
rim_101 Rectangle & Rectangle double-case bar
rim_102 Round & Rectangle double-case bar
rim_103 Round & Oval double-case bar
The same stator templates can be used for brushless motors (IPMs); see “Brushless Motor (IPM)”
on page 120.
123
JMAG-Express
Contents of JPROJ File Exported from JMAG-Express

• Length Unit and Geometry (page 124)
• Studies (page 124)
• Study Properties (page 125)
• Analysis Conditions (page 125)
• Circuits (page 126)
• Mesh Settings (page 127)
• Response Table Creation Settings (page 128)
• Efficiency Map Settings (page 129)
IMPORTANT The information in this section is subject to change in future versions.
Length Unit and Geometry

• Millimeters (mm) are used as the unit of length.
• A 2D model is exported to the JPROJ file.
• For a partial model, the minimum geometry to be analyzed is decided based on information such
as periodicity of the geometry, magnetic field distribution, and winding settings, and only that
part is exported to a file.
• Partial models can also be set on circuits and not just geometries.
Studies
The following studies have been added to the JPROJ file exported from JMAG-Express.
Motor type Studies to be added

Brushless motor • Efficiency map analysis study (reduced order model) (study title: Map):
For details, see the explanation in “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
• No-load analysis study (study title: NoLoad):
This is a study of 2D magnetic field transient analysis.
• Load analysis study (study title: Load):
• Induced voltage analysis study (study title: InducedVoltage):
• Demagnetization analysis study (study title: Demagnetization):
Induction motor • Efficiency map analysis study (reduced order model) (study title: Map):
For details, see the explanation in “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
• Load analysis study (study title: Load):
• Load analysis study (study title: LoadPre):
This is a preliminary analysis study before the [Load] study is executed.
124
Study Properties
 [Step Control]
Each parameter of the step control is determined based on the number of poles, number of slots,
and speed for a brushless motor, and speed and slip for an induction motor.
 [Full Model Conversion]

[Stack Length] is the value of [HEIGHT: Stack Height] on the [Dimension] tab of the JMAG-
Express main window.
 [Circuit Settings]
Motor type Circuit conversion settings
Brushless motor The conversion factor is determined by the settings in [Parallel Number]/
[Series Number] (or [Coil Connection]) under the [Winding] tab.
Induction motor In [Circuit Settings], [Do Not Convert] is selected.
 [Solver Calculation Control]

Motor type Solver control settings
Induction motor • [Steady-state Approximate Transient Analysis]: ON
• [Induction Motor]: ON
• [Slip]:
• Efficiency map analysis:
The value calculated from the following formula is used.
Synchronous speed = 120 * power supply frequency/number of poles
Slip = (Synchronous speed - revolution speed)/synchronous speed
• Load analysis:
The slip value at the operating point is used.
 [Parallel Computing Settings]

The [Cores of Shared Memory Multiprocessing (SMP)] setting in [Number of Cores] in the JMAG-
Express [Options] dialog is not inherited by each study.
To use the parallel computing function in your analysis, you must reconfigure the settings in JMAG-
Designer.
Analysis Conditions
 Motion conditions
Motor type Settings
Brushless motor, • [Displacement Type]: [Constant Revolution Speed].
induction motor For efficiency map analysis, the value of [Maximum Rotating Speed] is used.
For all other analyses, the value of the velocity of the operating point is used.
125
JMAG-Express
 Temperature Distribution conditions

Motor type Settings
Brushless motor This condition is set in the study when using [Nonlinear (Irreversible/Thermal
demagnetization/Demagnetizing field) (Bilinear Approximation)] magnets.
• [Temperature]: [Constant]
The temperature value specified for the magnet is used.
Circuits
Motor type: analysis
Circuit components
type
Brushless motor: • Three-phase Current Source component
efficiency map analysis • Winding Multiphase Coil component
• Ground component
Brushless motor: • Electric Potential Probe components
no-load analysis, induced • Winding Multiphase Coil component
voltage analysis • Ground component
Brushless motor: • Three-phase Current Source component
load analysis • [X-axis Type]: [Angle]
• [Amplitude]: current at operating point
• [Period (mechanical angle)]: 360/(number of poles/2)
• [U-phase (electrical angle)]: Phase value at operating point
• Winding Multiphase Coil component
Brushless motor: • Three-phase Current Source macro component:
demagnetization analysis The values of the Current Source (1 Terminal) component in the sub
circuit are as follows:
• [X-axis Type]: Time
• [Amplitude]: (speed at operating point)/60
• [Frequency]: (number of poles/2)*(speed at operating point)/60
• [Phase]: 0
• [Start Point]: 1/(number of poles/2*(speed at operating point)/60)
• [End Point]: 2/(number of poles/2*(speed at operating point)/60)
• [X-axis Offset]: 1/(number of poles/2*(speed of operating point)/60)
126

Circuit components
type
Induction motor: • Three-phase Current Source component
efficiency map analysis • Winding Multiphase Coil component
• Cage macro component
• Resistor components in the Cage macro component:
[X-axis Type]: [Constant]
[Constant] value: A value determined from the design parameters of
JMAG-Express.
MEMO Cage macro components do not support circuit conversions.
Due to this, power supply voltage and winding resistance are output as
values depending on the number of series and parallels (values for when
circuit conversion is not used). For example, for 2 series, power supply
voltage and winding resistance are 1/2 the value.
Induction motor: • Three-phase Current Source component
load analysis • [X-axis Type]: [Time]
• [Amplitude]: Current value at operating point.
• [Frequency]: Frequency at operating point.
(Frequency at operating point) = (speed at operating point)/(1-(slip at
operating point)*(number of poles/2)/60)
• Cage macro component
• Resistor components in the Cage macro component:
[X-axis Type]: [Constant]
[Constant] value: A value determined from the design parameters of
JMAG-Express.
MEMO Cage macro components do not support circuit conversions.
Due to this, power supply voltage and winding resistance are output as
values depending on the number of series and parallels (values for when
circuit conversion is not used). For example, for 2 series, power supply
voltage and winding resistance are 1/2 the value.
Mesh Settings
JPROJ files exported from JMAG-Express also contain mesh information.
• Rotation slide mesh is used as the [Mesh Type] for all analyses.
• The number of divisions for calculation models is, for example, “4” for 1/4 models.
Mesh settings
type
Brushless motor: • [Generation Method]:
efficiency map analysis [Method 2 (Used from V.10.3)]
• [Circumferential Divisions]:
(least common multiple of the number of slots and poles)/(number of cal-
culation model divisions)*32
127
JMAG-Express

Mesh settings
type
no-load analysis [Method 3 (Automatic element size)]
load analysis [Method 2 (Used from V.10.3)]
induced voltage analysis [Method 2 (Used from V.10.3)]
This value is determined automatically by using the [Set Circumferential
Divisions Automatically] option.
demagnetization analysis [Method 2 (Used from V.10.3)]
• Element size of magnet:
(gap radius)/100 mm
Induction motor: • [Generation Method]:
efficiency map analysis [Method 3 (Automatic element size)]
180/(number of calculation model divisions)
• Element size of rotor conductor:
1 mm
Induction motor: • [Generation Method]:
load analysis [Method 2 (Used from V.10.3)]
Response Table Creation Settings

Response table creation settings have been added to the efficiency map analysis study (reduced order
model).
128
Motor type Parameters in the [Create Response Table] dialog

Brushless motor, • [Maximum Current]:
induction motor The value of [Maximum Current, A] under [Drive Circuit] in the [Drive] tab.
• [Maximum Speed]:
The value of [Maximum Rotating Speed, rpm] under [Drive Circuit] in the
[Drive] tab.
• [Parallel Jobs]:
The [Parallel Jobs of Efficiency Map Study] setting in the JMAG-Express
[Options] dialog is not inherited by the study.
Efficiency Map Settings

Efficiency map settings have been added to the efficiency map analysis study (reduced order model).
Motor type Parameters in the [Efficiency Map] dialog

Brushless motor, • [Max Voltage]:
induction motor The value of [Maximum Voltage, V] under [Drive Circuit] in the [Drive] tab.
• [Max Current]:
The value of [Maximum Current, A] under [Drive Circuit] in the [Drive] tab.
• [Voltage Limit]:
[Peak Voltage Amplitude]. [Voltage Limit] is a parameter for brushless motors.
• [Motor Control]:
[Max Power/Efficiency]. [Motor Control] is an option for brushless motors.
• [Mode]:
[Motor + Generation Mode]
• [PWM Losses]:
Determined by the parameters and options set in [Drive Circuit] of the [Drive]
tab.
• [Loss factor] in [Mechanical Loss]:
The value of [Mechanical Loss Factor, W/k rpm] under [Drive Circuit] in the
[Drive] tab.
129
JMAG-Express
Keyboard Shortcuts
 View control
To do this Press
Zoom in/out the model view Scroll the mouse wheel back and forth. Or, hold down the
mouse wheel and drag.
Move the model view Hold down the mouse wheel and drag with the left mouse
button.
130
JMAG-Express Classic Overviews
This chapter describes the overview of JMAG-Express Classic.

• About JMAG-Express Classic (page 134)
• Types of Motors Supported by JMAG-Express Classic (page 135)
• Functions of JMAG-Express Classic (page 137)
• JMAG-Express Classic Data Management (page 140)
133
About JMAG-Express Classic

For a product to be released, there are a series of procedures as shown below, regardless of slight dif-
ferences in purpose or type.
JMAG provides various tools for virtual evaluation of performance in terms of steps in product
design of electric machinery. JMAG-Express Classic is meant to be used in the preliminary design
stage of motors.
Generally, the following functions can be used in JMAG-Express Classic.
• Motor design using a template:
JMAG-Express Classic provides templates standardizing information such as motor geometries
(2D), materials, circuits, and drive conditions for each type of motor. Users can easily design
motors by selecting a template and setting specification values.
User-original templates can be created using 2D geometries created with other commercial CAD
software.
Motors designed in JMAG-Express Classic and exported as JCF files and DXF files can be used
in JMAG-Designer and other analysis software.
• Motor property evaluation:
Clicking one button after motor design allows evaluation of motor characteristics using elec-
tromagnetic field analysis after a short wait time. Characteristics evaluation can also be run for
2D geometries created in other commercial CAD software.
Obtained evaluation results can be used as input data of circuit simulators such as Simulink and
PSIM by exporting it as the JMAG-RT model data file (also known as RTT file. Extension:
*.rtt).
In addition, JMAG-Express Classic can be used when researchers of motor design are learning its
behavior principle and design method.
134
Types of Motors Supported by JMAG-Express Classic

JMAG-Express Classic can handle the following motors.
• Brushless Motor (IPM) • Switched Reluctance Motor

• Brushless Motor (SPM) • Brush Motor
• Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/IPM) • Externally Excited Synchronous Machine
• Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/SPM) • Wound-Field AC Synchronous Machine
• Induction Motor • Claw Pole Alternator
• Single-phase Induction Motor • Universal Motor
First row: Brushless motor (IPM, SPM, outer rotor/IPM, outer rotor/SPM),
induction motor, single-phase induction motor,
Second row: switched reluctance motor, brush motor, externally excited synchronous machine,
wound-field AC synchronous machine, Claw Pole alternator, universal motor
IMPORTANT Some functions cannot be used depending on the motor type. For details, see
“Functions of JMAG-Express Classic” on page 137.
 Brushless Motor (IPM)

tor and a magnet-mounted inner rotor. The motor rotates synchronously with the armature and
field system. Three-phase, six-phase and nine-phase are supported.
 Brushless Motor (SPM)

inner rotor. The motor rotates synchronously with the armature and field system. Three-phase, six-
phase and nine-phase are supported.
 Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/IPM)

tor and a magnet-mounted outer rotor. The motor rotates synchronously with the armature and
field system. Three-phase, six-phase and nine-phase are supported.
 Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/SPM)

outer rotor. The motor rotates synchronously with the armature and field system. Three-phase, six-
phase and nine-phase are supported.
135
 Induction Motor
This is a squirrel cage induction motor. It is composed of a coil-wound stator and a cage-mounted
rotor. Three-phase, six-phase and nine-phase are supported.
 Single-phase Induction Motor

This is a single-phase squirrel cage induction motor. It is composed of a coil-wound stator and a
cage-mounted rotor.
 Switched Reluctance Motor

This is a switched reluctance motor (variable reluctance motor). It is composed of a coil-wound sta-
tor and rotor. Three-phase, four-phase and five-phase are supported.
 Brush Motor
This is a DC motor with brush/commutator. It is composed of a coil-wound rotor and a magnet-
mounted stator. This motor runs on direct voltage.
 Externally Excited Synchronous Machine

This is a motor with a salient rotor core. Excitation is performed using externally supplied current.
The motor is composed of a stator wound with a coil and a rotor wound with a field coil. The motor
rotates when the armature and the field are synchronized. Three-phase, six-phase and nine-phase are
supported.
 Wound-Field AC Synchronous Machine

This is a synchronous motor with a salient rotor core. Excitation is performed using externally sup-
plied current. The motor is composed of a stator wound with a coil and a rotor wound with a field
coil. The motor rotates when the armature and the field are synchronized.
 Claw Pole Alternator

This is a three-phase claw pole type alternator. Excitation is performed using the externally supplied
current. The alternator is composed of a stator wound with a coil and a rotor wound with a field
coil. The alternator rotates when the armature and the field are synchronized.
 Universal Motor
This is a universal motor (single-phase series commutator motor). It is composed of a coil-wound
stator, rotor, brush, and commutator.
136
Functions of JMAG-Express Classic

The following functions can be used in JMAG-Express Classic.
• Evaluation (page 138)
• Motor Design Using a Template (page 138)
• Motor Sizing (page 138)
• Parametric Evaluation (page 138)
• JMAG-RT Model Creation (Exporting Evaluation Results for Control Circuit Simulation)
(page 139)
• Temperature Evaluation (page 139)
• Efficiency Map Creation (page 139)
 Function correspondence table for each motor
O: Supported, -: Not supported
JMAG-RT Model Creation
Temperature Evaluation
Efficiency Map Creation

using a template
Motor design
Motor Sizing
Evaluation
Brushless motor (IPM, SPM, 3-phase       

Outer Rotor/IPM, Outer Rotor/ 6-phase     -  
SPM) 9-phase     -  
Induction motor 3-phase       
6-phase     -  
9-phase     -  
Single-phase induction motor Single-phase   -  - - -
Switched reluctance motor 3-phase      - -
4-phase      - -
5-phase      - -
Brush motor -     - - -
Externally excited synchronous 3-phase   -  - - -
machine 6-phase   -  - - -
9-phase   -  - - -
Wound-field AC synchronous 3-phase   -  - - -
machine 6-phase   -  - - -
9-phase   -  - - -
Claw pole alternator 3-phase    - - - -
Universal motor Single-phase -  - - - - -
137
Evaluation
Characteristics of a motor speed can be evaluated at high speed.
• JMAG-Express Classic license is required.
• This function can be run when using a 2D geometry created using the Geometry Editor in
JMAG-Designer or commercial CAD software.
• This characterization process prioritizes calculation speed and is therefore inferior to JMAG-
Designer in terms of calculation accuracy.
For details, see “Running a Characteristics Evaluation” on page 238.
For details about using motor geometry data created in commercial CAD software, see “Creating a
Template Using the Geometry Created with the Geometry Editor and commercial CAD soft-
ware” on page 296.
Motor Design Using a Template

JMAG-Express Classic provides templates that define parameters for the geometry, materials, circuit
and drive conditions for each type of motor is built-in with geometries (2D), materials, circuits, and
templates standardized with information such as drive conditions for each type of motor. A motor is
designed using this template.
• JMAG-Express Classic has various templates for each type of motor.
• 2D geometries created with the Geometry Editor of JMAG-Designer and other commercial
CAD software can be imported to JMAG-Express Classic to create user-original templates.
• Motor designs exported as JCF files or JPROJ files can be used as an input file of JMAG-
Designer. Also, exporting geometries as DXF files allows use in software other than JMAG.
For details, see “Designing the Motor Using a Template” on page 226.
MEMO Later explanations will refer to templates created by the user as “user defined templates,” in con-
trast to templates registered by default in JMAG-Express Classic.
Motor Sizing
Sizing is a function for outputting the values of the main dimensions which fulfill desired value of
the specified rated output. The target motor can be easily designed by adjusting each design param-
eter after using the sizing function and determining approximate specifications.
For details, see “Calculating Recommended Specifications Using the Sizing Function” on page
231.
Parametric evaluation is a function for performing multiple evaluations for multiple cases in which
the design parameters (geometry, winding, and drive circuit) were modified automatically.
Responses from design parameter changes can be verified.
For details, see “Running Parametric Evaluation” on page 258.
138
JMAG-RT Model Creation (Exporting Evaluation Results for Control Circuit

Simulation)
JMAG-RT models can be created based on the evaluation results.
JMAG-RT models are the characteristics data such as flux linkage and inductance of a coil, induc-
tance, and resistance obtained as JMAG analysis results, which are exported for a control circuit sim-
ulation. Referencing this JMAG-RT model in Circuit Editor of JMAG-Designer, Simulink, or
PSIM makes it possible to perform a control circuit simulation accounting for motor characteristics.
For details, see “Exporting Evaluation Results for Control Circuit Simulation (JMAG-RT Models)”
on page 271.
MEMO JMAG-RT models can be created in JMAG-RT as well as JMAG-Express Classic.
Because JMAG-RT models created in JMAG-RT are based on analysis results using the JMAG-Designer
solver, they are superior to JMAG-RT models created in JMAG-Express Classic in terms of calculation
accuracy.
Temperature Evaluation
Heat generation due to loss such as copper loss, iron loss, or mechanical loss can be taken into
account when evaluating motor characteristics.
For details, see “Performing an Evaluation Taking Into Account Temperature” on page 260.
Efficiency Map Creation

Efficiency maps and power maps can be created with JMAG-Express Classic.
Using the map function, the motor operating range and efficiency and power output at each operat-
ing point can be checked. When creating a map, voltage and current limits are used.
For details, see “Evaluating Motor Performance Using Maps” on page 263.
139
JMAG-Express Classic Data Management

The following user-created data is stored in a database and is managed in JMAG-Express Classic.
• Templates (all motors), part templates (rotors or stators).
• Correction factors (materials, constants, result values)
• User materials (magnetic materials, magnets)
The database is created in the user-defined template folder.
Verifying the Path for the User-defined Template Folder

1. Select [Tools] > [Options] from the JMAG-Express Classic menu bar.
The [Options] dialog is displayed.
2. Click the [System] tab.
The folder path for the current user-defined template is displayed in the [User-Defined Tem-
plate] box. To change the path, enter any path into the text box.
No changes are required if there are no issues with the default settings. The default folder path is
as follows:
C:/Users/(User Name)/Documents/JMAG/JMAG-Express Classic10.0/database
Duplicating Selected Data and Using on Another Machine

Created templates, correction factors, and materials can be used on another machine by importing/
exporting the registered data in the database to a JMD file.
Importing/exporting data from a database can be performed from the [Manage Database] dialog.
For details, see “Managing Data Registered in the Database” on page 304.
Importing/Exporting Designed Motors as a Geometry Model

To use designed motors not as a JMAG-Express Classic template, but as a JMAG-Designer analysis
model, they must be exported as a JCF, JPROJ, or DXF file format.
For details, see “Exporting Designed Motors to a File” on page 276.
140
Basic Operation of JMAG-Express Classic
This chapter describes how to start JMAG-Express Classic, as well as its window configuration and menu.

• Starting JMAG-Express Classic (page 142)
• Screen Configuration (page 143)
• Menu (page 151)
141
Starting JMAG-Express Classic

JMAG-Express Classic is started from the Windows button or JMAG-Designer.
Starting from the Windows Button

1. Click the Windows button.
2. Select [JMAG-Designer] > [JMAG-Express Classic].
JMAG-Express Classic starts and the startup window is displayed.
Starting from JMAG-Designer
1. Click [Motor Model] on the toolbar of JMAG-Designer.

The following procedure can also be specified.
• In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a project and select [Motor Model] > [Create with
JMAG-Express Classic].
• From the JMAG-Designer menu bar, select [Tools] > [Motor Model].
The [Start JMAG-Express Classic] dialog is displayed.
MEMO When the above operations are executed without opening the project file in JMAG-
Designer, a message dialog asking whether to save the project file will be displayed before the [Start
JMAG-Express Classic] dialog. Click [Yes] and specify the destination to save the project file.
MEMO Select [Do not show this dialog in the future] if you do not want the [Start JMAG-Express
Classic] dialog to display every time JMAG-Express Classic starts.
2. Select [Close].
JMAG-Express Classic starts.
142
This chapter describes each of the screen configurations in JMAG-Express Classic.
• Startup Window (page 143)
• Template Editor Window (page 148)
MEMO The menus and tabs that are displayed in each of the screens differ depending on the type of
motor or evaluation item.
Startup Window
The startup window is displayed when JMAG-Express Classic starts.
Startup window
To close this window, click [Close]. The template window is displayed.

MEMO Select [Do not show this window in the future] to skip this window the next time JMAG-
Express Classic starts.
Template Window
Select a template to use in the template window.
143
Template Window
Tabs
The following tabs appear in the template window.
Tabs
 [Links] tab
A link button linking to the JMAG website will be displayed in the [Links] tab.
 [Template] tab
The list of templates are categorized by the type of motor and displayed in the [Template] tab. Orig-
inal templates created by the user will also be displayed in this tab.
The JMAG-Express Classic main window is displayed with one of the following operations.
• Click the template icon of the entire motor or the link displayed in the tab.
• Click the [Build New Combination] link and select both the rotor template and stator template.
Run the following operations to display the template editor window.
• Click the [Import DXF File] link and specify the DXF file of the motor geometry of the full
model.
MEMO For details about [Export DXF File], see “Evaluating Geometries Created in commercial CAD
software with JMAG-Express Classic” on page 290.
Main Window
Motor specifications are entered and characteristics evaluation is run in the main window.
144
Main Window
Tabs
The following tabs are displayed in the main window.
Tabs in the main window
 [Requirement] tab
The [Requirement] tab is displayed only for brushless motor, induction motor, switched reluctance
motor, brush motor, externally excited synchronous machine, wound-field AC synchronous
machine, and claw pole alternator.
Specifies settings for target value of motors and sizing parameters.
For details, see “[Requirement] Tab” on page 162.
 [Dimensions] tab
Specifies the dimensions of a motor.
The name of the template is displayed at the top of the tree. Variables (dimensions) are displayed
and categorized by motor parts (such as stator or im_rotor).
For details, see “[Dimensions] Tab” on page 163.
 [Materials] tab
Specifies the material of each part.
The name of the template is displayed at the top of the tree. Motor parts are displayed below, and
parts are displayed below that.
For details, see “[Materials] Tab” on page 171.
 [Winding] tab
Specify coil pitch and connection information in the [Winding] tab.
For an externally excited synchronous machine, wound-field AC synchronous machine, or claw pole
alternator, specify the settings for the main winding on the stator side in the [Winding] tab.
See the following pages for details.
145
• All motors:
“[Winding] Tab (Shared)” on page 177.
• Brushless motor:
“[Winding] Tab” on page 189
• Induction motor:
“[Winding] Tab (Multi-phase Induction Motor (Three-phase/Six-phase/Nine-phase))” on
page 196, “[Winding] Tab (Single-phase Induction Motor)” on page 198
• Switched reluctance motor:
• Brush motor:
• Externally excited synchronous machine:
“[Winding] Tab, [Field Coil] Tab” on page 204
• Wound-field AC synchronous machine and claw pole alternator:
• Universal motor:
 [Field Coil] tab

The [Field Coil] tab is displayed only for externally excited synchronous machines, wound-field AC
synchronous machines, and claw pole alternators.
Specify the connection information of the field coil on the rotor side in the [Field Coil] tab.
 [Drive] tab
A drive circuit and power supply to evaluate characteristics are specified. The template name is dis-
played at the top of the tree. Components of the circuit and design parameters for the circuit are dis-
played below.
For details, see the following pages:
“[Drive] Tab” on page 191
• Brush motor:
146
 [Thermal] tab
The [Thermal] tab is displayed when [Temperature Evaluation] is selected. This tab allows you to
set the parameters for evaluation considering temperature.
See “[Thermal] Tab” on page 182 for details.
 [Correction] tab
The [Correction] tab is displayed by selecting [Correction Factor] after running an evaluation of
characteristics.
The correction factor can be set in this tab for materials, constants, and result values, after running
an evaluation of characteristics.
For details, see “[Correction] Tab” on page 187.
 [Motor Diagram] tab

This tab shows the motor geometry determined from the values of each variable in the [Dimensions]
tab.
Magnetization direction of the magnet is displayed when rotor magnet is selected in the [Materials]
tab.
The winding direction is displayed when the [Winding] tab is displayed. Use the button on the top
right to show/hide the winding direction of each phase.
MEMO If the there is an inconsistency in the geometry, each part of the motor in the [Motor Diagram]
tab will not be highlighted.
 [Winding Diagram] tab

The [Winding Diagram] tab is displayed for a brushless motor, induction motor, switched reluc-
tance motor, externally excited synchronous machine, wound-field AC synchronous machine, and
claw pole alternator.
The slot number passed by the coil of each phase and the connection of each phase are displayed in
the diagram. Alphabets displayed in the [Winding Diagram] tab show the phases (U, V, W, A, B, C,
D, E). The numbers are the slot numbers. When the coil passing through the slot is facing the verti-
cal upward direction, it will be displayed in a column called [UP SLOT]. When it is facing the ver-
tical downward direction, it will be displayed in a column called [DOWN SLOT].
MEMO The positions of the phase and slot on the model can be confirmed in the [Motor Diagram] tab.
 [Slot Diagram] tab

The [Slot Diagram] tab is displayed for a brushless motor, induction motor, switched reluctance
motor, externally excited synchronous machine, wound-field AC synchronous machine, and claw
pole alternators.
Alphabets displayed in the [Slot Diagram] tab show the phases (U, V, W, A, B, C, D, E). The num-
bers are the slot numbers.
Use the button on the top right to show/hide the coil of each phase.
MEMO The positions of the phase and slot on the model can be confirmed in the [Motor Diagram] tab.
147
 [Thermal Model] tab

The [Thermal Model] tab is displayed when [Temperature Evaluation] is selected. Under the
[Thermal Model] tab, a thermal equivalent circuit diagram and a section of the model are displayed.
Each figure shows the relationship between the input parameters under the [Thermal] tab.
 [Characteristics] tab
The tab is divided into the following three frames: “design comparisons”, “performance graph”, and
“design sheet.”
• Design comparisons:
Design comparisons shows the history of characteristics evaluations in table form. Flags and
comments can be added to each case displayed in the table.
• Performance graph:
Performance graph is shown after running a characteristics evaluation. The value of each point
on a graph is displayed in table form when clicking on each graph and opening the [Graph Plot
Value] dialog. Right-click the table and specify [Copy All] to paste all contents in the table onto
a calculation software.
• Design sheet:
Design sheet shows the list of the parameters set in the [Dimensions], [Materials], [Winding],
and [Drive] tabs, as well as their corresponding values. Running characteristics evaluation dis-
plays evaluation value tables at a certain X-axis.
Design comparisons
Performance graph
Design sheet
See “Checking Evaluation Results (Operations in the [Characteristics] Tab)” on page 238.
Template Editor Window

The template editor window is displayed when one of the following operations are executed.
• Click [Modify] next to the component (such as stator, IPM_rotor) in the [Dimensions] tab of
the main window, then select [Edit Current Template] or [Create New Template from JCF/DXF
File] from the [Select Template] dialog.
• In the template window, click [Import DXF File] from the [Template] tab, and specify a file in
the [Open File] dialog.
148
MEMO In the former, the [Model], [Constraint], [Preview], and Editor] tabs are displayed in the tem-
plate editor window. The [Model] and [Editor] tabs are displayed in the latter.
template editor window
This window is used when specifying the following settings for the template.
• Type of material applied to the components and parts of the template
• Associations with the edge and condition
• Constraint settings to control the geometry (changing dimensions to variables)
• Feature settings to define the regularity of the geometry (periodicity/symmetricity)
This window can also link to JMAG-Designer and make modifications to the geometry.
Tabs
The following tabs are displayed in the template editor window.
Tab of the template editor window
 [Model] tab
The [Model] tab specifies the type of material applied to each component and part of the template,
and makes associations to edges and conditions.
For details, see “[Model] Tab” on page 209.
 [Constraint] tab
The [Constraint] tab specifies the constraint to control the geometry and feature to define the regu-
larity of the geometry.
For details, see “[Constraint] Tab (Constraint/Feature)” on page 215.
 [Preview] tab
The [Preview] tab allows confirmation of constraints and features specified for the template.
For details, see “[Preview] Tab” on page 221.
149
 [Editor] tab
The [Editor] tab displays the geometry defined by the [Model] tab, [Constraint] tab, and [Preview]
tab.
MEMO The color for regions, edges, and vertices in the [Editor] tab changes depending on the status.
The following describes the meaning of each color.
Color Description
Light blue The edge is displayed in light blue when it is registered as [Hidden Edges] in the
[Model] tab.
Edges displayed as light blue in the template editor window cannot be seen in the
main window.
Red Target edges are displayed in red when [d-Axis], [Boundary Edge], or [Hidden Edges]
is clicked in the treeview of the [Model] tab.
Orange The outline for a region selected in the [Editor] tab is displayed in orange.
Green Edges or vertices set with a constraint while selected in the treeview of the [Con-
straint] tab are displayed in green.
(Optional) Variables and supporting dimension lines selected in the tree of the [Preview] tab are
displayed in the color specified in the [Appearance] tab of the [Options] dialog. The
[Options] dialog is displayed when selecting [Tool] > [Options] from the menu bar.
Example: Dimension line (teeth width)
150
Menu
The menu bar of JMAG-Express Classic displays [File], [Edit], [View], [Template], [Sizing], [Char-
acteristics], [Tool], and [Help] depending on the window.
From top to bottom: Menu of the template window, menu of the main window,
menu of the template editor window
[File] Menu
The [File] menu is displayed in the template window, main window, and template editor window.
 [New]
This command is displayed in the main window.
Operation of selecting the template can be started again by returning to the template window.
A message dialog asking whether to save the changes is displayed when this command is selected
with template specifications entered. Click either [Yes] or [No]. [Register Template to Database] dia-
log is displayed when [Yes] is clicked. For details about this dialog, see “[Register to Database]” on
page 155.
 [Open]
This command can be selected from the template window or the main window.
The [Open] dialog is displayed when this command is selected.
Open the following files and simulate the motor model created previously.
• JMAG-MotorTemplate files (.jmd)
• Parameter files (.csv):
The parameter file can only be selected when [Open] is selected from the main window
For details, see “Import the Specifications Entered Previously from the File” on page 230.
 [Save]
This command can be selected from the main window.
[Save] saves the dimensions, materials, winding, and drive conditions specified in JMAG-Express
Classic to a JMAG-MotorTemplate files (.jmd). The first time a file is saved, [Save] performs the
same operations as [Save As]. After the file has been saved once, [Save] overwrites the previously
saved file.
 [Save As]
The designed motor is saved to a file. The types of files that can be saved are as follows:
151

• Parameter files (.csv)
• JCF files (.jcf )
• JMAG-Designer Project File (.jproj)
• DXF files (.dxf )
For details about saving as JMAG-MotorTemplate files and Parameter files, see “Export the Entered
Specifications to a File” on page 229.
When saving as JCF files, JMAG-Designer Project files, and DXF files, see “Exporting Designed
Motors to a File” on page 276.
 [Create JMAG-RT Model]

[Create JMAG-RT Model] exports the evaluation results as a RTT file (.rtt).
For details, see “Exporting Evaluation Results for Control Circuit Simulation (JMAG-RT Models)”
on page 271.
 [Export Evaluation Results]

The evaluation result is exported in CSV format (.csv). For details, see “Running a Characteristics
Evaluation” on page 238.
 [Print]
[Print] prints displayed contents in the [Characteristics] tab.
 [Output PDF File]

[Output PDF File] exports the contents in “performance graph” and “design sheet” in the [Charac-
teristics] tab as a PDF file.
 [Exit]
This command can be selected from the template window and the main window.
[Exit] closes JMAG-Express Classic.
MEMO JMAG-Express Classic cannot be closed from the template editor window.
 [Back to Main Window]

This command can be selected from the template editor window.
[Back to Main Window] switches back from the template editor window to the main window.
[Edit] Menu
The [Edit] menu is displayed in the main window and the template editor window.
152
 [Undo]
[Undo] cancels the last operation.
MEMO The number of times a selected operation can be undone is specified by using [Max Undo Stack
Size] in the [System] tab of the [Options] dialog. The [Options] dialog is displayed when [Tool] >
[Options] is selected from the menu bar.
 [Redo]
This menu reverses the action that has been undone.
 [Undo List]
The [Undo List] dialog is displayed when this command is selected. This dialog displays the list of
operations from the start of JMAG-Express Classic to the current state. When an operation is
selected from the list and [Undo] is clicked, the state will be reversed to where the selected operation
was run.
Click [Close] to exit the [Undo List] dialog.
 [Edit in JMAG-Designer]
[Edit in JMAG-Designer] changes the template geometry using the Geometry Editor of JMAG-
Designer.
For details, see “Editing the Template Geometry Using the JMAG-Designer Geometry Editor” on
page 303.
 [Get from JMAG-Designer]

[Get from JMAG-Designer] retrieves the geometry that is modified in the Geometry Editor of
JMAG-Designer.
For details, see “Editing the Template Geometry Using the JMAG-Designer Geometry Editor” on
page 303.
 [Cut Out Partial Model]

[Cut Out Partial Model] cuts out minimal geometry required to evaluate in JMAG-Express Classic
from geometry imported from JCF files or DXF files.
For details, see “Cut Out the Partial Model” on page 299.
 [Create Region]
[Create Region] creates regions for geometries imported from DXF files.
For details, see “Manually Create the Region” on page 300.
153
[View] Menu
The [View] menu is displayed in the main window and the template editor window.
 [Select]
This command can be selected from the main window and template editor window.
[Select] enables the selection of edges and vertices in the [Edit] tab of the template editor window.
 [Zoom]
This command can be selected from the main window and template editor window. [Zoom] zooms
in on or zooms out from the geometry displayed in the [Motor Diagram] tab of the main window or
the [Editor] tab of the template editor window.
While [Zoom] is pressed, clicking the left-mouse button and dragging upward zooms in on the
geometry. Dragging downward zooms out from the geometry.
 [Move]
This command can be selected from the main window and template editor window.
[Move] moves (pans) the geometry displayed in the [Motor Diagram] tab of the mail window or
[Editor] tab of the template editor window.
While [Move] is pressed, clicking the left-mouse button and dragging will move the geometry to
the direction it is dragged.
 [Fit to Window]
This command can be selected from the main window or the template editor window.
[Fit to Window] displays the entire geometry in the [Motor Diagram] tab of the main window or
the [Editor] tab of the template editor window.
[Template] Menu
The [Template] menu is displayed in the template window, main window, and template editor win-
dow.
 [Property]
The [Template Properties] dialog is displayed when this command is selected.
The unit of the dimension and the number of decimal places can be changed in this dialog.
• The unit of dimension is (mm) and the number of decimal places is set at “4” in the default state.
• Settings for the unit of dimension and number of decimal places are applied to parameters
related to the dimensions in the [Dimensions] tab and the [Winding] tab, as well as design com-
parisons of the [Characteristics] tab.
MEMO The effective number of digits for the parameter not related to the dimensions of the [Wind-
ing] tab is “5.”
• Values are not converted even if the units of dimension are changed while entering specifications.
154
• The dimension value is rounded off to the number of digits after the change when the number of
decimal places is decreased while entering specifications. When [Fix] is selected from the [Gap
Type] list in the [Dimensions] tab, the other dimension values are updated based on the
rounded-off value of the gap length.
• Information on units of dimension and the number of decimal places are saved to the template.
 [Register to Database]
The [Register Template to Database] dialog is displayed when this command is selected from the
main window or template editor window.
This dialog can register motor specifications, correction factors, and report layouts as a template in
the database.
The items are registered in the database after specifying the following settings and clicking [OK].
[Save Target]
Select a data to save as a template from the [Save Target] list.
Type Description
[All] Saves the rotor and stator in a single template.
[Rotor] or [Stator] Saves a part template with only a rotor or stator.
[Material Correction Factor], [Constant Correc- Saves the correction factor applied to the model.
tion Factor], or [Result Value Correction Factor]
[Report Layout] Saves the “performance graphs” frame layout in the
[Specifications] tab.
[Template Name]
Specify a file name for the template in the [Template Name] box. Multi-byte characters can also be
used. If a file with the same name exists, the file is overwritten.
The [OK] button in the [Register Template to Database] is not active unless a template name is
specified in the [Template Name] box.
[Image File]
An image used as a description can be attached to the template when either [All], [Rotor], or [Sta-
tor] is selected from the [Save Target] list.
Specify an image file (.png) after clicking on [Import], and opening the [Image File] dialog when
attaching an image.
The image specified here will be displayed in the template editor window, [Build New Combina-
tion] dialog, and the [Select Template] dialog.
[Description]
Specify information or comment related to the created template in the [Description] box. Informa-
tion specified here will be displayed in the template editor window, the [Build New Combination]
dialog, and the [Select Template] dialog.
155
[Existing Templates], [Existing Rotors], [Existing Stators], [Existing Material Correction

Factors], [Existing Constant Correction Factors], [Existing Result Value Correction Factor],
[Existing Report Layouts]
Depending on what is selected from the [Save Target] list, the displayed list varies. These lists display
templates registered in the database, correction factors, and a list of the report layouts. To overwrite
an existing template, select a template from the list.
MEMO To design a new motor based on a newly registered template, re-select a template by returning
to the template window.
 [Manage Database]
The [Manage Database] dialog is displayed when this command is selected from the template win-
dow and main window.
Templates, correction factors, and custom materials registered in the database can be imported/
exported and deleted in this dialog. For operations in the [Manage Database] dialog, see the follow-
ing pages.
• “Exporting Data from the Database” on page 304
• “Importing Data into the Database” on page 304
• “Deleting Data from the Database” on page 305
[Sizing] Menu
The [Sizing] menu is displayed in the main window.
For details about the sizing function, see “Calculating Recommended Specifications Using the Siz-
ing Function” on page 231.
 [Register Stator Geometry], [Register Rotor Geometry]

The geometry parameter set needs to be set for the rotor and stator to prevent inconsistencies for the
recommended value of dimensions due to the sizing function and the actual motor geometry.
 [Geometry Parameter Set List]

Confirms the parameter set specified to a geometry.
 [Preset Sizing]
Specify variables (geometry parameters) to be referenced when calculating a recommended dimen-
sion using the sizing function.
[Characteristics] Menu
The [Characteristics] menu is displayed in the main window.
 [Evaluate]
Runs characteristics evaluation of a motor.
High-speed characteristics evaluation can be run. For details, see “Running a Characteristics Evalu-
ation” on page 238.
156
 [Parametric Mode]
Runs a parametric evaluation.
For details, see “Running Parametric Evaluation” on page 258.
 [Calc in Designer]
This command is displayed when JMAG-Express Classic is run from the Windows menu.
Exports a motor designed in JMAG-Express Classic to JMAG-Designer and runs analysis.
For details, see “Calculating Designed Motors in JMAG-Designer” on page 278.
The correction factor can be set on materials, constants, and result values after running an evalua-
tion of characteristics.
 [Stack Design]
The history of characteristics evaluation is saved.
 [Edit Characteristics]
Changes the items displayed in the [Characteristics] tab.
 [Map]
Creates efficiency maps and output maps.
See “Evaluating Motor Performance Using Maps” on page 263 for details.
 [Temperature Evaluation]
Runs characteristics evaluation considering heat generation due to specified copper loss, iron loss,
mechanical loss, etc.
See “Performing an Evaluation Taking Into Account Temperature” on page 260 for details.
[Tool] Menu
The [Tool] menu is displayed in the template window, main window, and template editor window.
 [Send to JMAG-Designer]
The designed motor is exported to JMAG-Designer.
For details, see “Sending Designed Motors to JMAG-Designer” on page 279.
 [Close JMAG-Designer Link]

Releases a link between JMAG-Designer and JMAG-Express Classic.
For details, see “Sending Designed Motors to JMAG-Designer” on page 279.
157
MEMO JMAG-Designer and JMAG-Express Classic are automatically linked at the following timing.
• When starting JMAG-Express Classic from JMAG-Designer
• When sending a motor designed from JMAG-Express Classic to JMAG-Designer
 [Options]
This command can be selected from the template window, main window, and template editor win-
dow. The [Options] dialog is displayed when selecting this command.
The following settings can be specified in this dialog.
[System] tab
[User-Defined Template] Specify the folder to save user-defined templates.
[Max Undo Stack Size] Specify the number of times a selected operation can be undone
using [Undo] . The default value is 20.
[Display] tab
[Language] Select the language used in the user interface for JMAG-Express
Classic. The language for the user interface is automatically deter-
mined based on the language of the operating system when [System
Default] is selected.
[Window] Select [Do not show startup window] to hide the startup window
during JMAG-Express Classic startup.
[Appearance] tab
• [Background Color]:
Determine the background color for the [Motor Diagram] tab in main window or the [Editor]
tab in the template editor window.
[Use Gradient Background] To apply a gradient background to the [Motor Diagram] tab or the
[Editor] tab, select [Use Gradient Background]. For a single color
background, clear [Use Gradient Background]. Click the color but-
ton displayed to the right of [Background Color] to display a color
palette. Select the color to be applied to the background from the
color palette.
[Top Color], [Bottom Color] These options are shown when [Use Gradient Background] is
selected.
Specify the color at the top/bottom of the window when displaying
a gradient color. Click the color button displayed to the right of
[Top Color]/[Bottom Color] to display a color palette. Select a color
to be applied to the top/bottom window from the color palette.
• [Model Diagram]
158
[Color] and [Line Width] for Specify the color and width of the model outline. Click the color
[Model Outline] button displayed to the right of [Color] to display a color palette.
Select a color to be applied to the model outline from the color pal-
ette.
[Fill Region] Clear [Fill Region] when displaying a region with the same color as
the background with no fill.
[Color] and [Line Width] for Specify the color and width of the dimension line when highlighted.
[Dimension Line (Highlight)] Click the color button displayed to the right of [Color] to display a
color palette. Select a color to be applied to the dimension line from
the color palette.
[Feature Size Background] Specify a background color of the dimension value. Click the color
button displayed to the right of the [Color] to display a color pal-
ette. Select a color to be applied to the background of the dimension
value from the color palette.
[Help] Menu
The [Help] menu is displayed in the template window, main window, and template editor window.
 [Help]
This command can be selected from the template window, main window, and template editor win-
dow.
Opens the JMAG-Express Classic Help.
 [About]
This command can be selected from the template window, the main window, and the template edi-
tor window.
[About] displays the version information of JMAG-Express Classic.
159
160
JMAG-Express Classic Design Parameters and
Template Parameters
This chapter describes the following parameters specified in JMAG-Express Classic.

• Design parameters for defining motor specifications that each template contains. Specified in each tab of the
main window.
• Parameters for defining the templates themselves. Specified in each tab of the template editor window.

• Common Design Parameters (page 162):
[Requirement] Tab (page 162), [Dimensions] Tab (page 163), [Materials] Tab (page 171), [Winding] Tab
(Shared) (page 177), [Thermal] Tab (page 182), [Correction] Tab (page 187)
• Design Parameters for a Brushless Motor (page 189):
[Winding] Tab (page 189), [Drive] Tab (page 191)
• Design Parameters for an Induction Motor (page 196):
[Winding] Tab (Multi-phase Induction Motor (Three-phase/Six-phase/Nine-phase)) (page 196), [Winding]
Tab (Single-phase Induction Motor) (page 198), [Drive] Tab (page 199)
• Design Parameters for a Switched Reluctance Motor (page 200):
• Design Parameters for a Brush Motor (page 202):
• Design Parameters for an Externally Excited Synchronous Machine (page 204):
[Winding] Tab, [Field Coil] Tab (page 204), [Drive] Tab (page 204)
• Design Parameters for a Wound-field AC Synchronous Machine and Claw Pole Alternator (page 205):
[Winding] Tab, [Field Coil] Tab (page 205), [Drive] Tab (page 205)
• Design Parameters for a Universal Motor (page 207):
• Parameters During Creating and Editing Templates (page 209):
[Model] Tab (page 209), [Constraint] Tab (Constraint/Feature) (page 215), [Preview] Tab (page 221)
161
Common Design Parameters

This section describes the following parameters set in the main window which are not dependent on
the motor type.
• [Requirement] Tab (page 162)
• [Dimensions] Tab (page 163)
• [Materials] Tab (page 171)
• [Winding] Tab (Shared) (page 177)
• [Thermal] Tab (page 182)
• [Correction] Tab (page 187)
[Requirement] Tab
Set the motor target values and sizing parameters in the [Requirement] tab in the main window.
 [Targeted Value]
When a characteristics evaluation is performed after setting the target values for the motor, a line
showing the range of possible operation is displayed in the performance graph.
Left: maximum torque, right: rated power
Select the flags of the items that will be used as target values from those shown below, and enter a
value in the text box.
• [Rated Power, kw]:
When [Rated Power, kw] is deselected, the [Apply] button of the [Requirement] tab will not be
activated.
• [Maximum Torque, Nm]
• [Rated Revolution Speed, rpm]:
Enter the target revolution speed during maximum torque.
For brushless motors, when [X-axis] in the [Drive] tab is set to anything other than [Revolution
Speed, rpm], after clicking [Apply] in the [Requirement] tab, the [Rated Revolution Speed, rpm]
value is carried over to the [Revolution Speed, rpm] in the [Drive] tab.
• [Maximum Revolution Speed, rpm]:
When [Maximum Revolution Speed, rpm] is selected, this value is carried over to the maximum
revolution speed of the line showing the range of possible operation.
For brushless motors, when [Maximum Revolution Speed, rpm] is not selected and [X-axis] in
the [Drive] tab is set to [Revolution Speed, rpm], a graph that covers the maximum revolution
speed is displayed.
162
JMAG-Express Classic Design Parameters and Template Parameters
MEMO The relational equation of rated output, maximum torque, and rated revolution speed is the fol-
lowing:
(Rated output (W)) = (Maximum torque (N x m)) × 2p × (Rated revolution speed (rpm) /60)
When the specified values do not satisfy this formula, a warning message is shown.
 [Sizing Parameter]
Using the sizing function allows the calculation of recommended values of design parameters such as
dimensions, materials, and windings by simply specifying the desired rated output.
The recommended value is reflected in the parameter for each tab of [Dimensions], [Materials],
[Winding], and [Drive].
By using the sizing function, after determining approximate specifications, adjust each parameter
and design the motor so the desired performance is satisfied.
MEMO For details about the sizing function, see “Calculating Recommended Specifications Using the
Sizing Function” on page 231.
[Dimensions] Tab
The [Dimensions] tab is displayed in the main window. Specifies dimensions for a motor.
• The template label is displayed at the top of the tree.
• Variables (geometry parameters) are categorized and displayed by the structural components of
the motor.
MEMO When constraints and features are set in the geometry, variables linked to these are displayed
in the [Dimensions] tab. Constraints and features are set in the [Constraint] tab of the template edi-
tor window.
• Each parameter has a variable, name, and value.
Component
Label
Variable name
Value
When a variable such as [SD1: Outside Diameter] is selected from the tree, a dimension line for
that variable is shown in the [Motor Diagram] tab. The variable value can be specified at the
same time.
• Click [Modify] displayed on the right side of the components to change or edit templates. For
details, see “Change the Template of the Stator or Rotor While Entering the Specifications”
on page 227, and “Editing Templates” on page 302.
• An expression can be specified for the value.
163
• Variables used for parameters can be used in the expression. For example, when variable B is
two times variable A, “2*A” is entered for the value of variable B.
• When variables of different parts are used, the part name needs to be included in the expres-
sion as “Part! Variable” (e.g. stator!SD1).
[Unit]
The unit of dimension is displayed. To change the unit of dimension, select [Template] > [Property]
from the menu bar. For details, see “[Template] Menu” on page 154.
[all]
The following variables are displayed in [all] for components.
 [OUTD: Outer Diameter]

Specify [OUTD: Outer Diameter] when enlarging or shrinking the size of the entire motor.
[OUTD: Outer Diameter] is specified when setting the size of the entire model (values for the entire
variable are updated when the value for [OUTD: Outer Diameter] is modified).
 [GAP: Gap Length]

Changing [GAP: Gap Length] changes only the [GAP: Gap Length] part for the rotor outer diame-
ter for inner rotors, and the rotor inner diameter for outer rotors.
The required size of components (stator or rotor) is automatically adjusted, when there are inconsis-
tencies in the geometries based on modifications in [GAP: Gap Length].
 [Gap Type]
• When [Fix] is selected, the gap length of the stator inner diameter and rotor outer diameter is
fixed for the inner rotor. For the outer rotor, gap length of the rotor inner diameter and the stator
outer diameter is fixed.
For the inner rotor, when the stator inner diameter is changed the rotor outer diameter is
updated, and when the rotor outer diameter is changed the stator inner diameter is updated. The
same applies to the outer rotor.
• When [Free] is selected, the gap length will shrink/expand along with changes made to other
variables.
 [HEIGHT: Stack Height]

Type the height of a stator.
 Usage Notes When Using User-Defined Templates

• [OUTD: Outer Diameter] is not displayed in the [Dimensions] tab, if the diameter constraint
which displays the entire outer diameter is not set in a template. Specify the diameter constraint
164
in the [Constraint] tab of the template editor window, when setting [OUTD: Outer Diameter]
to active.
• [GAP: Gap Length] is not displayed in the [Dimensions] tab, if the diameter constraint which
displays the outside diameter of stator in the template of an inner rotor motor is not set. This
also applies when the diameter constraint for the outside diameter of a rotor in the template of
an outer rotor motor is not set.
Specify the diameter constraint in the [Constraint] tab of the template editor window, when set-
ting [GAP: Gap Length] to active.
• [GAP: GAP Length] is not displayed in the [Dimensions] tab, if the diameter constraint which
displays the inside diameter of a stator and the outside diameter of a rotor in the template of an
inner rotor motor is not set.
This also applies when the diameter constraint which displays the inside diameter of a rotor and
the outside diameter of a stator is set, in the template of the outer rotor motor.
Specify the diameter constraint in the [Constraint] tab of the template editor window, when set-
ting [Gap Length] to active. Furthermore, click [Preset Sizing] , open the [Preset Sizing] dia-
log, and set which variable (diameter constraint) indicates the stator inner diameter and rotor
outer diameter (or the rotor inner diameter, stator outer diameter).
[End Ring]
The cross section of a cage can be defined for induction motors. For some of the templates for exter-
nally excited synchronous machines and wound-field AC synchronous machines, the end ring cross
section of a damper bar can be defined.
The resistance value between the rotor bar is accounted for during evaluation based on the section
settings.
The resistance value in between the rotor bar is calculated with the following formula.
(Resistance value in between rotor bar) = (end ring circumference)/
(effective cross section area of end ring) x (electric conductivity of cage) x (number of rotor bars)
Circumference of the end ring, Calculated from the following formula.

m (end ring circumference) = (center position of bar + offset from
center position of bar) x 2π
Effective cross section area of Calculated from the following formula.
end ring, m^2 (effective cross section area of end ring) = (cross section area of
end ring) x (effective cross section area)/100
Electric conductivity of cage The value of [Electric Conductivity] in the [Materials] tab is
used.
Number of rotor bars The value in [The number of Secondary Conductors] of the
[Dimensions] tab is used.
Specify the following settings.
 [End Ring Section]

When the cross-section area of the end ring are the same in the upper edge and lower edge, select
[Same]. When they are different, select [Different].
Parameters to define the cross section area of the end ring are displayed separately for upper edge
and lower edge when [Different] is selected.
165
 [Section Type]
Select [Rectangular] or [Trapezoid] when calculating the cross section area from the dimensions of
the end ring cross section.
When specifying the cross section area of the end ring directly, select [Section Area].
The parameters displayed in the tree will differ depending on the selected [Section Type].
 [CEH: Height], [CEW: Width]

Displayed when [Rectangular] is selected in [Section Type]. Type the height and width of end ring.
 [CEH: Height], [CEU: Upper Width], [CEL: Lower Width]

Displayed when [Trapezoid] is selected in [Section Type]. Type the values shown in diagram below.
[Upper Width]
[Height]
[Lower Width]
 [CEA: Section Area]

Displayed when [Section Area] is selected in [Section Type]. Enter the cross sectional area of the end
ring.
 [CEP: Offset] (Offset amount from the center position of the bar)
Specify how much the center position of the end ring is offset from the center position of the bar.
The arithmetic mean value of the vertex coordinates of the bar region is used as the center position
of the bar.
With the default value set to 0, the center positions of the end ring and bar are the same. Entering a
positive value moves the center position of the end ring away from the model center. Entering a neg-
ative value moves the center position of the end ring towards the model center.
This parameter is used when calculating the circumference of the end ring.
166
Bar
End ring Center position of end ring
[Offset] [Offset]
Center
Center position of bar

Left: [Offset] is “0”,
Center: A positive value is entered in [Offset] (moves away from the center),
Right: A negative value is entered in [Offset] (moves towards the center)
 [CES: Effective Section Area (%)]

When the cross section area of the end ring is set to 100%, specify the percentage of the area that
actually has current running through it.
(Effective cross section area of end ring) = (End ring cross section area) x (Effective cross section
area)/100
 [Shaft Part], [External Case: shaft]

Displayed when a brushless motor or a induction motor is used and the following operation is exe-
cuted.
• Click [Temperature Evaluation].
Specify the following dimension values for temperature evaluation. Changing these dimension val-
ues will be reflected in the model section view under the [Thermal Model] tab.
Variable name Parameter Description

CT [Case Thickness] Specifies the thickness of the case (housing) that covers the
motor.
ECH [End Cap Height] Specifies the distance from the stator surface.
- [Presence of Fins] Select [Has Fines] when cooling using fins attached to the
case is modeled in the temperature evaluation.
FW [Fin Width] Displayed when [Has Fines] is selected for [Presence of Fins].
FT [Fin Thickness] Displayed when [Has Fines] is selected for [Presence of Fins].
FN [Number of Fines] Displayed when [Has Fines] is selected for [Presence of Fins].
SL [Shaft Length] Specifies the height of the shaft.
167
Left: brushless motor inner rotor, right: induction motor
Claw Pole
For claw pole alternator, the shape of the claw poles can be defined from the following parameters.
• RE: Root Embrace
• TE: Tip Embrace
• RT: Root Thickness
• DSLOT: Slot Depth
• TT: Tip Thickness
• SHT: Shoe Thickness
• RFR: Root Fillet Radius
• TFR: Tip Fillet Radius
• ECL: Edge Chamfer Length
• ECA: Edge Chamfer Angle
Please check the figure below for the points where each parameter is defined.
168
Notes
• The volume for a model is calculated from the specifications in the [Dimensions] tab, [Winding]
tab, and [Field Coil] tab to calculate mass/inertia moment.
The entire volume is calculated by the following formula.
(Entire coil volume) = (Area for each coil area) x (Slot fill factor) x (Length of single coil) x
(Number of coils)
Item Description
Area of single The area of a single coil region differs based on the [Layers] settings in the [Wind-
coil region ing] tab.
• The value with the sum of an area in a region specified for [Layer 1] and [Layer 2]
of [Coil Layer], is used when [Layers] is “1”.
• The area of a region set for [Layer 1] in [Coil Layer] is used when [Layers] is “2.”
For field winding, the area of the region set to coil layer [Layer 1] is used.
* The specifications for [Layers], are set in the [Model] tab of the template editor
window.
Lamination fac- The set values or calculated values in the [Winding] tab and [Field Coil] tab are
tor used.
Length of a sin- The calculation is run by the following formula.
gle coil (Length of a single coil) = ((Height) + (Length of end winding)) x 2
(Length of end winding) = (Distance between slots) + (Raised length of coil)
Height The value set in the [Dimensions] tab is used.
Distance The length of arc which is connected from the region where the coil is exiting, to the
between slots center of area where it is entering.
169
Distance between slots
Coil region
Example: Brushless motor (coil pitch: 2)
Item Description
Raised length of • The calculation is run by the following formula for concentrated winding.
coil (Raised length of coil) = ((coil width)/2) x 2
• The calculation is run by the following formula for distributed winding.
(Raised length of coil) = ((Coil width) /2) x 6
*The length of distributed winding also includes the length required to wind over
other coils.
Coil width The calculation is run by the following formula.
(Coil width) = (Area of coil region)/(Length of radial direction of coil region)
MEMO Example of raised length of coil

• For concentrated windings, the raised length of the top area of the coil when L is “1/2 the coil width”
is 2L.
1/2 the coil width

Coil center line
Rotor and stator

Coil Coil width
Concentrated winding (left: full model view, right: enlarged view of upper area)
• For distributed windings, the raised length of the top area of the coil when L is “1/2 the coil width” is
6L.
170
1/2 the coil width

Coil center line
Rotor and stator

Coil
Coil width
Distributed winding (left: full model view, right: enlarged view of upper area)
[Materials] Tab
This tab is displayed in the main window.
Materials for each part in a motor can be specified in this tab.
• At the top of the tree, the template label is displayed. Each part of a motor is listed in the
treeview.
• When a part is selected from the treeview, the corresponding part of a model is highlighted in the
[Motor Diagram] tab. The material properties of the selected part are also displayed in the
[Material] settings.
• The types of materials which can be applied to each part are determined in advance as a tem-
plate, and detailed settings are performed for each type of material in the [Material] tab.
Settings of magnetic material
Parameter in the [Materials] tab is displayed

according to [Material Type] of the template.
Left: main window [Materials] tab, Right: template editor window [Model] tab.
The types of materials which can be applied to each part are determined for each template.
• One of the following material types is specified for each part.
171
• Magnetic Material:
For the default templates, the [Material Type] for “stator core”, “rotor core”, and “shaft” is
specified as [Magnetic Material].
• Magnet:
For the default templates, the [Material Type] for “rotor magnet”, and “stator magnet” is
specified as [Magnet].
• Coil:
For the default templates, the [Material Type] for “coil” and “stator coil” is specified as [Coil].
• Non-Magnetic Material:
For the default templates, the [Material Type] for the induction motor part “cage” is specified
as [Non-Magnetic Material].
• Air:
For the default templates, the [Material Type] for the induction motor part “air (cage air
gap)” is specified as [Air].
• Field coil:
For the default templates, [Material Type] of the part “field coil” for an externally excited syn-
chronous machine, wound-field AC synchronous machine, and claw pole alternator is speci-
fied as [Field Coil].
• Damper bar (Control winding):
For the default templates, [Material Type] of the part “damper bar” for an externally excited
synchronous machine, wound-field AC synchronous machine is specified as [Damper Bar].
Specifying Magnetic Material Properties
 [Category], [Product]
From the [Category] list, select a category of the categorized materials to be used.
• [JSOL - Steel_Sheets]:
Select this when using sample data provided by JSOL. This sample data is specified for JIS model
numbers.
• Material manufacturer company and material type:
Select when using material data of an actual product provided by the material manufacturer.
• [Custom Steel]:
Select to manually define material characteristics (B-H curve, iron loss equation, mass density) of
the material applied to the parts. For details, see “Using Custom Materials (Soft Magnetic
Materials)” on page 175.
When [Custom Steel] is selected, materials (parts) created by the user in JMAG-Designer can be
selected.
When the [Category] list is selected, the material in the selected category is shown in the [Product]
list. Select one of the materials to be applied to the part.
Notes
When [Custom Steel] is selected from the [Category] list, the [Product] list displays a soft magnetic
material created by a user in JMAG-Designer that satisfies the following conditions.
• [B-H curve] is set as [Magnetic Property Type]
• [Iron Loss Equation] or [Iron Loss Table] is specified as [Iron Loss type].
When [Iron Loss Equation] is specified, setting method for each coefficient/multiplier is [Con-
stant].
• The [Anisotropy Type] of [Iron Loss] is [Isotropic]
172
• [Use Hysteresis Loop] and [Residual Strain Loss Correction] of [Iron Loss] are set to Off
 [Iron Loss Correction Factor]

Specify the correction factor for [Iron Loss Correction Factor] when correcting loss for electromag-
netic steel sheets.
The correction equation is as follows:
N
VI = 2π  ------ τ + βP Iron + P Copper
 60
β≥0
VI : Input (w), N : Revolution speed of the rotor (rpm), τ : Torque (Nm),
β : Iron loss correction factor, P Iron : Iron loss of the steel sheet (W),
P copper : Copper loss of the coil (W)
Specifying Magnet Properties
 [Category], [Product]
From the [Category] list, select a category of the categorized materials to be used.
• [JSOL - Ferrite Magnet], [JSOL-Nd-Fe-B_Magnet]:
Select this when using sample data provided by JSOL. This sample data is specified for JIS model
numbers.
• Material manufacturer company and material type:
Select when using material data of an actual product provided by the material manufacturer.
• [Custom Magnet]:
Select to manually define material characteristics (relative permeability, coercive force, mass den-
sity) of the material applied to the parts. For details, see “Using Custom Materials (Magnets)”
on page 176.
When [Custom Magnet] is selected, materials (partially) created by the user in JMAG-Designer
can be selected.
When the [Category] list is selected, the materials in the selected category is shown in the [Type] list.
Select one of the materials to be applied to the part.
Notes
• The two types of sample data provided by JSOL are Ferrite magnets and Neodymium magnets.
The numbered section for magnet names are numeric values for residual magnetic flux density.
For example, the residual magnetic flux density for “Ferrite_br02” is 0.2 (T).
• When [Custom Magnet] is selected from the [Category] list, one of the following applicable
items from the magnets created by a user in JMAG-Designer is shown.
• [Magnetic Property Type] is [Nonlinear (Reversible)]
• [Magnetic Property Type] is [Nonlinear (Reversible/Temperature dependent)].
• “Temperature Dependent” is displayed at the end of the material name when the magnet is tem-
perature dependency.
• To set the thermal or irreversible demagnetization for a magnet, send the model data to JMAG-
Designer, and then specify the settings.
173
 [Temperature, deg]
When a temperature dependent magnet is selected from the [Product] list, select at which tempera-
ture magnetic properties data is used in the characteristics evaluation.
 [Magnetization Pattern]
Specify the magnetization distribution using some simplified patterns.
Lists the magnetization patterns, including [Radial], [Parallel], and [Polar Anisotropy]. For [Polar
Anisotropy], specify the radius of the pole in the magnetization.
Magnetization Pattern
The magnet flux is corrected according to the following formula.
k
F ′ = F  1 + --------- ( Tf now – Tf base )
100
F ' : Corrected magnet flux (Wb)
F : Magnet flux before correction (Wb)
k : The [Temperature Correction Factor, %/K] value for a magnet part under the [Materials]
tab
Tf now : Temperature during evaluation (K)
Tf base : The [Base Temperature, K] value for a magnet part under the [Materials] tab
When performing a correction, enter the following parameters.

• [Drive Temperature, K]:
The operating temperature of the magnet (the temperature of a magnet when the motor is run-
ning).
Default: 293.15 K = 20 deg C
• [Base Temperature, K]:
The initial temperature of the magnet.
Default: 293.15 K = 20 deg C
• [Temperature Correction Factor, %/K]:
A correction factor by which the temperature is multiplied.
Allowed range: -100.0 to 0.0 (negative value or zero), default: -0.11%/K
Notes
• The temperature correction factor can be applied to magnets with no temperature dependency.
174
• Heat generation due to loss such as copper loss, iron loss, or mechanical loss can be taken into
account when evaluating motor characteristics. See “Performing an Evaluation Taking Into
Account Temperature” on page 260.
Specifying Properties for Coil/Non-Magnetic Material/Field Coil/Damper Bar
 [Category]
From the [Category] list, select a material.
Type Description
[Copper] The density is set to 8960 (kg/m3).
The electric conductivity is set to 64500000 (S/m).
[Aluminum] The density is set to 2699 (kg/m3).
The electric conductivity is set to 40000000 (S/m).
[Other] Select this when applying densities and electric conductivity to parts.
 [Electric Conductivity, S/m], [Density, kg/m^3]

When [Other] is selected from the [Category] list, enter the values.
Using Custom Materials (Soft Magnetic Materials)

Materials with any properties can be used. For soft magnetic materials, specify B-H curves, iron loss
formulas, and mass density.
1. Select [User Steel] from the [Category] list.
2. Select [New Material] from [Product] list, and click .

The [Material Property Setting (Steel Sheet)] dialog is displayed.
3. Input the material name in [Label].
4. Enter the magnetic field and magnetic flux density values in the [B-H curve] table.
The following should be noted when setting the table:
• Enter the magnetic fields in ascending order.
• Enter two or more data points.
• Specify (0, 0) for the first point of the B-H curve.
• Specify the table data so that the gradient of the B-H curve decreases monotonously on the B-
H plane (Make sure there is only one inflection point).
Point of inflection #2
Point of inflection #1
Monotonous Monotonous
increase increase
Monotonous
decrease
Example: B-H curve with multiple inflection points (w-shaped curve)
175
MEMO The [B-H Curve] table supports copy-and-paste of data.

5. Specify the coefficient and multiplier of the [Iron Loss Equation].
Specify coefficients Kh , Ke and multipliers α , β , γ , δ according to the following formula.
α β r δ
W = Kh ⋅ B ⋅ f + Ke ⋅ B ⋅ f
W : Loss Density [W/m3], B : Magnetic Flux Density [T], f : Frequency [Hz]
6. Specify the density in [Density].

The mass density of material is used for calculating the mass or moment of inertia.
7. Click [OK].
In the [Product] list in the [Materials] tab, the names of the created materials are shown.
• To edit the created materials, select the material from [Product] and click .
• To delete the created material, select the material from [Product] and click .
Using Custom Materials (Magnets)

Materials with any properties can be used. For magnetic materials, specify relative permeability,
coercive force, and mass density.
1. Select [Custom Magnet] from the [Category] list in the [Materials] tab.
2. Select [New Material] from [Product] and click .

The [Material Property Setting (Magnet)] dialog is displayed.
3. Input the material name in [Label].
4. Enter constant relative permeability for [Relative Permeability].
5. For [Coercive Force], enter the value bHc at the intersection of the magnetic field axis
and the straight line of the demagnetization curve which is extrapolated.
Magnetic flux density, T
Relative permeability μ r
Magnetic field, A/m
Coercive force bHc
6. Specify the density in [Density].

The mass density of material is used for calculating the mass or moment of inertia.
7. Click [OK].
In the [Product] list in the [Materials] tab, the names of the created materials are shown.
• To edit the created materials, select material from [Product] and click .
• To delete the created material, select the material from [Product] and click .
176
[Winding] Tab (Shared)

The [Winding] tab is displayed in the main window. The winding state can be specified in this tab.
The setting items consistent for all motors in the [Winding] tab will be explained here.
MEMO For details about setting items that differ depending on the motor, see the following page.
• Brushless motor: “[Winding] Tab” on page 189
• Induction motor: “[Winding] Tab (Multi-phase Induction Motor (Three-phase/Six-phase/Nine-
phase))” on page 196
• Single-phase induction motor: “[Winding] Tab (Single-phase Induction Motor)” on page 198
• Switched reluctance motor: “[Winding] Tab” on page 200
• Brush motor: “[Winding] Tab” on page 202
• Externally excited synchronous machine: “[Winding] Tab, [Field Coil] Tab” on page 204
• Wound-field AC synchronous machine and claw pole alternator: “[Winding] Tab, [Field Coil] Tab” on
page 205
• Universal motor: “[Winding] Tab” on page 207
 [Coil Property]
Specify details of the coil such as the number of turns, the size and geometry of the wire cross sec-
tion, and insulating film. The phase resistance or coil resistance is calculated based on these parame-
ters and used for the evaluation.
Phase resistance or coil resistance can also be specified directly.
[Input Item]
Select the type of parameter to specify.
Since there is a correlation among the number of turns, wire size, and slot fill factor (ratio of the wire
cross section area against the slot cross section), specifying two of the three parameters determines
the remaining parameter.
Type Description
[Turns/Wire Size] Specify the number of turns of the coil, as well as the geometry and size of
the wire cross section.
The slot fill factor is calculated based on these parameters and the following
formula.
(Slot fill factor) = (Wire cross section area + Insulation film area) x (Num-
ber of turns)/(Slot area - Insulation sheet area)
[Turns/Slot Fill Factor] Specify the number of turns of the coil and ratio of the wire cross section
area to the slot cross section.
The cross-section area of the wire is calculated based on these parameters
and the following formula.
(Wire cross section area; including film thickness) = (Slot area - Insulation
sheet area) x (Slot fill factor)/(Number of turns)
Before selecting [Turns/Slot Fill Factor] in [Input Item], select the type of
geometry of the wire cross section in the [Setting Type]. Also, enter the
ratio of the width and height of the rectangular wire when selecting the
[Rectangle Wire Dimension].
The diameter of the round wire or width and height of the rectangle wire is
calculated based on the wire cross section area including the film thickness.
The ratio of the width and height of the rectangle wire uses the value that
has been calculated.
177
Type Description
[Wire Size/Slot Fill Fac- Specify the geometry and size of the wire cross section, and the ratio of the
tor] wire cross section area to the slot cross section.
The number of turns of the coil is calculated based on these parameters and
(Turns) = (Slot area) x (Slot fill factor)/(Wire cross section area + Insulation
film area)
[Phase Resistance] Can be selected for a brushless motor, induction motor, switched reluc-
tance motor, externally excited synchronous machines, wound-field AC
synchronous machines, or claw pole alternator. Specify the resistance of the
entire coil per phase. In addition to [Phase Resistance], it also specifies
[Number of Turns] and [Slot Fill Factor].
[Coil Resistance] Can be selected for a brush motor or universal motor. Specify the resistance
of each coil. In addition to [Coil Resistance], it also specifies [Number of
Turns] and [Slot Fill Factor].
MEMO The slot area is determined by the area of the coil region.
Coil region 2
Coil region 1
Coil region of the stator
MEMO Phase resistance R phase is calculated based on the following formula when either [Turns/Wire
Size], [Turns/Slot Fill Factor]. or [Wire Size/Slot Fill Factor] is selected.
1 L phase × Kl × N turn × N coil
R phase = --- × ------------------------------------------------------------------
σ S wire
σ : Electric conductivity of materials (S/m),
L phase : Length (m) per coil,
Kl : Correction factor for the length of the coil,
N coil : Number of coils (for multiple phase motor, number of coils per phase),
N turn : Number of turns (turn) (for multiple phase motor, number of turns per phase),
S wire : Cross section area (m2) for one wire
MEMO For details about the calculation method for the length per coil, see the notes of “[Dimensions]
Tab” on page 163.
[Number of Turns]
Specify [Number of Turns] when either [Turns/Wire Size], [Turns/Slot Fill Factor], [Phase Resis-
tance], or [Coil Resistance] is selected in [Input Item].
• Enter the number of turns per coil when it is a brushless motor, induction motor (three-phase/
six-phase/nine-phase), switched reluctance motor, externally excited synchronous machines,
wound-field AC synchronous machines, or claw pole alternators. For example, one phase is con-
figured from two teeth, and when there are 50 turns wound per phase, enter “25” in the [Num-
ber of Turns].
178
Number of turns
to specify
Eg. DC motor with 6-slots and 4-poles
MEMO Coils are created to match the number of phases for a switched reluctance motor.
• Enter the number of coil wires that pass each slot for a single-phase induction motor. Enter “6”
in the [Number of Turns] (number of wires in the black square).
Example
• Enter the number of coil wires that pass one side of the teeth when it is a brush motor or univer-
sal motor.
Example
[Setting Type], [Wire Diameter] or [Wire Size]

Specify [Setting Type] when either [Turns/Wire Size] or [Wire Size/Slot Fill Factor] is selected in the
[Input Item].
Select [Round Wire Dimension] or [Rectangle Wire Dimension] as the wire cross section geometry.
Furthermore, enter [Wire Diameter] when [Round Wire Dimension] is selected and [Wire Size]
(width and height of the wire) when [Rectangle Wire Dimension] is selected.
MEMO The unit of [Wire Diameter] and [Wire Size] follows the unit specified in the [Dimensions] tab.
Note that the value is not converted when the unit changes in the [Dimensions] tab after the value is
input.
179
[Film Thickness], [Number of Strands], [Insulation Thickness]

Specify these parameters when either [Turns/Wire Size], [Turns/Slot Fill Factor], or [Wire Size/Slot
Fill Factor] is selected in [Input Item].
[Film Thickness] Enter thickness for insulation that wraps the wire.
[Number of Strands] When winding a wire in parallel, enter the number of wires to put in paral-
lel.
[Insulation Thickness] Enter insulation thickness to prevent contact of the slot and wire. This
parameter is used to calculate slot fill factor.
MEMO The unit of [Film Thickness] and [Insulation Thickness] follows the unit specified in the
[Dimensions] tab. Note that the value is not converted when the unit changes in the [Dimensions] tab
after the value is input.
[Slot Fill Factor]

Specify [Slot Fill Factor] when either [Turns/Slot Fill Factor], [Wire Size/Slot Fill Factor] or [Phase
Resistance] (or [Coil Resistance]) is selected in the [Input Item].
• Enter the value defined with the following formula as the [Slot Fill Factor] when selecting either
[Turns/Slot Fill Factor] or [Wire Size/Slot Fill Factor].
(Slot fill factor) = (Wire cross section area + Insulation film area) x (Number of turns)/(Slot
area - Insulation sheet area)
• Enter the value defined with the following formula as the [Slot Fill Factor] when [Phase Resis-
tance] or [Coil Resistance] is selected.
(Slot fill factor) = (Wire cross section area) x (Number of turns)/(Slot area - Insulation sheet
area)
MEMO The slot fill factor is used when calculating the volume of the entire coil. For details, see
“[Dimensions] Tab” on page 163. Furthermore, when [Phase Resistance] or [Coil Resistance] is selected
as an [Input Item], the slot fill factor is also used when calculating coil current density. For details see
“List of Evaluation Results” on page 241.
MEMO The definition of insulation sheet area is shown below.
Left: In case of single-layer winding, right: In case of dual-layer winding
[Maximum of Slot Fill Factor]

Specify [Maximum of Slot Fill Factor] when either [Turns/Wire Size], [Turns/Slot Fill Factor], or
[Wire Size/Slot Fill Factor] is selected in [Input Item]. Enter the maximum value of the slot fill fac-
tor. When the value of [Slot Fill Factor] has exceeded [Maximum of Slot Fill Factor], a warning will
be displayed.
180
[Correction Factor]
Specify [Correction Factor] when either [Turns/Wire Size], [Turns/Slot Fill Factor], or [Wire Size/
Slot Fill Factor] is selected in [Input Item]. Enter the multiplier for the coil length.
[Phase Resistance]
Specify [Phase Resistance] when [Phase Resistance] is selected in [Input Item]. Enter the resistance
of the entire coil per phase (the resistance of the area enclosed with dotted lines in the diagram
below).
Resistance of coil
[Coil Resistance]
Specify [Coil Resistance] when [Coil Resistance] in [Input Item] is selected. Enter the resistance per
coil. “1 coil” is a bundle of wire winded through two slots.
[Layers]
Specify [Layers] for brushless motors, induction motors (three-phase/six-phase/nine-phase), exter-
nally excited synchronous machines, wound-field AC synchronous machines, or claw pole alterna-
tors.
Select [1] or [2] as the number of the coil side which pass through each slot.
Left: single-layer winding, right: double-layer winding
If you select [1], one coil side is housed in one slot. If you select [2], two coil sides are housed in one
slot.
The number of layers is accounted for when either [Turns/Wire Size], [Turns/Slot Fill Factor], or
[Wire Size/Slot Fill Factor] is selected in [Input Item] during the calculation of phase resistance.
The number of layers is automatically fixed to “2” when [Automatic (Concentrated Winding)] is
selected as the coil winding method in the [Winding] group box.
[Number of Coils]
Specify [Number of Coils] for a single-phase induction motor. Type the number of coils per pole of
the main winding.
181
MEMO The number of coils per pole is accounted for when either [Turns/Wire Size], [Turns/Slot Fill
Factor] or [Wire Size/Slot Fill Factor] is selected in [Input Item] during the calculation of phase resis-
tance.
[Thermal] Tab
The [Thermal] tab on the main window is displayed when [Temperature Evaluation] is selected.
Notes
• Derived units are fixed, such as the heat transfer coefficient (W/(m^2K)), thermal conductivity
(W/(m K)), and thermal resistance (K/W) units. If the length or temperature unit is changed in
the [Template Properties] dialog, the derived units will not change.
• The following heat source components are used in the thermal equivalent circuit.
Pjs: coil copper loss
Pjr: secondary conductor copper loss
Pis: stator core iron loss
Example of a thermal equivalent circuit

(left: brushless motor (IPM), right: induction motor)
182
Parameters
 [Setting]
[Evaluation Type] Select one of the following:
• [Startup Temperature] (Default):
The temperature immediately after starting the motor is evaluated.
• The thermal equivalent circuit calculations are performed only once.
• [Steady Temperature]:
The steady state temperature of the motor is evaluated. Steady state is
where the temperature distribution variations cannot be seen over the
passage of time.
• The thermal equivalent circuit calculations are repeated until the tem-
perature converges.
The temperature of the current iteration (the current execution of the
thermal equivalent circuit calculations) and its previous iteration is
compared, and when the difference is within 1 deg C (or 1 K, 1.8 deg
F), the temperature is judged to have converged.
• If the temperature does not converge after 10 iterations of thermal
equivalent circuit calculations, the execution is aborted and an error
message is displayed.
• At each iteration, the current temperature is used to correct the coil
and secondary conductor resistance values and the magnet flux values.
[Revolution Speed, rpm] The revolution speed of the motor.
Depending on the selection from the [Mode] list, the [Revolution
Speed] box may be displayed as an input parameter under the [Drive]
tab. The value specified in the [Revolution Speed] box under the
[Drive] tab is entered in the [Revolution Speed] box under the [Ther-
mal] tab.
However, the [Revolution Speed] box under the [Drive] tab and the
[Revolution Speed] box under the [Thermal] tab are not necessarily the
same value. If the [Revolution Speed] value is changed under the
[Drive] ([Thermal]) tab, change the [Revolution Speed] value under the
[Thermal] ([Drive]) tab to the same value.
[Ambient, degC] The temperature of the motor drive environment.
The unit of temperature can be changed in the [Template Properties]
dialog.
183
[Stator-Case Gap], [Coil- Select the contact status between parts from the following. Depending on
Stator Gap], [Coil-Case the contact state setting, the contact coefficient and thermal resistance
Gap] value between parts change.
• [Perfect]:
When [Perfect] is selected, the temperature evaluation is performed with
the contact coefficient and thermal resistance set to 0.
• [Good]
• [Average] * Default
• [Poor]
In the [Perfect] > [Good] > [Average] > [Poor] order, the degree of adhesion
between parts changes from high to low.
The contact state between parts is modeled in the thermal equivalent

circuit as follows:
• [Stator-Case Gap]: Rsig
• [Coil-Stator Gap]: Rcu, ir
• [Coil-Case Gap]: Rew, ec
Example: Brushless motor (IPM) cross section

and thermal equivalent circuit
When [Advanced Settings] described later is selected, the contact coeffi-

cient and thermal resistance values between parts can be specified.
[Cooling Method] Select the motor cooling method from the following:
• [Natural] * Default
• [Forced]: Heat extraction using a cooling fan is modeled in the tempera-
ture evaluation.
• [Heat Extraction]: The specified amount of heat removed is used in the
temperature evaluation.
Select [Natural] to not use a cooling device in the temperature evalua-
tion.
184
[Fan Flow Rate, m/s] Specifies the cooling fan wind speed when [Forced] is selected for
[Cooling Method].
[Fan Flow Rate, m/s] is modeled in the thermal equivalent circuit as fol-
lows:
• [Fan Flow Rate, m/s]: Reca
Example: Brushless motor (IPM) thermal equivalent circuit

[Heat Extraction from When [Heat Extraction] is selected for [Cooling Method], specifies the
Rotor, W] amount of heat removed from the rotor.
The [Heat Extraction from Rotor] value is subtracted from the amount of
heat generated in the secondary conductors.
[Heat Extraction from When [Heat Extraction] is selected for [Cooling Method], specifies the
Stator, W] amount of heat removed from the stator.
The [Heat Extraction from Stator] value is subtracted from the amount of
heat generated in the coils.
 [Advanced Settings]
Select [Advanced Settings] when specifying the following parameters.
• Convection heat transfer coefficient
• Equivalent heat transfer coefficient of filling material
• Gap contact coefficient
• Thermal conductivity of each part
• Part (or gap, convection) thermal resistance
 [Detail (Coefficient)]
Select the checkbox for an input parameter to change its value. The text box to the right of the
checkbox becomes active.
[Natural Convection Heat Transfer If [Natural] is selected for [Cooling Method], the value spec-
Coefficient, W/(m^2K)] ified here is used.
[Forced Convection Heat Transfer Coef- If [Forced] is selected for [Cooling Method], this value is
ficient, W/(m^2K)] changed based on the [Fan Flow Rate, m/s] value.
[Stator Core-Case Gap] Specify the air gap coefficient of the gap between the stator
core and the case.
This value changes depending on the [Stator-Case Gap] set-
ting under [Setting].
185
[Filling Material Equivalent Heat Trans- If the motor contains resin or inorganic materials, specify the
fer Coefficient, W/(m K)] heat transfer coefficient of those materials.
[Coil-Case Contact Coefficient] This value changes depending on the [Coil-Case Gap] set-
ting under [Setting].
[Rotor Material Thermal Conductivity, Specify the material thermal conductivity of each part.
W/(m K)]
[Stator Material Thermal Conductivity,
W/(m K)]
[Coil Material Thermal Conductivity,
W/(m K)]
[Shaft Material Thermal Conductivity,
W/(m K)]
[Air Thermal Conductivity (External), Specify the thermal conductivity of the air outside or
W/(m K)] inside the case.
[Air Thermal Conductivity (Internal),
W/(m K)]
 [Detail (Thermal Resistance)]

Select the checkbox for an input parameter to change its value. The text box to the right of the
checkbox becomes active.
186
Variable name Parameter Description

Rsy1 [Outside Stator Yoke, K/W] Specify the thermal resistivity at each posi-
Rsy2 [Inside Stator Yoke, K/W] tion.
Rst [Stator Teeth, K/W] Those positions are modeled in the thermal
Rr [Rotor, K/W] equivalent circuit as shown below.
Rshf [Shaft, K/W]
R0 [Natural Convection, K/W]
Reca [Forced Convection, K/W]
Rew, ec [Stator Winding - External
Case, K/W]
Rcu, ir [Stator Copper - Stator Slot, K/
W]
Rsig [Stator Core - External Case, K/
W]
Rs, ag [Stator Teeth - Airgap, K/W]
Inner rotor brushless motor thermal
Rr, ag [Rotor-Airgap, K/W] equivalent circuit
Ria, ec [Internal Air - Endcap, K/W]
Rew, ia [Stator Winding - Inner Air, K/
W]
Outer rotor brushless motor thermal

equivalent circuit
Induction motor thermal equivalent circuit
[Correction] Tab
The [Correction] tab is displayed by selecting [Correction Factor] after running an evaluation of
characteristics. The correction factor can be set in this tab for materials, constants, and result values,
after running an evaluation of characteristics.
187
• At the top of the tree, the template label is displayed. Each correction factor is listed in the
treeview.
Notes
• The types of correction factor that can be set vary on the type of motor.
• The correction factor is divided into the following categories.
• [Material]:
The [Magnetic Body - Saturation] setting is specified for the entire magnetic material of all
motors. The [Magnet - Residual Flux Density] and [Magnet - Coercive Force] setting is spec-
ified for brushless motors and the entire magnetic material for brushless motors and brush
motors.
• [Constant]
• [Result Value]
• Rerunning an evaluation of characteristics is required when modifying the correction factor set in
[Material] and [Constant].
• The correction factor is saved in templates.
• The correction factor is saved in JCF files. The correction factor specified only in [Material] can
be used in JMAG-Designer.
Saving Templates for Correction Factor

The correction factor can be saved as a template.
MEMO For details about using a correction factor registered in the database on another computer, see
“Managing Data Registered in the Database” on page 304.
1. Select [Template] > [Register Template to Database] from the menu bar while the cor-
rection factor is set.
The [Register Template to Database] dialog is displayed.
2. Select either [All], [Material Correction Factor], [Constant Correction Factor], or [Result
Value Correction Factor] from [Save Target].
3. Specify [File Name] and [Description].
4. Click [OK].
MEMO Exporting a correction factor template to a file or importing a correction factor template
from a file, can be done in the [Manage Database] dialog. The [Manage Database] dialog is displayed
by selecting [Template] > [Manage Database].
Applying Templates for Correction Factor

Apply a correction factor template to a motor.
1. Click [Modify] on the right side of each category of the [Correction] tab.
The [Select Correction Factor] dialog is displayed.
2. Select the correction factor to apply to a motor from the [Correction Factor] list.
3. Click [OK].
A correction factor template is applied to a motor.
188
Design Parameters for a Brushless Motor

This section describes unique settings for the brushless motor in tabs.
MEMO For details on the procedures for entering motor specifications, see “Designing the Motor Using
a Template” on page 226.
[Winding] Tab
The [Winding] tab is displayed in the main window. The status and connection method for wind-
ings is specified in this tab.
MEMO The status windings set in the [Winding] tab can be confirmed in the [Motor Diagram] and
[Winding Diagram] tab of the graphics window.
[3], [6], or [9] can be selected.
• JMAG-RT models cannot be created when [9] is selected. For details on creating JMAG-RT
models, see “Exporting Evaluation Results for Control Circuit Simulation (JMAG-RT Models)”
on page 271.
 [Parallel Number], [Series Number]

In [Parallel Number], the divisors for the number of coils is displayed. For example, if the number of
slots is 24, '1, 2, 4, 8' is displayed. When [Parallel Number] is set, [Series Number] is automatically
determined.
MEMO When [Turns/Wire Size], [Turns/Slot-Fill Factor], or [Wire Size/Slot-Fill Factor] for [Input
Item] under [Coil Property] is selected, the phase resistance is calculated taking into account whether the
coils are in series or parallel.
 [Coil Property]
See the “[Winding] Tab (Shared)” on page 177.
 [Winding]
Set the winding method of the coil. Status of winding is displayed in the [Motor Diagram] tab on
the right once the winding method of the coil is determined.
189
How to set the winding method

Method Description
[Automatic] The winding method is determined based on the coil pitch.
[Automatic (Concentrated Winding)] This is a winding method with coil pitch as “1” and number
of layers as “2.”
[Manual] Set any winding method using [Edit Phase] and the winding
table described later.
[Coil Pitch]
the diagram below.
[Edit Phase], winding table

First, select a phase in [Edit Phase].
Next, enter ID of the slot where each coil enters and exits in the winding table. Slot ID is assigned in
a counter clockwise direction. Specify ID of the slot where a coil penetrates upward vertically to the
graphics window in the [Go] column. Specify ID of the slot where a coil penetrates downward verti-
cally to the graphics window in the [Return] column.
Example
[Phase Order]
The displacement method for the U, V, and W phase can be selected. Switching the phase order
changes the rotation direction of the rotating magnetic field.
• [UWV]:
At the current flow timing, V-phase shifts by -120 degrees and W-phase shifts by +120 degrees in
reference to the U-phase.
190
I u = I ⋅ sin ( 2πft + θ )
I v = I ⋅ sin ( 2πft + θ – 2π ⁄ 3 )
I w = I ⋅ sin ( 2πft + θ + 2π ⁄ 3 )
f : Frequency (Hz), t : Time (s), θ : Phase (rad)
• [UVW]:
At the current flow timing, V-phase shifts by +120 degrees and W-phase shifts by -120 degrees in
I u = I ⋅ sin ( 2πft + θ )
I v = I ⋅ sin ( 2πft + θ + 2π ⁄ 3 )
I w = I ⋅ sin ( 2πft + θ – 2 π ⁄ 3 )
f :Frequency (Hz), t :Time (s), θ :Phase (rad)
[Drive] Tab
This tab specifies a motor power source when running an evaluation of characteristics in a brushless
motor.
MEMO For details, see “Running a Characteristics Evaluation” on page 238.
 [Circuit Property]
Select a drive mode from the [Mode] list, and then enter each parameter.
There are three drive mode types as follows:
The drive mode selection pertains to the control method and the evaluation axis (the X-axis of the
evaluation results graph displayed from performing a characteristic evaluation).
191
Drive mode Description

Current Select this mode when evaluating the performance of a sinusoidal driven motor with
current control. When [Current] is selected, the following evaluation results graphs
can be obtained. For the X-axis, the physical quantity selected for [X-axis] is entered.
• X-axis vs torque (or efficiency, output, copper loss, iron loss, line voltage (ampli-
tude), power factor, phase voltage (RMS), line voltage (RMS))
• Slot number vs magnetomotive force distribution
In this mode, set the following parameters.

• [Line Current (Amp), A]
• [Current Phase, deg]:
This parameter is displayed when [Line Current (Amp), A] or [Revolution Speed,
rpm] is selected for [X-axis]. Specify a value between -180 degrees and +180
degrees inclusive. The default value is 0 degrees.
• [Current Phase Range Upper, deg], [Current Phase Range Lower, deg]:
Displayed when [Current Phase, deg] is selected for [X-axis]. For both, specify a
value between -180 degrees and +180 degrees inclusive. The default value for
[Current Phase Range Upper, deg] is 90 degrees, and the default value for [Current
Phase Range Lower, deg] is 0 degrees.
• [Revolution Speed, rpm]:
Enter the rated revolution speed.
• [X-axis] (evaluation axis):
For the X-axis of the evaluation results graph, select [Line Current (peak), A],
[Current Phase, deg], or [Revolution Speed, rpm].
192

Voltage (Sin) Select this mode when evaluating the performance of a sinusoidal driven motor with
voltage control. When [Voltage (Sin)] is selected, the following evaluation results
graphs can be obtained. For the X-axis, the physical quantity selected for [X-axis] is
entered.
• X-axis vs torque (or efficiency, output, copper loss, iron loss, phase current (RMS),
power factor, phase voltage (RMS), line voltage (RMS))

• [Line Voltage (peak), V]
• [Current Phase, deg]:
This parameter is displayed when [Line Voltage (Amp), V] or [Revolution Speed,
• [Current Phase Range Upper, deg], [Current Phase Range Lower, deg]:
Displayed when [Current Phase, deg] is selected for [X-axis]. For both, specify a
value between -180 degrees and +180 degrees inclusive. The default value for
[Current Phase Range Upper, deg] is 90 degrees, and the default value for [Current
Phase Range Lower, deg] is 0 degrees.
Enter the rated revolution speed. There is no [Revolution Speed, rpm] setting
when [Revolution Speed, rpm] is selected for [X-axis] described later.
• [Maximum Line Current (peak), A]
Select [Line Voltage (Amp), V], [Current Phase, deg], or [Revolution Speed, rpm]
for the X-axis for the evaluation results graph. When [Revolution Speed, rpm] is
selected, the revolution speed range is determined in JMAG-Express Classic.
193

Voltage (120 Select this mode when evaluating the performance of a 120-degree conduction mode
deg) (rectangular wave drive) motor. When [Voltage (120deg)] is selected, the following
evaluation results graphs can be obtained. For the X-axis, the physical quantity
selected for [X-axis] is entered.
• X-axis vs torque (or efficiency, output, copper loss, iron loss, phase current (RMS),
power factor, phase voltage (RMS), line voltage (RMS))

• [DC Voltage, V]
• [Advance Phase Angle, deg]:
This parameter is displayed when [Line Voltage (Amp), V] or [Revolution Speed,
• [Advance Phase Angle Range Upper, deg], [Advance Phase Angle Range Lower,
deg]:
Displayed when [Advance Phase Angle, deg] is selected for [X-axis]. For both,
specify a value between -180 degrees and +180 degrees inclusive. The default value
for [Advance Phase Angle Range Upper, deg] is 90 degrees, and the default value
for [Advance Phase Angle Range Lower, deg] is 0 degrees.
• [Maximum Line Current (peak), A]
Enter the rated revolution speed. There is no [Revolution Speed, rpm] setting
when [Revolution Speed, rpm] is selected for [X-axis] described later.
Select [Line Voltage (Amp), V], [Advance Phase Angle, deg], or [Revolution
Speed, rpm] for the X-axis for the evaluation results graph. When [Revolution
Speed, rpm] is selected, the revolution speed range is determined in JMAG-
Express Classic.
MEMO Enter the values shown in the following diagram for [Line Current (Amp), A] and [Line Voltage
(Amp), V].
Left: Star connection, Right: Delta connection

(V: Line Voltage (V), Vp: Phase Voltage (V), l: Line Current (A), lp: Phase Current (A))
MEMO When evaluating characteristics, output is produced for 10 equally spaced values for the param-
eter selected from the [X-axis] list.
However, data points with negative efficiency values are not displayed for efficiency evaluation results
graphs.
194
Furthermore, if the following conditions are satisfied, output is produced for 20 equally spaced values for
the parameter selected from the [X-axis] list.
• [Current Phase] or [Advance Phase Angle] is selected in the [X-axis] list
• [Current Phase Range Upper, deg] - [Current Phase Range Lower, deg] > 180 degrees
(or [Advance Phase Angle Range Upper, deg] - [Advance Phase Angle Range Lower, deg] > 180
degrees)
 [Do Not Use Adaptive Analysis]

This setting is used to perform a detailed analysis of a designed motor with JMAG-Designer, or
when exporting a JCF file. This setting is not used for a characteristics evaluation. For details, see
“Exporting Designed Motors to a File” on page 276 and “Sending Designed Motors to JMAG-
Designer” on page 279.
195
Design Parameters for an Induction Motor

This section describes unique settings for the induction motor in tabs.
• [Winding] Tab (Multi-phase Induction Motor (Three-phase/Six-phase/Nine-phase)) (page 196)
• [Winding] Tab (Single-phase Induction Motor) (page 198)
[Winding] Tab (Multi-phase Induction Motor (Three-phase/Six-phase/Nine-

phase))
The [Winding] tab is displayed in the main window. The status and connection method for wind-
ings is specified in this tab.
MEMO The status windings set in the [Winding] tab can be confirmed in the [Motor Diagram] and
[Winding Diagram] tab of the graphics window.
[3], [6], or [9] can be selected.
• JMAG-RT models cannot be created when [6] or [9] is selected. For details on creating JMAG-
RT models, see “Exporting Evaluation Results for Control Circuit Simulation (JMAG-RT Mod-
els)” on page 271.
 [Parallel Number], [Series Number]

In [Parallel Number], the divisors for the number of coils is displayed. For example, if the number of
slots is 24, '1, 2, 4, 8' is displayed. When [Parallel Number] is set, [Series Number] is automatically
determined.
MEMO When [Turns/Wire Size], [Turns/Slot-Fill Factor], or [Wire Size/Slot-Fill Factor] for [Input
Item] under [Coil Property] is selected, the phase resistance is calculated taking into account whether the
coils are in series or parallel.
 [Coil Property]
See the“[Winding] Tab (Shared)” on page 177.
196
 [Winding]

Type Description
[Automatic] The winding method is determined based on the coil pitch.
[Manual] Set any winding method using [Edit Phase] and the winding
table described later.
[Coil Pitch]
the diagram below.

First, select a phase in [Edit Phase]. Next, enter ID of the slot where each coil enters and exits in the
winding table. Slot ID is assigned in a counter clockwise direction. Specify ID of the slot where a
coil penetrates upward vertically to the graphics window in the [Go] column. Specify ID of the slot
where a coil penetrates downward vertically to the graphics window in the [Return] column.
[Phase Order]
The displacement method for the U, V, and W phase can be selected. Switching the phase order
changes the rotation direction of the rotating magnetic field.
• [UWV]:
At the current flow timing, V-phase shifts by -120 degrees and W-phase shifts by +120 degrees in
197
I u = I ⋅ sin ( 2πft + θ )
I v = I ⋅ sin ( 2πft + θ – 2π ⁄ 3 )
I w = I ⋅ sin ( 2πft + θ + 2π ⁄ 3 )
f : Frequency (Hz), t : Time (s), θ : Phase (rad)
• [UVW]:
At the current flow timing, V-phase shifts by +120 degrees and W-phase shifts by -120 degrees in
I u = I ⋅ sin ( 2πft + θ )
I v = I ⋅ sin ( 2πft + θ + 2π ⁄ 3 )
I w = I ⋅ sin ( 2πft + θ – 2 π ⁄ 3 )
f : Frequency (Hz), t :Time (s), θ :Phase (rad)
[Winding] Tab (Single-phase Induction Motor)

MEMO The status of winding set in the [Winding] tab can be confirmed in the [Motor Diagram] tab
and [Winding Diagram] tab of the graphics window.
MEMO The connection method of coil only supports series for single-phase induction motors.
 [Coil Property]
 [Winding]

Type Description
[Automatic] Set the winding method based on the [Number of Coils
per Pole].
[Manual] Set any winding method using the winding table
described later.
Winding table
The winding table is specified when [Manual] is selected as the setting method of winding coils.
Enter ID of the slot where each coil enters and exits in the winding table. Slot ID is assigned in a
counter clockwise direction. Specify ID of the slot where a coil penetrates upward vertically to the
198
[Drive] Tab
This tab specifies a motor power source when running an evaluation of characteristics in a induction
motor.
The voltage source and cage component needs to be specified for an induction motor.

Voltage Source Specify the following parameters for a single-phase induction motor.
• [Rated Voltage (RMS), V]
• [Frequency, Hz]
Three-phase Voltage Source For induction motors (3 phase, 6 phase, 9 phase), specify the follow-
ing parameters.
• [Phase Voltage (Amp), V]
• [Frequency, Hz]
Represents a three-phase AC voltage. With reference to the phase of
the U-phase, the V-phase is -120 degrees and the W-phase is +120
degrees.
 [Revolution Speed], [Do Not Use Adaptive Analysis]

These settings are used to perform a detailed analysis of a designed motor with JMAG-Designer, or
when exporting a JCF file. This setting cannot be used for a characteristics evaluation. For details,
see “Exporting Designed Motors to a File” on page 276 and “Sending Designed Motors to JMAG-
199
Design Parameters for a Switched Reluctance Motor

This section describes unique settings for the switched reluctance motor in tabs.
[Winding] Tab
 [Phases]
Either three-phase, four-phase, or five-phase can be selected.
 [Coil Connection]
Select one of the following for the connection status of each coil.
Type Description
[Series] Connects all the coils in series.
[Parallel] Connects all the coils in parallel.
MEMO The phase resistance accounting for series/parallel of the coil is calculated when either [Wire
Size/Slot Fill Factor], [Turns/Slot Fill Factor], or [Wire Size/Slot Fill Factor] is selected in [Input Item] of
[Coil Property].
 [Coil Property]
 [Winding]

Type Description
[Manual] Set the arbitrary winding method using [Edit Phase] and the
winding table described later.

First, select a phase in [Edit Phase].
200
Next, enter ID of the slot where each coil enters and exits in the winding table. Slot ID is assigned in
a counter clockwise direction. Specify ID of the slot where a coil penetrates upward vertically to the
Example: Three-phase switched reluctance motor

(Winding property for A-phase coil)
[Drive] Tab
This tab specifies a motor power source when running an evaluation of characteristics in a switched
reluctance motor.
Specify the power supply and the applied voltage timing when setting the switched reluctance
motor.
Components of drive
Description
circuit
DC Voltage, V Enter the applied voltage for direct current.
Voltage Application Start Specify the timing to start applying voltage by an angle. This setting is spec-
Angle, deg ified when the salient poles for the rotor and stator in a position where they
are not facing each other is specified at 0 degrees.
Voltage Application Specify the timing to stop applying voltage in the rotational displacement
Width (Mechanical for a rotor, from, the applied voltage start position.
angle), deg
Maximum Current, A Enter the maximum value of the electric current flowing in a coil when volt-
age is applied.
Revolution Speed, rpm Enter the maximum revolution speed.

This setting is used to perform a detailed analysis of a designed motor with JMAG-Designer, or
when exporting a JCF file. This setting is not used for a characteristics evaluation. For details, see
“Exporting Designed Motors to a File” on page 276 and “Sending Designed Motors to JMAG-
201
Design Parameters for a Brush Motor

This section describes unique settings for the brush motor in tabs.
[Winding] Tab
 [Winding System]
Select either [Lap Winding] or [Wave Winding].
Type Description
[Lap Winding] When [Lap Winding] is selected, each coil exits from a com-
mutator and passes over as many slots as specified in [Coil
Pitch] and connects to the next commutator.
[Wave Winding] When [Wave Winding] is selected, each coil exits from a com-
Pitch] and connects to the commutator that is the number of
commutators away that is specified in [Commutator Bar
Pitch].
 [Coil Property]
 [Coil Pitch]
the diagram below.
 [Commutator Bar Pitch]

Specify [Commutator Bar Pitch] when [Wave Winding] is selected for [Winding System].
202
Each coil that exits from a commutator passes over as many slots as specified in [Coil Pitch] and
connects to the commutator that is the number of commutators away that is specified in [Commu-
tator Bar Pitch].
[Drive] Tab
This tab specifies a motor current source when running an evaluation of characteristics in a brush
motor.
 [Drive]
Specify the properties for the brush and commutator.
Components of drive circuit Description

DC Voltage, V Enter the rated voltage.
Rated Current, A Enter the rated current. The rated current is used to calculate the
contact resistance between the brush and the commutator.
(Contact resistance of brush) = (contact voltage drop)/(rated
current)
Contact Voltage Drop, V Enter the voltage drop caused by the contact resistance of the
brush when the brush and the commutator segment are in com-
plete contact. The contact voltage drop is used to calculate the
contact resistance between the brush and the commutator.
(Contact resistance of brush) = (contact voltage drop)/(rated
current)
Slit Width between Segments, deg Enter the width between commutator segments by angle.
Brush Width, deg Enter the brush width in degrees.
Lead Angle, deg Set [Lead Angle, deg] to add an advance angle to the motor. The
positive direction of the lead angle is the reverse direction rotat-
ing the motor.
Brush width
Brush
Slit width between segment
Rotation
direction
Lead angle
Commutator

203
Design Parameters for an Externally Excited Synchronous Machine

This section explains parameters in the main window specific to an externally excited synchronous
machine.
• [Winding] Tab, [Field Coil] Tab (page 204)
MEMO For details on the procedures for entering motor specifications, see “Common Design Parame-
ters” on page 162.
[Winding] Tab, [Field Coil] Tab

In the [Winding] tab in the main window, specify the status of the main winding and connection
method for the stator side. In the [Field Coil] tab, specify the status of the field winding and connec-
tion method for the rotor side.
For an externally excited synchronous machine, settings in the [Winding] and [Field Coil] tabs are
the same as a brushless motor. See “[Winding] Tab (Shared)” on page 177 and “[Winding] Tab” on
page 189.
[Drive] Tab
Set the motor power source to be used for characteristics evaluation in the [Drive] tab of the main
window. For an externally excited synchronous machine, some of the settings in the [Drive] tab are
the same as a brushless motor.
 [Drive Circuit]
The parameters to be displayed additionally depending on the item from [Mode] and [X-axis] are
the same as a brushless motor. For details, see “[Drive] Tab” on page 191.
 [Field Current, A]
Enter the direct current value to be applied to the rotor-side field coil.

This setting is used to calculate a designed motor in detail with JMAG-Designer or to export it to a
JCF file. For details, see “Exporting Designed Motors to a File” on page 276 and “Sending
Designed Motors to JMAG-Designer” on page 279.
204
Design Parameters for a Wound-field AC Synchronous Machine and

Claw Pole Alternator
This section explains parameters in the main window specific to a wound-field AC synchronous
machine and claw pole alternator.
• [Winding] Tab, [Field Coil] Tab (page 205)
MEMO For details on the procedures for entering motor specifications, see “Common Design Parame-
ters” on page 162.
[Winding] Tab, [Field Coil] Tab

In the [Winding] tab in the main window, specify the status of the main winding and connection
method for the stator side. In the [Field Coil] tab, specify the status of the field winding and connec-
tion method for the rotor side.
For a wound-field AC synchronous machine and a claw pole alternator, some of the settings in the
[Winding] and [Field Coil] tabs are the same as a brushless motor. See “[Winding] Tab (Shared)” on
page 177 and “[Winding] Tab” on page 189.
[Drive] Tab
Set the motor power source to be used for characteristics evaluation in the [Drive] tab of the main
window.
 [Drive Circuit]
Type the following parameters.
[Rated Voltage, V] The rated voltage (effective value) for the stator-side coil. Specify
the line voltage value. This value is used as the reference for volt-
age (p.u) of the evaluation results graph.
[Rated Short Circuit Current, The rated short circuit current (effective) for the stator-side coil.
A] Specify the line current value. This value is used as the reference
for voltage (p.u) of the evaluation results graph.
[Maximum Field Current, A] The maximum current value that passes through the rotor-side
field coil.
[Revolution Speed, rpm] The rated revolution speed to be evaluated.
[Power Factor Angle, deg] The phase difference between the stator voltage and stator cur-
rent. This value is used for creating the phase diagram.
[Stator Voltage, V] The phase voltage (effective value) for the stator side. This value
is used for creating the phase diagram.
[Stator Current, A] The phase current (effective value) for the stator side. This value
is used for creating the phase diagram.
205

This setting is used to calculate a designed motor in detail with JMAG-Designer or to export it to a
JCF file. For details, see “Exporting Designed Motors to a File” on page 276 and “Sending
Designed Motors to JMAG-Designer” on page 279.
206
Design Parameters for a Universal Motor

This section describes unique settings for the universal motor in tabs.
[Winding] Tab
 [Winding System]
Select either [Lap Winding] or [Wave Winding].
Type Description
[Lap Winding] When [Lap Winding] is selected, each coil exits from a com-
Pitch] and connects to the next commutator.
[Wave Winding] When [Wave Winding] is selected, each coil exits from a com-
Pitch] and connects to the commutator that is the number of
commutators away that is specified in [Commutator Bar
Pitch].
 [Coil Property]
See “[Winding] Tab (Shared)” on page 177.
 [Coil Pitch]
the diagram below.
 [Commutator Bar Pitch]

Specify [Commutator Bar Pitch] when [Wave Winding] is selected for [Winding System].
207
Each coil that exits from a commutator passes over as many slots as specified in [Coil Pitch] and
connects to the commutator that is the number of commutators away that is specified in [Commu-
tator Bar Pitch].
[Drive] Tab
This tab is available in the main window.
The power supply and connection can be set for the circuit. The template name is displayed at the
top, and each component and setting items of a circuit are listed in the treeview.
 [Universal Motor Power Supply]

Sets the brush and commutator components for a universal motor.
• [DC Voltage, V]:
For [Voltage], specify the value of the direct current voltage applied to the universal motor.
• [Rated Current, A]
• [Contact Voltage Drop, V]
• [Slit Width between Segments, deg]
• [Brush Width, deg]
• [Lead Angle, deg]
• [Number of Turns of Field of Field Coil]/[Field Coil Resistance (ohm)]:
The [Field Coil Resistance] and [Number of Turns of Field of Field Coil] settings are applied to
the coils of the stator displayed in the [Dimensions] tab.
MEMO The number of brushes to be set is two.

208
Parameters During Creating and Editing Templates

This section describes parameters to specify when creating and editing templates in the template edi-
tor window.
• [Model] Tab (page 209)
• [Constraint] Tab (Constraint/Feature) (page 215)
• [Preview] Tab (page 221)
[Model] Tab
The following settings are specified in the [Model] tab in the template editor window.
• Part configuration (stator core, coil, rotor core, cage, shaft, etc.)
• Material types applied to each part (magnetic material, magnet, coil, non-magnetic material,
etc.)
• Boundary edge (Edge set with Rotation Periodic Boundary condition)
• Display/hide edges in the [Model] tab of the main window
• d-axis direction (pole direction) *For brushless motors, brush motors, externally excited synchro-
nous machines, and wound-field AC synchronous machines
• Teeth position *For switched reluctance motors
• Sets *For switched reluctance motors
MEMO Some of the parameters in the [Model] tab are different when clicking [Import DXF File] in the
template window and opening the template editor window. For details, see “Evaluating Geometries Cre-
ated in commercial CAD software with JMAG-Express Classic” on page 290.
[Parts]
Add and remove parts which compose the template, set material types applied to each part, and link
part characteristics to geometry.
• To add parts, click [Add] .
• To delete parts, select the part from the tree and click [Delete] .
209
• Selecting each part from the tree allows the part's properties to be set.
After setting the properties, click [Apply] in the lower part of the [Model] tab. When another
item in the tree is clicked before clicking [Apply], the settings are not applied.
The parameters which can be set as part properties are as follows:
 [Name]
Enter the part name.
 [Material Type]
Select the type of material to be applied to the part. The following materials can be chosen from.
• [Magnetic Material]:
For materials specified as a [Magnetic Material], the material and iron loss correction factor can
be specified in the [Materials] tab in the main window.
• [Magnet]:
For materials specified as a [Magnet], the material, magnetization pattern, and temperature cor-
rection factor can be specified in the [Materials] tab in the main window.
• [Coil]:
For materials specified as a [Coil], the electric conductivity, and density can be specified in the
[Materials] tab in the main window.
• [Cage]:
For materials specified as a [Cage], the electric conductivity and density can be specified in the
• [Non-magnetic Material]:
For materials specified as a [Non-magnetic Material], the electric conductivity and density can be
specified in the [Materials] tab in the main window.
• [Field Coil]:
For parts with [Field Coil] selected, the electric conductivity and density can be specified in the
• [Damper Bar]:
For parts with [Damper Bar] selected, the electric conductivity and density can be specified in
the [Materials] tab in the main window.
• [Air]
MEMO When geometry created in JMAG-Designer is imported into JMAG-Express Classic in the JCF
format, the material types set in JMAG-Designer are inherited and shown in the JMAG-Express Classic
tree.
 [Target Regions]
Specify which regions of the geometry apply to the part.
• Clicking the [Target Regions] list changes the background color to pink. The region can now be
selected from the [Editor] tab.
• To remove a selection from [Target Regions], select a region in the [Target Regions] list, and then
press the [Delete] key on the keyboard.
 [Coil Layer1], [Coil Layer2]

When [Material Type] is set to [Coil] or [Field Coil], specify the regions corresponding to [Coil Lay-
er1] and [Coil Layer2]. The procedures are the same as [Target Regions].
210
MEMO To express the inflow/outflow of the current to each coil in JMAG-Express Classic, divide one
coil into two regions. To use two regions composed of one coil as one region, select [1] from the [Layers]
list in the [Winding] tab in the main window.
 [Magnetization Pattern (Parallel)], [Magnetization Pattern (Radial)]

When [Material Type] is [Magnet], specify the method to determine the magnetization direction of
the magnet.
For parallel magnetization patterns

Click [Magnetization Pattern (Parallel)] , and select one of the following specification methods.
Default Determines the magnetization direction automatically based on the
number of poles. The magnetization direction of the first pole is
arranged at (360/(number of poles*2) degrees counter-clockwise from
the X-axis and is outward.
Edge Direction The [Edge Direction] setting is used when [Magnetization Pattern] is
set to [Parallel] in the [Materials] tab in the main window.
Specify the standard edge (line). The magnetization direction is set as
parallel to that edge. To change the magnetization direction to the
opposite direction of the arrows shown in the window, select [Reverse
Direction].
Normal Line The [Normal Line] setting is used when [Magnetization Pattern] is set
to [Parallel] in the [Materials] tab in the main window.
Specify the standard edge (line). The magnetization direction is set as
perpendicular to that edge. To change the magnetization direction to
the opposite direction of the arrows shown in the window, select
[Reverse Direction].
For radial magnetization patterns

Click [Magnetization Pattern (Radial)] , and select one of the following specification methods.
Default The magnetization direction is determined automatically based on the
number of poles.
The magnetization direction of the first pole is set so that it spreads
radially from the center point.
Entity The [Entity] setting is used when [Magnetization Pattern] is set to
[Radial] in the [Materials] tab in the main window.
Specify the standard vertex and edge (arc). The magnetization direc-
tion is set radially from the vertex (or center point of an arc). To
change the magnetization direction to the opposite direction of the
arrows shown in the window, select [Reverse Direction].
 [Number of Bars]
When [Material Type] is set to [Cage], specify the number of bars.
211
[Boundary Edge]
[Boundary Edge] is used for partial modeling during a characteristics evaluation and JCF file out-
put.
During partial modeling, the Rotation Periodic Boundary condition is set for the edge set to
[Boundary Edge].
• Clicking the [Target Edge] list changes the background color to pink. The edge (line) can now be
• Specify the edge on the X-axis for a stator.
• For the rotor, specify the edge in the radial direction which is positioned on the clock-wise
side, looking from the center line of the region.
Center line of the region
Center line of the region
Target edge of [Boundary Edge]

Setting examples of a boundary edge for a rotor
MEMO When specifying multiple edges as [Target Edge], they all must be positioned on identical
lines.
• To remove a selection from [Target Edge], select an edge in the [Target Edge] list, and then press
the [Delete] key on the keyboard.
After performing these settings, click [Apply] in the lower part of the [Model] tab. When another
[Hidden Edges]
Edges set as [Hidden Edges] will no longer be shown in the [Motor Diagram] tab of the main win-
dow.
When creating a user-defined template, use JMAG-Designer's Geometry Editor or other commer-
cial CAD software to create a rotor with one pole and stator with one slot, and then import it into
JMAG-Express Classic. By copying the rotor with one pole or stator with one slot in the circumfer-
ential direction in JMAG-Express Classic, the motor can be displayed as a full model in the [Motor
Diagram] tab in the main window.
For motors that are not specified to hide edges, excessive edges are shown in the [Motor Diagram]
tab, as shown in the bottom-left image. By appropriately setting edges as hidden, only the boundary
edges of parts are shown in the [Motor Diagram] tab, as shown in the bottom-right image.
212
• Clicking the [Target Edge] list changes the background color to pink. The edge can now be
MEMO Lines not belonging to a region can be handled as auxiliary lines in JMAG-Express Classic.
Constraints can be set to auxiliary lines. However, auxiliary lines cannot be shown in the [Motor Dia-
gram] in the main window.
[d-Axis]
When the pole direction is different than the default for brushless motors, brush motors, externally
excited synchronous machines, or wound-field AC synchronous machines, specify the pole direction
with [d-Axis]. The default pole direction is the rotated position in (360/(No. poles*2)) degrees
counterclockwise from the X-axis.
The initial position (position an angle of 0 degrees) is determined based on the specified d-axis
direction.
• Clicking the [Target Edge] list changes the background color to pink. The edge can now be
selected from the [Editor] tab. The specified edge (line) is set as the d-axis direction.
[Teeth Position]
[Teeth Position] is set for a rotor (sr_motor) and stator (sr_stator) of a switched reluctance motor.
This setting can be used during a characteristics evaluation.
Specify a vertex positioned in the center of the salient pole of the rotor or stator. The facing position
of the salient pole of the rotor and stator is determined based on the specified vertex.
• Clicking the [Target Vertex] list changes the background color to pink. The vertex can now be
• To remove a selection from [Target Vertex], select a vertex in the [Target Vertex] list, and then
press the [Delete] key on the keyboard.
213
Example: SR motor ([Teeth Position] is specified for the vertex in arrow)
item in the tree is clicked be-fore clicking [Apply], the settings are not applied.
[Sets]
[Sets] is set for the edges of the rotor (sr_rotor) and the stator (sr_stator) of a switched reluctance
motor.
Sets are a function for grouping multiple regions (or edges and vertices).
MEMO Sets created in JMAG-Express Classic can be read by JMAG-Designer by using a JCF file.
Perform the following to create and edit sets.

• To create a set, select [Sets] from the tree in the [Model] tab, and then right-click. To create
region sets, select [Add New Region Set]. Similarly, Select [Add New Edge Set] for an edge set,
and [Add New Vertex Set] for a vertex set.
• To modify a set, click the set to be edited in the tree in the [Model] tab. The parameters are dis-
played below.
• To delete a set, right-click the set to be deleted in the tree in the [Model] tab. Select [Delete].
Set parameter are as follows. After performing each setting, click [Apply] in the lower part of the
[Model] tab. When another item in the tree is clicked before clicking [Apply], the settings are not
applied.
 [Set Name]
Enter a name.
 [Target Entities]
Specify regions (or edges and vertices) included in a set.
• Clicking the [Target Entities] list changes the background color to pink. The region (or edge/ver-
tex) can now be selected from the [Editor] tab.
• To remove a selection from [Target Entities], select a region (or edge/vertex) in the [Target Enti-
ties] list, and then press the [Delete] key on the keyboard.
 [Include Entities on Copied Regions]

The minimum periodic pattern of the model geometry is displayed in the template editor window.
The entire geometry is created by running a rotation copy for the minimum periodic pattern in
JMAG-Express Classic.
214
Select [Include Entities on Copied Regions] by copying the geometry pattern displayed in the [Edi-
tor] tab to include in the 'set' for regions (or edges or vertices).
[Constraint] Tab (Constraint/Feature)

Constraints or features for the geometry are set in the [Constraint] tab of the template editor win-
dow. Constraints and features are settings required for changing the dimensions in JMAG-Express
Classic.
Settings of constraints and features are displayed as variables (dimensional parameters) in the
[Dimensions] tab of the main window.
Left: [Constraint] tab of the template editor window

Right: [Dimensions] tab of the main window
Constraints and features do not need to be set when dimensions are not changed in JMAG-Express
Classic.
List of constraints or features that are already set are displayed in the tree of the [Constraint] tab.
• Click [Add] when setting new constraints or features.
• Click [Delete] when deleting constraints or features.
• Click the up and down arrow buttons to modify the order of application on the geometry
of the constraints or features.
Notes
• Constraints do not need to be set when changes are not made to dimensions in JMAG-Express
Classic.
• When the part scale feature is used, the size in the radial direction of the entire rotor or stator can
be controlled. However, the part scale feature cannot be used with other constraints.
• When there are more than enough constraints set on a template, dimensions may not be changed
appropriately in the [Dimensions] tab of the main window. When not enough constraints are
215
set, the geometry may become deformed during dimension change. Modify constraints accord-
ingly when a message is displayed informing that there are too many constraints or not enough
constraints.
• [OUTD: Outer Diameter] is not displayed in the [Dimensions] tab of the main window unless a
diameter constraint which displays the entire outer diameter is not set on a template. Specify the
diameter constraint in the [Constraint] tab when setting [OUTD: Outer Diameter].
• [GAP: Gap Length] is not displayed in the [Dimensions] tab of the main window unless a diam-
eter constraint which displays the outer diameter of a stator is not set in the template of an inner
rotor motor. This also applies when the diameter constraint for the outer diameter of a rotor is
not set in the template of an outer rotor motor.
Specify the diameter constraint in the [Constraint] tab when setting [GAP: Gap Length].
• [GAP: Gap Length] is not displayed in the [Dimensions] tab of the main window unless a diam-
eter constraint which displays the inner diameter of a stator and the outer diameter of a rotor is
not set in the template of an inner rotor motor. This also applies when the diameter constraint
which displays the inner diameter of a rotor and the outer diameter of a stator is set in the tem-
plate of the outer rotor motor. Specify the diameter constraint in the [Constraint] tab when set-
ting [GAP: Gap Length].
• Specify which variable (diameter constraint) is to display the inner diameter of a stator and the
outer diameter of a rotor (or the inner diameter of a rotor, outer diameter of stator) in the [Preset
Sizing] dialog.
Types of constraints
The types of constraints are as follows:
MEMO For details about the constraints for the Geometry Editor, see the “JMAG User's Manual
Parameter Explanation Edition” and “Operations Edition”.
Constraint Target Variable Description
Angle Two lines Angle Constrains the angle of two lines.
• [Double Angle] can be selected to make
the angle half the variable value.
• The angle of two lines can be defined to a
center angle, half the center angle, or a
rectangle.
• The third line becomes the center line
when it is selected.
Radius/Diame- Circle, Arc Radius/ Constrains radius/diameter of a circle or an
ter Diameter arc.
Parallelity Two lines N/A Constrains the position so that two lines
always remain parallel.
Distance Two targets from verti- Distance Constrains the distance between two tar-
ces, lines, arcs, or cir- gets.
cles • [Double Distance] can be selected which
constraints distance half the variable.
• The third line becomes the center line
when it is selected and the target is a line.
Concentric Two circles, two arcs, N/A Constrains the position so that the center is
the combination of a always coincident between two circles or
circle and an arc arcs.
216
Constraint Target Variable Description

Fixation All vertices, lines, cir- N/A Constrains so that the length, size, and loca-
cles, and arcs tion of a shape is fixed.
Coincident Combination of a ver- N/A Constrains the position of the vertex so that
tex and a line, a vertex it is on a line (arc or circle) or the extension
and an arc, a vertex of the line.
and a circle
Tangency Two circles, two arcs, N/A Constrains so that two lines are always in
the combination of a contact.
circle and a line, an arc
and a line, an arc and a
circle
Fillet Three lines that are Fillet radius Constrains so that three lines construct a fil-
continuous (line - arc - let.
line)
Chamfer Three lines that are Angle and Constrains so that three lines construct a
continuous distance of chamfer.
chamfer
Horizontality Line N/A Constrains a line horizontally parallel to the
X-axis.
Verticality Line N/A Constrains a line vertically to the X-axis.
Perpendicularity Two lines N/A Constrains two lines to remain vertical.
Types of features
The types of features are as follows:
MEMO For details about the constraints for the Geometry Editor, see “JMAG User's Manual Parameter
Explanation Edition” and “Operations Edition”.
Feature Target Variable Description
Region Fillet Two lines that are con- Fillet radius Specifies a fillet between two lines.
tinuous or one line and This feature is inherited even when import-
one arc that is continu- ing a motor designed in JMAG-Express
ous Classic in the Geometry Editor of JMAG-
Designer.
Region Chamfer Two lines that are con- Length and Specifies a chamfer between two lines.
tinuous or one line and angle of This feature is inherited even when import-
one arc that is continu- chamfer ing a motor designed in JMAG-Express
ous Classic in the Geometry Editor of JMAG-
Designer.
Region Radial Region, feature Angle and Positions a region in the circumferential
Pattern number of direction around the vertex or origin. It is
copies possible to specify a feature as the target to
be copied.
This feature is inherited even when import-
ing a motor designed in JMAG-Express
Classic in the Geometry Editor of JMAG-
Designer.
217

Region Mirror Region, feature Line that is Regions are positioned in symmetry on a
Copy symmetric center axis. It is possible to specify a feature
axis as the target to be copied.
This feature is inherited even when import-
ing a motor designed in JMAG-Express
Classic in the Geometry Editor of JMAG-
Designer.
Boolean for Two regions N/A Runs Boolean operations on regions with
Regions duplicate areas.
• When [Union] is used, two regions are
merged into one region, and it becomes
one region.
• When [Subtraction] is used, the two
regions are left unchanged, but because
the duplicate area is removed from one of
the regions, the duplicate state is resolved.
• When [Subtraction] is used and [Delete
Regions] is selected, the region to subtract
is removed along with the duplicate area,
and only the region to be subtracted from
remains.
• When [Intersection] is used, only the
duplicate area of the two regions is kept,
and the rest is removed.
From left to right: Original figure (Overlapping regions), region with [Union] selected,
region with [Subtraction] selected, region with [Subtraction] and [Delete Regions] selected, region
with [Intersection] selected
218

Part Scale 1 or 2 vertices Distance Controls the size in the radial direction of
the entire rotor or stator.
The size of the entire rotor and stator will
extend or shrink in the radial direction
when the distance value of the part scale is
increased or decreased.
• When one vertex is selected, the distance
between the origin and specified vertex
will be constrained.
• When two vertices are selected, the dis-
tance between the two vertices will be
constrained.
The following should be noted.
• Set the end points in the radial direction
of the rotor or stator.
• Part scale cannot be used with other con-
straints.
Setting Items
 [Dimension line option]

Can be set for angle constraint, radius/diameter constraint, distance constraint, part scale, region
radial pattern and boolean for regions.
• Select [Standard] or [Double Angle] for angle constraints. The angle of the constraint or feature
will change to half the value of the variable when [Double Angle] is selected.
• Select [Radius] or [Diameter] for radius/diameter constraints.
• Select [Standard] or [Double Distance] for distance constraint or part scale. The distance of the
constraint or feature will change to half the value of variable when [Double Distance] is selected.
• Select [Center Vertex] or [Origin] for region radial pattern features.
• Select [Union], [Subtraction] or [Intersection] for boolean for regions features.
 [Target Entities]
Specify an entity that will be the target for setting constraints or features.
Clicking the inside of each list will change the background to pink. Select a region (or edge, vertex)
from the [Editor] tab in this state.
MEMO When boolean for regions (Subtraction) is used, select a region considering that subtraction is
obtained using “[Target Entities 1] - [Target Entities 2]” as the formula.
 [Features]
This setting is available for region radial pattern and region mirror copy.
Specifies the feature to be copied.
Clicking the [Features] list will change the background to pink. Select a feature from the [Con-
straints] list. The feature that can be selected in this case is the Boolean for Region.
219
 [Delete Regions]
This setting is available for boolean for regions.
To remove the specified region in [Target Entities 2] after performing a Boolean operation, select
[Delete Regions].
 [Parameter Name]
This setting is available for angle constraint, radius/diameter constraint, distance constraint, fillet
constraint, and chamfer constraint.
Specify a variable name.
 [Label]
This setting is available for angle constraint, radius/diameter constraint, distance constraint, fillet
constraint, chamfer constraint, region fillet, region chamfer, region radial pattern and part scale.
Specify a description for variables.
 [Default Value]
This setting is available for region fillet, region chamfer, region radial pattern and part scale.
Region fillet and region chamfer

Specify a default value for “radius” displayed in the bottom image for region fillet. Specify the
default values of “length” and “angle” displayed in the bottom image for region chamfer.
[Radius]
[Length]
[Angle]
Left: Region Fillet, Right: Region Chamfer
Region radial pattern

Specify the default values of “rotational angle” and “number of copies.”
Part scale
Enter a default value for distance in the diagram below.
220
Left: For distance between a vertex and the origin,

Right: For distance between the two vertices
 [Reference Entity]
This setting is available for setting region mirror copies. Select a line entity to be specified as a sym-
metry axis for a mirror copy.
MEMO For details about the procedures in selecting line entities, see “[Target Entities]” on page 219.
 [Use the Parameter of Another Constraint]

This setting is available for angle constraints, radius/diameter constraints, distance constraints, fillet
constraints, and chamfer constraints.
Select this flag to link a currently specified constraint with another constraint.
• Select the constraint to link from the [Applicable Constraints] list when linking the same type of
constraints.
• Select [Expression] from the [Applicable Constraints] list, and then input the expression in the
[Expression] box when linking based on a relational expression.
Example: When multiplying “SD1: Outside Diameter” by 0.9 for the outer coil diameter, enter
“SD1*0.9” in the [Expression] box.
• The following items can be selected in the [Applicable Constraint] list when a currently specified
constraint is an angle constraint.
Center Angle When the applicable constraint is the [Center Angle], the area set with the angle con-
straint is fixed on the angle determined by the number of poles and slots. The area
where a constraint angle is set is fixed by an angle determined by the number of models
and number of slots when the dependency [Center angle] is selected.
Half of the When the applicable constraint is [Half of the Center Angle], the area set with the angle
Center Angle constraint is fixed on half the angle determined by the number of poles and slots. The
area set by the angle constraint when the dependency is [Half of the Center Angle] is
fixed by half of the angle determined by the number of poles and number of slots.
Rectangle When the applicable constraint is the [Rectangle], the area set with the angle constraint
is constantly fixed on 90 degrees. The area where a constraint angle is set is fixed at a 90
degrees angle when the dependency [Rectangle] is selected.
[Preview] Tab
This tab is available in the editor window.
221
The constraint conditions set on the model can be viewed.

When variables displayed in the treeview are selected, the [Editor] tab on the right displays dimen-
sion lines in areas where constraints the variables indicate are set.
• By entering parameters, it is possible to check if the geometry can be changed or not.
• The parameters of the set constraint, as well as the number of slots, poles, and bars (for rotors of
the induction motor) can be changed.
• When the [Back to Original Geometry] in the [Preview] tab is clicked, the geometry be
returned back prior to being changed.
MEMO When the [Preview] tab is switched to other tab, the geometry will revert back prior to review-
ing.
MEMO For details about [Editor] tab, see “Template Editor Window” on page 148.
222
Designing Motor Using JMAG-Express Classic
This chapter describes the procedures for motor design using JMAG-Express Classic.

• Selecting Templates (page 224)
• Designing the Motor Using a Template (page 226)
• Calculating Recommended Specifications Using the Sizing Function (page 231)
223
Selecting Templates
1. Click the link of the motor design in the [Template] tab of the template window.
The following motor links will be displayed in the [Template] tab.
• Brushless Motor (IPM)
• Brushless Motor (SPM)
• Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/IPM)
• Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/SPM)
• Induction Motor
• Single-phase Induction Motor
• Switched Reluctance Motor
• Brush Motor
• Externally Excited Synchronous Machine
• Wound-Field AC Synchronous Machine
• Claw Pole Alternator
• Universal Motor
Clicking the link of each motor displays its list of templates.
2. Click one of the following icons or links.
• Template of the entire motor (PM_I_D_I.2, IM_I_D_SC.2 etc.):
Clicking an icon or link displays the main window.
MEMO Icons or links of user-defined templates registered in the database are displayed in the
[Template] tab.
MEMO For details about templates built-in to JMAG-Express Classic by default, see “JMAG-
Express Classic Appendix” on page 307.
• [Build New Combination]:
Click [Build New Combination] to combine and use templates of only rotors or only stators.
Select the template to use from the [Rotor] and [Stator] list once the [Build New Combina-
tion] dialog is displayed. Click [OK] to display the main window.
MEMO For details about the part template built-in to JMAG-Express Classic by default, see
“JMAG-Express Classic Appendix” on page 307.
• [Import DXF File]:
Click [Import DXF File] when importing full model geometry created in the Geometry Edi-
tor of JMAG-Designer or commercial CAD software from a DXF file.
For details about procedures in this case, see “Evaluating Geometries Created in commercial
CAD software with JMAG-Express Classic” on page 290.
MEMO [Import DXF File] is a procedure used when not changing dimensions in JMAG-Express
Classic. To import geometry created in the Geometry Editor of JMAG-Designer or commercial
CAD software into JMAG-Express Classic and change the dimensions in JMAG-Express Classic,
a separate procedure needs to be run. For details, see “Creating a Template Using the Geome-
try Created with the Geometry Editor and commercial CAD software” on page 296.
MEMO Motor specifications can be specified with the following procedures.

• Procedure to individually specify design parameters such as dimension, material, drive condition,
and winding. For details, see “Designing the Motor Using a Template” on page 226.
224
• Procedure to derive recommended specifications based on the objective value using the sizing
function. For details, see “Calculating Recommended Specifications Using the Sizing Function”
on page 231.
225
Designing the Motor Using a Template

• Enter Motor Specifications to the Template (page 226)
• Change the Template of the Stator or Rotor While Entering the Specifications (page 227)
• Register the Entered Specifications into the Database (page 228)
• Simulate the Specifications Previously Entered in the Database (page 229)
• Export the Entered Specifications to a File (page 229)
• Import the Specifications Entered Previously from the File (page 230)
Enter Motor Specifications to the Template

Individually specify each design parameter such as dimension, material, drive condition, and wind-
ing.
1. Specify the units for the dimension values and the number of decimal places as
required.
The unit of dimension is (mm) and the number of decimal places is set at “4” in the default state.
To change these settings, select [Template] > [Property] from the menu bar.
For details, see “[Property]” on page 154.
2. Specify settings for target values and sizing during characteristics evaluation in the
[Requirement] tab.
For details, see “[Requirement] Tab” on page 162.
For details about sizing, see “Calculating Recommended Specifications Using the Sizing Func-
tion” on page 231.
3. Specify motor dimensions in the [Dimensions] tab.
For details, see “[Dimensions] Tab” on page 163.
MEMO The template to be used (rotor, stator) can be changed from the [Dimensions] tab. For
details, see “Editing the Template Geometry Using the JMAG-Designer Geometry Editor” on page
303.
4. Specify materials of each part in the [Materials] tab.
For details, see “[Materials] Tab” on page 171.
5. Specify winding information in the [Winding] tab and [Field Coil] tab.
See the following pages.
• Common items:
“[Winding] Tab (Shared)” on page 177
“[Winding] Tab (Multi-phase Induction Motor (Three-phase/Six-phase/Nine-phase))” on
page 196, “[Winding] Tab (Single-phase Induction Motor)” on page 198
• Brush motor:
226

6. Specify settings such as drive circuit in the [Drive] tab.
Parameters displayed in the [Drive] tab will differ depending on the evaluation method selected
in step 4.
See the following pages.
• Brush motor:
Motor design is complete with these procedures.

• For details about registering entered specifications into the database, see “Register the
Entered Specifications into the Database” on page 228.
• For details about saving entered specifications to a file, see “Simulate the Specifications Pre-
viously Entered in the Database” on page 229.
• For details about running characteristics evaluation, see “Running a Characteristics Evalua-
tion” on page 238.
• For details about using entered specifications in JMAG-Designer or other software, see
“Using Data Created in JMAG-Express Classic in Other Software Applications” on page
275.
Change the Template of the Stator or Rotor While Entering the Specifications
The template of the rotor or stator can be changed in the main window.
 Notes
• The template of the motor cannot be changed to another type in the main window (e.g. brush-
less motor (IPM) to induction motor).
To change the motor template to a different type, select [File] > [New] from the menu bar, return
to the template window, and select a template again.
227
• The numbers of poles and slots, as well as diameter values are inherited from the previous model
to the new when changing templates. The default values of the template after changing are auto-
matically applied to the motor, when values are not inherited due to large differences in geome-
tries.
 Procedures
1. Click [Modify] on the right of the motor parts (stator, ipm_rotor etc.) in the [Dimen-
sions] tab of the main window.
The [Select Template] dialog is displayed.
2. Select [Switch to Selected Template].
3. Select the template of either the stator or the rotor from the [Templates] list.
4. Click [OK].
Return to the main window. It will change to the template selected in step 3.
Register the Entered Specifications into the Database

Registering the entered specifications into the database as user-defined templates allow simulation of
the entered specifications even when closing and restarting JMAG-Express Classic.
MEMO For details about using a template registered in the database on another computer, see “Manag-
ing Data Registered in the Database” on page 304.
1. Select [Template] > [Register to Database] from the menu bar in the main window.
MEMO The [Register Template to Database] dialog is also displayed when selecting [File] > [New]
after entering the specifications and clicking [Yes] in the displayed message dialog.
2. Select either [All], [Rotor], or [Stator] from the [Save Target] list.
• When [All] is selected, it will be saved as a template of the entire motor including both the
rotor and stator.
• If either [Rotor] or [Stator] is selected, it will be saved as a part template of either just the
rotor or just the stator.
3. Type the template name in the [Template Name] box.
Multi-byte characters can also be entered in the [Template Name] box.
[OK] of the [Register Template to Database] dialog will be disabled unless the [Template Name]
box is specified.
MEMO To overwrite the existing template, select a template from the [Existing Templates] list (or
[Existing Rotors], [Existing Stators]).
4. Arbitrarily specify the [Image File] and [Description] box.
• Specify the path to the description image of the template in the [Image File] box. Click
[Import] to open the [Image File] dialog, and specify the image file (.png).
The image specified is displayed in the template window, the [Build New Combination] dia-
log, and the [Select Template] dialog.
• Specify information attached to the template in the [Description] box.
Details entered here will be displayed in the template window, [Build New Combination],
and [Select Template] dialog.
228
5. Click [OK].
The entered specifications will be registered in the database as a user-defined template.
User-defined templates registered in the database can be selected from the template window.
Simulate the Specifications Previously Entered in the Database

When specifications previously entered are registered in the database as user-defined templates,
entered specifications can be simulated with the following procedures.
MEMO For details about saving entered specifications as user-defined templates, see “Register the
Entered Specifications into the Database” on page 228.
1. Click the link of each motor in the [Template] tab of the template window.
Clicking the link of each motor displays its list of templates. The user-defined template regis-
tered in the database will also be displayed.
2. Click the icon or link of the user-defined template that will be used.
MEMO Run the following procedures when specifications entered previously are saved as part tem-
plates of either just the rotor or just the stator.
1. Click the [Build New Combination] link in the [Template] tab of the template window.
2. Select a user-defined template to use from [Rotor] and [Stator] in the [Build New Combination]
dialog, and click [OK].
Export the Entered Specifications to a File

Entered specifications can be exported as a JMAG motor template file (.jmd) or parameter file (.csv).
1. Select [File] > [Save As] from the menu bar of the main window.
The [Save As] dialog is displayed.
2. Select the format of the exported file from the [File Type] list.
The file formats that can be selected are the following:
• JMAG-MotorTemplate files (.jmd):
It is a file for the JMAG-Express Classic database. It includes information such as geometry,
material, and correction factor of the template.
• Parameter File (.csv):
It is a file for saving the specifications of JMAG-Express Classic. It includes the name of the
used template, setting parameters, and its value. Importing parameter files in JMAG-Express
Classic allows the simulation of specifications entered previously.
• JMAG-Designer Project File (.jproj), JCF File (.jcf ), DXF File (.dxf ):
These file formats are selected when using data outside JMAG-Express Classic. For details, see
“Exporting Designed Motors to a File” on page 276.
3. Specify the destination to save the file in the [Save In] list.
4. Specify the file name to export in the [File name] combo box.
5. Click [Save].
229
Import the Specifications Entered Previously from the File

Import the JMAG-MotorTemplate file (.jmd) or parameter file (.csv) and simulated the specifica-
tions entered previously.
MEMO For details about exporting a JMAG motor template file or parameter file, see “Exporting
Designed Motors to a File” on page 276.
1. Select [File] > [Open] from the menu bar in the template window or the main window.
The [Open] dialog is displayed.
MEMO Parameter files can only be opened from the main window.
2. Select the file type to import.
• Parameter files (.csv)
MEMO The parameter file can be selected when running the operation of step 1 in the main win-
dow.
3. Specify the file to import.
When multiple template data is included in the specified JMAG motor template file, a message
dialog asking which template to open is displayed. Specify one template to open from the list in
JMAG-Express Classic.
4. Click [Open].
The JMAG motor template file is imported.
Or the parameter file is imported and the content of the parameter file is applied to the displayed
motor.
MEMO When the template that is being used is different between the parameter file and the dis-
played motor, a message dialog confirming whether to import the parameter file is displayed. Click
[OK] to import the file.
230
Calculating Recommended Specifications Using the Sizing Function

Using the sizing function allows the calculation of recommended values of design parameters such as
dimensions, materials, and windings by simply specifying the desired rated power.
The recommended value is reflected in the parameter for each tab in [Dimensions], [Materials],
[Winding], and [Drive].
By using the sizing function, after determining approximate specifications, adjust each parameter
and design the motor so the desired performance is satisfied.
MEMO This function is for the brushless motor, induction motor (three-phase/six-phase/nine-phase),
switched reluctance motor, brush motor, and claw pole alternator. This function cannot be used in a sin-
gle phase induction motor, externally excited synchronous machine, wound-field AC synchronous
machine, and universal motor.
• Parameters That Fluctuate Using the Sizing Function (page 231)

• Creating a Motor Model Using the Sizing Function (page 232)
• Advanced Preparations for the Sizing Function (User-defined Template is Used) (page 234)
• Registering Geometry Parameter Set (User-defined Templates is Used) (page 234)
Parameters That Fluctuate Using the Sizing Function

The following values and design parameters are updated by using the sizing function.
 [Dimensions] tab
All dimensions, number of slots, number of poles, number of secondary conductor (induction
motor only)
 [Materials] tab
Magnet (brushless motor only), Cage (induction motor only)
MEMO When [Magnet] or [Cage] is specified under [Sizing Parameters] in the [Requirement] tab, the
settings are not updated even if the sizing function is used.
 [Winding] tab
• Brushless motor, three-phase induction motor:
Phase resistance, number of turns, layers, coil pitch, winding scheme (distributed winding/con-
centrated winding)
MEMO When [Winding] is specified under [Sizing Parameter] in the [Requirement] tab, the set-
tings are not updated even if the sizing function is used.
Phase resistance, number of turns
• Brush motor:
Coil resistance, number of turns
• Claw pole alternator:
• Stator coil: phase resistance, number of turns, number of layers, coil pitch
• Field coil: coil resistance, number of turns
231
 [Drive] tab
Line voltage (Amp), maximum line current (Amp), revolution speed
Phase voltage (Amp), revolution speed
MEMO Revolution speed is a settings parameter for JMAG-Designer. It is not used for a characteris-
tics evaluation in JMAG-Express Classic.
DC voltage, voltage application start angle, voltage application width (mechanical angle), maxi-
mum current
• Brush motor:
DC voltage, rated current, contact voltage drop, slit width between segments, brush width
• Claw pole alternator:
Rated voltage, rated short-circuit current, maximum field coil current, revolution speed, stator
voltage, stator current
Creating a Motor Model Using the Sizing Function

1. Select a template in the JMAG-Express Classic template window.
See “Selecting Templates” on page 224.
2. Run an advanced preparation for sizing.
Running advanced preparations are not required when the registered default template is selected
in step 1 in which the setting to use the sizing function is specified beforehand.
The following settings need to be specified when using the sizing function if a user defined tem-
plate is selected in step 1.
• Advanced preparations for the sizing function (required):
For details, see “Advanced Preparations for the Sizing Function (User-defined Template is
Used)” on page 234.
• Registering a geometry for stator or rotor (if required):
For details, see “Registering Geometry Parameter Set (User-defined Templates is Used)”
on page 234.
3. In the [Requirement] tab, specify the desired rated power (0.01kW - 100000kW) in the
[Rated Power, kW] box of the [Targeted Value] group box.
4. In the [Sizing Parameter] group box, specify design parameters to be fixed during sizing.
Select the flags for the design parameters to be fixed, and enter a value in the text box or select an
item from the list. Values specified here will be retained after sizing is applied.
• [Number of Poles] (brushless motor and induction motor only)
• [Number of Slots] (brushless motor and induction motor only)
• [Number of Bars] (induction motor only)
• [Maximum Outer Diameter of Motor, mm]
232
• [Maximum Motor Height, mm]:

Enter the stator height.
• [Power Supply Voltage (RMS), V]

• [Maximum Current (RMS), A]
• [Winding] (brushless motor only):
Select either [Distributed Winding] or [Concentrated Winding] in which [Distributed
Winding] is selected when this setting is not specified.
• [Magnet] (brushless motor and brush motor only):
Select [Neodymium] or [Ferrite] in which [Neodymium] is selected when this setting is not
specified.
• [Cage] (induction motor only):
Select [Copper] or [Aluminium] in which [Copper] is selected when this setting is not speci-
fied.
5. Click [Apply].
The motor dimensions and other recommended parameters are set based on the setting specified
in [Desired Rated Power].
By default, the motor outer diameter and the motor stack height are set at a ratio of 1:1. For a
claw pole alternator only, the ratio is set at 3.2: 1.
MEMO If the combination of the number of slots and poles specified in the [Sizing Parameter]
group box is invalid, the number of slots will be adjusted.
MEMO By applying the values calculated using the sizing function, a message will be displayed
prompting the user to apply recommended values in the case of inconsistencies occurring in required
values such as the voltage constant or torque constant.
MEMO When the geometry cannot be updated using the number of slots, poles and the secondary
conductors calculated with the sizing function, values closest to the recommended values which can
be used to update the geometry are applied.
When this occurs, a message is displayed showing the recommended number of slots, poles, and sec-
ondary conductors. These values can be manually set in the [Dimensions] tab, and the geometry
parameters causing inconsistencies can be manually adjusted.
However, cases in which geometry can't be updated can be reduced by preemptively registering
“Geometry Parameter Set”. For details, see “Registering Geometry Parameter Set (User-
defined Templates is Used)” on page 234.
233
6. Make appropriate changes to the design parameters based on the recommended speci-
fications calculated using sizing to complete the specifications.
Advanced Preparations for the Sizing Function (User-defined Template is Used)

The sizing function adjusts the size of the motor using the gap between the stator and the rotor to
set it as a standard when setting a recommended diameter. Therefore, the variable name of a geome-
try parameter that is required for adjusting needs to be defined. The sizing function cannot be used
if this setting does not exist.
MEMO The preset settings for sizing can also be referenced from [Gap Length] in the [Dimensions] tab
of the main window.
1. Click [Preset Sizing] in the mein window.

Or select [Sizing] > [Preset Sizing] from the menu bar.
The [Preset Sizing] dialog is displayed.
2. Specify the following settings.
• Brushless motor (inner rotor), induction motor, switched reluctance motor, brush motor
• Variable name describing [Outside Diameter of Rotor]
• Variable name describing [Inside Diameter of Stator]
• Brushless motor (outer rotor)
• Variable name describing [Inside Diameter of Stator]
• Variable name describing [Outside Diameter of Rotor]
3. Click [OK].
Registering Geometry Parameter Set (User-defined Templates is Used)

When the geometry cannot be updated after changing only the number of slots, poles, and second-
ary conductors, the sizing function can be used more easily by registering parameter combinations in
the “Geometry Parameter Set List”.
Geometry parameter sets are the defined relationships between key values (registering the number of
slots, poles, and secondary conductors as a key) and other geometry parameter values for the stator
and rotor.
[Geometry Parameter Set List] dialog.

In the upper table, slot values (the number of slots) and the stator external/internal diameter for
these values are defined.
234
If the geometry parameter set is registered in advance, the geometry parameter set is referenced, and
other geometry values are updated when calculating the recommended number of slots/poles and
number of the secondary conductors using the sizing function.
Verifying Geometry Parameter Sets
1. In the main window, select [Sizing] > [Geometry Parameter Set List] from the menu bar.
The [Geometry Parameter Set List] dialog is displayed. Currently registered geometry parameter
sets are displayed in a list in this dialog.
Registering Geometry Parameter Sets (Stator)
1. Specify [SLOTS: Number of Slots] in the [Dimensions] tab in the main window.
2. Specify other geometry parameter values (internal/external diameter of the stator, etc.)
for the number of slots specified in step 1.
3. Select [Sizing] > [Register Stator Geometry] from the menu bar.
The combinations of number of slots and values of each geometry parameter are registered as
geometry parameter sets.
MEMO Geometry parameter sets with the same number of slots cannot be registered multiple times.
4. Using the same procedure, register the geometry parameter sets as many as needed.
Registering Geometry Parameter Sets (Brushless Motor/Three-phase Induction Motor

Rotors)
1. Specify [POLES: Number of Poles] (or [BARS: The number of Secondary Conductor]) in
the [Dimensions] tab in the main window.
2. Specify other geometry parameter values (internal/external diameter of the rotor, etc.)
for the number of poles (or number of secondary conductors) specified in step 1.
3. Select [Sizing] > [Register Rotor Geometry] from the menu bar.
The combinations of number of poles (or number of secondary conductors) and values of each
geometry parameter are registered as the geometry parameter sets.
MEMO Geometry parameter sets with the same number of poles (or number of wires for secondary
conductors) cannot be registered multiple times.
4. Using the same procedure, register the geometry parameter sets as many as needed.
Deleting Geometry Parameter Sets
1. In the main window, select [Sizing] > [Geometry Parameter Set List] from the menu bar.
The [Geometry Parameter Set List] dialog is displayed. Currently registered geometry parameter
sets are displayed in a list in this dialog.
2. Select unneeded geometry parameter sets from the list and click [Delete].
235
236
Evaluating Motor Characteristics in JMAG-Express
Classic
This chapter describes the steps and Notes for running motor characteristics evaluation using JMAG-Express
Classic.

• Running a Characteristics Evaluation (page 238)
• Running Parametric Evaluation (page 258)
• Performing an Evaluation Taking Into Account Temperature (page 260)
• Evaluating Motor Performance Using Maps (page 263)
• Exporting Evaluation Results for Control Circuit Simulation (JMAG-RT Models) (page 271)
237
Running a Characteristics Evaluation

Characteristics of a motor speed can be evaluated at high speed.
• Procedures (page 238)
• Checking Evaluation Results (Operations in the [Characteristics] Tab) (page 238)
• List of Evaluation Results (page 241)
MEMO Characteristics evaluation cannot be run for universal motors.
MEMO Geometries can be imported from DXF files and evaluated. For details, see “Evaluating Geom-
etries Created in commercial CAD software with JMAG-Express Classic” on page 290.
Procedures
1. Specify the dimensions, drive condition and winding in each tab.
For details, see “Designing Motor Using JMAG-Express Classic” on page 223.
2. Click [Evaluate] .
Or, select [Characteristics] > [Evaluate] from the menu bar.
Design comparisons, performance graph, and design sheet are displayed in the [Characteristics]
tab.
MEMO The correction factor can be set on materials, constants, and result values after running an
evaluation of characteristics. For details, see “[Correction] Tab” on page 187 for details.
Checking Evaluation Results (Operations in the [Characteristics] Tab)

Evaluation results can be confirmed in the [Characteristics] tab of the main window.
The tab is divided into the following three frames: “design comparisons”, “performance graph”, and
“design sheet.”
MEMO For details about evaluation results, see “List of Evaluation Results” on page 241.
 Changing items displayed in the [Characteristics] tab

The contents of the performance graph and design sheet can be changed in the [Characteristics] tab.
To change them, click and select [Edit Characteristics] in the toolbar. Changing the settings, and
then click [Edit Characteristics] again to clear the selection, the changes are reflected in the
[Characteristics] tab.
The following can be changed.
Switching items to display in the design sheet

Arbitrarily switch between on/off of the flag displayed on the left of each parameter in the table.
Show/hide of the performance graph

Arbitrarily select [Show]/[Hide] displayed on the top left of each graph.
Properties of the performance graph

Clicking each graph displays the [Graph Line Property] dialog. The following settings are available
in the [Graph Line Property] dialog.
238
Evaluating Motor Characteristics in JMAG-Express Classic
[Graph Title] Selecting [Graph Title] allows the title of the graph to be changed.
[Graph Type] Selecting [Series Lines] displays the results of multiple cases on one
graph. Selecting [Response Graph] creates a response value graph
based on the results of multiple cases. Specify [Target Point] below.
[Line Option] • [X Component]:
Select the component to be displayed as the X-axis.
• [Y Component], [Component]:
The components to be displayed as the Y-axis are shown in the
list. Multiple components can be set. Click for multiple set-
tings. The component type can also be selected from the [Com-
ponent] list. To remove components to display as the Y-axis, select
the component in the list and click .
• [Target Point]:
Displayed when [Response Graph] is selected in [Graph Type].
Any value can be specified for “X-axis used in the evaluation”. “X-
axis used in the evaluation” differs depending on the motor type.
For brushless motors and externally excited synchronous
machines, they are the components specified for [X-axis] in the
[Drive] tab (current amplitude, current phase, revolution speed,
or voltage).
For induction motors and switched reluctance motors, it is the
revolution speed. For brush motors, it is torque.
For wound-field AC synchronous machines, it is field current.
[Axis] This is specified when dividing and displaying the Y-axis into left
and right. Clicking [Edit] allows the title, scaling, and value
range of the X-axis, Y-axis (left), and Y-axis (right) to be specified.
[Line Style], [Line Width], The graph line properties can be specified.
[Marker], [Marker Size]
Move the position of the performance graph

The graph display position can be moved by dragging and dropping each graph.
Adding and deleting performance graph

Graphs can be added or deleted by right-clicking the performance graph.
 Exporting evaluation results displayed in the [Characteristics] tab

Click [Export Evaluation Results] in the main window when exporting evaluation results dis-
played in the [Characteristics] tab in CSV file format.
Design Comparisons
• History of characteristics evaluation will be saved in design comparisons when [Stack Design]
is selected in the toolbar.
• Flags can be set and comments can be inserted for each design proposal of design compari-
sons.
• Selecting multiple design proposals from the design comparisons can be done by holding the
[Ctrl] or [Shift] key while clicking on each design proposal.
239
• Select and right-click a design proposal in design comparisons to display a menu. Select [Apply
Selected Case] from the menu to reflect specifications in the design proposal onto the [Dimen-
sions], [Materials], [Winding], [Drive], and [Correction] tab.
Performance Graph
• A line showing the operating range in a graph for an evaluation result is displayed when specify-
ing target values in the [Requirement] tab. For details, see “[Requirement] Tab” on page 162 for
details.
• The evaluation axis of a graph can be changed for brushless motors. Change [X-axis] on the
[Drive] tab to change the evaluation axis.
• The value of each point on a graph is displayed on a table when clicking on each result graph.
Right-click a table and specify [Copy All] to copy the entire contents in a table onto calculation
software.
• Each evaluation result is displayed with the color shown in the [Graph] cell in the table for the
design proposal.
• Only the evaluation results of design proposals are displayed in the performance graph when the
flag on the left of the design comparisons is on. Right-click design comparisons to display the
menu to switch on/off for all flags on the left of design comparisons.
• When one arbitrary design proposal is selected in the design comparisons, a marker will be
shown on the appropriate graph line of the design proposal on the graph.
 Importing a performance graph layout from a template

Click [Change Layout] in the top right corner of the frame in the performance graph to display the
[Select Report Layout] dialog. Select the layout to be applied from the list, and then click [OK]. See
methods for saving the layout below.
 Saving a performance graph layout in the database:

The layout in the frame of the performance graph can be registered in the database as a template.
To save a template, select [Template] > [Register to Database] from the menu bar.
Select [All] or [Report Layout] from the [Save Target] list, and click [OK].
Design Sheet
• Click a parameter such as [Winding] displayed in the design sheet to display a dialog to change
the value of its parameter.
• The evaluation results in the specified X-axis value can be displayed in a table format. Enter an
arbitrary value on the X-axis in the top of [Machine Constant] in the design sheet.
The value on the X-axis to be entered may vary depending on the motor type or the settings of
[X-axis] of the [Drive] tab as shown below:
Motor type [X-axis] of the [Drive] tab The X-axis value to be entered
Brushless motor, externally [Line Voltage (Amp), V] Line Voltage (Amp)
excited synchronous machines [Line Current (Amp), deg] Line Current (Amp)
[Current Phase, deg] Current Phase
[Revolution Speed, rpm] Revolution Speed
[Advance Phase Angle, deg] Advance Phase Angle
Induction motor - Revolution Speed
240
Motor type [X-axis] of the [Drive] tab The X-axis value to be entered
Switched reluctance motor - Revolution Speed
Brush motor - Torque
Wound-field AC synchronous - Field current
machines
List of Evaluation Results

Running characteristics evaluation displays the following items in the [Characteristics] tab.
• Common Items for Entire Motors (page 241)
• Brushless Motor and Externally Excited Synchronous Machine (page 241)
• Switched Reluctance Motor (page 252)
• Brush Motor (page 253)
• Wound-Field AC Synchronous Machine and Claw Pole Alternator (page 255)
Common Items for Entire Motors

• Winding (Connection method, winding, phase resistance or coil resistance, slot area, conductor
area per phase)
• Drive condition
• Dimension
MEMO [Resistance] of the [End Ring] displayed as evaluation results of an induction motor in the
design sheet indicates the “resistance value of the full circle on one of the end rings.”
• Mass property (mass, volume, inertia)
MEMO The mass of coil is calculated by the following formula.
Mass of coil = Density of coil material x Volume of entire coil
• Materials
Brushless Motor and Externally Excited Synchronous Machine
 Graph
Notes
• For evaluation results graphs produced, characteristics are output for 10 equally spaced values for
the item (revolution speed, current phase, line current peak, line voltage peak, advance angle)
selected from the [X-axis] list under the [Drive] tab.
However, data points with negative efficiency values are not output for efficiency evaluation
results graphs.
Furthermore, if the following conditions are satisfied, characteristics are output for 20 equally
spaced values for the item (revolution speed, current phase, line current peak, line voltage peak,
advance angle) selected from the [X-axis] list under the [Drive] tab.
• [Current Phase] or [Advance Phase Angle] is selected in the [X-axis] list
• [Current Phase Range Upper, deg] - [Current Phase Range Lower, deg] > 180 degrees (or
[Advance Phase Angle Range Upper, deg] - [Advance Phase Angle Range Lower, deg] > 180
degrees)
241
• The maximum revolution speed is automatically determined when selecting [Revolution Speed]
from the [X-axis] list.
• If [Voltage (Sin)] or [Voltage (120deg)] is selected from the [Mode] list under the [Drive] tab,
motor characteristics will be calculated based on flux linkage obtained by FEM calculations using
the current value of each point that is determined when dividing the range from 0 A to [Maxi-
mum Line Current (peak)] into three equal parts. For example, when [Maximum Line Current
(peak)] is 30 A, FEM calculations with “0 A, 10 A, 20 A, and 30 A” are executed.
Characteristics for current values other than those for each point are calculated based on the flux
linkage obtained by linear interpolation. Therefore, if the value of [Maximum Line Current
(peak)] is set to an excessive value, calculation accuracy may deteriorate.
Graph
• Revolution speed (current phase, line current peak, line voltage peak or advanced phase
angle) Vs. Torque (efficiency, power, copper loss, iron loss, power factor, phase current (RMS),
line voltage peak, phase voltage (RMS), line voltage (RMS))
• Slot number Vs. Magnetomotive force
Item Unit Description
Evaluation axis: revolution speed, current phase, line current peak, line voltage peak or advanced
phase angle
Torque Nm Steady state torque generated in a motor. Losses are taken into
account in this value.
The steady state is where fluctuation of electric current or speed in
time is fixed and the variations are stable.
Efficiency % Mechanical power according to input power. It is calculated from
• Motor mode:
η = ( P – W iron ) ⁄ ( P + W copper ) × 100
• Generator mode:
η = ( P + W copper + W iron ) ⁄ P × 100
η : efficiency (%), P : power (W) ( P = T 0 ω ), W iron : iron loss

(W), W copper : copper loss (W), T 0 : torque calculated without
considering iron loss, ω : angular velocity (rad/s)
For an externally excited synchronous machine, the loss of the field
coil is also taken into consideration.
Negative values are not output in the graph.
Power (output) W Motor power. It is calculated from the following formula.
• Motor mode:
L = P – W iron
• Generator mode:
L = P + W copper + W iron
L : power (output) (W), P : power (W) ( P = T 0 ω ), W iron : iron

loss (W), W copper : copper loss (W), T 0 : calculated torque not
including iron loss, ω : angular velocity (rad/s)
242

Copper loss W Joule loss occurring in coils. Value for the entire motor (3 phases).
For an externally excited synchronous machine, field coil losses are
also accounted for.
W copper = R × ( i d × i d + i q × i q )
W copper : Copper loss (W), R : Phase resistance (ohm),
i d , i q : d-axis/q-axis components for current (A)

W copper = R × ( i d × i d + i q × i q ) + R f × i f × i f
W copper : Copper loss (W), R : Phase resistance (ohm),
R f : Field winding resistance (ohm), i f : Field coil current (A),
3 2π 3 2π
i d = – --- × I p × sin  β × --------- i q = --- × I p × cos  β × ---------
2  360 2  360
I p : Phase current amplitude (A), β : Current phase (deg)
Iron loss W Iron loss in the stator.

Power factor - Ratio of active power against apparent power
Phase Current (RMS) A Depending on the settings in the [Drive] tab for a brushless motor,
the meaning will differ as in the following:
• Phase current (RMS) in voltage where effective current is maxi-
mum regardless of the [X-axis] when the [Mode] is [Voltage
(Sin)] or [Voltage (120 deg)].
• Phase current (RMS) in revolution speed where effective current
is maximum when the [Mode] is [Current] and [X-axis] is [Revo-
lution Speed, rpm].
• Value of specified [Line Current (Amp), A] converted to phase
current (RMS) when [Mode] is [Current] and [X-axis] is [Cur-
rent Phase, deg] or [Line Current (Amp), A].
Line Voltage (Amp) V Maximum value of the line voltage.
Phase Voltage (RMS) V Effective value of phase voltage for U-phase (V-phase, W-phase).
Line Voltage (RMS) V Effective value of line voltage for U-V interphase (V-W interphase,
W-U interphase).
Magnetomotive force A Total value of the magnetomotive force among the U-phase, V-
phase, and W-phase when the amplitude is 1 A for the current in
the U-phase.
 Table (Machine Constant)

• Inductance:
Ld, Lq, self inductance, mutual inductance
• Torque constant K t
• Voltage constant K e
243
• Magnetic circuit:
Average magnetic flux density (teeth, back yoke, gap)
• Electric part:
Rated current, wire current density, revolution speed at rated current
• Power
• Loss
• Electric circuit
244
Evaluation position of back yoke cross section
Evaluation position of teeth cross section

Value of evaluation axis: revolution speed, current phase, line current (Amp), line voltage (Amp) or
advanced phase angle)
Inductance Inductance Ld H d-axis inductance
Inductance Lq H q-axis inductance
Self-inductance H Self-inductance per phase
Mutual induc- H Average value of an electrical angle (one cycle) for
tance mutual inductance in each phase.
Torque constant K t Nm/A The ratio of the torque T produced by a motor to the
current supplied to it.
The torque constant is defined as follows: where I dc is
the time averaged current on the direct current side
when the three-phase sine wave current flows in the
star connection, and I 0 is the current amplitude of
each phase.
K t = T ⁄ I dc
I dc = 3 ⁄ ( circular constant π ) ⋅ I 0
However,
• Motor mode:
T = ( T 0 – W iron ) ⁄ ω
• Generator mode:
T = ( T 0 + W copper + W iron ) ⁄ ω
T 0 : torque at maximum current value calculated with-

out considering iron loss,
W iron : iron loss (w), ω : angular velocity (rad/s),
245

Voltage constant K e Vsec/ Value indicating the relationship between angular
rad velocity ω and amplitude of the line induced voltage
V.
The voltage constant K e is defined as the following:
• For square wave drive, K e = K t
• For sinusoidal drive, K e = K t ⋅ ( 2 ⁄ 3 )

K t : torque constant
Magnetic circuit Average Teeth T Average value of magnetic flux density of teeth.
Flux Density Calculated in the following step.
1.Calculate the magnetic flux density of each tooth
cross section when applying the line current at 0
degree phase specified in the [Drive] tab.
See the figure below for the location of the cross sec-
tion evaluated here.
2.Calculate the average value based on the magnetic
flux density of all teeth cross sections.
Average Back T Average value of magnetic flux density of back yoke.
Yoke Flux Den- Calculated in the following step.
sity
1.Calculate the magnetic flux density of each back
yoke section when applying the line current at 0
degree phase specified in the [Drive] tab.
See the figure below for the location of the cross sec-
tion evaluated here.
2.Calculate the average value based on the magnetic
flux density of all back yoke cross sections.

Magnetic circuit Average Gap Flux T Average value of magnetic flux density of motor gap.
Density Calculated in the following step.
1.Calculate the absolute value of the radial component
of the magnetic flux density at the center of the gap.
2.Calculate the value of 1. at each position in the cir-
cumferential direction at the center of the gap.
3.Calculate the average value based on the value of 2.
Magnet Flux Wb Armature flux linkage due to permanent magnets Ψ a .
Linkage
246

Electric part Phase Current A Depending on the settings in the [Drive] tab for a
(RMS) brushless motor, the meaning will differ as in the fol-
lowing:
• Phase current (RMS) in voltage where effective cur-
rent is maximum regardless of the [X-axis] when the
[Mode] is [Voltage (Sin)] or [Voltage (120 deg)].
• Phase current (RMS) in revolution speed where
effective current is maximum when the [Mode] is
[Current] and [X-axis] is [Revolution Speed, rpm].
• Value of specified [Line Current (Amp), A] con-
verted to phase current (RMS) when [Mode] is
[Current] and [X-axis] is [Current Phase, deg] or
[Line Current (Amp), A].
Electric part Wire current A/m^2 Calculate values from the following formula.
density (Coil current density) = (Effective current)/(Circuit
parallel number)/(Wire cross section area)
* For the wire cross section area, use the value calcu-
lated based on the following formulas.
• If selecting either [Round Wire Dimension] or
[Rectangle Wire Dimension] as the [Setting Type] in
the [Winding] tab:
(Wire cross section area) = (Cross section of 1 wire)
× (Number of strands)
• If selecting [Phase Resistance] as the [Setting Type]
in the [Winding] tab:
(Wire cross section area) = (Slot cross section area) ×
(Lamination factor)/(Number of turns)
Revolution speed rpm Revolution speed per minute in a motor given the
at phase current effective current
(RMS)
247

Power Torque Nm Steady state torque generated in a motor.
The steady state is where fluctuation of electric current
or speed in time is fixed and the variations are stable.
Efficiency % Mechanical power according to input power. It is cal-
culated from the following formula.
• Motor mode:
η = ( P – W iron ) ⁄ ( P + W copper ) × 100
• Generator mode:
η = ( P + W copper + W iron ) ⁄ P × 100
η : efficiency (%), P : power (W) ( P = T 0 ω ), W iron :

iron loss (W), W copper : copper loss (W), T 0 : calcu-
lated torque not including iron loss, ω : angular veloc-
ity (rad/s)
For an externally excited synchronous machine, the
loss of the field coil is also taken into consideration.
Power (output) W Motor power. It is calculated from the following for-
mula.
• Motor mode:
L = P – W iron
• Generator mode:
L : power (output) (W), P : power (W)

( P = T 0 ω ), W iron : iron loss (W), W copper : copper
loss (W), T 0 : calculated torque not including iron
loss, ω : angular velocity (rad/s)
248

Loss Copper loss W Joule loss occurring in coils. Value for the entire motor
(3 phases). For an externally excited synchronous
machine, field coil losses are also accounted for.
Pc = R × ( id × id + iq × iq )
P c : Copper loss (W), R : Phase resistance (ohm),

Pc = R × ( id × id + iq × iq ) + Rf × if × if
P c : Copper loss (W), R : Phase resistance (ohm),
R f : Field winding resistance (ohm),
i f : Field coil current (A),
3 2π
i d = – --- × I p × sin  β × ---------
2  360
3 2π
iq = --- × I p × cos  β × ---------
2  360
I p : Phase current amplitude (A), β : Current phase

(deg)
Iron loss W Iron loss in the stator
Electric Circuit Line Voltage V Maximum value of the line voltage. This is equivalent
(Amp) to the voltage in the direct current component of
inverter.
Phase Voltage V Effective value of phase voltage for U-phase (V-phase,
(RMS) W-phase).
Line Voltage V Effective value of line voltage for U-V interphase (V-W
(RMS) interphase, W-U interphase).
Induction Motor
 Graph
• Revolution speed Vs. Torque (efficiency, power, copper loss, iron loss, primary current, 1st cur-
rent loss, 2nd current loss, power factor, magnetizing current)
• Slot number Vs. Magnetomotive force
Evaluation axis: revolution speed
Torque Nm This applies to ( 1 – s ) ⁄ s ⋅ r2 in the upper figure.
Average torque generated in a motor that is in steady state.
The steady state is where fluctuation of time for electric current
or speed is fixed and the variations are stable.
249

Efficiency = (power)/(power + copper loss + iron loss) * 100
Power W Motor power
Copper loss W Total Joule loss of the primary and secondary coil.
Displayed only for three-phase/six-phase/nine-phase motors.
Phase Current (RMS) A Phase current (RMS) in revolution speed where effective current
is maximum.
Displayed only for single motors.
Primary current A Effective value of the primary current per phase.
1st current loss W Loss for 1st resistance ( r1 ) in T-type equivalent circuit
2nd current loss W Loss for 2nd resistance ( r2 ) in T-type equivalent circuit
Magnetizing current A Current to generate magnetic flux in a coil
Magnetomotive force A Total value of the magnetomotive force among the U-phase, V-
phase, and W-phase when the amplitude is 1 A for the current in
the U-phase.

• Equivalent circuit parameters:
Primary leakage reactance, secondary leakage reactance, primary resistance, secondary resistance,
iron loss equivalent conductance, excitation susceptance, exciting inductance
• Starting characteristics * Three-phase/six-phase/nine-phase motors:
Starting impedance (real, imaginary), starting current, starting torque
• Electric part:
Phase current (RMS), primary current, wire current density
• Power
• Loss
• Electric circuit
The description of each item are listed in the table below.
250

Value of evaluation axis: revolution speed
Equivalent Cir- Primary leakage ohm x1 in the figure
cuit Parameters reactance
Secondary leakage ohm x2 in the figure
reactance
Primary resistance ohm r1 in the figure
Secondary resis- ohm r2 in the figure
tance
Iron loss equiva- S g 0 in the figure.
lent conductance
Displayed only for three-phase/six-phase/nine-
phase motors.
Excitation suscep- S b 0 in the figure.
tance
phase motors.
Exciting induc- H Conversion from excitation susceptance.
tance Exciting inductance =1/ b 0 /(2*π*f )
b 0 : Excitation susceptance, f : Rated frequency
Starting character- Starting imped- Ohm Impedance (Real) for the entire circuit of T-type
istics ance (Real) equivalent circuit, when slip is 0.
Starting imped- Ohm Impedance (Imaginary) for the entire circuit of T-
* Three-phase/six- ance (Imaginary) type equivalent circuit, when slip is 0.
phase/nine-phase Starting current A T-type equivalent circuit for 1 electric current when
motors slip is 0.
Starting torque Nm Torque when slip is 0.
Electric Part Phase Current A Phase current (RMS) in revolution speed where
(RMS) effective current is maximum.
Displayed only for single motors.
Primary current A Effective value of the primary current per phase
phase motors.
Wire current den- A/m^2 Calculate values from the following formula.
sity (Coil current density) = (Effective current)/(Circuit
[Rectangle Wire Dimension] as the [Setting Type]
(Wire cross section area) = (Cross section of 1
wire) × (Number of strands)
• If selecting [Phase Resistance] as the [Setting
Type] in the [Winding] tab:
(Wire cross section area) = (Slot cross section area)
× (Lamination factor)/(Number of turns)
251

Power Torque Nm This applies to ( 1 – s ) ⁄ s ⋅ r2 in the upper figure.
Average torque generated in a motor that is in
steady state.
The steady state is where fluctuation of time for
electric current or speed is fixed and the variations
are stable.
Efficiency % Mechanical power according to input power. It is
calculated from the following formula.
Efficiency = (power)/(power + copper loss + iron
loss) * 100
Power W Motor power
Loss Copper loss W Total Joule loss of the primary and secondary coil
phase motors.
phase motors.
1st current loss W Loss for 1st resistance ( r1 ) in T-type equivalent cir-
cuit
Loss 2nd current loss W Loss for 2nd resistance ( r2 ) in T-type equivalent
circuit
Electric Circuit Magnetizing cur- A Current to generate magnetic flux in a coil.
rent Displayed only for three-phase/six-phase/nine-
phase motors.
Switched Reluctance Motor
 Graph
Revolution speed Vs. Torque (efficiency, copper loss, iron loss, line current (amp), power, power
factor)

Evaluation axis: revolution speed
Torque Nm Steady state torque generated in a motor.
The steady state is where fluctuation of time for electric current
or speed is fixed and the variations are stable.
Copper loss W Joule loss generated in a coil
Iron loss W Iron loss generated in a stator and rotor
Line Current (Amp) A Current value flowing in the coils of a phase
Power W Motor power
252

• Inductance:
Maximum inductance, minimum inductance
• Electric Part:
Phase current (RMS), wire current density
• Power
• Loss
Value of evaluation axis: revolution speed
Inductance Minimum Induc- H The minimum value used in the calculation for an
tance inductance table
Maximum Induc- H The maximum value used in the calculation for an
tance inductance table
Electric part Phase Current A Phase current (RMS) in revolution speed where
(RMS) effective current is maximum
Wire Current A/m^2 Calculate values from the following formula.
Density (Coil current density) = (Effective current)/(Circuit
in the [Winding] tab: (Wire cross section area) =
(Cross section of 1 wire) × (Number of strands)
• If selecting [Phase Resistance] as the [Setting
Type] in the [Winding] tab:
Power Torque Nm Steady state torque generated in a motor.
The steady state is where fluctuation of time for
electric current or speed is fixed and the variations
are stable.
Efficiency % Mechanical power according to input power. It is
calculated from the following formula.
loss) * 100
Power W Motor power
Loss Copper loss W Joule loss generated in a coil
Brush Motor
 Graph
Torque Vs. Revolution speed (current amplitude, copper loss, iron loss, efficiency, power)
253

Evaluation axis: torque
Current A Current value flowing motor
Revolution speed rpm Revolution speed per minute for motor
Copper loss W Joule loss generated in a coil
Power W Motor power

• Machine constant:
Back EMF constant, torque constant, terminal resistance
• Electric part:
Current, wire current density, revolution speed at current
• Power
• Loss
Value of evaluation axis: torque
Equivalent circuit Back EMF con- Vsec/ Value relating to angular velocity ω and induced volt-
stant K e rad age between the terminals V e .
The Back EMF Constant K e is defined as
Ke = Ve ⁄ ω .
Torque constant Nm/A The ratio of the torque T produced by a motor to the
Kt current supplied to it.
The torque constant is defined as follows: where I dc
is the time averaged current, V is the rated voltage,
V e is the induced voltage, and R is the resistance.
K t = T ⁄ I dc
I dc = ( V – V e ) ⁄ R
However, T = T 0 – W iron ⁄ ω
T 0 : calculated torque not including iron loss,
W iron : iron loss (w), ω : angular velocity (rad/s)
Terminal resis- ohm Terminal resistance for DC motors.

tance
254

Electric part Current A Current in revolution speed where effective current is
maximum.
Wire current den- A/m^2 Calculate values from the following formula.
sity (Coil current density) = (Effective current)/(Circuit
(Wire cross section area) = (Cross section of 1
wire)× (Number of strands)
• If selecting [Phase Resistance] as the [Setting Type]
Electric part Revolution speed rpm Revolution speed per minute in a motor given the
at current current
Power Revolution speed rpm Revolution speed per minute for motor
Efficiency % Mechanical power according to input power. It is cal-
culated from the following formula.
loss) * 100
Power W Motor power
Loss Copper loss W Joule loss in the coil
Iron loss W Iron loss in the stator
Wound-Field AC Synchronous Machine and Claw Pole Alternator
 Graph
• Field current vs no-load saturation curves (OCC), ((Three phase short circuit curve (SCC), gap
line (AGL), zero power factor full load saturation curves (ZPF))
Evaluation axis: field current
No-load saturation p.u. Upward curve of the armature winding line voltage when increasing
curve (OCC) field current and rotating with no-load and at the rated speed.
Expressed with the scaling factor based on the rated voltage (effective
value).
Gap line (AGL) p.u. Curve of the extended gradient of the no-load saturation curve when
field current is around zero. Expressed with the scaling factor based on
the rated voltage (effective value).
255

Zero power factor p.u. Upward curve of the armature winding line voltage when rated short
full load saturation circuit current (effective value) with zero power factor flows through
curve (ZPF) armature windings, and increasing field current while rotating at the
rated speed. Expressed with the scaling factor based on the rated volt-
age (effective value).
Three phase short p.u. Upward curve of the line current (effective value) flowing through the
circuit curve (SCC) armature winding when increasing field current and rotating at the
rated speed with the three-phase terminal short-circuited. Expressed
with the scaling factor based on the rated short-circuit current (effec-
tive value).
 Phasor Diagram (Vector Plot)

When running at the specified revolution speed, stator voltage, stator current, and power factor
angle, figure expressing the relationship between each item and voltage vector, current vector, and
the electromotive force vector. The vertical axis is q-axis, and the horizontal axis is d-axis.
 Result Value Table (Machine Constant)

• Equivalent circuit parameters:
IFNL, IFG, short-circuit ratio, IFSI, saturated direct axis synchronous reactance, unsaturated
direct axis synchronous reactance, Gamma, electromotive force, direct axis synchronous reac-
tance, horizontal axis synchronous reactance
• Circuit characteristics:
No-load saturation curves (OCC), Three phase short circuit curve (SCC), gap line (AGL), zero
power factor full load saturation curves (ZPF)
Value of evaluation axis: field current
256

Equivalent cir- IFNL A Field current value which produces rated voltage under no
cuit parameter load condition.
IFG A Field current value when voltage on a gap line is 1.0 (p.u.).
Short circuit - Ratio of IFNL and IFSI. Defined by the following for-
ratio (SCR) mula.
SCR = IFNL/IFSI
IFSI A Field current value when armature current is the rated
short circuit current for short circuit testing.
Saturated direct p.u. Direct axis (d-axis) synchronous reactance under saturated
axis synchro- condition. Defined by the following formula.
nous reactance Xdsat = 1/SCR
(Xdsat)
Unsaturated p.u. Direct axis (d-axis) synchronous reactance under unsatu-
direct axis syn- rated condition. Defined by the following formula.
chronous reac- Xdunsat = IFSI/IFG
tance (Xdunsat)
Gamma (γ) deg Phase difference γ between back electromotive force Eq
vector and stator current vector when running at specified
power factor, stator voltage, and stator current.
When load angle, which is the phase difference between
back electromotive force Eq vector and stator voltage vec-
tor, is set as δ, it is defined with the following formula.
γ=δ+φ
δ: load angle (deg), φ: power factor angle (deg)
Equivalent cir- Electromotive V Electromotive force produced in the armature winding
cuit parameter force (Eq) when running at specified power factor, stator voltage, and
stator current.
Direct axis syn- ohm Direct axis (d-axis) synchronous reactance when running
chronous reac- at specified power factor, stator voltage, and stator current.
tance (Xd)
Horizontal axis ohm Horizontal axis (q-axis) synchronous reactance when run-
synchronous ning at specified power factor, stator voltage, and stator
reactance (Xq) current.
Circuit charac- No-load satura- p.u. Value of no-load saturation curve at the specified field cur-
teristics tion curve rent.
(OCC)
Three phase p.u. Value of three-phase short circuit curve at the specified
short circuit field current.
curve (SCC)
Gap line (AGL) p.u. Value of gap line at the specified field current.
Zero power fac- p.u. Value of zero power factor full load saturation curve at the
tor full load sat- specified field current.
uration curve
(ZPF)
257
Running Parametric Evaluation

Run evaluations of multiple cases with changes values in design parameters (geometry, winding,
drive circuit) and confirm the response.
Notes
• Only a single design parameter can be changed for each parametric evaluation.
• The following design parameter cannot be changed in the parametric evaluation.
Tab Parameters not supported
[Requirement] tab All parameters
[Dimensions] tab Gap Type, units
[Materials] tab Category
[Winding] tab Wire property/Setting Type, Go/Return of Manual Winding
[Drive] tab Mode, X-axis
[Correction] tab All parameters
Procedures
1. Open the [Characteristics] tab in the main window.
Parameters that support parametric evaluation are highlighted in yellow in the design sheet
shown in the [Characteristics] tab.
2. Click the parameters to evaluate in the design sheet.
The [Input Parameter] dialog is displayed.
3. Click .
The dialog will change from [Input Parameter] to [Parametric Range Input].
4. Select either the [Range] or [Table] method to specify the design parameter values to
evaluate.
[Range] is a method to specify evaluation values at equal intervals based on start and end values,
and the divisions of range.
[Table] directly specifies evaluation values.
MEMO Some design parameters disable the selection of [Range].
5. When [Range] is selected in step 4, specify values in [Start], [End] and [Division].
For instance, when specifying “0” for [Start], “30” for [End] and “3” for [Division],
values of “0, 10, 20, 30” will be evaluated.
6. When [Table] is selected and the design parameter is a material, select a material from
the list in each cell. For any other design parameters, input numbers into each cell.
Parametric evaluation will run.
258
[Stack Design] in the main window will automatically be enabled and evaluation results will
be added in the [Characteristics] tab.
In the design comparisons of the [Characteristics] tab, the flag for the case added after the para-
metric evaluation will be selected.
On the other hand, the flag for the current case will be deselected.
MEMO Parametric evaluation can also be executed with the following procedures.
1. Select parameters to be evaluated in the [Dimensions], [Winding], and [Drive] tab.
2. Click [Parametric Mode] .
The following steps are the same as the procedure above from step 4 onwards.
259
Performing an Evaluation Taking Into Account Temperature

Heat generation due to loss such as copper loss, iron loss, or mechanical loss can be taken into
account when evaluating motor characteristics.
Notes
• Characteristics evaluation taking into account temperature is applicable to brushless motors and
induction motors.
A thermal equivalent circuit is used for characteristics evaluation taking into account tempera-
ture. A thermal equivalent circuit is created using the copper loss in the coils, the copper loss in
the secondary conductors, and the iron loss in the stator core as heat sources. Using the tempera-
ture obtained from thermal equivalent circuit calculations, the coil resistance, secondary conduc-
tor resistance, and magnet flux are corrected.
Example of a thermal equivalent circuit

(left: brushless motor (IPM), right: induction motor)
Pjs: coil copper loss, Pjr: secondary conductor copper loss, Pis: stator core iron loss
• The values for iron loss and copper loss in the graphs displayed in the [Specifications] tab are
used as the values for the heat sources in thermal circuits. The values used are determined by the
following rules:
• When the graph X-axis is the current value or the voltage value (brushless motors):
Values according to the current value or voltage value set under [Drive Circuit] in the [Drive]
tab are used.
• When the graph X-axis is the current phase or the advance phase angle (brushless motors):
Values according to the lower limit of the current phase range set under [Drive Circuit] in the
[Drive] tab are used.
• When the graph X-axis is the rotation speed (brushless motors, induction motors):
Values according to the rotation speed set under [Setting] in the [Thermal] tab are used.
• The coil resistance and secondary conductor resistance are corrected using the following formula.
–6
R′ = R ( 1 + α × 10 ( Tr now – Tr base ) )
R' : Corrected resistance (ohm)
R : Resistance before correction (ohm)
α : The [Temperature Correction Factor, ppm/K] value for a conductive part under the [Materi-
als] tab
Tr now : Temperature during evaluation (K)
260
Tr base : The [Base Temperature, K] value for a conductive part under the [Materials] tab
• The magnet flux is corrected according to the following formula.

k
F ′ = F  1 + --------- ( Tf now – Tf base )
100
F ' : Corrected magnet flux (Wb)
F : Magnet flux before correction (Wb)
k : The [Temperature Correction Factor, %/K] value for a magnet part under the [Materials]
tab
• When calculating iron loss, the magnet flux corrected using the following equation is used.
B = B load – B 0 ( k × ( Tf now – Tf base ) )
B : Magnet flux used in iron loss calculations (Wb)
B load : Teeth or back yoke magnetic flux at load (Wb)
B 0 : Teeth or back yoke magnetic flux at no-load (Wb)
k : The [Temperature Correction Factor, %/K] value for a magnet part under the [Materials] tab
• The magnet and cage temperatures are calculated with the assumption that they are the same as
the rotor core temperature.
• The temperature distribution in the axial direction of the case and shaft is not taken into
account.
Procedures
1. Specify the motor specifications using the same procedure as when using regular char-
acterization, that is, regular characteristics evaluation.
2. Click [Temperature Evaluation] in the [Input] window.
The [Thermal] tab is displayed on the left side of the window. Under the [Thermal] tab, input
parameters such as [Evaluation Type], [Revolution Speed], [Ambient], air gap status, and [Cool-
ing Method] are displayed.
The [Thermal Model] tab is displayed on the right side of the window. Under the [Thermal
Model] tab, a thermal equivalent circuit diagram and a section of the model are displayed. Each
figure shows the relationship between the input parameters under the [Thermal] tab.
3. Specify the temperature property parameters under the [Thermal] tab.
When [Advanced Settings] on the [Thermal] tab is selected, additional parameters such as the
convection heat transfer coefficient, part thermal conductivity, and part and gap thermal resis-
tances are displayed.
See “[Thermal] Tab” on page 182 for details.
261
4. Click the [Dimensions] tab and specify the dimensional parameters for [Shaft] and
[External Case].
The [Shaft Part] and [External Case] are displayed under the [Dimensions] tab when [Tempera-
ture Evaluation] has been selected.
See “[Dimensions] Tab” on page 163 for details.
5. Click the [Materials] tab and specify the temperature correction factor for each part.
For brushless motors, the temperature correction factor for each coil part and for each magnet
part can be specified.
For induction motors, the temperature correction factor for each coil and for the cage can be
specified.
See “[Materials] Tab” on page 171 for details.
Characterization taking into account temperature is performed.
Under the [Characteristics] tab, result graphs for the characterization taking into account tem-
perature are displayed. The temperature result values are displayed in a design case table and a
characteristics table under the [Characteristics] tab.
The temperature of each part is also displayed in the model section figure and thermal equivalent
circuit diagram under the [Thermal Model] tab.
IMPORTANT Depending on the selection from the [Mode] list, the [Revolution Speed]
box may be displayed as an input parameter under the [Drive] tab. The value specified in
the [Revolution Speed] box under the [Drive] tab is entered in the [Revolution Speed] box
under the [Thermal] tab.
However, the [Revolution Speed] box under the [Drive] tab and the [Revolution Speed] box
under the [Thermal] tab are not necessarily the same value. If the [Revolution Speed] value
is changed under the [Drive] ([Thermal]) tab, change the [Revolution Speed] value under
the [Thermal] ([Drive]) tab to the same value.
262
Evaluating Motor Performance Using Maps

Efficiency maps and power maps can be created with JMAG-Express Classic.
About Maps
Using the map function, the motor operating range and efficiency and power output at each operat-
ing point can be checked. When creating a map, voltage and current limits are used.
For a brushless motor, the following maps can be displayed.
• N-T-Efficiency (efficiency map)
• N-T-Power (power map)
• N-T-TotalLoss (total loss map)
• N-T-CopperLoss (copper loss map)
• N-T-IronLoss (iron loss map)
• N-T-CopperAndIronLoss (iron loss + copper loss map)
• N-T-MechanicalLoss (mechanical loss map)
• N-T-Id (d-axis current map)
• N-T-Iq (q-axis current map)
• N-T-Iam (phase current amplitude map)
• N-T-V (line voltage amplitude map)
• N-T-PowerFactor (power factor map)
• N-T-PhaseAngle (phase angle map)
For a induction motor (three-phase/six-phase/nine-phase), the following maps can be displayed.
• N-T-Efficiency (efficiency map)
• N-T-Power (power map)
• N-T-TotalLoss (total loss map)
• N-T-CopperLoss (copper loss map)
• N-T-StatorCopperLoss (stator copper loss map)
• N-T-RotorCopperLoss (rotor copper loss map)
• N-T-IronLoss (iron loss map)
• N-T-MechanicalLoss (mechanical loss map)
• N-T-I (current map)
• N-T-V (line voltage amplitude map)
• N-T-Slip (slip map)
• N-T-PowerFactor (power factor map)
MEMO For details on physical quantities, see “Physical Quantities Used For Maps” on page 267.
Notes
• The map function is for brushless motors and induction motors (three-phase/six-phase/nine-
phase).
Single-phase induction motors, switched reluctance motors, brush motors, externally excited
263
synchronous machines, wound-field AC synchronous machines, claw pole alternators, and uni-
versal motors are not supported.
• The results for both power running and regenerative operation are displayed on one map (nega-
tive torque is displayed on the map).
• Linear interpolation is performed between operating points.
Procedures
IMPORTANT When running characteristics evaluation for brush motors, the number of
poles and brushes need to be the same.
2. When creating multiple maps, select the checkboxes for the cases in the [Graph] column
in the design case table.
Multiple maps can be created at once (up to 4 cases).
3. Click [Map] .
Or, select [Characteristics] > [Map] from the menu bar.
The [Map Setting] dialog is displayed.
4. Select the motor control method from the [Control] list.
In the current version, the control method is fixed to [Maximum Power].
5. Specify the [Maximum Voltage, V], [Maximum Current, A], and [Maximum Speed, rpm]
values for motor constraints.
If [Maximum Voltage, V], [Maximum Current, A], or [Maximum Speed, rpm] is zero, the [Cre-
ate] button will not be active.
[Maximum Voltage, V]:

Input the maximum value of the fundamental line voltage supplied from the inverter to the
motor.
When the amplitude of the phase voltage is Vph, for a star connection the motor is controlled
so that √3 × Vph <= Vmax. For a delta connection, the motor is controlled so that Vph <=
Vmax.
When the amplitude of the phase voltage is Vph, for a star connection the motor is controlled
so that √3 × Vph/√2 <= Vmax. For a delta connection, the motor is controlled so that Vph/
√2 <= Vmax.
264
Fig. Inverter circuit
[Maximum Current, A]:

Input the maximum amplitude of the line current supplied from the inverter to the motor.
When the amplitude of the phase current is Iph, for a star connection the motor is controlled
so that Iph <= Imax. For a delta connection, the motor is controlled so that Iph × √3 <= Imax.
When the amplitude of the phase current is Iph, for a star connection the motor is controlled
so that Iph/√2 <= Imax. For a delta connection, the motor is controlled so that Iph/√2/√3 <=
Imax.
[Maximum Speed, rpm]:

Specify the upper limit of the motor speed.
6. Click [Create].
The [Efficiency Map] dialog is displayed.
A map is displayed at the top of the [Efficiency Map] dialog and a table is displayed at the bot-
tom. The table shows the control method, input parameter values, efficiency and operating
range.
• The Z-axis of the map can be changed from [Data Type].
• Click [Export] to export the map and table in the [Efficiency Map] dialog to a PDF file
(.pdf ).
• After moving the mouse pointer over the map, the following icons will be displayed. With
these icons, the following operations can be performed.
Zoom Dragging the map after clicking this icon enlarges the map.
Pan Dragging the map after clicking this icon moves the map curves while
changing the display of the axes.
Zoom In Each time this icon is clicked, the map is enlarged.
Zoom Out Each time this icon is clicked, the map becomes smaller.
Fit Clicking this icon adjust the map size so that the entire map is displayed.
Toggle Spike Lines After clicking this icon and clicking on a map, the X-, Y-, and Z-axis values
of the closest operating point to the point where the mouse is positioned
appear and auxiliary lines are displayed.
265
Show Closest Data When clicking on a point on a map curve after clicking this icon, the X-,
on Hover Y-, and Z-axis values of that point appear.
Display Map Table Click this icon to display the map data table in the [Map Table] dialog.
The [Map Table] dialog displays the X-, Y-, and Z-axis values of all the
operating points in table format.
• Right-click a cell in the table to copy the data in that cell.
• When [Table] is selected from [Data Type], a table of the selected physi-
cal quantity (efficiency, power, etc.) is displayed. When [Coordinate
Value] is selected, a table of the revolution speed, torque, and selected
physical quantity (efficiency, power, etc.) at each operating point is dis-
played.
• Click [Export] to export the table displayed in the [Map Table] dialog to
a CSV file (.csv).
• When changing the rotation speed range, torque range, or operating
point interval (resolution) output to the table, change the [Max Value],
[Min Value], and/or [Division] values under [Revolution Speed Resolu-
tion] for the rotation speed range or operating point interval (or [Torque
Resolution] for the torque range or operating point interval) and click
[Apply].
Edit Map Property Click this icon to display the [Map Property] dialog.
In the [Map Property] dialog, the values of the input parameters ([Con-
trol], [Maximum Voltage], [Maximum Current], [Maximum Speed]) for
editing the map can be edited.
• It is also possible to change the range of torque values and selected physi-
cal quantity (such as efficiency or power) displayed on the map. When
changing the range, clear [Default Maximum Torque] (or [Default Mini-
mum Torque], [Default Maximum Value], or [Default Minimum
Value]), and enter a maximum value (or minimum value) of the range in
the text box.
Motor Control Method

The following control methods are supported.
Control method Description

[Maximum Power] For a brushless motor, the point at which the maximum torque is reached
is searched for while varying the current amplitude and current phase.
For an induction motor, the point at which the maximum torque is
reached is searched for while varying the current amplitude and slip.
266
Physical Quantities Used For Maps
Brushless motor
 X-axis
Revolution speed, rpm The speed of each operating point is determined by dividing the range
from 0 to [Maximum Speed, rpm] by 10. However, for the minimum
speed, use the larger of the following values.
• 1/100 of the maximum speed
• 0.1 x (Maximum speed - (Maximum speed x 1/100))/(Number of divi-
sions)
For example, if 1000 is specified for [Maximum Speed, rpm], the speed of
each operating point will be 10, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800,
900, 1000.
 Y-axis
Torque, Nm The torque value at each operating point is determined by dividing the
range from the maximum torque to the minimum torque by 40.
 Z-axis
Efficiency, % Mechanical output vs. input power.
This is calculated from the following formula.
Power running mode:
ωT – W iron – W mech
η = 100 × -------------------------------------------------
ωT + W copper
Regenerative mode:
ωT + W copper + W iron
η = 100 × -------------------------------------------------------- * ωT is a negative value.
ωT – W mech
η : efficiency (%)
ω : angular velocity (rad/s). ( N : revolution speed (rpm))
T : torque (Nm). Value calculated from FEA.
W iron : iron loss (W)
W mech : mechanical loss (W)
267

Power, W Motor power.
Power running mode:
L = P – W iron – W mech
Regenerative mode:
L : power (output value) (W)

P : input power (W) ( P = T 0 ω )

T 0 : torque (Nm) calculated without taking iron loss into account
ω : angular velocity (rad/s)

Total loss, W Total of copper loss, iron loss and mechanical loss
Copper loss, W Loss generated in the coil windings
Iron loss, W Loss generated in the stator
Mechanical loss, W Mechanical loss calculated from the following formula.
LF
W mech = ------------ × N
1000
LF : loss factor (W/k rpm). [Loss Factor] is set under the [Drive] tab.
N : rotor rotation speed (rpm)
Id, A d-axis current
Iq, A q-axis current
Iam, A Line current amplitude
Line voltage peak, V Peak value of the line voltage between the U-phase and V-phase
Phase angle, deg The electrical angle difference between the d-axis of the rotor and the U-
phase coil axis at the initial position of the rotor
Induction motor
T-type equivalent circuit for the induction motor
268
 X-axis
Revolution speed, rpm The speed of each operating point is determined by dividing the range
from 0 to [Maximum Speed, rpm] by 40. However, for the minimum
speed, use the larger of the following values.
• 1/200 of the maximum speed
• 0.2 x (Maximum speed - (Maximum speed x 1/200))/(Number of divi-
sions)
 Y-axis
Torque, Nm The torque value at each operating point is determined by dividing the
range from the maximum torque to the minimum torque by 40.
 Z-axis
Efficiency, % Mechanical output vs. input power.
Power running mode:
ωT – W mech
η = 100 × --------------------------------------------------------
ωT + W copper + W iron
Regenerative mode:
ωT
η = 100 × -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ωT – W copper – W iron – W mech
η : efficiency (%)
ω : angular velocity (rad/s). ω = 2π × N ⁄ 60 ( N : rotor rotation speed
(rpm))
T : torque (Nm) calculated from the equivalent circuit. This value takes
into account copper and iron losses.
269

Power, W Motor power.
Power running mode:
L = P – W mech
Regenerative mode:
L = P + W mech
L : power (output value) (W)

P : input power (W) ( P = T 0 ω )
T 0 : torque (Nm) calculated without taking into account mechanical loss

Total loss, W Total of copper loss, iron loss and mechanical loss
Copper loss, W Total of stator copper loss and rotor copper loss
Stator copper loss, W Loss generated in the coil windings used in the stator (primary resistance
loss)
Rotor copper loss, W Loss generated in the cage used in the rotor (secondary resistance loss)
Iron loss, W Loss generated in the stator
Mechanical loss, W Mechanical loss calculated from the following formula.
LF
W mech = ------------ × N
1000
LF : loss factor (W/k rpm). [Loss Factor] is set under the [Drive] tab.
Voltage, V Line voltage amplitude
Current, A Line current amplitude
Slip Ratio of rotor rotation speed to stator rotation speed.
N
s = 1 – ------
Ns
s : slip
N s : synchronous speed (rpm)
270
Exporting Evaluation Results for Control Circuit Simulation (JMAG-

RT Models)
A data for control circuit simulation that includes motor properties such as flux linkage/inductance
of coil, resistance can be created using the evaluation results of JMAG-Express Classic. This data is
referred to as a JMAG-RT model.
A JMAG-RT model can be placed in a circuit diagram as a component before running a control cir-
cuit simulation. With this setting, motor characteristics, including geometry and materials, can be
taken into account in a control circuit simulation.

• Supported Control Circuit Simulators (page 271)
• Process of Control Circuit Simulation Using JMAG-Express Classic (page 272)
Notes
• This function supports the following models.
• Three-phase brushless motor
• Three-phase induction motor:
* Coupling with Simulink is supported. Coupling with PSIM is not supported.
* Coupling with Simulink is supported. Coupling with PSIM is not supported.
JMAG-RT models cannot be created for single-phase induction motors, brush motors, externally
excited synchronous machines, wound-field AC synchronous machines, claw pole alternator, and
universal motors.
• A JMAG-RT model which accounts for iron loss is created for brushless motors. For other
motors, iron loss is not accounted for.
• Other than JMAG-Express Classic, motor models for JMAG-RT can be created on JMAG-RT.
The results may differ when JMAG-Express Classic and JMAG-RT use the same analysis model
to create a motor model for JMAG-RT that is referring to a circuit simulator. The difference is
that JMAG-RT prioritizes calculation accuracy and JMAG-Express Classic uses calculation speed
in which the results may change. The file exported from JMAG-Express Classic is used as a stan-
dard when obtaining a numerical value to be used for simulation, and the file exported from
JMAG-RT is used to obtain precise results.
Supported Control Circuit Simulators

The following types of circuit simulators are supported.
 JMAG-Designer
Version 18.0 or later is required.
Create a control circuit with Circuit Editor and add the JMAG-RT Model component. Set JMAG-
RTT model data file to refer to that JMAG-RT Model component.
For details, see the explanation of the JMAG-RT Model component in “Parameter Explanation Edi-
tion”.
271
 MATLAB/Simulink (32 bit/ 64 bit)

Version R2006b or later is required.
SimPowerSystems is required to run a control circuit simulation using Simulink (electric signal
input).
For details about Simulink (electric signal input), see “Process of Control Circuit Simulation Using
JMAG-Express Classic” on page 272.
 PSIM (32 bit/ 64 bit)

Version 7.1.2 or later and MagCoupler-RT option are required.
For information about MagCoupler-RT option, please contact the distributor of PSIM.
Process of Control Circuit Simulation Using JMAG-Express Classic

A control circuit simulation using the results of JMAG-Express can be performed as follows:

2. Click [Create JMAG-RT Model] .

Or, select [File] > [Create JMAG-RT Model] from the menu bar.
The [Create JMAG-RT Model] dialog is displayed.
3. Click [Reference], and specify the destination folder and file name.
A JMAG-RT model is exported as a RTT file (.rtt).
4. A file other than a JMAG-RT model (.rtt) may be necessary when using a JMAG-RT
model in MATLAB/Simulink.
To export these files with a JMAG-RT model, select [Copy Files Required for Simulator],
and select the simulator that is currently used from the [Simulator Type] list.
• [Simulink (electric signal input)]:
(files to be copied: _Ein.mdl, .mexw64)
Select this type when connecting JMAG-RT model blocks to electric circuits in Simulink. For
this type, Simscape is required in addition to MATLAB/Simulink.
• [Simulink (electric signal input, Specialized Power Systems)]:
(files to be copied: .mdl, .mexw64)
this type, Simscape and Simscape Electrical are required in addition to MATLAB/Simulink.
• [Simulink (voltage signal input)]:
(files to be copied: _Vin.mdl, .mexw64)
Select this type when voltage control signals are input to each coil in the JMAG-RT model
block in Simulink. In this type, the JMAG-RT model block outputs the torque/electromag-
netic force and the current flowing in each phase of the coil.
• [Simulink (current signal input)]:
(files to be copied: _Iin.mdl, .mexw64)
netic force.
272
• [PSIM]:
(files to be copied: .xml)
Select this type when connecting JMAG-RT model blocks to electric circuits in PSIM. This
type cannot be selected in JMAG-RT Linux version.
MEMO A set of files that are exported with a RTT file is given the same name as RTT file.
MEMO A set of files that are exported with a RTT file needs to be saved in the same folder. If these
files are not located in the same folder, a control circuit simulation is not run correctly.
MEMO Only the files that are exported from the same version of JMAG-Express Classic can be used.
Only the files exported from the same version of Express can be used for a control circuit simulation.
MEMO When using the JMAG-RT model with JMAG-Designer Circuit Editor, clear [Copy Files
Required for Simulator].
5. Select [Enter Motor Information] to enable the display in JMAG-RT Viewer.
The motor information is displayed when RTT file is opened in JMAG-RT Viewer. These items
do not affect the model creation process of Express.
MEMO For details about JMAG-RT Viewer, see JMAG website (https://www.jmag-interna-
tional.com/).
6. Click [OK].
Motor characteristics are evaluated, and then a JMAG-RT model is created using the evaluation
results.
7. Create a circuit diagram or a block diagram for a circuit simulator to position a JMAG-RT
model.
8. Specify the properties for a JMAG-RT model to run a control circuit simulation.
273
274
Using Data Created in JMAG-Express Classic in Other
Software Applications
This chapter describes the steps and Notes for using data of motors designed in JMAG-Express Classic with
JMAG-Designer and other software.

• Exporting Designed Motors to a File (page 276)
• Calculating Designed Motors in JMAG-Designer (page 278)
• Sending Designed Motors to JMAG-Designer (page 279)
• Notes on Using Data Exported from JMAG-Express Classic with JMAG-Designer (page 282)
275
Exporting Designed Motors to a File

Export motor geometry designed in JMAG-Express Classic and specification data to a file. Exported
files can be imported into JMAG-Designer and commercial CAD software.
1. To export JCF or JPROJ files, set up the following items in advance as needed.
• When [Do Not Use Adaptive Analysis] is selected in the [Drive] tab:
Can specify whether or not to use the Adaptive Mesh function.
When [Do Not Use Adaptive Analysis] is not selected and a data file is imported into JMAG-
Designer, [Use Adaptive Mesh Control] is selected in the [Mesh Properties] dialog in JMAG-
Designer.
MEMO For details on the Adaptive Mesh function, see “JMAG User's Manual Parameter Expla-
nation Edition”.
• For [Revolution Speed, rpm] for induction motors and brush motors:
Specify the rotor revolution speed. The specified revolution speed is used in the Rotation
Motion condition.
2. Select [File] > [Save As] from the menu bar in the main window.
The [Save As] dialog is displayed.
3. Select the file format to export from the [File Type] list.
The following options can be selected.
• JMAG-Designer Project File (.jproj):
This is a JMAG-Designer project file which includes settings information for geometry,
mesh, materials, and conditions. For details about exported JPROJ files, see “Notes on Using
Data Exported from JMAG-Express Classic with JMAG-Designer” on page 282.
• JCF File (.jcf ):
This is an input file for JMAG product shared calculations which includes settings informa-
tion for geometry, mesh, materials, and conditions. For details about exported JCF files, see
“Notes on Using Data Exported from JMAG-Express Classic with JMAG-Designer” on page
282.
• DXF file (.dxf ):
One of the file formats for saving CAD data developed by Autodesk.
• JMAG-MotorTemplate files (.jmd), Parameter File (.csv):
These file formats are for using data in JMAG-Express Classic. For details, see “Export the
Entered Specifications to a File” on page 229.
MEMO In the case of a claw pole alternator, JCF File (.jcf ) and DXF File (.dxf ) can not be selected.
4. Specify the directory to save the file in the [Save in] list.
5. Specify a file name in the [File Name] box.
6. Set the option as needed when [JCF File] or [JMAG-Designer Project File] is selected in
[File Type].
• [Partial Model]:
This option can be used when [JCF File] or [JMAG-Designer Project File] is selected.
• When [Partial Model] is selected, the minimum geometry to be analyzed is decided based
on the information such as periodicity of the geometry, magnetic field distribution, and
winding settings, and only that part is saved in a file.
276
Using Data Created in JMAG-Express Classic in Other Software Applications
• When [Full Model] is selected, the state displayed on the JMAG-Express Classic main
screen is saved in a file as is.
• [Model Dimension]:
This option can be used when [JMAG-Designer Project File] is selected.
• When [2D Model] is selected, save it as a 2D geometry in a file.
• When [3D Model] is selected, expand the model to 3D using the [HEIGHT: Stack
Height] value of the [Dimensions] tab, then save in a file.
• [Create Coil End]:
This option can be used when both [JMAG-Designer Project File] and [3D Model] are
selected.
When [Create Coil End] is selected, the end windings are modeled using the coil templates of
the Geometry Editor, then saved in a file.
MEMO When modeling the end windings, each setting in the [HEIGHT: Stack Height] of the
JMAG-Express Classic [Dimensions] tab or [Coil] tab is referenced.
MEMO [Create Coil End] is not available when [Manual] is selected in the [Winding] of the JMAG-
Express Classic [Winding] tab.
7. Click [Save].
The designed motor is exported to a file.
277
Calculating Designed Motors in JMAG-Designer

Import motor geometry designed in JMAG-Express Classic and specification data into JMAG-
Designer, and then perform a magnetic field analysis using JMAG-Designer.
1. Set the following items in JMAG-Express Classic in advance as needed.

Designer.
nation Edition”.
Motion condition.
2. Click [Calc in Designer] in the main window.

Selecting [Characteristics] > [Calc in Designer] from the menu bar in the main window also dis-
plays the settings.
The [Model Export Option] dialog is displayed.
3. Specify the options of [Model Dimension], [Create Coil End], and [Partial Model] as
required.
For details on each option, see step 6 for “Exporting Designed Motors to a File” on page 276.
4. Click [OK].
The motor designed with JMAG-Express Classic will be added to the project of the JMAG-
Designer that linked with JMAG-Express Classic. If there is no JMAG-Designer that linked with
JMAG-Express Classic, start JMAG-Designer newly and send the motor there.
Continuously, analysis is executed in JMAG-Designer.
MEMO Conditions and circuits are set for the motor sent to JMAG-Designer based on the setting
on JMAG-Express Classic. For details on the settings, see “Notes on Using Data Exported from
JMAG-Express Classic with JMAG-Designer” on page 282.
278
Sending Designed Motors to JMAG-Designer

Import motor geometry designed in JMAG-Express Classic and specification data into JMAG-
Designer.
• Procedures for Using JMAG-Express Classic as a Stand-alone (page 279)
• Procedures for Starting JMAG-Express Classic from JMAG-Designer (page 280)
Notes
• For these described procedures, once motors have been imported from JMAG-Express Classic to
JMAG-Designer, they can no longer be edited in JMAG-Express Classic.
• Constraints and features set to geometry in JMAG-Express Classic are also inherited by the
geometry imported into JMAG-Designer's Geometry Editor. However, when geometry is
imported into the Geometry Editor, fillet constraints set in JMAG-Express Classic are replaced
with radius/diameter constraints and tangential constraints. Similarly, chamfer constraints are
replaced with distance constraints and angle constraints.
MEMO For details about settings for the file imported into JMAG-Designer, see “Notes on Using
Data Exported from JMAG-Express Classic with JMAG-Designer” on page 282.
Procedures for Using JMAG-Express Classic as a Stand-alone
Importing to JMAG-Designer
1. Set the following items in JMAG-Express Classic as needed.

Designer.
nation Edition”.
Motion condition.
2. Select [Tool] > [Send to JMAG-Designer] from the menu bar in the main window.
required.
4. Click [OK].
The model that is created in JMAG-Express Classic is imported as a new model in the treeview
of JMAG-Designer.
279
Releasing a link with JMAG-Designer

Release a link between JMAG-Designer and JMAG-Express Classic.
MEMO JMAG-Designer and JMAG-Express Classic are automatically linked at the following timing.
• When starting JMAG-Express Classic from JMAG-Designer
• When sending a motor designed from JMAG-Express Classic to JMAG-Designer
1. Select [Tool] > [Close JMAG-Designer Link] from the menu bar in the main window.
A message “Exit the link to JMAG-Designer. OK?” is displayed.
2. Click [OK].
The JMAG-Designer linked with JMAG-Express Classic exits.
IMPORTANT When JMAG-Designer is terminated by releasing a link with JMAG-Express
Classic, JMAG-Designer's project is not saved automatically. If necessary, save the project
before releasing the link.
Procedures for Starting JMAG-Express Classic from JMAG-Designer
Importing to JMAG-Designer
1. Set the following items in JMAG-Express Classic in advance as needed.

Designer.
nation Edition”.
Motion condition.
2. Right-click [Motor Model] in the [Project Manager] of JMAG-Designer, and select
[Import].
required.
4. Click [OK].
The model that is created in JMAG-Express Classic is imported as a new model in the treeview
of JMAG-Designer.
280
Importing to Geometry Editor

The following operations can be performed when using the geometry editor in JMAG-Designer.
• Converting motor designed in JMAG-Express Classic into a 3D model
• Creating a new model based on a model designed in JMAG-Express Classic
1. In the JMAG-Designer [Project Manager] tree, right-click a model and select [Change
Link to Geometry Editor].
2. In the JMAG-Designer [Project Manager] tree, right-click the model, and select [Update
Model] when importing a geometry edited in the Geometry Editor into JMAG-Designer.
281
Notes on Using Data Exported from JMAG-Express Classic with

JMAG-Designer
This section explains parameter relationship between JMAG-Express Classic and JMAG-Designer as
well as Notes when importing data created in JMAG-Express Classic into JMAG-Designer or send-
ing data from JMAG-Express Classic to JMAG-Designer.
• For a partial model, the minimum geometry to be analyzed is decided based on the information
such as periodicity of the geometry, magnetic field distribution, and winding settings, and only
that part is exported to a file.
• Partial models can also be set on circuits and not just geometries.
• A JCF file exported by JMAG-Express Classic cannot run an analysis in JMAG-Scheduler of
JMAG-Designer, without setting certain specifications. Import the JCF file into JMAG-
Designer, and then run the analysis.
• For a brushless motor, induction motor (three-phase/six-phase/nine-phase), switched reluctance
motor, externally excited synchronous motor, or wound-field AC synchronous machine, if 2 or
more is selected for [Parallel Number] under the [Winding] tab (or the [Field Coil] tab), for each
phase this number of FEM Coil components are arranged in parallel.
If 2 or more is selected in [Parallel Number], JCF files output from JMAG-Express Classic can-
not be used with tools such as the Calculate PM Motor Inductance tool and JMAG-RT. To use
JCF files output from JMAG-Express Classic with these tools, select 1 in [Parallel Number].
Geometry
• For 3D and partial models, a model of half the size of the [HEIGHT: Stack Height] value of the
[Dimensions] tab is created in the rotation axis direction. When [Create Coil End] is selected,
the end windings are created only for the upper coil.
• For 3D and full models, a model will be created using the value of [HEIGHT: Stack Height] of
the [Dimensions] tab. When [Create Coil End] is selected, the end windings are created both for
the upper and lower coils.
Study Properties
 Step control
Motor type Settings for the step control
Brushless motor, exter- Steps for two periods of cogging are set.
nally excited synchro- • [Regular Interval]
nous machine, wound- • [Start Time]: 0 (s)
field AC synchronous
• [End Time]: 1/revolution speed (rps)
machine
• [Divisions]: 16* (the least common multiple of the number of poles and
slots.)
• [Steps]: 33
282
Motor type Settings for the step control

Induction motor Steps for half period of mechanical angle are set.
• [Regular Interval]
• [Start Time]: 0 (s)
• [Divisions]: 4* (the number of slots.)
• [Steps]: (the number of slots)*0.5*4
Switched reluctance The step for an electrical angle (1period) is specified.
motor • [Regular Interval]
• [Divisions]: 90*360/(mechanical angle in electrical angle (1 period))
• [Steps]: 90
Brush motor, universal Steps for 2 slots are set.
motor • [Regular Interval]
• [End Time]: 1/ (revolution speed (rps))
• [Divisions]: 16* (the number of slots)
• [Steps]: 33
MEMO If you want to analyze one period of electrical angle, modify the step control settings in JMAG-
Designer.
 Full model conversion

The [Stack Length] and unit of measurement needs to be confirmed, and then modified as neces-
sary. [Length of FEM Coil/Conductor] also needs to be confirmed, and then modified as necessary.
 Circuit conversion
The conversion factor is determined by the settings in [Parallel Number]/[Series Number] (or [Coil
Connection]) under the [Winding] tab.
MEMO For induction motors and wound-field AC synchronous machines, circuit conversion is always
unselected.
 Solver calculation control

Motor type Solver control settings
Induction motor • [Steady-state Approximate Transient Analysis]: ON
• [Induction Motor]: ON
• [Slip]: Use the value calculated from the following formula.
Synchronous speed = 120 * power supply frequency/number of poles
Slip = (Synchronous speed - revolution speed)/synchronous speed
283
Conditions
 Boundary conditions
• The Periodic Boundary condition settings are based on the setting for [Boundary Edge] for
[Edge] in the [Model] tab of the editor window.
• For 3D and partial models, the Symmetry Boundary condition is set to the XY plane.
 Motion conditions
• [Initial Position] of the Motion condition uses the value for [Advance Phase Angle] that is auto-
matically calculated based on the winding settings in the [Winding] tab of the main window and
[d-axis Direction] for [Edge] in the [Model] tab of the editor window.
• [Constant Revolution Speed] of the Motion condition uses the value for [Rotational Speed] in
the [Drive] tab of the main window.
Circuit
Brushless Motor
MEMO When exporting data, the setting of [X-axis] on the [Drive] tab of the main window is ignored.
 Winding
Settings are exported as Winding Multiphase Coil components.
• When 2 or more is selected in [Parallel Number] in the [Winding] tab, FEM Coil components
are arranged in parallel for each phase.
 Drive
When [Current] is selected for [Mode] in the [Drive] tab of the main window, settings are exported
as Three-phase Current Source components.
• [X-axis Type] is set to [Angle].
• In [Amplitude], the value [Line Current (AMP), A] specified in JMAG-Express Classic is used.
• [Phase (electrical angle)] is set to the value specified for [Current Phase, deg] in JMAG-Express
Classic.
• The number of output Three-phase Current Source components changes depending on [Phase]
in the [Winding] tab, with one output for three-phase, two for six-phase, and three for nine-
phase.
When [Voltage (Sin)] is selected for [Mode] in the [Drive] tab of the main window, settings are ex-
ported as Three-phase Electric Potential Source components.
• [X-axis Type] is set to [Angle].
• In [Amplitude], the value of phase voltage (amplitude) calculated from [Line Voltage (AMP), V]
specified in JMAG-Express Classic is used.
• [Phase (electrical angle)] is set to the value specified for [Current Phase, deg] in JMAG-Express
Classic.
phase.
284
When [Voltage (120 deg)] is selected for [Mode] in the [Drive] tab of the main window:
Settings are exported as Electric Potential Source (1 Terminal) components and PAM inverter
(diode) macro components.
• For Electric Potential Source component(1 Terminal), [X-axis Type] is [Time], and [Function] is
[Constant]. In [Constant], the value of phase voltage (amplitude) calculated from [Line Voltage
(AMP), V] specified in JMAG-Express Classic is used.
Induction Motor (Three-phase/Six-phase/Nine-phase)
 Winding
Settings are exported as Winding Multiphase Coil components.
 Drive
The settings are exported as a Three-phase Electric Potential Source component and a Cage macro
component.
• For Three-phase Electric Potential Source component, [X-axis Type] is [Time]. [Amplitude, V]
and [Frequency, F] use the values specified in JMAG-Express Classic. [Phase, θ] is “0”.
phase.
• For the [X-axis Type] of Resistor components included in Cage macro components, [Constant]
and the value specified in JMAG-Express Classic are used.
However, Cage macro components do not support circuit conversions. Due to this, when out-
putting a partial model of an induction motor, power supply voltage and winding resistance are
output as values depending on the number of series and parallels (values for when circuit conver-
sion is not used). For example, for 2 series, power supply voltage and winding resistance are 1/2
the value.
Single-Phase Induction Motor
 Winding
The coil area is exported as FEM Coil component.
 Drive
The drive area is exported as Electric Potential Source (1 Terminal) component and Cage macro
component. Each parameter is set as follows:
• [X-axis type] of Electric Potential Source component (1 Terminal) is [Time]. [Frequency, F] uses
the values specified in JMAG-Express Classic. [Phase, θ] is “0”.
• The [X-axis Type] of Resistor components included in Cage macro components is [Constant].
285
 Winding
The winding is exported as a FEM Coil component, Diode component, and Switch components for
each phase.
• FEM Coil components are positioned for each phase in parallel when [Parallel] is selected in
[Coil Connection] of the [Winding] tab.
• FEM Coil components are always positioned in a series when combinations of series -parallel is
selected in [Coil Connection] of the [Winding] tab.
 Drive
The drive area is exported as electric potential source (1-terminal) component. The Resistor compo-
nent is outputted as an internal resistance for the power supply.
Brush Motor
 Winding
The coil area is exported as macro component (lap winding or wave winding).
 Drive
The drive area is exported as electric potential source (1-terminal) component and Brush/Commu-
tator component.
Externally Excited Synchronous Machine
 Stator side
Winding
Settings are exported as winding multi-phase coil components.
Drive
When [Current] is selected in [Mode] in the [Drive] tab, Three-phase Current Source components
are output.
• [X-axis Type] is [Angle].
• In [Amplitude], the value [Line Current (Amp), A] specified in JMAG-Express Classic is used.
• [Phase (electrical angle)] uses the [Current Phase, deg] value specified in JMAG-Express Classic.
phase.
When [Voltage (Sin)] is selected in [Mode] in the [Drive] tab, Three-phase Electric Potential Source
components are output.
• In [Amplitude], the value of phase voltage (amplitude) calculated from the value of [Line Voltage
(peak), V] specified in JMAG-Express Classic is used.
286
phase.
When [Voltage (120deg)] is selected in [Mode] in the [Drive] tab, Three-phase Electric Potential
Source (1 Terminal) components are output.
• In [Amplitude], the value of phase voltage (amplitude) calculated from the value of [Line Voltage
(peak), V] specified in JMAG-Express Classic is used.
phase.
 Rotor side
Winding
Output as a macro component (field coil).
• When [Parallel] is selected as [Coil Connection] in the [Field Coil] tab, FEM Coil components
are placed in parallel for each phase.
MEMO Macro components (field coil) are for JMAG-Express Classic only.
Drive
Output as Current Source (1 Terminal) component.
• The [X-axis Type] of the Current Source (1 Terminal) component is [Time], and [Function] is
[Constant].
• In [Constant], the value [Field Current, A] specified in JMAG-Express Classic is used.
Wound-Field AC Synchronous Machine
 Stator side
Winding
• When [Delta] is selected as the [Connect Method] in the [Winding] tab, a macro component
(delta connection) is output.
• When [Star] is selected as the [Connect Method] in the [Winding] tab, a macro component (star
connection) is output.
• If 2 or more is selected in [Parallel Number] under the [Winding] tab, FEM Coil components
Drive
Output as a Three-phase Electric Potential Source component.
• The [X-axis Type] for a Three-phase Electric Potential Source component is [Angle]. [Ampli-
tude], [Frequency], and [Phase] are “0”.
287
 Rotor side
Winding
Output as a Filed Coil macro component. For models with a damper bar, a Cage macro component
is output.
• If 2 or more is selected in [Parallel Number] under the [Field Coil] tab, FEM Coil components
• The [Type] of Resistor components included in Cage macro components is [Constant].
MEMO Macro components (field coil) are for JMAG-Express Classic only.
Drive
Output as Current Source (1 Terminal) component.
• The [X-axis Type] of the Current Source (1 Terminal) component is [Time], and [Function] is
[Constant]. In [Constant], the value [Maximum Field Current, A] specified in JMAG-Express
Classic is used.
Universal Motor
 Winding
The coil area is exported as a macro component (Lap Winding or Wave Winding) and FEM Coil
component.
 Drive
The drive area is exported as Electric Potential Source (1 Terminal) component and Brush/Commu-
tator component.
Mesh
• The adaptive mesh control settings depend on the setting of [Do Not Use Adaptive Analysis] in
the [Drive] tab of the main window.
288
Using Data Created in Third-party Software in JMAG-
Express Classic
This chapter describes the steps and Notes for using geometry in JMAG-Express Classic that was created in the
Geometry Editor or other commercial CAD software.

• Evaluating Geometries Created in commercial CAD software with JMAG-Express Classic (page 290)
• Creating a Template Using the Geometry Created with the Geometry Editor and commercial CAD software
(page 296)
289
Evaluating Geometries Created in commercial CAD software with

Motor geometries created with commercial CAD software can be directly imported and evaluated in
DXF file formats in JMAG-Express Classic.
MEMO To modify the dimensions of geometry in JMAG-Designer that was created in the Geometry
Editor or other commercial CAD software, the geometry must be saved as a template (save the dimen-
sion values as parameters). For details, see “Creating a Template Using the Geometry Created with the
Geometry Editor and commercial CAD software” on page 296.
• Notes Regarding the Use of This Function (page 290)

• Notes for Creating Geometries (page 291)
Notes Regarding the Use of This Function

• This function cannot be used in claw pole alternator and universal motor.
• For motor models created by directly loading DXF files, dimension values that can be edited in
the [Dimensions] tab of the main window are limited to [OUTD: Outside Diameter] and
[HEIGHT: Stack Height].
To increase the dimension values that can be edited, set constraints for the model.
In that case, [Cut Out Partial Model] needs to be run to convert the geometry to minimal units
required in the evaluation. Minimal geometry required for evaluation are one pole for rotors and
one slot for stators.
See following pages:
• “Creating a Template Using the Geometry Created with the Geometry Editor and com-
mercial CAD software” on page 296
• “[Constraint] Tab (Constraint/Feature)” on page 215
• “Manually Create the Region” on page 300
290
Using Data Created in Third-party Software in JMAG-Express Classic
Notes for Creating Geometries

Take note of the following when creating motor geometry using the JMAG-Designer Geometry
Editor or commercial CAD software.
• For these described procedures, JMAG-Express Classic can import geometry from a DXF file
(.dxf ).
• 3D geometry cannot be imported into JMAG-Express Classic.
• Create a full model.
• Include geometries of both the stator and rotor side to one file.
• JMAG-Express Classic can import at a state where layers in the DXF file are integrated.
• JMAG-Express Classic can import the following entity types from DXF files.
LINE, ARC, CIRCLE, POLYLINE, LWPOLYLINE
• Regions are automatically created when DXF files are imported to JMAG-Express Classic. How-
ever, the region may not be created since the intersecting point of the entities is not regarded as
being connected. For this case, change [Merge Vertex Tolerance] and create the region manually.
MEMO Merge vortex tolerance can be specified even during DXF file import.
MEMO To create the region manually, see “Manually Create the Region” on page 300.
Procedures
1. Create motor geometry with commercial CAD software and save as a DXF file.
See “Notes for Creating Geometries” on page 291.
2. Run JMAG-Express Classic.
For details, see “Starting JMAG-Express Classic” on page 142.
3. Click the same type of motor as the geometry created in the template window of JMAG-
Express Classic (example: brushless motor (IPM), induction motor).
4. Click [Import DXF File].
5. Specify the file of step 1. Furthermore, enter the distance of two vertices in the [Merge
Vertex Tolerance] box so they are recognized as connected (same vertex).
The vertices are merged when the distance between the two vertices are below the value specified
in the [Merge Vertex Tolerance] box and assumed to have “vertices overlapping.”
6. Click [Open].
The geometry is loaded and displayed in the template editor window. Regions are automatically
generated for the loaded geometry. On the left of each item displayed in the [Parts] tree of the
[Model] tab, an icon meaning “Not Set” is displayed .
MEMO Manually create the region by selecting [Edit] > [Create Region] from the menu bar when a
region is not created in the loaded geometry.
7. Specify settings for each item displayed in the [Parts] tree of the [Model] tab.
The items displayed in the [Parts] tree differ depending on the type of motor.
[Origin]
Specify the center of the motor model.
291
Click [Origin] of the [Parts] tree. The [Target Vertex] list is displayed, so click the center of the
model of the [Editor] tab. Then, click [Apply].
MEMO When the origin of the global coordinate system of the loaded geometry matches the center
of the model, [Origin] settings are unnecessary.
[Stator Core], [Rotor Core]

Click [Stator Core] or [Rotor Core] of the [Parts] tree. The [Target Regions] list is displayed so
click the region of the stator core or rotor core on the [Editor] tab. Then, click [Apply].
MEMO After clicking [Apply], the icon meaning “Not Set” displayed on the left of the [Stator
Core] or [Rotor Core] of the [Parts] tree under the [Model] tab changes to the icon meaning “Already
Set.”
[Stator Magnet], [Rotor Magnet]

Specify the magnet for brushless motors and brush motors.
Click [Stator Magnet] or [Rotor Magnet] in the [Parts] tree. Specify the number of poles in the
[Number of Poles] box. Next, click inside the [Target Regions] list and click the region of the
magnet in the [Editor] tab. Click [Apply] after specifying the magnetization direction if neces-
sary.
For details on specifying the magnetization direction, see “[Model] Tab” on page 209.
[Coil]
Click [Coil] of the [Parts] tree. Specify the number of slots in the [Number of Slots] box. Next,
select either [Create Region] or [Select Region] depending on the coil regions of the imported
geometry, and then specify the parameters.
Click [Apply] to finish specifying the parameters.
• [Create Region]:
Select [Create Region] when the coil region of the loaded geometry is not separated into two.
Furthermore, specify the following parameters.
• [Slot Side Diameter]:
For inner rotors, specify the inner diameter of the coil region. For outer rotors, specify the
outer diameter of the coil region. These values determine the width of the coil region in
the radial direction.
• [Start Angle (Teeth)]:
Enter the angle of the center position of the teeth from the X-axis.
The small circles show the center position of each coil region in the circumferential direction.
The large circle shows the inner diameter of coil regions for inner rotors, and the outer-diam-
eter (The value input in the [Slot Side Diameter] box) for outer rotors.
If the displayed position is correct, click [Apply].
292
Center position of each coil region
[Slot Side Diameter]
Left: Example settings (for an inner rotor)

Right: Enlarged view of a slot
• [Select Region]:
Select [Select Region] when the region of the coil parts in the loaded geometry is separated to
two. Furthermore, click the [Coil Layer 1] list, and click one of the regions included in [Coil
Layer 1] of the [Editor] tab. Click also on one of the regions for [Coil Layer 2] with the same
method.
Specify [Coil Layer 1] and [Coil Layer 2] to the coil region in the first slot from the X-axis in
the counter-clockwise direction. Slot ID (1, 2, ...) is assigned in the counter-clockwise direc-
tion from the specified coil region.
Once the layer has been specified, the position of the coil region recognized in JMAG-Express
Classic will be displayed. If the displayed position is correct, click [Apply].
Coil Layer 2
Coil Layer 1
Example
[Field Coil]
Specify the field coil for externally excited synchronous machines and wound-field AC synchro-
nous machines.
293
Click [Field Coil] in the [Parts] tree. Specify the number of poles using the [Number of Poles]
box. Next, click in-side the [Field Coil Layer 1] list, and click one of the regions included in the
field coil layer 1 in the [Editor] tab. Click also on one of the regions for [Field Coil Layer 2] with
the same method. Click [Apply] after the parameters are specified.
[Cage]
Specify the cage for induction motors.
First click [Cage] of the [Parts] tree. Specify the number of bars in the [Number of Bars] box.
Next, click inside the [Target Regions] list and click the region of the bar in the [Editor] tab.
Click [Apply].
[d-Axis]
Specify the d-axis direction for brushless motors, brush motors, externally excited synchronous
machines, and wound-field AC synchronous machines.
Click [d-Axis] of the [Parts] tree. The [Target Edge] list is displayed so click the edge of the
model in the [Editor] tab. Click [Apply].
MEMO Information of current phase 0 degrees is required for motor evaluation, so be sure to specify
the d-Axis direction. If the d-axis is not set, it is positioned at (360/(number of poles)*2) degrees
counterclockwise from the X-axis.
[Teeth Position]
Specify the teeth position for switched reluctance motors. The vertex specified as the teeth posi-
tion will be reference in determining the facing position of the salient poles for the rotor and sta-
tor.
Click the [Teeth Position] of the [Parts] tree. The [Target Vertex] list is displayed so click each
vertex positioned in the center of the salient pole on the rotor side and the stator side in the [Edi-
tor] tab. Click [Apply].
Example: Three-phase switched reluctance motor

Set the [Teeth Position] to the vertex of the arrow.
Specifying damper bar (damping winding)

To use models with a damper bar, it must be added to the [Parts] tree because damper bars are
not displayed in the [Parts] tree by default.
Selecting [Rotor] in the [Parts] tree and then clicking adds a new part named “Untitled” to
the [Parts] tree. Enter a name in [Name], and select [Damper Bar] as [Material Type]. Specify the
number of bars for one pole with the [Number of Bars] box.
Next, click inside the [Target Regions] list and click the region of the bar in the [Editor] tab.
Click [Apply] after the parameters are specified.
294
8. Confirm that the “Already Set” icon is displayed for several items that are displayed in
the [Model] tab.
MEMO Items that were “Not Set ” in the main window will not be loaded when “Not Set” icons
are ignored.
9. Click [Back to Main Window] .

Or, select [File] > [Back to Main Window] from the menu bar.
10.Specify items of each tab in the main window and run evaluation.
For details about evaluation, see “Running a Characteristics Evaluation” on page 238.
MEMO Select [Template] > [Register to Database] from the menu bar on the main window to save
input specifications as a user-defined template.
295
Creating a Template Using the Geometry Created with the

Geometry Editor and commercial CAD software
Import the geometry created in the JMAG-Designer Geometry Editor or other commercial CAD
software, save it as a geometry template, and then register it to the database.
MEMO Geometry does not need to be saved as a template (save the dimension values as parameters)
when not changing the dimensions in JMAG-Express Classic. Perform the procedures for “Evaluating
Geometries Created in commercial CAD software with JMAG-Express Classic” on page 290.
• Notes for Creating Geometries (page 296)

• Procedure (page 298)
• Cut Out the Partial Model (page 299)
• Manually Create the Region (page 300)
Notes for Creating Geometries

Take note of the following when creating motor geometry using the JMAG-Designer Geometry
Editor or commercial CAD software.
• For these described procedures, JMAG-Express Classic can import geometries from JCF files
(.jcf ) or DXF files (.dxf ).
• Data for a 3D geometry cannot be imported into JMAG-Express Classic.
• The geometry to be created can be either a full model or partial model.
• When a full model was created, there is a need to run [Cut Out Partial Model] and convert to
a geometry with minimal units required in the evaluation. Minimal units of geometry
required for evaluation are one pole for rotors and one slot for stators.
See “Cut Out the Partial Model” on page 299.
• Create a geometry with one slot when replacing a stator. Also align the center line of the teeth
of the stator on the X-axis.
Left, Center: Unsupported partial model, Right: Supported partial model
• Take note of the following when creating a partial model.

• Create a geometry with one pole when replacing a data for a rotor.
• Create a geometry with one slot when replacing a data for a stator.
• In JMAG-Express Classic, you cannot use a part model which places teeth in the center
and has coils on both sides of the teeth. Create your geometry so that the teeth surround
the coils.
296
Coil
Coil
Teeth
Coil
Coil Teeth
Left: Unsupported partial model (teeth are in the center with the coil on the outside edges). Right:
Supported partial model (coils are in the center with the teeth surrounding the coils).
• Create two coil regions included in one slot to describe inflow and outflow of current in a
coil. Not supported when there are more than three coil regions.
Coil region 2
Coil region 1
A, B, C: Supported partial model, D, E: Unsupported partial model
• Do not use [Merge Regions] of the region mirror copy feature when creating coil regions in
the Geometry Editor. [Merge Regions] for the coil regions cannot be used in JMAG-Express
Classic. The two coil regions created using [Merge Regions] in the Geometry Editor is pre-
sumed to be more than three coil regions in JMAG-Express Classic and cannot be used as a
template.
Notes for JCF Files

• Study properties and condition settings included in the JCF file are not succeeded onto data
imported to JMAG-Express Classic.
• Material category settings included in the JCF file are succeeded onto data imported to JMAG-
Express Classic. However, details including parameters are not succeeded.
• Constraints and feature settings from the Geometry Editor included in the JCF file are succeeded
onto data imported to JMAG-Express Classic.
• Create the geometries the stator side and rotor side separately for two different sketches. Another
option is to create the geometries in the stator side and rotor side, and then save them separately
in two different files. If either of these conditions is not met, JMAG-Express Classic cannot rec-
ognize the geometries properly.
MEMO Import a geometry from the Geometry Editor to JMAG-Designer in which a JCF file can be
exported by creating a magnetic field analysis study.
Notes for DXF Files

• JMAG-Express Classic can import the following entity types from DXF files.
LINE, ARC, CIRCLE, POLYLINE, LWPOLYLINE
• JMAG-Express Classic can import at a state where layers in the DXF file are integrated.
297
• Create the geometries on the stator and rotor side separately and save them in two different files.
If one file contains the geometries both for the stator side and rotor side, JMAG-Express Classic
cannot recognize the geometries properly.
• Regions are automatically created after importing DXF files into JMAG-Express Classic. How-
ever, the region may not be created since the intersecting point of the entities is not regarded as
being connected. For this case, change the [Merge Vertex Tolerance] and create the region manu-
ally.
• To create the region manually, see “Manually Create the Region” on page 300.
Procedure
1. Create geometry in the JMAG-Designer Geometry Editor and commercial CAD software,
and save as a JCF file or DXF file format.
For details, see “Notes for Creating Geometries” on page 296.
2. Start JMAG-Express Classic.
For details see “Starting JMAG-Express Classic” on page 142.
3. Double-click the icon or link of the same template and motor for the new motor tem-
plate created in the JMAG-Express Classic template startup window.
For example, to create a brushless motor (IPM) template, click one of the templates
(PM_I_D_I.2, PM_I_D_I2.2, or PM_I_D_IV.2) categorized as a brushless motor.
4. Select [Modify] on the right side of the motor parts (such as [stator] or [im_rotor]) in the
[Dimensions] tab.
The [Template] dialog is displayed.
5. Select [Create New Template from JCF/DXF File].
6. Specify the file of method 1. Enter the distance range that assumes the vertex is dupli-
cated in the [Merge Vertex Tolerance] when specifying a DXF file.
7. Click [Open].
The template editor window is displayed.
8. Confirm the state of the template and fix the geometry if necessary.
For details about cutting out partial models from full model geometry, see “Cut Out the Partial
Model” on page 299.
For details about manually creating regions, see “Manually Create the Region” on page 300.
For details about fixing geometries in the Geometry Editor, see “Editing the Template Geome-
try Using the JMAG-Designer Geometry Editor” on page 303.
9. Specify the template parts structure, the type of material to apply to the parts, and
make associations with edges and conditions in the [Model] tab.
298
10.Specify the feature to define the constraints to control the geometry and the feature to
define regularity of the geometry in the [Constraint] tab.
MEMO Constraint settings are not required when not changing geometries.
11.Confirm the constraints and features set in the [Preview] tab.
12.Click [Back to Main Window] .

13.Specify the name of the template in the [Template Name] box. The [Description] box
can also be entered if required.
• Multi-byte characters can also be entered in the [Template Name] box. The [OK] button can-
not be clicked unless the text box is filled in.
• Select a template from the [Existing Templates] list when overwriting an existing template.
• Specify information and comments related to the created template in the [Description] box if
required. Information entered in this text box is displayed in the template window, [Build
New Combination] dialog, and [Select Template] dialog.
MEMO The main window is displayed without saving the template when [Destroy and Return] is
selected.
14.Click [OK].
The main window is displayed. The template database is updated.
Cut Out the Partial Model

There is a need of converting to geometry of minimal units required in the evaluation when import-
ing full model geometry from the JCF file and DXF file.
MEMO Minimal units of geometry required for evaluation are one pole for rotors and one slot for sta-
tors.
Notes
• Cut Out Partial Model does not support Undo function.
• Cut Out Partial Model cannot be run when constraints are set on the geometry.
• When a partial model is cut out from the geometry of a full model stator, the geometry position
is automatically modified so the center line of the teeth of the stator is placed on the X-axis.
Procedure
1. Select [Edit] > [Cut Out Partial Model] from the Template Editor window.
Open the [Cut Out Partial Model] dialog. On the model in the [Edit] tab, the position that will
be cut out is shown with a red line.
2. Click the vertex that will be the origin of the model in the [Editor] tab.
The ID of the clicked vertex will be shown in the [Origin] box of the [Cut Out Partial Model]
dialog.
299
3. Enter the start position (angle) when cutting out the partial model in the [Start Angle]
box.
4. Specify the model divisions in the [Number of Slots] box (or the [Number of Poles],
[Number of Bars] box).
The name of the spin box changes to [Number of Slots] for stators, [Number of Poles] for rotors
other than induction motors, and [Number of Bars] for rotors of induction motors.
5. Select [Use Mirror Feature] when creating a model with half the specified number of
divisions, and the other half creating with the mirror copy feature.
The reference axis of region mirror copy will be displayed with a red line on the model in the
[Edit] tab when [Use Mirror Feature] is set on.
6. Click [OK].
A partial model will be cut out from the full model and only the cut out area will be displayed in
the [Edit] tab.
Manually Create the Region

When the geometry is imported from the DXF file, the region will be automatically created.
However, even if the entities appear to be connected, the region may not be created since the inter-
secting point of the entities is not regarded as being connected. Change the [Merge Vertex Toler-
ance] and manually create region for similar cases.
Notes
• Regions can be created for areas where entities are all connected together.
Left: Region not closed, Right: Region closed
• Regions cannot be created when constraints are specified on the geometry.
Procedure
1. Select [Edit] > [Create Region] from the menu bar of the template editor window.
Open the [Create Region] dialog.
2. Specify the distance of two vertices in the [Merge Vertex Tolerance] box so they are rec-
ognized as connected.
When geometry is imported from the DXF file and the region is not automatically created,
change the value in the [Merge Vertex Tolerance] and try recreating.
3. Click [OK].
Region is created.
300
Managing the Database and Editing Templates in
This chapter describes the operation of the database registered with editing procedures of templates, templates,
materials, and correction factor.

• Editing Templates (page 302)
• Managing Data Registered in the Database (page 304)
301
Editing Templates
The template used in motor design can be edited.
• Modifying Basic Information of a Template (page 302)
• Editing the Template Geometry Using the JMAG-Designer Geometry Editor (page 303)
MEMO For details when creating new templates using geometries created by the user, see “Creating a
Template Using the Geometry Created with the Geometry Editor and commercial CAD software” on
page 296.
Modifying Basic Information of a Template

• Each template has the following basic information.
• Included parts (stator core, coil, rotor core, cage, shaft, etc.)
• Types of material for each part (magnetic material, magnet, coil, non-magnetic material, etc.)
• d-axis direction
*for brushless motors, brush motors, externally excited synchronous machines, and wound-field
AC synchronous machines
• Boundary edges
• Edges to be hidden in the [Motor Diagram] of the main window
• Constraint variable for geometry and its value
The settings explained above are modified in the template editor window.
1. Select [Modify] on the right side of the motor parts (such as stator or im_rotor) in the
[Dimensions] tab.
The [Select Template] dialog is displayed.
2. Select [Edit Current Template].
3. Click [OK].
The template editor window is displayed.
4. Specify the template parts structure, the type of material to apply to the parts, and
make associations with edges and conditions in the [Model] tab.
5. Specify the feature to define the constraints to control the geometry and the feature to
define regularity of the geometry in the [Constraint] tab.
MEMO When the dimensions are not modified in JMAG-Express Classic, settings for constraints
and features are not necessary.
6. Confirm the constraints and features set in the [Preview] tab.
7. Click [Back to Main Window] .

302
Managing the Database and Editing Templates in JMAG-Express Classic
8. Specify the name of the template in the [Template Name] box.

Multi byte characters can also be entered in the [Template Name] box.
The [OK] button cannot be clicked unless the text box is filled in.
MEMO Select a template from the [Existing Templates] list when overwriting an existing template.
9. Specify information and comments related to the created template in the [Description]
box if required.
Information entered in this text box is displayed in the template window, [Build New Combina-
tion] dialog, and [Select Template] dialog.
10.Click [OK].
The main window is displayed. The template database is updated.
MEMO Settings in the template editor window is deleted and the main window is displayed when
[Destroy and Return] is selected.
Editing the Template Geometry Using the JMAG-Designer Geometry Editor

The geometry of the template can be changed using the Geometry Editor in JMAG-Designer.
MEMO See the following pages when using geometry created by the user in JMAG-Express Classic.
• “Evaluating Geometries Created in commercial CAD software with JMAG-Express Classic” on page
290
• “Creating a Template Using the Geometry Created with the Geometry Editor and commercial
CAD software” on page 296
1. Select [Edit] > [Edit in JMAG-Designer] from the menu bar in the template editor win-
dow.
The Geometry Editor of JMAG-Designer starts and the geometry data of JMAG-Express Classic
are imported into JMAG-Designer.
2. Edit the geometry in the Geometry Editor.
For details about the Geometry Editor, see “JMAG User's Manual Parameter Explanation Edi-
tion”.
3. Select [Edit] > [Get from JMAG-Designer] from the menu bar in the template editor win-
dow.
The Geometry Editor of JMAG-Designer ends, and the geometry data that is edited in the
Geometry Editor of JMAG-Designer is imported into JMAG-Express Classic.
303
Managing Data Registered in the Database

JMAG-Express Classic enters templates, materials, and correction factor created by the user into the
database, and manages them. Exporting/importing data from the database allows users to use them
in another computer.
• Exporting Data from the Database (page 304)
• Importing Data into the Database (page 304)
• Deleting Data from the Database (page 305)
Exporting Data from the Database

Exports templates, materials, correction factor data registered in the database to a file.
MEMO For details about exporting motor models with specifications entered in the template, see
“Exporting Designed Motors to a File” on page 276.
1. Select [Template] > [Manage Database] from the menu bar of the template window or
the main window.
The [Manage Database] dialog is displayed. In this dialog, data registered in the database are
listed in a tree.
2. Select a template to export from the list (or correction factor, materials).
The selected data will be exported together as one file.
MEMO To select multiple data from the list, hold the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key and click each data.
MEMO All data displayed in this dialog can be selected by holding the [Ctrl] key and pressing the
[A] key while the [Manage Database] dialog is active.
3. To export the template data (or correction factor, material) as a JMAG motor template
file (.jmd) format, click [Export].
To export material data in the JMAG material XML file (.xml) format, click [Mat Export].
The [Export Templates] dialog or the [Save As] dialog is displayed.
• JMAG motor template files (.jmd) can only be imported to JMAG-Express Classic.
• JMAG Material XML files (.xml) can be imported not only to JMAG-Express Classic, but
also JMAG-Designer.
4. Specify a file name and a directory to save the file.
5. Click [Save].
The data in the database is exported to a file.
6. Click [Close] in the [Manage Database] dialog.
MEMO Right-click [Custom Materials] of the material list in the [Toolbox] of JMAG-Designer, and
select [Import Material], when importing a JMAG material XML file exported from JMAG-Express
Classic into JMAG-Designer.
Importing Data into the Database

Import the template, material, and correction factor data from the file and add to the database.
main window.
304
Managing the Database and Editing Templates in JMAG-Express Classic
The [Manage Database] dialog is displayed. Data registered in the database will be displayed as a
tree in the dialog.
2. Click [Import] to import a JMAG motor template file (.jmd).
Click [Mat Import] to import JMAG material XML file (.xml).
3. Specify the file to import.
4. Click [Open].
The file is imported and data is added to the database.
The imported template is displayed in the [Template] tab of the template window. The imported
material is displayed in the [Product] list in the [Materials] tab of the main window. The
imported correction factor is displayed in the [Select Correction Factor] dialog.
Deleting Data from the Database

Delete the template, material, and correction factor data from the database.
MEMO Part of the custom materials created in JMAG-Designer are automatically copied and added to
the JMAG-Express Classic database when using JMAG-Designer and JMAG-Express Classic on the
same computer. However, deleting these custom materials from the JMAG-Express Classic database will
not delete them from the JMAG-Designer database.
main window.
The [Manage Database] dialog is displayed. Data registered in the database will be displayed as a
tree in the dialog.
2. Select a template (or correction factor, material) to delete from the list.
MEMO To select multiple data from the list, hold the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key and click each data.
MEMO All data displayed in this dialog can be selected by holding the [Ctrl] key and pressing the
[A] key while the [Manage Database] dialog is active.
3. Click [Delete].
The data selected in step 2 is deleted from the database.
The deleted template is hidden from the [Template] tab in the template editor window. The
deleted material is hidden from the [Product] list in the [Materials] tab of the main window. The
imported material is hidden from the [Product] list in the [Materials] tab of the main window.
The imported correction factor is hidden from the [Select Correction Factor] dialog.
305
306
JMAG-Express Classic Appendix
This chapter describes default templates, access/shortcut keys of JMAG-Express Classic.

• Default Template (page 308)
• Access/Shortcut Key (page 317)
307
Default Template
A list of templates built-in to JMAG-Express Classic by default are shown here.
• There is both a template of the entire motor including both the rotor and stator, and a part tem-
plate only including the rotor or stator.
• When using the part template, click [Build New Combination] in the template selection win-
dow, and select the chm-plate for the rotor-side and the stator-side separately.
Brushless Motor (IPM)
 Templates of the entire model

PM_I_D_I.2 PMSM/inner rotor/distributed winding/IPM
PM_I_D_I2.2 PMSM/inner rotor/distributed winding/IPM; flux barrier’s angle is vari-
able.
PM_I_D_IV.2 PMSM/inner rotor/distributed winding/IPM; magnets are arranged with
V-shaped.
 Rotor templates
rip_000 IPM Rotor, Basic
rip_001 Standard
rip_003 Spoke
rip_004 Hexagon barrier. Operating 2 points on an edge
rip_005 V standard
rip_006 Crescent
rip_007 Twin crescent
rip_008 Bisection
rip_009 Bisection. Two-layer
rip_010 Bisection. Three-layer
rip_011 Disposed in center of the flux barrier
rip_012 Connected inner slit
rip_013 Inverted triangle
rip_014 V-type. Two-layer
so_000 Stator core basic geometry
308
Brushless Motor (SPM)

PM_I_D_S2.2 PMSM/inner rotor/distributed winding/SPM
PM_I_D_S3.2 PMSM/inner rotor/distributed winding/SPM; magnet is a half cylinder.
PM_I_D_S6.2 PMSM/inner rotor/distributed winding/SPM; magnet’s width is even.
PM_I_D_S7.2 PMSM/inner rotor/distributed winding/SPM; magnet’s angle is constant.
PM_I_D_S8.2 PMSM/inner rotor/distributed winding/SPM; magnet’s width is even, and
the axis diameter is variable.
PM_I_D_S9.2 PMSM/inner rotor/distributed winding/SPM; magnet is a half cylinder,
and the axis diameter is variable.
 Rotor templates
rsp_001 Ring
rsp_006 Constant width. Semi-circular
rsp_007 Constant width. Decay
so_000 Stator core, Basic
309
Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/IPM)

PM_O_C_I PMSM/outer rotor/concentrated winding/IPM
 Rotor templates
rip_101 Standard
rip_103 Spoke
rip_106 Crescent
Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/SPM)

PM_O_C_S.2 PMSM/outer rotor/concentrated winding/SPM
PM_O_C_S4.2 PMSM/outer rotor/concentrated winding/SPM; magnet’s width is even.
PM_O_C_S5.2 PMSM/outer rotor/concentrated winding/SPM; magnet’s angle is con-
stant.
 Rotor templates
rsp_101 Ring
310

rsp_106 Crescent
rsp_107 Constant width, Decay
Induction Motor

IM_I_D_SC.2 Induction motor/inner rotor/distributed winding/cage
 Rotor templates
rim_001 Round bar
rim_002 Oval bar
rim_004 Sector bar
311
Single-phase Induction Motor

SIM_I_D_SC.2 Single phase induction motor/inner rotor/distributed winding/cage
 Rotor templates
rim_001 Round bar
rim_002 Oval bar
rim_004 Sector bar
312


SR_I_C_R1 SRM(3-5 Phase)/Inner/Concentrated Winding/Reluctance
 Rotor templates
rsr_001 Round tooth bottom
rsr_002 Straight tooth bottom
rsr_003 Taper tooth and round tooth bottom
rsr_004 Taper tooth and straight tooth bottom
ssr_001 Round tooth bottom
ssr_002 Straight tooth bottom
ssr_003 Taper tooth and round tooth bottom
ssr_004 Taper tooth and straight tooth bottom
Brush Motor

DC_I_M_A Brush Motor/Number of Poles = Number of Brushes/Number of Slots =
Number of Commutators
 Rotor templates
bmr_001 Constant tooth width, Round slot bottom
bmr_002 Constant tooth width, Flat slot bottom
bmr_003 Constant tooth angle, Round slot bottom
bmr_004 Constant tooth angle, Flat slot bottom
bmr_006 Parallel sided teeth, Round slot bottom
bmr_007 Parallel sided teeth, Flat slot bottom
bmr_008 Parallel sided slot, Round slot bottom
bms_001 Round external form, Constant gap in magnet
313
bms_002 Round external form, Constant angle of clearance in magnet

bms_003 Round external form, Constant width in magnet
bms_004 Round external form, Constant angle in magnet
bms_005 Round external form, No gap in magnet
bms_006 Round external form, Magnet in crescent form
bms_007 Round external form, Magnet decay
bms_011 Flat external, Constant gap in magnet
bms_012 Flat external, Constant angle of clearance in magnet
bms_013 Flat external, Constant width in magnet
bms_014 Flat external, Constant angle in magnet
bms_016 Flat external, Magnet in crescent form
bms_017 Flat external, Magnet decay
bms_021 Angular external form, Constant gap in magnet
bms_022 Angular external form, Constant angle of clearance in magnet
bms_023 Angular external form, Constant width in magnet
bms_024 Angular external form, Constant angle in magnet
bms_026 Angular external form, Magnet in crescent form
bms_027 Angular external form, Magnet decay
bms_033 External angle + Fillet, Constant width in magnet
Externally Excited Synchronous Machine

EE_I_D_FC Externally Excited Synchronous Machine/Salient-pole rotor/inner rotor/
Distributed winding
 Rotor templates
rws_001 Salient-pole rotor
rws_002 Salient-pole rotor, Damper bars
314

WF_I_D_FC Wound-Field AC Synchronous Machine/Salient-pole rotor/inner rotor/dis-
tributed winding
WF_I_D_FC_D Wound-Field AC Synchronous Machine/Salient-pole rotor/Damper bar/
inner rotor/distributed winding
 Rotor templates
rws_001 Salient-pole rotor
rws_002 Salient-pole rotor, Damper bars
Claw Pole Alternator

CP_I_D_FC Claw Pole Alternator
315
Universal Motor

UN_I_C2_A Universal motor/inner rotor/concentrated winding/rotating armature
316
Access/Shortcut Key
This section will describe access keys/shortcut keys that can be used in JMAG-Express Classic.
• The initial letter of the menu name is underlined as the access key when the [Alt] key is pressed
on the keyboard.
• The shortcut key will be shown at the right of each command row.
Access key Shortcut key
• The “+” sign used in the table below means to “hold two keys together”, “>” means a separate
operation from the one before.
For example, “[Alt] + [F] > [O]” shown in the table below means to “press and hold the [Alt] key
on the keyboard while pressing the [F] key, then release both keys and press the [O] key”.
Template Window
Menu and command Access key Shortcut
File
Open [Alt] + [F] > [O] [Ctrl] +[O]
Exit [Alt] + [F] > [X]
Template
Manage Database [Alt] + [P] > [M]
Tool
Options [Alt] + [T] > [O]
Help
Help [Alt] + [H] > [H]
About [Alt] + [H] > [A]
Main Window
File
New [Alt] + [F] > [N] [Ctrl] + [N]
Open [Alt] + [F] > [O] [Ctrl] + [O]
Create JMAG-RT Model [Alt] + [F] > [R]
Export Evaluation Results [Alt] + [F] > [C]
317

Print [Alt] + [F] > [P] [Ctrl] + [P]
Output PDF File [Alt] + [F] > [D]
Exit [Alt] + [F] > [X]
Edit
Undo [Alt] + [E] > [U] [Ctrl] + [Z]
Redo [Alt] + [E] > [R] [Ctrl] + [Y]
Undo List [Alt] + [E] > [L]
View
Select [Alt] + [V] > [S]
Zoom [Alt] + [V] > [Z]
Zoom to Area [Alt] + [V] > [A]
Move [Alt] + [V] > [T]
View All [Alt] + [V] > [F]
Template
Property [Alt] + [P] > [P]
Resister to Database [Alt] + [P] > [R]
Manage Database [Alt] + [P] > [M]
Sizing
Register Stator Geometry [Alt] + [S] > [T]
Register Rotor Geometry [Alt] + [S] > [R]
Geometry Parameter Set [Alt] + [S] > [L]
List
Preset Sizing [Alt] + [S] > [P]
Characteristics
Evaluate [Alt] + [C] > [E] [Ctrl]+[E]
Parametric Mode [Alt] + [C] > [P] [Ctrl]+[P]
Calc in Designer [Alt] + [C] > [D]
Correction Factor [Alt] + [C] > [C]
Stack Design [Alt] + [C] > [S]
Edit Characteristics [Alt] + [C] > [E]
Temperature Evaluation [Alt] + [C] > [T]
Tool
Send to JMAG-Designer [Alt] + [T] > [J]
Close JMAG-Designer [Alt] + [T] > [C]
Link
Help
318
Editor Window
File
Back to Main Window [Alt] + [F] > [B]
Edit
Edit in JMAG-Designer [Alt] + [E] > [E]
Get from JMAG- [Alt] + [E] > [G]
Designer
Cut Out Partial Model [Alt] + [E] > [C]
Create Region [Alt] + [E] > [R]
View
Select [Alt] + [V] > [S]
Zoom [Alt] + [V] > [Z]
Zoom to Area [Alt] + [V] > [A]
Move [Alt] + [V] > [T]
View All [Alt] + [V] > [F]
Template
Register to Database [Alt] + [P] > [R]
Tool
Help
319
320
JMAG-RT
JMAG-RT Overviews
This chapter describes the JMAG-RT tool that is provided with JMAG.
• For the procedure for creating JMAG-RT models using JMAG-RT and how to use the JMAG-RT Library
Manager, see “Creating JMAG-RT Models with JMAG-RT” on page 327.
• For creating input JCF files for JMAG-RT and the parameters used when creating JMAG-RT, see “Settings
and Notes for Creating JMAG-RT Models” on page 429.
• For information on the programs that can create JMAG-RT models and the parameters and notes for using
JMAG-RT models in JMAG-Designer, see “Using JMAG-RT Models in JMAG-Designer” on page 577.
• For the parameters and notes when using JMAG-RT models in circuit simulators such as Simulink and
PSIM, see “Using JMAG-RT Models in a Commercial Circuit Simulator” on page 581.
• For the parameters and notes when using JMAG-RT models in user created programs in C, see “Using
JMAG-RT Models in Your Programs in C” on page 723.

• About JMAG-RT (page 324)
• Applications Supported by JMAG-RT (page 325)
• Programs and Licenses for Creating JMAG-RT Models with JMAG-RT (page 326)
323
JMAG-RT
About JMAG-RT
JMAG-RT is a tool to create analysis data based on the results of a JMAG Finite Element Method
(FEM) analysis to use in a circuit simulator.
Analyzing the various characteristics of a motor (geometry, materials, etc.) is simple if a control cir-
cuit simulation is performed using a motor model that includes an equivalent circuit.
Furthermore, an analysis that accounts for the motor characteristics can also be performed by
directly linking JMAG and the circuit simulator, however, the time required for analysis increases
largely because the FEA is performed for each step.
JMAG-RT can run high-speed control circuit simulations while taking into account the motor char-
acteristics obtained from an FEA.
JMAG-RT creates specialized data (hereinafter referred to as a JMAG-RT model) for the circuit sim-
ulator by obtaining the required motor parameters (flux linkage of coils, inductance, resistance, etc.)
from the FEA results of the motor. The motor characteristics can be taken into account in a control
circuit simulation by referring to a JMAG-RT model.
The JMAG RT model can be used as a circuit component in a control circuit simulation. Therefore,
a JMAG FEA that includes a circuit and a control circuit simulation does not need to be performed
each time the drive circuit is modified.
A parametric FEA is performed in JMAG to obtain the circuit characteristics of the model in
JMAG-RT. The parametric analysis requires some time, but the amount of time that is required can
be reduced by distributing the calculations using the JMAG-RemoteSystem.
A control circuit simulation can be performed using JMAG-RT as follows:
1. Create an FEM model with the JMAG preprocessor.

2. Run an FEA with the magnetic field analysis solver, and then create a JMAG-RT model in
JMAG-RT.
3. Run a control circuit simulation using the JMAG-RT model.
MEMO A JMAG-RT model is exported as an RTT file (.rtt). The basic information contained in the
file can be checked in the JMAG-RT Viewer.
324
JMAG-RT Overviews
Applications Supported by JMAG-RT

JMAG-RT can create JMAG-RT models for a variety of applications such as electromagnetic relays
and resolvers as well as motors.
When creating a JMAG-RT model, select the appropriate type in the JMAG-RT Library Manager.
The following types are available:
Type
Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor • Supports 3-phase motors and 6-phase motors; some
(PMSM) restriction exists for 6-phase motors. See “Notes on
Using the PM Synchronous Motor Model Type” on page
430.
• You can select from the following types. See “PMSM/
SynRM JMAG-RT Model Type (LdLq, Spatial Harmonic)”
on page 435 for details.
• LdLq model
• Spatial harmonic (differential) model
• Spatial harmonic (integral) model
Stepping Motor Supports 2-phase motors.
See “Notes on Using the Stepping Motor Type” on page
475.
Linear Solenoid -
Linear Synchronous Motor (LSM) Supports 3-phase motors.
Switched Reluctance Motor (SRM) Supports 3-phase motors, 4-phase motors, and 5-phase
motors.
See “Notes on Using the SR Motor Model Type” on page
507.
Induction Motor (IM) Supports 3-phase motors and 6-phase motors.
See “Notes on Using the Induction Motor Model Type”
on page 515.
Wound Field Synchronous Motor Supports 3-phase motors.
(WFSM) See “Notes on Using the Wound-Field Synchronous
Motor Model Type” on page 530.
Synchronous Reluctance Motor • Supports 3-phase motors and 6-phase motors; some
(SynRM) restriction exists for 6-phase motors. See “Notes on Using
the Synchronous Reluctance Motor Model Type” on
page 431.
• You can select from the following types. See “PMSM/
SynRM JMAG-RT Model Type (LdLq, Spatial Harmonic)”
on page 435 for details.
• LdLq model
Generic Model A generic model can be created from any FEM model cre-
ated in JMAG-Designer.
See “Concerning Generic Models” on page 551.
325
JMAG-RT
Programs and Licenses for Creating JMAG-RT Models with JMAG-RT

The following programs and their licenses are required to create JMAG-RT models (FEA with
JMAG-RT).
Program Description
JMAG-RT (JMAG-RT The following license is required in order to use JMAG-RT.
Library Manager) • JMAG-RT:
JMAG-RT full package license. Used for each type of operation and for
creating JMAG-RT models (FEA using JMAG-RT) in the JMAG-RT
Library Manager.
Magnetic field analysis PM synchronous motor, synchronous reluctance motor, unipolar step-
solver ping motor, linear solenoid, linear synchronous motor, SR motor,
wound-field synchronous motor, and generic model:
• A DP license (JW_MAG_DPL) needs to be installed when using a 2D
FEM model.
• A TR license (JW_MAG_TR) needs to be installed when using a 3D
FEM model.
Induction motor:
• A FQ license (JW_MAG_FQ) is required regardless of the model dimen-
sion.
• In addition, if automatic calculation of stray load loss is selected, a tran-
sient analysis license (JW_MAG_DP for 2D models, JW_MAG_TR for
3D models) is required.
Iron loss analysis solver When the Iron Loss condition is set in the FEM model, the iron loss analy-
sis license (JW_TOOL_LOSS) is required.
Parallel computing To use the shared memory multiprocessing (SMP) functions or the mas-
sively parallel processing (MPP) functions, the parallel computing licenses
(JW_MAG_SMP) are required.
The number of licenses required depends on the degree of parallelism of
parallel computing. For details, see the “Parameters Description” and
“Licenses”.
GPU solver A GPU solver license (JW_MAG_GPU) is required to use the new GPU
solver.
326
Creating JMAG-RT Models with JMAG-RT
This chapter describes operations, parameters, and Notes when creating JMAG-RT models using JMAG-RT.

• Starting JMAG-RT Library Manager (page 328)
• Screen Configuration of JMAG-RT Library Manager (page 329)
Creating JMAG-RT Models

• Creating JMAG-RT Model Using FEA Results (page 334)
• Creating JMAG-RT Model from a CSV File (page 341)
• Using the Data Added to the RT Model Library on Another Machine (page 344)
Editing JMAG-RT Models

• Adding, or Partially Replacing with, New Results Data in a JMAG-RT Model (Recalculation to Improve
Accuracy) (page 345)
• Applying Correction to Result Values of JMAG-RT Model (page 351)
• Adding Loss Data to a JMAG-RT Model (page 365)
Checking JMAG-RT Models

• Exporting Results Data from a JMAG-RT Model to a File (page 372)
Operations without GUI (command line execution)

• Creating a Model for JMAG-RT Using the Command Line (page 387)
• Running Analysis Using Third-Party Job Schedulers (page 421)
Compatibility with previous versions

• Updating JMAG-RT Model Created by JMAG-Designer Version 10.4 or Earlier (page 428)
327
JMAG-RT
Starting JMAG-RT Library Manager

JMAG-RT Library Manager can be started from a menu in Windows or from JMAG-Designer.
• Starting from the Windows [Start] Menu (page 328)
• Starting from JMAG-Designer (page 328)
Starting from the Windows [Start] Menu

1. Click the [Start] icon in Windows.
2. Select [JMAG-Designer] > [JMAG-RT].
Starting from JMAG-Designer

1. From the JMAG-Designer menu bar, select [Tools] > [JMAG-RT].
328
Screen Configuration of JMAG-RT Library Manager

The screen configuration of JMAG-RT Library Manager is as follows:
• [RT Model Library] Table (page 329)
• Title Bar (page 330)
• Buttons (page 330)
[RT Model Library] Table

The [RT Model Library] table displays a list of JMAG-RT base models.
MEMO Setting information (such as an input JCF file and parameter settings) for creating an RTT file
is called a “JMAG-RT base model”.
MEMO Multiple JMAG-RT base models can be selected from the table by using the [Ctrl] key or [Shift]
key on the keyboard.
Item Description
[Creation] For specifying a JMAG-RT base model for creating a JMAG-RT model.
If the [Create Model] button at the bottom is clicked, FEA for the models
for which this checkbox is selected will be performed.
[Model Name] JMAG-RT base model name.
The name entered in the [Title] box under [Basic Information] under the
[Information] tab in the setup dialog for each model is displayed.
[RTT File Name] Name of a JMAG-RT model created based on a JMAG-RT base model.
This is blank when a JMAG-RT model based on its associated JMAG-RT
base model has not been created.
[Model Type] The model type selected when creating a new JMAG-RT base model is dis-
played.
[PM Synchronous Motor], [Two-Phase Stepping Motor], [Linear Sole-
noid], [Linear Synchronous Motor], [SR Motor], [Induction Motor],
[Wound-Field Synchronous Motor], [Generic Model]
[Comment] The entered text is displayed in the [Comment] box under the [Informa-
tion] tab in the setup dialog for the model.
329
JMAG-RT
Item Description
[Data Status] [Ready] is displayed for JMAG-RT base models for which a JMAG-RT
model has not been created.
[Created] is displayed for JMAG-RT base models for which a JMAG-RT
model has been created.
[Status] While creating a JMAG-RT model, the status of that model is displayed.
• [Holding]:
Awaiting creation.
• [Running]:
A JMAG-RT model is being created.
• [Terminate]:
JMAG-RT model creation completed successfully.
• [Error]:
JMAG-RT model creation failure.
 [RT Model Library] table context menu

The following operations are available from the menu that is displayed when a JMAG-RT base
model is clicked. See “Buttons” on page 330 for a description of these operations.
• [Modify]
• [Copy]
• [Delete]
• [Apply loss table]
• [Apply correction file]
• [Recalculation]
• [Export Characteristics]
Title Bar
The following operations are available from the menu that is displayed when JMAG-RT Library
Manager title bar is right-clicked.
• [Restore], [Move], [Size], [Maximize], [Minimize]:
Changes the JMAG-RT Library Manager window size and position.
• [Close]:
Closes JMAG-RT Library Manager.
• [About]:
Opens the [About JMAG-RT Library Manager] dialog. This dialog displays the JMAG-RT
Library Manager version information.
Buttons
 [Help]
Opens JMAG-RT Help.
 [New]
Adds a new JMAG-RT base model to JMAG-RT Library Manager.
330
When [New] is clicked, the [Model Type] dialog is displayed. Select the model type.
See the following page for details:
• “Creating JMAG-RT Model Using FEA Results” on page 334
• “Creating JMAG-RT Model from a CSV File” on page 341
 [Modify]
Modifies the settings for the JMAG-RT base models selected in the RT Model Library table.
If a JMAG-RT base model for which an RTT file has not been created is selected, a parameter setup
dialog is displayed after [Modify] is clicked.
If a JMAG-RT base model for which an RTT file has been created is selected, the [Question] dialog
is displayed after [Modify] is clicked.
 [Duplicate]
The JMAG-RT base models selected in the [RT Model Library] table are copied and added to the
[RT Model Library] table.
These JMAG-RT base models are copied with the same names. The status displayed in the [Status]
column for a copied JMAG-RT base model is the same as the JMAG-RT base model it was copied
from.
MEMO The name of a JMAG-RT base model can be changed in the [Title] box under [Basic Informa-
tion] under the [Information] tab in its model setup dialog.
 [Delete]
Deletes the JMAG-RT base models selected in the [RT Model Library] table.
 [Recalculation]
In the [RT Model Library] table for a JMAG-RT base model for which an RTT file has been created
is selected, corrects the resolution parameters such as current, adds and executes FEM analyses, and
updates the FEA results data outputted to the JMAG-RT model.
When [Recalculation] is clicked, a dialog is displayed with only the parameters that can be changed
before analysis re-execution. Specify each parameter.
• “Adding, or Partially Replacing with, New Results Data in a JMAG-RT Model (Recalculation to
Improve Accuracy)” on page 345
 [Export Characteristics]
For selected JMAG-RT base models in the [RT Model Library] table with a created RTT file, the
FEA results in the RTT file are exported to a CSV file.
Click [Export Characteristics] to display the [Export Properties] dialog. Specify the physical quanti-
ties to be output to the CSV file and the file export destination.
• “Exporting Results Data from a JMAG-RT Model to a File” on page 372
 [Export Model Data]

Exports the data for the JMAG-RT base models selected in the [RT Model Library] table as a
JMAG-RT Library Manager file (.jrt).
331
JMAG-RT
Perform this operation to use the [RT Model Library] table data on another machine.
• “Using the Data Added to the RT Model Library on Another Machine” on page 344
 [Import Model Data]

Imports a JMAG-RT Library Manager file (.jrt).
• “Using the Data Added to the RT Model Library on Another Machine” on page 344
 [Create Model]
Executes FEM analyses of the JMAG-RT base models whose checkboxes are selected in the [RT
Model Library] table, and creates RTT files containing the results data.
If multiple JMAG-RT base models are selected, they are executed one by one.
 [Stop]
Stops the creation of RTT files.
In addition to stopping the analysis execution of the JMAG-RT base model that is displayed as
[Running] in the [Status] column in the [RT Model Library] table, the scheduled analysis execu-
tions for the waiting JMAG-RT base models are canceled.
 [Apply loss table]

Adds loss tables obtained from FEM analyses in JMAG-Designer to an RTT file.
Click [Apply loss table] to display the [Apply Loss Table] dialog. Specify the RTT file to which the
loss table is to be added and the loss table file (.csv).
• “Adding Loss Data to a JMAG-RT Model” on page 365
 [Apply correction file]

Applies correction values to the results values for the FEM analyses in an RTT file, for example,
inductance and torque values.
Click [Apply correction file] to display the [Apply Correction File] dialog. Specify the RTT file to
which the corrections are to be applied and a correction file (.csv).
• “Applying Correction to Result Values of JMAG-RT Model” on page 351
 [Copy to Circuit Simulator]

Exports the RTT files that have been created for JMAG-RT base models selected in the [RT Model
Library] to a specified folder. The type of files exported depends on the type of platform, such as
Simulink or PSIM.
 [Setting]
Specifies the JMAG-RT data storage folder.
332
Click [Setting] to display the [Setting] dialog. Enter the folder path in [Save Data to].
When a new JMAG-RT base model is added to JMAG-RT Library Manager, a new folder is created
under the folder specified in [Save Data to], and FEA input/output files from JMAG-RT and its
RTT file are output.
 [Exit]
JMAG-RT closes.
333
JMAG-RT
Creating JMAG-RT Model Using FEA Results

Set the additional parameters for JMAG-model creation to the FEM model input JCF file created by
JMAG-Designer and execute the analysis. An RTT file is created based on the analysis results.
1. Create a FEM model in JMAG-Designer and export it to a JCF file.

2. Load the JCF file into the JMAG-RT Library Manager.
3. Set the parameters.
4. Perform a FEA using JMAG-RT (Creation of a JMAG-RT Model).
5. Check and edit the contents of the JMAG-RT model.
6. Copy the JMAG-RT model to the working folder of the circuit simulator.
7. Run a control circuit simulation using the JMAG-RT model.
MEMO For PM synchronous motors and synchronous reluctance motors, it is possible to create a
JMAG-RT model from data written in CSV format. For instructions on how to create a JMAG-RT
model from data in a CSV file, see “Creating JMAG-RT Model from a CSV File” on page 341.
Create a FEM model in JMAG-Designer and export it to a JCF file

The FEM model used to create a JMAG-RT model in JMAG-RT must satisfy several requirements.
If these requirements are not satisfied, the FEM model cannot be imported into JMAG-RT Library
Manager. The requirements differ according to the type of model.
See following sections about notes about creating FEM model:
• “PM Synchronous Motor and Synchronous Reluctance Motor” on page 430
• “Stepping Motor” on page 475
• “Linear Solenoid” on page 483
• “Linear Synchronous Motor” on page 493
• “SR Motor” on page 507
• “Induction Motor” on page 515
• “Wound-Field Synchronous Motor” on page 530
• “Generic Model” on page 551
Load the JCF file into the JMAG-RT Library Manager

1. Select [Tools] > [JMAG-RT] from the JMAG-Designer menu bar.
2. In the JMAG-RT Library Manager, click [New] to open the [Model Type] dialog.
3. Select the type of the model from the [Model Type] list.
• [PM Synchronous Motor]
• [Two-phase Stepping Motor]
• [Linear Solenoid]
• [Linear Synchronous Motor]
• [SR Motor]
334
• [Induction Motor]
• [Wound-Field Synchronous Motor]
• [Synchronous Reluctance Motor]
• [Generic Model]
4. Specify the JCF file to be imported. Also, depending on the model type, specify the num-
ber of phases and the type of JMAG-RT model to be created.
When [PM Synchronous Motor] or [Synchronous Reluctance Motor] is selected from

[Model Type]:
i. In the [Model Type] dialog, click [OK] to display the [Select Motor Model] dialog.
ii. In [Number of Phases], select either [3-phases] or [6-phases (3-phases double con-
nection)].
When [6-phases(3-phases double connection)] is selected, [Spatial Harmonic Model] under
[Execute FEM Calculation] is automatically selected. [LdLq model] and [Use User Data]
cannot be selected.
iii. Select [Execute FEM Calculation].
[Execute FEM Calculation] should be selected to create a JMAG-RT model from the JMAG
FEA results.
[Use User Data] should be selected to create JMAG-RT model from user prepared data writ-
ten in CSV format. For details, see “Creating JMAG-RT Model from a CSV File” on page 341.
iv. Select either [LdLq model] or [Spatial Harmonics Model], or both.
Select the checkbox suitable for your required accuracy and purpose. For details, see “PMSM/
SynRM JMAG-RT Model Type (LdLq, Spatial Harmonic)” on page 435.
The type (LdLq or spatial harmonic) cannot be changed after a JMAG-RT model is created.
v. Click [Browse] next to [JCF File] to specify JCF file for FEA in JMAG-RT.
vi. Click [OK].
The dialog for setting parameters for FEA with JMAG-RT is displayed.
When [Induction Motor] is selected from [Model Type]:

i. In the [Model Type] dialog, click [OK] to display the [Select Motor Model] dialog.
ii. In [Number of Phases], select either [3-phases] or [6-phases (Star, Pole number
switching)].
iii. Click [Browse] next to [JCF File] to specify JCF file for FEA in JMAG-RT.
iv. Click [OK].
When [Two-phase Stepping Motor], [Linear Solenoid], [Linear Synchronous Motor], [SR
Motor], [Wound-Field Synchronous Motor], or [Generic Model] is selected from [Model
Type]:
i. Click [Browse] next to [JCF File] to specify JCF file for FEA in JMAG-RT.
ii. Click [OK].
335
JMAG-RT
Set the parameters

1. Set parameters for FEA using JMAG-RT.
The settings vary according to the type of model. See following sections for details:
• “PM Synchronous Motor and Synchronous Reluctance Motor” on page 430
• “Stepping Motor” on page 475
• “Linear Solenoid” on page 483
• “Linear Synchronous Motor” on page 493
• “SR Motor” on page 507
• “Induction Motor” on page 515
• “Wound-Field Synchronous Motor” on page 530
• “Generic Model” on page 551
2. Click [OK].
FEM models added with parameter information for FEA with JMAG-RT (called JMAG-RT
base models), will be added to the [RT Model Library] table.
• The checkboxes in the [Creation] column are used to execute the following buttons:
• [Create Model]
• [Copy to Circuit Simulator]
• The status of a JMAG-RT model that is being created is displayed in the [Status] column.
3. To edit the parameters of the JMAG-RT base model, select the JMAG-RT base model
from the [RT Model Library] table and click [Modify].
To delete a JMAG-RT base model, select the JMAG-RT base model from the [RT Model
Library] table and click [Delete].
• Clicking [Modify] or [Delete] with the checkbox in the [Creation] column selected will not
execute the process.
For example, only A is deleted when [Delete] is clicked if the [RT Model Library] table is the
same as the figure below. Use caution when modifying or deleting base models.
• When a JMAG-RT model is created from a base model, the base model is locked for editing.
A locked base model is displayed as “Created” in the [Data Status] column.
When a locked base model is selected and [Modify] is clicked, a message dialog will appear
asking if the lock should be released. Click [Yes] to release the lock.
A base model that has “Ready” displayed in the [Data Status] column has all of the necessary
settings specified, but a JMAG-RT model has not been created, or an JMAG-RT model has
been created, but the base model has been unlocked.
336
Perform a FEA using JMAG-RT (Creation of a JMAG-RT Model)

1. In the [RT Model Library] table, select the checkbox in the [Creation] column for the
JMAG-RT base model.
2. Click [Create Model].
A multi-case FEA for JMAG-RT model creation is started.
• When multiple JMAG-RT base model checkboxes are selected, the FEAs are run in order
from the top of the [RT Model Library] table.
• While the FEA is running, a progress bar is displayed in the [Calculation Progress] dialog.
When multiple JMAG-RT base model checkboxes are selected, two progress bars are dis-
played. The upper progress bar shows the progress of the currently running FEA, and the
lower progress bar shows the overall progress.
The format for displaying the remaining calculation time is as follows:

Time is shown starting from seconds when necessary.
year: day: hour: minute: second
Example:
35:44 (35 minutes 44 seconds)
10:35:44 (10 hours 35 minutes 44 seconds)
FEA interruption:
Click [Stop] in JMAG-RT Library Manager to terminate the currently running FEA. When
multiple base models are run, FEA for the next base model is started.
Resuming an interrupted FEA:

Before resuming an interrupted FEA, change the [Calculation Mode] setting as necessary.
The [Calculation Mode] can be changed on the [Create] tab of the dialog for setting the param-
eters for FEA with JMAG-RT. This dialog is displayed when the base model is selected and
[Modify] is clicked.
The following calculation modes are available:
• [Recalculate Only Failed Cases] (default):
Only the FEA for the case that failed during the previous execution is re-executed.
• [Redo All Calculations]:
Discards the results obtained in the previous execution and starts all FEA for all the cases.
After setting [Calculation Mode], click [OK].
In the [RT Model Library] table, select the checkbox for the base model again and click [Create
Model] to resume the FEA of the base model.
337
JMAG-RT
After FEA:
When JMAG-RT completes all cases of the FEA, the JMAG-RT model that is created is
exported as an RTT file. The folder of the file can be confirmed in the [Information] tab opened
by selecting a base model from the [RT Model Library] table, and then clicking [Modify]. The
default folder is located in the following folder:
c:Users\(User name)\Documents\JMAG\JMAG_RT
Click [Setting] in JMAG-RT Library Manager, and then specify a new folder to change the
folder.
After the FEA is completed, a report is displayed. If the FEA fails, the cause of the failure is
shown in the report.
Check and edit the contents of the JMAG-RT model

The following operations are possible for a JMAG-RT model:
• Outputting results to CSV file:
Outputs results data (inductance, magnetic flux, etc.) from FEA in a JMAG-RT model in CSV
file format. See “Exporting Results Data from a JMAG-RT Model to a File” on page 372.
• Increasing resolution and re-creating (Update RTT files):
Increases the calculation resolution and add the results data to the existing JMAG-RT model. See
“Adding, or Partially Replacing with, New Results Data in a JMAG-RT Model (Recalculation to
Improve Accuracy)” on page 345.
• Applying correction factors to results:
Applies a correction factor to FEA results in a JMAG-RT model. See “Applying Correction to
Result Values of JMAG-RT Model” on page 351.
• Adding loss data:
Loss data is added to a JMAG-RT model. See “Adding Loss Data to a JMAG-RT Model” on page
365.
MEMO Basic information on JMAG-RT models can be viewed by using JMAG-RT Viewer in addition
to JMAG-RT. For information about JMAG-RT Viewer, see “JMAG-RT Viewer” on page 741.
Copy the JMAG-RT model to the working folder of the circuit simulator
The RTT file exported in Step 5 is copied to the working directory of the circuit simulator. Further-
more, the files required to run a control circuit simulation using a JMAG-RT model (MDL file,
Netlist XML file, etc.) can be exported to the same directory.
1. Select the checkbox for the JMAG-RT base model that is displayed as “Created” in the
[Data Status] column of the [RT Model Library] table.
Multiple JMAG-RT models can be copied to a circuit simulator by selecting multiple base mod-
els to copy to the working directory of the circuit simulator.
2. Click [Copy to Circuit Simulator].
3. In the [Copy to Circuit Simulator] dialog, set the following parameters.
[Platform]
Depending on the platform selected, the files to be copied will change. Depending on the model
type and number of phases (Three-phase or Six-phase), the platform choice will change.
338
• [Export RTT File]:

(files to be copied: .rtt)
Only RTT files are copied. The copied RTT files can be used on any platform. Select this
type to use JMAG-RT Model components in the circuit editor of JMAG-Designer.
• [Simulink (electric signal input)]:
(files to be copied: .rtt, _Ein.mdl, .mexw64)
this type, Simscape is required in addition to MATLAB/Simulink.
• [Simulink (electric signal input, Specialized Power Systems)]:
(files to be copied: .rtt, .mdl, .mexw64)
this type, Simscape and Simscape Electrical are required in addition to MATLAB/Simulink.
• [Simulink (voltage signal input)]:
(files to be copied: .rtt, _Vin.mdl, .mexw64)
netic force and the current flowing in each phase of the coil.
• [Simulink (current signal input)]:
(files to be copied: .rtt, _Iin.mdl, .mexw64)
netic force.
• [PSIM]:
(files to be copied: .rtt, .xml)
Select this type when connecting JMAG-RT model blocks to electric circuits in PSIM. This
type cannot be selected in JMAG-RT Linux version.
• [Other C Program]:
(files to be copied: .rtt)
Select this type when using JMAG-RT models in C programs created by the user. This type
cannot be selected in JMAG-RT Linux version.
[Copy to]
Specify the folder to run the analysis with a circuit simulator.
[Data File List]

The RTT file will be exported with the same name as the input JCF file. If you want to export
the file with a different name, enter that name in the following text box:
• Simulink:
[RTT File Name] box
• PSIM:
[Netlist XML File Name] box
[Copy Subcircuit File]

When this checkbox is selected, the following files are copied with the RTT file:
• Simulink:
MDl file and DLL file
• PSIM:
Netlist XML file and DLL file
If [Copy Subcircuit File] is cleared, only the RTT file is copied.
339
JMAG-RT
Click [OK] after specifying the settings.

MEMO A JPLOT file, XML file containing the JMAG-RT settings (RTMOTOR.xml), a report file
(HTML file), and an error file are exported when a JMAG-RT model is created (FEA by JMAG-RT).
Only the JPLOT file and the XML file are copied for the JMAG-RT model to the circuit simulator.
Run a control circuit simulation using the JMAG-RT model
 Using JMAG-RT model in JMAG-Designer Circuit Editor:

Create a control circuit with Circuit Editor and add the JMAG-RT Model component. Set RTT file
to refer to that JMAG-RT Model component.
For details, see the explanation of the JMAG-RT Model component in “Parameter Explanation Edi-
tion”.
 Using JMAG-RT model in MATLAB/Simulink, PSIM, or C language program:

Arrange a JMAG-RT model block in the circuit of the circuit simulator.
Specify the parameters, such as coil resistance and moment of inertia, for the JMAG-RT model
block, and then run the control circuit simulation.
See following chapters in details about each model. Notes for each platform are included.
• “Using JMAG-RT Models in MATLAB/Simulink” on page 582
• “Using JMAG-RT Models in PSIM” on page 709
• “Using JMAG-RT Models in Your Programs in C” on page 723
340
Creating JMAG-RT Model from a CSV File

RTT files can be created based on user prepared data and actual measurement data in CSV file for-
mat instead from an FEM model (.jcf ) created by JMAG.
• Input CSV File Format (page 342)
Notes
• This function supports the following applications:
• Three-phase PM synchronous motor
• Three-phase synchronous reluctance motor
• A JMAG-RT LdLq model is created using this function. A spatial harmonic model cannot be
created.
• Iron loss cannot be accounted for.
Procedures
1. Prepare a CSV file according to the specified format.
See “Input CSV File Format” on page 342.
2. Set the settings for creating JMAG-RT models in the JMAG-RT Library Manager.
i. From the JMAG-Designer menu bar, select [Tool] > [JMAG-RT].
ii. Click [New] in the JMAG-RT Library Manager.
iii. In the [Model Type] dialog, from the [Model Type] list, select [PM Synchronous
Motor] and click [OK].
iv. In the [Select Motor Model] dialog, select the [Use User Data].
v. Click [Browse] under [Csv File].
vi. In the [Open] dialog, specify the CSV file and click [Open].
vii.Click [OK].
viii.In the [PM Synchronous Motor] dialog, set the parameters for each tab.
Make sure to set the following parameters:
• [Create] tab (page 443):
• [Resistance] under [Configuration of FEM Coil]
• [Resolution Point Sequence] under [Current (LdLq)]:
RTT files contain inductance data for amplitude axis and phase axis. Therefore, the
resolution must be specified to convert the data created with the ld and lq axis to the
amplitude and phase axis.
Note the following:
341
JMAG-RT
• To specify a correction factor for the number of turns in circuit simulation, set [Number
of Turns] in the [Create] tab. The value specified here will be a reference value (default
number of turns).
The correction factors for the number of turns are turns_coil1 and turns_coil2 in the
JMAG-RT model block.
• An FEM analysis is not run when a JMAG-RT model is created with a CSV file. There-
fore, the settings for [Parallel Computing] and [Machine (Server)] are not necessary.
ix. Click [OK] in the [Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor] dialog.
The new setting for creating JMAG-RT models is added in the [RT Model Library] list.
3. Create a JMAG-RT model from the JMAG-RT Library Manager.
i. Select the checkbox for the RTT model creation setting in step 2 displayed in the [Cre-
ate] column.
ii. Click [Create Model].
The process to create the JMAG-RT model is performed.
When the processing is finished, the [JMAG Solver Report] dialog is displayed.
4. Export a JMAG-RT model from the JMAG-RT Library Manager.
i. Click [Copy to Circuit/Control Simulator].
ii. In the [Copy to Circuit/Control Simulator] dialog, specify [Copy To] and [Platform],
and click [OK].
Input CSV File Format
 Example of CSV file
01 Flux
02 1.23400
03 Id, Iq, Ld, Lq
04 0.00000, 0.12247, 0.00100, 0.03100
05 -0.10607, 0.06124, 0.00200, 0.03200
06 -0.12247, 0.00000, 0.00300, 0.03300
07 -0.10607, -0.06124, 0.00500, 0.03500
08 -0.06124, -0.10607, 0.00600, 0.03600
 Format
Line 1 Flux Fixed. Use a one-byte character string.
Line 2 Magnet flux-linkage The unit is (Wb).
Line 3 Id, Iq, Ld, Lq Fixed. Use a one-byte character string.
Line 4 and following lines Id, Iq, Ld, Lq values. The unit of Id and Iq is (A). The unit of Ld
and Lq is (H). Enter a value for each column.
342
 Notes Regarding Input Data

• Specify the magnet flux-linkage Ψ a calculated from the following equation.
Ψa = Ψf × (3 ⁄ 2)
Ψ a : value of magnet flux-linkage to be specified (Wb)
Ψ f : maximum value of armature flux-linkage due to the permanent magnet per phase (Wb)
• Specify Id and Iq near a data retention point that is determined by resolution.

Resolution is the value of the [Resolution Point Sequence] box of the [Current (Ld/Lq)] group
box in the [Create] tab of JMAG-RT Library Manager. For example, when “4” is entered in the
[Resolution Point Sequence] box, the data retention point will be determined as in the diagram
below.
: Data retention point
Resolution of amplitude: 4 Resolution of phase: 4
Inductance data retention points
• Since data sorting occurs by JMAG-RT, the ascending/descending order of Id and Iq can be
determined freely.
343
JMAG-RT
Using the Data Added to the RT Model Library on Another Machine

The JMAG-RT base model information added to the [RT Model Library] table can be exported as a
JMAG-RT Library Manager file (.jrt) and imported into the [RT Model Library] table on a different
machine.
Notes
• The JMAG-RT Library Manager file (.jrt) outputs parameters necessary for analysis re-execu-
tion.
Procedures
 Exporting the JMAG-RT Library Manager file (.jrt)
1. From the [RT Model Library] table, select the JMAG-RT base models to export to a file.
Multiple JMAG-RT base models can be selected from the table by using the [Ctrl] key or [Shift]
key on the keyboard.
2. Click [Export Model Data].
3. In the [Save As] dialog, specify a file name and save location.
4. Click [Save].
 Importing JMAG-RT base models from a JMAG-RT Library Manager file (.jrt)
1. On the JMAG-RT Library Manager, click [Import Model Data].

2. In the [Open] dialog, specify the JMAG-RT Library Manager file to be imported.
3. Click [Open].
If the name for a JMAG-RT base model being imported is the same as a name for a JMAG-RT
base model already in the [RT Model Library] table, merging for example does not occur, rather
the JMAG-RT base model being imported is imported as a separate JMAG-RT base model.
344
Adding, or Partially Replacing with, New Results Data in a JMAG-RT

Model (Recalculation to Improve Accuracy)
Results data (inductance, torque, etc.) from an FEA executed after editing resolution setting values
(current amplitude, current phase, etc.) can be added to or partially replace existing data in a JMAG-
RT model file (.rtt). When using this function, since it is sufficient to only execute calculations
impacted by additions and replacements, creation times can be significantly shortened compared to
recreating a JMAG-RT model from scratch.
Use this function if there are for example places where results data is discontinuous in a JMAG-RT
model already created.
• Changing the Input File (page 347)
• Resolution Settings (page 347)
Notes
• The recalculation function inherits the [Recalculate with Increased Resolution] settings from
[Calculation Mode] for JMAG-Designer Version 17.0 or earlier.
• The recalculation function does not support the following models:
• PM synchronous motor (LdLq model)
• PM synchronous motor (model created from a CSV file)
• Synchronous reluctance motor (LdLq model)
• Synchronous reluctance motor (model created from a CSV file)
• The recalculation function does not support changing the mechanical angle resolution. To
change the mechanical angle resolution, create a new JMAG-RT model.
• Recalculation with JMAG-RT can be executed in batch from the command line using JMAG
Job System.
To export the input file for JMAG Job System that is needed in this case, select [File export for
JMAG JobSystem execution] under [CPU Group Name] in the [Recalculation] dialog and click
the [Export] button.
For details on running analysis from the command line using JMAG JobSystem, refer to the
“Operations Edition”.
Procedures
1. From the [RT Model Library] table, select the JMAG-RT base model shown as “Created”
in the [Data Status] field, and click [Recalculation].
Or, right-click the JMAG-RT base model in the [RT Model Library] table and select [Recalcula-
tion].
2. In the [Recalculation (model type name)] dialog, set parameters for recalculation.
• [File Name]:
Select an input JCF file for recalculation. By default, the input file used for the previous cal-
culation is displayed. See “Changing the Input File” on page 347.
345
JMAG-RT
• Resolution settings:
The parameters that can be set depend on the model type. See “Resolution Settings” on
page 347.
• When adding:
Select [Add] and enter a value in each text box. When duplicate settings have been made
for calculated values, see “Concerning cases executed when resolution is added” on
page 346.
For a generic model, it is also necessary to select a coil set to add resolution to.
MEMO For a generic model, a referencing coil set has the same settings as the referenced coil
set that it references, so no selections can be made.
• When replacing:
Select [Edit] and click [Calculated Point]. The [Recalculation Point List] dialog is dis-
played, so check the checkboxes for the cases to recalculate and click [OK].
MEMO When recalculating the data calculated by JMAG-RT included in JMAG-Designer
before Version 17.0, the [Jcf file] column of the [Recalculation Point List] dialog is blank.
• [Parallel Computing], [License (LM-X)], [Machine (Server)], [Hosts File], [Do Not Output
Distribution to Result File], [Do not leave result files]:
These are the same as the parameters set for the original calculation. See the description of the
[Create] tab for PMSMs.
• [Export] button:
If [File export for JMAG JobSystem execution] is selected under [CPU Group Name], the
[Export] button will be displayed instead of the [OK] button. For instructions on how to use
this button, see the description of the [Create] tab for PMSMs.
3. Click [OK] in the [Recalculation (model type name)] dialog.
JMAG-RT Library Manager is returned to.
For the JMAG-RT base model for which recalculation settings were made, the [Data Status] field
has changed from “Created” to “Ready”.
4. Check the checkbox for the JMAG-RT base model for which recalculation settings were
made, and click [Create Model].
A new case is created based on the recalculation settings, and FEA is executed.
At this time, the existing RTT file is renamed and remains in the calculation execution folder.
For example, if an existing RTT file is “AAA.rtt”, it will be renamed as follows:
AAA-20100530-134715.rtt (<<original file name - date - hours, minutes, seconds>>.rtt)
 Concerning cases executed when resolution is added

For example, suppose a JMAG-RT model is created with the following current amplitudes specified.
0, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2
And suppose the current amplitudes are modified as follows and recalculation is executed.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4
Since the results data for the cases where the current amplitude was 0, 1, or 2 is already present in
the JMAG-RT model, calculation execution occurs only for the cases where the current amplitude is
3 or 4.
Finally, in the JMAG-RT model, the results data for the following current amplitudes is present.
0, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4
346
Changing the Input File

The reasons for many of the times that results data in a JMAG-RT model are discontinuous are as
follows:
• Linear or nonlinear calculations do not converge
• Sufficient calculation accuracy is not obtained due to a course mesh
In order to avoid these problems, modify the following in the previous input file by specifying them
in the [File name] box in JMAG-RT Library Manager [Recalculation (model type name)] dialog.
• Set stricter convergence criteria in the [Linear Solver] setting panel or the [Nonlinear Calcula-
tion] setting panel in the [Study Properties] dialog.
• Identify the areas where mesh is course and perform mesh generation with finer mesh for these
areas. Perform adjustments using for example the element size setting function on parts, faces,
etc.
Furthermore, do not change the settings for shapes, dimensions, conditions, circuits, etc. If these are
changed, an incorrect JMAG-RT model may be created or execution may fail.
Resolution Settings
This function supports changing the following resolution parameters.
347
JMAG-RT
Model type Parameters

Three-phase PMSM [Inductance] • [Amplitude (A)]:
(spatial harmonic), Displayed when [Drive Type] is [Sine Wave
Three-phase SynRM Drive].
(spatial harmonic) • [U-phase Current (A)], [V-phase Current (A)],
[W-phase Current (A)]:
Displayed when [Drive Type] is [Other].
• [Current Phase (deg)]:
Displayed when [Drive Type] is [Sine Wave
Drive].
• [Zero Phase Sequence Current (A)]:
Drive] and [Use zero phase sequence current] is
selected.
[Torque] • [Torque setting is same as inductance]
• [Amplitude (A)]:
Drive].
• [U-phase Current (A)], [V-phase Current (A)],
Drive].
• [Zero Phase Sequence Current (A)]:
Drive] and [Use zero phase sequence current] is
selected.
348

Six-phase PMSM (spa- [Inductance] • [Coil set 1 current amplitude (A)]
tial harmonic), Six- • [Coil set 1 current phase (deg)]
phase SynRM (spatial
• [Coil set 2 current amplitude (A)]
harmonic)
• [Coil set 2 current phase (deg)]:
Displayed when [Table Type] is [Use current
phase of each coil set as axis of tables].
• [Current phase angle difference between coil sets
(deg)]:
phase angle difference between coil sets as axis of
tables].
• [Coil set 1 current phase (deg)]
• [Coil set 2 current phase (deg)]:
phase of each coil set as axis of tables].
• [Current phase angle difference between coil sets
(deg)]:
phase angle difference between coil sets as axis of
tables].
Stepping motor [Inductance] • [Current (A)]
• [Current (A)]
Linear solenoid [Inductance/Electromag- • [Current (A)]
netic Force]
Linear synchronous [Inductance] • [Current at Load (A)]
motor [Electromagnetic Force] • [Current at Load (A)]:
Drive].
• [U-phase Current (A)], [V-phase Current (A)],
• [Current Phase at Load (deg)]
SR motor [Inductance] • [Current (A)]
• [Current (A)]
Three-phase/Six-phase [Operating Range] • [Current (A)]
induction motor • [Slip Frequency (Hz)]
349
JMAG-RT

Wound-field synchro- [Inductance] • [Stator Coil Amplitude (A)], [Stator Coil Current
nous motor Phase (deg)]:
Displayed when [Current type] is [Amplitude,
Current Phase].
• [d-axis Current (A)], [q-axis Current (A)]:
Displayed when [Current type] is [dq Axis Cur-
rent].
• [Field Coil Amplitude (A)]
• [Stator Coil Amplitude (A)], [Stator Coil Current
Phase (deg)]:
Displayed when [Current type] is [Amplitude,
Current Phase].
• [d-axis Current (A)], [q-axis Current (A)]:
Displayed when [Current type] is [dq Axis Cur-
rent].
• [Field Coil Amplitude (A)]
Generic model [Inductance] • [Current (A)]
• [Current Phase (deg)]
• [Current (A)]
• [Current Phase (deg)]
[Suppress Calculation • Referenced project files, models, studies
Case] • [Neighborhood Level]
350
Applying Correction to Result Values of JMAG-RT Model

Corrections can be applied to FEA result values written in RTT files. Once the corrections have
been applied, correction value information is added to the RTT file. From hereon, every time the
file is used, the correction value is reflected on the Ld, Lq torque table.
Use this function when accounting for 3D effects on a 2D RTT file.
• Physical Quantity That Can be Corrected and Correction Types (page 352)
• Format of Correction File (page 354)
Notes
• This function supports RTT files for the following applications:
• Three-phase/six-phase PM synchronous motor:
However, RTT files containing zero-phase current data are not supported by this function.
• Three-phase/six-phase Synchronous reluctance motor
• Three-phase Induction motor
• If applying corrections, the correction file (.csv) needs to be made manually by writing the cor-
rection value in the regulated file format. For details about the correction file format, see “For-
mat of Correction File” on page 354.
• Old formats of correction files ($RT_Correction_LdLq, $RT_Correction_BackEMF, $RT_Cor-
rection_Flux) cannot be used for versions later than 13.0 or 13.1.
• Corrected RTT files can have different correction files applied to them. For this case, the correc-
tion value information written in the RTT file will be updated (with a value obtained by multi-
plying the existing correction value by the correction value of newly-applied correction file).
• Importing a corrected RTT file into JMAG-RT Viewer will display a map of the corrections.
MEMO Reviews are possible using corrected RTT file result value maps. However, if applying cor-
rected result values in an RTT file in a newly created file, this cannot be done in JMAG-RT Viewer.
Use JMAG-RT.
• Corrections to result values in RTT files cannot be executed from command lines.
• Total flux linkage corrections cannot be used with inductance corrections or magnet flux-linkage
corrections.
Procedures
1. Prepare a correction file (.csv).
For details about the correction file format, see “Format of Correction File” on page 354.
in the [Data Status] field, and click [Apply correction file].
Or, right-click the JMAG-RT base model in the [RT Model Library] table and select [Export
Characteristics].
3. In the [Apply Correction File] dialog, click [Browse] on the [RTT file before correction]
box and specify the path for the RTT file to be corrected.
351
JMAG-RT
If selecting the JMAG-RT base model from the [RT Model Library] table and clicking on [Apply
correction file], the file path for the JMAG-RT model data will be entered automatically.
4. Click [Browse] on the [Correction file] box and specify the path for the correction file.
5. In the [RTT file after correction] box, specify the name of the corrected RTT file and
where it is to be saved.
If the setting is the same as for 3. above, the file is overwritten.
6. If adding corrected file name information to an RTT file, select [Publish correction file
name].
If [Publish correction file name] is selected, the correction file name can be confirmed when
importing the RTT file into JMAG-RT Viewer.
7. Click [Output].
The corrected RTT file will be output.
Physical Quantity That Can be Corrected and Correction Types

The following corrections are possible.
 Addition
Set the physical quantity of the correction target. This supports the following physical quantities:
PM synchronous motor and synchronous reluctance motor

Correction target by model type
Correction Type Description
Ld, Lq Spatial harmonic
Leakage inductance correction Specify the cor- Three-phase (or Six-phase) leakage
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_U rection value for inductance *1
leakage induc-
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_V
tance of the coil
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_W
(H).
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_U1
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_V1
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_W1
*1 Correction will be run as if leakage inductance is connected to each phase in series.
 Multiplier
Set the correction value (correction ratio) multiplied to the physical quantity of the correction tar-
get. This supports the following physical quantities:
352

Inductance correction Specify the correction value d-axis inductance, Three-phase (or
($RT_Correction_Inductance) for current (A), phase (deg). q-axis inductance six-phase) induc-
tance
Torque correction Specify the correction value Torque
for current (A), phase (deg). - *1
($RT_Correction_Torque)
Magnet flux-linkage correction Specify the correction value Magnet flux-link-
for current (A), phase (deg). - age
($RT_Correction_MagFlux)
Total flux linkage correction Specify the correction value d-axis inductance, Three-phase (or
($RT_Correction_TotalFlux- for current (A), phase (deg). q-axis inductance, six-phase) induc-
Linkage) magnet flux-link- tance, magnet flux-
age linkage
Iron loss correction Specify the correction value Hysteresis loss, eddy current loss
($RT_Correction_Ironloss) for the revolution speed
(rpm), current (A).
*1 Torque is calculated by the torque formula based on the voltage equation.
Induction motor
$RT_Correction_Resistance_Sec- The correction factor for secondary conductor resistance.
ondary Set the correction value when the primary axis is the slip fre-
quency (Hz) and the secondary axis is the primary current (A).
$RT_Correction_MagnetizingIn- The correction factor for magnetizing leakage inductance.
ductance Set the correction value when the primary axis is the slip fre-
$RT_Correction_LeakageInduc- The correction factor for primary coil flux leakage.
tance_Primary Set the correction value when the primary axis is the slip fre-
$RT_Correction_LeakageInduc- The correction factor for secondary conductor flux leakage.
tance_Secondary Set the correction value when the primary axis is the slip fre-
353
JMAG-RT
Format of Correction File

Create correction files (.csv) in accordance with the following formats.
Three-phase PM Synchronous Motor and Three-phase Synchronous Reluctance Motor
 Format
• Do not fail to input the following on Row 1 “$RT_Correction_Start,” and on the end row put
“$RT_Correction_End”.
• Enter correction values (correction ratio) separated by commas after reservation words that start
with $ for corrections of table specifications.
• If a column is missing, anything after that column will be invalid and cannot be corrected.
Row 1 $RT_Correction_Start,
Start marker * Fixed
Row 2 $RT_Correction_Version, (Version number)
File version. Specify “13.0.a”.
Row 3 $RT_Correction_MotorType, (Motor Type)
Specify the following as the motor type.
• [PMSM]: Three-phase PM synchronous motor
• [SynRM]: Three-phase synchronous reluctance motor
Row 4 • When specifying a constant value:
(type of correction), (correction value)
• When specifying tables:
(type of correction), (number of table rows), (number of table columns)
Specify one of the following for correction type.
• [$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_U]:
Addition correction of inductance in U-phase coil (constant)
• [$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_V]:
Addition correction of inductance in V-phase coil (constant)
• [$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_W]:
Addition correction of inductance in W-phase coil (constant)
• [$RT_Correction_Inductance]:
Multiplier correction of inductance (table)
• [$RT_Correction_Torque]:
Multiplier correction of torque (table)
• [$RT_Correction_MagFlux]:
Multiplier correction of magnet flux linkage (table)
• [$RT_Correction_TotalFluxLinkage]:
Multiplier correction of total flux linkage (table)
• [$RT_Correction_Ironloss]:
Multiplier correction of iron loss (table)
Specify correction values for constant.
Specify the number of columns and rows of tables specified after row 5 for
table.
354
Row 5 or later Correction tables when specifying tables

Row 5 and Column 1 for each row thereafter will be the table title row. Table
examples for each correction type are shown below. (The number of rows in
this example is “3” and number of columns “6”).
• For multiplier correction of inductance (current amplitude (A), phase
(deg)):
$Iam/Beta, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
• For multiplier correction of torque (current amplitude (A), phase (deg)):

$Iam/Beta, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
• For multiplier correction of magnet flux-linkage (current amplitude (A),

phase (deg)):
$Iam/Beta, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
100.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
200.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
300.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
• For multiplier correction of total flux linkage (current amplitude (A), phase
(deg)):
$Iam/Beta, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
100.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
200.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
300.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
• For multiplier correction of iron loss (revolution speed (rpm), current ampli-
tude (A)):
$N/Current, 10.0, 20.0, 30.0, 40.0, 50.0, 60.0
100.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
200.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
300.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
End row $RT_Correction_End,
End marker * Fixed
 Sample 1: Addition correction of inductance (constant)

$RT_Correction_Start,
$RT_Correction_Version, 13.0.a
$RT_Correction_MotorType, PMSM
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_U, 0.01
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_V, 0.02
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_W, 0.03
$RT_Correction_End,
355
JMAG-RT
 Sample 2: Multiplier correction of inductance (table)

$RT_Correction_Inductance, 3, 6
$Iam/Beta, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$RT_Correction_End,
Six-phase PM Synchronous Motor and Six-phase Synchronous Reluctance Motor
 Format
• Do not fail to input the following on row 1 “$RT_Correction_Start,” and on the end row put
• [PMSM_6Phase]: Six-phase PM synchronous motor
• [SynRM_6Phase]: Six-phase synchronous reluctance motor
Row 4 • When specifying constant values:
(correction type), (correction value)
(correction type), (axis 1 physical properties), (axis 2 physical properties), (axis 3
physical properties), (axis 4 physical properties), (axis 5 physical properties)
356

• [$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_U1]:
Addition correction for U1 phase coil inductance (constant)
• [$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_V1]:
Addition correction for V1 phase coil inductance (constant)
• [$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_W1]:
Addition correction for W1 phase coil inductance (constant)
Inductance multiplier correction (table)
Torque multiplier correction (table)
Multiplier correction for magnet flux linkage (table)
Multiplier correction for total flux linkage (table)
Iron loss multiplier correction (table)
Specify correction values for constant values.
For table specifications, specify the number of physical properties of each axis
for tables specified in the 6th and subsequent rows.
For example, in this scenario, each axis (I1, Beta1, I2, Beta2) in an inductance
correction table has the following values.
• I1 axis: 10, 30
• Beta1 axis: 0.0, 90.0
• I2 axis: 10, 20, 30
• Beta 2-axis: 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
The number of physical properties of the I1 axis is 2, the number of physical
properties of the Beta1 axis is 2, the number of physical properties of the I2
axis is 3, and the number of physical properties of the Beta2 axis is 6. In accor-
dance with this, enter “$RT_Correction_Inductance, 2, 2, 3, 6”.
The number of axes in correction tables will differ depending on the physical
quantities where correction values are applied, similar to the following:
• Inductance, torque, magnet flux, total flux linkage:
4 (I1 axis, Beta1 axis, I2 axis, Beta2 axis)
• Iron loss:
5 (I1 axis, Beta1 axis, I2 axis, Beta2 axis, Speed axis)
357
JMAG-RT
Row 5 $RT_Correction_AxisOrder, (Axis 1), (Axis 2), (Axis 3), (Axis 4)

• When physical quantities where correction values are applied are inductance (or
torque, magnetic flux, total flux linkage):
$RT_Correction_AxisOrder, Iam1, Beta1, Iam2, Beta2
$RT_Correction_AxisOrder, (Axis 1), (Axis 2), (Axis 3), (Axis 4), (Axis 5)
• When physical quantities where correction values are applied are iron loss:
$RT_Correction_AxisOrder, Iam1, Beta1, Iam2, Beta2, Speed
The title row for each axis.
Specify the physical properties of each axis for tables specified in the 6th and
subsequent rows in order. The meaning of each physical property is as follows:
Iam1: Current amplitude of coil set 1 (A)
Beta1: Current phase of coil set 1 (deg)
Beta2: Current phase of coil set 2 (deg) or the current phase difference of
coil set 1 and coil set 2 (deg)
Speed: Rotational speed (rpm)
Items used as axes in each corrected table will differ depending on the physical
quantities to be corrected.
Enter the contents of the correction table declared on the 4th row.
• Enter the physical property values for each axis in ascending order.
• Data after this row has a nested structure with the first axis as the outermost
part. Shown below is the data structure of correction tables for axes 1 to 4.
Axis 1 value 1
Axis 2 value 1
|- 3rd axis-4th axis table
Axis 1 value 1
Axis 2 value 2
Axis 1 value 1
Axis 2 value 3
Axis 1 value 2
Axis 2 value 1
Axis 1 value 2
Axis 2 value 2
...
358
Example:
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis/4thAxis, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 90.0
$3rdAxis/4thAxis, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7,
20.0, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7,
...
Enter the value of the 1st axis after [$1stAxis].
$1stAxis, 10.0
Enter the value of the second axis after [$2ndAxis].
$2ndAxis, 0.0
For iron loss correction, enter the value of the 3rd axis after [$3rdAxis].
$3rdAxis, 0.0
An example of the 3rd axis-4th axis table (or the 4th axis-5th axis table) is
shown below. The number of rows in this example is “3”, and the number of
columns is “6”.
• For inductance (or torque, magnet flux, total flux linkage) multiplier correc-
tions:
The 3rd axis is the current amplitude of coil set 2 (A), and the 4th axis is the
current phase of coil set 2 (deg).
$3rd/4th, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
100.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
200.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
300.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
• For multiplier correction of iron loss:

The 4th axis is the current phase of coil set 2 (deg) and the 5th axis is rota-
tion speed (rpm).
$4th/5th, 10.0, 20.0, 30.0, 40.0, 50.0, 60.0
100.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
200.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
300.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,

End marker * Fixed
 Sample 1: Additional correction for inductance (constant)

$RT_Correction_MotorType, PMSM_6Phase
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_U1, 0.01
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_V1, 0.02
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_W1, 0.03
$RT_Correction_End,
359
JMAG-RT
 Sample 2: Multiplier correction for inductance (table)

$RT_Correction_Inductance, 2, 2, 3, 6
$AxisOrder, Iam1, Beta1, Iam2, Beta2
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis/4thAxis, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 90.0
$3rdAxis/4thAxis, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7,
20.0, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7,
30.0, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7,
$1stAxis, 30.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis/4thAxis, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7,
20.0, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7,
30.0, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7,
$1stAxis, 30.0
$2ndAxis, 90.0
$3rdAxis/4thAxis, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7,
20.0, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7,
30.0, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7,
$RT_Correction_End,
 Sample 3: Multiplier correction for iron loss (table)

$RT_Correction_Ironloss, 2, 2, 3, 3, 6
$AxisOrder, Iam1, Beta1, Iam2, Beta2, Speed
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis, 0.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis, 30.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis, 60.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 10.0
360
$2ndAxis, 30.0
$3rdAxis, 0.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 30.0
$3rdAxis, 30.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 30.0
$3rdAxis, 60.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 50.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis, 0.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 50.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis, 30.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 50.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis, 60.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 50.0
$2ndAxis, 30.0
$3rdAxis, 0.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 50.0
$2ndAxis, 30.0
$3rdAxis, 30.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 50.0
$2ndAxis, 30.0
$3rdAxis, 60.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
361
JMAG-RT
$RT_Correction_End,
 Sample 4: Inductance multiplier correction (table) and torque multiplier correction

(table)
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis/4thAxis, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 90.0
$3rdAxis/4thAxis, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7,
20.0, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7,
30.0, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7,
$RT_Correction_Torque, 1, 1, 3, 6
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis/4thAxis, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$RT_Correction_End,
362
Three-phase Induction Motor
 Format
• [IM]: Induction motor
Row 4 (type of correction), (number of table rows), (number of table columns)
• [$RT_Correction_Resistance_Secondary]:
Multiplier correction table for secondary conductor resistance (Ohm)
• [$RT_Correction_MagnetizingInductance]:
Multiplier correction table for magnetizing leakage inductance (H)
• [$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_Primary]:
Multiplier correction for primary coil leakage inductance (H)
• [$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_Secondary]:
Multiplier correction for secondary conductor leakage inductance (H)
table.
363
JMAG-RT
Row 5 or later Correction tables

• Multiplier correction for secondary conductor resistance (Primary axis
(row): Slip frequency (Hz), Secondary axis (column): Primary current (A)):
$SlipFreqency/Iam, 0.1, 1.0, 20.0, 50.0, 100.0, 1000.0
10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
• Multiplier correction for magnetizing leakage inductance (Primary axis

10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
• Multiplier correction for primary coil leakage inductance (Primary axis

10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
• Multiplier correction for secondary leakage inductance (Primary axis (row):

Slip frequency (Hz), Secondary axis (column): Primary current (A)):
10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
End marker * Fixed
 Sample 1: Multiplier correction for leakage inductance (table)

$RT_Correction_MotorType, IM
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_Primary, 3, 6
0.25, 1.0, 1.01, 1.02, 1.03, 1.04, 1.05
10.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6
100.0, 2.0, 2.2, 2.4, 2.6, 2.8, 3.0
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_Secondary, 2, 4
$SlipFrequency/Iam, 0.1, 1.0, 10.0, 100.0
0.25, 0.99, 0.98, 0.97, 0.96
100.0, 0.95, 0.94, 0.93, 0.92
$RT_Correction_End
364
Adding Loss Data to a JMAG-RT Model

It is possible to add the following types of results data obtained from FEA in JMAG-Designer to
RTT files (.rtt).
• Harmonic equivalent copper loss resistance data
• Iron loss data
Use this function to take into account harmonic iron loss or harmonic copper loss in control circuit
simulations.

• Loss Table File Format (page 368)
Notes
 Motors supported by this function

• This function supports RTT files for the following applications:
• Three-phase/six-phase PM synchronous motors (from spatial harmonic model data or from
spatial harmonic model + LdLq model data):
However, RTT files containing zero-phase current data are not supported by this function.
• Three-phase/six-phase synchronous reluctance motors (from spatial harmonic model data or
from spatial harmonic model + LdLq model data)
• Three-phase induction motors
• Generic models
• This function does not support RTT files for the following applications:
• Three-phase/six-phase PM synchronous motors (in LdLq models)
• Three-phase/six-phase synchronous reluctance motors (in LdLq models)
• Stepping motors
• Linear solenoids
• Linear synchronous motors
• Six-phase induction motors
• SR motors
• Wound-field synchronous motors
 Required files
• When adding loss data to an RTT file, it is necessary to create a loss table file (.csv) containing
the loss data according to a prescribed format. For the loss table file format, see “Loss Table File
Format” on page 368.
 Using with other functions

• Addition of loss data to an RTT file cannot be executed from the command line.
• Corrections can also be applied to RTT files with added loss data. See “Applying Correction to
Result Values of JMAG-RT Model” on page 351.
365
JMAG-RT
• Even if re-executed (page 345) after adding loss data to an RTT file, the loss data is retained in
the RTT file.
However, even if adding (or modifying) the resolution before re-execution, the loss data added
before re-execution will not be updated. In this case, as necessary, edit the loss data and re-add.
 Addition of loss data to generic model RTT files

• Use single-byte characters for motion condition titles and coil set titles. Loss data cannot be
added to RTT files that include motion conditions or coil sets with multi-byte characters in their
titles.
The title of a motion condition is specified when creating the input JCF file that the motion
condition is in with JMAG-Designer. Coil set titles are specified when performing settings in the
JMAG-RT model library.
• Even if loss data is added to an RTT file created from multiple motion conditions, the loss data
will not be considered properly during control circuit simulation.
 Addition of harmonic equivalent copper loss resistance data

• Harmonic equivalent copper loss resistance data can be added to PM synchronous motor, syn-
chronous reluctance motor, or induction motor RTT files. It cannot be added to generic model
RTT files.
• AC copper loss resistors are considered to be in series with DC copper resistors.
V = (R ' + R ) × I + dφ ⁄ dt
• V : voltage (V)
• R' : AC copper loss resistance (ohm). The value obtained from converting the harmonic cop-
per loss into resistance.
• R : DC copper loss resistance (ohm). A resistance value set by an FEM coil.
• I : current amplitude (A)
• dφ ⁄ dt : induced voltage (V) from coil flux linkage
 Addition of iron loss data

• Iron loss data can be added to PM synchronous motor, synchronous reluctance motor, induction
motor, or generic model RTT files.
• Iron loss data is converted into torque/electromagnetic force. This force is subtracted from the
torque/electromagnetic force in which iron loss is not taken into account.
• Rotating machines:
T ' = T – W iron ⁄ ω
T ' : torque (N·m) that takes into account iron loss
T : torque (N·m) that does not take into account iron loss
366
• Linear motion machines:

F ' = F – W iron ⁄ v
F ' : electromagnetic force (N) that takes into account iron loss
F : electromagnetic force (N) that does not take into account iron loss
v : speed (m/s)
• For induction machines, the stray load loss computed automatically does not include iron loss.
Note that the definitions (values) are different from JMAG-Designer Version 17.1 on.
 Control circuit simulation using a JMAG-RT model with loss data added
• Iron loss data added using this function is used in control circuit simulations when both of the
following settings are configured for JMAG-RT model blocks in Simulink.
• Select [Use iron loss table]
• Select [2: Table from CSV]
• Harmonic equivalent copper loss resistance data added using this function is used in control cir-
cuit simulations when the following settings are configured for JMAG-RT model blocks in Sim-
ulink.
• Select [Use AC copper loss resistance]
• Select [1: Equivalent Resistance Table from CSV]
• The added iron loss data and harmonic equivalent copper loss resistance data are interpolated
using the interpolation method ([Table data interpolation type]) specified in the JMAG-RT
model block.
• When a value outside the range of the added iron loss data or harmonic equivalent copper loss
resistance data is referenced during control circuit simulation, the endpoint value (minimum or
maximum value) of the loss data or resistance data is used.
Procedures
1. Export a results table in from JMAG-Designer to a CSV file or text file.
2. Process the results table exported in step 1 to create a loss table file (.csv).
For the loss table file format, see “Loss Table File Format” on page 368.
in the [Data Status] field, and click [Apply loss table].
Or, right-click the JMAG-RT base model in the [RT Model Library] table and select [Apply Loss
Table].
4. In the [Apply Loss Table] dialog, under the [Select an original RTT file] box, set the path
of the RTT file to which to add loss data.
After clicking [Apply Loss Table] with a JMAG-RT base model selected from the [RT Model
Library] table, the path for the RTT file outputted based on the JMAG-RT base model is
entered.
MEMO If an RTT file with loss data already added is specified in the [Select an original RTT file]
box, the loss data is overwritten.
5. In the [Select an updated RTT file] box, enter the save destination and name of the RTT
file with added loss data.
367
JMAG-RT
If the same path and name is specified as in step 4, the file will be overwritten and saved.
6. To add harmonic equivalent resistance data, select [Harmonic equivalent copper loss
resistance table file (csv)], click [Browse] to the right side of the text box, and specify the
loss table file (.csv) path.
7. To add iron loss data, select [Iron loss table file (csv)], click [Browse] to the right side of
the text box, and specify the loss table file (.csv) path.
8. Click [Output].
A RTT file with loss data added is output.
Loss Table File Format

Provide a loss table file (.csv) with the following format.
PM Synchronous Motors, Induction Motors
 Sample (iron loss table file)

$Iamp[A],Beta[deg],Speed[rpm],DCvoltage[V],CarrierFreq[Hz],Loss[W]
1.0,45,6000,500,6000,100
1.0,45,6000,500,12000,200
1.0,45,6000,750,6000,300
1.0,45,6000,750,12000,400
1.0,75,6000,500,6000,500
1.0,75,6000,500,12000,600
1.0,75,6000,750,6000,700
1.0,75,6000,750,12000,800
MEMO No title line is required in the loss table file. In this sample, to indicate the meaning of each
value in each row, a “$” at the beginning of the first line means that the line is a comment line, becoming
a title line added.
 Format
• Separate each value with a comma (,).
• If a “$” is at the beginning of a line, the line is treated as a comment line and is not added to the
RTT file.
• An error is generated if any row does not have the required number of values.
• An error is generated if there is a line containing a blank entry.
• Blank lines (lines with only newlines) are ignored.
• Label each row entry as follows:
Entry ID Entry title Description
1 Iamp [A] 1st entry:
Current amplitude (A)
2 “Beta [deg]” or “Slip[Hz]” 2nd entry:
PM synchronous motor: current phase (deg). Define
0 deg to 360 deg.
Induction motor: slip frequency (Hz)
3 Speed [rpm] 3rd entry:
Rotation speed (rpm)
368

4 DCvoltage [V] 4th entry:
DC bus voltage (V)
5 CarrierFreq [Hz] 5th entry:
Carrier frequency (Hz).
6 “Loss [W]” or “Resistance For a harmonic equivalent copper loss resistance table
[Ohm]” file: equivalent resistance (Ohm)
For an iron loss table file: iron loss (W)
However, the entries can be interpreted in any way as desired. For example, the 5th entry can be
used for temperature (K) if temperature (K) is inputted to input port Carrier Freq in the JMAG-
RT model block in a circuit simulator.
• Loss data must be provided for every combination of entries from the rows.
If the number of different values in the 1st entry, 2nd entry, 3rd entry, 4th entry, 5th entry are
numI, numB, numR, numV, numF respectively, the required number of data points is
numI*numB*numR*numV*numF.
For example, if the first entry values are (1, 2), 2nd entry values are (3, 4), 3rd entry values are (5,
6), 4th entry value is 7, and 5th entry value is 8, loss data for the following 8 patterns is required
(equivalent resistance or iron loss is entered for XXX).
1,3,5,7,8,XXX
1,3,6,7,8,XXX
1,4,5,7,8,XXX
1,4,6,7,8,XXX
2,3,5,7,8,XXX
2,3,6,7,8,XXX
2,4,5,7,8,XXX
2,4,6,7,8,XXX
As long as all combinations are covered, it does not matter what the order of the data points is.
Generic Models
For generic models, it is necessary to describe any loss tables included after defining their loss table
axes.
 Sample (iron loss table file)

$-----------------------------
$LossTable for generic model
$-----------------------------
$
$reference_name, AxisType, index(0-)
#reference_name="CoilSet#1", type="Current",index=0
#reference_name="CoilSet#1", type="Phase",index=1
#reference_name="CoilSet#2", type="Current",index=2
#reference_name="DCVoltage", type="User",index=3
#reference_name="Motion", type="Speed",index=4
$
$Iamp[A]ofCoilSet1,Iphase[deg]ofCoilSet1,Iamp[A]ofCoilSet2,DCvoltage[V],Speed[rpm],Loss[W]
1.00E-01,0.00E+00,1.00E+00,1.00E+02,1.00E+02,5.00E+01
1.00E-01,0.00E+00,1.00E+00,1.00E+02,2.00E+02,6.00E+01
1.00E-01,0.00E+00,1.00E+00,1.00E+02,3.00E+02,7.00E+01
1.00E-01,0.00E+00,5.00E+00,1.00E+02,1.00E+02,5.20E+01
1.00E-01,0.00E+00,5.00E+00,1.00E+02,2.00E+02,6.20E+01
369
JMAG-RT
1.00E-01,0.00E+00,5.00E+00,1.00E+02,3.00E+02,7.20E+01
1.00E-01,3.60E+02,1.00E+00,1.00E+02,1.00E+02,5.00E+01
1.00E-01,3.60E+02,1.00E+00,1.00E+02,2.00E+02,6.00E+01
1.00E-01,3.60E+02,1.00E+00,1.00E+02,3.00E+02,7.00E+01
1.00E-01,3.60E+02,5.00E+00,1.00E+02,1.00E+02,5.20E+01
1.00E-01,3.60E+02,5.00E+00,1.00E+02,2.00E+02,6.20E+01
1.00E-01,3.60E+02,5.00E+00,1.00E+02,3.00E+02,7.20E+01
MEMO No title line is required in a loss table file. In this sample, to indicate the meaning of each value
in each row, a “$” at the beginning of a line means that the line is a comment line which is a title line.
 Format
• If a “$” is at the beginning of a line, the line is treated as a comment line and is not added to the
RTT file.
• If a “#” is at the beginning of a line, the line is treated as axis information.
• Add the loss table rows below the “#” rows.
Axis definitions
• One or more axes must be defined.
1 reference_name If “type” is “Current” or “Phase”, enter a coil set name.
If “type” is “Speed”, enter the name of a motion condition.
If “type” is “User”, enter a name.
Enclose the names in double quotation marks.
2 type Axis type
Enter one of the following:
• Current:
Coil set current amplitude (A)
• Phase:
Coil set current phase (deg) Can be specified when the [Drive
Type] is a [Sin (1-phase)] or [Sin (3-phase)] coil set. Define 0 deg
to 360 deg.
• Speed:
Motion condition speed For rotational motion, the unit is rpm.
For translational motion, the unit is m/s.
• User:
User-defined physical quantity (DC bus voltage, carrier fre-
quency, temperature, etc.) axes.
Multiple user-defined axes can be set.
For this type, the loss table used in a JMAG-RT block is accessed
using each time a value is input into the JMAG-RT block input
port “user specified input”.
Enclose axis “type” names in double quotation marks.
3 index Loss table column number
Start from number 0.
And number consecutively (0, 1, 2, etc., not for example 0, 1, 3,
etc.)
370
Loss table
• Separate each value with a comma (,).
• An error is generated if any row does not have the required number of values.
• An error is generated if there is a line containing a blank entry.
• Blank lines (lines with only newlines) are ignored.
1~(last Iamp [A], Iphase [deg], Speed Enter values of current amplitude, current phase,
entry-1) [rpm], etc. speed, etc. in the defined axis index order.
Last entry Loss [W] Iron loss (W)
• Loss data must be provided for every combination of axis values. See the example in “PM Syn-
chronous Motors, Induction Motors” on page 368.
371
JMAG-RT
Exporting Results Data from a JMAG-RT Model to a File

FEA results data in an RTT file can be exported to a CSV file (.csv). Use this function when for
example RTT file results data verification is desired.
The following results data can be output to a CSV file.
• Inductance (Ld, Lq)
• Inductance (details)
• Magnetic flux
• Torque
• Driving force
• Current (Id, Iq)
• Induced voltage
However, the results data that can be output varies depending on the model type. For details on
results data, see “Results Data Details” on page 374.
Table associating model types and outputs

: supported, -: not supported
Induced voltage
Magnetic flux
Driving force
Inductance
Inductance
(details)
Current
(Ld, Lq)
Torque
(Id, Iq)
Three-phase PM synchronous motor: LdLq
-  - - - - 
model
Three-phase PM synchronous motor: Spatial
    - - 
harmonic (differential) model: sinusoidal drive
 -  - - - 
harmonic (differential) model: Other
- - - - -  -
harmonic (integral) model
Six-phase PM synchronous motor: Spatial har-
 -   - - -
monic (differential) model
Three-phase synchronous reluctance motor:
-  - - - - 
LdLq model
Spatial harmonic (differential) model: sinusoi-     - - 
dal drive
 -  - - - 
Spatial harmonic (differential) model: Other
Six-phase synchronous reluctance motor: Spa-
 -   - - -
tial harmonic (differential) model
Stepping motor  -  - - - -
Linear solenoid  -  - - - -
Linear synchronous motor    -  - 
SR motor - -  - - - -
372
: supported, -: not supported
Induced voltage
Magnetic flux
Driving force
Inductance
Inductance
(details)
Current
(Ld, Lq)
Torque
(Id, Iq)
Three-phase/Six-phase Induction Motor - -  - - - -
Wound-field synchronous motor  -  - - - -
Generic model  -  - - - -
Notes
• Current (Id, Iq) CSV files can be exported from RTT files created in JMAG-Designer Version
19.0 or later.
CSV files of other result values can be exported from RTT files managed by the JMAG-RT
library manager, even if a JMAG-Designer version before version 19.0 is used.
• The following output values are those described in the RTT file:
• Inductance (details)
• Torque when [Drive Type] is [Sine Wave Drive] and [Use zero phase sequence current] is
selected
• Magnetic flux
• Current (Id, Iq)
• The following output values are processed from values described in the RTT file:
• Inductance (Ld, Lq)
• Torque when [Drive Type] is [Sine Wave Drive] and [Use zero phase sequence current] is
cleared
• Driving force
• Induced voltage
• The output values do not reflect the correction factors set in the [RT Correction] tab of each
model, etc.
Procedures
in the [Data Status] field, and click [Export Characteristics].
Or, right-click the JMAG-RT base model in the [RT Model Library] table and select [Export
Characteristics].
2. In the [Export Properties] dialog, under [Output Items], select the checkbox for the
results data to be output to a CSV file.
Depending on the model type, one or more of the following checkboxes is displayed. For details
on results data output, see “Results Data Details” on page 374.
• [Flux]:
Flux.csv is output.
• [Inductance (Detail)]:
Inductance.csv is output.
373
JMAG-RT
• [Inductance (Ld,Lq)]:
Ld_graph.csv and Lq_graph.csv are output.
• [Torque]:
When [Drive Type] is [Sin Wave Drive] and [Use zero phase sequence current] is cleared,
Trq_graph.csv and AveTrq_graph.csv are output. Enter the current phase in [Advance Angle
[deg]]. The result values for the entered current phase is output.
When [Drive Type] is [Sin Wave Drive] and [Use zero phase sequence current] is selected,
Torque.csv is output.
• [Thrust Force]:
AveForce_graph.csv and Force_graph.csv are output.
Enter the current phase in the [Advance Angle [deg]] box. The results data for the current
phase specified is output.
• [Current]:
Id.csv and Iq.csv are output.
• [Induced Voltage]:
InducedVoltage_graph.csv is output.
• For a PM synchronous motor, enter the number of revolutions per minute of the rotor in
the [Rotation Speed [rpm]] box. The results data for the rotation speed specified is out-
put.
• For a linear synchronous motor, enter the distance traveled per second for the moving part
in the [Velocity of Moving Part [m/s]] box. The results data for the moving speed specified
is output.
The results data for the value specified in each text box is output.
3. Click [Browse] next to the [Output folder] box and set the path of the CSV file.
4. Click [Export].
Results Data Details
PM Synchronous Motor and Synchronous Reluctance Motor
 Magnetic flux (Flux.csv)

Can be output for a spatial harmonic model. Cannot be output for an LdLq model. The output
depends on [Drive Type].
When [Drive Type] is [Sine Wave Drive]

Column ID Column title Description
1 current current amplitude, A
2 phase current phase, deg
3 zerocurrent zero phase sequence current, A.
When [Use zero phase sequence current] is cleared, this col-
umn is not output.
4 angle mechanical angle, deg
5 FluxU U-phase coil magnetic flux, Wb
6 FluxV V-phase coil magnetic flux, Wb
7 FluxW W-phase coil magnetic flux, Wb
374
Sample (Flux.cvs)
When [Drive Type] is [Other]

1 currentU U-phase coil current amplitude, A
2 currentV V-phase coil current amplitude, A
3 currentW W-phase coil current amplitude, A
 Inductance (details) (Inductance.csv)

Can be output for a spatial harmonic model. Cannot be output for an LdLq model. The output
depends on [Drive Type].

3 zerocurrent zero phase sequence current, A.
When [Use zero phase sequence current] is cleared, this col-
umn is not output.
5 Luu U-phase coil self-inductance, H
6 Muv U-phase coil - V-phase coil mutual inductance, H
7 Muw U-phase coil - W-phase coil mutual inductance, H
8 Mvu V-phase coil - U-phase coil mutual inductance, H
9 Lvv V-phase coil self-inductance, H
10 Mvw V-phase coil - W-phase coil mutual inductance, H
11 Mwu W-phase coil - U-phase coil mutual inductance, H
12 Mwv W-phase coil - V-phase coil mutual inductance, H
13 Lww W-phase coil self-inductance, H
When [Drive Type] is [Other]

1 currentU U-phase coil current amplitude, A
2 currentV V-phase coil current amplitude, A
375
JMAG-RT

3 currentW W-phase coil current amplitude, A
8 Mvu V-phase coil - U-phase coil mutual inductance, H
 Inductance (Ld, Lq) (Ld_graph.csv, Lq_graph.csv)

The current phase dependent d-axis and q-axis inductance values at each current amplitude are out-
put.
• When the results data of both the LdLq model and the spatial harmonic model are represented in
an RTT file, the inductance from the LdLq model is output.
• When [Use zero phase sequence current] is selected, each value is output when the zero-phase
sequence current is 0 A.
1 Beta [deg] current phase, deg
2 and above I=XXX d-axis or q-axis inductance, H, for each current amplitude in
the column titles.
• “XXX” is the current amplitude (A).
• Ld and Lq are the average values for one electrical cycle.
Sample
 Torque (Trq_graph.csv)
When [Drive Type] is [Sine Wave Drive] and [Use zero phase sequence current] is cleared
Torque that is dependent on the rotation mechanical angle at each current value at the advance angle
specified (current phase) is output.
• The advance angle is the value specified in [Advance Angle [deg]] in the [Export Properties] dia-
log.
• The rotational angles are listed in the [Mechanical angle calculation range] box in [Resolution]
under the [Information] tab.
• Can be output for a spatial harmonic model. Cannot be output for an LdLq model.
376
Item or
Row ID Column ID Description
column title
1 1 Beta=XXX advance angle (current phase), deg
“XXX” is the value specified in [Advance
Angle [deg]] in the [Export Properties] dia-
log.
2 and above 1 Theta [deg] rotation mechanical angle, deg
2 and above I=XXX Torque, Nm, for each current amplitude in
the column titles.
“XXX” is the current amplitude (A).
Sample
 Torque (AveTrq_graph.csv)
When [Drive Type] is [Sine Wave Drive] and [Use zero phase sequence current] is cleared
The average torque at each current phase and current value is output.
• Can be output for a spatial harmonic model. Cannot be output for an LdLq model.
2 and above I=XXX Average torque, N•m, for each current amplitude in the
column titles.
Sample
 Torque (Torque.csv)
When [Drive Type] is [Sine Wave Drive] and [Use zero phase sequence current] is selected
377
JMAG-RT

3 zerocurrent zero-phase sequence current, A
5 torque torque, Nm
 d-axis current, q-axis current (Id.csv and Iq.csv)

These are current tables for spatial harmonic (integral) models. See “PMSM/SynRM JMAG-RT
Model Type (LdLq, Spatial Harmonic)” on page 435 for details on spatial harmonic (integral) mod-
els.
These tables can be output from spatial harmonic (integral) models, but cannot be output from
LdLq model, or spatial harmonic (differential) models.

1 FluxD d-axis magnetic flux, Wb
2 FluxQ q-axis magnetic flux, Wb
4 id or iq For an Id.csv file, d-axis current, A
For an lq.csv file, q-axis current, A
Sample (Id.cvs)
 Induced voltage (InducedVoltage_graph.csv)

The induced voltage in the no-load state at the rotation speed specified is output.
• The rotation speed is the value specified for [Rotation Speed [rpm]] in the [Export Properties]
dialog.
Item
Row ID Column ID or Description
column title
1 1 Rotation rotation speed, rpm.
Speed=XXX [rpm] “XXX” is the value specified for [Rotation
Speed [rpm]] in the [Export Properties] dialog.
2 and above 1 Theta [deg] rotation mechanical angle, deg
2 U-phase U-phase coil induced voltage, V
3 V-phase V-phase coil induced voltage, V
4 W-phase W-phase coil induced voltage, V
378
Stepping Motor

1 distance displacement, deg
2 FluxA+ A-phase coil magnetic flux, Wb
3 FluxA- A(-)-phase coil magnetic flux, Wb
4 FluxB+ B-phase coil magnetic flux, Wb
5 FluxB- B(-)-phase coil magnetic flux, Wb

2 distance displacement, deg
3 LAA A-phase coil self-inductance, H
4 MAa A-phase coil - A(-)-phase coil mutual inductance, H
5 MAB A-phase coil - B-phase coil mutual inductance, H
6 MAb A-phase coil - B(-)-phase coil mutual inductance, H
7 MaA A(-)-phase coil - A-phase coil mutual inductance, H
8 Laa A(-)-phase coil self-inductance, H
9 MaB A(-)-phase coil - B-phase coil mutual inductance, H
10 Mab A(-)-phase coil - B-phase coil mutual inductance, H
11 MBA B-phase coil - A-phase coil mutual inductance, H
12 MBa B-phase coil - B(-)-phase coil mutual inductance, H
13 LBB B-phase coil self-inductance, H
14 MBb B-phase coil - B(-)-phase coil mutual inductance, H
15 MbA B(-)-phase coil - A-phase coil mutual inductance, H
16 Mba B(-)-phase coil - A(-)-phase coil mutual inductance, H
17 MbB B(-)-phase coil - B-phase coil mutual inductance, H
18 Lbb B(-)-phase coil self-inductance, H
Linear Solenoid

1 distance displacement, m
2 Flux magnetic flux, Wb

379
JMAG-RT

3 L inductance, H
Linear Synchronous Motor


 Inductance (Ld, Lq) (Ld_graph.csv, Lq_graph.csv)

The current phase dependent d-axis and q-axis inductance values at each current amplitude are out-
put.

1 Displacement [m] displacement, m
2 and above I=XXX d-axis or q-axis inductance, H, for each current amplitude
in the column titles.
 Driving force (Force_graph.csv)

The displacement-dependent driving force at each current value at the advance angle specified (cur-
rent phase) is output.
• The advance angle is the value specified in [Advance Angle [deg]] in the [Export Properties] dia-
log.
• The displacements are listed in the [Angle] box in [Electro magnetic resolution] under the
[Information] tab.
380
Item
Row ID Column ID or Description
column title
1 1 Beta=XXX [deg] advance angle (current phase), deg
“XXX” is the value specified in [Advance Angle
[deg]] in the [Export Properties] dialog.
2 and above 1 Displacement [m] displacement, m
2 I=XXX Driving force, N, for each current amplitude
in the column titles.
 Driving force (AveForce_graph.csv)

The average driving force at each current phase and current value is output.

2 and above I=XXX Average driving force, N, for each current amplitude in the
column titles.
 Induced voltage (InducedVoltage_graph.csv)

The induced voltage in the no-load state at the moving speed specified is output.
• The moving speed is the value specified for [Velocity of Moving Part [m/s]] in the [Export Prop-
erties] dialog.
Item or
Row ID Column ID Description
column title
1 1 Translation moving speed, m/s.
Speed=XXX [m/s] “XXX” is the value specified in [Velocity of
Moving Part [m/s]] in the [Export Properties]
dialog.
2 and above 1 Displacement [m] displacement, m
2 U-phase U-phase coil induced voltage, V
3 V-phase V-phase coil induced voltage, V
4 W-phase W-phase coil induced voltage, V
SR Motor
Three-phase SR motor
3 Laa A-phase coil self-inductance, H
4 Mab A-phase coil - B-phase coil mutual inductance, H
381
JMAG-RT

5 Mac A-phase coil - C-phase coil mutual inductance, H
6 Lbb B-phase coil self-inductance, H
7 Mbc B-phase coil - C-phase coil mutual inductance, H
8 Mca C-phase coil - A-phase coil mutual inductance, H
9 Mcb C-phase coil - B-phase coil mutual inductance, H
10 Lcc C-phase coil self-inductance, H
For 4 phases, the D-phase self-inductance and the D-phase - (A-phase, B-phase, and C-phase)
mutual inductance are also output.
For 5 phases, the D-phase self-inductance, the E-phase self-inductance, the D-phase - (A-phase, B-
phase, C-phase, and E-phase) mutual inductance, and the E-phase - (A-phase, B-phase, C-phase,
and D-phase) mutual inductance are also output.
Induction Motor
Three-phase motors
2 slip_freq slip frequency, Hz
3 L11_table self-inductance of each phase of the stator, H
4 M12_table mutual inductance for each combination of a phase of the
stator and a phase of the rotor, H
6 L22_table self-inductance of each phase of the rotor, H
Six-phase motors
2 slip_freq slip frequency, Hz
3 multiplication double angle (p: number of pole pairs).
1: 2p poles (multiplication 1)
2: 4p poles (multiplication 2)
4 L11_table self-inductance of each phase of the stator, H
7 L22_table self-inductance of each phase of the rotor, H
382
Wound-field Synchronous Motor

The output depends on [Current type].
When [Current type] is [Amplitude, Current Phase]

1 current_stator stator coil current amplitude, A
2 phase stator coil current phase, deg
3 current_field field coil current amplitude, A
5 FluxU stator coil U-phase magnetic flux, Wb
6 FluxV stator coil V-phase magnetic flux, Wb
7 FluxW stator coil W-phase magnetic flux, Wb
8 FluxF field coil magnetic flux, Wb
When [Current type] is [dq Axis Current]

1 current_stator_ld stator coil d-axis current amplitude, A
2 current_stator_lq stator coil d-axis current amplitude, A
5 FluxU stator coil U-phase magnetic flux, Wb
6 FluxV stator coil V-phase magnetic flux, Wb
7 FluxW stator coil W-phase magnetic flux, Wb
8 FluxF field coil magnetic flux, Wb

The output depends on [Current type].
When [Current type] is [Amplitude, Current Phase]

1 current_stator stator coil current amplitude, A
2 phase stator coil current phase, deg
5 Luu stator U-phase coil self-inductance, H
6 Muv stator U-phase coil - stator V-phase coil mutual inductance,
H
7 Muw stator U-phase coil - stator W-phase coil mutual inductance,
H
8 Muf stator U-phase coil - field coil mutual inductance, H
9 Lvv stator V-phase coil self-inductance, H
10 Mvw stator V-phase coil - stator W-phase coil mutual inductance,
H
383
JMAG-RT

11 Mvf stator V-phase coil - field coil mutual inductance, H
12 Mwu stator W-phase coil - stator U-phase coil mutual inductance,
H
13 Mwv stator W-phase coil - stator V-phase coil mutual inductance,
H
14 Lww stator W-phase coil self-inductance, H
15 Mwf stator W-phase coil - field coil mutual inductance, H
16 Mfu field coil - stator U-phase coil mutual inductance, H
17 Mfv field coil - stator V-phase coil mutual inductance, H
18 Mfw field coil - stator W-phase coil mutual inductance, H
19 Lff field coil self-inductance, H
When [Current type] is [dq Axis Current]

1 current_stator_ld stator coil d-axis current amplitude, A
2 current_stator_lq stator coil d-axis current amplitude, A
5 Luu stator U-phase coil self-inductance, H
6 Muv stator U-phase coil - stator V-phase coil mutual inductance,
H
7 Muw stator U-phase coil - W-phase coil mutual inductance, H
8 Muf stator U-phase coil - field coil mutual inductance, H
9 Lvv stator V-phase coil self-inductance, H
10 Mvw stator V-phase coil - stator W-phase coil mutual inductance,
H
11 Mvf stator V-phase coil - field coil mutual inductance, H
12 Mwu stator W-phase coil - stator U-phase coil mutual induc-
tance, H
13 Mwv stator W-phase coil - stator V-phase coil mutual induc-
tance, H
14 Lww stator W-phase coil self-inductance, H
15 Mwf stator W-phase coil - field coil mutual inductance, H
16 Mfu field coil - stator U-phase coil mutual inductance, H
17 Mfv field coil - stator V-phase coil mutual inductance, H
18 Mfw field coil - stator W-phase coil mutual inductance, H
19 Lff field coil self-inductance, H
Generic Model

• Current phase, current amplitude, and displacement are output for each coil set.
The coil set output order follows the sorting order in the [Coil Set] list under the [Create] tab in
the JMAG-RT Library Manager.
384
If the coil set that selected [Reference Coil Set] or the coil set [Drive Type] is [Constant], current
phase and displacement will not be output.
• Magnetic flux is output for each coil.
The coil set output order follows the coil set sorting order in the [Coil Set] list under the [Create]
tab in the JMAG-RT Library Manager, and the phase order (UVW) in the coil sets.
1 and above Current1: Amplitude 1st coil set current amplitude, A
Current1: Angle 1st coil set current phase, deg
Current2: Amplitude 2nd coil set current amplitude, A
Current2: Angle 2nd coil set current phase, deg
... (The number of current amplitudes and the number current phases are the same as the
number of coil sets)
Current*: Amplitude *th coil set current amplitude, A
Current*: Angle *th coil set current phase, deg
Motion1: Disp/Ang Displacement, due to a motion condition, referenced by the
1st coil set, m or deg
2nd coil set, m or deg
... (The number of displacements outputted is dependent on the number of coil sets)
Motion*: Disp/Ang Displacement due to a motion condition referenced by the
*th coil set, m or deg
Flux1 1st coil magnetic flux, Wb
Flux2 2nd coil magnetic flux, Wb
... (Magnetic flux is output dependent on the number of coil sets)
Last column Flux* *th coil magnetic flux, Wb
Sample
(In this sample model, two coil sets are set.
[Drive Type] of coil set #1 is [Sin (3-phase)].
Coil set #2 references coil set #1.
“Flux1” means “coil set #1 U-phase coil magnetic flux”.)

• Current phase, current amplitude, and displacement are output for each coil set.
The coil set output order follows the sorting order in the [Coil Set] list under the [Create] tab in
385
JMAG-RT
If the coil set that selected [Reference Coil Set] or the coil set [Drive Type] is [Constant], current
phase and displacement will not be output.
• Self-inductance is output for each coil. In addition, mutual inductance from a combination of
coils is also output.
The coil set output order follows the coil set sorting order in the [Coil Set] list under the [Create]
tab in the JMAG-RT Library Manager, and the phase order (UVW) in the coil sets.
1 and above Current1: Amplitude 1st coil set current amplitude, A
Current1: Angle 1st coil set current phase, deg
Current2: Amplitude 2nd coil set current amplitude, A
Current2: Angle 2nd coil set current phase, deg
... (The number of current amplitudes and the number current phases are the same as the
number of coil sets)
Current*: Amplitude *th coil set current amplitude, A
Current*: Angle *th coil set current phase, deg
1st coil set, m or deg
2nd coil set, m or deg
... (The number of displacements outputted is dependent on the number of coil sets)
Motion*: Disp/Ang Displacement due to a motion condition referenced by the
*th coil set, m or deg
L11 1st coil self-inductance, H
M12 1st coil - 2nd coil mutual inductance, H
... (The number of mutual inductances with the 1st coil outputted is dependent on the
number of coils)
M1* 1st coil - *th coil mutual inductance, H
M21 2nd coil - 1st coil mutual inductance, H
L22 2nd coil self-inductance, H
... (The number of mutual inductances with the 2nd coil outputted is dependent on the
number of coils)
M2* 2nd coil - *th coil mutual inductance, H
... (The number of self-inductances are the same as the number of coils, and the number
of mutual inductances are dependent on the number of coils)
Last column L** *th coil self-inductance, H
386
Creating a Model for JMAG-RT Using the Command Line

The input data (base model) for creating a JMAG-RT model can be created using the command line
instead of using the JMAG-RT Library Manager. The command line is useful to create multiple base
models simultaneously.
Notes
• Corrections to result values in RTT files cannot be executed from command lines.
Procedures
1. Start JMAG-RT Library Manager, and then create a base model.
For information about creating model data, see steps 2 through 4 in “Creating JMAG-RT Model
Using FEA Results” on page 334.
The settings of the base model are used as the default value of each parameter for a new base
model.
This procedure is not necessary if a model is created using an existing base model, or if the
default values specified in the JMAG-RT Library Manager are used.
2. Create a parameter file (.txt).
In the parameter file, describe which parameter will change in what way for the JMAG-RT base
model created in step 1. See “Creating a Parameter File” on page 392.
3. For Linux, set the “LD_LIBRARY_PATH” environment variable.
Environment variable Value
LD_LIBRARY_PATH Set the following two paths.
(1) JMAG installation directory (full path)
(2) RTSimulator installation directory (full path)
MEMO With Linux, environment variable names are case sensitive.
For Linux (C shell):

Execute the following command.
setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH (JMAG installation directory):(RTSimulator installation
directory)
Command example is as follows when the following settings are specified.

• JMAG-Designer is installed in “/home/user/installation/JMAG222”.
• RTSimulator is installed in “/home/user/installation/JMAG222/JMAG_RT”.
setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH /home/user/installation/JMAG222:/home/user/installation/
JMAG222/JMAG_RT
For Linux (bash):

Execute the following command.
export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=(JMAG installation directory):(RTSimulator installation
directory)
387
JMAG-RT
Command example is as follows when the following settings are specified.

• RTSimulator is installed in “/home/user/installation/JMAG222/JMAG_RT”.
export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=/home/user/installation/JMAG222:/home/user/installation/
JMAG222/JMAG_RT
4. Run the following command.

With Windows, it is possible to create a batch file (.bat) that describes the command and execute
it. For Linux, it is possible to create a shell script file (.sh) that describes the command and exe-
cute it. For details of these commands, see “Windows command” on page 388 and “Linux com-
mand” on page 389.
When these commands are executed, a base model is created. If the JMAG-RT Library Manager
is running at the same time, then the base model that is created is automatically added to the [RT
Model Library] list.
For the procedure after executing the command, see “Creating JMAG-RT Model Using FEA
Results” on page 334.
 Windows command
• With Windows, use RTSimulateRunner.exe.
• When using a batch file, describe the below command in a text editor, and save it with a name.
Change the extension of the file to “*. bat” and double click the file. The command is then exe-
cuted.
• When a command line and its arguments consists of two or more lines, enter a “^” (hat) at the
end of each line. For details on escape characters such as hat, use Windows Help.
"C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\JMAG_RT\RTSimulateRunner.exe"^
-model="folder_path" -file="parameterfile_path"
Describe one of the commands shown below.
Syntax 1
Use syntax 1 to create a new JMAG-RT base model using the existing JMAG-RT base model. A new
JMAG-RT base model is created using the set of input data and the parameter file located in the
model directory with syntax 1. Options in [ ] can be omitted.
Command configuration:
./RTSimulateRunner.exe^
-model="folder_path"^
-file="parameterfile_path"^
[-exec] [-rttout="rttfile_path"] [-rttplatform=platformtype]
Example:
-model="D:\Data\Model"^
-file ="D:\Data\Test.txt"
-exec -rttout="D:\Data\rt_result" -rttplatform=simulink
388
Syntax 2
Use syntax 2 to create a new JMAG-RT base model using the default values in the JMAG-RT
Library Manager. A new JMAG-RT base model is created using the JCF file, parameter file, and
default values specified in the JMAG-RT Library Manager with syntax 2. Options in [ ] can be
omitted.
./RTSimulateRunner.exe^
-file="parameterfile_path"^
-jcf="inputfile_path"^
Example:
-file="D:\Data\parameter.txt"^
-jcf="D:\Data\Test.jcf"^
-exec -rttout="D:\Data\rt_result" -rttplatform=psim
 Linux command
• For Linux, use RTSimulator.
• When using a shell script file, describe the below command in a text editor, and save it with a
name. Change the extension of the file to “*.sh” and double click the file. The command is then
executed.
• When a command line and its arguments consists of two or more lines, enter a backslash (\) at
the end of each line. For details on escape characters such as backslash, use Linux Help.
• In the case of Linux, command and arguments are case sensitive.
Describe one of the commands shown below.
Syntax 1
Use syntax 1 to create a new JMAG-RT base model using an existing JMAG-RT base model. A new
JMAG-RT base model is created using a set of input data and a parameter file located in the model
directory with syntax 1. Options in [ ] can be omitted.
./RTSimulator\
-model="folder_path"\
-file="parameterfile_path"\
Example:
/home/user/installation/JMAG222/JMAG_RT/RTSimulator\
-model=/home/user/data/model\
-file=/home/user/data/parameter.txt\
-exec -rttout=/home/user/data/rt -rttplatform=simulink
Syntax 2
Use syntax 2 to create a new JMAG-RT base model using the default values in the JMAG-RT
Library Manager. A new JMAG-RT base model is created using a JCF file, parameter file, and
JMAG-RT Library Manager default values with syntax 2. Options in [ ] can be omitted.
389
JMAG-RT
./RTSimulator\
-file="parameterfile_path"\
-jcf="inputfile_path"
Example:
/home/user/installation/JMAG222/JMAG_RT/RTSimulator\
-file=/home/user/data/parameter.txt\
-jcf=/home/user/data/test.jcf\
-exec -rttout=/home/user/data/rt -rttplatform=Simulink
 RTSimulator command-line options

Required/
Option Argument Description
optional
-model Full path of the model Required for Values of [Folder] of the [Information]
folder of the referenced syntax 1 tab in the setup dialog for each model
JMAG-RT base model of the JMAG-RT Library Manager.
An example of a model folder is shown
below.
C:\Users\Login name\MyDocuments
\JMAG\JMAG_RT\RT_DATAXXXX
A folder specified with the -model
option is not used in JMAG-RT analy-
sis executions.
The folder specified in [Save Data to]
in the JMAG-RT Library Manager
[Settings] dialog is used for analysis
execution.
-file Full path of parameter Required For details, see “Creating a Parameter
file (.txt) File” on page 392.
-jcf The full path of the JCF Required for File specified in the [Model Type] dia-
file of the FEM model syntax 2 log or the [Select Motor Model] dialog.
used in the analysis The [Model Type] dialog will open
when the [New] button in the JMAG-
RT Library Manager is clicked on.
The [Select Motor Model] dialog will
open when the [OK] button of the
[Model Type] dialog is clicked on when
it is a PM synchronous motor.
390
Required/
Option Argument Description
optional
-exec Not available Optional Flag to create model.
• When using “-exec,” create a JMAG-
RT model in succession to creating a
JMAG-RT base model.
• When using “-exec,” do not execute a
command in the state that the
JMAG-RT Library Manager is run-
ning.
If the JMAG-RT Library Manager is
running when the command is exe-
cuted, the process will only go up to
creating a JMAG-RT base model
even if “-exec,” is used.
-rttout Full path of the output Optional Value of [Copy to] of the [Copy to Cir-
folder of the RTT file cuit Simulator] dialog.
The [Copy to Circuit Simulator] dialog
will open when the [Copy to Circuit
Simulator] button of JMAG-RT
Library Manager is clicked on.
-rttplatform Platform name Optional Value of [Platform] in the [Copy to
• rttonly Circuit Simulator] dialog.
• simulink: The [Copy to Circuit Simulator] dialog
Simulink (electric sig- will open when the [Copy to Circuit
nal input) Simulator] button of JMAG-RT
• simulink_specialized: Library Manager is clicked on.
Simulink (electric sig- When “-rttplatform” is not specified, it
nal input, Specialized will be processed as “rttonly: Only
Power Systems) writes RTT files.”
• simulink_current:
Simulink (current sig-
nal input)
• simulink_voltage:
Simulink (voltage sig-
nal input)
• psim
• c:
Any C language pro-
gram
“psim” and “c” are not
supported in Linux.
391
JMAG-RT
Creating a Parameter File

Create a parameter file to be used when running a command. The following should be noted when
creating a parameter file.
• The text format (.txt) must be used.
• The name of the file can be specified arbitrarily.
• A parameter file needs to be created for each calculation.
• The parameter and the value are connected with an equal sign (=).
An example is indicated in the figure below.
Example
Defining a Point Sequence (PointArray)

A table that is referenced by each parameter can be defined.
Property Flag
Type (Type) Description
(propName) (scriptKeyName)
id Integer Table ID (positive integer)
The specified table ID is referenced by each
parameter.
name String Name of the table
The name should be enclosed in double quota-
tion marks.
value Double Each value of table
 Example:
PointArray=1,"Undefined",1.0,2.0,3.0
392
Parameters for PM Synchronous Motor (PMSMotor) and Synchronous Reluctance Motor

(SynRM)
Property Flag
motor_type Flag Model type:
PMSMotor • Three-phase PM synchronous motor
PMSMotorSix- • Six-phase PM synchronous motor
Phase
SynRM • Three-phase synchronous reluctance motor
SynRMSixPhase • Six-phase synchronous reluctance motor
accuracy_type Flag Motor model type:
1 • LdLq
3 • Spatial harmonic (differential)
4 • LdLq + Spatial harmonic (differential)
6 • Spatial harmonic (differential) + Spatial har-
monic (integral)
7 • LdLq + Spatial harmonic (differential) + Spa-
tial harmonic (integral)
pole Integer Number of poles

flg_auto_initial- Flag Rotor initial position settings.
ize_rotor_posi- 0 • Do not set automatically
tion 1 • Set automatically
rotor_initial_po- Double Rotor initial position (deg).
sition Used when flg_auto_initialize_rotor_posi-
tion=0.
flg_ignore_ro- Flag Ignore the difference caused by automatic cal-
tor_initial_posi- culation
tion_difference 0 • Cancel the load analysis when there is a dif-
ference between the automatically calculated
initial position and the specified initial posi-
tion.
1 • Do not cancel the load analysis when there is
a difference between the automatically calcu-
lated initial position and the specified initial
position.
phase_u Integer FEM coil: U-phase
phase_v Integer FEM coil: V-phase
phase_w Integer FEM coil: W-phase
phase_u1 Integer FEM coil: U1-phase
phase_v1 Integer FEM coil: V1-phase
phase_w1 Integer FEM coil: W1-phase
phase_u2 Integer FEM coil: U2-phase
phase_v2 Integer FEM coil: V2-phase
phase_w2 Integer FEM coil: W2-phase
393
JMAG-RT
Property Flag
coil_turn Double Number of coil turns
flg_winding_pat- Flag Connection pattern
tern 0 • Y-connection
1 • Delta-connection
resistance Double Phase resistance (ohm)
U_Leakage_In- Double U-phase leakage inductance (H)
ductance
V_Leakage_In- Double V-phase leakage inductance (H)
ductance
W_Leakage_In- Double W-phase leakage inductance (H)
ductance
U1_Leakage_In- Double U1-phase leakage inductance (H)
ductance
V1_Leakage_In- Double V1-phase leakage inductance (H)
ductance
W1_Leakage_In- Double W1-phase leakage inductance (H)
ductance
U2_Leakage_In- Double U2-phase leakage inductance (H)
ductance
V2_Leakage_In- Double V2-phase leakage inductance (H)
ductance
W2_Leakage_In- Double W2-phase leakage inductance (H)
ductance
flg_drive Flag Drive type
0 • Sinusoidal
1 • Other
flg_use_zero_se- Flag 0 Do not use zero-phase sequence current
quence_current 1 Use zero-phase sequence current
beta2_axis_type Flag Table type
0 • Use current phase difference
1 • Use current phase
calculation_- Flag Calculation Method for Circuit/Control Simu-
method_for_con- lator.
trol_simulator Available when motor_type=PMSMotor and
flg_drive=0.
0 • Differential Method
1 • Differential Method and Integral Method
flg_nonlinear Flag Nonlinear high-speed calculation
0 • Do not apply
1 • Apply
flg_use_phase_sy Flag Symmetry of phase
mmetry 0 • Do not use
1 • Use
394
Property Flag
flg_resolution Flag Current
0 • Auto setting (A)
1 • Current phase range (deg)
rated_current Double Rated current (A)
Available if flg_resolution=0
phase_range_start Double Start angle for the current phase range (deg).
Available if flg_resolution=0.
phase_range_end Double End angle for the current phase range (deg).
flg_half_periodic Flag Inductance.
Available if accuracy_type=3.
0 • No periodicity for 1/2 electrical angle
1 • Periodicity for 1/2 electrical angle
inductance_cur- Integer Table ID for the current amplitude or instanta-
rent_table_id neous current value of inductance
inductance_cur- Integer Table ID for the current amplitude 1 of induc-
rent1_table_id tance
inductance_cur- Integer Table ID for the current amplitude 2 of induc-
rent2_table_id tance
flg_auto_resolu- Flag Auto adjusting the mechanical resolution for
tion inductance
0 • Do not apply auto adjusting
1 • Apply auto adjusting
induc- Integer Table ID for the current phase of inductance.
tance_beta_table Available if accuracy_type=1 or 3.
_id
inductance_be- Integer Table ID for the current phase 1 of inductance
ta1_table_id
inductance_be- Integer Table ID for the current phase 2 of inductance
ta2_table_id
inductance_an- Double Mechanical angle resolution for inductance
gle_resolution (deg).
Available if accuracy_type=2 or 3.
inductance_ze- Int Table ID for the zero-phase current of induc-
ro_sequence_cur- tance.
rent_table_id Available if flg_use_zero_sequence_current=1.
flg_torque_set- Flag Available if accuracy_type=3
ting 0 • Do not use the same settings for inductance
and torque
1 • Use the same settings for inductance and
torque
torque_cur- Integer Table ID for the current amplitude of torque.
rent_table_id Available if accuracy_type=2 or 3.
395
JMAG-RT
Property Flag
torque_cur- Integer Table ID for the current amplitude or instanta-
rent1_table_id neous current value of torque
torque_cur- Integer Table ID for the current amplitude 2 of torque
rent2_table_id
torque_beta_table Integer Table ID for the current phase of torque.
_id Available if accuracy_type=2 or 3.
torque_be- Integer Table ID for the current phase 1 of torque
ta1_table_id
torque_be- Integer Table ID for the current phase 2 of torque
ta2_table_id
flg_torque _au- Flag Auto adjusting the mechanical angle resolution
to_resolution for torque
0 • Do not apply auto adjusting
1 • Apply auto adjusting
torque_angle_res- Double Mechanical angle resolution for torque.
olution Available if accuracy_type=2 or 3.
flg_auto_calc Flag Type of periodic angle for torque
0 • Do not calculate automatically for one peri-
odic angle from the number of poles
1 • Calculate automatically for one periodic
angle from the number of poles
periodic_angle Double Periodic angle for torque (deg)
torque_zero_se- Int Table ID for the zero-phase current of torque.
quence_cur- Available if flg_use_zero_sequence_current=1.
rent_table_id
flg_resolu- Flag LdLq Current
tion_ldlq 0 • Simple Settings
1 • Advanced Settings
rated_cur- Double LdLq Rated Current (A).
rent_ldlq Available if flg_resolution_ldlq =0.
phase_range_start Double Start angle for the LdLq current phase range
_ldlq (deg).
Available if flg_resolution_ldlq =0.
phase_range_end Double End angle for the LdLq current phase range
_ldlq (deg).
inductance_cur- Integer Table ID for the current amplitude of induc-
rent_ld- tance for LdLq.
lq_table_id Available if accuracy_type=1 or 4.
induc- Integer Table ID for the current phase of inductance
tance_beta_ld- for LdLq.
lq_table_id Available if accuracy_type=1 or 4.
396
Property Flag
flg_iron_loss Flag Consider iron loss
0 • Not considered
1 • Considered
flg_iron_loss_spe Flag Iron loss calculation mode
ed_up 0 • Conventional mode (Iron loss calculation
license is used after magnetic field analysis is
completed.)
1 • High speed mode (Iron loss calculation
license is used during magnetic field analysis.)
flg_iron_loss_res- Flag Rotate velocity
olution 0 • Simple settings
1 • Advanced settings
max_rotate_ve- Double Maximum revolution speed (rpm).
locity Available if flg_iron_loss_resolution=0.
rotate_veloci- Integer Table ID for revolution speed.
ty_table_id Available if flg_iron_loss_resolution=1.
coef_magnet_- Double Temperature correction factor of magnet (%/K)
temperature
base_magnet_- Double Base temperature for magnet (K)
temperature
coef_coil_tem- Double Temperature correction factor of coil (ppm/K)
perature
base_coil_tem- Double Base temperature for coil (K)
perature
inertia_correc- Double correction factor (coef_inertia1) of inertia
tion_factor1 moment
inertia Double Inertia moment J0 (kgm2)
tion_factor2 moment
time_constant Double Time constant τmech (MechTimeConstant(s))
coef_torque Double Correction factor for torque
coef_acloss Double Correction factor for AC loss
coef_material Double Correction factor for steel sheet
acloss_num_con- double Number of conductors in slot height

duc-
tors_in_slot_heig
ht
acloss_num_con- double Number of conductors in slot width
duc-
tors_in_slot_widt
h
acloss_num_slots double Slots per phase
_per_phase
acloss_slot_width double Averaged slot width (m)
397
JMAG-RT
Property Flag
acloss_conduc- Flag Conductor type
tor_type 0 • Rectangle
1 • Round
acloss_conduc- double Conductor height (m).
tor_height Specify this when acloss_conductor_type=0.
acloss_conduc- double Conductor width (m).
tor_width Specify this when acloss_conductor_type=0.
acloss_conduc- double Conductor diameter (m).
tor_diameter Specify this when acloss_conductor_type=0.
acloss_stack_leng double Core stack (m)
th
acloss_conductiv- double Conductivity (S/m)
ity
solver_parallel_- Flag Parallel computing function

type 0 • Non-parallel
1 • Shared memory type (SMP)
2 • Highly parallel distributed (MPP)
(Default: The value specified in the input JCF
file.)
num_solver_pro- Int SMP parallelism when solver_parallel_type = 1.
cess Number of MPP processes when solver_paral-
lel_type = 2.
num_solver_- Int Number of MPP threads.
thread Used when solver_parallel_type = 2.
solver_mp- String Absolute path of MPP hosts file.
p_host_file Used when solver_parallel_type = 2.
flg_solver_gpu Using GPU for calculation processing
0 • Do not use GPU
1 • Use GPU
file.)
flg_remote Flag Execution method
0 • Local execution
1 • Remote execution
num_process Int Number of processes
cpu_group_name String When using JMAG-RemoteSystem, specify the
“Server: Port ID: Group name”.
Example: 10.157.101.2:8888:test1
When using a remote machine with SSH, spec-
ify the remote machine name.
reservation_key String Reservation key
398
Property Flag
use_multi_license Flag Power simulation license
0 • Use
1 • Do not use
flg_recalculation Flag Calculation mode:
0 • Recalculate only the failed cases
1 • Recalculate all cases
flg_plot_file Flag Control result files:
0 • Export the distribution amount into result
1 files
• Do not export the distribution amount into
result files
flg_delete_result Flag Delete result files after calculation:
0 • Leave result files after calculation
1 • Delete result files after calculation
Parameters for the Stepping Motor (SteppingMotor)
Property Flag
motor_type Flag SteppingMotor Model type: Two-phase stepping motor

phase_ap Integer FEM coil: A-phase
phase_am Integer FEM coil: -A-phase
phase_bp Integer FEM coil: B-phase
phase_bm Integer FEM coil: -B-phase
coil_turn Integer Number of turns
flg_exitation Flag Excitation:
1 • One phase excitation
2 • One-two excitation
3 • Two phase excitation
max_current Double Upper limit of the current range
flg_resolution Flag Resolution
0 • Disable the resolution setting
1 • Enable the resolution setting
inductance_divi- Integer Number of divisions for the rotational angle for
sion inductance
inductance_cur- Integer Table ID the current versus inductance during
rent_table_id excitation
torque_period- Double Rotation angle for torque (deg)
ic_angle
torque_division Integer Number of divisions for the rotational angle for
torque
399
JMAG-RT
Property Flag
torque_cur- Integer Table ID for the current versus torque during
tion_factor1 moment
inertia Double Inertia moment J0 (kgm2)
tion_factor2 moment
time_constant Double Time constant τ-mech (s)
coef_magnet_tem- Double Temperature correction factor of magnet (%/K)
perature
base_magnet_tem- Double Base temperature for magnet (K)
perature
coef_coil_tempera- Double Temperature correction factor of coil (ppm/K)
ture
base_coil_tempera- Double Base temperature for coil (K)
ture

file.)
lel_type = 2.
num_solver_thread Int Number of MPP threads
Used when solver_parallel_type = 2
solver_mpp_host_- String Absolute path of MPP hosts file
file Used when solver_parallel_type = 2
1 • Use GPU
file.)
Example: 10.157.101.2:8888:test1
When using a remote machine with SSH, specify
the remote machine name.
400
Property Flag
0 • Use
1 • Do not use
0 • Export the distribution amount into result files
1 • Do not export the distribution amount into
result files
Parameters for Linear Solenoid (LinearSolenoid)
Property Flag
motor_type Flag LinearSolenoid Model type: Linear solenoid
phase Integer FEM coil ID

max_position Double Upper limit of motion range (m)
min_position Double Lower limit of motion range (m)
position_division Integer Number of divisions for resolution (position)
flg_motion_table Flag Specify the table for the resolution (position)
• Set automatically based on the upper/lower
0 limit of motion range and the number of
divisions
• Specify a table
1
motion_table_id Integer Table ID for the resolution (position)
current_division Integer Number of divisions for the resolution (cur-
rent)
max_current Double Maximum value of the current range (A) for the
resolution (current)
flg_current_table Flag Table for the resolution (current)
0 • Set automatically based on the current range
and the number of divisions
1 • Specify a table
current_table_id Integer Table ID for the resolution (current)
401
JMAG-RT
Property Flag
mass_factor1 Double Mass correction factor (coef_mass1)
mass Double Mass(M0)(kg)
time_constant Double Time constant Τmech (MechTimeConstant (s))
coef_magnet_tem- Double Temperature correction factor of magnet (%/K)
perature
perature
ture
ture

file.)
lel_type = 2.
1 • Use GPU
file.)
Example: 10.157.101.2:8888:test1
0 • Use
1 • Do not use
402
Property Flag
1 files
result files
Parameters for the Linear Synchronous Motor (LSMotor)
Property Flag
motor_type Flag LSMotor Model type: Linear synchronous motor
periodic_position Double Displacement for one period of electrical angle

(m)
flg_winding_pat- Flag Connection pattern:
tern 0 • Y connection
1 • Delta connection
flg_drive Flag Drive type:
0 • Sinusoidal
1 • Other
flg_force Flag Attractive force
0 • Do not export attractive force
1 • Export attractive force
flg_force_direction Flag Direction of attractive force
1 • X
2 • Y
3 • Z
current_ampli- Double Current amplitude range (A)
tude_range
cur- Double Current phase range (deg)
rent_phase_range
403
JMAG-RT
Property Flag
inductance_divi- Integer Inductance
sion Number of divisions for the displacement
inductance_cur- Integer Table ID for the current versus inductance
rent_table_id during excitation
flg_use_phase_sym Flag Symmetry of phase
metry 0 • Do not use
1 • Use
displace- Double Displacement of electromagnetic force (m)
ment_range
position_division Integer Number of divisions for the displacement of
electromagnetic force
force_cur- Integer Table ID for the current versus electromagnetic
rent_table_id force during excitation
force_beta_table_i Integer Table ID for the current versus electromagnetic
d force during excitation
mass Double Mass (M0)(kg)
time_constant Double Time constant τ-mech (s)
coef_magnet_tem- Double Temperature correction factor of magnet (%/
perature K)
perature
ture
ture

file.)
num_solver_pro- Int SMP parallelism when solver_parallel_type =
cess 1.
Number of MPP processes when solver_paral-
lel_type = 2.
num_solver_- Int Number of MPP threads
thread Used when solver_parallel_type = 2
404
Property Flag
1 • Use GPU
file.)
Example: 10.157.101.2:8888:test1
0 • Use
1 • Do not use
1 files
result files
Parameters for the SR Motor (SRMotor)
Property Flag
motor_type Flag SRMotor Model type: SR motor

phase Integer Number of phases
phase_A Integer FEM coil: A-phase
phase_B Integer FEM coil: B-phase
phase_C Integer FEM coil: C-phase
405
JMAG-RT
Property Flag
phase_D Integer FEM coil: D-phase
phase_E Integer FEM coil: E-phase
coil_turn Integer Number of turns
inductance_divi- Integer Number of divisions for the rotational angle
sion for inductance
inductance_cur- Integer Table ID for the current versus inductance
rent_table_id during excitation
rated_current Double Rated current (A)
Available if resolution=0
torque_cur- Integer Table ID for the current versus torque during
torque_angle_reso- Double Mechanical angle resolution for torque
lution Available if accuracy_type=2 or 3
flg_auto_calc Flag Type of periodic angle for torque
0 • Do not calculate automatically for one peri-
odic angle from the number of poles
1 • Calculate automatically for one periodic
angle from the number of poles
periodic_angle Double Periodic angle for torque (deg)
ture
ture

file.)
cess 1.
lel_type = 2.
406
Property Flag
1 • Use GPU
file.)
Example: 10.157.101.2:8888:test1
0 • Use
1 • Do not use
1 files
result files
Parameters for the Induction Motor (InductionMotor)
Property Flag
motor_type Flag Model type:
InductionMotor • Three-phase induction motor
InductionMotor- • Six-phase induction motor
PoleChange

NumRotorBars Integer Number of secondary conductor
model_division Integer Number of model division
407
JMAG-RT
Property Flag
phase_a Integer FEM coil: A-phase
phase_b Integer FEM coil: B-phase
phase_c Integer FEM coil: C-phase
phase_d Integer FEM coil: D-phase
phase_e Integer FEM coil: E-phase
phase_f Integer FEM coil: F-phase
flg_winding_pat- Flag Connection pattern
tern 0 • Y-connection
NumSeriesPer- Integer Number of turns in series per phase in the pri-
Phase mary circuit
WindingFactor Double Winding factor
StatorCurrent_PA Integer Table ID for current
SlipFreq_PA Integer Table ID for slip frequency
stray_load_loss_- Double Base frequency for stray load loss (Hz)
frequeny
use_stray_- Integer Specifying method for stray load loss
load_loss_auto_- 0 • Defined manually
setting 1 • Defined automatically
stray_load_loss Double Stray load loss (W)
1 • Considered
flg_iron_loss_spee Flag Iron loss calculation mode
d_up 0 • Conventional mode (Iron loss calculation
completed.)
license is used during magnetic field analy-
sis.)
rotate_veloci- Integer Table ID for revolution speed.
ty_table_id
coef_1st_coil_tem- Double Temperature correction factor of primary coil
perature (ppm/K)
base_1st_coil_tem- Double Base temperature for primary coil (K)
perature
coef_2nd_coil_- Double Temperature correction factor of secondary coil
temperature (ppm/K)
base_2nd_coil_- Double Base temperature for secondary coil (K)
temperature
408
Property Flag
coef_2nd_resis- Double Secondary resistance correction factor
tance
coef_magnetiz- Double Magnetizing leakage inductance correction fac-
ing_inductance tor
coef_1st_leak- Double Primary leakage inductance correction factor
age_inductance
coef_2nd_leak- Double Secondary leakage inductance correction factor
age_inductance
coef_torque Double Torque correction factor
addition- Double Primary leakage inductance correction value
al_1st_leakage_in- (H)
ductance
addition- Double Secondary leakage inductance correction value
al_2nd_leak- (H)
age_inductance
acloss_num_con- double Number of conductors in slot height

duc-
tors_in_slot_heigh
t
acloss_num_con- double Number of conductors in slot width
duc-
tors_in_slot_width
acloss_num_slots_ double Slots per phase
per_phase
acloss_conductor_- Flag Conductor type
type 0 • Rectangle
1 • Round
acloss_conduc- double Conductor height (m)
tor_height Specify this when acloss_conductor_type=0.
acloss_conduc- double Conductor width (m)
tor_width Specify this when acloss_conductor_type=0.
acloss_conductor_- double Conductor diameter (m)
diameter Specify this when acloss_conductor_type=0.
acloss_stack_lengt double Core stack (m)
h
acloss_conductiv- double Conductivity (S/m)
ity
409
JMAG-RT
Property Flag
file.)
cess 1.
lel_type = 2.
1 • Use GPU
file.)
Example: 10.157.101.2:8888:test1
0 • Use
1 • Do not use
1 files
result files
410
Parameters for the Wound-Field Synchronous Motor (WFSMotor)
Flag
Property Type
(scriptKeyNam Description
(propName) (Type)
e)
motor_type Flag WFSMotor Model type: wound-field synchronous motor

flg_auto_initialize_ro- Flag Rotor initial position settings.
tor_position 0 • Do not set automatically
1 • Set automatically
rotor_initial_position Double Rotor initial position (deg).
Used when flg_auto_initialize_rotor_posi-
tion=0.
flg_ignore_rotor_ini- Flag Ignore the difference caused by automatic cal-
tial_position_difference culation
0 Cancel the load analysis when there is a dif-
ference between the automatically calculated
initial position and the specified initial posi-
tion.
1 Do not cancel the load analysis when there is
a difference between the automatically calcu-
lated initial position and the specified initial
position.
phase_u Integer Coil number: U-phase of stator coil
phase_v Integer Coil number: V-phase of stator coil
phase_w Integer Coil number: W-phase of stator coil
coil_turn Double Stator coil number of turns
flg_winding_pattern Flag Connection pattern for stator coil
0 • Y-connection
resistance Double Stator coil phase resistance (ohm)
num_series Integer Circuit conversion for a stator coil, number of
series
num_parallel Integer Circuit conversion for a stator coil, number of
parallels
phase_fc Double Coil number: Field coil
field_coil_turn Double Field coil number of turns
fieldcoil_resistance Double Field coil resistance (ohm)
num_series_field_Coil Integer Circuit conversion for a field coil, number of
series
411
JMAG-RT
Flag
Property Type
(propName) (Type)
e)
num_parallel_field_Coil Integer Circuit conversion for a field coil, number of
parallels
current_type Flag Current type
0 • dq axis current
1 • Amplitude, current phase
flg_nonlinear Flag Nonlinear high speed calculation
0 • Do no apply
1 • Apply
flg_torque_setting Flag Inductance and torque settings
0 • Use different settings
1 • Use same settings
flg_use_phase_symmetry Flag Symmetry of phase
0 • Do not use
1 • Use
flg_half_periodic Flag Inductance. Use half electrical angle periodicity.
0 • Do not use half electrical angle periodicity
1 • Use half electrical angle periodicity
inductance_cur- Integer Current amplitude table ID of stator coil
rent_table_id inductance
inductance_beta_table_id Integer Current phase table ID of stator coil inductance
inductance_field_- Integer Current table ID of field coil inductance
coil_table_id
inductance_angle_resolu- Double Inductance mechanical angle resolution (deg)
tion
torque_current_table_id Integer Current amplitude table ID of stator coil
torque
torque_beta_table_id Integer Current phase table ID of stator coil torque
torque_field_- Integer Current table ID of field coil torque
coil_table_id
torque_angle_resolution Double Torque mechanical angle resolution (deg)
flg_auto_calc Flag Specification method for the angle of one
period of torque
0 • Do not automatically calculate the angle of
one period from the number of poles
• Automatically calculate the angle of one
1
period from the number of poles.
periodic_angle Double Angle (deg) of one period of torque
412
Flag
Property Type
(propName) (Type)
e)
1 • Considered
flg_iron_loss_speed_up Flag Iron loss calculation mode
0 • Conventional mode (Iron loss calculation
completed.)
license is used during magnetic field analysis.)
flg_iron_loss_resolution Flag Rotate velocity
0 • Simple settings
1 • Advanced settings
max_rotate_velocity Double Maximum revolution speed (rpm).
Available if flg_iron_loss_resolution=0.
rotate_velocity_table_id Integer Table ID for revolution speed.
Available if flg_iron_loss_resolution=1.
coef_coil_temperature Double Temperature correction factor of stator coil
(ppm/K)
base_coil_temperature Double Base temperature for temperature correction of
stator coil (K)
coef_field_coil_tempera- Double Temperature correction factor of field coil
ture (ppm/K)
base_field_coil_tempera- Double Base temperature for temperature correction of
ture field coil (K)
coef_flux Double Correction value for flux linkage of stator coil
coef_flux_field_coil Double Correction value for flux linkage of field coil
coef_torque Double Correction value for torque
coef_material Double Correction value for steel sheet
turns_coil2 Double Correction value for the number of turns of sta-
tor coil
turns_coil2_field_coil Double Correction value for the number of turns of
field coil
acloss_num_conduc- double Number of conductors in slot height

tors_in_slot_height
acloss_num_conduc- double Number of conductors in slot width
tors_in_slot_width
413
JMAG-RT
Flag
Property Type
(propName) (Type)
e)
acloss_num_slots_per_ph double Slots per phase
ase
acloss_conductor_type Flag Conductor type
0 • Rectangle
1 • Round
acloss_conductor_height double Conductor height (m)
Specify this when acloss_conductor_type=0.
acloss_conductor_width double Conductor width (m)
Specify this when acloss_conductor_type=0.
acloss_conductor_diame- double Conductor diameter (m)
ter Specify this when acloss_conductor_type=0.
acloss_stack_length double Core stack (m)
acloss_conductivity double Conductivity (S/m)
solver_parallel_type Flag Parallel computing function

0 • Non-parallel
file.)
num_solver_process Int SMP parallelism when solver_parallel_type = 1.
lel_type = 2.
solver_mpp_host_file String Absolute path of MPP hosts file
1 • Use GPU
file.)
414
Flag
Property Type
(propName) (Type)
e)
Example: 10.157.101.2:8888:test1
0 • Use
1 • Do not use
1 files
result files
Parameters for the Generic Model (GenericModel)
 Coil set
Format
coil_set ({coilSetIndex}): {propName} = {value}
Notes
• coilSetIndex is Int type. The coil set is automatically added by the number of the largest coil-
SetIndex.
• If there is no specified parameter in the automatically added coil set, it will be registered with the
default value.
• The default for coil set title is as follows:
English: Coil set # {currentCoilSetIndex}
Example
coil_set (1): title = U_coil 1
coil_set (3): title = W_coil 3
In this example, three coil sets are added.
• The titles of the first and third coil sets are as described.
415
JMAG-RT
• Title of the first coil set: U_coil 1

• Title of the third coil set: W_coil 3
• The default for the title of the second coil set is used. Coil set #2 in the English version.
• All parameters of the second coil set, unspecified parameters of the first and third coil sets are
registered as default values.
 [Independent Motion Settings]
Format
motion_set ({motionId}): {propName} = {value}
Notes
• motionId is Int type. It refers to the ID of the motion condition on the JCF file.
 [Calculation Case Suppression Property]
Format
case_suppression_setting(index):{popName}={value}
Notes
• Indexes must be in serial. Indexes must not have any missing numbers.
• “model” and “study” are Int-type. These respectively refer to model IDs and study IDs in refer-
ence project files (.jproj).
Model IDs and study IDs cannot be confirmed in JMAG-Designer or JMAG-RT. Use the refer-
ence project file pro-ject.xml to confirm these instead.
A jfiles folder with the same name as the project file is located in the folder where the reference
project file is positioned. project.xml is located in that folder.
A <model id=”XX”> row and a <study id=“YY”> row are described in project.xml. The model
ID is displayed in the “XX” portion. The study ID is displayed in the “YY” portion.
For example, in the following project.xml, the model ID is 6, and the study ID is 2.
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<jproj>
<title><![CDATA[]]></title>
<model id="6">
<path><![CDATA[Generic~1]]></path>
<title><![CDATA[Generic]]></title>
<study id="2">
Example
case_suppression_setting(1):jproj="D:\JMAG\RT\Generic-01.jproj"
case_suppression_setting(1):model=6
case_suppression_setting(1):study=2
case_suppression_setting(1):neighborhood_level=1
Property Type Flag

Description
(propName) (Type) (scriptKeyName)
motor_type Flag GenericModel Model type: Generic model
Coil set parameters

title String Coil set title
416
Property Type Flag

Description
drive_type Flag Drive Type
0 • Constant
1 • Sin (1-phase)
2 • Sin (Three-phase)
3 • De-enegrized
phase_u Int FEM coil: U-phase
phase_v Int FEM coil: V-phase
phase_w Int FEM coil: W-phase
num_turn Double Number of coil turns
reference_coil_set Int Reference Coil Set ID
flg_reference_coil_set Flag Reference coil set
0 • Use
1 • Do not use
OffsetAngle Double Offset angle (elec. deg)
reference_motion_set Int Reference Motion ID
flg_motion_periodicity Flag Periodic
0 • The displacement is assumed to have no
periodicity.
1 • The displacement is assumed to be periodic.
mechanical_an- Double Mechanical angle (deg) for one electrical

gle_per_electric_period period when referring to the Rotation Motion
condition.
Mechanical displacement (m) for one electrical
period when referring to the Translation
Motion condition.
base_coil_temp Double Base temperature for temperature correction
coef_coil_temp Double Temperature correction factor
turns_coil2 Double C2 FEM Coil Number of Turns Correction
Factor
coef_flux Double K2 Flux Linkage Correction Factor
flg_use_same_setting Flag Current resolutions
0 • Torque setting is different as inductance
1 • Torque setting is same as inductance
flg_use_half_period Flag Current resolutions for inductance
0 • No periodicity for 1/2 electrical angle
1 • Periodicity for 1/2 electrical angle
i_inductance_pa Int Table ID for the current of inductance
417
JMAG-RT
Property Type Flag

Description
beta_inductance_pa Int Table ID for the current phase of inductance
resolution_inductance Double Mechanical angle resolution (deg) for induc-
tance when referring to the Rotation Motion
condition.
Mechanical displacement resolution (m) for
inductance when referring to the Translation
Motion condition.
reference_force_condi- Int Torque condition ID when referring to the
tion Rotation Motion condition.
Force condition ID when referring to the
Translation Motion condition.
beta_torque_pa Int Table ID for the current phase of torque
i_torque_pa Int Table ID for the current of torque
torque_angle_resolution Double Mechanical angle resolution (deg) for torque
when referring to the Rotation Motion condi-
tion.
Mechanical displacement resolution (deg) for
torque when referring to the Translation
Motion condition.
[Independent Motion Property] parameters

reference_force_condi- Int Torque condition ID when Rotation Motion
tion condition is set.
Force condition ID when Translation Motion
condition is set.
periodic_motion Flag 0 • The displacement is assumed to have no
periodicity.
1 • The displacement is assumed to be periodic
such as with a rotational motion.
maximum_mechani- Double Maximum mechanical angle (deg) when Rota-
cal_disp tion Motion condition is set.
Maximum mechanical distance (m) when
Translation Motion condition is set.
mechanical_disp_resu- Double Mechanical angle resolution (deg) when Rota-
lution tion Motion condition is set.
Mechanical displacement resolution (m) when
Translation Motion condition is set.
coef_force Double K3 Torque/Electromagnetic force Correction
Factor
[Add Suppression Calculation Case Setting] parameters
418
Property Type Flag

Description
flg_use_calculation_- Flag 0 • Do not use the [Add Suppression Calcula-
case_suppression 1 tion Case Setting] function
• Use the [Add Suppression Calculation Case
Setting] function
jproj String Reference project file (.jproj) absolute path
model Int Reference model ID
study Int Reference study ID
neighborhood_level Int Neighborhood level
solver_parallel_type Flag Parallel computing function

0 • Non-parallel
file.)
num_solver_process Int SMP parallelism when solver_parallel_type =
1.
lel_type = 2.
solver_mpp_host_file String Absolute path of MPP hosts file
1 • Use GPU
file.)
Example: 10.157.101.2:8888:test1
419
JMAG-RT
Property Type Flag

Description
0 • Use
1 • Do not use
1 files
result files
420
Running Analysis Using Third-Party Job Schedulers

JMAG-RT can be run from the command line. Command line execution is effective for creating a
large number of RTT files.
JMAG-RT is equipped with the following modes.
• Mode to create input files (.jcf ) for flux linkage and inductance calculation
• Mode to create input files (.jcf ) for torque calculation
• Mode to create input files (.jcf ) for iron loss calculation
• Mode to run analyses of each JCF file on the job scheduler
• Mode to create an RTT file based on analysis results.
Using these modes, JMAG analysis can be run or managed with third-party job schedulers.
MEMO From JMAG-Designer Version 16.0, JMAG-RT Library Manager can now submit jobs to third-
party job scheduler using SSH.
• For details on the SSH settings, see “JMAG User's Manual Parameter Explanation Edition”.
• When submitting a job to a third-party job scheduler using SSH, select a remote machine from the
[CPU Group Name] list in the [Distributed Calculation] group box on the [Create] tab of each
motor.
Notes
• The command line executions described here are supported by Windows and Linux.
• Users need to write scripts and define transferring the created input files and result files after cal-
culations and sending jobs to the job scheduler.
Call Command
When executing JMAG-RT processing, use ExecSolver. ExecSolver is a program to manage solver
programs such as magnetic field analysis (jam.exe) and JMAG-RT (RTMaker.exe).
Procedures
1. For Windows, set the InsDir, WorkDir, and Path environment variables.
InsDir JMAG installation folder (full path). Default value is “C:\Program
Files\JMAG-Designer22.2”.
WorkDir Calculation folder (full path)
Example: “D:\RT\RT_DATA-200101112233”.
JCF files used for calculations are created in the newly generated run
folders in the folder specified in WorkDir.
When executing multiple analyses simultaneously using JMAG-RT
from the command line, specify different calculation folders for each
calculation. For details, see “Notes on Simultaneous Analysis Execu-
tion from the Command Line (for Errors Caused by Jstage2 Files)” on
page 425.
PATH JMAG installation folder (full path). Default value is “C:\Program
Files\JMAG-Designer22.2”.
421
JMAG-RT
When setting the environment variable from the command prompt, run the following com-
mands.
SET InsDir=(JMAG installation folder)
SET WorkDir=(calculation folder)
SET PATH=%PATH%;(JMAG installation folder)
Command examples are shown below. These commands are examples when the following set-
tings are specified.
• JMAG-Designer22.2 is installed with default settings.
• Specify the folder where the input JCF file of JMAG-RT is placed (D:\RT\RT_DATA-
200101112233) as the calculation folder.
SET InsDir=C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2
SET WorkDir=D:\RT\RT_DATA-200101112233
SET PATH=%PATH%;%InsDir%
2. For Linux, set the InsDir, WorkDir, LD_LIBRARY_PATH, and PATH environment variables.
InsDir JMAG installation directory (full path).
WorkDir Calculation directory (full path).
When executing multiple analyses simultaneously using JMAG-RT
from the command line, specify different calculation folders for
each calculation. For details, see “Notes on Simultaneous Analysis
Execution from the Command Line (for Errors Caused by Jstage2
Files)” on page 425.
LD_LIBRARY_PATH Directory where the shared library necessary for running analysis in
JMAG is located.
For the 64-bit version: “(JMAG installation directory) /solver/mod/
lib/linux64”.
PATH ExecSolver installation directory (full path).
MEMO In the case of Linux, environment variable names are case sensitive.
For Linux (C shell):

Execute the following commands.
setenv InsDir (JMAG installation directory)
setenv WorkDir (calculation directory)
setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH (JMAG installation directory)/solver/mod/lib/linux64
setenv PATH ${PATH}:(JMAG installation directory)/solver/bin
Command examples are as follows:

These commands are examples when the following settings are specified.
• Calculation directory is “/home/user/rt/RT_DATA-200101112233”.
setenv InsDir /home/user/installation/JMAG222
setenv WorkDir /home/user/rt/RT_DATA-200101112233
setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH /home/user/installation/JMAG222/solver/mod/lib/linux64
setenv PATH ${PATH}:${InsDir}/solver/bin
422
For Linux (bash):

Execute the following commands.
export InsDir=(JMAG installation directory)
export WorkDir=(calculation directory)
export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=(JMAG installation directory)/solver/mod/lib/linux64
export PATH=${PATH}:(JMAG installation directory)/solver/bin
Command examples are as follows:

These commands are examples when the following settings are specified.
• The calculation directory is “/home/user/rt/RT_DATA-200101112233”.
export InsDir=/home/user/installation/JMAG222
export WorkDir=/home/user/rt/RT_DATA-200101112233
export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=/home/user/installation/JMAG222/solver/mod/lib/linux64
export PATH=${PATH}:${InsDir}/solver/bin
3. Run the following command.

* Select one of the options enclosed in [].
./ExecSolver.exe^
[-rt_induct_jcf], [-rt_torque_jcf], [-rt_ironloss_jcf], [-rt], or [-rt_post]^
"jcf file_path"^
"rtmotor_path"
Example: Windows
"C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\ExecSolver.exe^
-rt_induct_jcf^
"D:\RT\RT_DATA-200101112233\GENERIC.jcf"^
"D:\RT\RT_DATA-200101112233\rtmotor.xml"
Example: Linux
/home/user/installation/JMAG222/solver/bin/ExecSolver\
-rt_induct_jcf\
"/home/user/rt/RT_DATA-200101112233/GENERIC.jcf"\
"/home/user/rt/RT_DATA-200101112233/rtmotor.xml"
MEMO Write only one option for specifying the mode such as [-rt_induct_jcf ], [-rt_torque_jcf ], [-
rt_ironloss_jcf ], [-rt], [-rt_post] for each executable statement. If multiple options are written, the
statement is not work properly.
MEMO In these examples, in order to enter a command spanning two or more lines, the escape char-
acter (^) or backslash (\) is used just before a line break. Use Windows or Linux Help for details on
the escape character.
 ExecSolver command-line options

Option Required/Optional Description
-rt_induct_jcf Optional This is a creation option of input files (.jcf ) for calculating
flux linkage and inductance.
-rt_torque_jcf Optional This is a creation option of input files (.jcf ) for calculating
torque.
-rt_ironloss_jcf Optional This is a creation option of input files (.jcf ) for calculating
iron loss.
-rt Optional This is a JMAG-RT analysis execution mode option.
423
JMAG-RT
Option Required/Optional Description

-rt_post Optional This is a creation option of RTT file based on output result
files.
jcf file_path Required Path of input file for JMAG-RT (.jcf )
rtmotor_path Required File with the parameters needed to create JMAG-RT models.
rtmotor.xml is created in a destination folder (directory) for
saving data when a JMAG-RT model is created using
JMAG-RT Library Manager.
The destination folder (directory) for saving data is the “run”
folder in [Folder] of the JMAG-RT Model Library.
 Notes on command-line options and input files
PM synchronous motor
• The input files (.jcf ) specified at the command line may or may not contain circuit settings.
• A JCF file for torque calculation cannot be created for LdLq models.
• An error will be written to a jlog file when the -rt_torque_jcf option is executed for a LdLq
model.
• When the -rt_torque_jcf option is executed for LdLq + spatial harmonic model, only a JFC
file for spacial harmonic torque calculation will be created, and a warning will be written to a
jlog file.
• -rt_ironloss_jcf option cannot be used for a spatial harmonic model. This is because Iron Loss
conditions are set on a JCF file for Flux or Inductance calculation for a spatial harmonic model,
and the magnetic field analysis JCF file set with the Iron Loss condition can be obtained by exe-
cuting the existing -induct_jcf=yes option.
• When -rt_ironloss_jcf option is executed for a spatial harmonic model, an error will be writ-
ten in the jlog file.
• When -rt_ironloss_jcf option is executed for a Ld Lq+ spatial harmonic model, only a JCF file
for iron loss calculation of LdLq will be created, and a warning will be written in the jlog file.
Stepping Motor, Linear Solenoid, Linear Synchronous Motor, and SR Motor

Wound-field synchronous motor

• The -rt_ironloss_jcf option is not supported.
Induction Motor
• The input file specified in the command must contain circuit information.
Generic Model
• The input file specified in the command must contain circuit information.
• The -rt_ironloss_jcf and -rt_torque_jcf options are not supported.
For generic models, all input files are generated using the -rt_induct_jcf option.
424
 Call process
The call process for job schedulers are as follows:
([HF6ROYHU 0RGXOHQDPH([HF6ROYHUH[Hʥ
-0$*57 0RGXOHQDPH570DNHUH[Hʥ
,QSXW-&)ILOH
0RGHWRFUHDWH-&)ILOHV
0RGHWRFUHDWH-&)ILOHV 0RGHWRFUHDWH-&)ILOHV
IRUFDOFXODWLQJIOX[OLQNDJH
IRUFDOFXODWLQJWRUTXH IRUFDOFXODWLQJLURQORVV
DQGLQGXFWDQFH
Ͳrt_induct_jcf Ͳrt_torque_jcf Ͳrt_ironloss_jcf
,QSXW-&)ILOHVIRU
,QSXW-&)ILOHVIRU ,QSXW-&)ILOHVIRU
FDOFXODWLQJIOX[OLQNDJH
FDOFXODWLQJWRUTXH FDOFXODWLQJLURQORVV
DQGLQGXFWDQFH
0RGHWRUXQDQDQDO\VLVIRUHDFK-&)ILOH
Ͳrt
XVLQJDMREPDQDJHPHQWV\VWHP
5HVXOWILOHVIRUIOX[OLQNDJHLQGXFWDQFHWRUTXHDQGLURQORVV
FDOFXODWLRQV
0RGHWRJHQHUDWH-0$*57PRGHOGDWDILOHV Ͳrt_post
2XWSXW577ILOH
Notes on Simultaneous Analysis Execution from the Command Line (for Errors
Caused by Jstage2 Files)
When JMAG-RT (RTMaker.exe) is executed, Jstage2 files are exported and are updated from as
needed. This file is exported to inform the GUI of the progress of the analysis execution. It has
information such as analysis execution elapsed time, degree of progress (%), and end time estimate.
When a JMAG-RT (RTMaker.exe) analysis is executed from the command line, Jstage2 files are
exported to the folder directly above the analysis output folder specified by environment variable
WorkDir. For example, if D:\RT\RT_DATA\run is specified in WorkDir, the Jstage2 files are
exported to D:\RT\RT_DATA.
425
JMAG-RT
Therefore, if more than one analysis is executed simultaneously in folders at the same hierarchy level
from the command line, the times the Jstage2 files are exported may be the same causing analysis
execution failure.
Example: If Input1.jcf, Input2.jcf, and Input3.jcf are executed from the command line
simultaneously, from each analysis a Jstage2 file is exported to the RT_DATA folder
In such a case, do the following:
 When ExecSolver is executed

Change the path of the analysis output folder set with environment variable WorkDir for each anal-
ysis.
 When RTMaker.exe is executed

When executing RTMaker.exe directly from the command line, do one of the following:
• Change the path of the analysis output folder set with environment variable WorkDir for each
analysis.
For example, lower one level the folder hierarchy of the analysis output folder as follows:
Before change:
WorkDir="D:\RT\RT_DATA-200101112233\run1"
After change:
WorkDir="D:\RT\RT_DATA-200101112233\run1\work"
Example: Even if Input1.jcf, Input2.jcf, and Input3.jcf are executed from the command line
simultaneously, each Jstage2 file is exported to a different location
426
• Use the environment variable RT_OUTPUT_JSTAGE_FILE to cancel the exporting of the

jstage2 files.
To cancel an export, specify 0 as the value of RT_OUTPUT_JSTAGE_FILE.
RT_OUTPUT_JSTAGE_FILE 1: Export jstage2 files (default)
0: Do not export jstage2 files
MEMO For instructions on how to run RTMaker.exe directly from the command line, see User's Man-
ual for JMAG-Designer Version 16.1 or earlier.
427
JMAG-RT
Updating JMAG-RT Model Created by JMAG-Designer Version 10.4

or Earlier
The file format of RTT file is modified from JMAG-Designer 10.5 or later.
The JMAG-RT Viewer does not support an old version of an RTT file, in which it is necessary to
convert the file format to the new version in order to display an RTT file in JMAG-RT Viewer.
MEMO For details about JMAG-RT Viewer, see “JMAG-RT Viewer” on page 741.
Notes
• A set of control circuit simulation files written before JMAG-Designer 10.5 cannot be used for
the updated JMAG-RT data files.
It is necessary to use a set of files for the control circuit simulation written from JMAG-Designer
10.5 or later when using the updated JMAG-RT data files.
• When converting an RTT file to a new format, the calculation data generated when the relevant
file was created needs to be in the JMAG-RT Library Manager (JMAG-RT base model). Conver-
sion is not successful when only an RTT file is available.
• The [Creation Date] displayed in the [Data Information] tab is the date which the JMAG-RT
file was updated.
Procedures
1. Start the JMAG-RT Library Manager bundled in JMAG-Designer 10.5 or later.
2. Select the JMAG-RT base model shown as “Created” in the [Data Status] field from the
[RT Model Library] table of JMAG-RT and click [Modify].
Or, right-click the JMAG-RT base model in the [RT Model Library] table and select [Modify].
A message asking if you want to edit the current data is displayed.
3. Select [No].
A dialog to set each model type is displayed.
4. Check the information for the JMAG-RT model file displayed in the [Data Information]
tab.
5. Select [OK] and a message asking if you want to update the RTT file is displayed.
6. Select [Yes].
A report file is displayed whether or not updating the data has succeeded or not. Check the error
message that is displayed explaining the error if it occurs.
7. Copy the JMAG-RT model to the working folder for the circuit simulator.
The RTT file that is created to the working folder is converted to the new format.
428
Settings and Notes for Creating JMAG-RT Models
This chapter describes the following points for each model type of JMAG-RT model:
• Notes and restrictions on model types
• Rules and notes for creating input JCF files for JMAG-RT
• Parameters in the JMAG-RT Library Manager

• PM Synchronous Motor and Synchronous Reluctance Motor (page 430)
• Stepping Motor (page 475)
• Linear Solenoid (page 483)
• Linear Synchronous Motor (page 493)
• SR Motor (page 507)
• Wound-Field Synchronous Motor (page 530)
• Generic Model (page 551)
429
JMAG-RT
PM Synchronous Motor and Synchronous Reluctance Motor

• Notes on Using the PM Synchronous Motor Model Type (page 430)
• Notes on Using the Synchronous Reluctance Motor Model Type (page 431)
• Creating an FEM Model with JMAG (page 432)
• PMSM/SynRM JMAG-RT Model Type (LdLq, Spatial Harmonic) (page 435)
• JMAG-RT Library Manager Settings (page 438)
Notes on Using the PM Synchronous Motor Model Type

• 3-phase windings and 6-phase windings are supported.
However, the following restrictions exist for 6-phase motors:
• For a dual Y-connection motor, a motor that does not share a neutral point is supported.
• For dual delta connection motors, inductance and torque calculated assuming [Sine Wave
Drive] (the sum of the phase currents of each delta connection is zero) is used. While [Other]
can be selected as the [Drive Type] for 3-phase motors, this cannot be selected for 6-phase
motors.
• Spatial harmonic (differential) models can be created. LdLq models, and spatial harmonic
(integral) models cannot be created. For details on model types, see “PMSM/SynRM JMAG-
RT Model Type (LdLq, Spatial Harmonic)” on page 435.
• When 6-phase JMAG-RT models are used in JMAG-Designer control circuits, control circuit
analysis inductance result values cannot be output from JMAG-RT Model component out-
put terminals.
However, when [Output Inductance to CSV File] is selected, control circuit analysis induc-
tance result values can be exported to CSV files.
• The initial position of the rotor is the “position where the direction of the d-axis and U/U1 axes
coincides.” You can specify the d-axis. For details see the explanation on [Rotor Initial Position]
in the [Create] tab on page 443.
• When creating a JMAG-RT model of a 3-phase motor with an unbalanced Y-connected circuit,
use either of the following settings:
• Use a spatial harmonic model and select [Other] for [Drive Type].
• Use a spatial harmonic model, select [Sine Wave Drive] for [Drive Type], and set the zero-
phase sequence current.
430
Notes on Using the Synchronous Reluctance Motor Model Type

• 3-phase windings and 6-phase windings are supported.
However, the following restrictions exist for 6-phase motors:
• For a dual Y-connection motor, a motor that does not share a neutral point is supported.
• For dual delta connection motors, inductance and torque calculated assuming [Sine Wave
Drive] (the sum of the phase currents of each delta connection is zero) is used. While [Other]
can be selected as the [Drive Type] for 3-phase motors, this cannot be selected for 6-phase
motors.
• When 6-phase JMAG-RT models are used in JMAG-Designer control circuits, control circuit
analysis inductance result values cannot be output from JMAG-RT Model component out-
put terminals.
However, when [Output Inductance to CSV File] is selected, control circuit analysis induc-
tance result values can be exported to CSV files.
coincides.” You can specify the d-axis. For details see the explanation on [Rotor Initial Position]
in the [Create] tab on page 443.
431
JMAG-RT
Creating an FEM Model with JMAG

An FEM model (input JCF file) needs to be created to meet the following requirements.
 Analysis type
• Create a FEM model for a magnetic field transient analysis.
 Analysis conditions
• Set the Rotation Motion condition and select [Constant Revolution Speed] in [Displacement
Type]. Even if a different type is selected, [Constant Revolution Speed] is used in FEA with
JMAG-RT.
• The initial position of the rotor can be set to any position. JMAG-RT automatically determines
the position for the current phase at zero based on the flux linkage calculation when creating a
JMAG-RT model.
• When creating a spatial harmonic (differential) JMAG-RT model, specify a Torque condition. It
does not matter which calculation method (nodal force, Lorentz force, or surface force) in the
Torque condition is used. If multiple Torque conditions are set in a JCF file, the Torque condi-
tion displayed at the top of the JMAG-Designer [Project Manager] tree is used.
When creating an Ld, Lq JMAG-RT model, a Torque condition is not required.
For details about spatial harmonic models and LdLq models, see “PMSM/SynRM JMAG-RT
Model Type (LdLq, Spatial Harmonic)” on page 435.
• Set Iron Loss conditions when accounting for iron loss during calculation. Also, select any
method other than [Hysteresis Model] as the calculation method for [Hysteresis Loss] and any
method other than [Eddy Currents in Steel Plate] as the calculation method for [Joule Loss].
When multiple Iron Loss conditions are set to FEM models, the sum of loss calculated from each
Iron Loss condition is output to the JMAG-RT model lookup tables.
However, depending on the [Motor Model] and [Drive Type] settings in JMAG-RT Library
Manager, it may not be possible to take iron loss into account. Please refer to the explanation on
[Allow Iron Loss].
• When using FEM models set with Temperature Distribution conditions, [Constant] must be
selected for those Temperature Distribution conditions. FEM models that possess Temperature
Distribution conditions with either [Table], [Thermal Circuit], or [Coupling Analysis] selected
cannot be used in JMAG-RT.
• Set three FEM Coil conditions for 3-phase motors. Set six FEM Coil conditions for 6-phase
motors.
A JMAG-RT model cannot be created if the number of FEM Coil conditions set in the FEM
model is too small or too large. JMAG-RT performs calculations assuming that one FEM Coil
condition corresponds to one phase coil.
When creating a JMAG-RT model based on an FEM model in which each phase coil consists
of multiple FEM coils
FEM Coil condition coil sets are in series. It is for this reason that when modeling coils connected in
parallel with JMAG-Designer, different FEM Coil conditions are usually set for each coil.
However, it is necessary that FEM models used in JMAG-RT are set with three FEM Coil condi-
tions for 3-phase motors, and set with six FEM Coil conditions for 6-phase motors (one for each
phase).
432
Therefore, when creating a JMAG-RT model based on an FEM model in which each phase coil
consists of multiple FEM coils, change the FEM Coil condition settings and circuit conversion set-
tings in JMAG-Designer.
Rules when changing

• In JMAG-Designer, set one FEM Coil condition for each phase. Coils originally connected in
parallel should also be included in one FEM Coil condition by adding multiple coil sets to
that FEM Coil condition.
• In the [Circuit Settings] setting panel in the JMAG-Designer [Study Properties] dialog, select
[Convert (Series/Parallel)]. In addition, enter the number of parallel coils in [Parallel], and
enter the number of model divisions divided by the parallel conversion ratio in [Series].
• Specify the coil resistance value in the [Resistance] box under the [Create] tab in JMAG-RT
Library Manager. In this [Resistance] box, as usual enter the coil resistance value per phase.
Example of change
The 3-phase model in this example has 24 slots, and each slot has two coils. Each phase coil con-
sists of a total of 8 coil components. The resistance value of each phase coil is 1 ohm.
Example model
For this example, change the settings as follows:
[Study Properties]
Model divisions JMAG-RT Library Manager
Circuit Conversion
1/4 model [Resistance] under the [Create] Select [Convert (Series/Parallel)]
tab: 1ohm [Series]: 4/8 = 0.5
[Parallel]: 8
Note
• When this change is made, circulating currents flowing in parallel sections of the circuit are
not taken into account by FEA in JMAG-RT. Use the motor type [Generic Model] when tak-
ing into account the circulating current.
 Meshing
• Generate a mesh using one of the following methods. Selection of [Standard Meshing], [Slide
Mesh], or [Generate Mesh at Each Step] is done in the [Mesh Properties] dialog.
• [Standard Meshing] + [FEM+BEM]:
The [FEM+BEM] can be selected under [Calculation Method] in the [Study Properties] dia-
log only for a 2D model.
• [Standard Meshing] + Slide condition manual setting
433
JMAG-RT
• [Slide Mesh]:
The Slide condition is automatically set when the Rotation Slide Mesh option is used to gen-
erate the mesh.
• [Generate Mesh at Each Step] (patch mesh function)
• It is recommended to apply a rotation periodic mesh. The Rotation Periodic Mesh function is a
function to generate a symmetric mesh in the vicinity of gap parts for models with rotational
periodicity.
 Study properties
• When using a partial FEM model, enable both the Full Model Conversion function and the Cir-
cuit Conversion function in the [Study Properties] dialog and specify the respective conversion
factors. JMAG-RT uses the FEM analysis result value as the value in full models.
• When Iron Loss conditions are set in the FEM model, iron loss calculations are also run in the
FEA run by JMAG-RT. To use the SMP function in this iron loss calculation, select [Parallel
Computing (Parallel Setting is Set from the Parallel Tab)] in the [Iron Loss] setting panel of the
[Study Properties] dialog.
MEMO The parallel computing function (SMP, MPP, hybrid, GPU) settings for magnetic field analysis
can be changed in the [Create] tab of the JMAG-RT model library. The parallel computing settings for
iron loss calculations cannot be changed in the JMAG-RT model library.
 Sets and coordinate systems settings

• When outputting selected physical quantities to the JMAG-RT model, set sets to the calculation
range of the physical quantities. If outputting the physical quantities according to user-defined
coordinate systems, also set the coordinate systems.
The output of the selected physical quantity is set on JMAG-RT [Output Port] tab. See “[Out-
put Port] Tab (Spatial Harmonic Model)” on page 466.
 Other notes
• It is not necessary to associate FEM Coil conditions with FEM Coil components. It is not neces-
sary to create the circuit itself. For FEM Coil conditions that are not associated with FEM Coil
components a warning is displayed in the [Project Manager] tree in JMAG-Designer, however
there is no need to modify it.
• JMAG-RT cannot perform calculations that account for eddy currents. Even if [Allow Eddy
Current] or [Calculate Distribution in Steel Plate] is selected from the [Eddy Currents] list in the
material properties for a part, eddy currents cannot be accounted for.
• When distributing multiple cases of calculation on multiple machines, it may take time to trans-
fer the result files. By setting the following options in the [Output Control] setting panel of the
[Study Properties] dialog, the result file size and the number of files are reduced, and the file
transfer time and the total calculation time. can be shortened.
• Select [Output Table Results Only (NO mesh will be Output)].
MEMO In addition to the above settings, even if you select [Do Not Output Distribution to Result
File] on the [Create] tab of the JMAG-RT Library Manager, it is effective in reducing the calculation
time.
434
PMSM/SynRM JMAG-RT Model Type (LdLq, Spatial Harmonic)

Following types of JMAG-RT models can be created for a PM synchronous motor or synchronous
reluctance motor.
IMPORTANT Synchronous reluctance motor spatial harmonic (integral method) models
cannot be created in the current version.
Model type Description
LdLq model The LdLq model has d-axis and q-axis inductances with current dependency
and current phase angle dependency.
• The effects of harmonics due to the slots cannot be simulated because only
a sinusoidal component of the electromotive force for the motor is used to
calculate Ld and Lq.
• An LdLq model is created from user prepared data (.csv). See “Creating
JMAG-RT Model from a CSV File” on page 341.
• Turn on [LdLq Model] to enable the display of torque-speed curve or effi-
ciency map in the JMAG-RT Viewer.
Spatial harmonic (differ- These models are supported from JMAG-Designer Version 18.1 and earlier
ential) model (former name: spatial harmonic model).
The spatial harmonic (differential) model has inductance and torque with
current dependency and current phase angle dependency.
The effects of harmonics due to the slots can be simulated. The inductance
can be obtained highly accurately even if the model has a very high magnetic
saturation.
6-phase motor JMAG-RT models possess the result data of this model.
Spatial harmonic (inte- These models are supported by JMAG-Designer Version 19.0 or later (for-
gral) model mer name: flux integral model).
Results data for flux linkage and torque, both dependent on the current and
current phase angle, is output. The effects of slot harmonics can be checked.
Even if the magnetic saturation is very large, it is possible to obtain linkage
flux with sufficient accuracy.
When comparing the spatial harmonic (integral) model and the spatial har-
monic (differential) model, it is found that the calculation accuracy is com-
parable between the two models, but the calculation speed is better with the
spatial harmonic (integral) model.
When adding a spatial harmonic (integral) model to an RTT file, created
with JMAG-RT in a JMAG-Designer version before JMAG-Designer Ver-
sion 18.1, containing a spatial harmonic (differential) model, see “Adding a
spatial harmonic (integral) model to an RTT file created before Version
18.1” on page 436.
435
JMAG-RT
Model type Description

Current tables used in a spatial harmonic (integral) model can be checked by
using the characteristics export function. See “Exporting Results Data from
a JMAG-RT Model to a File” on page 372.
The following functions and options are not available for the spatial har-
monic (integral) model:
• [Other] of [Drive Type] in the JMAG-RT Library Manager [Create] tab
• Current signal input in circuit control simulation. Voltage signal input
and electrical signal input are supported.
• The delta-connection option in circuit control simulation. The star-con-
nection option is supported.
• Skew option settings in circuit control simulation ([Set skew option]).
• Efficiency map creation using JMAG-RT Viewer
Note the following:

• The spatial harmonic (integral) model converted from a spatial harmonic
(differential) model has a smaller input current range than the spatial har-
monic (differential) model input current range. Therefore, when creating a
JMAG-RT model, set a current value that is sufficiently larger than the
assumed maximum current.
• When using the spatial harmonic (integral) model in Simulink, use the
fixed-step continuous explicit solver [ode1] (Euler's method) as the Sim-
ulink solver.
 Notes
• The JMAG-RT model type can be selected in the [Select Motor Model] dialog (See step3 at
“Creating JMAG-RT Model Using FEA Results” on page 334).
However, for a 3-phase motor, the JMAG-RT model type can be changed in the [Create] tab of
the [PM Synchronous Motor] dialog of JMAG-RT Library Manager even after loading the FEM
model.
• The LdLq model and spatial harmonic models employ a different method of calculation. Hence
calculation time. when checking [LdLq Model] and [Spatial Harmonic Model] is a summation
of calculation time. for each [LdLq Model] and [Spatial Harmonic Model].
• The simple spatial harmonic model supported by JMAG-Designer 10.4 or older versions are
integrated into the spatial harmonic (differential) model. Setting for the simple spatial harmonic
model in the old JMAG-RT model can be displayed in the latest JMAG-RT Library Manager,
but the simple spatial harmonic model type cannot be selected when creating a new motor
model.
 Adding a spatial harmonic (integral) model to an RTT file created before Version
18.1
ExecSolver can be used to create RTT files containing spatial harmonic (integral) model result data
from RTT files containing 3-phase motor spatial harmonic (differential) model result data.
Notes
• A JMAG-RT license is used whenever commands are executed.
• RTT files used as input for this command must satisfy the following conditions.
436
• 3-phase motors are used. It is not possible to create spatial harmonic (integral) models from
6-phase spatial harmonic (differential) models.
• [Model Type] is [PM Synchronous Motor].
• spatial harmonic (differential) model result data is output.
LdLq model result data alone cannot be created from RTT files.
• When this command is executed, a Run folder is created in the execution folder specified by the
environment variable “WorkDir”. The RTT file that contains both the spatial harmonic (differ-
ential) model and the spatial harmonic (integral) model is exported in the Run folder. The spatial
harmonic (differential) model data in the exported RTT file is the same as the input RTT file.
Environment variables settings

When using ExecSolver, it is necessary to set environment variables.
For details on the procedure for setting environment variables, see “JMAG User’s Manual Overview
Edition”.
• Windows
Variable Value
InsDir Folder where JMAG is installed (absolute path).
In case of default, “C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2.”
WorkDir Full path of the folder to which temporary files, result files, restart files, etc.
generated during analysis are written.
E.g.: “C:\Program Files\JMAG\Analysis.”
• Linux
Variable Value
InsDir Directory where JMAG is installed (absolute path).
WorkDir Full path of the directory to which temporary files, result files, restart files,
etc. generated during analysis are written.
E.g.: “/usr/work/Analysis.”
LD_LIBRARY_PATH Directory where the shared library necessary for running analysis in JMAG
is located.
For the 64-bit version: “JMAG_install_directory/solver/mod/lib/linux64.”
Execution
Command structure:
./ExecSolver.exe -rt_post_flux_int [rtt file path]
Example for Windows:

"C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\ExecSolver.exe"^
-rt_post_flux_int^
"D:\Data\rt_result\motor.rtt"
Example for Linux:

/home/user/installation/JMAG222/JMAG_RT/ExecSolver\
-rt_post_flux_int\
/home/user/data/rt/motor.rtt
437
JMAG-RT
JMAG-RT Library Manager Settings

• [Information] Tab (page 438)
• [Create] Tab (page 443)
• [Output Port] Tab (Spatial Harmonic Model) (page 466)
• [Motion] Tab (page 468)
• [RT Correction] Tab (page 469)
• [Winding Conductor] Tab (page 473)
MEMO From JMAG-Designer Version 17.1 on there is no longer a [Motor Characteristics] tab. The
settings under the [Motor Characteristics] tab are inherited by the results data export function. See
“Exporting Results Data from a JMAG-RT Model to a File” on page 372.
[Information] Tab
The [Information] tab manages information in the JMAG-RT model.
 [Basic Information]
Item Description
[Title] Entering this item is optional.
The characters entered in [Title] are displayed in the [Model Name]
column in the [RT Model Library] table in the JMAG-RT Library
Manager.
[Created By] Entering this item is optional.
[File Name], These items are automatically entered by JMAG-RT.
[Motor Type],
[Creation Data],
[JMAG Version],
[RTT File Version],
[Model Type]
 [Motor Information]
Item Description
[Publish] • Selected:
When opening the RTT file output from JMAG-RT in
JMAG-RT Viewer, the contents in this column are dis-
played in JMAG-RT Viewer.
• Cleared:
The contents in this column are not displayed in JMAG-
RT Viewer.
[Weight (kg)], Entering these item is optional.
[Shaft Length (m)], Values entered here are not used for calculation to create a
[External Diameter (m)], JMAG-RT model.
[Moment of Inertia (kgm2)],
[Rated Speed (rpm)],
[Rated Output (kW)],
[Rated Current (A)],
[Rated Voltage (V)]
438
Item Description
[Number of Poles] This item is automatically entered after completion of cal-
culation for JMAG-RT model creation.
[d-axis Offset Angle (deg)] This item is automatically entered after calculation to cre-
ate JMAG-RT model is finished. The value of θ shown
below is displayed here.
θ: The value of [d-axis Offset Angle]. Mechanical angle.

α: The value of [Rotor Initial position (deg)]. Mechanical
angle.
d_auto: Automatically calculated d-axis direction.
d_user: User-defined d-axis direction.
U: U-axis direction
When [Automatically Calculate] is selected for [Rotor Ini-
tial Position] in the [Create] tab, 0 is displayed.
[Resistance (ohm)] Phase resistance.
This item is automatically entered after completion of cal-
[Permanent Magnet Flux (Wb)] The item is set automatically after the model is created by
JMAG-RT.
Value Ψ a of magnetic flux linking the coil for the dq coordi-
nate system.
Ψ a is calculated with the following formula.
Ψa = Ψf × (3 ⁄ 2)
Ψ a : magnet magnetic flux value (Wb) described in the

JMAG-RT model
Ψ f : maximum value (Wb) of the armature flux linkage
from a permanent magnet per phase
3-phase motor: These items are automatically entered after the calculations
[Ld (H)], to create the JMAG-RT model are completed for the LdLq
[Lq (H)] model or when [Sine Wave Drive] is selected in [Drive Type]
for the spatial harmonic model.
6-phase motor:
The formula differs between the LdLq model and the spatial
[Ld1d1 (H)],
harmonics model.
[Lq1q1 (H)],
[Ld1d2 (H)], • If the RTT file has results data from both the LdLq model
[Lq1q2 (H)], and the spatial harmonics model, the values calculated
[Ld2dd (H)], using the spatial harmonics model results data are dis-
[Lq2q2 (H)] played.
• For 6-phase motors, the model type is a spatial harmonic
model.
439
JMAG-RT
Item Description
LdLq model
The average values of all data points in the Ld table and Lq
table are output, which depend on both current amplitude
and current phase.
For Ld and Lq (the data points in the Ld and Lq tables), see
“Definition formulas for d- and q-axis inductance” below.
Spatial harmonic model

From performing a 3-phase to 2-phase conversion (absolute
conversion with a coefficient of 2 ⁄ 3 ) on a 3-by-3 matrix
of phase inductances having current amplitude, current
phase, and mechanical angle dependence, an Ld table and an
Lq table having both current amplitude and current phase
dependence are obtained. The average value of all the data
points from the Ld table and the average value of all the data
points from the Lq table are displayed.
When [LdLq (Constant)] is selected under [Accuracy Type]

in the JMAG-RT model block for Simulink, the values dis-
played here are used for the control circuit simulation.
3-phase motor: These items are automatically entered after completion of
[U Phase Leakage Inductance (H)], calculation for JMAG-RT model creation.
[V Phase Leakage Inductance (H)],
[W Phase Leakage Inductance (H)]
6-phase motor:
[U1 Phase Leakage Inductance (H)],
[V1 Phase Leakage Inductance (H)],
[W1 Phase Leakage Inductance (H)],
[U2 Phase Leakage Inductance (H)],
[V2 Phase Leakage Inductance (H)],
[W2 Phase Leakage Inductance (H)]
[Number of Turns] This item is automatically entered after completion of cal-
Definition formulas for d- and q-axis inductance

• PMSM:
dφ d φq
L dd = --------- L qs = -----
dI d Iq
3 3
I d = – --- I sin ( βπ ⁄ 180 ) Iq = --- I cos ( βπ ⁄ 180 )
2 2
L dd , L qs : d-axis dynamic inductance (H) and q-axis static inductance (H)
I d , I q : d-axis and q-axis phase current in the coil (A)
φ d , φ q : d-axis and q-axis total magnetic flux (Wb)
I : current amplitude (A)
β : current phase (deg)
440
• SynRM:
φd φq
L ds = ----- L qs = -----
Id Iq
Id = – 3
3
--- I sin ( βπ ⁄ 180 ) Iq = --- I cos ( βπ ⁄ 180 )
2 2
L ds , L qs : d-axis and q-axis static inductance (H)
However, the d-axis inductance for a permanent magnet assisted SynRM is defined by the fol-
lowing formula:
L ds = (φ d – φ magnet d ) ⁄ I d
φ magnet d : d-axis magnet magnetic flux (Wb).
The flux linkage for the FEM coil when the current is zero.
 [Comment]
Item Description
When opening the RTT file output from JMAG-RT in JMAG-
RT Viewer, the contents in this column are displayed in JMAG-
RT Viewer.
• Cleared:
The contents in this column are not displayed in JMAG-RT
Viewer.
[Comment] box Optionally enter comments about JMAG-RT model.
 [Resolution]
Item Description
RT Viewer.
• Cleared:
Viewer.
[LdLq Inductance Resolution] When 3-phase motors are used and [LdLq model] is selected, these
parameters are automatically entered when calculations for creat-
ing JMAG-RT models end.
[Harmonic Flux Resolution], When 3-phase motors are used and [Special Harmonic] is selected,
[Harmonic Inductance Resolu- these parameters are automatically entered when calculations for
tion], [Harmonic Torque Resolu- creating JMAG-RT models end.
tion]
441
JMAG-RT
Item Description
[Flux Resolution], [Inductance These parameters are automatically entered when calculations for
Resolution], [Torque Resolution] creating 6-phase JMAG-RT models end.
Resolution is output for each coil set for 6-phase motors.
MEMO When selecting [Spatial Harmonic Model] with [Torque setting is same as inductance] in the
[Create] tab also selected, being affected by the following parameters, the mechanical angle calculation
range of inductance and torque will change as shown in the table below.
• [Use half electrical angle periodicity] in the [Create] tab.
• [Use auto angle resolution setting for saving time] in the [Create] tab.
Use auto angle Mechanical angle Mechanical angle
Use half electrical
resolution setting for calculation range of calculation range of
angle periodicity
saving time inductance torque
OFF OFF 1 period 1 period
ON OFF 1/2 period 1/2 period
OFF ON 1/2 period 1/6 period
ON ON 1/2 period 1/6 period
 [Output Port]
Item Description
RT Viewer.
• Cleared:
Viewer.
Output port table The settings under the [Output Port] tab are automatically filled in.
 [Winding Conductors]
Item Description
RT Viewer.
• Cleared:
Viewer.
[Conductors in Slot Height], When the conductor wire specifications are specified on the [Wind-
[Conductors in Slot Width], ing Conductor] tab, these parameters are automatically entered
[Slots per Phase], [Averaged Slot when calculations for creating JMAG-RT models end.
Width (m)], [Conductor Type],
[Conductor Height (m)], [Con-
ductor Width (m)], [Conductor
Diameter (m)], [Core Stack
Length (m)], [Conductivity (S/
m)]
442
 [Folder]
The RTT file is exported to the folder indicated in this text box. The HTML file (JCF file
name.html) created when the JMAG-RT model data is created is exported to this folder with the
model data.
Furthermore, a “run” folder is created in this folder when a JMAG-RT model is created. The JPLOT
file, etc., of the FEA is exported to the run folder.
[Create] Tab
The [Create] tab specifies the parameters for the FEA required to create a JMAG-RT model.
 [Motor Model], [Change Model]

The type of JMAG-RT model is displayed. See “PMSM/SynRM JMAG-RT Model Type (LdLq, Spa-
tial Harmonic)” on page 435 for the features of each model.
Click [Change Model] to change the type of JMAG-RT model.
JMAG-RT model types cannot be changed when any of the following conditions are satisfied.
• 6-phase motor models
• Models where JMAG-RT models (.rtt) have already been created
 [Number of Poles]
Specifies the number of poles for the motor.
 [Rotor Initial Position (deg)]

[Rotor Initial Position This parameter is used to determine the rotor initial position so that the d-axis
(deg)] and U-axis (the magnetic flux direction of the U-phase coil) match. This set-
ting is necessary to correctly handle the current phase in the lookup tables of
JMAG-RT models.
• [Automatically calculate]:
The rotor position at the point when the U-phase flux waveform peaks is
used as the rotor initial position.
• [Specified]:
The user-specified angle is used to determine the rotor initial position.
Enter the mechanical angle difference between the U-axis and the d-axis in
the initial state of FEA models; enter a negative value if the d-axis is counter-
clockwise relative to the U-axis, and enter a positive value if the d-axis is
clockwise relative to the U-axis.
When considering angle differences, the [Initial Position] settings of Motion
conditions can be ignored.
443
JMAG-RT
[Ignore the difference This option can be used when [Specified] is selected in [Rotor Initial Position
from automatic calcu- (deg)].
lation] When this option is used, processing for no-load analysis and load analysis is
run together. Therefore, the calculation time. is shorter compared to when the
option is not used.
• Selected (default):
Load analysis is run even when there is a difference of electrical angle ±5deg
or more between the initial position (deg) calculated in no-load analysis and
the value entered in the [Rotor Initial Position (deg)] box.
When the checkbox is selected, operations are processed in the following
order:
(1). Create input JCF files for no-load analysis and load analysis.
(2). Run no-load analysis and load analysis.
(3). Calculate the rotor initial position from the result of the no-load analy-
sis.
(4). Output a warning message to the solver report when there is a difference
between the calculated initial position and the value entered in the [Rotor
Initial Position (deg)] box.
(5). Create RTT files from the results of the no-load analysis and load analy-
sis.
• Cleared:
Load analysis is canceled when there is a difference of electrical angle ±5deg
or more between the initial position (deg) calculated in no-load analysis and
the value entered in the [Rotor Initial Position (deg)] box.
When the checkbox is cleared, operations are processed in the following
order:
(1). Create an input JCF file for no-load analysis.
(2). Run no-load analysis.
(3). Calculate the rotor initial position from the result of the no-load analy-
sis.
(4-1). Cancel the no-load analysis when there is a difference between the cal-
culated initial position and the value entered in the [Rotor Initial Position
(deg)] box. Do not proceed to (5) and (6).
(4-2). Create an input JCF file for load analysis when there is no difference
between the calculated initial position and the value entered in the [Rotor
Initial Position (deg)] box.
(5). Run load analysis.
(6). Create RTT files from the results of no-load analysis and load analysis.
 [Configuration of FEM Coil]

3-phase motor: Each lists displays the FEM Coil conditions set in the input file (.jcf ).
[U-Phase], [V-Phase], [W- Specify the condition is associated with each phase.
Phase]
The JMAG-RT model motor rotates counterclockwise. The phase differ-
6-phase motor: ence between the three phases is defined relative to the U-phase. V-phase is
[U1 phase], [V1 phase], displaced by the electrical angle of -120 degrees and the W-phase by +120
[W1 phase], [U2 phase], degrees.
[V2 phase], [W2 phase]
444
Rotation Rotation
direction direction
Distributed Concentrated
winding winding
Rotation Rotation
direction direction
winding winding
[Number of Turns] Specify the number of coil turns for each phase.
The value specified here is applied to all coils.
The value specified here is used for FEA in JMAG-RT.
[Connection Pattern] Select either [Y-connection] or [Delta-connection] for 3-phase motors.
The connection pattern selected here is used when performing NT curve

calculation and efficiency map calculation with JMAG-RT Viewer or when
performing circuit calculation using PSIM.
When performing circuit calculations using Simulink, the connection pat-
tern specified in the properties of the JMAG-RT model block is used, and
the connection pattern selected here is not used.
Each pattern is shown below. Arrows in the figure represent the positive
direction of the current.
[Y-connection] [Delta-connection]
445
JMAG-RT
[Resistance (ohm)] Specify the resistance value of the coil.
When performing circuit calculations using JMAG-Designer
or PSIM, the value specified here is used as the default value.
When performing circuit calculations using Simulink, the
value specified here is not used.
3-phase motor: Specify these values when accounting for leakage inductance
[U Phase Leakage Inductance (H)], during NT curve calculation and efficiency map calculation
[V Phase Leakage Inductance (H)], with JMAG-RT Viewer or circuit calculation using Sim-
[W Phase Leakage Inductance (H)] ulink.
Leave it at zero when it is not being accounted for.
6-phase motor:
[U1 Phase Leakage Inductance (H)], The problem will be solved as if the coil with the specified
[V1 Phase Leakage Inductance (H)], leakage inductance value is connected in series with the coil
[W1 Phase Leakage Inductance (H)], of each phase when a value other than zero is specified.
[U2 Phase Leakage Inductance (H)], The value in the [Leakage Inductance] box of the FEM Coil
[V2 Phase Leakage Inductance (H)], component in the input JCF file is displayed as the default
[W2 Phase Leakage Inductance (H)] value of leakage inductance.
 [Current (Ld, Lq)]

This group box is displayed when creating LdLq models.
Determine the calculation resolution of the JMAG-RT model.
Type Description
[Simple Settings] Determines data points from the ranges of rated current and current phase.
Specify the following:
• [Rated Current (A)]:
Phase current amplitude.
The created JMAG-RT model has data in the range of 1/2 to 3 times the
specified rated current. There are seven data points for current, and the
range from the rated current to three times the rated current is divided
equally into six points.
Ex: If the rated current is 1 A, the following table is created.
0.5 1.0 1.4 1.8 2.2 2.6 3
• [Current Phase Range (deg)] (range upper and lower limits):

The range specified here is in 10-degree increments, and outside this
range data points are created in 45-degree increments.
446
Type Description
[Advanced Settings] Uses user-specified data points for FEA via JMAG-RT.
Click [Setting] to open the [Advanced Settings of Current] dialog and
specify the following parameters.
• [Amplitude (A)]:
Click [Point Sequence] to open the [Current Point Sequence] dialog and
specify a table for the phase current amplitude.
• Set the current table to include the range of current values that are
input to the JMAG-RT model during a control circuit simulation. If
the value range of the current table is not sufficiently large, then it may
not be possible to account for the effects of magnetic saturation during
a control circuit simulation.
• If a current that exceeds the value range of the current table is input to
the JMAG-RT model during a control circuit simulation, then the
JMAG-RT model will output the inductance and torque values at the
maximum or minimum current.
Click [Point Sequence] to open the [Current Phase Point Sequence] dia-
log and specify a table for the current phase.
Values can be created for each point in a table based on the range that is
determined from the minimum and maximum values and the number of
divisions for that range. Click [Create Point Sequence] to open the [Create
Point Sequence] dialog. Enter values for [Min], [Max], and [Division], and
click [OK] to add the values to the [Current Point Sequence] dialog or the
[Current Phase Point Sequence] dialog.
If the ratio of the resolution to [Max] is less than 1.0e-4, then errors may
occur in JMAG-RT calculations. The resolution is the value that is the dif-
ference between [Min] and [Max] which is then divided by [Division].
 [Current (Ld, Lq)] * Creating a JMAG-RT model from CSV

It is necessary to specify the following items to create a JMAG-RT model from a CSV file.
[Resolution Point Specifies a resolution to expand Id and Iq axes data into amplitude and
Sequence] phase axes data.
 [Current (Spatial Harmonic)]

This group box is displayed when creating spatial harmonic models.
Specify the calculation resolution of the JMAG-RT model.
JMAG-RT executes FEA at the specified current value for each rotational angle. The JMAG-RT
model created using the FEA results stores current-dependent result data.
447
JMAG-RT
[Drive Type] By selecting the excitation method when creating a JMAG-RT model, a
current waveform pattern supported by the JMAG-RT model is defined.
• [Sine Wave Drive]:
Select when it is guaranteed that the sum of the instantaneous current
flowing in each coil of the motor is zero. For example, in a Y-connection,
it is guaranteed that the sum of the instantaneous current of each coil is
zero, even with 120-degree excitation or when one phase is disconnected.
However, by setting the zero-phase sequence current, current unbalance
can be expressed even when [Sine Wave Drive] is selected. See the
description on [Set zero phase sequence current].
• [Other]:
Select when the sum of the instantaneous current flowing in each coil of
the motor is not guaranteed to be zero. For example, when the current
flow reverses in a delta connection.
The time taken to create a JMAG-RT model differs depending on the cur-
rent waveform pattern.
• When [Sine Wave Drive] is selected, FEA used for creating a JMAG-RT
model is performed in which parametric analysis on two variables - the
current spatial vector amplitude and phase - is performed.
• When the [Other] is selected, FEA used for creating a JMAG-RT model
is performed in which parametric analysis on three variables - Iu, Iv, Iw
each a coil current - is performed.
MEMO For 6-phase motors, only [Sine Wave Drive] is supported as the
[Drive Type].
[Table Type] This option is displayed only for 6-phase motors.
Current phase differences are used as axes in the JMAG-RT model lookup
tables. Here, select the type of current phase difference to be used as the
axis.
• [Use current phase angle difference between coil sets as axis of tables]:
The phase difference between the current vector of coil set 1 and the cur-
rent vector of coil set 2 is used as the axis value. When this option is
selected, set [Coil set 1 current phase (deg)] and [Current phase angle
difference between coil sets (deg)] in [Inductance] and [Torque]. If there
is a current phase delay in coil set 2, relative to coil set 1, set negative
phrase differences.
• [Use current phase of each coil set as axis of tables]:
The phase of the phase current in each coil set is used as the axis value.
When this option is selected, set [Coil set 1 current phase (deg)] and
[Coil set 2 current phase (deg)] in [Inductance] and [Torque].
448
[Calculation Method for This option is displayed when using a 3-phase PMSM and selecting [[Sine
Circuit/Control Simula- Wave Drive] for [Drive Type].
tor] Select one of the following:
• [Differential Method]:
Outputs a lookup table of the differential method model to the RTT file.
• [Differential Method and Integral Method]:
Outputs lookup tables of the differential method model and integral
method model to the RTT files.
Note the following:
• When a JMAG-RT base model is opened which does not have an RTT
file created, [Differential Method] is selected by default. When a JMAG-
RT base model is opened which does have an RTT file created, [Differ-
ential Method] or [Differential Method and Integral Method] will be
selected according to the content of that RTT file.
• When all of the following conditions are satisfied, the lookup tables of
integral method models will not be output to RTT files even if [Differen-
tial Method and Integral Method] is selected.
• [Specified] is selected for [Rotor Initial Position (deg)].
• The difference between the automatically calculated initial position
and the user-specified initial position is greater than 0.1 (deg) in elec-
trical angle.
• Even if [Differential Method] is selected here and the RTT file is created,
the lookup table of the integral method model can be added to the RTT
file later by one of the following methods:
• Execute the ExecSolver + -rt_post_flux_int option (page 436).
• Change [Calculation Mode] to [Recalculate Only Failed Case], select
[Differential Method and Integral Method] from [Differential
Method], and recreate RTT files.
[Auto Setting] Use this button to automatically set [Amplitude] (or [Current]) and [Cur-
rent Phase] data points.
The [Amplitude] (or [Current]) data points are created using a rated cur-
rent. Click [Auto Setting] to open the [Auto Setting] dialog. For [Sine
Wave Drive], enter a phase current amplitude in [Rated Current (A)]. For
[Other], enter an instantaneous value of the current in [Rated Current
(A)]. A range is created whose maximum value is three times the value
entered.
Seven data points are created. However, if the minimum value among the
calculated data points is greater than 0.1 A, 0.1 A is inserted into the table,
making the number of data points eight.
Ex 1: For a rated current of 5 A the following table is created.

0.1 2.1429 4.2857 6.4286 8.5714 10.7143 12.8571 15.0000
Ex 2: For a rated current of 0.1 A the following table is created.

0.04286 0.08571 0.12857 0.1714 0.2142 0.2571 0.3
[Current Phase] data points are created in 15-degree steps from 0 to 90

degrees, and in 45-degree steps from 90 to 360 degrees.
449
JMAG-RT
[Apply nonlinear fast Select this checkbox to speed up the processing of nonlinear calculations.
solver] A differential inductance is calculated from a specified current and a cur-
rent slightly larger than this specified current.
When [Apply nonlinear fast solver] is selected, the specified current calcu-
lation results are used as the initial values for the slightly larger current cal-
culations.
MEMO When this checkbox is selected, the [Use High Speed Solver]
option is used. This option can be set in the [Nonlinear Calculation] set-
ting panel of the [Study Properties] dialog in JMAG-Designer.
MEMO The [Apply nonlinear fast solver] option cannot be used for 6-
phase motors.
[Torque setting is same as This checkbox becomes active after selecting [Sine Wave Drive] for [Drive
inductance] Type].
• Selected:
When this is selected, the setting of the current resolution for inductance
also applies to the setting of the current resolution for torque.
• Cleared:
When this is selected, different current resolution can be set for torque
and inductance. In this case, the current resolution for magnetic flux uses
the same setting as the current resolution for inductance.
[Use phase symmetry] This checkbox becomes active when a 3-phase motor is used and [Sine
Wave Drive] is selected for [Drive Type].
• Selected:
Assumes that the magnetic flux, torque, and inductance of the motor
have symmetry with respect to phase and executes FEAs only within the
phase range of -90 to +90 degrees of electrical angle. Based on the results,
FEAs for the remaining phase range (+90 to +270 degrees) are performed
in post processing.
With these settings, the FEA resolution (number of cases) is reduced by
about half, so it is possible to greatly reduce the time taken to create a
JMAG-RT model. In addition, since the results data stored in the
JMAG-RT model is reduced, the file size of the JMAG-RT model is
reduced.
• Cleared:
FEAs in the phase range of 0 to 360 degrees of electrical angle are per-
formed assuming that the magnetic flux, torque, and inductance of the
motor have no symmetry with respect to phase.
When [Use phase symmetry] is selected, no physical quantity output under
the [Output Port] tab can be set.
Note that there are limitations when using the [Consider Phase Symmetry]
option with a 6-phase motor.
• Select [Use current phase of each coil set as axis of tables] in [Table
Type]. This option is not available when [Use current phase angle differ-
ence between coil sets as axis of tables] is selected.
• The angle difference between the U1 and U2 axes must be +30 degrees
or -30 degrees in electrical angle (see figure below).
450
Left and Center: The angle difference between the U1 and U2 axes is +30 degrees or -30 degrees,
Right: The angle difference between the U1 axis and the U2 axis is greater than 30 degrees
[Inductance]
Specifies the inductance data point to be used when creating a JMAG-RT model.
[Use half electrical angle Select [Use half electrical angle periodicity] when the angle dependency for
periodicity] inductance in each phase has periodicity per 1/2 electrical angle.
The periodicity is used where the calculation time. can be reduced when
creating a JMAG-RT model.
3-phase motor and [Sine Click [Point Sequence] to open the [Current Point Sequence] dialog.
Wave Drive]: For [Sine Wave Drive], enter one or more values for the phase current
[Amplitude (A)] amplitude. For [Other], enter one or more instantaneous values of the cur-
3-phase motor and rent.
[Other]: • Set the current point sequence to include the range of current values that
[Current (A)] are input to the JMAG-RT model during a control circuit simulation.
6-phase motor: • When [Others] is selected for [Drive Type] and the control circuit simu-
[Coil set1 current ampli- lation using the RTT file to be created supplies the motor with AC tak-
tude (A)], [Coil set2 cur- ing positive and negative values such as sine wave and square wave, enter
rent amplitude (A)] the positive and negative values (e.g., -10, -5, -2, -1, 1, 2, 5, 10).
• 0 A cannot be added to the point sequence in [Inductance].
• Based on the range determined from the minimum and maximum values
and the number of divisions for that range, a value can be created for
each point in the point sequence. Click [Create Point Sequence], enter
values for [Min], [Max], and [Division], and click [OK].
If the ratio of the resolution to [Max] is less than 1.0e-4, errors may
occur in JMAG-RT calculations. Resolution is the difference between
[Min] and [Max] divided by [Division].
Control circuit simulation
• When a current of 0 A is input to the JMAG-RT model, the JMAG-RT
model outputs the inductance and torque values obtained from the no-
load analysis that is run when creating the JMAG-RT model.
• If a current that exceeds the value range of the current point sequence is
input to the JMAG-RT model, the JMAG-RT model outputs the induc-
tance and torque values at the maximum or minimum current.
451
JMAG-RT
3-phase motor: Click [Point Sequence] to open the [Current Phase Point Sequence] dialog
[Current Phase (deg)] and enter two or more current phase values.
• When [Use phase symmetry] is selected, specify current phases in a range
6-phase motor:
between -90 and +90 degrees of the electrical angle.
[Coil set1 current phase
(deg)], [Coil set2 current • When [Use phase symmetry] is cleared, specify current phases within a
phase (deg)] range between 0 and 360 degrees of the electrical angle.
• Values can be created for each point in a table based on the range that is
determined by the minimum and maximum values and the number of
divisions for that range. Click [Create Point Sequence] to open the [Cre-
ate Point Sequence] dialog. Enter values for [Min], [Max], and [Divi-
sion], and click [OK] to add the values to the [Current Phase Point
Sequence] dialog.
If the ratio of the resolution to [Max] is less than 1.0e-4, then errors may
occur in JMAG-RT calculations. The resolution is the value that is the
difference between [Min] and [Max] which is then divided by [Division].
• When 6-phase motors are used and [Use current phase angle difference
between coil sets as axis of tables] is selected for [Table type], [Coil set 2
current phase (deg)] is not displayed.
6-phase motor: Specify this parameter when using 6-phase motors and selecting [Use cur-
[Current phase angle dif- rent phase angle difference between coil sets as axis of tables] for [Table
ference between coil sets type].
(deg)] Click [Point Sequence] to open the [Current phase angle difference
between coil sets Point Sequence] dialog and specify the table of the phase
difference between the current vector of coil set 1 and the current vector of
coil set 2.
[Use zero phase sequence [Use zero phase sequence current] is displayed when the following condi-
current] tions are met:
• 3-phase PMSM
• [Spatial Harmonic Model] is selected for [Motor Model].
• [Sin Wave Drive] is selected for [Drive Type].
In this function, the zero-phase sequence current I 0 follows the equation

obtained from the power invariant conversion.
Iu + Iv + Iw
I 0 = ----------------------------
3
Select [Use zero phase sequence current] when setting the currents flowing
in or out of the neutral point of the Y-connection. In addition, click [Point
Columns] to open the [Zero Phase Sequence Current Point Sequence] dia-
log and enter two or more instantaneous values for the zero-phase sequence
current.
• Enter the 0 A point.
• When only non-negative values are set, the inductance and torque values
corresponding to negative zero-phase sequence current values are esti-
mated from the values corresponding to positive zero-phase sequence
current values in the control circuit simulation.
452
• Values can be created for each point in a table based on the range deter-
mined by the minimum and maximum values and the number of divi-
sions for that range. Click [Create Point Sequence] and enter values for
[Min], [Max], and [Division]. Click [OK] to add the values to the [Cur-
rent Phase Point Sequence] dialog.
If the ratio of resolution to [Max] is less than 1.0e-4, then errors may
occur in JMAG-RT calculations. The resolution is the value that is the
difference between [Min] and [Max] which is then divided by [Division].
Note the following:

• Zero-phase sequence current can be set even when [Delta-Connection] is
selected in [Connection Pattern]. However, in a circuit simulation using
an RTT file that contains zero-phase sequence current data, you cannot
select delta-connection and use the neutral point.
• When [Use zero phase sequence current] is selected, the following
options cannot be used:
• [Use phase symmetry]
• [Use half electrical angle periodicity]
• [Use auto angle resolution setting for saving time]
• When you change the [Use zero phase sequence current] setting, the
recalculation function cannot be used, and the RTT file must be regener-
ated.
• The following JMAG-RT functions cannot be used for RTT files that
contain zero-phase sequence current data:
• [Apply Correction File] (page 351)
• [Apply Loss Table] (page 365)
[Use auto angle resolu- When [Use auto angle resolution setting for saving time] is selected, FEA
tion setting for saving for RT motor model generation is executed for only 1/6 of an electrical
time] angle period.
After FEA execution, the software extends the data for the 1/6 of an electri-
cal angle period to 1 electrical angle period, and writes this expanded data
to an RTT file. Since FEA is only executed for 1/6 of an electrical angle
period, the time to create an RTT file can be reduced compared to when
the checkbox is cleared.
453
JMAG-RT
When [Use auto angle resolution setting for saving time] is selected, the
automatically changed mechanical angle calculation range and mechanical
angle resolution are calculated using the following equations.
2 ⋅ 360 1
R = ----------------- ⋅ ---
p 6
R
θ new = --------------
R
-------
θ in
θ in : [Mechanical Angle Resolution [deg]] value
θ new : mechanical angle resolution after automatic adjustment (deg)
p : number of poles
R : mechanical angle calculation range (deg). For details, see “[Informa-
tion] Tab” on page 438.
* : smallest integer greater than or equal to a real number
When [Use auto angle resolution setting for saving time] is selected, no
physical quantity output under the [Output Port] tab can be set.
Use [Use auto angle resolution setting for saving time] when mesh includ-
ing the gap part in the FEM model is symmetric along the rotation axis. To
be specific, symmetricity for each mechanical angle equivalent to 1/6 elec-
tric periodic angle is necessary. Calculation accuracy will decrease when this
flag is used for an FEM model with non-symmetric mesh.
MEMO The [Use auto angle resolution setting for saving time] option
cannot be used for 6-phase motors.
[Mechanical Angle Reso- Specifies the rotor position data resolution.
lution (deg)] The spatial harmonic component orders that can be captured by a cre-
ated JMAG-RT model vary depending on the mechanical angle resolu-
tion. The relationship between the maximum order that can be
captured and the mechanical angle resolution is as follows:
Maximum mechanical angle resolution = 360/(number of pole pairs)/
((maximum order)/2)
For example, to capture the 24th-order torque ripple with an 8-pole
motor and a fundamental frequency with a period that is 1 electrical
angle period, it is necessary to specify a mechanical angle resolution of
7.5 deg or smaller.
360/(8/2)/(24/2)=7.5deg
454
[Torque]
Specifies the torque data point to be used when creating a JMAG-RT model.
3-phase motor and [Sine See the description for [Amplitude (A)] in [Inductance].
Wave Drive]:
[Amplitude (A)]
3-phase motor and
[Other]:
[Current (A)]
6-phase motor:
[Coil set1 current ampli-
tude (A)], [Coil set2 cur-
rent amplitude (A)]
3-phase motor: See the description for [Current Phase (deg)] in [Inductance].
[Current Phase (deg)]
6-phase motor:
[Coil set1 current phase
(deg)], [Coil set2 current
phase (deg)]
6-phase motor: See the description for [Current phase angle difference between coil sets
[Current phase angle dif- (deg)] in [Inductance].
ference between coil sets
(deg)]
[Use zero phase sequence See the description for [Use zero phase sequence current] in [Inductance].
current]
[Use auto angle resolu- See the description for [Use auto angle resolution setting for saving time] in
tion setting for saving [Inductance].
time]
[Mechanical Angle Reso- See the description for [Mechanical Angle Resolution (deg)] in [Induc-
lution (deg)] tance].
[Calculate Rotation This checkbox becomes active after selecting [Sine Wave Drive] for
Angle from the Number [Drive Type].
of Poles] • Selected:
The angle of one period of torque ripple is automatically calculated from
the number of poles. The equation is as follows:
360 1
θ mech = --------- × ---
pn 6
pn : number of pole pairs

When [Calculate Rotation Angle from the Number of Poles] is selected,
the [Periodic Angle of Torque [deg]] box is grayed out.
• Cleared:
The angle for one period of torque ripple is used.
455
JMAG-RT
[Periodic Angle of Torque When selecting [Sine Wave Drive] as [Drive Type], enter a mechanical
(deg)] angle corresponding to one period of torque ripple.
When selecting [Other] as [Drive Type], enter a mechanical angle corre-
sponding to one period of electrical angle.
For example, if the mechanical angle resolution is 1 degree and [Periodic
Angle of Torque (deg)] is “30”, computations are performed for 1 degree to
30 degrees for a total of 30 steps (one step per degree).
 [Iron Loss]
[Allow Iron Loss] • Cleared:
Iron loss is not accounted for in FEA for JMAG-RT model creation.
• Selected:
Iron loss is accounted for FEA for JMAG-RT model creation.
When a JMAG-RT model with iron loss data is used in a control circuit
simulation, the JMAG-RT model outputs the value after subtracting the
torque corresponding to the iron loss.
Afterwards, using JMAG-RT Viewer, select [Allow Iron Loss] when

drawing torque speed curves/efficiency maps that account for iron loss.
Note the following:
• Iron loss cannot be accounted for in the control circuit simulation
using PSIM.
• Iron loss output from the iron loss analysis solver is accounted for in a
control circuit simulation.
• To select [Allow Iron Loss], the Iron Loss condition should be set in
the input JCF file of JMAG-RT.
• If all of the following conditions apply, iron losses cannot be accounted
for in FEA for creating JMAG-RT models:
(1) a 3-phase motor is used
(2) the model is spatial harmonics
(3) [Drive Type] is [Other].
456
[Analysis Mode] When starting to create JMAG-RT models using magnetic field analysis
input files that are set with Iron Loss conditions, magnetic field analysis is
executed first. After magnetic field analysis has completed, iron loss analysis
is executed next.
The timing for when to obtain iron loss analysis solver licenses is specified
under [Analysis Mode]. Select either of the following:
• [High Speed Mode (Use Iron Loss License During Magnetic Field Anal-
ysis]:
Iron loss analysis solver licenses are also secured in addition to magnetic
field analysis solver licenses at the same time that magnetic field analysis
begins.
Iron loss analyses can start smoothly and without issue after magnetic
field analyses have completed. Iron loss analysis solver licenses that are
currently secured cannot be used with other jobs, however.
• [Conventional Mode (Use Iron Loss License After Magnetic Field Analy-
sis is Completed)]:
Once magnetic field analyses have completed, the process for obtaining
iron loss analysis solver licenses begins.
No loss in time occurs if there exists iron loss analysis solver licenses that
are not being used at the point where magnetic field analyses have com-
pleted. If there are no iron loss analysis solver licenses that are not being
used, however, then a waiting status will occur until iron loss analysis
solver licenses are released.
Default settings are those that were configured in the [Iron Loss condition]
setting panel of the [Study Properties] dialog when magnetic field analysis
input files were created.
457
JMAG-RT
[Rotate Velocity] Select the rotation speed resolution setting method to be used when creat-
ing a JMAG-RT model. The iron loss at each rotation speed specified is
output to a JMAG-RT model.
• [Simple Settings]:
Specifies the resolution automatically based on the value of maximum
rotation speed.
Enter the value in [Maximum Revolution Speed (rpm)].
The model calculation process will use speed increments fifth part of the
maximum revolution speed. For example, when the [Maximum Revolu-
tion Speed (rpm)] is set to 3600rpm, the model creation process will use
revolution speed of 720, 1440, 2160, 2880 and 3600.
• [Advanced Settings]:
Uses the specified resolution.
Click [Point Sequence] to open the [Point Sequence] dialog and specify a
table for the revolution speeds.
Note the following:

• Circuit simulators refer to the iron loss table using an absolute value of
the revolution speed hence setting negative value as the revolution speed
is allowed.
But it is assumed that the iron loss table is created for normal rotation
with positive speed, so that it may not match the value which is correct
physically.
• Revolution speed used in iron loss analyses run for iron loss data of the
RTT file will be the revolution speed value specified in [Simple Settings]
or [Advanced Settings] that is closest to zero.
Results of other revolution speeds will be interpolated within the pro-
gram based on the results of the revolution speed closest to zero and out-
put as an RTT file.
 [Parallel Computing]
To use the parallel computing function in magnetic field analysis in JMAG-RT, set the following
parameters:
MEMO The set values in the input JCF files are displayed as default values of each parameter.
MEMO When using the parallel computing function in iron loss calculation, [Parallel Computing (Par-
allel Setting is Set from the Parallel Tab)] should be selected in the input JCF file.
458
Parallel computing type Select from the following:
• [Do Not Use]
• [Shared memory Multiprocessing (SMP)]:
Parallelizes calculation processing on a per-thread basis. Parallel process-
ing is performed using a single node (machine).
• [Massive Parallel Processing (MPP)]:
Parallelizes calculation processing on a per-process basis. Parallel process-
ing is performed using single or multiple network-connected nodes
(machines).
For details on SMP and MPP, see the following pages:

• “Performing Large Scale Calculations Using Parallel Computing” in the
“Operations Edition”
• “Parallel Computing Settings” under “Study Properties of Magnetic Field
Analysis” in the “Parameter Explanation Edition”
[Degree of Parallelism] This parameter is active when [Shared memory Multiprocessing (SMP)]
is selected.
Specify the number of threads.
[Processes], [Thread], [Processes] and [Thread] are active when [Massive Parallel Processing
[Total Parallelism] (MPP)] is selected.
Specify the number of threads and number of processes. A value deter-
mined by [Processes] and [Threads] is displayed in [Total Parallelism].
[Use GPU] • Selected:
Use GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) installed in the machine for JMAG
calculation processing.
• Cleared:
Do not use GPU for JMAG calculation processing.
Check the following page for precautions when using GPUs:
• “Parallel Computing Settings” under “Study Properties of Magnetic Field
Analysis” in the “Parameter Explanation Edition”
 [Machine (Server)]
Specify the machine to run FEA for creating JMAG-RT models.
Type Description
[Local Execution] Runs JMAG-RT calculations using the current machine.
Enter the maximum number of solvers that can be run simultaneously in the
[Number of Processes]. The same number of solver licenses are used as solvers
running simultaneously.
459
JMAG-RT
Type Description
[Use Distributed Cal- Runs JMAG-RT calculations using machines on the same network as the cur-
culation] rent machine.
MEMO When using a remote machine to run JMAG-RT calculations, either
of the following settings are required:
• Prepare the JMAG-RemoteSystem execution environment and register the
host name or host ID of the JMAG-RemoteSystem job scheduler server
machine on the local machine.
• Register the remote machine or commercial job scheduler system to JMAG-
Designer on the local machine. Registration can be done in the JMAG-
Designer [Preferences] dialog [SSH/Execution Script Settings] setting
panel.
 [CPU Group Name]

When [Use Distributed Calculation] is selected in [Machine (Server)], select one of the pre-added
remote machines.
MEMO The remote machine can be added in the [SSH/ Execution Script Settings] setting panel of the
[Preferences] dialog in JMAG-Designer. Some of the types in the table below are the choices displayed in
[Remote Batch System] of the [SSH/ Execution Script Settings] dialog in JMAG-Designer.
Type Description
JMAG-RemoteSystem Uses JMAG-RemoteSystem to run the job.
(Host name or host ID of JMAG-RemoteSystem is displayed in the [Machine (Server)] list with
the server) the host name or host ID specified in the [Host Setting] dialog.
Create the following settings:
• [CPU Group]:
Select one CPU node group to use for the job.
For JMAG-RemoteSystem, see the description in the “JMAG Installation
Manual”.
Remote machine ([Cus- Runs the job on the [Custom Script] remote machine set in the [SSH/
tom Script]) Execution Script Settings] dialog.
Remote machine ([Run Runs the job on the [Run Directly] remote machine set in the [SSH/
Directly]) Execution Script Settings] dialog.
460
Type Description
PBS/Torque, LSF, Slurm Uses [PBS/Torque], [LSF], or [Slurm] set in the [SSH/ Execution Script
Settings] dialog to run the job.
Create the following settings:
• [Num Nodes]:
Maximum number of nodes that can be used for the job. This can be
changed when the later described [Manage Jobs Using JMAG Job Sys-
tem] is selected.
• [Cores per node]:
The maximum number of CPU cores that can be used for the job on
each node. This can be changed when the later described [Manage Jobs
Using JMAG Job System] is selected.
• [Queue], [Resource], [Option]:
Depending on the type of job scheduler system, different text boxes are
displayed. The default values specified in the [SSH/ Execution Script
Settings] dialog are entered in each text box. Change the values as
needed.
[File export for JMAG Selecting this option and clicking [Export] will export the parameters set in
JobSystem execution] the dialog to a JobSystem execution job file (.xml).
The JobSystem execution job files can be used as input files for executing
analysis in batch using the JMAG Job System from the command line.
Note the following:

• When this option is selected, the [OK] button is replaced by the [Export]
button.
• With this option, some parameters, such as the host file, cannot be set.
These parameters should be specified in the execution shell when run-
ning analysis in batch from the command line.
• When using this option, use a JCF file exported from JMAG-Designer
Version 22.2 or later.
• For details on running analysis from the command line using JMAG Job-
System, refer to the “Operations Edition”.
The following options may be used:
[Managing Jobs The JMAG Job System is a batch management function for multi-case calculation
Using JMAG Job and is provided for use when running high-performance computing (HPC).
System] (Massive • Cleared (default):
Job Runner Func- JMAG Job System is not used.
tion)
461
JMAG-RT
• Selected:
JMAG Job System is used.
Note the following:
• If [Manage Jobs using JMAG Job System] is selected, the [Execute grouped
jobs together] settings in the [SSH/Execution Script Settings] dialog is
ignored.
• When using the JMAG Job System, the massively parallel processing (MPP)
function and hybrid parallel processing function cannot be used.
• The specified number of nodes and the maximum number of cores are set in
the job scheduler system using the following options:
PBS: -l option
LSF: -n and -R option
Slurm: --ntasks option and --cpus-per-task option
For more details on the JMAG Job System, see “Operations Edition”.
 [Hosts File]
[Hosts File] Specify the MPP hosts file (.txt) when running a job that uses the massively
parallel processing (MPP) function. An MPP hosts file is a user created file that
defines the name (or IP address) of the node used for calculation and the max-
imum number of running processes for the node.
When the [Run Directly] or [Custom Script] remote machine is selected in
[Machine (Server)] and [Manage Jobs using JMAG Job System] is selected,
specify any hosts file (.txt). A hosts file is a user created file that defines the
name (or IP address) of the node used for calculation and the maximum num-
ber of cores for the node.
Hosts file
If a hosts file is not specified, the default hosts file (hosts.txt) is used. If a
default hosts file is not found, all cores of the current machine are used in the
calculation.
For more details on the format of the MPP hosts file and hosts file, see “Oper-
ations Edition”.
462
 [License (LM-X)]
[Reservation Key] Enter the reservation key of the license to be used for calculation.
By reserving licenses, you can run jobs without waiting for an available
license, even if multiple jobs are submitted to the calculation machine.
Pre-set the reservation key with the JMAG License Center.
The reservation key has an expiration date. The reserved license cannot be
used for jobs without a reservation key during this period.
[Use Power Simulation LM-X power simulation licenses (PSLs) are licenses dedicated to multi-case
License] calculations. 100 jobs can be run simultaneously with one license.
• Cleared (default):
Regular license is used.
• Selected:
PSL is used to run simultaneous multiple-case calculations.
[Manage License in Job This checkbox is activated when [Manage Jobs using JMAG Job System] is
System] selected. The JMAG Job System not only manages batch jobs, but also
controls the number of LM-X licenses used.
• Cleared (default):
The same number of licenses at most is used for the job as the number of
cores that can be used on each computation node.
• Selected:
Depending on the number of calculation cases, the JMAG Job System
controls the number of licenses used.
Note the following:
• If you want to use regular licenses with PSL, use the environment vari-
able JMAG_PSL_CONTROL_XX to enable the use of both licenses.
 [Calculation Mode]
Select one of the following modes when recalculating input data that has already been calculated.
MEMO To add new result data to an existing RTT file, or to replace some result data in an existing RTT
file, use the recalculation function. For details on the recalculation function, see “Adding, or Partially
Replacing with, New Results Data in a JMAG-RT Model (Recalculation to Improve Accuracy)” on
page 345.
463
JMAG-RT
Type Description
[Recalculate Only Failed Recalculates only cases that failed in the previous calculation.
Cases] JMAG-RT will not be able to output an RTT file unless multiple cases
have been calculated and all their cases have been completed successfully.
When this is selected, only failed cases are redone, conserving calculation
time.
In addition, the following parameter changes can be reflected in the RTT
file created in the previous calculation. To change any other parameters,
select [Redo All Calculations].
• [Connection Pattern] in [Configuration of FEM Coil] under the [Cre-
ate] tab
• [Resistance] in [Configuration of FEM Coil] under the [Create] tab
• All parameters included in [Equation of Motion (PSIM only)] under the
[Motion] tab
• All parameters under the [Information] tab
• All parameters under the [RT Correction] tab
When selecting [Recalculate Only Failed Cases], the run folder where the
FEA result file is output must remain unchanged. The run folder is created
in [Folder] under the [Information] tab.
[Redo All Calculations] Redo all calculation cases from the beginning.
 [Do Not Output Distribution to Result File]

• Selected:
In FEA, the [Control of Distribution] settings in the input JCF file are not used. In this case, any
data that is not used to create the JMAG-RT model is not output to the JPLOT file.
• Cleared:
In FEA, the [Control of Distribution] settings in the input JCF file are used. In this case, the size
of the JPLOT file will increase, taxing the capacity of the hard disk.
 [Do not leave result files]

• Selected:
After the FEA for all cases for JMAG-RT model creation is completed, the exported JPLOT file
is deleted.
• Cleared:
Even if FEA for all cases for JMAG-RT model creation is completed, the exported JPLOT file
remains.
 [Delete result file] button

[Delete result file] becomes active when modifying the JMAG-RT model.
If an RTT file has already been created, clicking this button deletes the JPLOT files that were
exported during FEA calculation, run by JMAG-RT.
 [Export] button
[Export] is displayed when [File export for JMAG JobSystem execution] is selected under [CPU
Group Name].
Using [Export], JobSystem execution job files (.xml) can be exported to run analysis in batch from
the command line using the JMAG JobSystem.
464
Click [Export] to display the [Set up] dialog. Specify the destination of the export file and click
[OK].
Note the following:
• For FEA calculation run by JMAG-RT, the following files are exported with the JobSystem exe-
cution job file.
• JCF file:
When recalculation is run to improve accuracy, the JCF file is exported if the input JCF file is
changed from the previous calculation.
• JMAG-RT configuration file (rtmotor.xml):
This file contains the parameters and their values set in the JMAG-RT library manager.
• run folder
• RTT file:
This file is exported when [Recalculate Only Failed Cases] is selected in [Calculation
Mode] or when recalculation to improve accuracy are run. This file contains the FEA
results before recalculation, and the FEA results are added to this file when the recalcula-
tion is run.
• JCF list file for JMAG-RT (jcffiles.xml):
This file is exported when [Recalculate Only Failed Cases] is selected in [Calculation
Mode] or when recalculation to improve accuracy is run. This file contains information
on the input JCF files for the calculation cases run by JMAG-RT.
These files are used with the JobSystem execution job files. Do not change the names of exported
files and folders, nor the folder structure.
465
JMAG-RT
[Output Port] Tab (Spatial Harmonic Model)

Any physical quantity for rotational angle dependency and current dependency can be added to a
JMAG-RT model to reference it during a control circuit simulation.
Use the set and coordinate system that is set in JMAG-Designer.
Note the following:
• When making the following settings on the [Create] tab, the output port can not be set. Before
setting the output port, clear these checkboxes.
• When [Use auto angle resolution setting for saving time] is selected.
• When [Use phase symmetry] is selected.
• If all the following conditions are satisfied, the output port function cannot be used.
• [Use half electrical angle periodicity] is selected in the [Create] tab.
• [Calculation] is [Maximum] or [Minimum]
• [Component] is not [Absolute].
• Two or more target set types (node, element, element edge, element face)
 Output Port List

Button Description
[Add Port] Adds a new output port to the list.
[Delete Port] Deletes the selected output port from the list.
466
 Output Port Properties

Perform settings on the properties of the output port selected in the list.
[Title] Specifies the title of the output port.
[Target set] Specifies which physical quantities in the set that are set in the JCF file to
output. Click . And select the checkboxes for the sets to be output in the
[Select] dialog.
The physical quantity to be output must be all the same type (nodes, ele-
ments, element edges, element faces) for a set in a single output port.
For details on set creation methods, see “JMAG User's Manual Operations
Edition”.
[Type] under [Type] Select the type of physical quantity to be output. The following physical
quantities can be selected.
[Magnetic Flux Density], [Magnetic Field Strength], [Magnetization],
[Current Density], [Joule Loss Density], [Lorentz Force Density],
[Nodal Force]
Each physical quantity has current and rotational angle dependencies
for the following values depending on the [Drive Type] settings.
• When [Drive type] is [Sine Wave Drive], each physical quantity has
dependency on current amplitude (A), current phase (deg), mechan-
ical angle (deg).
• When [Drive type] is [Other], each physical quantity has depen-
dency on current (lu, lv, lw) (A) and mechanical angle (deg).
[Coordinate System] Select which coordinate system should be used to output the physical
under [Type] quantities. The following items are displayed as the model coordinate sys-
tem.
[Global Rectangular], [Cylindrical], [Local Rectangular (Y-Z-X)], [Local
Rectangular (Z-X-Y)]
Any coordinate system set in a JCF file can be referenced.
In scalar type physical quantities (Joule loss density), a coordinate system
cannot be selected.
[Component] under Specifies the physical quantity component.
[Type] For rectangular coordinate system, you can select from [Absolute value],
[X], [Y], and [Z].
For cylindrical coordinate system, you can select from [Absolute value],
[R], [θ], and [Z].
In scalar type physical quantities (Joule loss density), component cannot be
selected.
[Calculation] under Select the type of value to be output.
[Type] [Minimum], [Maximum], [Average], [Integral], [Summation]
When [Integral] is selected in [Calculation], [Coordinate System] and
[Component] cannot be set. However, for part sets, [Component] must be
set even when [Integral] is selected.
MEMO The combinations of calculation methods for each set (mesh group) type are as follows:
467
JMAG-RT
Minimum value,
Set type/calculation method maximum value, Total Integral
simple average
Vertex, node   -
Part, element   
Edge, element edge -  
Face, element face -  
 [Reference Resolution]
The resolution of output physical quantities is determined from the settings on the [Create] tab.
Select [Refer inductance setting] or [Refer torque setting].
[Motion] Tab
 [Equation of Motion (PSIM only)]

Specifies the moment of inertia and time constant for a JMAG-RT model to use in the PSIM con-
trol/circuit simulator. These values are used as default values in the PM Synchronous Machine (RT)
block.
The JMAG-RT model created for Simulink contains these values, but the settings cannot be used in
Simulink. These parameters need to be specified again in Simulink.
A correction factor can be applied to the moment of inertia. The correction factor is as follows:
J = coef_inertia 1 ⋅ J 0 + coef_inertia 2
dω
J ------- = T – T load – B ⋅ ω
dt
J
B = -------------
τ mech
J : inertia moment (kgm2)
coef_inertia1 : inertia moment correction factor
J 0 : inertia moment of motion region (kgm2)
coef_inertia2 : moment of inertia correction value (kgm2)
dω
------- : rotational acceleration (deg/s) or angular acceleration
dt
T : torque (Nm)
T load : load torque (Nm)
B : attenuation constant (Nm/ (deg/s))
ω : revolution speed (deg/s) or angular velocity
τ mech : time constant (s)
468
[Inertia Moment J 0 The value specified for [Inertia J 1 ] in the [Define Equation of Motion]
(kgm2)] dialog for JMAG-Designer is displayed by default.
[Inertia Moment Correc- The value specified for [Inertia Coefficient, p] in the [Define Equation of
tion Coefficient Motion] dialog for JMAG-Designer is displayed by default.
coef_inertia 1 ]
[Inertia Moment Correc- The value specified for [Correction Value J 2 ] in the [Define Equation of
tion Coefficient Motion] dialog for JMAG-Designer is displayed by default.
coef_inertia 2 ]
[Time Constant τ mech (s)] -
[RT Correction] Tab

The correction factor can be specified for each parameter exported to the RTT file.
MEMO A RTT file describes the FEA result data and the correction factor specified on the [Correction]
tab separately. The correction factor specified on the [Correction] tab does not update the FEA result
data described in the RTT file.
MEMO The specified correction factors are cleared and default values are used to re-create a JMAG-RT
model.
 [Temperature Correction]
Specify the base temperature and correction factor for the magnet and the coil appeared in the below
equation.
Correction equation for magnet
k
F′ = F  1 + --------- ( Tf now – Tf base )
100
F′ : magnetic flux after correction (Wb)
F : magnetic flux before correction (Wb)
k : temperature correction factor of magnet (%/K)
The range of the coefficient is -100.0 - 0.0 (negative). Default: -0.11%/K

Tf now : magnet temperature during motor drive (temperature during analysis) (K)
Tf base : base temperature for magnet (K)
469
JMAG-RT
Correction equation for coil
R′ = R ( 1 + α ( Tr now – Tr base ) )
R' : resistance after correction (ohm)
R : resistance before correction (ohm)
α : temperature correction factor of coil (ppm/K)
The range of the coefficient is 0.0 and over. Default value is 3810 ppm/K.
Tr now : coil temperature during motor drive (temperature during analysis) (K)
Tr base : base temperature of coil (K). Default: 293.15K
Notes
• Magnet flux-linkage which decreases with temperature fluctuations is accounted for during a
torque calculation.
• The correction factors specified in the [RT Correction] tab can be used in the control circuit
simulation using Simulink.
If nothing is connected to the input ports [Coil Temp] and [Magnet Temp] of the JMAG-RT
model block, the simulation assumes that the temperature of the magnets and coils of the motor
being driven is 0 K. Clear [Use_Temperature_Correction] in the properties of the JMAG-RT
model block when not performing temperature correction.
• The temperature correction function cannot be used in the circuit simulation using PSIM.
• The correction factor specified in the [RT Correction] tab is displayed as the default value of the
temperature correction setting of JMAG-RT Viewer.
• Temperature correction settings magnets cannot be used when synchronous reluctance motors
and the FEM models of input JCF files do not possess magnets.
 [Direct Correction], [Complex Correction], [Reference Correction]

K6 2
Correction equation for inductance: L new = K 1 × K 5 ×  ------ × L ( I new )
 n
Correction equation for magnetic flux:
K6
Ψ
• Spatial Harmonic Model: new = K 2 × K 4 × K 5
× -----
- × Ψ ( I new )
n
K6
• LdLq model: Ψ new = K 2 × K 4 × K 5 × ------ × Ψ
n
Correction equation for torque: T new = K 3 × K pa3 ( I ) × K 5 × T ( I new )
Correction equation for AC loss:

W acnew = K 6 × W ac
470
K
7
Correction equation for current: I new = ------ × I
n
L new : inductance after correction (H)
L : inductance before correction (H)
Ψ new : magnetic flux after correction (Wb)
Ψ : magnetic flux before correction (Wb)
T new : torque after correction (Nm)
T : torque before correction (Nm)
W acnew : AC loss after correction (Ohm)
W ac : AC loss before correction (Ohm)
I new : reference current value after correction (A)
* Used when referring to the inductance and torque.

I : reference current value before correction (A)
n : number of turns (turn)
Specify the following correction factors based on the equations above.
[Direct Correction]
Inductance (coef_inductance) K 1 The default is 1.
Flux Linkage in Magnet (coef_flux) K 2 The default is 1.

MEMO Correction settings for magnet magnetic flux can-
not be used when synchronous reluctance motors and the
FEM models of input JCF files do not possess magnets.
Torque Correction (coef_torque) K 3 The default is 1.
471
JMAG-RT
Current-Dependent Torque Table (coef- The current dependent table is used to correct values accord-
table_torque) K pa3 ing to the current amplitude.
If you select [Use Current-Dependent Table for Torque Cor-
rection (coeftable_torque_flag)], the [Point Sequence] but-
ton becomes active. Click [Point Sequence] to open the
[Current-Dependent Torque Point Sequence] dialog and
specify a current-dependent correction table.
The following should be noted when the current dependent
table is used.
• If the current exceeds the specified range when using the
JMAG-RT model in a control/circuit simulator, the induc-
tance and torque values obtained at the maximum and
minimum currents are applied instead of extrapolating.
• The correction table data is exported to a table file (.pa) in
addition to the RTT file when the JMAG-RT model is
copied to a control/circuit simulator. The same file name
as the RTT file is used for this table file.
The name of the table file is used in the RTT file and can-
not be changed. Furthermore, the RTT file and table file
need to be stored in the same directory.
AC losses correction K 6 The default is 1.
For details on AC copper loss parameters, see “[Winding
Conductor] Tab” on page 473.
[Complex Correction]
Magnet (coef_magnet) K 4 Magnet grade. The default is 1.
MEMO Grade correction settings for magnets cannot be
used when synchronous reluctance motors and the FEM
models of in-put JCF files do not possess magnets.
Steel Sheet (coef_material) K 5 Steel sheet grade. The default is 1.
FEM Coil Number of Turns Correction C1 = K6 ⁄ n
Factor C 1
K 6 : FEM coil number of turns correction value (Turn)
(turns_coil1)
[Reference Correction]
FEM Coil Number of Turns Correction C2 = K7 ⁄ n
Factor (Current Reference) C 2
K 7 : FEM coil number of turns correction value (current ref-
erence) (Turn) (turns_coil2)
472
Notes
• The result for the control circuit simulation based on the numerical solution for JMAG-RT may
be unstable, when the equation K 1 × K 5 × ( K 6 ⁄ n ) 2 for inductance correction is less than 1.
• To use the correction factor specified in the [RT Correction] tab in control circuit simulation
using Simulink, clear [Set Coefficients Manually] in the RT block properties.
• In the control circuit simulation using PSIM, the value specified in the [RT Correction] tab is
displayed as the default value of the correction factor in the RT block properties.
• The correction factor specified in the [RT Correction] tab is not taken into consideration when
calculating the NT curve or efficiency map in JMAG-RT Viewer.
[Winding Conductor] Tab
 [Winding Conductor (AC Losses)]

During control circuit simulations, approximately calculated AC copper loss can be accounted for
based on the specifications of the conductor wire. Specifications for conductor wire used in calculat-
ing AC copper loss can be entered with [Winding Conductor (AC Losses)].
Notes
• [Winding Conductor (AC Losses)] settings are optional.
• [Winding Conductor (AC Losses)] input parameter values cannot be used in FEM analysis
for creating JMAG-RT models.
• Specifications for conductor wire can be entered even in JMAG-Designer and control circuit
simulators.
• When using JMAG-Designer and Simulink as control/circuit simulators, AC copper loss can be
accounted for in JMAG-RT models. AC copper loss cannot be accounted for when using PSIM
or user-defined C programming languages.
• To not publish the [Winding Conductor (AC Losses)] information given to a JMAG-RT model
for the users of that JMAG-RT model, clear [Publish] for [Winding Conductor] in the [Informa-
tion] tab.
• The following settings are not included in the specifications of the conductor wire that are speci-
fied here.
• Conductor series/parallel information.
During control circuit simulations, AC copper loss is calculated assuming that conductors are
connected in series.
• Coil ends:
To account for coil end AC copper loss, enter parameters ([AC Loss], etc.) used for correc-
tions in JMAG-Designer and control circuit simulators.
• The two following types of methods are available for accounting for AC copper loss for JMAG-
RT models.
• Method specifying conductor wire specifications and approximately calculating AC copper
loss in JMAG-RT models during control circuit simulations:
This is the method that is described in this section.
• Method giving harmonic equivalent copper loss resistance data loaded from CSV files to
JMAG-RT models.
For details on this method, see “Adding Loss Data to a JMAG-RT Model” on page 365.
473
JMAG-RT
Parameters
• [Conductors in Slot Height (zs)]
• [Conductors in Slot Width (zw)]
• [Number Of Slots Per Phase]
• [Averaged Slot Width (ws) [m]]
• [Conductor Type]:
Select either [Rectangular] or [Round].
• Cross-section dimensions:
Specify [Conductor Height (hc) [m]] and [Conductor Width (wc) [m]] when [Rectangular] is
selected.
Specify [Conductor Diameter (hc) [m]] when [Round] is selected.
• [Core Stack Length [m]]
• [Conductivity [S/m]]
Slot cross-sections
474
Stepping Motor
• Notes on Using the Stepping Motor Type (page 475)
Notes on Using the Stepping Motor Type

• 2-phase motor is supported.
• Inductance is calculated using the following formula:
L = ( φ –φI = 0) ⁄I
L : inductance (H)
I : current (A)
φ : flux linkage (Wb)

 Analysis type
• Four FEM Coil conditions, [A-phase], [A-phase (-)], [B-phase], and [B-phase (-)] need to be
specified for a 2-phase unipolar stepping motor.
Specify the current inflow faces as indicated below for a partial model.
A-phase (-) A-phase
B-phase (-) B-phase
: Periodic boundary face
1/6 partial unipolar stepping motor model (60 degrees)
JMAG-RT.
• Set a Torque condition. It does not matter which calculation method (nodal force, Lorentz force,
or surface force) in the Torque condition is used.
If multiple Torque conditions are set in a JCF file, the Torque condition displayed at the top of
the JMAG-Designer [Project Manager] tree is used.
475
JMAG-RT
 Meshing
Mesh], or [Generate Mesh at Each Step] is done in the [Mesh Properties] dialog:
• [Slide Mesh]:
erate mesh.
 Other notes
• JMAG RT cannot perform calculations that account for eddy currents. Even if [Allow Eddy Cur-
rent] or [Calculate Distribution in Steel Plate] is selected from the [Eddy Currents] list in the
time.
476

This section describes how to specify the settings in the JMAG-RT Library Manager.
[Information] Tab
Item Description
The characters entered in [Title] are displayed in the [Model
Name] column in the [RT Model Library] table in the
[File Name], [Motor Type], [Creation These items are automatically entered by JMAG-RT.
Data], [JMAG Version], [RTT File Ver-
sion]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
[Weight (kg)], [Shaft Length (m)], Enter these items arbitrarily.
[External Diameter (m)], [Moment of Values entered here are not used for calculation to create a
Inertia (kgm2)], [Rated Speed (rpm)], JMAG-RT model.
[Rated Power (kW)], [Rated Current
(A)], [Rated Voltage (V)]
[Number of Poles], [Number of Turns] These items are automatically entered after completion of
calculation for JMAG-RT model creation.
This item is automatically entered after completion of calcu-
lation for JMAG-RT model creation.
477
JMAG-RT
 [Comment]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
 [Resolution]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
[Flux Resolution], [Inductance Reso- Each item is automatically entered after completion of cal-
lution], [Torque Resolution] culation for JMAG-RT model creation.
 [Folder]
model data.
[Create] Tab
The parameters for the FEA required to create a JMAG-RT model are specified in the [Create] tab.

[A-Phase], [-A-Phase], [B- Each lists displays the FEM Coil conditions set in the FEM model.
Phase], [-B-phase] Specify the condition is associated with each phase.
[Number of Turns] Specifies the number of coil turns for each phase.
478
[Resistance (ohm)] Specifies the resistance value of the coil.
When performing circuit calculations using JMAG-Designer or PSIM, the
value specified here is used as the default value.
When performing circuit calculations using Simulink, the value specified
here is not used.
 [Current]
Specifies the excitation method and the current range during energization.
[Excitation Type] Select the type of excitation from the following types.
• [One-Phase Excitation]
• [One-Two Phase Excitation]
• [Two-Phase Excitation]
[Current Range (A)] Specifies the maximum instantaneous value of the current assumed for the
motor when being driven.
The minimum value is set at 0 A. The torque characteristics are obtained
based on the range between the minimum value and maximum value.
Be sure to enter a maximum value so that out-of-range current values are
not referenced during control circuit simulation.
[Current Range (A)] is not available if the [Enable the Setting of Resolu-
tion] is selected.
 [Enable the Setting of Resolution]

Reduces the scale of the model or calculation time. by lowering the resolution for the linear range
for a JMAG-RT model because the values within the linear range are interpolated. Whereas, you can
improve the calculation accuracy by raising the resolution for the nonlinear range.
Select the [Enable the Setting of Resolution], and then click [Resolution] to specify the resolution.
Specify the following settings in the [Resolution] dialog.
[Inductance] in the [Resolution] dialog

In order to obtain the current dependent inductance characteristics, specify the rotational angle res-
olution and the current value.
[Number of Rotation Specifies the number of divisions for the rotational angle for one electrical
Angle] period.
[Current at Load (A)] Specifies the current resolution with a table. The table must cover the cur-
rent range expected in the drive circuit (Example: 2, 3, 5, 8, 10).
Click [Point Sequence] to open the [Current Point Sequence] dialog, and
create a table.
JMAG-RT uses the table to calculate the inductance when current flows
only in phase A, and to calculate the inductance when current flows only in
phase B.
This does not depend on the excitation method.
479
JMAG-RT
[Torque] in the [Resolution] dialog

In order to obtain torque characteristics, specify the rotational angle and the current value.
[Rotation Angle (deg)] Specifies the rotational angle for one electrical period.
[Division of Rotation Specifies the number of divisions for the rotational angle for one electrical
Angle] period.
[Current at Load (A)] Specifies the current resolution with a table. The table must cover the cur-
rent range expected in the drive circuit (Example: 2, 3, 5, 8, 10).
Click [Point Sequence] to open the [Current Point Sequence] dialog, and
create a table.
Use absolute values.

Specifies the moment of inertia and the time constant for a JMAG-RT model if PSIM is used as a
control/circuit simulator. These settings are used as the default values in the Step Machine (RT)
block.
The JMAG-RT model created for Simulink also contains these settings, but they are not used in
Simulink. These settings need to be specified again in Simulink.
A correction factor can be applied to the moment of inertia. The correction factor is defined as fol-
lows:
J = coef_inertia 1 ⋅ J 0 + coef_inertia 2
dω
J ------- = T – T load – B ⋅ ω
dt
J
B = -------------
τ mech
J : inertia moment (kgm2)
coef_inertia1 : inertia moment correction factor
J 0 : inertia moment of motion region (kgm2)
coef_inertia2 : moment of inertia correction value (kgm2)
dω
------- : rotational acceleration (deg/s) or angular acceleration
dt
T : torque (Nm)
T load : load torque (Nm)
B : attenuation constant (Nm/ (deg/s))
ω : revolution speed (deg/s) or angular velocity
[Inertia Moment J0 The value specified for [Inertia J1] in the [Define Equation of Motion] dia-
(kgm2)] log of JMAG-Designer is displayed by default.
480
[Correction for Inertia The value specified for [Inertia Coefficient p] in the [Define Equation of
Moment coef_inertia1 ] Motion] dialog for JMAG-Designer is displayed by default.
[Correction for Inertia The value specified for [Inertia Offset J2] in the [Define Equation of
Moment coef_inertia2 ] Motion] dialog for JMAG-Designer is displayed by default.
[Time Constant τ mech -

(s)]
 [Parallel Computing], [Machine (Server)], [CPU Group Name], [Hosts File], [License
(LM-X)]
These are all common settings for motors. See the description on PM synchronous motors on page
443.
Select one of the following modes when recalculating input data that has already been calculated:
page 345.
Type Description
time.
ate] tab
[Motion] tab
 [Do Not Output Distribution to Result File], [Do not leave result files], [Delete result
file], [Delete result file] button, [Export] button
443.
481
JMAG-RT
[RT Correction] Tab

MEMO The correction factors can also be specified in a control/circuit simulator.
model.
equation.
Correction equation for magnet:
k
F ′ = F  1 + --------- ( Tf now – Tf base )
 100 
F ' : magnetic flux after correction (Wb)
K : temperature correction factor of magnet (%/K)

Correction equation for coil:
R ′ = R ( 1 + α ( Tr now – Tr base ) )
Notes
torque calculation.
If nothing is connected to the input ports [coil Temp] and [magTemp] of the JMAG-RT model
block, the simulation assumes that the temperature of the magnets and coils of the motor being
driven is 0 K. Clear [Use_Temperature_Correction] in the properties of the JMAG-RT model
block when not performing temperature correction.
482
Linear Solenoid

 Analysis type
• Set an FEM Coil condition.
• Set a Translation Motion condition. Can be used only for translational motion in one direction.
In addition, the initial position specified in the Translation Motion condition is the reference
position of the motion range specified in the JMAG-RT Library Manager.
• Set an Electromagnetic Force condition. It does not matter which calculation method (nodal
force, Lorentz force, or surface force) in the Electromagnetic Force condition is used.
If multiple Electromagnetic Force conditions are set in a JCF file, the Electromagnetic Force con-
dition displayed at the top of the JMAG-Designer [Project Manager] tree is used.
 Meshing
• [Slide Mesh]:
The Slide condition is automatically set when the Translation Slide Mesh option is used to
generate mesh.
483
JMAG-RT

The output of selected physical quantity is set on JMAG-RT [Output Port] tab. See “[Output
Port] Tab” on page 490.
 Other notes
time.
484

• [Output Port] Tab (page 490)
[Information] Tab
Item Description
sion]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
[Weight (kg)], [Rated Speed (m/s)], Enter these items arbitrarily.
[Rated Power (kW)], [Rated Current Values entered here are not used for calculation to create a
(A)], [Rated Voltage (V)] JMAG-RT model.
[Resistance (ohm)] Phase resistance
This item is automatically entered after completion of cal-
[Number of Turns] This item is automatically entered after completion of cal-
485
JMAG-RT
 [Comment]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
 [Resolution]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
[Flux Resolution], [Inductance Resolu- Each item is automatically entered after completion of calcu-
tion], [Electro magnetic Resolution] lation for JMAG-RT model creation.
 [Folder]
model data.
486
[Create] Tab

[FEM Coil] Displays the FEM Coil conditions set in the input file (.jcf ).
[Number of Turns] Specifies the number of turns for the coil.
here is not used.
 [Upper Limit (m)] and [Lower Limit (m)] under [Motion Range]
Specifies the movable range of the mover. The initial position specified in the Translation Motion
condition becomes the reference position (position where the moving distance is zero).
Processing when a value outside the movable range is input to the JMAG-RT model differs depend-
ing on the circuit simulator used.
• For Simulink:
A value within the movable range specified here is output from the JMAG_RT model block out-
put port “disp”. When a value that exceeds the upper limit value is input, the upper limit value
specified is output from the output port “disp”. However, the user can change to a different pro-
cessing by modifying the JMAG_RT model block.
• For a C language program:
Processed by the program.
• For other (SIL/HIL):
Processed according to each software implementation. Check the manual of the software used for
how to deal with motor system simulations.
The JMAG_RT model block itself does not use the movable range specified here.
 [Resolution (position)]
Specifies the resolution of the data for the mover.
The scale of the model or calculation time. can be reduced by lowering the resolution for the linear
range in JMAG-RT because the values within the linear range are interpolated. The accuracy of a
calculation can be improved by raising the resolution for the nonlinear range.
[Number of Divisions] By equally dividing the range specified in [Movable Range] by the specified
value, the number of data points for the position of the mover is deter-
mined.
[Use Point Sequence] Specifies the number of data points of mover position by table.
When selecting this checkbox, click [Point Sequence] to open the [Resolu-
tion (position) Point Array] dialog.
Specify the position of the mover within the movable range.
487
JMAG-RT
 [Resolution (current)]
Specifies the resolution of the data for the current flowing in the linear solenoid.
The scale of the model or calculation time. can be reduced for the JMAG-RT model by lowering the
resolution for the linear range because the values within the linear range are interpolated. The accu-
racy of the calculation can be improved by raising the resolution for the nonlinear range.
[Current Range (A)] Specifies the maximum current flowing through the linear solenoid.
[Number of Divisions] By equally dividing the range specified in [Current Range (A)] by the
specified value, the number of data points for the current is determined.
[Use Point Sequence] Specifies the number of data points of current by table.
When selecting this checkbox, click [Point Sequence] to open the [Resolu-
tion (current) Point Array] dialog.
Specify the current value within the current range.

Specifies the mass, time constant, and spring constant for the JMAG-RT model data if PSIM is used
as the control/circuit simulator. These settings are used as the default values in the Linear Solenoid
(RT) block.
The JMAG-RT model created for Simulink contains these values, but they are not used in Simulink.
These settings need to be specified again in Simulink.
A correction factor can be applied to the mass. The correction factor is defined as follows:
M = coef_mass 1 ⋅ M 0 + coef_mass 2
F = Mx·· + Bx· + Kx
M
B = -------------
τ mech
M : mass (kg)
coef_mass 1 : correction factor for mass
M 0 : mass of motion region (kg)
coef_mass 2 : correction value for mass (kg)
F : electromagnetic force (N)
B : attenuation constant (N/ (m/s))
K : spring constant (N/m). K is set on PSIM.

··
x : acceleration in the translation direction (m/s2)
x· : speed in the translation direction (m/s)
x : the stretch of the spring from the natural length (m)
488
[Mass M 0 (kg)] The value specified for [Mass M1] in the [Define Equation of Motion] dia-
log of JMAG-Designer is displayed by default.
[Mass Correction Coeffi- The value specified for [Mass Coefficient p] in the [Define Equation of
cient coef_mass1 ] Motion] dialog of JMAG-Designer is displayed by default.
[Mass Correction Coeffi- The value specified for [Mass M2] in the [Define Equation of Motion] dia-
cient coef_mass2 ] log of JMAG-Designer is displayed by default.
(s)]
(LM-X)]
443.
page 345.
Type Description
time.
ate] tab
[Motion] tab
443.
489
JMAG-RT
[Output Port] Tab

Any physical quantity for displacement dependency and current dependency can be added to a
• If all the following conditions are satisfied, the output port function cannot be used:

Button Description

output. Click the button. And select the checkboxes for the sets to be
output in the [Select] dialog.
Edition”.
[Nodal Force]
Each physical quantity has dependency on current amplitude (A), current
phase (deg), mechanical displacement (m).
tem.
cannot be selected.
490
[X], [Y], and [Z].
[R], [θ], and [Z].
selected.
Minimum value,
simple average
[RT Correction] Tab

model.
equation.
Correction equation for magnet
k
F ′ = F  1 + --------- ( Tf now – Tf base )
 100 
K : temperature correction factor of magnet (%/K)

Tf now : magnet temperature during solenoid drive (temperature during analysis) (K)
491
JMAG-RT
R′ = R ( 1 + α ( Tr now – Tr base ) )
The range of the coefficient is 0.0 and over. Default value is 3810 ppm/K
Tr now : coil temperature during solenoid drive (temperature during analysis) (K)
Notes
force calculation.
492
Linear Synchronous Motor


 Analysis type
• Set three FEM Coil conditions.
If the number of FEM Coil conditions specified is less than or more than 3 the JMAG-RT model
cannot be created. JMAG-RT performs calculations assuming that one FEM Coil condition cor-
responds to one phase coil.
When creating a JMAG-RT model based on an FEM model in which each phase coil consists of
multiple FEM coils, change the FEM Coil condition settings and circuit conversion settings in
JMAG-Designer. For details, see “When creating a JMAG-RT model based on an FEM model in
which each phase coil consists of multiple FEM coils” on page 432.
• Set the Translation Motion condition and select [Constant Speed] in [Displacement Type]. Even
if a different type is selected, [Constant Speed] is used in FEA with JMAG-RT.
• The initial position of the mover is the same as that of the FEM model.
• Set a Force condition. It does not matter which calculation method (nodal force, Lorentz force,
or surface force) in the Force condition is used.
If multiple Force conditions are set in a JCF file, the Force condition displayed at the top of the
JMAG-Designer [Project Manager] tree is used.
 Meshing
• [Slide Mesh]:
The Slide condition is automatically set when the Translation Slide Mesh option is used to
generate mesh.
493
JMAG-RT

 Other notes
time.

MEMO From JMAG-Designer Version 17.1 on there is no longer a [Motor Characteristics] tab. The
settings under the [Motor Characteristics] tab are inherited by the results data export function. See
“Exporting Results Data from a JMAG-RT Model to a File” on page 372.
494
[Information] Tab
Item Description
sion]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
[Weight (kg)], [Rated Speed (m/s)], Enter these items arbitrarily. Values entered here are not used
[Rated Power (kW)], [Rated Current for calculation to create a JMAG-RT model.
(A)], [Rated Voltage (V)]
[Displacement (m)] Displacement per period of electrical angle.
[Number of Turns] This item is automatically entered after completion of calcu-
 [Comment]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
495
JMAG-RT
 [Resolution]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
tion], [Electro magnetic Resolution] lation for JMAG-RT model creation.
 [Folder]
model data.
[Create] Tab
 [Displacement per Period of Electrical Angle (m)]

Specifies the displacement for one period of electrical angle.

[U-Phase], [V-Phase], [W- Each lists displays the FEM Coil conditions set in the input file (.jcf ).
Phase] Specify the condition is associated with each phase.
The JMAG-RT model motor moves in the positive direction and the phase
difference between the three phases is defined relative to the U-phase. The
V-phase is displaced by an electrical angle of -120 degrees and the W-phase
by +120 degrees.
[Number of Turns] Specifies the number of coil turns for each phase.
[Connection Pattern] Select either [Y-connection] or [Delta-connection].
The connection pattern selected here is used when performing control cir-
cuit simulation using PSIM.
When performing a control circuit simulation using Simulink, the connec-
tion pattern specified in the properties of the JMAG-RT model block is
used, not the connection pattern selected here.
496
[Resistance (Ohm)] Specifies the resistance value of the coil.
here is not used.
 [Drive Type]
[Drive type] defines a current waveform pattern that JMAG-RT models supports.
Select the type of current waveform for driving the motor in the circuit simulator according to
whether the motor has a sinusoidal or non-sinusoidal current waveform.
The time required for creating JMAG-RT model data varies with the current waveform pattern.
Type Description
[Sine Wave Drive] Select when it is guaranteed that the sum of the instantaneous current flow-
ing in each coil of the motor is zero.
When [Sine Wave Drive] is selected, FEA used for creating a JMAG-RT
model is performed in which parametric analysis on two variables - the cur-
rent spatial vector amplitude and phase - is performed.
Specify the following settings if [Sine Wave Drive] is selected.
• [Output Attraction Force]:
Outputs the force in the specified direction as an attractive force by
selecting [X], [Y], or [Z] under [Attraction Direction].
497
JMAG-RT
Type Description
• [Current Amplitude Range (A)]:
Specifies the maximum value of the phase current amplitude range for
creating a JMAG-RT model. The minimum value is set at 0 A.
Data points in the range from 0 A to the maximum value specified here
are created at equal intervals. Six data points are created.
Example: When the maximum value is 100 A
0, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100 (A)
In a control circuit simulation using a JMAG-RT model, when a current

phase exceeding the specified range is input, the current phase remainder
modulo the maximum value is used.
Example: When the maximum value in the JMAG-RT model is 180 deg
and the input current phase is 200 deg in the circuit simulator, the fol-
lowing input value is used.
F (θ): F (200) = F (180 + 20) = F (20)
F: loolup table value
θ: phase
• [Current Phase Range (deg)]:

Specifies the maximum value of the phase range of the phase current that
generates a JMAG-RT model. The minimum value is fixed at 0 degrees.
Data points in the range from 0 deg to the maximum value specified here
are created at equal intervals. 11 data points are created.
Example: When the maximum value is 360 deg
0, 36, 72, 108, 144, 180, 216, 252, 288, 324, 360
If [Enable the Setting of Resolution] is selected, these settings are not used.
[Other] Select when the sum of the instantaneous current flowing in each coil of
the motor is not guaranteed to be zero. For example, when the current flow
reverses in a delta connection.
When the [Other] type is selected, FEA used for creating a JMAG-RT
model is performed in which parametric analysis on three variables - Iu, Iv,
Iw, each a coil current - is performed.
Specify the following settings if [Other] is selected.
• [Output Attraction Force]:
Outputs the force in the specified direction as an attractive force by
selecting [X], [Y], or [Z] under [Attraction Direction].
• [Current Range at Load (Absolute Value) (A)]:
Enter the maximum value of the phase current amplitude range. The
minimum value is set at 0 A. The default value is 10 A.
If [Enable the Setting of Resolution] is selected, these settings are not used.
 [Enable the Setting of Resolution]

Reduces the scale of the model and calculation time.s by lowering the resolution for the linear ranges
in the JMAG-RT model used since the values in the linear ranges are interpolated. The calculation
accuracy can be improved by raising the resolution for the nonlinear ranges.
Select [Enable the Setting of Resolution], and then click [Resolution] to specify the resolution. Spec-
ify the following settings in the [Resolution] dialog.
498
[Inductance] in the [Resolution] dialog

To obtain the current dependent inductance characteristics, specify the displacement resolution and
the current value.
[Number of Displacement Specifies the number of divisions for one period of electrical angle.
Divisions]
[Current at Load (A)] Click [Point Sequence] to open the [Current Point Sequence] dialog and
create a point sequence of current values within the operating range (exam-
ple: 2, 3, 5, 8, 10).
• When [Sine Wave Drive] is selected for [Drive Type], enter the current
amplitude.
• When [Others] is selected for [Drive Type] and the control circuit simu-
lation using the RTT file to be created supplies the motor with AC tak-
ing positive and negative values such as sine wave and square wave, enter
the positive and negative values (e.g., -10, -5, -2, -1, 1, 2, 5, 10).
• 0 A cannot be added to the current point sequence in [Inductance].
Control circuit simulation
• If a current of 0 A is input to the JMAG-RT model, the JMAG-RT
model outputs the inductance and torque values obtained from the no-
load analysis that is run when creating the JMAG-RT model.
[Electromagnetic Force] in the [Resolution] dialog

To obtain electromagnetic force characteristics, specify the displacement and the current value.
[Use phase symmetry] This checkbox becomes active after selecting [Sine Wave Drive] for [Drive
Type].
• Selected:
Assumes that the magnetic flux, electromagnetic force, and inductance of
the motor have symmetry with respect to phase. FEA is performed only
within the phase range of -90 to +90 degrees of electrical angle. Based on
the results, FEA for the remaining phase range (+90 to +270 degrees) is
performed in post-processing.
reduced.
• Unselected:
FEA in the phase range of 0 to 360 degrees of electrical angle is per-
formed assuming that the magnetic flux, electromagnetic force, and
inductance of the motor have no symmetry with respect to phase.
[Displacement (m)] Specifies the displacement for one period of electromagnetic force when
[Sine Wave Drive] is selected for [Drive Type].
Specifies the displacement for one period of electrical angle when [Other]
is selected for [Drive Type].
The electromagnetic force is computed within the displacement range
specified for [Displacement].
499
JMAG-RT
[Number of Displacement Specifies the number of divisions for one period specified for [Displace-
Divisions] ment].
[Current at Load (A)] See the description of [Current at Load (A)] in [Inductance].
[Current Phase at Load This parameter becomes active after selecting [Sine Wave Drive] for [Drive
(deg)] Type].
Click [Point Sequence] to open the [Current Phase Point Sequence] dialog,
and then specify a current phase table.
• When [Use phase symmetry] is selected, specify current phases between -
90 and +90 degrees of electrical angle inclusive.
• When [Use phase symmetry] is cleared, specify current phases between 0
and 360 degrees of electrical angle inclusive.

Specifies the mass and the time constant for a JMAG-RT model if PSIM is used as a control/circuit
simulator. These values are used as the default values in the Linear Synchronous Machine (RT)
block.
The JMAG-RT model created for Simulink also contains these settings, but they are not used in
Simulink. These parameters need to be specified again in Simulink.
A correction factor can be applied to the mass. The correction factor is defined as follows:
M = coef_mass 1 ⋅ M 0 + coef_mass 2
2
d x dx
M -------2- = F – F load – B ⋅ ------
dt dt
M
B = -------------
τ mech
M : mass (kg)
coef_mass 1 : correction factor for mass
M 0 : mass of motion region (kg)
coef_mass 2 : correction value for mass (kg)
2
d-------x-
2
: acceleration in the translation direction (m/s2)
dt
F : electromagnetic force (N)
F load : additional force other than F
B : attenuation constant (N/ (m/s))
dx
------ : speed in the translation direction (m/s)
dt
500
[Mass M 0 (kg)] The value specified for [Mass M 1 ] in the [Define Equation of Motion] dia-
log for JMAG-Designer is displayed by default.
[Mass Correction Coeffi- The value specified for [Mass Coefficient p ] in the [Define Equation of
cient coef_mass 1 ] Motion] dialog for JMAG-Designer is displayed by default.
[Mass Correction Coeffi- The value specified for [Mass M 2 ] in the [Define Equation of Motion] dia-
cient coef_mass 2 ] log for JMAG-Designer is displayed by default.
(s)]
(LM-X)]
443.
page 345.
Type Description
time.
ate] tab
[Motion] tab
443.
501
JMAG-RT
[Output Port] Tab

Any physical quantity for displacement dependency and current dependency can be added to a
Note the following:
setting the output port, clear these checkboxes.

Button Description

Edition”.
[Nodal Force]
• When [Drive type] is [Sine Wave Drive], each physical quantity has
dependency on current amplitude (A), current phase (deg), mechan-
ical displacement (m).
• When [Drive type] is [Other], each physical quantity has depen-
dency on current (lu, lv, lw) (A) and mechanical displacement (m).
502
tem.
cannot be selected.
[X], [Y], and [Z].
[R], [θ], and [Z].
selected.
Minimum value,
simple average
503
JMAG-RT
[RT Correction] Tab

MEMO The specified correction factors are cleared and default values are used to re-create the JMAG-
RT model.
equation.
k
F ′ = F  1 + --------- ( Tf now – Tf base )
 100 
k : temperature correction factor of magnet (%/K)

R′ = R ( 1 + α ( Tr now – Tr base ) )
Notes
• Magnet flux-linkage which decreases with temperature fluctuations is accounted for during
thrust and attractive force calculation.
504

K6 2
Correction equation for inductance: L new = K 1 × K 5 ×  ------ × L ( I new )
n
K6
Correction equation for flux linkage in magnets: Ψ new = K 2 × K 4 × K 5 × ------ × Ψ
n
Correction equation for electromagnetic force: F new = K 3 × K pa3 ( I ) × K 5 × F ( I new )
7K
Correction equation for current: I new = ------ × I
n
L new : inductance after correction (H)
L : inductance before correction (H)
Ψ new : flux linkage for magnets after correction (Wb)
Ψ : flux linkage for magnets before correction (Wb)
F new : electromagnetic force after correction (N)
F : electromagnetic force before correction (N)
I new : reference current value after correction (A)

* Used to refer to the inductance and electromagnetic force.
I : reference current value before correction (A)
Specify the following correction factors based on the above equations.
[Direct Correction]
[Inductance (coef_inductance)] K 1 The default is 1.
[Flux Linkage in Magnet (coef_flux)] The default is 1.
K2
[Electromagnetic Force Correction The default is 1.

(coef_force)] K 3
505
JMAG-RT
[Current Dependent Electromagnetic The current dependent table is used to correct values accord-
Force Table (coeftable_force)] K pa3 ing to the current amplitude.
If you select [Use Current-Dependent Table for Electromag-
netic Force Correction (coeftable_torque_flag)], the [Point
Sequence] button becomes active. Click [Point Sequence] to
open the [Current-Dependent Torque Point Sequence] dia-
log and specify a current-dependent correction table.
The following should be noted when the current dependent
table is used:
• If the current exceeds the specified range when using the
JMAG-RT model in a control/circuit simulator, the induc-
tance and torque values obtained at the maximum and
minimum currents are applied instead of extrapolating.
• The correction table data is exported to a table file (.pa)
in addition to the RTT file when the JMAG-RT model
is copied to a control/circuit simulator. The same file
name as the RTT file is used for this table file.
The name of the table file is used in the RTT file and
cannot be changed. Furthermore, the RTT file and table
file need to be stored in the same directory.
[Magnet (coef_magnet)] K 4 Magnet grade. The default is 1.
[Steel Sheet (coef_material)] K 5 Steel sheet grade. The default is 1.

[FEM Coil Number of Turns Correc- C1 = K6 ⁄ n
tion Factor] C 1 K 6 : FEM coil number of turns correction value (Turn)
(turns_coil1)
[FEM Coil Number of Turns Correc- C2 = K7 ⁄ n
tion Factor (Current Reference)] C 2
K 7 : FEM coil number of turns correction value (current ref-
erence) (Turn) (turns_coil2)
Notes
• The flux linkage generated from magnets is specified for correction for linear synchronous
motors.
506
SR Motor
• Notes on Using the SR Motor Model Type (page 507)
Notes on Using the SR Motor Model Type

• The coil inductance is calculated using the current flowing only in a single phase coil. This can
have an effect on the accuracy of the model in multi-phase motors where the inductance of a sin-
gle phase coil is actually dependent on the current flowing in all of the phases.
• This motor type supports 3-phase to 5-phase motor.
• SR motors using magnets cannot be dealt with by the motor type [SR Motor]. Use the motor
type [Generic Model].
• Inductance is calculated according to the following formula:
φi
L ij = ----
Ij
L ij :
• When i = j , self-inductance of i -th coil (H)

• When i ≠ j , mutual inductance between i -th coil and j -th coil (H)
I j : current flowing through j -th coil (A)
φ i : flux linkage of i -th coil (Wb)

 Analysis type
 Materials
• Do not use magnets. When calculating an SR motor that uses a magnet, use the motor type
[Generic Model].
• Set the same number of FEM Coil conditions in the JCF file as the number of phases of the SR
motor.
If the number of FEM Coil conditions specified and number of phases are not the same, a
JMAG-RT model cannot be created. JMAG-RT performs calculations assuming that one FEM
Coil condition corresponds to one phase coil.
When creating a JMAG-RT model based on an FEM model in which each phase coil consists of
multiple FEM coils, change the FEM Coil condition settings and Circuit Conversion settings in
JMAG-Designer. For details, see “When creating a JMAG-RT model based on an FEM model in
which each phase coil consists of multiple FEM coils” on page 432.
507
JMAG-RT
JMAG-RT.
• In the JMAG-RT SR motor model, the initial rotor position of the input FEM model is the ini-
tial rotor position of the JMAG-RT model. For an SR motor, if the initial position of a rotor
salient pole and the center of the stator tooth on which the phase coil which is first energized has
been wound are opposite each other, torque is not generated and the motor does not rotate.
• Set a Torque condition. It does not matter which calculation method (nodal force, Lorentz force,
or surface force) in the Torque condition is used.
If multiple Torque conditions are set in a JCF file, the Torque condition displayed at the top of
the JMAG-Designer [Project Manager] tree is used.
 Meshing
• [Slide Mesh]:
erate mesh.
 Other notes
• The FEM Coil condition needs to be associated with an FEM Coil component by creating a cir-
cuit in a standard FEA, but a circuit and the FEM Coil components do not need to be specified
to use JMAG-RT.
508
time.

[Information] Tab
Item Description
sion]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
(A)], [Rated Voltage (V)],
509
JMAG-RT
Item Description
 [Comment]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
 [Resolution]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
[Inductance Resolution], [Torque Reso- Each item is automatically entered after completion of calcu-
lution] lation for JMAG-RT model creation.
 [Folder]
model data.
510
[Create] Tab
 [Number of Phases]
Specifies the number of phases for the motor from [3-phase], [4-phase] and [5-phase].

[A-Phase], [B-Phase], [C- Each lists displays the FEM Coil conditions set in the input file (.jcf ).
Phase], [D-Phase], [E- Specify the condition is associated with each phase.
Phase]
[Number of Turns] Specifies the number of turns for the each coil.
The specified value is used in FEA in JMAG-RT.
When performing circuit calculations using JMAG-Designer, the value
specified here is used as the default value.
here is not used.
 [Current]
Type Description
[Simple Settings] Determines the data resolution of inductance and torque using a specified
rated current. Enter a value in [Rated Current (A)].
• Inductance data resolution has 5 points. By dividing the range from 0 A
to the specified rated current into 6 equal parts, the value of each data
point is determined. However, the 0 A data point is excluded.
Example: When [Rated Current] is 10, the data resolution is 2, 4, 6, 8,
10.
• Torque data resolution has 8 points. The data points are determined by
dividing the range from 0 A to the specified rated current into 2 equal
parts and dividing the range from the specified rated current to three
times that value into 5 equal parts.
Example: When [Rated Current] is 10, the data resolution is 0, 5, 10, 14,
18, 22, 26, 30.
[Advanced Settings] Defines the current dependency of inductance and torque using tables.
Click [Setting] to open the [Advanced Settings of Current] dialog.
511
JMAG-RT
[Inductance] in the [Advanced Settings of Current] dialog

[Current (A)] Click [Point Sequence] to open the [Current Point Sequence] dialog to
specify a current table.
lution (deg)]
[Torque] in the [Advanced Settings of Current] dialog

[Current (A)] Click [Point Sequence] to open the [Current Point Sequence] dialog to
specify a current table.
lution (deg)]
[Calculate Rotation • Selected:
Angle from the Number The angle of one period of torque ripple is automatically calculated from
of Poles] the number of poles. The equation is as follows:
360
θ mech = --------------
2 ⋅ pn

• Unselected:
[Periodic Angle of Specifies a mechanical angle corresponding to one period of torque ripple.
Torque (deg)] For example, if the mechanical angle resolution is 1 degree and [Periodic
Angle of Torque (deg)] is 30, computations are performed for 1 degree to

This parameter can not be set.
(LM-X)]
443.
page 345.
512
Type Description
time.
ate] tab
[Motion] tab
443.
[RT Correction] Tab

model.
The temperature correction is for the coil. The correction equation is as follows:
R′ = R ( 1 + α ( Tr now – Tr base ) )
513
JMAG-RT
Specify the base temperature and correction factor for the coil appeared in the above equation.
Notes
If nothing is connected to the input port [coil Temp] of the JMAG-RT model block, the simula-
tion assumes that the temperature of the coils of the motor being driven is 0 K. Clear [Use_Tem-
perature_Correction] in the properties of the JMAG-RT model block when not performing
temperature correction.
514
Induction Motor
• Notes on Using the Induction Motor Model Type (page 515)
IMPORTANT The calculation method for induction motors was altered in Version 17.0.
When using data before Version 16.1, parameters such as the current table and slip frequency
table are to be set again.
Notes on Using the Induction Motor Model Type

• 3-phase motors and 6-phase motors are supported. Single-phase motors are not supported.
The following restrictions exist for 6-phase motors:
• Only 6-phase Y-connection is supported. Double Y-connection and Delta-connection are not
supported.
• Symmetrical 6-phase AC (the current phase difference of each phase is 60 degrees) is sup-
ported, but asymmetrical 6-phase AC is not supported.
• 6-phase pole-changing induction motors are supported (Before change: 2p poles, After
change: 4p poles, p: number of pole pairs).
• The current phase difference for each phase is 60 degrees for 2p poles and 120 degrees for
4p poles.
• In FEA with JMAG-RT, machine characteristics (secondary resistance and various induc-
tances) are calculated separately for 2p poles drive and 4p poles drive. In the control cir-
cuit simulation, the voltage equation is solved using the machine characteristics of the 2p
poles drive and 4p poles drive that are output to the RTT file. The torque and iron loss
obtained from this are then output.
515
JMAG-RT
• Based on the idea of a T-type equivalent circuit, physical quantities dependent on the slip fre-
quency and primary current specified by the user are calculated. The equivalent circuit used is as
follows:
X1: Primary leakage reactance (ohm)

X2: Secondary leakage reactance (ohm)
R1: Primary resistance (ohm)
R2: Secondary resistance (ohm)
Rst: Stray load loss resistance (ohm). Stray load loss is the difference in loss between a 5% slid-
ing load and no load. Here, this loss refers to iron loss and secondary harmonic copper loss.
B0: Excitation susceptance (S)
G0: Exciting conductance (S)
S: Slip
Since these parameters are not mechanical angle dependent, the induction motor model cannot
take into account spatial harmonics.
• When the JMAG-RT model (.rtt) of the induction motor is used in control circuit simulation,
iron loss is output and the torque drop due to the iron loss is taken into account during analysis.
Also, iron loss and stray load loss are taken into account when creating an efficiency map with
JMAG-RT Viewer.

An FEM model (input JCF file) needs to be created to meet the following requirements:
 Analysis type
• Create a FEM model for a magnetic field frequency analysis.
• Set three FEM Coil conditions for 3-phase motors. Set six FEM Coil conditions for 6-phase
motors.
516
• A JMAG-RT model cannot be created if the number of FEM Coil conditions set in the FEM
model is too small or too large. JMAG-RT performs calculations assuming that one FEM
Coil condition corresponds to one phase coil.
When creating a JMAG-RT model based on an FEM model in which each phase coil consists
of multiple FEM coils, change the FEM Coil condition settings in JMAG-Designer. For
details, see “When creating a JMAG-RT model based on an FEM model in which each
phase coil consists of multiple FEM coils” on page 432.
• For a 6-phase motor, the phase of the current flowing in the coils for each of the phases (A, B,
C, D, E, and F) must be shifted as follows:
A-Phase: 0 deg, B-Phase: -60 deg, C-Phase: -120 deg, D-Phase: -180 deg, E-Phase: -240 deg,
F-Phase: -300 deg.
• Set FEM Conductor condition to each bar of the cage.
JMAG-RT.
• Set Iron Loss conditions when accounting for iron loss during calculations.
• Do not set the following conditions:
• Multi Slice conditions
 Circuit
• For an induction motor model, FEA for creating a JMAG-RT model is executed using FEM
model circuit connection data as is. Therefore, place the component for supplying current or
potential and the FEM Coil components in Circuit Editor, and connect the terminals (star con-
nection or delta connection). In addition, place a cage component.
Example (left: star connection, right: delta connection)
For 6-phase induction motor models, star connection is supported, but delta connection is not
supported.
 Meshing
517
JMAG-RT

• [Slide Mesh]:
erate mesh.
When the circuit's conversion factors for the stator circuit and rotor circuit are different, specify
the conversion factor for each circuit using the Circuit Conversion function in the [Study Prop-
erties] dialog and the Circuit Conversion condition.
 Other notes
• Both 2D models and 3D models can be utilized.
However, in the case of a 3D models, it can be analyzed when it is a model that removes the
rotor-side end coil and allows the bar to pierce through the model in an upward direction in the
same way as the coil.
• JMAG-RT cannot perform calculations which account for eddy currents in parts other than cage
bars. For parts other than cage bars, selecting [Allow Eddy Current] or [Surface Current Approx-
imation (SIBC)] from the [Eddy Current] list in the material properties for each part is also
invalid.
transfer time and the total calculation time. can be shortened:
time.

Specify the following items:
518
[Information] Tab
Item Description
sion]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
(A)], [Rated Voltage (V)], [Rated Fre-
quency (Hz)]
For 6-phase motors, the minimum number of poles (value at
2p poles) is displayed.
 [Comment]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
519
JMAG-RT
 [Resolution]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
[Current (A)], [Slip Frequency (Hz)] Each item is automatically entered after completion of calcu-
 [Folder]
model data.
[Create] Tab
The [Create] tab specifies the parameters for the FEA required to create a JMAG-RT model.
For 6-phase motors, specify the minimum number of poles (value at 2p poles). If a value is entered
for [Number of poles,] the number of poles at 4p poles (the value obtained by multiplying the
entered value by 2) will be displayed for [Number of poles when switching].
 [Number of Secondary Conductor]

Specifies the number of rotor bars.
 [Model Divisions]
Specifies the number of circumferential divisions of the FEM model in the input file (.jcf ). For
example, “1” is specified in the case of a full model. “4” is specified in the case of a quarter model.
520

3-phase motor: Each list displays the FEM Coil conditions set in the input JCF file.
[U-Phase], [V-Phase], Specify the conditions to be associated with each phase.
[W-Phase] For 6-phase motors, note the following:
6-phase motor:
• For a 6-phase motor, the phase of the current flowing in the coils for each
[A-Phase], [B-Phase],
of the phases (A, B, C, D, E, and F) must be shifted as follows:
[C-Phase], [D-Phase],
A-Phase: 0 deg, B-Phase: -60 deg, C-Phase: -120 deg, D-Phase: -180 deg,
[E-Phase], [F-Phase]
E-Phase: -240 deg, F-Phase: -300 deg
• During the drive after changing the number of poles, the phase of the
current flowing in the coils for each of the phases is shifted as follows:
A-Phase: 0 deg, B-Phase: -120 deg, C-Phase: -240 deg, D-Phase: 0 deg,
E-Phase: -120 deg, F-Phase: -240 deg
[Number of Turns] Specifies the number of turns per coil.
[Connection Pattern] For 3-phase motors, select [Y connection] or [Delta-connection].
For 6-phase motors, only [Y connection] is supported. Therefore, [Con-
nection Pattern] is not displayed on the [Create] tab.
The connection pattern selected is used when performing a control circuit
simulation or creating an efficiency map in JMAG-RT Viewer.
Left: [Y-connection], Right: [Delta-connection]

Arrows in the figure represent the positive direction of the current.
[Resistance (ohm)] Specifies the resistance value of the entire coil per phase.
here is not used.
[Number of Turns in Specifies the number of conductors connected in series per phase. This can
Series per Phase in the Pri- be calculated by the number of slots * number of coil layers * number of
mary Circuit] turns/(number of parallel conductors * number of phases)”.
521
JMAG-RT
[Winding Factor], [Wind- Specifies the correction factor to reflect the effect of the winding method,
ing Factor (number of such as distributed winding or short-pitch winding, on the induced volt-
poles switch)] age.
For 6-phase motors, [Winding Factor] and [Winding Factor (number of
poles switch)] are applied to the induced voltage before and after pole-
changing, respectively (Before change: 2p poles, After change: 4p poles, p:
number of pole pairs).
 [Rated]
These settings are used to calculate stray load losses. Stray load loss is taken into account when creat-
ing an efficiency map in JMAG-RT Viewer.
[Frequency (Hz)] Specifies the rated frequency.
[Voltage (V)] Specifies the phase voltage amplitude value.
 [Operating Range]
These settings are used to calculate stray load losses. Stray load loss is taken into account in the effi-
ciency map calculation in JMAG-RT Viewer.
For all combinations of the current values and slip frequencies specified here, magnetic field analysis
with constraint conditions and synchronized conditions are executed, and the result value is used in
T-type equivalent circuits.
[Current (A)] Primary current amplitude (A).
enter the values in ascending order.
An error may occur in the calculation when the ratio of current resolution
and [Max] is less than 1.0e-4. Resolution is the difference between [Max]
and [Min] divided by the [Divisions]. Change either the value of [Max],
[Min], or [Divisions] when it matches the state above.
[Slip Frequency (Hz)] Secondary frequency (Hz).
Click [Point Sequence] to open the [Slip Frequency Point Sequence] dialog
and enter the values in ascending order.
The maximum value specified here is used as the frequency corresponding
to slip 1 of the maximum power supply frequency.
 [Stray Load Loss]

For 3-phase motors, set the stray losses to be accounted for in the efficiency map calculations in
JMAG-RT Viewer.
MEMO For 6-phase motors, JMAG-RT Viewer cannot account for stray losses when calculating effi-
ciency maps.
MEMO Stray load loss is not taken into account in control circuit simulation using Simulink.
[Base Frequency [Hz]] A frequency to evaluate stray load loss.
The frequency used during operation is normally specified.
522
[Method] For 3-phase motors, select either [Defined Manually] or [Defined Auto-
matically]. For 6-phase motors, [Defined Automatically] is not supported.
• [Defined Manually]:
Specifies settings for stray load loss manually.
When [Defined Manually] is selected, enter a value for stray load loss for
base frequency in the text box. The unit is (W).
• [Defined Automatically]:
Automatically calculates stray load loss, based on base frequency, iron
loss, and harmonic secondary copper loss.
The calculation time. is increased when [Defined automatically] is
selected, as compared to when [Defined manually] is selected.

This parameter can not be set.
 [Iron Loss]
• Selected:
Afterwards, using JMAG-RT Viewer, select [Allow Iron Loss] when
drawing torque speed curves/efficiency maps that account for iron loss.
Note the following:
using PSIM.
523
JMAG-RT
is executed next.
ysis]:
begins.
sis is Completed)]:
[Rotate Velocity] The iron loss at each rotation speed specified is output to a JMAG-RT
model.
Click [Point Sequence] to open the [Point Sequence] dialog and specify a
table for the revolution speeds.
Note the following:

• Circuit simulators refer to the iron loss table using an absolute value of
the revolution speed hence setting negative value as the revolution speed
is allowed.
But it is assumed that the iron loss table is created for normal rotation
with positive speed, so that it may not match the value which is correct
physically.
• Revolution speed used in iron loss analyses run for iron loss data of the
RTT file will be the revolution speed value specified in [Point Sequence]
that is closest to zero.
Results of other revolution speeds will be interpolated within the pro-
gram based on the results of the revolution speed closest to zero and out-
put as an RTT file.
524
(LM-X)]
443.
page 345.
Type Description
time.
ate] tab
[Motion] tab
443.
525
JMAG-RT
[RT Correction] Tab

model.
Specify the base temperature and correction factor for the primary coils and secondary conductors
appeared in the below equation.
R′ = R ( 1 + α ( Tr now – Tr base ) )
Notes
If nothing is connected to the input ports [1st_coilTemp] and [2nd_coilTemp] of the JMAG-RT
model block, the simulation assumes that the temperature of the coils and secondary conductors
of the motor being driven is 0 K. Clear [Use_Temperature_Correction] in the properties of the
JMAG-RT model block when not performing temperature correction.
• The correction factor specified in the [RT Correction] tab is displayed as the default value of the
temperature correction setting of JMAG-RT Viewer.
 [Direct Correction]
Correction equation for secondary resistance: R 2new = K 1 × R 2
Correction equation for inductance: L snew = K 2 × L m + K 3 × L sl + C 1

L rnew = K 2 × L m + K 4 × L rl + C 2
Correction equation for torque: T new = K 5 × T

526
R 2new : Secondary resistance after correction (Ohm)
R 2 : Secondary resistance before correction (Ohm)
L snew : Primary coil inductance after correction (H)
L rnew : Secondary conductor inductance after correction (H)
L m : Magnetizing leakage inductance (H)
L sl : Primary coil leakage inductance (H)
L rl : Secondary conductor leakage inductance (H)
T new : Torque after correction (Nm)
T : Torque before correction (Nm)
Specify the following correction factors based on the equations above:
[Secondary Resistance] K 1 Secondary resistance correction factor. The default is 1.
[Magnetizing Leakage Inductance] K 2 Magnetizing leakage inductance correction factor. The

default is 1.
[Primary Leakage Inductance] K 3 Primary coil leakage inductance correction factor. The
default is 1.
[Secondary Leakage Inductance] K 4 Secondary conductor leakage inductance correction factor.
The default is 1.
[Torque Correction] K 5 Torque correction factor. The default is 1.
[Additional Primary Leakage Inductance Correction value for primary coil leakage inductance. The
(H)] C 1 default is 0.
[Additional Secondary Leakage Induc- Correction value for secondary coil leakage inductance. The
tance (H)] C 2 default is 0.
[AC losses correction] K 6 The default is 1.

Notes
• The correction factor specified in the [RT Correction] tab is not taken into consideration when
calculating the NT curve or efficiency map in JMAG-RT Viewer.
527
JMAG-RT

Notes
simulators.
tion] tab.
fied here:
• Coil ends:
• The two following types of methods are available for accounting for AC copper loss for JMAG-
RT models:
• Method specifying conductor wire specifications and approximately calculating AC copper
loss in JMAG-RT models during control circuit simulations:
This is the method that is described in this section.
• Method giving harmonic equivalent copper loss resistance data loaded from CSV files to
JMAG-RT models.
For details on this method, see “Adding Loss Data to a JMAG-RT Model” on page 365.
Parameters
selected.
528

Slot cross-sections
529
JMAG-RT
Wound-Field Synchronous Motor

• Notes on Using the Wound-Field Synchronous Motor Model Type (page 530)
Notes on Using the Wound-Field Synchronous Motor Model Type

• Inductance is calculated according to the following formula:
Δφ i
L ij = --------
ΔI j
L ij :
• When i = j , self-inductance of i -th coil

• When i ≠ j , mutual inductance between i -th coil and j -th coil (H)
Δ I j : amount of change in current flowing through j -th coil
Δφ i : amount of change in flux linkage of i -th coil (Wb)
coincides.” You can specify the d-axis. For details see explanation on [Rotor Initial Position] in
the [Create] tab on page 535.

 Analysis type
 Analysis Conditions
• Set 4 FEM Coil conditions. The four conditions include three stator coils (U-phase, V-phase, W-
phase) and one field coil.
JMAG-RT.
• The initial position of the rotor can be set to any position. JMAG-RT automatically determines
the position for the current phase at zero based on the flux linkage calculation when creating a
JMAG-RT model.
• Set Iron Loss conditions when accounting for iron loss during calculations. Additionally, select
any method other than [Hysteresis Model] as the calculation method for [Hysteresis Loss]. Select
any method other than [Eddy Currents in Steel Plate] as the calculation method for [Joule Loss].
When multiple Iron Loss conditions are set to FEM models, the sum of loss calculated from each
Iron Loss condition is output to JMAG-RT model lookup tables.
530
 Meshing
• [Slide Mesh]:
erate mesh.
When the circuit's conversion factors for the stator coil and field coil are different, specify the
conversion factor for each circuit using the Circuit Conversion function in the [Study Properties]
dialog and the Circuit Conversion condition.
The conversion factors of each circuit can also be set in the JMAG-RT library manager without
using the Circuit Conversion condition.

 Other notes
531
JMAG-RT
time.

[Information] Tab
Item Description
sion]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
[Rated Output (kW)], [Rated Cur-
rent (A)], [Rated Voltage (V)]
[Number of Poles] This item is automatically entered after completion of calcu-
532
Item Description
[d-axis Offset Angle (deg)] This item is automatically entered after calculation to cre-
ate JMAG-RT model is finished. The value of θ shown
below is displayed here.
θ: The value of [d-axis Offset Angle]. Mechanical angle.

α: The value of [Rotor Initial position (deg)]. Mechanical
angle.
d_auto: Automatically calculated d-axis direction.
d_user: User-defined d-axis direction.
U: U-axis direction
When [Automatically Calculate] is selected for [Rotor Ini-
tial Position] in the [Create] tab, 0 is displayed.
[Phase Resistance (ohm)], [Number of Phase resistance and number of turns of stator coil.
Turns] These items are automatically entered after completion of
[Field Coil Resistance (ohm)], [Field Resistance and number of turns of field coil.
Coil Number of Turns] These items are automatically entered after completion of
 [Comment]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
 [Resolution]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
533
JMAG-RT
Item Description
tion], [Torque Resolution] lation for JMAG-RT model creation.
MEMO When [Torque setting is same as inductance] is selected in the [Create] tab, the following
parameters are affected, and mechanical angle calculation range for inductance and torque change as
shown in the table below.
• [Use half electrical angle periodicity] in the [Create] tab.
• [Use auto angle resolution setting for saving time] in the [Create] tab.
Use auto angle Mechanical angle Mechanical angle
Use half electrical
resolution setting for calculation range of calculation range of
angle periodicity
saving time inductance torque
OFF OFF 1 period 1 period
ON OFF 1/2 period 1/2 period
OFF ON 1/2 period 1/6 period
ON ON 1/2 period 1/6 period
 [Output Port]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
Output port table The settings under the [Output Port] tab are automatically
filled in.
 [Winding Conductors]
Item Description
RT Viewer.
• Cleared:
Viewer.
[Conductors in Slot Height], When the conductor wire specifications are specified on the [Wind-
[Conductors in Slot Width], ing Conductor] tab, these parameters are automatically entered
[Slots per Phase], [Averaged Slot when calculations for creating JMAG-RT models end.
Width (m)], [Conductor Type],
[Conductor Height (m)], [Con-
ductor Width (m)], [Conductor
Diameter (m)], [Core Stack
Length (m)], [Conductivity (S/
m)]
534
 [Folder]
model data.
[Create] Tab
Specifies the number of poles for the synchronous motor.
 [Rotor Initial Position (deg)]

[Rotor Initial Position This parameter is used to determine the rotor initial position so that the d-
(deg)] axis and U-axis (the magnetic flux direction of the U-phase coil) match.
This setting is necessary to correctly handle the current phase in the lookup
tables of JMAG-RT models.
• [Automatically calculate]:
The rotor position at the point when the U-phase flux waveform peaks is
used as the rotor initial position.
• [Specified]:
The user-specified angle is used to determine the rotor initial position.
Enter the mechanical angle difference between the U-axis and the d-axis
in the initial state of FEA models; enter a negative value if the d-axis is
counterclockwise relative to the U-axis, and enter a positive value if the
d-axis is clockwise relative to the U-axis.
When considering angle differences, the [Initial Position] settings of
Motion conditions can be ignored.
535
JMAG-RT
[Ignore the difference This option can be used when [Specified] is selected in [Rotor Initial Posi-
from automatic calculation (deg)].
tion] When this option is used, processing for no-load analysis and load analysis
is run together. Therefore, the calculation time. is shorter compared to
when the option is not used.
• Selected (default):
Load analysis is run even when there is a difference of electrical angle
±5deg or more between the initial position (deg) calculated in no-load
analysis and the value entered in the [Rotor Initial Position (deg)] box.
When the checkbox is selected, operations are processed in the following
order:
(1). Create input JCF files for no-load analysis and load analysis.
(2). Run no-load analysis and load analysis.
(3). Calculate the rotor initial position from the result of the no-load
analysis.
(4). Output a warning message to the solver report when there is a differ-
ence between the calculated initial position and the value entered in the
[Rotor Initial Position (deg)] box.
(5). Create RTT files from the results of the no-load analysis and load
analysis.
• Cleared:
Load analysis is canceled when there is a difference of electrical angle
±5deg or more between the initial position (deg) calculated in no-load
analysis and the value entered in the [Rotor Initial Position (deg)] box.
When the checkbox is cleared, operations are processed in the following
order:
(1). Create an input JCF file for no-load analysis.
(2). Run no-load analysis.
(3). Calculate the rotor initial position from the result of the no-load
analysis.
(4-1). Cancel the no-load analysis when there is a difference between the
calculated initial position and the value entered in the [Rotor Initial Posi-
tion (deg)] box. Do not proceed to (5) and (6).
(4-2). Create an input JCF file for load analysis when there is no differ-
ence between the calculated initial position and the value entered in the
[Rotor Initial Position (deg)] box.
(5). Run load analysis.
(6). Create RTT files from the results of no-load analysis and load analy-
sis.
536
 [Configuration of a FEM coil of Stator Coil], [Configuration of a FEM coil of Field

Coil]
[U-phase], [V-phase], [W- Each lists displays the FEM Coil conditions set in the input file (.jcf ).
phase], [Field Coil] Specify the condition is associated with each phase.
The motor rotates counterclockwise and the phase difference between the
three phases is defined relative to the U-phase. V-phase is displaced by the
electrical angle of -120 degrees and the W-phase by +120 degrees.
Rotation Rotation
direction direction
winding winding
Rotation Rotation
direction direction
winding winding
[Number of Turns] Specifies the number of turns for the stator coil and the field coil.
[Connection Pattern] Select either [Y-connection] or [Delta-connection].
When performing circuit calculations using Simulink, the connection pat-
tern specified in the properties of the JMAG-RT model block is used, and
the connection pattern selected here is not used.
537
JMAG-RT
here is not used.
[Circuit Conversion Series The conversion factors of Circuit Conversion set in the input JCF file are
Number], [Circuit Con- shown in each text box.
version Parallel Number] Change conversion factors as preferred such as when changing the circuit
conversion factors of the field coil and stator coil. In doing so, make sure to
consider how the circuit of a partial model is connected when the circuit is
changed to a full model.
Note that [Circuit Conversion Series Number] and [Circuit Conversion
Parallel Number] can be set when a Circuit Conversion condition is not set
in the input JCF file.
 [Current (Spatial Harmonic)]

Determine the calculation resolution of the JMAG-RT model.
JMAG-RT executes FEA at the specified current value for each rotational angle. The JMAG-RT
model created using the FEA results stores current-dependent result data.
Set each parameter paying attention to the following points.
• Make sure that the set current range described below includes the value of the current that flows
through the JMAG-RT model to be created during control circuit simulation execution.
The set current value is used to generate a parameter table for the JMAG-RT model. If a current
outside the set range is input to the JMAG-RT model during control circuit simulation, the
lookup table values obtained with the maximum or minimum value of the current will be
applied, resulting in possibly incorrect operation.
• The inductance and torque are not extrapolated when the current is outside the current range
when a JMAG-RT model is used in a circuit simulator. The value for an inductance or torque
obtained from the maximum or minimum current value is applied when this occurs.
538
[Current type] Select the method to specify motor model calculation points.
• [Amplitude, Current Phase]:
Specifies motor model calculation points with a current amplitude table
and a current phase table.
• [dq Axis Current]:
Specifies motor model calculation points with a d-axis current table and
a q-axis current table.
When this is selected, specify d-axis current Id, q-axis current Iq, current
amplitude Ia, and current phase β using the following formula (can be
used for both Delta connections and Star connections).
Iq = ( 3 ⁄ 2 ) × I a × cos ( β )
I d = – ( 3 ⁄ 2 ) × I a × sin ( β )
I a : phase current amplitude (A)
[Apply nonlinear fast Select this checkbox to speed up the processing of nonlinear calculations.
solver] A differential inductance is calculated from a specified current and a cur-
rent slightly larger than this specified current.
When [Apply nonlinear fast solver] is selected, the specified current calcu-
lation results are used as the initial values for the slightly larger current cal-
culations.
MEMO When this checkbox is selected, the [Use High Speed Solver]
option is used. This option can be set in the [Nonlinear Calculation] set-
ting panel of the [Study Properties] dialog in JMAG-Designer.
[Torque setting is same as • Selected:
inductance] When this is selected, the setting of the current resolution for inductance
also applies to the setting of the current resolution for torque.
• Cleared:
When this is selected, different current resolution can be set for torque
and inductance. In this case, the current resolution for magnetic flux uses
the same setting as the current resolution for inductance.
539
JMAG-RT
[Use phase symmetry] This checkbox can be set when [Amplitude, Current Phase] is selected for
[Current Type].
• Selected:
Assumes that the magnetic flux, torque, and inductance of the motor
have symmetry with respect to phase and executes FEAs only within the
phase range of -90 to +90 degrees of electrical angle. Based on the results,
FEAs for the remaining phase range (+90 to +270 degrees) are performed
in post processing.
reduced.
• Cleared:
FEAs in the phase range of 0 to 360 degrees of electrical angle are per-
formed assuming that the magnetic flux, torque, and inductance of the
motor have no symmetry with respect to phase.
When [Use phase symmetry] is selected, no physical quantity output under
the [Output Port] tab can be set.
[Inductance]
Specifies the calculation points for inductance.
[Use half electrical angle When the angle dependency of inductance for each phase has periodicity
periodicity] for each 1/2 electric periodic angle, select [Use half electrical angle period-
icity]. Periodicity can be accounted for when creating a JMAG-RT model
to decrease the calculation amount.
[Stator Coil Amplitude This parameter is displayed when selecting [Amplitude, Current Phase] as
(A)] [Current Type].
specify a table of the phase current amplitude.
Specify the value bigger than 0.
[Stator Coil Current This parameter is displayed when selecting [Amplitude, Current Phase] as
Phase (deg)] [Current Type].
Click [Point Sequence] to open the [Current Phase Point Sequence] dialog,
and then specify a current phase table.
• When [Use phase symmetry] is selected, specify current phases between -
90 and +90 degrees of electrical angle inclusive.
• When [Use phase symmetry] is cleared, specify current phases between 0
and 360 degrees of electrical angle inclusive.
540
[d-Axis Current (A)] This parameter is displayed when selecting [dq Axis Current] as [Current
Type].
specify a table of the d-axis current.
Specify the real value.
[q-Axis Current (A)] This parameter is displayed when selecting [dq Axis Current] as [Current
Type].
specify a table of the q-axis current.
Specify the real value.
[Field Coil Current (A)] Click [Point Sequence] to open the [Current Point Sequence] dialog and
specify a table of the field coil current.
Specify the value bigger than 0. Only positive values can be entered.
lution (deg)] Values larger than 0 can be typed.
[Torque]
Specifies the calculation points for torque.
MEMO When [Torque setting is same as Inductance] is selected, [Torque] settings are not needed.
[Stator Coil Amplitude See the description for [Stator Coil Amplitude (A)] in [Inductance].
(A)]
[Stator Coil Current See the description for [Stator Coil Current Phase (deg)] in [Inductance].
Phase (deg)]
[Field Coil Current (A)] See the description for [Field Coil Current (A)] in [Inductance].
[d-Axis Current (A)] See the description for [d-Axis Current (A)] in [Inductance].
[q-Axis Current (A)] See the description for [q-Axis Current (A)] in [Inductance].
[Mechanical Angle Reso- See the description for [Mechanical Angle Resolution (deg)] in [Induc-
lution (deg)] tance].
541
JMAG-RT
[Calculate Rotation • Selected:
Angle from the Number The angle of one period of torque ripple is automatically calculated from
of Poles] the number of poles. The equation is as follows:
360 1
θ mech = --------- × ---
pn 6

• Cleared:
[Periodic Angle of Torque Specifies a mechanical angle corresponding to one period of torque ripple.
(deg)] For example, if the mechanical angle resolution is 1 degree and [Periodic
Angle of Torque (deg)] is “30”, computations are performed for 1 degree to
 [Iron Loss]
Specifies whether to consider iron loss in FEA for JMAG-RT model creation.
• Selected:
Note the following:
using PSIM.
542
is executed next.
ysis]:
begins.
sis is Completed)]:
[Rotate Velocity] Select the rotation speed resolution setting method to be used when creat-
ing a JMAG-RT model. The iron loss at each rotation speed specified is
output to a JMAG-RT model.
• [Simple Settings]:
Specifies the resolution automatically based on the value of maximum
rotation speed.
Enter the value in [Maximum Revolution Speed (rpm)].
The model calculation process will use speed increments fifth part of the
maximum revolution speed. For example, when the [Maximum Revolu-
tion Speed (rpm)] is set to 3600rpm, the model creation process will use
revolution speed of 720, 1440, 2160, 2880 and 3600.
• [Advanced Settings]:
Uses the specified resolution.
Click [Point Sequence] then the [Point Sequence] dialog is displayed.
Specify a table for the revolution speeds.
543
JMAG-RT
Note the following:
• Circuit simulators refer to JMAG-RT model iron loss tables using the
absolute value of rotation speed hence setting a negative value as the rota-
tion speed is allowed.
• The rotation speed used in iron loss analysis executed to create iron loss
data in a JMAG-RT model is the rotation speed specified in [Simple Set-
tings] or [Advanced Settings] that is closest to zero. Results from other
rotation speeds are interpolated within the program from the results from
the rotation speed closest to zero and output as a JMAG-RT model.
(LM-X)]
443.
page 345.
Type Description
time.
ate] tab
[Motion] tab
443.
544
[Output Port] Tab

A physical quantity for rotational angle dependency and current dependency can be added to a
Note the following:
setting the output port, clear these checkboxes:
• If all the following conditions are satisfied, the output port function cannot be used:

Button Description

Edition”.
[Nodal Force]
Each physical quantity has dependencies on the following [Amplitude,
Current Phase] physical quantities or on the [dq Axis Current] physical
quantities depending on if [Current Type] is [Amplitude, Current Phase]
or [Current Type] is [dq Axis Current], respectively.
• When [Current Type] is [Amplitude, Current Phase], each physical
quantity has dependency on current amplitude (A), current phase (deg),
and mechanical angle (deg).
• When [Current Type] is [dq Axis Current], each physical quantity has
dependency on d-axis current (A), q-axis current (A), and mechanical
angle (deg).
545
JMAG-RT
tem.
cannot be selected.
[X], [Y], and [Z].
[R], [θ], and [Z].
selected.
Minimum value,
simple average
546
[RT Correction] Tab

model.
Specify the reference temperature and correction factor for both the stator coil and field coil based
on the correction equation written below.
R′ = R ( 1 + α ( Tr now – Tr base ) )
α : coil coefficient (ppm/K)
Tr base : base temperature in coil (K). Default: 293.15K
Notes
If nothing is connected to the input ports [Coil Temp] and [Field Coil Temp] of the JMAG-RT
model block, the simulation assumes that the temperature of the coils of the motor being driven
is 0 K. Clear [Use_Temperature_Correction] in the properties of the JMAG-RT model block
when not performing temperature correction.

Flux linkage correction equations:
K7
• Stator coil: Ψ snew = K 1 × K 4 × ------ × Ψ s (I s new , I fnew )
ns
K8
• Field coil: Ψ fnew = K 2 × K 4 × ------ × Ψ f (I s new , I fnew)
nf
Torque correction equation: T new = K 3 × K 4 × T (I snew , I fnew )

547
JMAG-RT
Current correction equations:

K7
• Stator coil: I snew = ------ × I s
ns
K8
• Field coil: I fnew = ------ × I f
nf
Ψ snew : flux linkage of stator coil after correction (Wb)
Ψ s : flux linkage of stator coil before correction (Wb)
Ψ fnew : flux linkage of field coil after correction (Wb)
Ψ f : flux linkage of field coil before correction (Wb)
T new : torque after correction (N/m)
T : torque before correction (Nm)
I snew : stator coil current after correction (A) *Used when referencing torque.
I s : stator coil current before correction (A)
n s : number of turns in a stator coil
I fnew : field coil current after correction (A) *Used when referencing torque.
I f : field coil current before correction (A)
n f : number of turns in a field coil
Specify the following correction factors based on the equations above.
[Direct Correction]
[Flux Linkage of Stator Coil] K 1 Correction factor for flux linkage of stator coil. The default is
1.
[Flux Linkage of Field Coil] K 2 Correction factor for flux linkage of field coil. The default is
1.
[Torque Correction] K 3 Correction factor for torque. The default is 1.
[AC losses correction] K 6 The default is 1.

[Steel Sheet] K 4 Steel sheet grade. The default is 1.
548
[Number of Turns of Stator Coil (Cur- C1 = K7 ⁄ ns
rent Reference)] C 1
K 7 : correction value for the number of turns of stator coil
n s : number of turns
[Number of Turns of Field Coil (Cur- C2 = K8 ⁄ nf

rent Reference)] C 2
K 8 : correction value for the number of turns of field coil
n f : number of turns

Notes
simulators.
tion] tab.
fied here.
• Coil ends:
Parameters
549
JMAG-RT
selected.
Slot cross-sections
550
Generic Model
• Concerning Generic Models (page 551)
Concerning Generic Models

• A JMAG-RT generic model can be created from any FEM model created in JMAG-Designer.
For example, applications not included in [Model Type] in [JMAG-RT Library Manager] such
as multi-phase synchronous motors, generators, transformers, etc. are also supported.
• A JMAG-RT generic model has excitation current dependency and displacement dependent coil
flux linkage, coil inductance, and an electromagnetic force/torque table. In addition, since the
JMAG-Designer Circuit Editor contains circuit wiring information, there are no constraints on
the circuit wiring method.
• Multiple Motion conditions are supported. However, there are the following restrictions:
• When [Sin (1-phase)] or [Sin (3-phase)] is selected from the [Drive Type] list in the [Coil
Property] group box under the JMAG-RT Library Manager [Create] tab, [Use half electrical
angle periodicity] in [Inductance] in the [Current] group box cannot be selected. If selected,
an error is generated.
• For the JMAG-RT generic model, the following physical quantity can be output arbitrarily:
• Magnetic flux density
• Magnetic field strength
• Magnetization
• Current density
• Joule loss density
• Lorentz force density
• Nodal force
551
JMAG-RT
 Limitations
• Eddy current and iron loss cannot be taken into account.
• A JMAG-RT generic model does not include information on equations of motion. Define the
equations of motion within a block on the control circuit simulation side that uses JMAG-RT
generic model.
• It is not possible to define different current resolutions for inductance and torque.

 Analysis type
• When adding loss data to an RTT file exported by executing FEM computations from JMAG-
RT, use single-byte characters in the title for the Motion condition set in JMAG-Designer. Loss
data cannot be added when specifying a Motion condition where multi-byte characters are used
in their titles.
For details on adding loss data to an RTT file, see “Adding Loss Data to a JMAG-RT Model” on
page 365.
 Circuit
• Circuit wiring information is required for JMAG-RT generic models. Create a circuit using the
JMAG-Designer Circuit Editor.
The following circuit components must be used in JMAG-RT generic model circuits:
• FEM Coil components:
Link FEM Coil components with FEM Coil conditions.
The following components can be used in JMAG-RT generic model circuits:
• Inductor components
• Resistor components
• Capacitor components
• Electric Potential Probe components
• Electric Potential Source (1 Terminal) components
• Current Source (1 Terminal) components
• Ground components
Components other than above should not be used JMAG-RT generic model circuits.
• The order of input terminals for generic model RTT files to be created (such as the terminal elec-
tric potential of JMAG-Designer JMAG-RT Model components, and the source of the Simulink
JMAG_RT_generic_V/Iin block, etc.) depends on the terminal IDs of input FEM model cir-
cuits.
Terminal IDs cannot be confirmed in JMAG-Designer or in the Circuit Editor. Circuits must
552
therefore be created after gaining an understanding the of the rules that concern how terminal
IDs are assigned.
Rules for terminal ID assignment are as follows:
• Terminal IDs are determined based on the position of each terminal in a circuit diagram in
the Circuit Editor.
• The initial position for the assignment of terminal IDs is the top left of a circuit diagram.
• Terminal IDs are given in descending order in a longitudinal direction from the top.
• Multiple terminals handled as one single terminal in input FEM models (JCF files) all share
one terminal ID.
Terminal ID assignment example

Each terminal is given a terminal ID in the order of the arrow shown.
The figures below consist of input FEM model circuits for 6-phase motors, and JMAG-RT
Model components that refer to RTT files created based on those input FEM models.
The “input FEM model Electric Potential Source (1 Terminal) component terminals” and the
“JMAG-RT Model component input electric potential terminals” are linked, and this displayed
in the figures via the dotted lines.
The components that make up the circuits are the same in both the left and right figures.
Because the positions of the components and terminals differ, however, the terminal IDs given to
each terminal are also different. As a result of these differences in position, there exists a differ-
ence in what is represented for the terminal electric potential (from V1 to V6) of the JMAG-RT
Model components.
The V2 terminal of the JMAG-RT Model component in the left figure, for example, acts as the
input electric potential of the V1-phase coil, whereas the V2 terminal of the JMAG-RT Model
component in the right figure acts as the input electric potential of the U2-phase coil.
553
JMAG-RT
Input FEM model circuits for 6-phase motors,

and JMAG-RT Model components that refer to RTT files created based on those input FEM models.
 Meshing
• Generate a mesh using any method.

Port] Tab (Spatial Harmonic Model)” on page 466.
554
 Other notes
time.
• The initial position of FEM model rotors becomes the initial position of rotors for JMAG-RT
model that are created based on those FEM models. If initial rotor positions are specified in
Motion conditions set to FEM models, then those values are also accounted for when determin-
ing the initial position of rotors for JMAG-RT models.
In JMAG, it is recommended that the initial positions of FEM model rotors are specified so that
the mechanical angle difference between the U-axis (U-phase coil magnetic flux direction) and
the d-axis is 0 deg.
•
d-axis direction
Rotating Machine Model
555
JMAG-RT

[Information] Tab
Item Description
sion]
 [Comment]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
 [Resolution]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
[Suppress Calculation Case], [Coil Set] These items are set automatically after the model is created
table, [Independent Motion] table by JMAG-RT.
556
 [Output Port]
Item Description
• Cleared:
RT Viewer.
Output port table The settings under the [Output Port] tab are automatically
filled in.
 [Folder]
model data.
[Create] Tab
 [Coil Property]
Set the parameters of the motion synchronized with the power supply current and power supply.
[Coil Set] list

Click [Add Coil Set] and select one or more coil sets to add to the list.
Essentially, one or more coil sets must be added for each FEM Coil condition in the input JCF file.
However, presets ([Sin(1-phase)], [Sin(3-phase)]) are available for commonly used settings such as
single-phase coils and 3-phase coils that respond to sinusoidal current (voltage). When using presets,
there is no need to add the same number of coil sets as the input JCF file FEM Coil conditions.
[Coil Set Title]

Enter the title for a coil set. Since multiple coil sets are defined, input appropriate titles to distin-
guish between them.
MEMO When adding loss data to an RTT file exported by executing FEAs from JMAG-RT, use single-
byte characters for the coil set titles. Loss data cannot added when specifying the coil sets where multi-
byte characters are used in their titles. For details on adding loss data to an RTT file, see “Adding Loss
Data to a JMAG-RT Model” on page 365.
[Drive Type]
Decide the [Drive Type] of each coil set based on the waveforms of the currents flowing through the
FEM coils associated with that coil set. Lookup tables for magnetic flux, inductance, electromag-
netic force, torque, and current waveforms are output to RTT files.
• Combinations of multiple drive types can be used in a single JMAG-RT analysis model. Use two
[Sin(3-phase)] coil sets for 6-phase synchronous motors, for example.
• The number of JMAG-RT calculation cases is determined by the complete combination of cur-
rent data points and mechanical angle resolution data points for each coil set.
557
JMAG-RT
• Selecting [Sin(1-phase)] (or [Sin(3-phase)]) will reduce the number of calculation cases rather
than [Constant] when setting the same current waveform.
• The number of calculation cases is reduced by increasing the number of [De-energized] coil
sets.
Select from the following:
Type Description
[Constant] Any waveform current is passed through single-phase FEM coils.
• Select [Constant] when the Motion condition to be synchronized with
the power supply connected to each phase is not set in the FEM
model of input JCF file.
[Sin (1-phase)] A sine wave current is passed through single-phase FEM coils.
• When selecting [Sin (1-phase)], the Motion condition to be synchro-
nized with the power supply connected to each phase must be set in
the FEM model of input JCF file.
• When [Sin (1-phase)] is selected, FEA with JMAG-RT is performed
under the assumption that the current is balanced in the coil set.
For this reason, assuming that a [Sin (1-phase)] RTT file is used in con-
trol circuit simulation in a circuit configuration where the affects of
return currents is large, the assumption of balanced current may be
invalid and sufficient accuracy may not be able to be obtained.
[Sin (3-phase)] A sine wave current is passed through 3-phase FEM coils.
• A single coil set can be associated with three FEM Coil conditions for
[Sin(3-phase)].
• When selecting [Sin (3-phase)], the Motion condition to be synchro-
nized with the power supply connected to each phase must be set in the
FEM model of input JCF file.
• When [Sin (3-phase)] is selected, FEA with JMAG-RT is performed
under the assumption that the current is balanced in the coil set.
For this reason, assuming that a [Sin (3-phase)] RTT file is used in con-
trol circuit simulation in a circuit configuration where the affects of
return currents is large, the assumption of balanced current may be
invalid and sufficient accuracy may not be able to be obtained.
[De-energized] FEM coils are not energized.
• Select [De-energized] for FEM coils that obtain correct solutions without
energization, such as some coils such as resolvers.
• Setting parameters in the [Current] group box is not necessary for [De-
energized] coil sets.
• Errors will occur when all coil sets are [De-energized].
558
[Configuration of an FEM Coil]

This group box associates coil sets selected in the [Coil Set] list with FEM Coil conditions in input
JCF files. set the following parameters:
[FEM Coil] This list is displayed when the [Drive Type] is [Constant], [Sin(1-phase)],
or [De-energized].
FEM Coil conditions set to input JCF file FEM models are displayed in
this list.
Select the FEM Coil conditions to associate with coil sets.
[U-phase Coil], [V-phase This list is displayed when the coil set [Drive Type] is [Sin(3-phase)].
Coil], [W-phase Coil] FEM Coil conditions set to input JCF file FEM models are displayed in
this list.
Select the FEM Coil conditions to associate with the coil set U-phase, V-
phase, and W-phase.
[Number of Turns] Enter the number of turns for FEM coils.
Even when setting the number of turns for FEM coils in input JCF file
FEM models, this is overwritten by the value that is entered here.
Set a value for [Number of Turns] even when the coil set [Drive Type] is
[De-energized].
[Resistance (ohm)] Set the FEM coil phase resistance.
The phase resistance entered here is used only in control circuit simulations
with PSIM.
Set a value for [Phase Resistance] even when the coil set [Drive Type] is
[De-energized].
[Current]
Setting parameters in the [Current] group box is not necessary when the coil set [Drive Type] is [De-
energized].
[Reference Coil Set] This option is available when [Drive type] of the coil set is [Sin (1-phase)]
or [Sin (3-phase)].
• Selected:
Use the same inductance and torque resolution as the referenced coil set.
With this setting, calculation cost can be further reduced. set the follow-
ing parameters:
• Reference coil set:
You can select a coil set of [Sin (1-phase)] or [Sin (3-phase)] for [Drive
Type].
• Cleared:
Set the inductance and torque resolution independently without refer-
ring to another coil set.
[Reference Motion] Set this parameter when [Drive type] of the coil set is [Sin (1-phase)] or
[Sin (3-phase)].
Select the Motion condition that synchronizes with the current cycle.
559
JMAG-RT
[Offset Angle (elec. deg)] Set this parameter when the [Drive type] of coil sets is either [Sin (1-
phase)] or [Sin (3-phase)].
Enter the value that is obtained by converting the angle difference
(mechanical angle) between the U-axis (U-phase coil magnetic flux direc-
tion) and the d-axis at the initial state of an FEM model into an electrical
angle. Users should be aware during these circumstances that the [Initial
Position] settings for Motion conditions are reflected in rotor positions at
the initial state of FEM models.
• When coil sets refer to Rotation Motion conditions:
[Offset Angle] = (x2 – x1)/[Mechanical Angle for Electric Period] x 360
x1: U-axis angle (deg), x2: d-axis angle (deg)
• When coil sets refer to Translation Motion conditions:
[Offset Angle] = (x2 – x1)/[Mechanical Displacement for Electric Period]
× 360
x1: U-axis position (m) in the translation direction, x2: d-axis position
(m) in the translation direction
Linear motor model settings example
[Periodic] • Selected:
The displacement is assumed to be periodic. In this case, if a displace-
ment exceeding the specified value in [Mechanical Angle for Electric
Period] or [Mechanical Displacement for Electric Period] is input, the
value considering the periodicity of the displacement is output.
• Cleared:
The displacement is assumed to have no periodicity. In this case, even if a
displacement exceeding the specified value in [Mechanical Angle for
Electric Period] or [Mechanical Displacement for Electric Period] is
input, the value corresponding to [Mechanical Angle for Electric Period]
or [Mechanical Displacement for Electric Period] is output.
[Mechanical Angle for Enter the mechanical angle/displacement corresponding to one period of
Electric Period (deg)] or electrical angle.
[Mechanical Displace-
ment for Electric Period
(m)]
560
[Torque setting is same as • Selected:
inductance] The current resolution of the inductance is also used to set the current
resolution of the torque.
• Cleared:
Set different current resolutions for torque and inductance. In this case,
the data point number of magnetic flux is same as the data point number
of inductance.
[Inductance], [Torque]
[Use half electrical angle • Selected:
periodicity] Calculate the inductance and torque for a half period of electrical angle,
and calculate table values for one period of electrical angle from these val-
ues. When it can be assumed that the inductance and electromagnetic
force/torque are periodic for a half period of electrical angle, if the check-
box is selected, the processing time can be shortened.
• Cleared:
Processing occurs for one period of electrical angle.
When multiple Motion conditions are set in an input JCF file and [Sin (1-
phase)] or [Sin (3-phase)] is selected for [Drive Type], clear [Use half elec-
trical angle periodicity]. If selected, an error is generated.
[Current (A)] Click [Point Sequence] to open the [Current Point Sequence] dialog and
specify a current point sequence within the operating range.
• Enter the currents in ascending order.
• As the number of data points in the point sequence increases, lookup
tables with finer resolution can be obtained.
• When [Constant] is selected for [Drive Type] and the control circuit sim-
ulation using the RTT file to be created takes positive and negative values
of the current, enter the positive and negative values . (e.g., -5, -2, -1, 1,
3, 5, 10).
[Current Phase (deg)] This parameter can be specified for the [Sin (1-phase)] or [Sin (3-phase)]
coil set.
Click [Point Sequence] to open the [Current Phase Point Sequence] dialog
and specify a current phase table.
• As the number of input points increases, it is possible to obtain lookup
tables with finer resolution.
[Mechanical Angle Reso- This can be specified for the [Sin (1-phase)] or [Sin (3-phase)] coil set.
lution (deg)] or In the case of rotational motion, set the resolution in the rotational
[Mechanical Displace- angle direction. In the case of translational motion, set the resolution in
ment Resolution (m)] the moving direction.
With a smaller value entered, it is possible to obtain lookup tables with
finer resolution.
[Reference Torque] or This parameter is specified after [Reference Motion] is selected.
[Reference Force] Select the Torque or Force condition set for the same part as the reference
Motion condition.
561
JMAG-RT
[Correction Factor]
Specify the following parameters:
• [Temperature Correction Factor] α coili
• [Base Temperature for Temperature Correction] Tr coilibase
• [FEM Coil Number of Turns Correction Factor] C 2coili
• [Flux Linkage Correction Factor] K 2coili
• [Torque/Force Correction Factor] K 3i :
This option is not available when [Drive type] of the coil set is [Constant].
The correction equations are as follows:

• Coil correction equation:
R coilinew = R coili ( 1 + α coili ( Tr coilinew – Tr coilibase ) )
R coilinew : resistance (ohm) of the i -th coil after correction
R coili : resistance (ohm) of i -th coil before correction
α coili : temperature correction factor of the i -th coil (ppm/K)
Values allowed: 0.0 - no upper limit. Default: 3810 ppm/K

Tr coilinew : temperature of i -th coil (temperature during analysis) (K) during drive
Tr coilibase : reference temperature (K) of the i -th coil. Default: 293.15 K
• Flux linkage correction equation:
Ψ coilinew = K 2coili × C 2coili × Ψ coili (I coil1new , I coil2new ,… , Icoilnnew)
Ψ coilinew : magnetic flux (Wb) interlinked to the i -th coil after correction
Ψ coili : magnetic flux (Wb) interlinked to the i -th coil before correction
K 2coili : correction value of magnetic flux interlinked to the i -th coil
C 2coili : correction factor for the number of turns of the i -th coil
Icoilnnew : reference current value (A) of the n th coil after correction
• Current correction equation: I coilinew = C 2coili × I coili
I coilinew : reference current value (A) of the i -th coil after correction. Used when calculating
inductance and torque.
I coili : reference current value (A) of the i -th coil before correction
C 2coili : correction factor for the number of turns of the i -th coil
562
• Torque/electromagnetic force correction equation:
T inew = K 3i × T i (I coil1new , I coil2new ,… , Icoilnnew)
T inew : i -th torque (N · m)/electromagnetic force (N) after correction

K 3i : i -th torque/electromagnetic force correction factor
T inew : i -th torque (N · m)/electromagnetic force (N) before correction
Notes
• The correction factors specified can be used in the control circuit simulation using Simulink.
If nothing is connected to the input port [coil temperature] of the JMAG-RT model block,
the simulation assumes that the temperature of the coils of the motor being driven is 0 K.
Clear [Use_Temperature_Correction] in the properties of the JMAG-RT model block when
not performing temperature correction.
• The correction factor set is cleared when the JMAG-RT model is recreated, and returned to
the default value (uncorrected state).
 [Independent Motion Property]

Set the parameters of the motion that are not synchronized with the power supply current.
[Condition]
In this list, the Motion condition set in the FEM model is displayed. However, the Motion condi-
tion selected in [Reference Motion] under [Coil Property] is not displayed.
Parameters for each Motion condition

Select the Motion condition from the [Condition] list and set the following parameters:
[Reference Torque] or Select the torque or Force condition set for the same part as the Motion
[Reference Force] condition.
[Periodic] • Selected:
The displacement is assumed to be periodic. In this case, if a displace-
ment exceeding the value set in [Maximum Mechanical Angle] or [Maxi-
mum Displacement] is input, the value taking into account the
periodicity of the displacement is output.
• Cleared:
The displacement is assumed to have no periodicity. In this case, even if a
displacement exceeding the value set in [Maximum Mechanical Angle] or
[Maximum Displacement] is input, the value corresponding to the maxi-
mum value of the displacement is output.
[Maximum Mechanical Enter the maximum displacement of the mover.
Angle (deg)] or [Maxi-
mum Mechanical Dis-
placement (m)]
[Mechanical Angle Reso- In the case of rotational motion, set the resolution in the rotational angle
lution (deg)], or [Mechan- direction. In the case of translational motion, set the resolution in the mov-
ical Displacement ing direction. With a smaller value entered, it is possible to obtain a table
Resolution (m)] with finer resolution.
563
JMAG-RT
[Correction Factor] Specify the following parameter.
• [Torque/Force Correction Factor] K 3i
Torque/electromagnetic force correction equation:
T inew : i -th torque (N · m)/electromagnetic force (N) after correction

T inew : i -th torque (N · m)/electromagnetic force (N) before correction
Icoilnnew : reference current value (A) of the n -th coil after correction
 [Calculation Case Suppression Property]

When running JMAG-RT FEA, the number of JMAG-RT calculation cases can be suppressed by
narrowing the required calculation range for models from FEA results via JMAG-Designer.
For example, the current value (I1, I2) for two coils can be set as “1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6”.
• Under regular circumstances:
The number of JMAG-RT calculation cases is determined by the complete combination of cur-
rent and mechanical angle resolution data points for each coil set. In this example, 36 calculation
cases are created (with the red circles in the diagram below representing the created calculation
cases).
Data point range and calculation cases determined from current value settings
564
• When setting [Calculation Case Suppression Property]:

Model operating points in the specified JMAG-Designer FEA results are shown in the below dia-
gram (with the green double circles representing the operating points).
Model operating points obtained from JMAG-Designer FEA results
JMAG-RT draws lines connecting each operating point of the obtained model and detects data
points in the vicinity of those lines. Next is to create only the cases of the detected data points
and end points of the data point range (with the red circles in the diagram below representing the
calculation cases). In this example, 22 calculation cases are created.
Calculation cases determined from obtained operating points ([Neighborhood Level]: 1)
MEMO End point cases in the data point range are always created for the correction function.
MEMO In this example, current values are used for the first axis and second axis of the data points, but
depending on settings, data point axes will change with current amplitude, current phase, and mechani-
cal angle resolution.
565
JMAG-RT
[Suppress Calculation • Cleared (default):
Case] The number of cases determined by JMAG-RT settings is run as is with-
out referencing JMAG-Designer FEA results.
• Selected:
The number of FEA cases via JMAG-RT are reduced by referring to the
results of JMAG-Designer FEA that uses the same model as the JMAG-
RT input JCF file.
Note the following when using this function:
• Multiple JMAG-Designer FEA results can be referenced.
• Set the data points of each table for current amplitude, current phase,
and displacement amounts to be two or more.
• Clear [Use half electrical angle periodicity]. [Suppress Calculation
Case] and [Use half electrical angle periodicity] cannot be used
together.
[Add Calculation Case This is displayed when [Suppress Calculation Case] is selected.
Suppression Setting] but- With this button, specify the project file (.jproj) including the JMAG-
ton Designer FEA results to be referenced.
Click [Add Calculation Case Suppression Setting] to open the [Open
JMAG project file] dialog.
Specify JMAG-Designer project files (.jproj) that satisfy all of the following
conditions.
• Includes one or more transient analysis studies that possesses results.
How many cases are created in studies is of no concern.
• The same number of FEM Coil conditions and the same number of
Motion conditions as the JMAG-RT input JCF file is set.
Specify a file and click [Open] to display the [Add Suppression Calculation
Case Setting] dialog.
[Remove] Project files are deleted from the table in [Calculation Case Suppression
Property].
[Add Suppression Calculation Setting] dialog

[Study] tree Studies included in specified project files are displayed.
When multiple studies are displayed, select the checkboxes of studies refer-
enced in JMAG-RT FEA.
Studies that can be referenced are only transient analysis studies that pos-
sess results.
566
[Neighborhood Level] [Neighborhood Level] is a parameter for determining data points based on
lines that connect operating points. Specify an integer of 1 or more. The
default is “1”.
• When “1” is specified, cases with data points closest to the lines connect-
ing the detected operating points are created. See the example diagram
above.
• When “2” is specified, cases with data points that are one further outside
than that of having specified “1” are created.
The below diagram shows when the [Neighborhood Level] of the previ-
ous example is changed to “2”. The purple triangles represent the calcula-
tion cases additionally created when “2” is specified. In this example, 34
calculation cases are created.
Calculation cases determined from obtained operating points

([Neighborhood Level]: 2)
Click [OK] to return to the [Generic RT Model] setting panel. Informa-

tion for the specified project files are displayed in the table under [Calcula-
tion Case Suppression Property].
(LM-X)]
443.
page 345.
567
JMAG-RT
Type Description
time.
ate] tab
[Motion] tab
443.
[Output Port] Tab

Any physical quantity dependent on displacement and current can be output to the JMAG-RT
model and can be referred to during control circuit simulation.
Use the set and coordinate system that is set in the FEM model for setting an output port.
Note the following:

Button Description
568

For details on set creation methods, see “Operations Edition” and “Param-
eter Explanation Edition”.
[Nodal Force]
• When [Drive type] is [Sin (1-phase)] or [Sin (3-phase)], each physical
quantity has dependency on current amplitude (A), current phase (deg),
mechanical angle (deg).
• When [Drive type] is [Constant], each physical quantity has dependency
on current (lu, lv, lw) (A) and mechanical angle (deg).
tem.
cannot be selected.
[X], [Y], and [Z].
[R], [θ], and [Z].
selected.
569
JMAG-RT
Minimum value,
simple average
Specifies the [Physical Quantity Correction Factor] K 4 value according to the following correction
equation.
F inew = K 4i × F i (I coil1new , I coil2new ,… , Icoilnnew)
F inew : i -th physical quantity after correction
F i : i -th physical quantity before correction
K 4i : correction value of i -th physical quantity
570
Overview of Simulations Using JMAG-RT Models
A JMAG-RT model is a dataset of control circuit simulation parameters (coil flux linkage and inductance, resis-
tance etc.) that is extracted from FED analysis results of motors, etc. and edited. This dataset can be exported as
a RTT file.
Using blocks linked to the JMAG-RT model (RTT file) in the circuit simulator, makes it possible to run high-
speed control circuit simulation with consideration for nonlinear magnetizing properties and position depen-
dency, as if using the finite element method.
This chapter describes the settings and notes when JMAG-RT model is used with a commercial circuit simula-
tor.
MEMO A model that represents a specific application in a circuit simulator is referred to as a behavior model.

• Types of JMAG-RT Models (page 572)
• Programs That Can Create JMAG-RT Models (page 573)
• Circuit Simulators That Can Use JMAG-RT Models (page 575)
571
JMAG-RT
Types of JMAG-RT Models

 RTT file format
JMAG-RT model Description
JMAG-RT Model This is a model that contains data such as inductance and torque/electro-
magnetic force obtained from FEA using JMAG.
This model can be created using the following program:
• JMAG-RT
• JMAG-Express Classic
• JMAG-Express Online
• JMAG-Designer
See “Programs That Can Create JMAG-RT Models” on page 573.
JMAG-RT Loss Map This is a model that contains map data such as losses, created from the
Model results of the JMAG-Designer efficiency map analysis study.
This model can be created using the following program:
• JMAG-Designer
See “Programs That Can Create JMAG-RT Models” on page 573.
 MathWorks MAT file format

JMAG-RT model Description
JMAG-RT Model for JMAG-RT models in this format can be created using JMAG-RT Viewer
FEM-Parameterized based on the RTT file of the JMAG-RT model.
PMSM Blocks of MAT- See “Exporting MAT Files for MATLAB/Simulink FEM-Parameterized
LAB/Simulink Block” on page 793.
572
Programs That Can Create JMAG-RT Models

The JMAG-RT model (.rtt) can be created with the following programs:
Program Description
JMAG-RT From JMAG-RT, the following JMAG-RT models can be exported:
• PM synchronous motor (3-phase, 6-phase):
LdLq model, spatial harmonic (differential) model, spatial harmonic
(integral) model
• Synchronous reluctance motor (3-phase, 6-phase):
LdLq model, spatial harmonic (differential) model
• Unipolar stepping motor (2-phase)
• Linear solenoid
• Linear synchronous motor (3-phase)
• SR motor (3-phase, 4-phase, 5-phase)
• Induction motor (3-phase, 6-phase)
• Wound-field synchronous motor
• Generic model
JMAG-Express Classic, The following JMAG-RT models can be exported:
JMAG-Express Online • PM synchronous motor (3-phase, 6-phase):
Written in JMAG-Express as “brushless motor”.
• LdLq model
• SR motor (3-phase):
Written in JMAG-Express as “switched reluctance motor”.
• Induction motor (3-phase)
JMAG-RT Viewer The following functions can be used in JMAG-RT Viewer to make changes
and add data to the JMAG-RT model output from JMAG-RT:
• [Apply Skew]
• [Add Equivalent Iron Loss Resistance Table]
JMAG-Designer Effi- Exporting JMAG-RT models
ciency Map Analysis Stud- You can export JMAG-RT models from analysis results (response table) of
ies efficiency map analysis studies (speed-priority).
JMAG-RT models of the following applications can be exported:
• PM synchronous motor (3-phase)
• Synchronous reluctance motor (3-phase)
Adding map data
In efficiency map analysis studies, the map data of losses obtained as analy-
sis results can be added to JMAG-RT models exported from JMAG-RT
and JMAG-Express.
The map data can be added to JMAG-RT models of the following applica-
tions:
• PM synchronous motor (3-phase, 6-phase)
• Synchronous reluctance motor (3-phase, 6-phase)
573
JMAG-RT
Program Description
Exporting JMAG-RT loss map models
The map data of losses obtained as analysis results can be exported as the
JMAG-RT model in efficiency map analysis studies. This model is referred
to as a JMAG-RT loss map model.
JMAG-RT loss map models of the following applications can be exported:
• PM synchronous motor (3-phase, 6-phase)
• Synchronous reluctance motor (3-phase, 6-phase)
 Notes
• Even if the JMAG-RT model of the motor with similar specifications, the result of control circuit
simulation using the model will differ depending on the program used. This difference is caused
by different priorities in each program.
• JMAG-RT gives priority to calculation accuracy when running FEA.
• JMAG-Express gives priority to calculation speed when running FEA.
• In JMAG-Designer efficiency map analysis studies, you can select whether to give priority to
calculation accuracy or calculation speed.
Create your JMAG-RT model with the program that best meets your objectives.
• The specifications of the created JMAG-RT model and its accompanying files are different
depending on the program and version used. When running the control circuit simulation, use a
file created with the same program and the same version.
 Required license and creation procedure

For details on JMAG-RT, see JMAG-RT Help; for JMAG-Express, see JMAG-Express Help; for
JMAG-Designer efficiency map analysis studies, see JMAG-Designer Help.
574
Circuit Simulators That Can Use JMAG-RT Models

JMAG-RT models can be used in the following circuit simulators.
• See “Using JMAG-RT Models in a Commercial Circuit Simulator” on page 5817 for parameters
and notes when using them in Simulink and PSIM.
• See “Using JMAG-RT Models in Your Programs in C” on page 723 for notes when using JMAG-
RT models in a user-created program in C.
 JMAG-RT Model
MATLAB/
JMAG-Designer PSIM Program in C
Simulink
PM synchronous motor    
Synchronous reluctance
   -
motor
Unipolar stepping motor    
Linear solenoid    
Linear synchronous
   
motor
SR motor    
Induction motor    -
Wound-field synchro-
   -
nous motor
Generic model    -
 JMAG-RT Loss Map Model

MATLAB/
JMAG-Designer PSIM Program in C
Simulink
PM synchronous motor -  - -
Synchronous reluctance
-  - -
motor
Induction motor -  - -
MEMO For the latest information, see the JMAG website (https://www.jmag-international.com/).
 Notes
• Support for coupled analysis using JMAG and PSIM has been discontinued for major versions
and service packs released after April 2023.
575
JMAG-RT
576
Using JMAG-RT Models in JMAG-Designer
JMAG-RT models can be used in JMAG-Designer.

• Running a Control Circuit Simulation Using JMAG-RT Models in JMAG-Designer (page 579)
577
JMAG-RT
Notes
• JMAG-RT models cannot be used with Linux.
• JMAG-RT models of all model types provided by JMAG can be used in JMAG-Designer.
LdLq model, spatial harmonic (differential) model, spatial harmonic (integral) model
• Linear solenoid
• Generic model
578
Using JMAG-RT Models in JMAG-Designer
Running a Control Circuit Simulation Using JMAG-RT Models in

JMAG-Designer
This section describes the procedure; for details on the parameters of JMAG-RT model circuit com-
ponents and integration analysis study properties, please refer to the “Parameter Explanation Edi-
tion”.
• Running an Integrated Analysis Study (page 579)
• Running a Magnetic Field Analysis Study (page 580)
Running an Integrated Analysis Study

In this section, JMAG-RT is used to create the JMAG-RT model as an example of the procedure.
1. Create an FEM model in JMAG-Designer, and export an input JCF file for use with JMAG-
RT.
i. Start JMAG-Designer.
ii. Prepare a geometry model, and create a study.
For induction motors, create a frequency analysis. For models other than induction motors,
create a transient analysis.
iii. Set materials, conditions, and study properties, and generate mesh.
Depending on the motor type, add an electrical drive circuit.
iv. Export a JCF file from the study
This can be either geometry data or mesh data.
2. Start JMAG-RT, and create a RTT file using the file in step 1.
3. Create a integration model in JMAG-Designer.
ii. Select [File] > [Open] from the menu bar.
iii. Specify the RTT file from step 2, and click [Open].
The integration model and integration analysis study are automatically added to the project.
JMAG-RT Model components are placed in the circuit of the integration analysis study, and
these components are automatically linked to the imported RTT files.
4. Set a control circuit.
i. Right-click [Circuit] under [Integration Model] > [Integration Study] in the [Project
Manager] tree, and select [Show].
The Circuit Editor ([Edit Circuit] dialog) is displayed.
ii. Create a circuit diagram and set the properties of the circuit components.
iii. Place the JMAG-RT Model components and link them to the RTT file.
5. Set other parameters.
i. Right-click [Integration Study] under [Integration Model] in the [Project Manager]
tree, and select [Properties].
The [Study Properties] dialog is displayed.
579
JMAG-RT
ii. Set the properties of the study.

The parameters that can be set in the properties of the integration analysis study are the same
as those of the magnetic field transient analysis study, with some exceptions.
6. Run the analysis.
For example, right-click [Integration Study] under [Integration Model] in the [Project Manager]
tree, and select [Run Active Case].
7. Check the results.
The result data of the integration analysis study can be viewed in a table format or a graph for-
mat.
You can also check the electric current and electric potential in Circuit Editor.
Running a Magnetic Field Analysis Study

In this section, JMAG-RT is used to create the JMAG-RT model as an example of the procedure.
1. Create an FEM model in JMAG-Designer, and export an input JCF file for use with JMAG-
RT.
ii. Prepare a geometry model, and create a study.
For induction motors, create a frequency analysis. For models other than induction motors,
create a transient analysis.
iii. Set materials, conditions, and study properties, and generate mesh.
Depending on the motor type, add an electrical drive circuit.
iv. Export a JCF file from the study.
This can be either geometry data or mesh data.
2. Start JMAG-RT, and create a RTT file using the file in step 1.
3. Set a control circuit in JMAG-Designer.
ii. Prepare a dummy geometry model, and create a magnetic field transient analysis
study.
If the geometry model does not exist in the project, no other studies can be created except for
the integration analysis study.
iii. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the study and select [Add Circuit].
iv. Create a control circuit diagram.
v. Position JMAG-RT Model components, and link to the JMAG-RT model data file cre-
ated in step 2.
4. Run the analysis.
For example, in the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the study and select [Run Active Case].
5. Check the results.
580
Using JMAG-RT Models in a Commercial Circuit
Simulator
JMAG-RT models can be used in commercial circuit simulators such as Simulink and PSIM.
IMPORTANT Support for coupled analysis using JMAG and PSIM has been discontinued for major ver-
sions and service packs released after April 2023.

• Using JMAG-RT Models in MATLAB/Simulink (page 582)
• Simulink Programs Required to Use JMAG-RT Models (page 583)
• Providing the Execution Environment (page 583)
• Types of Block Related to the JMAG-RT Model (page 583)
• Adding Blocks to the Simulink Model (page 585)
• JMAG-RT Model Blocks: PM Synchronous Motor and Synchronous Reluctance Motor (page 585)
• JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Stepping Motor (page 617)
• JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Linear Solenoid (page 624)
• JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Linear Synchronous Motor (page 631)
• JMAG-RT Model Blocks: SR Motor (page 642)
• JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Induction Motor (page 649)
• JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Induction Motor (Data Created by JMAG-Express) (page 664)
• JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Wound-Field Synchronous Motor (page 670)
• JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Generic Model (page 685)
• JMAG-RT Loss Map Model Blocks (page 698)
• Adding User-specified Circuits to JMAG-RT Model Blocks (page 703)
• Using JMAG-RT Models in PSIM (page 709)
• PSIM Programs Required to Use JMAG-RT Models (page 710)
• Types of MagCoupler-RT Block (page 711)
• Adding MagCoupler-RT Blocks to the PSIM Model (page 712)
• Input/Output Nodes of a MagCoupler-RT Block (page 712)
• General RT Block (page 712)
• Other MagCoupler-RT Blocks (page 713)
581
JMAG-RT
Using JMAG-RT Models in MATLAB/Simulink

• Simulink Programs Required to Use JMAG-RT Models (page 583)
• Types of Block Related to the JMAG-RT Model (page 583)
• Adding Blocks to the Simulink Model (page 585)
• JMAG-RT Model Blocks: PM Synchronous Motor and Synchronous Reluctance Motor (page
585)
• JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Stepping Motor (page 617)
• JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Linear Solenoid (page 624)
• JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Linear Synchronous Motor (page 631)
• JMAG-RT Model Blocks: SR Motor (page 642)
• JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Induction Motor (page 649)
• JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Induction Motor (Data Created by JMAG-Express) (page 664)
• JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Wound-Field Synchronous Motor (page 670)
• JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Generic Model (page 685)
• JMAG-RT Loss Map Model Blocks (page 698)
• Adding User-specified Circuits to JMAG-RT Model Blocks (page 703)
Notes
• All JMAG-RT models provided by JMAG can be used in Simulink.
• Linear solenoid
• Generic model
• JMAG-RT Loss Map models can be used in Simulink.
582
Using JMAG-RT Models in a Commercial Circuit Simulator
Simulink Programs Required to Use JMAG-RT Models

Program Description
MATLAB/Simulink Use versions R2011a or later.
For the latest information, please refer to the following page:
https://www.jmag-international.com/rt_specification/
Simscape Required when using electrical signal input blocks built with the
Simscape Foundation library.
Simscape Electrical Required when using electrical signal input blocks built with the
Simscape Electrical Specialized Power Systems library.
Providing the Execution Environment

Depending on the environment in which the simulation will be run, some preparation is required.
 Installing the Microsoft Redistribution Package

When running on a computer that does not have JMAG installed, it is necessary that the redistrib-
utable package (Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 Redistributable) from Microsoft is installed. Download
the redistributable package from the Microsoft website, and install to your computer.
• Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 Redistributable Package (x86):
https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=8328
• Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 SP1 Redistributable Package (x64):
 Relocating the Simscape Electrical library block (formerly Simscape

SimpowerSystems library block)
In MATLAB/Simulink R2011b and later versions, relocation of the Simscape Electrical library
block is necessary when using the JMAG-RT electric signal input block placed in the following
folder.
(JMAG installation folder)\JMAG_RT\MATLAB6.5.1
The VoltageMeasurement block of the Simscape Electrical library is used for the electric signal input
block placed in this folder. Delete this block, and select the VoltageMeasurement block from the
library browser and relocate it to the model.
Types of Block Related to the JMAG-RT Model
 Blocks to be used with the RTT file

Block Description
JMAG-RT Model This block is provided by JMAG.
This block can link with RTT files that contain JMAG FEA result data cre-
ated using JMAG-RT and JMAG-Express.
This block is further divided into several more types depending on differ-
ences in models and input signals.
583
JMAG-RT
Block Description
Models consist of the following types:
• PM synchronous motors (3-phase, 6-phase)
• Synchronous reluctance motors (3-phase, 6-phase)
• Unipolar stepping motors (2-phase)
• Linear solenoids
• Linear synchronous motors (3-phase)
• SR motors (3-phase, 4-phase, 5-phase)
• Induction motors (3-phase, 6-phase)
• Wound-field synchronous motors
• Generic models
Input signals consist of the following types:
• Electric signals
• Current signals
• Voltage signals
JMAG-RT Loss Map This block is provided by JMAG.
Model This block can link with RTT files that contain the loss map data of effi-
ciency map analysis results created using JMAG-Designer efficiency map
analysis studies.
This block consists of only a single type, and is supported by several types
of motors.
 Blocks to be used with the MathWorks MAT file

Block Description
FEM-parameterized This block is provided by The MathWorks, Inc.
PMSM Data described in pre-existing RTT files can be export to the MathWorks
MAT file (.mat) format by using the MAT file export function for use with
JMAG-RT Viewer FEM-parameterized PMSM. Data loaded into MAT-
LAB from those MAT files can be used with this block.
Motors that support this block are as follows:
• PM synchronous motors (3-phase)
For details on the MAT file export function for use with JMAG-RT Viewer
FEM-parameterized PMSM, see “Exporting MAT Files for MATLAB/Sim-
ulink FEM-Parameterized Block” on page 793. This also introduces an
example procedure for using MAT files.
MEMO For details on the MATLAB/Simulink FEM-parameterized
PMSM block, see The MathWorks Inc. website (https://www.math-
works.com/help/physmod/sps/ref/femparameterizedpmsm.html).
584
Adding Blocks to the Simulink Model
 JMAG-RT Model blocks, JMAG-RT Loss Map Model blocks

Open the Simulink model file (.mdl) exported with the RTT file in the Simulink Command Win-
dow, and copy the block displayed on the screen to the circuit.
If an RTT file referenced by a Generic model electric signal block satisfies any of the following con-
ditions, then the electric signal block settings must be changed;
• When an RTT file contains data other than AC motors
• When an RTT file contains data for AC motors with both stator-side and rotor-side circuits. For
example, SR motors, stepping motors, and wound-field synchronous motors, etc.
See “Replacing the Electric Signal Block When Using a Motor Other Than a Synchronous
Machine (GENERIC)” on page 688.
JMAG-RT Model Blocks: PM Synchronous Motor and Synchronous Reluctance

Motor
• Notes (PMSM, SynRM) (page 585)
• Signal Type (PMSM, SynRM) (page 586)
• Files Referenced by the Block (PMSM, SynRM) (page 587)
• Parameters (PMSM, SynRM) (page 589)
• Input/Output Ports (PMSM, SynRM) (page 603)
• Switch signal terminals setting (PMSM, SynRM) (page 614)
Example: JMAG_RT_pmsm_Vin
Notes (PMSM, SynRM)

• The following models are not supported for synchronous reluctance motors in the current ver-
sion (These models cannot be created with JMAG-RT):
• Spatial harmonic (integral method) models
• If a value exceeding the current range specified when creating a JMAG-RT model is input to the
JMAG-RT model in a circuit simulator, the value of inductance and of torque obtained at the
maximum value or the minimum value of the current are applied. Extrapolations of inductance
and of torque are not performed.
• Setting the rotor or stator skew in a control circuit simulation using the JMAG-RT model of spa-
tial harmonic (integral), requires more calculation time due to structural issues in internal data.
To account for skew in a control circuit simulation, use the apply skew function of the JMAG-
585
JMAG-RT
RT Viewer to output the JMAG-RT model with skew and use that model for control circuit sim-
ulation.
Note, that if a skew is applied to the JMAG-RT model that is output using the JMAG-RT
Viewer apply skew function, and a skew is also applied to the model in the circuit simulator, the
analysis will result in an error.
• In the binary MEX file used in JMAG-RT model blocks, the voltage equation calculator is
described in a C language program.
Signal Type (PMSM, SynRM)

There are three types of signal inputs; electric signal input, voltage signal input, and current signal
input.
• 3-phase PMSM: [Electric signal input]

JMAG_RT_pmsm, JMAG_RT_pmsm_Ein This can be used by connecting to a Simscape Electri-
• 6-phase PMSM: cal domain.
JMAG_RT_pmsm_6phase_Ein This outputs torque and the current flowing in each
• 3-phase SynRM: coil, by entering voltage values from the Simscape
JMAG_RT_synrm, JMAG_RT_synrm_Ein Electrical domain.
• 6-phase SynRM:
JMAG_RT_synrm_6phase_Ein
• 3-phase PMSM: [Voltage signal input]
JMAG_RT_pmsm_Vin Outputs torque and the current flowing in each coil
• 6-phase PMSM: by entering voltage values.
JMAG_RT_pmsm_6phase_Vin Simscape and Simscape Electrical are not required for
• 3-phase SynRM: a simulation using the voltage signal input.
JMAG_RT_synrm_Vin
• 6-phase SynRM:
JMAG_RT_synrm_6phase_Vin
• 3-phase PMSM: [Current signal input]
JMAG_RT_pmsm_Iin Outputs torque and inductance by entering current
• 6-phase PMSM: values.
JMAG_RT_pmsm_6phase_Iin Simscape and Simscape Electrical are not required for
• 3-phase SynRM: a simulation using the current signal input.
JMAG_RT_synrm_Iin When using the current signal input, [Spatial Har-
• 6-phase SynRM: monic (Integral)] cannot be selected for [Accuracy
JMAG_RT_synrm_6phase_Iin Type].
586
Files Referenced by the Block (PMSM, SynRM)
File Description
RTT file (.rtt) The RTT file contains JMAG FEA result data (motor parameter
data) such as inductance and torque.
In the case of a PMSM, one of the following models (or all data) is
described according to the settings when creating the RTT file.
• LdLq model
You cannot edit the contents of the RTT file.
Windows 64bit: MATLAB binary files.
RT_Simulink.mexw64 These files contain the voltage equation calculation code in C-lan-
Linux 64bit: guage. You cannot edit the voltage equation calculation code.
RT_Simulink.mexa64
3-phase PMSM: Simulink model files.
JMAG_RT_pmsm_Ein.mdl These files define the JMAG-RT model (electric signal input) of a
6-phase PMSM: PMSM using the Simscape Foundation library.
JMAG_RT_pms- Either file is output when [Simulink (electric signal input)] is
m_6phase_Ein.mdl selected as a platform when the JMAG-RT model is exported from
the JMAG-RT Library Manager, JMAG-Designer, or JMAG-
Express.
3-phase PMSM: Simulink model file.
JMAG_RT_pmsm.mdl This file defines the JMAG-RT model (electric signal input) of a
PMSM using the Simscape Electrical Specialized Power Systems
library.
This file is output when [Simulink (electric signal input, Special-
ized Power Systems)] is selected as a platform when the JMAG-RT
model is exported from the JMAG-RT Library Manager, JMAG-
Designer, or JMAG-Express.
JMAG_RT_pmsm_Vin.mdl These files define the JMAG-RT model (voltage signal input) of a
6-phase PMSM: PMSM.
JMAG_RT_pms- Either file is output when [Simulink (voltage signal input)] is
m_6phase_Vin.mdl selected as a platform when the JMAG-RT model is exported from
Express.
JMAG_RT_pmsm_Iin.mdl These files define the JMAG-RT model (current signal input) of a
6-phase PMSM: PMSM.
JMAG_RT_pms- Either file is output when [Simulink (current signal input)] is
m_6phase_Iin.mdl selected as a platform when the JMAG-RT model is exported from
Express.
587
JMAG-RT
File Description
3-phase SynRM: Simulink model files.
JMAG_RT_synrm_Ein.mdl These files define the JMAG-RT model (electric signal input) of a
6-phase SynRM: SynRM using the Simscape Foundation library.
JMAG_RT_syn- Either file is output when [Simulink (electric signal input)] is
rm_6phase_Ein.mdl selected as a platform when the JMAG-RT model is exported from
the JMAG-RT Library Manager or JMAG-Designer.
3-phase SynRM: Simulink model file.
JMAG_RT_synrm.mdl This file defines the JMAG-RT model (electric signal input) of a
SynRM using the Simscape Electrical Specialized Power Systems
library.
This file is output when [Simulink (electric signal input, Specialized
Power Systems)] is selected as a platform when the JMAG-RT
model is exported from the JMAG-RT Library Manager or JMAG-
Designer.
JMAG_RT_synrm_Vin.mdl These files define the JMAG-RT model (voltage signal input) of a
6-phase SynRM: SynRM.
JMAG_RT_syn- Either file is output when [Simulink (voltage signal input)] is
rm_6phase_Vin.mdl selected as a platform when the JMAG-RT model is exported from
JMAG_RT_synrm_Iin.mdl These files define the JMAG-RT model (current signal input) of a
6-phase SynRM: SynRM.
JMAG_RT_syn- Either file is output when [Simulink (current signal input)] is
rm_6phase_Iin.mdl selected as a platform when the JMAG-RT model is exported from
Torque correction table file (.pa) This file is exported when the correction table for the current
dependent torque is specified in the [RT Correction] tab of JMAG-
RT Library Manager after a JMAG-RT model is created.
The same file name as the RTT file is used. This file name is used in
the RTT file and cannot be changed.
Note the following when working with the files in the above table:
• When running a control circuit simulation, put the files in the above table in the same folder.
• In the case of the JMAG-RT Library Manager, each file is exported to the folder specified in
the [Copy to Circuit Simulator] dialog in the JMAG-RT Library Manager.
• For JMAG-RT (Linux version), the MEX files and Simulink model files in the above table are
placed in the following directory.
(JMAG installation directory)/solver/mod/tools/rt/simulink
Use the files in this directory after copying them into the same directory as the RTT file.
• In JMAG-Express, each file is output to the folder specified in the [Create JMAG-RT Model]
dialog.
• During control circuit simulation execution, use the file output from the same version of JMAG-
RT and JMAG-Express. All of the files listed in the table above need to be updated if a model
exported from an older version of JMAG-RT is re-calculated with a newer version of JMAG-RT
588
or a control circuit simulation may not run properly. The JMAG-RT model block in the circuit
of Simulink also needs to be updated.
Parameters (PMSM, SynRM)

The following settings can be specified.
MEMO If a correction factor is specified in the JMAG-RT Library Manager, the value is used as the
default value in Simulink.
MEMO In this table, the signal types are indicated by the following abbreviations:
• electric: electric signal input
• voltage: voltage signal input
• current: current signal input
Parameter Description Signal type
RT data file The name of RTT file that linked to JMAG-RT model block electric, volt-
age, current
Accuracy Type This parameter is displayed for a 3-phase motor. Select one of the electric, volt-
following: age, current
• [LdLq (Constant)]:
[LdLq (Constant)] can be selected regardless of which model
(LdLq, simple spatial harmonics, spatial harmonics (differential),
or spatial harmonics (integral)) results are described in the RTT
file.
The average Ld and Lq calculated from the results table and a con-
stant magnet flux are used. The values used for Ld, Lq, and mag-
net flux can be checked from the JMAG-RT [PM Synchronous
Motor] dialog [Information] tab.
The torque equation is used to calculate torque.
• [LdLq (Table)]:
Uses LdLq model results.
A constant magnet flux is used. The magnet flux values used can
be checked from the JMAG-RT [PM Synchronous Motor] dialog
[Information] tab.
The torque equation is used to calculate torque.
• [Simple Spatial Harmonic]:
Uses simple spatial harmonic results. Simple spatial harmonic
models cannot be created with JMAG-Designer 10.5 or later.
• [Spatial Harmonic (Differential)]:
Uses spatial harmonic (differential) model results. The influence of
harmonics from slots can be accounted for by using spatial har-
monic (differential) models. Flux linkage and inductance can be
obtained with sufficient accuracy even in the case of severe mag-
netic saturation.
589
JMAG-RT

• [Spatial Harmonic (Integral)]:
Uses spatial harmonic (integral) model results.
Spatial harmonic (integral) models are models added from JMAG-
Designer Version 19.0.
The influence of harmonics from slots can be accounted for by
using spatial harmonic (integral) models. Flux linkage can be
obtained with sufficient accuracy even in the case of severe mag-
netic saturation.
If you select [Spatial Harmonic (Integral)], use the fixed-step con-
tinuous explicit solver [ode1] (Euler's method) as the Simulink
solver.
When comparing spatial harmonic (integral) models and spatial har-
monic (differential) models, the calculation accuracy is the same for
both but the calculation speed is faster with spatial harmonic (inte-
gral) models.
If you select an accuracy type for a model that is not described in the
RTT file, an error will be output during the calculation.
Use temperature Temperature correction factor use flag. electric, volt-
correction • When this flag is selected, the value inputted in the input port age, current
[Coil Temp] and [Magnet Temp] of the JMAG-RT model block is
used and the temperature correction function become active.
• When this flag is cleared, the value inputted in the input port
[Coil Temp] and [Magnet Temp] of the JMAG-RT model block is
ignored and the temperature correction function is inactive.
The temperature during drive is calculated as 0 K, when the input
port [Coil Temp] and [Magnet Temp] of the JMAG-RT model
block have no connection. When temperature correction is not used,
clear [Use temperature correction].
590

Use iron loss table A flag to account for iron loss. electric, volt-
When [Use iron loss table] is selected, iron loss is taken into account age, current
in calculations that use JMAG-RT models that include iron loss
data.
Select the type of iron loss table to use from the following:
• [1: Table from JMAG]:
Uses iron loss lookup tables that are FEA result data possessed
JMAG-RT models.
• [2: Table from csv]:
Uses iron loss tables added to JMAG-RT models from CSV files.
• This type can be selected when iron loss tables are added to
JMAG-RT models being used using the JMAG-RT [Apply Loss
Table] function.
• When this type is selected, input for JMAG-RT model block
input terminals [DC Voltage] and [Carrier Freq] is required.
• [3: Table from JMAG considering PWM carrier frequency]:
Uses equivalent iron loss resistance tables added to JMAG-RT
models using JMAG-RT Viewer.
• This type can be selected when the harmonic equivalent iron
loss resistance tables are added to JMAG-RT models being used
using the JMAG-RT Viewer [Add Equivalent Iron Loss Resis-
tance Table] function.
Calculations using JMAG-RT models that do not include this data
do not take iron loss into account even when [Use iron loss table] is
selected.
When [1: Table from JMAG] or [2: Table from csv] is selected, iron
loss data is dynamically converted into torque during simulations.
That value is deducted from the value of torque that does not
account for iron loss.
T ' : torque (N·m) that accounts for iron loss
T : torque (N·m) that does not account for iron loss

When [3: Table from JMAG considering PWM carrier frequency] is
selected, value is obtained from the torque table of JMAG-RT mod-
els by using the value after subtracting the current flowing in equiva-
lent iron loss resistance from the input current.
591
JMAG-RT

Specify Filter This can be used when [Use iron loss table] is selected and [3: Table electric, volt-
Inductance (H) from JMAG considering PWM carrier frequency] is also selected. age, current
When [Specify Filter Inductance (H)] is selected, enter a value in the
[Filter Inductance (H)] box.
When [Specify Filter Inductance (H)] is cleared, the inductance
value calculated from the FEA result data lookup table of JMAG-RT
models is used.
Inductance has the effect of suppressing iron loss resulting from cur-
rent harmonic components.
Use AC copper Flag to account for AC copper loss. electric, volt-
loss resistance When [Use AC copper loss resistance] is selected, AC copper loss is age, current
output from the output port [AC Copper Loss].
Select from the following the types of AC copper loss to use.
• [1: Equivalent Resistance from CSV]:
Use harmonic equivalent copper loss resistance data added to
JMAG-RT models from CSV files.
• This type can be selected when harmonic equivalent copper loss
resistance data is added to currently used JMAG-RT models
using the JMAG-RT [Apply Loss Table] function.
For calculations using JMAG-RT models that do not include
harmonic copper loss resistance data, AC copper loss is not
accounted for despite selecting [Use AC copper loss resistance].
• Resistance values equivalent to AC copper loss are added to val-
ues specified via the input parameter [Resistance of Coil].
• [2: Equivalent resistance from winding conductor settings]:
AC copper loss approximately calculated based on the specifica-
tions of the specified conductor wire is used. Both the skin effect
and the proximity effect of the conductor are accounted for when
calculating AC copper loss.
Enter the specifications of the conductor wire to pass through the
slots.
• [Number of conductors in slot height]:
The number of conductor wires in the slot height direction
(radial direction).
• [Number of conductors in slot width]:
The number of conductor wires in the slot width direction (cir-
cumferential direction).
• [Number of slots per phase]:
The number of slots per single phase.
• [Conductor type]:
Conductor wire cross-section geometry.
1: Rectangular, 2: Round
592

Enter the vertical width and horizontal width ([Conductor
height (m)], [Conductor width (m)]) when using rectangular
conductors.
Enter the diameter ([Conductor diameter (m)]) when using
round conductors.
• [Stack Length (m)]:
Stator core stack length.
• [Conductivity [S/m]]:
Conductor wire electrical conductivity.
Note the following:
• AC copper loss is calculated assuming that conductors are con-
nected in series in the slot height direction (radial direction).
• No checks for inconsistencies between the number of conductor
wires specified here and the information for the number of turns
that the JMAG-RT model possesses are executed.
• Use the correction factor [coef_AC_copper_loss (from winding
conductor settings)] when accounting for coil end loss.
Slot cross-sections
Parameter Description Block type

Moment of iner- The inertia moment (kgm2) of the rotating machine. electric, volt-
tia (kgm^2) This parameter is used when [Motion type] is set to [0]. age, current
Friction factor The friction coefficient (Nm/(rad/s)). electric, volt-
(Nm/(rad/s)) This parameter is used when [Motion type] is set to [0]. age, current,
Resistance of coil The coil phase resistance (ohm) electric, volt-
(ohm) age
593
JMAG-RT
Parameter Description Block type

Factor This is the tuning parameter that is used when connecting the MEX electric
module (Simulink signals) and the Simscape Electrical domain
(physical signals).
The default value is “1e3”.
If calculation accuracy does not improve even when reducing the
time interval duration, attempt to increase the value of [Factor] by
one digit. Because it will also not be possible to obtain calculation
accuracy if the value of [Factor] is too small, ensure that setting any
values smaller than the default are avoided.
Sample Time The time step for the analysis. electric, volt-
If the default value of “-1” is used, the time step specified in Sim- age, current
ulink is used in JMAG-RT.
If it takes too long to calculate with the time step specified in Sim-
ulink, specify a positive value for this setting. The value that is speci-
fied is used in the JMAG-RT model.
Offset Angle The initial position of the rotor. electric, volt-
(deg) Specifying this parameter can change the rotor initial position speci- age, current
fied in the RTT file.
The initial position of the rotor is specified in a position where the
direction of d-axis magnetic flux coincides with the direction of the
U-phase coil magnetic flux. However, you can specify the d-axis
when creating a JMAG-RT model.
d-axis direction
Initial position of rotation axis (default)
594

Connection type • [0]: electric, volt-
Star connections (Y-connections) are used. age
• [1]:
Delta connections are used.
When using spatial harmonic (differential) models, determine wiring

patterns according to the used RTT file [Drive Type]. When using
[Sine Wave Drive] RTT files, select [0] (Y connection). When using
[Other] drive RTT files, select [1] (Delta connection).
When using spatial harmonic (integral) models, select [0]. [Other]
drive RTT files do not support spatial harmonic (integral) models.
Use Neutral Point This parameter can be used when “0” (Y-connection) is entered for electric, volt-
[Connection Type]. age
When [Use Neutral Point] is selected, the zero-phase sequence cur-
rent is taken into account in the calculation. Also, a terminal for the
neutral point is added to the JMAG-RT model block.
Note the following:
• When selecting [Use Neutral Point], select [Spatial Harmonic
(Differential)] for [Accuracy type].
• When selecting [Use Neutral Point], use an RTT file that contains
zero-phase sequence current data.
Motion type • [0]: electric, volt-
Calculates the position of the rotor by solving the motion equation age, current
based on the inertia moment and friction coefficient.
• [1]:
Specifies the rotation of the rotor as a constant speed. The rotation
speed can be specified in [Rotation speed].
Rotation speed Specify this if [Motion Type] is set to [1]. electric, volt-
(rpm) age, current
Set Coefficients Correction factor setting flag. electric, volt-
Manually • Selected: age, current
The correction factor to the physical quantity can be specified.
• Cleared:
The correction factor described in the RTT file is used. The cor-
rection factor here is the value specified on the [RT Correction]
tab when creating the JMAG-RT model.
595
JMAG-RT

coef_inductance Correction factor for inductance. electric, volt-
For example, setting [coef_inductance] to “2.0” doubles all the age, current
inductance data.
2
L new = K 1 × K 5 × C 1 × L ( I new )
L new : inductance after correction (H).
L : inductance before correction (H).

K 1 : correction factor for inductance ([coef_inductance]).
K 5 : steel sheet grade ([coef_material]).
C 1 : correction factor for the number of turns. See the description

of [turns_coil1] below.
I new : reference current value (A) after correction. See the descrip-
tion of [turns_coil2] below.
The result for the control circuit simulation based on the numeri-
cal solution for JMAG-RT may be unstable, when the equation
“K_1 * K_5 * (C_1)^2 < 1” for inductance correction is less than
“1.”
coef_flux Correction factor for magnetic flux. electric, volt-
For example, setting [coef_flux] to “2.0” doubles all the magnetic age, current
flux data.
• [Spatial Harmonic (Differential)] and [Spatial Harmonic (Inte-
gral)]:
Ψ new = K 2 × K 4 × K 5 × C 1 × Ψ ( I new )
• [LdLq (Table)]:
Ψ new = K 2 × K 4 × K 5 × C 1 × Ψ
Ψ new : magnetic flux after correction (Wb).
Ψ : magnetic flux before correction (Wb).

K 2 : correction factor for magnetic flux ([coef_flux]).
K 4 : magnet grade ([coef_magnet]).
C 1 : correction value for the number of turns. See the description

of [turns_coil1] below.
MEMO Correction settings for magnet magnetic flux cannot be
used when the FEM models of input JCF files used when creating
RTT models for SynRM do not possess magnets.
596

Use torque coeffi- Correction setting flag for torque using correction table file (.pa). electric, volt-
cient file Select [Use torque coefficient file] to use the current dependence cor- age, current
rection table of torque.
Prepare the current dependent correction table file according to the
following format.
Line1; Table title

Line2; 1: 0 (Fixed Value. 10 characters right-packed), 2: Number
of data point (Number of lines after the Line3. 10 characters right-packed)
From the line3 onwards; 1: Current value, A (20 characters right-packed), 2:
correction factor (20 characters right-packed)
The following is a sample.

Untitled
0 5
1.00000000000E+000 2.00000000000E-001
2.00000000000E+000 4.00000000000E-001
3.00000000000E+000 6.00000000000E-001
4.00000000000E+000 8.00000000000E-001
5.00000000000E+000 1.00000000000E+000
The following should be noted when the current dependence correc-

tion table of torque is used:
• The name of the current dependent correction table file must be
the same as the input JCF file of JMAG. For example, if the input
file of JMAG is “motor.jcf”, please use “motor.pa”.
• Put the current dependent correction table file in the same folder
as the Simulink MDL file.
If the current exceeds the range specified in the table during a con-
trol/circuit simulation, the table data is not extrapolated and the val-
ues of inductance and torque obtained at the maximum value or the
minimum value of the current are output.
coef_torque Correction factor for torque. electric, volt-
For example, setting [coef_torque] to “2.0” doubles all the torque age, current
data.
T new = K 3 × K pa3 ( I ) × K 5 × T ( I new )
T new : torque after correction (Nm).
T : torque before correction (Nm).

K 3 : correction factor for torque ([coef_torque]).
K pa3 : correction factor for torque by the current dependence cor-

rection table ([Use torque coefficient file]).
I : reference current value (A) before correction.
597
JMAG-RT

coef_magnet Change of a magnet grade. electric, volt-
This coefficient easily simulates the effects of magnets that have been age, current
changed. This coefficient affects the magnetic flux.
MEMO Grade correction settings for magnets cannot be used when
the FEM models of input JCF files used when creating RTT models
for SynRM do not possess magnets.
coef_material Change of a steel sheet grade. electric, volt-
This correction factor easily simulates the effects of materials that age, current
have been changed. This coefficient affects the inductance, magnetic
flux, and torque.
turns_coil1 Correction value of the number of turns in coil. electric, volt-
Specify the number of coil turns for one phase. age, current
When setting [turns_coil1], the effects on the following physical
quantities can be easily simulated by changing the number of coil
turns.
• Inductance (see the equation of [coef_inductance])
• Magnetic flux (see the equation of [coef_flux])

C 1 = N new1 ⁄ N
C 1 : correction factor for the number of turns
N new1 : correction value for the number of turns (Turn) ([turns_-

coil1])
N : number of turns (Turn)
MEMO If you are using an RTT file that does not contain the data
of the number of turns, the value of [turns_coil1] is not used in the
calculation.
turns_coil2 A winding correction for reference current. electric, volt-
Specify the number of coil turns for one phase. age, current
By changing this value, control circuit simulation can be performed
with the number of turns different from the number of turns set
when creating the JMAG-RT model.
• When the number of turns is not changed in control circuit simu-
lation:
Enter the number of turns set when the JMAG-RT model was cre-
ated.
• When the number of turns is changed in control circuit simula-
tion:
Enter a number of turns different from the number of turns set
when the JMAG-RT model was created.
598

[turns_coil2] has an effect on the reference current value. The refer-
ence current value is used when the current dependence result physi-
cal quantity table of the FEA in the JMAG-RT model is referenced
according to the input from the circuit simulator. Changing the ref-
erence current value of the coil affects the following physical quanti-
ties.
• Inductance (see the equation of [coef_Inductance])
• Torque (see the equation of [coef_torque])

I new = C 2 × I
C 2 = N new2 ⁄ N
I new : reference current value (A) after correction
I : reference current value (A) before correction

C 2 : correction factor for the number of turns in coil for reference
current value
N new2 : correction value for the number of turns in coil for refer-
ence current value (Turn) ([turns_coil2])
N : number of turns (Turn)
MEMO If you are using an RTT file that does not contain the data
of the number of turns, the value of [turns_coil2] is not used in the
calculation.
coef_AC_cop- AC copper loss correction factor. electric, volt-
per_loss (from Setting “2.0” for example uniformly multiplies AC copper loss by age, current
winding conduc- 2.0.
tor settings)
This parameter value is used when [Use AC copper loss resistance] is
set.
Specify this to account for coil end AC copper loss.
base_coil_tem- Base temperature of coil (K). electric, volt-
perature Default: 293.15K. age, current
Enter a value larger than 0.
R′ = R ( 1 + α ( Tr now – Tr base ) )

α : temperature correction factor of coil (ppm/K) ([coef_coil_tem-
perature])
Tr now : coil temperature during motor drive (temperature during
analysis) (K). It is a value input to the input port [Coil Temp]
Tr base : base temperature of coil (K) ([base_coil_temperature])
599
JMAG-RT

coef_coil_tem- Temperature correction factor for coil (ppm/K). electric, volt-
perature Default: 3810 ppm/K. age, current
Range: 0.0 and over.
See the description of [base_coil_temperature] for correction equa-
tion.
base_magnet_- Base temperature of magnet (K). electric, volt-
temperature Default: 293.15K. age, current
k
F ′ = F  1 + --------- ( Tf now – Tf base )
 100 

k : temperature correction factor of magnet (%/K) ([coef_mag-
net_temperature])
Tf now : magnet temperature during motor drive (temperature
during analysis) (K). It is a value input to the input port [Magnet
Temp].
Tf base : base temperature of magnet (K) ([base_magnet_tempera-
ture])
MEMO Temperature correction settings for magnets cannot be used
when the FEM models of input JCF files used when creating RTT
models for SynRM do not possess magnets.
coef_magnet_- Temperature correction factor for magnet (%/K). electric, volt-
temperature Default: -0.11%/K. age, current
Range: -100 - 0.0 (negative).
See the description of [base_magnet_temperature] for correction
equation.
MEMO Temperature correction settings for magnets cannot be used
when the FEM models of input JCF files used when creating RTT
models for SynRM do not possess magnets.
Table data inter- Select an interpolation method for the table. The interpolation electric, volt-
polation type method selected here applies to all the tables for JMAG-RT models. age, current
• [Linear]:
Linear interpolation. This is the default method.
• [Cubic]:
Cubic interpolation. Method which uses approximately two points
in the interpolation interval, and interpolates with a cubic func-
tion.
600

Set skew option Flag to account for skew. electric, volt-
Skew is to tilt the motor stator or rotor to the axis direction to con- age, current
trol torque ripple.
A JMAG-RT model created from a model without skew is handled
as a JMAG-RT model created from a model with a skew when [Set
skew option] is selected.
Note the following:
• Not only applying a skew to only the rotor or stator but also apply-
ing skews to both the rotor and stator is supported.
• In this method, a skew is expressed by stacking and averaging
numerous cross-sections which are created corresponding to the
skew angle based on the results of a JMAG-RT model (torque, flux
linkage, inductance) generated using a model without skew.
• This method accounts for simple skews. 3D effects due to skew are
not accounted for with this method so the results are not com-
pletely consistent with when a JMAG-RT model created from a
3D model with skew is used.
Creating a JMAG-RT model using a 3D model with a skew is rec-
ommended when you wish to strictly evaluate the effects of a skew.
• When skew is accounted for, the JMAG-RT model result table
where skew is not accounted for is replaced with a result table after
accounting for a skew as preprocessing of the calculation. For this
reason, it may take time for pre-processing of the calculation.
• When [Accuracy Type] is [Spatial Harmonic (Integral)], [Set skew
option] cannot be used.
Skew type of Skew type of rotors or stators. These can be specified when [Set skew electric, volt-
rotor /Skew type option] is selected. age, current
of stator Select one from the following:
• [No Skew]
• [Linear Skew]
• [V Skew]
• [Step Skew]
Left: Linear skew of a stator, Center: V-skew of a stator, Right: Step skew of a rotor
601
JMAG-RT

Skew angle (deg) These can be specified when [Set skew option] is selected. electric, volt-
Enter the angle for a full model with a mechanical angle (angle dif- age, current
ference between top face and bottom face). The counterclockwise
direction in relation to the rotation axis will be positive.
A negative value can also be entered for the skew angle. If the skews
of the rotor and stator are facing a different direction, enter a nega-
tive value for the skew angle of one side.
In the case of [Linear skew] or [Step skew], the cross section at the
center of the rotation axis direction becomes the reference plane. For
example, if the skew angle is θ , the angle difference between the top
and center is +0.5 θ , and the angle difference between the center and
bottom is -0.5 θ .
Number of steps Steps of a skew. electric, volt-
Specify when [Step skew] is selected in [rotor_skew_type] or [sta- age, current
tor_skew_type].
Enter a value higher than 2.
From left to right: [Linear skew], [V-skew], [Step skew] (3 steps)

Add circuit Flag for adding user-specified circuits. electric
Additional flags for user-specified circuits.
Calculations can be run accounting for the circuit data you specified
in a Netlist file (.cir). Select [Add circuit] and enter the full path of
the Netlist file in the text box. If you specify only a file name, a Net-
list file located in the same folder as the Simulink model file (.mdl)
will be used.
See “Adding User-specified Circuits to JMAG-RT Model Blocks” on
page 703 for details on this function.
602
Input/Output Ports (PMSM, SynRM)
 3-phase motors
3-phase motor
Electric signal input (JMAG_RT_pmsm block and JMAG_RT_synrm block)
Input
Tm Load torque (Nm).
The torque corresponding to load connected with a motor shaft.
switch signal A Switch signal for connection with power supply of A-phase coil terminal (On:
1, Off: 0).
When selecting [Spatial Harmonic (Integral)] for [Accuracy type], turn on/off
all of the switch signals A, B, and C.
The spatial harmonic (integral) model supports for normal driving or driving
with no-load when all terminals are open, and does not supports for open-
phase driving.
Refer also to the explanation on “Switch signal terminals setting (PMSM,
SynRM)” on page 614.
switch signal B Switch signal for connection with power supply of B-phase coil terminal (On:
1, Off: 0)
switch signal C Switch signal for connection with power supply of C-phase coil terminal (On:
1, Off: 0)
switch signal N This input port is displayed when [Use Neutral Point] is selected.
Switch signal for connection with power supply of the neutral point terminal
(On: 1, Off: 0).
Coil Temp Coil temperature (K)
Magnet Temp Magnet temperature (K).
This input terminal cannot be used when the FEM models of input JCF files
used when creating RTT models for SynRM do not possess magnets.
603
JMAG-RT
DC Voltage When using a JMAG-RT model with user loss data, input a DC bus voltage
(V). When there is no input for the DC Voltage, 0 V is used for the DC volt-
age.
When using a JMAG-RT model without user loss data, it is not necessary to
input DC Voltage.
For details on applying loss data to a JMAG-RT model, see “Adding Loss
Carrier Freq When using a JMAG-RT model with user loss data, input a carrier frequency
(Hz). When there is no input for the Carrier Freq, 0 Hz is used for the carrier
frequency.
input Carrier Freq.
Output
is_abc Line current of each phase (ia, ib, ic) (A)
is_qd dq-axis current (is_q, is_d) (A).
See “Conversion formulas for is_qd and vs_qd” on page 612.
vs_qd dq-axis voltage (is_q, is_d) (V).
wm Rotation speed (rad/s)
thetam Rotation angle (rad)
Te Output torque (Nm).
The torque generated in air gap within a motor. The motor runs with “Te -
Tm” values.
Fabc For a spatial harmonic (differential) model and spatial harmonic (integral)
model, total flux linkage in coil (Wb). This value includes the magnetic flux
caused by the magnet and the current flowing in a coil.
For an LdLq model, flux linkage in each coil (Wb) caused by the magnet in
no-load.
LdLq For a spatial harmonic (differential) model, the d-axis inductance (H) and q-
axis inductance (H) calculated by 3-phase to 2-phase conversion of a 3-by-3
matrix of phase inductances included in an RTT file. In this case, both the d-
axis and q-axis are differential inductances.
For a spatial harmonic (integral) model, the d-axis inductance (H) and q-axis
inductance (H) are calculated from the total flux linkage of the coil. In this
case, only Ld is the differential inductance.
For an LdLq model, the d-axis inductance (H) and q-axis inductance (H)
included in an RTT file. The d-axis is differential inductance and the q-axis is
linear inductance.
See “Definition formulas for d- and q-axis inductance” on page 613.
Iron Loss Iron loss (W)
DC Copper Loss DC copper loss (W).
See “Calculation formulas for DC Copper Loss and AC Copper Loss” on
page 614.
604
AC Copper Loss AC copper loss (W).

This is output when [Use AC copper loss resistance] is selected.
page 614.
User Specified For a spatial harmonic (differential) model and spatial harmonic (integral)
Parameters model, any physical quantity set in the [Output Port] tab in the JMAG-RT
Library Manager. Value depending on current and mechanical angle.
Input/output
A A-phase terminal
B B-phase terminal
C C-phase terminal
N Neutral point terminal
Voltage signal input (JMAG_RT_pmsm_Vin block and JMAG_RT_synrm_Vin block)
Input
Va Electric potential of U-phase terminal (V)
Vb Electric potential of V-phase terminal (V)
Vc Electric potential of W-phase terminal (V)
Vn Electric potential of neutral point terminal (V)
age.
input DC Voltage.
frequency.
input Carrier Freq.
Output
605
JMAG-RT

Tm” values.
Fabc For a spatial harmonic (differential) model and spatial harmonic (integral)
model, total flux linkage in coil (Wb). This value includes the magnetic flux
caused by the magnet and the current flowing in a coil.
no-load.
For a spatial harmonic (integral) model, the d-axis inductance (H) and q-axis
inductance (H) are calculated from the total flux linkage of the coil. In this
case, only Ld is the differential inductance.
linear inductance.
page 614.
page 614.
User Specified For a spatial harmonic (differential) model and spatial harmonic (integral)
Parameter model, any physical quantity set in the [Output Port] tab in the JMAG-RT
Library Manager. Value depending on current and mechanical angle.
Current signal input (JMAG_RT_pmsm_Iin block, JMAG_RT_synrm_Iin)
Input
Ia Current of U-phase coils (A)
Ib Current of V-phase coils (A)
Ic Current of W-phase coils (A)
coilTemp Coil temperature (K)
magTemp Magnet temperature (K).
606
age.
input DC Voltage.
frequency.
input Carrier Freq.
Output
Tm” values.
Fabc For a spatial harmonic (differential) model, total flux linkage in coil (Wb).
This value includes the magnetic flux caused by the magnet and the current
flowing in a coil.
no-load.
linear inductance.
page 614.
page 614.
User Specified For a spatial harmonic (differential) model, any physical quantity set in the
Parameter [Output Port] tab in the JMAG-RT Library Manager. Value depending on
current and mechanical angle.
607
JMAG-RT
 6-phase motors
6-phase motor
Electric signal input (JMAG_RT_pmsm_6phase block and JMAG_RT_synrm_6phase block)
Input
switch signal A1 Switch signal for connection with power supply of A1-phase coil terminal
(On: 1, Off: 0).
Refer also to the explanation on “Switch signal terminals setting (PMSM,
SynRM)” on page 614.
switch signal B1 Switch signal for connection with power supply of B1-phase coil terminal
(On: 1, Off: 0)
switch signal C1 Switch signal for connection with power supply of C1-phase coil terminal
(On: 1, Off: 0)
switch signal A2 Switch signal for connection with power supply of A2-phase coil terminal
(On: 1, Off: 0).
switch signal B2 Switch signal for connection with power supply of B2-phase coil terminal
(On: 1, Off: 0)
switch signal C2 Switch signal for connection with power supply of C2-phase coil terminal
(On: 1, Off: 0)
age.
input DC Voltage.
608
frequency.
input Carrier Freq.
Output
is_A1B1C1_A2B2C Line current of each phase (ia1, ib1, ic1, ia2, ib2, ic2)(A)
2
is_q1d1_q2d2 d1q1-axis current (is_q1, is_d1) (A) and d2q2-axis current (is_q2, is_d2) (A).
See the description of the 3-phase motor for details.
vs_q1d1_q2d2 d1q1-axis voltage (is_q1, is_d1) (V) and d2q2-axis voltage (is_q2, is_d2) (V).
See the description of the 3-phase motor for details.
Tm” values.
Fa1b1c1_a2b2c2 Total flux linkage in coil (Wb). This value includes the magnetic flux caused
by the magnet and the current flowing in a coil.
Lxx 16 instances of dq coordinate system inductance values for two coil sets are
output. The definition of each value is as follows:
(1) Ld1d1, (2) Ld1q1, (3) Lq1d1, (4) Lq1q1,
(5) Ld1d2, (6) Ld1q2, (7) Lq1d2, (8) Lq1q2,
(9) Ld2d1, (10) Ld2q1, (11) Lq2d1, (12) Lq2q1,
(13) Ld2d2, (14) Ld2q2, (15) Lq2d2, (16) Lq2q2
dq-axis inductance (H) is calculated by the 3-phase to 2-phase conversion of a

3-by-3 matrix phase inductance included in an RTT file. In these circum-
stances, both the d-axis and q-axis are differential inductances.
page 614.
page 614.
User Specified Any physical quantity set in the [Output Port] tab in the JMAG-RT Library
Parameters Manager. Value depending on current and mechanical angle.
Input/output
A1 A1-phase terminal
B1 B1-phase terminal
C1 C1-phase terminal
A2 A2-phase terminal
B2 B2-phase terminal
609
JMAG-RT
C2 C2-phase terminal
Voltage signal input (JMAG_RT_pmsm_Vin_6phase block and

JMAG_RT_synrm_6phase_Vin block)
Input
Va1 Electric potential of U1-phase terminal (V)
Vb1 Electric potential of V1-phase terminal (V)
Vc1 Electric potential of W1-phase terminal (V)
Va2 Electric potential of U2-phase terminal (V)
Vb2 Electric potential of V2-phase terminal (V)
Vc2 Electric potential of W2-phase terminal (V)
age.
input DC Voltage.
frequency.
input Carrier Freq.
Output
is_a1b1c1_a2b2c2 Line current of each phase (ia1, ib1, ic1, ia2, ib2, ic2)(A)
Tm” values.
610
(1) Ld1d1, (2) Ld1q1, (3) Lq1d1, (4) Lq1q1,
(5) Ld1d2, (6) Ld1q2, (7) Lq1d2, (8) Lq1q2,
(9) Ld2d1, (10) Ld2q1, (11) Lq2d1, (12) Lq2q1,
(13) Ld2d2, (14) Ld2q2, (15) Lq2d2, (16) Lq2q2

page 614.
page 614.
Parameter Manager. Value depending on current and mechanical angle.
Current signal input (JMAG_RT_pmsm_Iin_6phase block and JMAG_RT_synrm_6phase_Iin

block)
Input
Ia1 Current of U1-phase coils (A)
Ib1 Current of V1-phase coils (A)
Ic1 Current of W1-phase coils (A)
Ia2 Current of U2-phase coils (A)
Ib2 Current of V2-phase coils (A)
Ic2 Current of W2-phase coils (A)
magTemp Magnet temperature (K).
age.
input DC Voltage.
611
JMAG-RT
frequency.
input Carrier Freq.
Output
Tm” values.
(1) Ld1d1, (2) Ld1q1, (3) Lq1d1, (4) Lq1q1,
(5) Ld1d2, (6) Ld1q2, (7) Lq1d2, (8) Lq1q2,
(9) Ld2d1, (10) Ld2q1, (11) Lq2d1, (12) Lq2q1,
(13) Ld2d2, (14) Ld2q2, (15) Lq2d2, (16) Lq2q2

page 614.
page 614.
 Output value details
Conversion formulas for is_qd and vs_qd
 
2 2
  cos Θ cos  Θ – --- π cos  Θ + --- π  Xu 
 Yd   3   3   
  = K× ×  Xv 
 Yq  2 2  
  – sin Θ – sin  Θ – --- π – sin  Θ + --- π  Xw 
 3   3 
 
Y d , Y q : d-axis and q-axis physical quantities after conversion
K : Coefficient (Power invariant: K = 2 ⁄ 3)
612
Θ : Electrical angle (rad)
Θ = θ deg × π ⁄ 180 θ deg = θ e + θ e0
θ deg : Electrical angle (deg)
θ e : Input electrical angle (deg)
θ e0 : Initial electrical angle (deg)
X u , X v , X w : U-phase, V-phase, and W-phase physical quantities prior to conversion
Definition formulas for d- and q-axis inductance

PMSM:
dφ d φq
L dd = --------- L qs = -----
dI d Iq
• Star connection:
3 3
2 2
• Delta connection:
3 1 3 1
I d = – --- I sin ( βπ ⁄ 180 ) × ------- Iq = --- I cos ( βπ ⁄ 180 ) × -------
2 3 2 3
L dd , L qs : d-axis dynamic inductance (H) and q-axis static inductance (H)
SynRM:
φd φq
L ds = ----- L qs = -----
Id Iq
• Star connection:
3 3
2 2
• Delta connection:
1 1
Id = – 3
3
--- I sin ( βπ ⁄ 180 ) × ------- Iq = --- I cos ( βπ ⁄ 180 ) × -------
2 3 2 3
L ds , L qs : d-axis and q-axis static inductance (H)
613
JMAG-RT
However, the d-axis inductance for a permanent magnet assisted SynRM is defined by the following
formula:
L ds = (φ d – φ magnet d ) ⁄ I d
φ magnet d : d-axis magnet magnetic flux (Wb).

The flux linkage for the FEM coil when the current is zero.
Calculation formulas for DC Copper Loss and AC Copper Loss

• DC Copper Loss:
W DCcopper = R × ( i d × i d + i q × i q )
W DCcopper : DC copper loss (W)
R : FEM coil resistance value (ohm)
i d : d-axis component of current (A)
i q : q-axis component of current (A)
• AC copper loss when using harmonic equivalent copper loss resistance data added to JMAG-RT
models from CSV files:
W ACcopper = R × ( i d × i d + i q × i q )
W ACcopper : AC copper loss (W)
R : Value obtained by converting harmonic copper loss into resistance (ohm)
• AC copper loss when using AC copper loss approximately calculated based on the specifications
of specified conductor wire:
W ACcopper : AC copper loss resistance (W)
R : resistance calculated from the specifications of the conductor wire (ohm)
i d : d-axis component of the current corresponding to AC copper loss (A)
i q : q-axis component of the current corresponding to AC copper loss (A)
Switch signal terminals setting (PMSM, SynRM)

The ON/OFF signal of a switch that is connected to a, b, and c terminals can be specified for these
switch signal terminals.
• If the switch is ON, enter “1”
• If the switch is OFF or the terminals are open, enter “0”.
614
Switch signal
terminals
Connection example 1: A JMAG-RT model block is connected to the power source via the
switches
The figure below is an example of a connection where terminals a, b, and c are connected to the
power source through the switches. “0” is set to the switch signal terminal if both of the switches
connected to each phase are OFF. “1” is specified if either of the switches is ON. For this example,
the current flowing in each phase is monitored and the switch signal terminal is “0” if the threshold
is below 1.0 x 10-4A.
PAM drive
615
JMAG-RT
Connection example 2: A JMAG-RT model block is connected to the power source directly
The terminals a, b, and c are connected to the power source without passing through the switches.
Arrange the AC voltage source block, and then specify “1” to the switch signal terminal.
Connection without the switches
Connection example 3: The terminals a, b, and c of a JMAG-RT model block are open
If the terminals a, b, and c are open, specify “0” to the switch signal terminal.
For example, specify “0” to the switch signal terminal to calculate the induced voltages as indicated
in the figure below.
Induced voltage calculation
616
JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Stepping Motor

• Signal Type (STEP) (page 617)
• Files Referenced by the Block (STEP) (page 618)
• Parameters (STEP) (page 619)
• Input/Output Ports (STEP) (page 622)
Example: JMAG_RT_2_mono_step
Signal Type (STEP)

input.
JMAG_RT_2_mono_step_Ein, [Electric signal input]

JMAG_RT_2_mono_step This can be used by connecting to a Simscape Electrical domain.
This solves the circuit equation and outputs torque and the current
flowing in each coil, by entering voltage values from the Simscape
Electrical domain.
JMAG_RT_2_mono_step_Vin [Voltage signal input]
Solves the circuit equation and outputs torque and the current flow-
ing in each coil, by entering voltage values.
Simscape and Simscape Electrical are not required for a simulation
using the voltage signal input.
JMAG_RT_2_mono_step_Iin [Current signal input]
Outputs torque by entering current values.
using the current signal input.
617
JMAG-RT
Files Referenced by the Block (STEP)
File Description
RTT file (.rtt) The RTT file contains JMAG FEA result data (motor
parameter data) such as inductance and torque.
RT_Simulink.mexw64
Linux 64bit:
RT_Simulink.mexa64
JMAG_RT_2_mono_step_Ein.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the JMAG-RT model (electric signal
input) of a 2-phase stepping motor using the Simscape
Foundation library.
This file is output when [Simulink (electric signal
input)] is selected as a platform when the JMAG-RT
model is exported from the JMAG-RT Library Man-
ager.
JMAG_RT_2_mono_step.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the JMAG-RT model (electric signal
input) of a 2-phase stepping motor using the Simscape
Electrical Specialized Power Systems library.
This file is output when [Simulink (electric signal
input, Specialized Power Systems)] is selected as a plat-
form when the JMAG-RT model is exported from the
JMAG_RT_2_mono_step_Vin.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the JMAG-RT model (voltage signal
input) of a 2-phase stepping motor.
This file is output when [Simulink (voltage signal
ager.
JMAG_RT_2_mono_step_Iin.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the JMAG-RT model (current signal
input) of a 2-phase stepping motor.
This file is output when [Simulink (current signal
ager.
• In the case of the JMAG-RT Library Manager, each file is output to the folder specified in the
[Copy to Circuit Simulator] dialog in the JMAG-RT Library Manager.
• For JMAG-RT (Linux version), the library and MDL files in the above table are placed in the
following directory.
618
Use the library and MDL files in this directory after copying them into the same directory as
the RTT file.
• Only the files that are exported from the same version of JMAG-RT can be used for a control cir-
cuit simulation. All of the files listed in the table above need to be updated if a model exported
from an older version of JMAG-RT is re-calculated with a newer version of JMAG-RT or a con-
trol circuit simulation may not run properly. The JMAG-RT model block in the circuit of Sim-
ulink also needs to be updated.
Parameters (STEP)
RT data file The name of RTT file that linked to JMAG-RT model block electric, voltage,
current
Use temperature Temperature correction factor use flag. electric, voltage,
correction • When this flag is selected, the value inputted in the input port current
[coilTemp] and [magTemp] of the JMAG-RT model block is
The temperature during drive is calculated as 0 K, when the
input port [coilTemp] and [magTemp] of the JMAG-RT model
block have no connection. When temperature correction is not
used, clear [Use temperature correction] as a parameter of the
Moment of inertia The inertia moment J of the rotating machine (kg·m2) electric, voltage,
current
Friction factor The friction coefficient (Nm/(rad/s)). electric, voltage,
current
Resistance of coil The resistance of the coil (ohm). electric, voltage
Factor This is the tuning parameter that is used when connecting the electric
MEX module (Simulink signals) and the Simscape Electrical
domain (physical signals).
time interval duration, attempt to increase the value of [Factor]
by one digit. Because it will also not be possible to obtain calcu-
lation accuracy if the value of [Factor] is too small, ensure that
setting any values smaller than the default are avoided.
619
JMAG-RT

Sample time The time step for the analysis. electric, voltage,
If the default value of “-1” is used, the time step specified in current
Simulink is used in JMAG-RT.
If it takes too long to calculate with the time step specified in
Simulink, type a positive value for this parameter. The value that
is specified is used in JMAG-RT.
turns_coil2 A winding correction for reference current. electric, voltage,
Specify the number of coil turns for one phase. current
By changing this value, control circuit simulation can be per-
formed with the number of turns different from the number of
turns set when creating the JMAG-RT model.
• When the number of turns is not changed in control circuit
simulation:
Enter the number of turns set when the JMAG-RT model was
created.
• When the number of turns is changed in control circuit simu-
lation:
Enter a number of turns different from the number of turns
set when the JMAG-RT model was created.
[turns_coil2] has an effect on the reference current value. The

reference current value is used when the current dependence
result physical quantity table of the FEA in the JMAG-RT
model is referenced according to the input from the circuit sim-
ulator. Changing the reference current value of the coil affects
the following physical quantities.
• Inductance
• Torque

I new = C 2 × I
C 2 = N new2 ⁄ N
I new : reference current value (A) after correction.
I : reference current value (A) before correction.

C 2 : correction factor for the number of turns in coil for refer-
ence current value.
N new2 : correction value for the number of turns in coil for
reference current value (Turn) ([turns_coil2]).
N : the number of turns of the coil.
Offset Angle The initial position of the rotational angle (deg). electric, voltage,
The initial position specified in the FEM model is used. The current
default position can be offset by specifying this parameter.
620

Set Coefficients Correction factor setting flag. electric, voltage,
Manually • When this flag is selected, the correction factor to the physical current
quantity can be specified.
• When this flag is cleared, the correction factor described in the
RTT file is used. The correction factor here is the value speci-
fied on the [RT Correction] tab when creating the JMAG-RT
model.
base_coil_tempera- Base temperature of coil (K). electric, voltage,
ture Default: 293.15K. current
R′ = R ( 1 + α ( Tr now – Tr base ) )
R' : resistance after correction (ohm).

R : resistance before correction (ohm).
α : temperature correction factor of coil (ppm/K) ([coef_-
coil_temperature]).
Tr now : coil temperature during motor drive (temperature
during analysis) (K). It is a value input to the input port [coil-
Temp].
Tr base : base temperature of coil (K) ([base_coil_tempera-
ture]).
coef_coil_tempera- Temperature correction factor for coil (ppm/K). electric, voltage,
ture Default: 3810 ppm/K. current
See the description of [base_coil_temperature] for correction
equation.
base_magnet_tem- Base temperature of magnet (K). electric, voltage,
perature Default: 293.15K. current
k
F ′ = F  1 + --------- ( Tf now – Tf base )
 100 
F ' : magnetic flux after correction (Wb).

F : magnetic flux before correction (Wb).
k : temperature correction factor of magnet (%/K) ([coef_-
magnet_temperature]).
Tf now : magnet temperature during motor drive (temperature
during analysis) (K). It is a value input to the input port
[magTemp].
Tf base : base temperature of magnet (K) ([base_magnet_tem-
perature]).
621
JMAG-RT

coef_magnet_tem- Temperature correction factor for magnet (%/K). electric, voltage,
perature Default: -0.11%/K. current
equation.
Table data interpo- Select an interpolation method for the table. The interpolation electric, voltage,
lation type method selected here applies to all the tables for JMAG-RT current
models.
• [Linear]:
Linear interpolation. This is the default method
• [Cubic]:
Cubic interpolation. Method which uses approximately two
points in the interpolation interval, and interpolates with a
cubic function.
Input/Output Ports (STEP)
 Electric signal input (JMAG_RT_2_mono_step)
Input
Tm Load torque (Nm). The torque corresponding to load connected with a
motor shaft.
magTemp Magnet temperature (K)
Output
Iab Coil current of each phase (ia, -ia, ib, -ib) (A)
Te Output torque (Nm). The torque generated in air gap within a motor. The
motor runs with “Te - Tm” values.
Input/output
Ain A-phase signal terminal
-Ain -A-phase signal terminal
Bin B-phase signal terminal
-Bin -B-phase signal terminal
622
Aout A-phase signal terminal

-Aout -A-phase signal terminal
Bout B-phase signal terminal
-Bout -B-phase signal terminal
 Voltage signal input (JMAG_RT_2_mono_step_Vin)
Input
Va Electric potential of A-phase terminal (V)
-Va Electric potential of -A-phase terminal (V)
Vb Electric potential of B-phase terminal (V)
-Vb Electric potential of -B-phase terminal (V)
motor shaft.
Output
Iab Coil current of each phase (ia, -ia, ib, -ib) (A)
 Current signal input(JMAG_RT_2_mono_step_Iin)
Input
motor shaft.
la Current of A-phase coils (A)
-la Current of -A-phase coils (A)
lb Current of B-phase coils(A)
-lb Current of -B-phase coils(A)
Output
623
JMAG-RT
JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Linear Solenoid

• Signal Type (SOLENOID) (page 624)
• Files Referenced by the Block (SOLENOID) (page 625)
• Parameters (SOLENOID) (page 626)
• Input/Output Ports (SOLENOID) (page 629)
Example: JMAG_RT_solenoid
Signal Type (SOLENOID)

input.
JMAG_RT_solenoid_Ein, [Electric signal input]

JMAG_RT_solenoid This can be used by connecting to a Simscape Electrical domain.
This solves the circuit equation and outputs electromagnetic force and the
current flowing in each coil, by entering voltage values from the Simscape
Electrical domain.
JMAG_RT_solenoid_Vin [Voltage signal input]
Solves the circuit equation and outputs electromagnetic force and the cur-
rent flowing in each coil, by entering voltage values.
Simscape and Simscape Electrical are not required for a simulation using
the voltage signal input.
JMAG_RT_solenoid_Iin [Current signal input]
Outputs electromagnetic force and inductance by entering current values.
the current signal input.
624
Files Referenced by the Block (SOLENOID)
File Description
RTT file (.rtt) The RTT file contains JMAG FEA result data such as inductance
and electromagnetic force.
RT_Simulink.mexw64
Linux 64bit:
RT_Simulink.mexa64
JMAG_RT_solenoid_Ein.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the linear solenoid JMAG-RT model (electric signal
input) using the Simscape Foundation library.
This file is output when [Simulink (electric signal input)] is selected
as a platform when the JMAG-RT model is exported from the
JMAG_RT_solenoid.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the linear solenoid JMAG-RT model (electric signal
input) using the Simscape Electrical Specialized Power Systems
library.
model is exported from the JMAG-RT Library Manager.
JMAG_RT_solenoid_Vin.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the linear solenoid JMAG-RT model (voltage signal
input).
This file is output when [Simulink (voltage signal input)] is selected
JMAG_RT_solenoid_Iin.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the linear solenoid JMAG-RT model (current sig-
nal input).
This file is output when [Simulink (current signal input)] is selected
the RTT file.
• Only the files that are exported from the same version of JMAG-RT can be used for a control cir-
cuit simulation. All of the files listed in the table above need to be updated if a model exported
625
JMAG-RT
from an older version of JMAG-RT is re-calculated with a newer version of JMAG-RT or a con-
trol circuit simulation may not run properly. The JMAG-RT model block in the circuit of Sim-
ulink also needs to be updated.
Parameters (SOLENOID)
current
correction • When this flag is selected, the value inputted in the input port current
input port [coilTemp] and [magTemp] of the JMAG-RT model
block have no connection. When temperature correction is not
used, clear [Use temperature correction] as a parameter of the
Mass The mass of the mover (kg). electric, voltage,
current
Friction factor The friction coefficient (N/(m/s)). electric, voltage,
current
Spring constant The spring constant (N/m). electric, voltage,
current
Sample Time The time step for the analysis. electric, voltage,
Simulink is used for the JMAG-RT model.
If the calculation takes to long with the time step specified in
Simulink, specify a positive value for this parameter. The value
that is specified is used for the JMAG-RT model.
626

By changing this value, control circuit simulation can be per- current
simulation:
created.
lation:
This correction has an effect on the reference current value. The

• Inductance
• Electromagnetic force
I new = C 2 × I
C 2 = N new2 ⁄ N
I new : Reference current value (A) after correction.
I : Reference current value (A) before correction.

C 2 : Correction factor for the number of turns in coil for refer-
ence current value.
N new2 : Correction value for the number of turns in coil for
N : The number of turns of the coil.
model.
627
JMAG-RT

R′ = R ( 1 + α ( Tr now – Tr base ) )
R' : Resistance after correction (ohm).

R : Resistance before correction (ohm).
α : Temperature correction factor of coil (ppm/K) ([coef_-
coil_temperature]).
Tr now : Coil temperature during motor drive (temperature
Temp].
Tr base : Base temperature of coil (K) ([base_coil_tempera-
ture]).
coef_coil_tempera- Temperature correction factor for coil (ppm/K). electric, voltage,
equation.
base_magnet_tem- Base temperature of magnet (K). electric, voltage,
k
F ′ = F  1 + --------- ( Tf now – Tf base )
 100 
F ' : Magnetic flux after correction (Wb).

F : Magnetic flux before correction (Wb).
k : Temperature correction factor of magnet (%/K)([coef_-
Tf now : Magnet temperature during motor drive (temperature
during analysis) (K). It is a value input to the input port [mag-
Temp].
Tf base : Base temperature of magnet (K) ([base_magnet_tem-
perature]).
coef_magnet_tem- Temperature correction factor for magnet (%/K). electric, voltage,
perature Default: -0.11%/K. current
equation.
628

models.
• [Linear]:
• [Cubic]:
cubic function.
Input/Output Ports (SOLENOID)
 Electric signal input (JMAG_RT_solenoid)
Input
Fm Load (N). The load corresponding to load connected with a mover of sole-
noid.
Output
Ia Coil current (A)
speed Speed (m/s)
disp Position (m)
Fe Electromagnetic force (N). The force generated in air gap within a solenoid.
Mover runs with “Fe - Fm” values.
Parameters Manager. Value depending on current and displacement.
Input/output
Ain Electric signal phase terminal:
Aout Electric signal phase terminal
 Voltage signal input (JMAG_RT_solenoid_Vin)
Input
629
JMAG-RT
noid.
Va Voltage (V)
Output
Ia Coil current (A)
speed Speed (m/s)
disp Position (m)
 Current signal input (JMAG_RT_solenoid_Iin)
Input
noid.
la Coil current (A)
Output
speed Speed (m/s)
disp Position (m)
630
JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Linear Synchronous Motor

• Signal Type (LSM) (page 631)
• Files Referenced by the Block (LSM) (page 631)
• Parameters (LSM) (page 633)
• Input/Output Ports (LSM) (page 639)
Example: JMAG_RT_lsm
Signal Type (LSM)

input.
JMAG_RT_lsm_Ein, [Electric signal input]

JMAG_RT_lsm This can be used by connecting to a Simscape Electrical domain.
This outputs electromagnetic force and the current flowing in each coil by
entering voltage values from the Simscape Electrical domain.
JMAG_RT_lsm_Vin [Voltage signal input]
Outputs electromagnetic force and the current flowing in each coil by
entering voltage values.
JMAG_RT_lsm_Iin [Current signal input]
Outputs electromagnetic force by entering current values.
Files Referenced by the Block (LSM)
File Description
data) such as inductance and electromagnetic force.
631
JMAG-RT
File Description
RT_Simulink.mexw64
Linux 64bit:
RT_Simulink.mexa64
JMAG_RT_lsm_Ein.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the JMAG-RT model (electric signal input) of a
linear synchronous motor using the Simscape Foundation library.
JMAG_RT_lsm.mdl Simulink model file.
linear synchronous motor using the Simscape Electrical Specialized
Power Systems library.
JMAG_RT_lsm_Vin.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the JMAG-RT model (voltage signal input) of a lin-
ear synchronous motor.
JMAG_RT_lsm_Iin.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the JMAG-RT model (current signal input) of a
linear synchronous motor.
Force correction table file (.pa) Copied when the correction table for the current dependent electro-
magnetic force is specified in the [RT Correction] tab of the JMAG-
RT Library Manager after a JMAG-RT model is created (after an
FEA using JMAG-RT). The same file name as the RTT file is used.
This file name is used in the RTT file and cannot be changed.
the RTT file.
632
• Only the files exported from the same version of JMAG-RT can be used for a control circuit sim-
ulation. All of the files listed in the table above need to be updated if a model exported from an
older version of JMAG-RT is re-calculated with newer version of JMAG-RT or a control circuit
simulation may not run properly. The JMAG-RT model block in the circuit of Simulink also
needs to be updated.
Parameters (LSM)
current
Use tempera- Temperature correction factor use flag. electric, voltage,
ture correction • When this flag is selected, the value inputted in the input current
port [coilTemp] and [magTemp] of the JMAG-RT model
block is used and the temperature correction function
become active.
• When this flag is cleared, the value inputted in the input
port [coilTemp] and [magTemp] of the JMAG-RT model
block is ignored and the temperature correction function is
inactive.
input port [coilTemp] and [magTemp] of the JMAG-RT
model block have no connection. When temperature correc-
tion is not used, clear [Use temperature correction] as a param-
eter of the JMAG-RT model block.
Mass The mass of the mover (kg). electric, voltage,
This parameter is used when [Motion type] is set to “0”. current
Friction factor The friction coefficient (N/(m/s)). electric, voltage,
Resistance of The coil phase resistance (ohm). electric, voltage
coil
If calculation accuracy does not improve even when reducing
the time interval duration, attempt to increase the value of
[Factor] by one digit. Because it will also not be possible to
obtain calculation accuracy if the value of [Factor] is too small,
ensure that setting any values smaller than the default are
avoided.
633
JMAG-RT

Simulink, specify a positive value for this setting. The value
that is specified is used in the JMAG-RT model.
Offset Displace- The initial position of the mover (m). electric
ment The initial position of the mover is the same as that of the
FEM model. The displacement can be offset by setting this
parameter.
Connection type Connection pattern. electric
0: Calculates using a Star-connection (Y-connection).
1: Calculates using a Delta-connection.
Motion type 0: Calculates the position of the mover by solving the motion electric, voltage,
equation based on the mass and friction coefficient. current
1: Specifies the motion of the mover as a time constant. The
translation speed can be specified in [Translation speed].
Translation Specify this if [Motion type] is set to “1”. electric, voltage,
speed (m/s). current
Manually • When this flag is selected, the correction factor to the physi- current
cal quantity can be specified.
• When this flag is cleared, the correction factor described in
the RTT file is used. The correction factor here is the value
specified on the [RT Correction] tab when creating the
JMAG-RT model.
coef_inductance Correction factor for inductance. electric, voltage,
For example, setting [coef_inductance] to “2.0” doubles all the current
inductance data.
2
L new = K 1 × K 5 × C 1 × L ( I new )
L new : Inductance after correction (H).
L : Inductance before correction (H).

K 1 : Correction factor for inductance ([coef_inductance]).
K 5 : Steel sheet grade ([coef_material]).
C 1 : Correction value for the number of turns. See the

description of [turns_coil1] below.
I new : Reference current value (A) after correction. See the
634

coef_flux Correction factor for magnetic flux. electric, voltage,
For example, setting [coef_flux] to “2.0” doubles all the mag- current
netic flux data.
Ψ new = K 2 × K 4 × K 5 × C 1 × Ψ
Ψ new : Magnetic flux after correction (Wb).
Ψ : Magnetic flux before correction (Wb).

K 2 : Correction factor for magnetic flux ([coef_flux]).
K 4 : Magnet grade ([coef_magnet]).
C 1 : Steel sheet grade ([coef_material]).
I new : Correction value for the number of turns. See the

Use torque coef- Correction setting flag for electromagnetic force using correc- electric, voltage,
ficient file tion table file (.pa). current
Select [Use torque coefficient file] to use the current depen-
dence correction table of electromagnetic force.
Prepare the current dependent correction table file according
to the following format.
Line1; Table title

Line2; 1: 0 (Fixed Value. 10 characters right-packed), 2: Number of
data point (Number of lines after the Line3. 10 characters right-
packed)
From the line3 onwards; 1: Current value, A (20 characters right-
packed), 2: correction factor (20 characters right-packed)
The following is a sample.

Untitled
0 5
1.00000000000E+000 2.00000000000E-001
2.00000000000E+000 4.00000000000E-001
3.00000000000E+000 6.00000000000E-001
4.00000000000E+000 8.00000000000E-001
5.00000000000E+000 1.00000000000E+000
The following should be noted when the current dependence

correction table of electromagnetic force is used.
• The name of the current dependent correction table file
must be the same as the input JCF file of JMAG. For exam-
ple, if the input file of JMAG is “motor.jcf”, please use
“motor.pa”.
• Put the current dependent correction table file in the same
folder as the Simulink mdl file.
• If the current exceeds the range specified in the table during
a control/circuit simulation, the table data is not extrapo-
lated and the values of inductance and electromagnetic force
obtained at the maximum value or the minimum value of
the current are output.
635
JMAG-RT

coef_torque Correction factor for the electromagnetic force. electric, voltage,
For example, setting this to “2.0” doubles all electromagnetic current
force data.
F new = K 3 × K pa3 ( I ) × K 5 × F ( I new )
F new : Electromagnetic force after correction (Wb).
F : Electromagnetic force before correction (Wb).

K 3 : Correction factor for electromagnetic force
([coef_torque]).
K pa3 : Correction factor for electromagnetic force by the
current dependence correction table ([Use torque coefficient
file]).
K 5 : Steel sheet grade ([coef_material]).
I new : Reference current value (A) after correction. See the

coef_magnet Change of a magnet grade. electric, voltage,
This correction factor easily simulates the effects of magnets current
that have been changed. This coefficient affects the magnetic
flux.
coef_material Change of a steel sheet grade. electric, voltage,
This correction factor easily simulates the effects of materials current
that have been changed. This coefficient affects the induc-
tance, magnetic flux, and electromagnetic force.
turns_coil1 Correction value of the number of turns in coil. electric, voltage,
When setting [turns_coil1], the effects on the following physi-
cal quantities can be easily simulated by changing the number
of coil turns.

C 1 = N new1 ⁄ N
C 1 : Correction factor for the number of turns.
N new1 : Correction value for the number of turns (Turn)

([turns_coil1]).
N : The number of turns of the coil (Turn).
636

simulation:
Enter the number of turns set when the JMAG-RT model
was created.
• When the number of turns is changed in control circuit sim-
ulation:
This correction has an effect on the reference current value.

The reference current value is used when the current depen-
dence result physical quantity table of the FEA in the JMAG-
RT model is referenced according to the input from the circuit
simulator. Changing the reference current value of the coil
affects the following physical quantities.
• Electromagnetic force (see the equation of [coef_torque])

I new = C 2 × I
C 2 = N new2 ⁄ N

C 2 : Correction factor for the number of turns in coil for ref-
erence current value.
reference current value (Turn)([turns_coil2]).
637
JMAG-RT

base_coil_tem- Base temperature of coil (K). electric, voltage,
R′ = R ( 1 + α ( Tr now – Tr base ) )

coil_temperature]).
[coilTemp].
ture]).
coef_coil_tem- Temperature correction factor for coil (ppm/K). electric, voltage,
perature Default: 3810 ppm/K. current
equation.
base_magnet_- Base temperature of magnet (K). electric, voltage,
temperature Default: 293.15K. current
k
F ′ = F  1 + --------- ( Tf now – Tf base )
 100 
F ' : Magnetic flux after correction (Wb).

F : Magnetic flux before correction (Wb).
k : Temperature correction factor of magnet (%/K) ([coef_-
Tf now : Magnet temperature during motor drive (tempera-
ture during analysis) (K). It is a value input to the input port
[magTemp].
Tf base : Base temperature of magnet (K) ([base_magnet_-
temperature]).
coef_magnet_- Temperature correction factor for magnet (%/K). electric, voltage,
temperature Default: -0.11%/K. current
See the description of [base_magnet_temperature] for correc-
tion equation.
638

Table data inter- Select an interpolation method for the table. The interpolation electric, voltage,
polation type method selected here applies to all the tables for JMAG-RT current
models.
• [Linear]:
• [Cubic]:
cubic function.
Input/Output Ports (LSM)
 Electric signal input (JMAG_RT_lsm)
Input
Fm Load (N). The load corresponding to load connected with a mover of linear
synchronous motor.
switch signal A Switch signal of A-phase (On: 1, Off: 0)
switch signal B Switch signal of B-phase (On: 1, Off: 0)
switch signal C Switch signal of C-phase (On: 1, Off: 0)
Output
is_qd dq-axis coil current (is_q, is_d) (A).
vs_qd: dq-axis voltage (is_q, is_d) (V).
speed Speed (m/s)
disp Position (m)
Thrust Thrust force (N). The force generated in air gap within a linear synchronous
motor. Mover runs with “Thrust - Fm” values.
Attractive Force Attractive force (N)
639
JMAG-RT
Input/output
A A-phase terminal
B B-phase terminal
C C-phase terminal
 Voltage signal input (JMAG_RT_lsm_Vin)
Input
synchronous motor.
Output
disp Position (m)
speed Speed (m/s)
 Current signal input (JMAG_RT_lsm_Iin)
Input
Ia Current of U-phase coils (A)
Ib Current of V-phase coils (A)
Ic Current of W-phase coils (A)
synchronous motor.
Output
Disp Position (m)
speed Speed (m/s)
640
 
2 2
 Yd   3   3   
  = K× ×  Xv 
 Yq  2 2  
  – sin Θ – sin  Θ – --- π – sin  Θ + --- π  Xw 
3 3  
Θ = θ deg × π ⁄ 180 θ deg = θ e + θ e0
641
JMAG-RT
JMAG-RT Model Blocks: SR Motor

• Signal Type (SRM) (page 642)
• Files Referenced by the Block (SRM) (page 643)
• Parameters (SRM) (page 644)
• Input/Output Ports (SRM) (page 647)
Example: JMAG_RT_SR
Signal Type (SRM)

input.
3-phase: [Electric signal input]

JMAG_RT_SR3_Ein, JMAG_RT_SR3 This can be used by connecting to a Simscape Electrical
4-phase: domain.
JMAG_RT_SR4_Ein, JMAG_RT_SR4 This solves the circuit equation and outputs torque and the
5-phase: current flowing in each coil, by entering voltage values from
JMAG_RT_SR5_Ein,JMAG_RT_SR5
the Simscape Electrical domain.
3-phase: [Voltage signal input]
JMAG_RT_SR3_Vin Solves the circuit equation and outputs torque and the cur-
4-phase: rent flowing in each coil, by entering voltage values.
JMAG_RT_SR4_Vin Simscape and Simscape Electrical are not required for a sim-
5-phase: ulation using the voltage signal input.
JMAG_RT_SR5_Vin
642
3-phase: [Current signal input]

JMAG_RT_SR3_lin Outputs torque by entering current values.
4-phase: Simscape and Simscape Electrical are not required for a sim-
JMAG_RT_SR4_lin ulation using the current signal input.
5-phase:
JMAG_RT_SR5_lin
Files Referenced by the Block (SRM)
File name Description

RTT file (.rtt) The RTT file contains JMAG FEA result data (motor
parameter data) such as inductance and torque.
RT_Simulink.mexw64
Linux 64bit:
RT_Simulink.mexa64
3-phase: JMAG_RT_SR3_Ein.mdl These files define the JMAG-RT model (electric signal
4-phase: JMAG_RT_SR4_Ein.mdl input) of a SR motor using the Simscape Foundation library.
5-phase: JMAG_RT_SR5_Ein.mdl One of these file is output when [Simulink (electric signal
input)] is selected as a platform when the JMAG-RT model
is exported from the JMAG-RT Library Manager.
3-phase: JMAG_RT_SR3.mdl These files define the JMAG-RT model (electric signal
4-phase: JMAG_RT_SR4.mdl input) of a SR motor using the Simscape Electrical Special-
ized Power Systems library.
5-phase: JMAG_RT_SR5.mdl
One of these file is output when [Simulink (electric signal
input, Specialized Power Systems)] is selected as a platform
when the JMAG-RT model is exported from the JMAG-RT
Library Manager or JMAG-Express.
3-phase: JMAG_RT_SR3_Vin.mdl These files define the JMAG-RT model (voltage signal
4-phase: JMAG_RT_SR4_Vin.mdl input) of a SR motor.
5-phase: JMAG_RT_SR5_Vin.mdl One of these file is output when [Simulink (voltage signal
is exported from the JMAG-RT Library Manager or JMAG-
Express.
3-phase: JMAG_RT_SR3_lin.mdl These files define the JMAG-RT model (current signal
4-phase: JMAG_RT_SR4_lin.mdl input) of a SR motor.
5-phase: JMAG_RT_SR5_lin.mdl One of these file is output when [Simulink (current signal
is exported from the JMAG-RT Library Manager or JMAG-
Express.
643
JMAG-RT
the RTT file.
dialog.
Parameters (SRM)
current
Use_Tempera- Temperature correction factor use flag. electric, voltage,
ture_Correction • When this flag is selected, the value inputted in the input port current
[coilTemp] of the JMAG-RT model block is used and the
temperature correction function become active.
[coilTemp] of the JMAG-RT model block is ignored and the
temperature correction function is inactive.
input port [coilTemp] of the JMAG-RT model block has no
connection. When temperature correction is not used, clear [Use
temperature correction] as a parameter of the JMAG-RT model
block.
Moment of inertia The inertia moment (kgm^2) of the rotating machine. electric, voltage,
644

Sample time The time step for the analysis. electric, voltage,
Simulink is used in JMAG-RT model.
Simulink, specify a positive value for this parameter. The value
that is specified is used in JMAG-RT model.
simulation:
created.
lation:
[turns_coil2] has an effect on the reference current value. The
• Inductance
• Torque
I new = C 2 × I
C 2 = N new2 ⁄ N

C 2 : Correction factor for the number of turns in coil for refer-
ence current value.
645
JMAG-RT

Offset Angle Initial position of the rotational angle (deg). electric, voltage,
The default position can be offset by specifying this parameter. current
• When creating an RTT file in JMAG-RT, the initial position
in the FEM model will be the default initial position of the
rotational angle.
• When creating an RTT file in JMAG-Express, the position
where the pole of the rotor and the A-phase teeth of the stator
are facing each other is the default initial position of the rota-
tional angle. JMAG-Express adjusts the position to the facing
state in the program when creating the RTT file; therefore, the
user does not need to be aware of the initial position when cre-
ating the motor model.
Motion type 0: Calculates the position of the rotor by solving the motion electric, voltage,
equation based on the inertia moment and friction coefficient. current
1: Specifies the rotation of the rotor as a constant speed. The
rotation speed can be specified in [Rotation speed].
Rotation speed Specify this if [Motion type] is set to “1”. electric, voltage,
(rpm) current
model.
R′ = R ( 1 + α ( Tr now – Tr base ) )

coil_temperature]).
Temp].
ture]).
coef_coil tempera- Temperature correction factor for coil (ppm/K). electric, voltage,
equation.
646

models.
• [Linear]:
• [Cubic]:
cubic function.
Input/Output Ports (SRM)
JMAG-RT model block of 3-phase
 Electric signal input (JMAG_RT_SR3, JMAG_RT_SR4, JMAG_RT_SR5)
Input
motor shaft.
Output
IABC (3-phase), Coil current of each phase (A)
IABCD (4-phase),
IABCDE (5-phase)
Iwm Rotation speed (rad/s)
Input/output
Ain A-phase signal terminal
Bin B-phase signal terminal
Cin C-phase signal terminal
Din D-phase signal terminal (4 phase, 5 phase)
Ein E-phase signal terminal (5 phase)
Aout A-phase signal terminal
647
JMAG-RT
Bout B-phase signal terminal

Cout C-phase signal terminal
Dout D-phase signal terminal (4 phase, 5 phase)
Eout E-phase signal terminal (5 phase)
 Voltage signal input (JMAG_RT_SR3_Vin, JMAG_RT_SR4_Vin, JMAG_RT_SR5_Vin)
Input
motor shaft.
Va Electric potential of A-phase terminal (V
Vc Electric potential of C-phase terminal (V)
Vd Electric potential of D-phase terminal (V) (4 phase, 5 phase)
Ve Electric potential of E-phase terminal (V) (5 phase)
Output
IABC (3-phase), Coil current of each phase (A)
IABCD (4- phase),
IABCDE (5-phase)
 Current signal input (JMAG_RT_SR3_lin, JMAG_RT_SR4_lin, JMAG_RT_SR5_lin)
Input
motor shaft.
lb Current of B-phase coils (A)
lc Current of C-phase coils (A)
ld Current of D-phase coils (A)
le Current of E-phase coils (A)
Output
648
JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Induction Motor

• Signal Type (IM) (page 649)
• Files Referenced by the Block (IM) (page 650)
• Parameters (IM) (page 651)
• Input/Output Ports (IM) (page 658)
Example: JMAG_RT_IM
Signal Type (IM)

input.
3-phase: [Electric signal input]

JMAG_RT_IM_Ein, This can be used by connecting to a Simscape Electrical domain.
JMAG_RT_IM This solves the state of star connection and outputs torque and the
6-phase: current flowing in each coil, by entering voltage values from the
JMAG_RT_IM_6phase_Ein Simscape Electrical domain.
3-phase: [Voltage signal input]
JMAG_RT_IM_Vin Solves the voltage equations using the input terminal voltages of a 3-
6-phase: phase/6-phase coil, and outputs the torque and the current flowing
JMAG_RT_IM_6phase_Vin in each coil.
using the voltage signal input.
3-phase: [Current signal input]
JMAG_RT_IM_Iin Outputs torque and inductance by entering current values.
6-phase: Simscape and Simscape Electrical are not required for a simulation
JMAG_RT_IM_6phase_Iin using the current signal input.
649
JMAG-RT
Files Referenced by the Block (IM)

data) such as resistance and leakage magnetic flux.
RT_Simulink.mexw64
Linux 64bit:
RT_Simulink.mexa64
3-phase: Simulink model files.
JMAG_RT_IM_Ein.mdl These files define the JMAG-RT model of an induction motor
6-phase: (electric signal input) using the Simscape Foundation library.
JMAG_RT_IM_6phase_Ein.mdl Either file is output when [Simulink (electric signal input)] is
selected as a platform when the JMAG-RT model is exported
from the JMAG-RT Library Manager.
3-phase: Simulink model file.
JMAG_RT_IM.mdl This file defines the JMAG-RT model of an induction motor
(electric signal input) using the Simscape Electrical Specialized
Power Systems library.
This file is output when [Simulink (electric signal input, Special-
ized Power Systems)] is selected as a platform when the JMAG-
RT model is exported from the JMAG-RT Library Manager.
JMAG_RT_IM_Vin.mdl These files define the JMAG-RT model of an induction motor
6-phase: (voltage signal input).
JMAG_RT_IM_6phase_Vin.mdl Either file is output when [Simulink (voltage signal input)] is
JMAG_RT_IM_Iin.mdl These files define the JMAG-RT model of an induction motor
6-phase: (current signal input).
JMAG_RT_IM_6phase_Iin.mdl Either file is output when [Simulink (current signal input)] is
the RTT file.
650
RT. All of the files listed in the table above need to be updated if a model exported from an older
version of JMAG-RT is re-calculated with a newer version of JMAG-RT or a control circuit sim-
ulation may not run properly. The JMAG-RT model block in the circuit of Simulink also needs
to be updated.
Parameters (IM)
current
Use_Tempera- Temperature correction factor use flag. electric, voltage,
ture_Correction • When this flag is selected, the value inputted in the input port current
[1st_coilTemp] and [2nd_coilTemp] of the JMAG-RT model
block is used and the temperature correction function become
active.
[1st_coilTemp] and [2nd_coilTemp] of the JMAG-RT model
block is ignored and the temperature correction function is
inactive.
input port [1st_coilTemp] and [2nd_coilTemp] of the JMAG-
RT model block have no connection. When temperature correc-
tion is not used, clear [Use temperature correction] as a parame-
ter of the JMAG-RT model block.
Use iron loss table A flag to account for iron loss. electric, voltage,
When [Use iron loss table] is selected, iron loss is taken into current
account in calculations that use JMAG-RT models that include
iron loss data.
Select the type of iron loss table to use from the following:
• [1: Table from JMAG (input: slip frequency [Hz], speed
[rpm], lamp [A])]:
Uses iron loss lookup tables that are FEA result data possessed
JMAG-RT models.
651
JMAG-RT

• [2: Table from csv (input: lamp [A], slip frequency [Hz], speed
[rpm], DCBus [V], carrier frequency [Hz])]:
Uses iron loss tables added to JMAG-RT models from CSV
files.
• This type can be selected when iron loss tables are added to
JMAG-RT models being used using the JMAG-RT [Apply
Loss Table] function.
• When this type is selected, input for JMAG-RT model
block input terminals [DC Voltage] and [Carrier Freq] is
required.
• [3: Table from JMAG considering PWM carrier frequency]:
Uses equivalent iron loss resistance tables added to JMAG-RT
models using JMAG-RT Viewer.
• This type can be selected when the harmonic equivalent
iron loss resistance tables are added to JMAG-RT models
being used using the JMAG-RT Viewer [Add Equivalent
Iron Loss Resistance Table] function.
Calculations using JMAG-RT models that do not include this
data do not take iron loss into account even when [Use iron loss
table] is selected.
When [1: Table from JMAG] or [2: Table from csv] is selected,
iron loss data is dynamically converted into torque during simu-
lations. That value is deducted from the value of torque that
does not account for iron loss.
T ' : torque (N·m) that accounts for iron loss
T : torque (N·m) that does not account for iron loss

When [3: Table from JMAG considering PWM carrier fre-
quency] is selected, value is obtained from the torque table of
JMAG-RT models by using the value after subtracting the cur-
rent flowing in equivalent iron loss resistance from the input
current.
Specify Filter This can be used when [Use iron loss table] is selected and [3: electric, voltage,
Inductance (H) Table from JMAG considering PWM carrier frequency] is also current
selected.
When [Specify Filter Inductance (H)] is selected, enter a value in
the [Filter Inductance (H)] text box. For 6-phase induction
motors, specify values for before the number of poles is changed
(value for 2p poles when the number of pole pairs is p) as well as
values for after the change (value for 4p poles).
When [Specify Filter Inductance (H)] is cleared, the inductance
value calculated from the FEA result data lookup table of
JMAG-RT models is used.
Inductance has the effect of suppressing iron loss resulting from
current harmonic components.
652

Use AC copper loss Flag to account for AC copper loss. electric, voltage,
resistance When [Use AC copper loss resistance] is selected, AC copper loss current
is output from the output port [AC Copper Loss].
Select from the following the types of AC copper loss to use.
• [1: Equivalent Resistance from CSV]:
Use harmonic equivalent copper loss resistance data added to
JMAG-RT models from CSV files.
• This type can be selected when harmonic equivalent copper
loss resistance data is added to currently used JMAG-RT
models using the JMAG-RT [Apply Loss Table] function.
For calculations using JMAG-RT models that do not
include harmonic copper loss resistance data, AC copper
loss is not accounted for despite selecting [Use AC copper
loss resistance].
• Resistance values equivalent to AC copper loss are added to
values specified via the input parameter [Resistance of Coil].
• [2: Equivalent resistance from winding conductor settings]:
AC copper loss approximately calculated based on the specifi-
cations of the specified conductor wire is used. Both the skin
effect and the proximity effect of the conductor are accounted
for when calculating AC copper loss.
Enter the specifications of the conductor wire to pass through
the slots.
(radial direction).
The number of conductor wires in the slot width direction
(circumferential direction).
Conductor wire cross-section geometry. 1: Rectangular, 2:
Round
height (m)], [Conductor width (m)]) when using rectangu-
lar conductors.
round conductors.
653
JMAG-RT

Note the following:
• AC copper loss is calculated assuming that conductors are con-
nected in series in the slot height direction (radial direction).
• No checks for inconsistencies between the number of conduc-
tor wires specified here and the information for the number of
turns that the JMAG-RT model possesses are executed.
• Use the correction factor [coef_AC_copper_loss (from wind-
ing conductor settings)] when accounting for coil end loss.
Slot cross-sections

Resistance of sta- The resistance of the stator coil (ohm). electric, voltage,
tor coil current
Simulink, type a positive value for this setting. The value that is
specified is used in the JMAG-RT model.
654

equation based on the inertia moment and friction coefficient. current
rotation speed can be specified in [Rotation speed].
Rotation speed Specify this if [Motion Type] is set to “1”. electric, voltage,
(rpm) current
model.
coef_AC_cop- AC copper loss correction factor. electric, voltage,
per_loss (from Setting “2.0” for example uniformly multiplies AC copper loss current
winding conduc- by 2.0.
tor settings) This parameter value is used when [Use AC copper loss resis-
tance] is set.
base_1st_coil tem- Base temperature of primary coil (K). electric, voltage,
R′ = R ( 1 + α ( Tr now – Tr base ) )

α : Temperature correction factor of coil (ppm/K) ([coef_1st_-
coil_temperature], [coef_2nd_coil_temperature]).
during analysis) (K). It is a value input to the input port [1st_-
coilTemp] or [2nd_coilTemp].
Tr base : Base temperature of coil (K) ([base_1st_coil_tempera-
ture], [base_2nd_coil_temperature]).
coef_1st_coil tem- Temperature correction factor for primary coil (ppm/K). electric, voltage,
See the description of [base_1st_coil_temperature] for correc-
tion equation.
base_2nd_coil Base temperature of secondary coil (K). electric, voltage,
tion equation.
655
JMAG-RT

coef_2nd_coil Correction factor of secondary coil (ppm/k). electric, voltage,
temperature Default: 3810 ppm/K. current
tion equation.
coef_2nd_coil_re- The secondary resistance correction factor. The default is 1.0. electric, voltage,
sistance The correction equation is as follows: current
R 2new = K 1 × R 2
R 2new : Secondary resistance after correction (Ohm)
R 2 : Secondary resistance before correction (Ohm)
K 1 : Secondary resistance correction factor
coef_magnetiz- The magnetizing leakage inductance correction factor. The electric, voltage,
ing_inductance default is 1.0. current
L snew = K 2 × L m + K 3 × L sl + C 1
L rnew = K 2 × L m + K 4 × L rl + C 2
L snew : Primary coil inductance after correction (H)
L rnew : Secondary conductor inductance after correction (H)
L m : Magnetizing leakage inductance (H)
L sl : Primary coil leakage inductance (H)
L rl : Secondary conductor leakage inductance (H)
K 2 : Magnetizing leakage inductance correction factor
K 3 : Primary coil leakage inductance correction factor
K 4 : Secondary conductor leakage inductance correction factor
C 1 : Correction value for primary coil leakage inductance (H)
C 2 : Correction value for secondary coil leakage inductance (H)
coef_1st_leak- The primary coil leakage inductance correction factor. The electric, voltage,
age_inductance default is 1.0. See the description for “coef_magnetizing_induc- current
tance” for the correction equation.
coef_2nd_leak- The secondary conductor leakage inductance correction factor. electric, voltage,
age_inductance The default is 1.0. See the description for “coef_magnetiz- current
ing_inductance” for the correction equation.
add_1st_leak- The additional correction value for the primary coil leakage electric, voltage,
age_inductance inductance (H). The default is 0.0. See the description for current
“coef_magnetizing_inductance” for the correction equation.
add_2nd_leak- The additional correction value for the secondary coil leakage electric, voltage,
age_inductance inductance (H). The default is 0.0. See the description for current
“coef_magnetizing_inductance” for the correction equation.
656

coef_torque The torque correction factor K 5 . The default is 1.0. electric, voltage,
current
T new = K 5 × T
T new : Torque after correction (Nm)
T : Torque before correction (Nm)

K 5 : Torque correction factor
models.
• [Linear]:
• [Cubic]:
cubic function.
Set skew option Flag to account for skew. electric, voltage,
Skew is to tilt the motor stator or rotor to the axis direction to current
control torque ripple.
A JMAG-RT model created from a model without skew is han-
dled as a JMAG-RT model created from a model with a skew
when [Set skew option] is selected.
Note the following:
• Applying a skew to the rotor is supported. Applying a skew to
the stator is not supported.
• Linear skew can be applied. V-skew and step skew can not be
applied.
• When this function is used, JMAG-RT model leakage induc-
tance is corrected in accordance with the specified skew angle.
• This method accounts for simple skews. 3D effects due to
skew are not accounted for with this method so the results are
not completely consistent with when a JMAG-RT model cre-
ated from a 3D model with skew is used.
Creating a JMAG-RT model using a 3D model with a skew is
recommended when you wish to strictly evaluate the effects of
a skew.
Rotor skew angle This can be specified when [Set skew option] is selected. electric, voltage,
(deg) Enter the angle for a full model with a mechanical angle (angle current
difference between top face and bottom face). The counterclock-
wise direction in relation to the rotation axis will be positive.
A negative value can also be entered for the skew angle.
The cross section at the center of the rotation axis direction
becomes the reference plane. For example, if the skew angle is θ ,
the angle difference between the top and center is +0.5 θ , and
the angle difference between the center and bottom is -0.5 θ .
657
JMAG-RT
Input/Output Ports (IM)
 3-phase motors
Electric signal input (JMAG_RT_IM)
Input
motor shaft.
switch signal A Switch signal of A-phase (On: 1, Off: 0)
switch signal B Switch signal of B-phase (On: 1, Off: 0)
switch signal C Switch signal of C-phase (On: 1, Off: 0)
1st_coilTemp Primary coil temperature (K)
2nd_coilTemp Secondary coil temperature (K)
(V). When there is no input for the DC Voltage, 0 V is used.
input DC Voltage.
(Hz). When there is no input for the Carrier Freq, 0 Hz is used.
input Carrier Freq.
Output
is_qd d-axis and q-axis current (is_q, is_d) (A).
See “Conversion formulas for is_qd and vs_qd” on page 663..
vs_qd d-axis and q-axis voltage (vs_q, vs_d) (V).
658
2nd Flux Secondary αβ axes magnetic flux (φ_α, φ_β) (Wb). The αβ axes are two
orthogonal axes making up a 2-phase stationary coordinate system where the
α-axis is placed to coincide with the U-phase axis in the 3-phase stationary
coordinate system.
Copper Loss DC stator copper loss (W), rotor copper loss (W), and AC stator copper loss
(W). Three values are output in an array.
Slip Frequency Slip frequency (Hz)
Input/output
A A-phase terminal
B B-phase terminal
C C-phase terminal
Voltage signal input (JMAG_RT_IM_Vin)
Input
motor shaft.
coilTemp Primary coil temperature (K)
input DC Voltage.
input Carrier Freq.
Output
coordinate system.
659
JMAG-RT
Current signal input (JMAG_RT_IM_Iin)
Input
motor shaft.
la Current of U-phase coils (A)
lb Current of V-phase coils (A)
lc Current of W-phase coils (A)
input DC Voltage.
input Carrier Freq.
Output
wm Rotational speed (rad/s)
coordinate system.
660
 6-phase motors
6-phase pole-changing induction motors are supported (Before change: 2p poles, After change: 4p
poles, p: number of pole pairs). Some terminals output both values for 2p poles and 4p poles.
Electric signal input (JMAG_RT_IM_6phase)
Input
motor shaft.
CoilTemp Primary coil temperature (K)
Output
is_abcdef Line current of each phase (ia, ib, ic, id, ie, if ) (A)
is_qd d-axis and q-axis currents for 2p poles and for 4p poles (is_q1, is_d1, is_q2,
is_d2) (A).
vs_qd d-axis and q-axis voltages for 2p poles and for 4p poles (vs_q1, vs_d1, vs_q2,
vs_d2) (V).
2ndFlux Secondary α-axis and β-axis magnetic fluxes for 2p poles and 4p poles (φ_α1,
φ_β1, φ_α2, φ_β2) (Wb).
The α-axis and β-axis are two orthogonal axes making up a 2-phase stationary
coordinate system where the α-axis is placed to coincide with the U-phase axis
in the 3-phase stationary coordinate system.
Slip Frequency Slip frequencies for 2p poles and 4p poles (Hz)
Input/output
A A-phase terminal
661
JMAG-RT
B B-phase terminal
C C-phase terminal
D D-phase terminal
E E-phase terminal
F F-phase terminal
Voltage signal input (JMAG_RT_IM_Vin_6phase)
Input
Va Electric potential of A-phase terminal (V)
Vc Electric potential of C-phase terminal (V)
Vd Electric potential of D-phase terminal (V)
Ve Electric potential of E-phase terminal (V)
Vf Electric potential of F-phase terminal (V)
motor shaft.
Output
is_abcdef Line current of each phase (ia, ib, ic, id, ie, if ) (A)
φ_β1, φ_α2, φ_β2) (Wb).
The α-axis and β-axis are two orthogonal axes making up a 2-phase station-
ary coordinate system where the α-axis is placed to coincide with the U-phase
axis in the 3-phase stationary coordinate system.
Current signal input (JMAG_RT_IM_Iin_6phase)
Input
lb Current of B-phase coils (A)
lc Current of C-phase coils (A)
ld Current of D-phase coils (A)
le Current of E-phase coils (A)
If Current of F-phase coils (A)
motor shaft.
662

Output
wm Rotational speed (rad/s)
φ_β1, φ_α2, φ_β2) (Wb).
The α-axis and β-axis are two orthogonal axes making up a 2-phase station-
ary coordinate system where the α-axis is placed to coincide with the U-phase
axis in the 3-phase stationary coordinate system.
 
   2---   2---   Xu 
cos Θ cos Θ – π cos Θ + π
 Yd   3   3   
  = K× ×  Xv 
 Yq  2 2  
  – sin Θ – sin  Θ – --- π – sin  Θ + --- π  Xw 
 3   3 
 
Θ = θ deg × π ⁄ 180 θ deg = θ e + θ e0
663
JMAG-RT
JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Induction Motor (Data Created by JMAG-Express)

• Notes (IM: JMAG-Express) (page 664)
• Signal Type (IM: JMAG-Express) (page 664)
• Files Referenced by the Block (IM: JMAG-Express) (page 664)
• Parameters (IM: JMAG-Express) (page 666)
• Input/Output Ports (IM: JMAG-Express) (page 668)
Notes (IM: JMAG-Express)

• Properties and input/output of JMAG - RT model block exported from JMAG-Express are the
same as JMAG-RT installed in JMAG-Designer version 16.1 or earlier.
Signal Type (IM: JMAG-Express)

input.
JMAG_RT_IM_Ein, [Electric signal input]

JMAG_RT_IM This can be used by connecting to a Simscape Electrical domain.
This solves the state of star connection and outputs torque and the current
flowing in each coil, by entering voltage values from the Simscape Electri-
cal domain.
JMAG_RT_IM_Vin [Voltage signal input]
Solves the state of star connection and outputs torque and the current flow-
ing in each coil, by entering voltage values.
JMAG_RT_IM_Iin [Current signal input]
Outputs torque and inductance by entering current values.
Files Referenced by the Block (IM: JMAG-Express)

The files required for a simulation with Simulink are listed in the table below.

data) such as resistance and leakage magnetic flux.
RT_Simulink.mexw64
Linux 64bit:
RT_Simulink.mexa64
664

JMAG_RT_IM_Ein.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the JMAG-RT model of an induction motor (elec-
tric signal input) using the Simscape Foundation library.
as a platform when the JMAG-RT model is exported from JMAG-
Express.
JMAG_RT_IM.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the JMAG-RT model of an induction motor (elec-
tric signal input) using the Simscape Electrical Specialized Power
Systems library.
model is exported from JMAG-Express.
JMAG_RT_IM_Vin.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the JMAG-RT model of an induction motor (volt-
age signal input).
Express.
JMAG_RT_IM_Iin.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the JMAG-RT model of an induction motor (cur-
rent signal input).
Express.
dialog.
665
JMAG-RT
Parameters (IM: JMAG-Express)

current
Use Iron Loss Flag for using iron loss electric, voltage,
Results for the iron loss can be obtained if a RTT file with current
iron loss information is used to run a calculation and [Use
Iron Loss] is selected.
Iron loss information is not taken into account when [Use
Iron Loss] is selected and a RTT file without iron loss infor-
mation is used
correction • When this flag is selected, the value inputted in the input current
port [1st_coilTemp] and [2nd_coilTemp] of the JMAG-
RT model block is used and the temperature correction
function become active.
port [1st_coilTemp] and [2nd_coilTemp] of the JMAG-
RT model block is ignored and the temperature correction
function is inactive.
input port [1st_coilTemp] and [2nd_coilTemp] of the
JMAG-RT model block have no connection. When tem-
perature correction is not used, clear [Use temperature cor-
rection] as a parameter of the JMAG-RT model block.
(kgm2) This parameter is used when [Motion type] is set to “0”. current
(Nm/(rad/s)) This parameter is used when [Motion type] is set to “0”. current
Resistance of 1st The resistance of the primary coil (ohm). electric, voltage,
coil (ohm) current
Resistance of 2nd The resistance of the secondary coil (ohm). electric, voltage,
coil (ohm) current
Factor This is the tuning parameter that is used when connecting electric
the MEX module (Simulink signals) and the Simscape Elec-
trical domain (physical signals).
obtain calculation accuracy if the value of [Factor] is too
small, ensure that setting any values smaller than the default
are avoided.
666

equation based on the inertia moment and friction coeffi- current
cient.
rotational speed can be specified in [Rotational speed].
Rotation speed Specify this if [Motion Type] is set to “1”. electric, voltage,
(rpm) current
Manually When this flag is selected, the correction factor to the physi- current
cal quantity can be set.
base_1st_coil tem- Base temperature of primary coil (K). electric, voltage,
R′ = R ( 1 + α ( Tr now – Tr base ) )

α : Temperature correction factor of coil (ppm/K)
([coef_1st_coil_temperature], [coef_2nd_coil_tempera-
ture]).
[1st_coilTemp] or [2nd_coilTemp].
Tr base : Base temperature of coil (K) ([base_1st_coil_tem-
perature], [base_2nd_coil_temperature]).
coef_1st_coil tem- Temperature correction factor for primary coil (ppm/K). electric, voltage,
See the description of [base_1st_coil_temperature] for cor-
rection equation.
base_2nd_coil Base temperature of secondary coil (K). electric, voltage,
rection equation.
667
JMAG-RT

coef_2nd_coil Correction factor of secondary coil (ppm/k). electric, voltage,
temperature Default: 3810 ppm/K. current
rection equation.
Input/Output Ports (IM: JMAG-Express)
 Electric signal input (JMAG_RT_IM)

Input Output Input/Output
• Tm: Load torque (Nm). The • is_abc: Line current of each • A: A-phase terminal
load torque Tm has the effect phase (ia, ib, ic) (A) • B: B-phase terminal
of reducing the output torque • is_qd: dq-axis current (is_q, • C: C-phase terminal
Te. is_d) (A)
• switch signal A: Switch signal • vs_qd: dq-axis voltage (vs_q,
of A-phase (On: 1, Off: 0) vs_d) (V)
• switch signal B: Switch signal • wm: Rotational speed (rad/s)
of B-phase (On: 1, Off: 0)
• thetam: Rotation angle (rad)
• switch signal C: Switch signal
• Te: Output torque (Nm).
of C-phase (On: 1, Off: 0)
Torque produced electromag-
• 1st_coilTemp: Primary coil netically for analysis results.
temperature (K) Motor runs with “Te - Tm” val-
• 2nd_coilTemp: Secondary coil ues.
temperature (K)
668
 Voltage signal input (JMAG_RT_IM_Vin)

• Tm: Load torque (Nm). The • is_abc: Line current of each -
load torque Tm has the effect phase (ia, ib, ic) (A)
of reducing the output torque • thetam: Rotation angle (rad)
Te.
• wm: Rotational speed (rad/s)
• Va: Electric potential of U- • Te: Output torque (Nm).
phase terminal (V) Torque produced electromag-
• Vb: Electric potential of V- netically for analysis results.
phase terminal (V) Motor runs with “Te - Tm” val-
• Vc: Electric potential of W- ues.
phase terminal (V)
• coilTemp: Primary coil tem-
perature (K)
• 2nd_coilTemp: Secondary coil
temperature (K)
 Current signal input (JMAG_RT_IM_Iin)

• Tm: Load torque (Nm). The • thetam: Rotation angle (rad) -
load torque Tm has the effect • wm: Rotational speed (rad/s)
of reducing the output torque • Te: Output torque (Nm).
Te. Torque produced electromag-
• la: Current of U-phase coils netically for analysis results.
(A) Motor runs with “Te - Tm” val-
• lb: Current of V-phase coils (A) ues.
• lc: Current of W-phase coils
(A)
• coilTemp: Primary coil tem-
perature (K)
• 2nd_coilTemp: Secondary coil
temperature (K)
669
JMAG-RT
JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Wound-Field Synchronous Motor

• Notes (WFSM) (page 670)
• Signal Type (WFSM) (page 670)
• Files Referenced by the Block (WFSM) (page 671)
• Parameters (WFSM) (page 672)
• Input/Output Ports (WFSM) (page 680)
Example: JMAG_RT_wfsm
Notes (WFSM)
• JMAG-RT performs FEA with the assumption that the current is balanced in the coils.
For this reason, assuming that an RTT file for this motor is used in control circuit simulation in
a circuit configuration where the affects of return currents is large, the assumption of balanced
current may be invalid and sufficient accuracy may not be able to be obtained.
Signal Type (WFSM)

input.
JMAG_RT_wfsm_Ein, [Electric signal input]

JMAG_RT_wfsm This can be used by connecting to a Simscape Electrical domain.
This outputs torque and the current flowing in each coil by entering volt-
age values from the Simscape Electrical domain.
JMAG_RT_wfsm_Vin [Voltage signal input]
Outputs torque and the current flowing in each coil by entering voltage
values.
670
JMAG_RT_wfsm_Iin [Current signal input]

Outputs torque and inductance by entering current values.
Files Referenced by the Block (WFSM)

data) such as total flux linkage and torque.
RT_Simulink.mexw64
Linux 64bit:
RT_Simulink.mexa64
JMAG_RT_wfsm_Ein.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the JMAG-RT model of a WFSM (electric signal
input) using the Simscape Foundation library.
JMAG_RT_wfsm.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the JMAG-RT model of a WFSM (electric signal
input) using the Simscape Electrical Specialized Power Systems
library.
JMAG_RT_wfsm_Vin.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the JMAG-RT model of a WFSM (voltage signal
input).
JMAG_RT_wfsm_Iin.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the JMAG-RT model of a WFSM (current signal
input).
671
JMAG-RT
the RTT file.
RT. All of the files listed in the table above need to be updated if a model exported from an older
version of JMAG-RT is re-calculated with a newer version of JMAG-RT or a control circuit sim-
ulation may not run properly. The JMAG-RT model block in the circuit of Simulink also needs
to be updated.
Parameters (WFSM)
current
correction • When this flag is selected, the value inputted in the input current
port [Coil Temp] and [Field Coil Temp] of the JMAG-RT
model block is used and the temperature correction func-
tion become active.
port [Coil Temp] and [Field Coil Temp] of the JMAG-RT
model block is ignored and the temperature correction
function is inactive.
input port [Coil Temp] and [Field Coil Temp] of the JMAG-
RT model block have no connection. When temperature cor-
rection is not used, clear [Use temperature correction] as a
parameter of the JMAG-RT model block.
Use Iron Loss A flag to account for iron loss. electric, voltage,
When [Use Iron Loss] is selected, iron loss is taken into current
account in the output torque.
The current that contributes to torque is calculated by using
an equivalent iron loss circuit created using the iron loss data.
Torque is obtained with iron loss taken into account from
using current in which iron loss was taken into account.
672

Use AC copper Flag to account for AC copper loss. electric, voltage,
loss resistance Based on the specifications of the specified conductor wire, current
approximately calculated AC copper loss is output from the
output port [AC Copper Loss]. Both the skin effect and the
proximity effect of the conductor are accounted for when cal-
culating AC copper loss.
Enter the specifications of the conductor wire to pass through
the slots.
(radial direction).
The number of conductor wires in the slot width direction
(circumferential direction).
Conductor wire cross-section geometry. 1: Rectangular, 2:
Round
height (m)], [Conductor width (m)]) when using rectangu-
lar conductors.
round conductors.
Note the following:

• AC copper loss is calculated assuming that conductors are
connected in series in the slot height direction (radial direc-
tion).
• No checks for inconsistencies between the number of con-
ductor wires specified here and the information for the
number of turns that the JMAG-RT model possesses are
executed.
• Use the correction factor [coef_AC_copper_loss (from
winding conductor settings)] when accounting for coil end
loss.
673
JMAG-RT
Slot cross-sections

Use PWM source A flag for using PWM signal. electric, voltage,
[Use pwm source] can be used when [Use Iron Loss] is current
selected.
When voltage/current violently vibrates, accounting for iron
loss significantly increases calculation errors. This flag is used
to increase calculation accuracy.
• When this flag is selected, voltage/current fluctuations in
one period of the specified frequency are averaged, and that
value is used to perform an iron loss calculation. The Sim-
ulink steps must be set to regular intervals.
• When this flag is cleared, the amplitude value of voltage/
current for each time is used to calculate iron loss in accor-
dance with Simulink step settings. In this case, when the
step time and the timing at which surge voltage occurs are
the same, the calculation accuracy may drop noticeably.
PWM frequency PWM signal carrier frequency (Hz). electric, voltage,
When [Use PWM source] is selected, specify the carrier fre- current
quency equal to one harmonic period. When the carrier fre-
quency is variably controlled, specify the highest frequency.
Phase resistance Stator coil phase resistance value (ohm). electric, voltage,
current
Field coil resis- Field coil resistance value (ohm). electric, voltage
tance
674

obtain calculation accuracy if the value of [Factor] is too
small, ensure that setting any values smaller than the default
are avoided.
Offset Angle (deg) The initial position of the rotor. electric, voltage,
Specifying this parameter can change the rotor initial position current
specified in the RTT file.
The initial position of the rotor is specified in a position
where the direction of d-axis magnetic flux coincides with the
direction of the U-phase coil magnetic flux. However, you
can specify the d-axis when creating a JMAG-RT model.
Connection type Connection pattern. electric, voltage,
0: Calculates using a Star-connection (Y-connection). current
equation based on the inertia moment and friction coeffi- current
cient.
1: Rotates the rotor at the value of input port [Speed].
Manually • When this flag is selected, the correction factor to the phys- current
ical quantity can be specified.
• When this flag is cleared, the correction factor described in
the RTT file is used. The correction factor here is the value
specified on the [RT Correction] tab when creating the
JMAG-RT model.
675
JMAG-RT

Coefficient of Correction factor for stator coil flux linkage. electric, voltage,
Fluxlinkage of Sta- For example, setting this to “2.0” doubles all the flux linkage current
tor Coil data.
The correction equation for stator coil flux linkage is as fol-
lows:
Ψ snew = K 1 × K 4 × C 1 × Ψ s (I s new , I fnew )
Ψ snew : Stator coil flux linkage after correction (Wb).
Ψ s : Stator coil flux linkage before correction (Wb).
K 1 : Correction factor for stator coil flux linkage ([Coeffi-

cient of Fluxlinkage of Stator Coil]).
K 4 : Steel sheet grade ([Coefficient of Material]).
C 1 : Correction value for the number of turns of stator coil.

See the description of [Turns In Stator Coil] below.
I snew : Reference current value (A) of stator coil after cor-
rection. See the description of [Turns In Stator Coil] below.
I fnew : Reference current value (A) of field coil after correc-
tion. See the description of [Turns In Field Coil] below.
Coefficient of flux Correction factor for field coil flux linkage. electric, voltage,
linkage of Field For example, setting this to “2.0” doubles all the flux linkage current
Coil data.
The correction equation for field coil flux linkage is as fol-
lows:
Ψ fnew = K 2 × K 4 × C 2 × Ψ f (I s new , I fnew)
Ψ fnew : Field coil flux linkage after correction (Wb).
Ψ f : Field coil flux linkage before correction (Wb).
K 2 : Correction factor for field coil flux linkage ([Coeffi-

cient of Fluxlinkage
of Field Coil]).
C 2 : Correction value for the number of turns of field coil.

See the description of [Turns In Field Coil] below.
676

Coefficient of Correction factor for torque. electric, voltage,
Torque For example, setting this to “2.0” doubles all the torque data. current
T new = K 3 × K 4 × T (I snew , I fnew )
T new : Torque after correction (Nm).
T : Torque before correction (Nm).

K 3 : Correction factor for torque ([Coefficient of Torque]).

Coefficient of Change of a steel sheet grade. electric, voltage,
Material This correction factor easily simulates the effects of materials current
that have been changed. This coefficient affects the flux link-
age of each coil and torque.
677
JMAG-RT

Turns in Stator Correction value for the number of turns in stator coil. electric, voltage,
Coil Specify the number of coil turns for one phase. current
[Turns In Stator Coil] has an direct effect on the following
physical quantities.
• Flux linkage of stator side
[Turns In Stator Coil] has an effect on the reference current

value of stator coil also. The reference current value of stator
coil is used when the current dependence result physical
quantity table of the FEA in the JMAG-RT model is refer-
enced according to the input from the circuit simulator.
Changing the reference current value of the stator coil affects
• Flux linkage
• Torque

I snew = C 1 × I s
C 1 = N snew ⁄ N s

rection.
I s : Reference current value (A) of stator coil before correc-
tion.
C 1 : Correction factor for the number of turns in stator coil.
N snew : Correction value for the number of turns in stator

coil ([Turns In Stator Coil]).
N s : The number of turns of the stator coil before correc-
tion.
Turns in Field Coil Correction value for the number of turns in field coil. electric, voltage,
[Turns In Field Coil] has an direct effect on the following
physical quantities.
• Flux linkage of field side
[Turns In Field Coil] has an effect on the reference current

value of field coil also. The reference current value of field coil
is used when the current dependence result physical quantity
table of the FEA in the JMAG-RT model is referenced
according to the input from the circuit simulator. Changing
the reference current value of the field coil affects the follow-
ing physical quantities.
• Flux linkage
• Torque
678

I fnew = C 2 × I f
C 2 = N fnew ⁄ N f

tion.
I f : Reference current value (A) of field coil before correc-
tion.
C 2 : Correction factor for the number of turns in field coil.
N fnew : Correction value for the number of turns in field

coil ([Turns In Field Coil]).
N f : The number of turns of the field coil before correc-
tion.
coef_AC_cop- AC copper loss correction factor. electric, voltage,
per_loss (from Setting “2.0” for example uniformly multiplies AC copper current
winding conduc- loss by 2.0.
tor settings) This parameter value is used when [Use AC copper loss resis-
tance] is set.
Base Stator Coil Base temperature of stator coil (K). electric, voltage,
Temperature Temperature at the resistance value that is input in [Phase current
resistance].
Default: 293.15K.
R′ = R ( 1 + α ( Tr now – Tr base ) )

α : Temperature correction factor of coil (ppm/K) ([Coeffi-
cient of Stator Coil Temperature] or [Coefficient of Field
Coil Temperature]).
[Coil Temp] or [Field Coil Temp].
Tr base : Base temperature of coil (K) ([Base Stator Coil
Temperature] or [Base Field Coil Temperature]).
Coefficient of Sta- Temperature correction factor for stator coil (ppm/K). electric, voltage,
tor Coil Tempera- Default: 3810 ppm/K. current
ture
See the description of [Base Stator Coil Temperature] for cor-
rection equation.
679
JMAG-RT

Base Field Coil Base temperature of field coil (K). electric, voltage,
Temperature Temperature at the resistance value that is input in [Field coil current
resistance].
Default: 293.15K.
rection equation.
Coefficient of Temperature correction factor for field coil (ppm/K). electric, voltage,
Field Coil Tem- Default: 3810 ppm/K. current
perature Range: 0.0 and over.
rection equation.
Table data interpo- Select an interpolation method for the table. The interpola- electric, voltage,
lation type tion method selected here applies to all the tables for JMAG- current
RT models.
• [Linear]:
• [Cubic]:
Cubic interpolation. Method which uses approximately
two points in the interpolation interval, and interpolates
with a cubic function.
Input/Output Ports (WFSM)
 Electric signal input (JMAG_RT_wfsm Block)
Input
motor shaft.
Switch Signal A Switch signal for stator coil A phase (On: 1, Off: 0).
Enter the ON/OFF signal of the switch to be connected to a terminal.
Switch Signal B Switch signal for stator coil B phase (On: 1, Off: 0).
Enter the ON/OFF signal of the switch to be connected to b terminal.
680
Switch Signal C Switch signal for stator coil C phase (On: 1, Off: 0).
Enter the ON/OFF signal of the switch to be connected to c terminal.
Switch Signal F Switch signal for field coil (On: 1, Off: 0)
Coil Temp Stator coil temperature (K)
Field Coil Temp Field coil temperature (K)
Speed Rotation speed at each step (rpm)
Output
Is_abc Line current of each phase (ia, ib, ic) (A)
Is_qd dq axis current (is_q, is_d) (A).
If Field coil current (A)
Vs_qd dq-axis voltage (is_q, is_d) (V).
V_np Neutral point electric potential for Y-connection (V)
Wm Angle speed (rad/s)
Thetam Rotation angle (rad)
Fabc Total flux linkage (Wb) of the armature coil. This value includes the magnetic
flux caused by the current flowing through the coil. It is output in the order of
U-phase, V-phase, and W-phase.
Ff Total flux linkage of field coil (Wb)
LdLq The dq-axis inductance (H) obtained by 3-phase to 2-phase conversion of a 3-
by-3 matrix of phase inductances included in an RTT file. In this case, both
the d-axis and q-axis are differential inductances.
L Self-inductance (H) and mutual inductance (H) of each phase of the coil.
There are 16 signals output in the following order. Both the stator coil output
and field coil output are differential inductances.
Lu, Muv, Muw, Muf,
Mvu, Lv, Mvw ,Mvf,
Mwu, Mwv, Lw, Mwf,
Muf, Mvf, Mwf, Lf
Eddy Loss Eddy current loss (W)
Hysteresis Loss Hysteresis loss (W)
page 684.
AC Copper Loss AC copper loss (W)
page 684.
Input/output
A A-phase terminal
B B-phase terminal
681
JMAG-RT
C C-phase terminal
F_in Input terminal for field coil
F_out Field coil signal terminal (output side)
 Voltage signal input (JMAG_RT_wfsm_Vin Block)
Input
motor shaft.
Va Stator coil U-phase terminal electric potential (V)
Vb Stator coil V-phase terminal electric potential (V)
Vc Stator coil W-phase terminal electric potential (V)
Vf Field coil terminal electric potential (V)
Output
Is_abc Line current of each phase (ia, ib, ic) (A)
Is_dq dq axis current (is_q, is_d) (A).
V_np Neutral point electric potential for Y-connection (V).
Lu, Muv, Muw, Muf,
Mvu, Lv, Mvw ,Mvf,
Mwu, Mwv, Lw, Mwf,
Muf, Mvf, Mwf, Lf
page 684.
682

page 684.
 Current signal input (JMAG_RT_wfsm_Iin Block)
Input
Ia Stator coil U-phase current (A)
Ib Stator coil V-phase current (A)
Ic Stator coil W-phase current (A)
motor shaft.
Output
Lu, Muv, Muw, Muf,
Mvu, Lv, Mvw ,Mvf,
Mwu, Mwv, Lw, Mwf,
Muf, Mvf, Mwf, Lf
page 684.
page 684.
683
JMAG-RT
 
2 2
 Yd   3   3   
  = K× ×  Xv 
 Yq  2 2  
  – sin Θ – sin  Θ – --- π – sin  Θ + --- π  Xw 
3 3  
Θ = θ deg × π ⁄ 180 θ deg = θ e + θ e0
Calculation formulas for DC Copper Loss and AC Copper Loss

• DC copper loss:
W DCcopper = R × ( i d × i d + i q × i q )
W DCcopper : DC copper loss (W)
R : FEM coil resistance value (ohm),
• AC copper loss when using AC copper loss approximately calculated based on the specifications
of specified conductor wire:
W ACcopper : AC copper loss resistance (W)
R : resistance calculated from the specifications of the conductor wire (ohm)
i d : d-axis component of the current corresponding to AC copper loss (A)
i q : q-axis component of the current corresponding to AC copper loss (A)
684
JMAG-RT Model Blocks: Generic Model

• Notes (GENERIC) (page 685)
• Signal Type (GENERIC) (page 686)
• Files Referenced by the Block (GENERIC) (page 687)
• Replacing the Electric Signal Block When Using a Motor Other Than a Synchronous Machine
(GENERIC) (page 688)
• Parameters (GENERIC) (page 690)
• Input/Output Ports (GENERIC) (page 696)
Example: JMAG_RT_generic_VIin
Notes (GENERIC)
• When [Sin (1-phase)] (or [Sin (3-phase)]) is selected for JMAG-RT model creation, FEA is per-
formed under the assumption that the current is balanced in the coil set.
For this reason, assuming that a [Sin (1-phase)] (or [Sin (3-phase)]) RTT file is used in control
circuit simulation in a circuit configuration where the affects of return currents is large, the
assumption of balanced current may be invalid and sufficient accuracy may not be able to be
obtained.
685
JMAG-RT
Signal Type (GENERIC)

There are two types of signal inputs; electric signal input and voltage/current signal input.
JMAG_RT_generic_Ein [Electric signal input]

Sets voltage equation in accordance with an input circuit information. And
calculates voltage and current based on the current conservation law. Then
outputs the following physical quantity.
• The value of the terminal potential (the value of the terminal to which
the Electric Potential Probe component is connected)
• Total flux linkage of FEM coil
• Torque/electromagnetic force
• Any physical quantity
The Simscape Foundation library is required for a simulation using the
electric signal input.
Note the following:
• If an RTT file referenced by an electric signal block has data for AC
motors, as well as data only for the stator-side circuits, then the electric
signal block in the JMAG installation folder (JMAG_RT_generic.mdl)
can be used for simulations without any modifications.
• If an RTT file referenced by an electric signal block satisfies any of the
following conditions, then the electric signal block settings must be
changed; see “Replacing the Electric Signal Block When Using a Motor
Other Than a Synchronous Machine (GENERIC)” on page 688.
• When an RTT file contains data for AC motors with both stator-side
and rotor-side circuits. For example, SR motors, stepping motors, and
wound-field synchronous motors, etc.
Voltage/current signal Solves voltage equation according to the input of the voltage/current value
input and outputs the following physical quantity.
• Current flowing through each component
• The value of the terminal potential (the value of the terminal to which
the Electric Potential Probe component is connected)
• Total flux linkage of FEM coil
Switch the input type (voltage/current) with [Source type].
the voltage/current signal input.
686
Files Referenced by the Block (GENERIC)

RTT file (.rtt) The RTT file contains the following data:
• JMAG's FEA result data such as total flux linkage and torque/
electromagnetic force
• Circuit connection information on the JMAG
RT_Simulink.mexw64
Linux 64bit:
RT_Simulink.mexa64
JMAG_RT_generic_Ein.mdl Simulink model file.
generic model using the Simscape Foundation library.
JMAG_RT_generic_VIin.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the JMAG-RT model (voltage/current signal input)
of a generic model.
the RTT file.
687
JMAG-RT
Replacing the Electric Signal Block When Using a Motor Other Than a Synchronous
Machine (GENERIC)
If an RTT file referenced by an electric signal block satisfies any of the following conditions, then
the electric signal block settings must be changed;
• When an RTT file contains data for AC motors with both stator-side and rotor-side circuits. For
example, SR motors, stepping motors, and wound-field synchronous motors, etc.
Perform the following procedure:
1. Place the electric signal block of the generic model in the circuit in Simulink.
2. Right-click the block placed in Step 1 and select [Mask] > [Edit Mask].
The [Mask Editor] dialog is displayed.
3. Open the [Initialization] pane and delete the contents of the Initialize command.
4. Click [OK].
5. Right-click the block placed in Step 1 and select [Mask] > [Look under Mask].
The wire diagram in the electric signal block is displayed.
6. Connect the terminal potential and coil current to the Simscape terminals so that the
wiring in the electric signal block corresponds to the motor driving circuit used to create
the RTT file.
Example:
The figure below shows the motor driving circuit used to create the RTT file, which contains
data (magnetic flux and inductance) for the three coils that are surrounded by red lines.
688
3-phase switched reluctance motor
The figure below shows the wiring diagram in the electric signal block that is modified to
account for the motor driving circuit of the RTT file shown above. In this circuit, the terminal
potentials of both ends of the coil are given to the S-function block. In addition, a current is
given to the coil from another S-function block via a current source.
7. After correcting the wiring, close the mask, and run the simulation.
689
JMAG-RT
Parameters (GENERIC)
For generic models, some parameters must be specified as array values.
Example of setting array values
• voltage/current: voltage/current signal input
RT data file The name of RTT file that linked to JMAG-RT model block electric,
voltage/current
Use temperature Temperature correction factor use flag. electric,
correction • When this flag is selected, the value inputted in the input port voltage/current
[coil temperature] of the JMAG-RT model block is used and
the temperature correction function become active.
[coil temperature] of the JMAG-RT model block is ignored and
the temperature correction function is inactive.
The temperature during drive is calculated as 0 K, when the input
port [coil temperature] of the JMAG-RT model block has no con-
nection. When temperature correction is not used, clear [Use
temperature correction] as a parameter of the JMAG-RT model
block.
Use Loss Table A flag to account for iron loss. electric,
If performing analysis execution using a JMAG-RT model that voltage/current
contains iron loss data with the [Use Loss Table] flag set, results in
which iron loss has been taken into account can be obtained.
Iron loss data is dynamically converted into torque during simula-
tion. For a given step, the torque value for this step that was con-
verted is subtracted from the torque value for this step in which
iron loss is not taken into account.

When using a JMAG-RT model that does not contain iron loss
data, iron loss is not taken into account even if [Use Loss Table] is
set.
Number of termi- Number of motor terminals. electric
nals This value affects the number of ports of JMAG-RT model block.
690

Number of coils Number of coils in circuit. electric
This value affects the number of ports of JMAG-RT model block.
Star/Delta Connection pattern. electric
0: Calculates using a Star-connection (Y-connection).
Series/Parallel Coil connection. electric
0: The FEM coils of each phase are connected in series
1: The FEM coils of each phase are connected in parallel
Number of series Number of series coils in one phase electric
coils in one phase
Number of parallel Number of parallel coils in one phase electric
coils in one phase
Source type Power supply type selection. voltage/current
Set as array values for each power supply component specified in
JMAG.
The input order is the same as the order of components in the
[Project Manager] tree.
0: voltage input
1: current input
Moment of inertia Inertia moment (kgm^2) of the rotating machine. electric,
Set as array values for each motion condition specified in JMAG. voltage/current
The input order is the same as the order of conditions in the
Friction Factor Friction coefficient (Nm/(rad/s)) or (Nm/(m/s)). electric,
The input order is the same as the order of conditions in the
Sample Time Time step for the simulation. electric,
If the default value(-1) is used, the time step specified in Simulink voltage/current
is used in JMAG-RT.
If it takes too long to calculate with the time step specified in Sim-
ulink, specify a positive value for this setting. The value that is
specified is used in the JMAG-RT model.
691
JMAG-RT

Resistance of coil Coil resistance value (ohm). electric,
Set as array values for each component specified in JMAG. voltage/current
Values set with the JMAG-RT Library Manager are not used.
For coils defined by n-phase sinusoidal waves, the values in the
coil sets must be the same. If different, the setting of the reference
coil will be set.
Resistance Resistance value (ohm) of Resistor component. electric,
Inductance Inductance value (H) of Inductor component. electric,
Capacitance Capacitance (F) of capacitor component. electric,
Offset position Initial value of displacement (rad)/(m). electric,
Motion type Motion type. electric,
0: motion equation. When this is selected, the value of the input
port [distance (in)] is used, and the value of the input port [dis-
tance (in)] is ignored.
1: input total displacement. When this is selected, the value of the
input port [load force] is used, and the value of the input port
[load force] is ignored.
692

Set coefficients Correction factor setting flag. electric,
manually • When this flag is selected, the correction factor to the physical voltage/current
fied on the [Create] tab when creating the JMAG-RT model.
Coefficient of coil Correction factor for coil flux linkage. electric,
flux Set as array values for each component specified in JMAG. For voltage/current
example, setting this to “2.0” doubles all the coil flux linkage data.
Ψ coilinew = K 2coili × C 2coili
× Ψ coili (I coil1new , I coil2new ,… , I coilnnew)
Ψ coilinew : Magnetic flux (Wb) interlinked to the i -th coil after
correction.
Ψ coili : Magnetic flux (Wb) interlinked to the i -th coil before
correction.
K 2coili : Correction factor of magnetic flux interlinked to the i -
th coil ([Coefficient of coil flux]).
C 2coili : Correction value for the number of turns of the i -th
coil ([Turns in coil]).
I coilnnew : Reference current value (A) of the n -th coil after
correction.
Coefficient of Correction factor for torque/electromagnetic force. electric,
torque/EM force Set as array values for each torque/Force condition specified in voltage/current
JMAG. For example, setting this to “2.0” doubles all the torque/
electromagnetic force data.
T inew : i -th torque (N · m)/electromagnetic force (N) after cor-

rection.
T i : i -th torque (N · m)/electromagnetic force (N) before cor-
rection.
([Coefficient of torque/EM force]).
I coili : Reference current value (A) of the n -th coil after correc-
tion.
693
JMAG-RT

Coefficient of user Correction factor for user specified output physical quantity. electric,
specified parame- Set as array values for each physical quantity specified in JMAG- voltage/current
ter RT. For example, setting this to “2.0” doubles all the data of spec-
ified physical quantity.
F inew = K 4i × F i (I coil1new , I coil2new ,… , Icoilnnew)
F inew : i -th physical quantity after correction.
F i : i -th physical quantity before correction.
K 4i : Correction factor of i -th physical quantity ([Coefficient of

user specified parameter]).
I coilnnew : Reference current value (A) of the n -th coil after
correction.
Turns in coil Correction for the number of turns in coil. electric,
Specify the number of coil turns for one phase. voltage/current
Set as array values for each component specified in JMAG.
[Turns in coil] has an effect on the reference current value of the

coil. The reference current value of the coil is used when the cur-
rent dependence result physical quantity table of the FEA in the
JMAG-RT model is referenced according to the input from the
circuit simulator. Changing the reference current value of the field
coil affects the following physical quantities.
• Flux linkage of the coil
I coilinew = C 2coili × I coili
C 2coili = N coilinew ⁄ N coili
I coilinew : Reference current value (A) of the i -th coil after cor-
rection.
I coili : Reference current value (A) of the i -th coil before cor-
rection.
C 2coili : Correction factor for the number of turns of the i -th
coil.
N coilinew : Correction value for the number of turns of the i -th
coil ([Turns in coil]).
N coili : The number of turns of the i -th coil.
694

Base coil tempera- Base temperature of coil (K). electric,
ture Default: 293.15K. voltage/current
Temperature at the resistance value that is input in [Resistance of
coil].
Set as array values.
R coilinew = R coili ( 1 + α coili ( Tr coilinew – Trcoilibase ) )
R coilinew : Resistance (ohm) of the i -th coil after correction.
R coili : Resistance (ohm) of i -th coil before correction.
α coili : Temperature correction factor of the i -th coil (ppm/K)

([Coefficients of coil temperature]).
Tr coilinew : Temperature of i -th coil (temperature during anal-
ysis) (K) during drive. It is a value input to the input port [coil
temperature].
Tr coilibase : Base temperature (K) of the i -th coil ([Base coil
temperature]).
Coefficients of coil Temperature correction factor for coil (ppm/K). electric,
temperature Default: 3810 ppm/K. voltage/current
Set as array values.
See the description of [Base coil temperature] for correction equa-
tion.
Table data interpo- Select an interpolation method for the table. The interpolation electric,
lation type method selected here applies to all the tables for JMAG-RT mod- voltage/current
els.
• [Linear]:
• [Cubic]:
cubic function.
695
JMAG-RT
Input/Output Ports (GENERIC)
The upper left figure shows the JMAG_RT_generic block (electric signal input) of a 6-phase motor
(1 motion condition settings, 6 motor terminals and 1 neutral point terminal).
IMPORTANT Depending on the content of the JMAG-RT model, the following input port
must be specified as array values:
• switch
• source
• load force
• displacement (in)
• coil temperature
 Electric signal input (JMAG_RT_generic block)
Input
load force Load (N·m or N).
“load force” has the effect of reducing the “torque/EM force”.
displacement (in) Total displacement (rad or m)
coil temperature Coil temperature (K)
user specified input User-specified physical quantity.
Use this port when loss data is added to a RTT file and user-defined axes exist
in this loss data.
When multiple values are input to this port, they are taken as physical quanti-
ties, in the data loss axis index order.
input user specified input.
Output
displacement (out) Total displacement (rad or m)
resistor current Current flowing through each Resistor component (A)
inductor current Current flowing through each Inductor component (A)
capacitor current Current flowing through each Capacitor component (A)
potential Potential (V) of the terminal to which an electric potential probe has been set
coil flux Total flux linkage (Wb) of each coils
696
torque/EM force Torque (N·m) or electromagnetic force (N).

Torque/force produced electromagnetically for analysis results. Application
runs with “torque/EM force - load force” values.
iron loss Iron loss (W)
user specified Any physical quantity set in the [Output Port] tab in the JMAG-RT Library
parameter Manager. Value depending on current and mechanical angle.
Input/output
electric terminal (1-) Motor terminal
electric terminal Neutral terminal
 Voltage/current signal input (JMAG_RT_generic_Vin block)
Input
switch Power switch (0: OFF, 1: ON)
source Potential (V) or current (A) to be applied to the terminal to which power has
been set
load force Load (N·m or N).
“load force” has the effect of reducing the “torque/EM force”.
displacement (in) Total displacement (rad or m)
coil temperature Coil temperature (K)
user specified input User-specified physical quantity.
Use this port when loss data is added to a RTT file and user-defined axes exist
in this loss data.
When multiple values are input to this port, they are taken as physical quanti-
ties, in the data loss axis index order.
input user specified input.
Output
displacement (out) Total displacement (rad or m)
coil current Current flowing through each FEM Coil component (A)
resistor current Current flowing through each Resistor component (A)
inductor current Current flowing through each Inductor component (A)
capacitor current Current flowing through each Capacitor component (A)
potential Potential (V) of the terminal to which an electric potential probe has been set
coil flux Total flux linkage (Wb) of each coils
torque/EM force Torque (N·m) or electromagnetic force (N).
Torque/force produced electromagnetically for analysis results. Application
runs with “torque/EM force - load force” values.
iron loss Iron loss (W)
user specified Any physical quantity set in the [Output Port] tab in the JMAG-RT Library
parameter Manager. Value depending on current and mechanical angle.
697
JMAG-RT
JMAG-RT Loss Map Model Blocks

The map data of losses obtained as analysis results can be added to the existing RTT file or exported
as a new RTT file in JMAG-Designer efficiency map analysis studies.
The RTT file that contains only map data exported from efficiency map analysis studies is referred
to as a JMAG-RT loss map model. The “JMAG-RT loss map mode block” can be linked with this
JMAG-RT loss map model.
The JMAG-RT loss map model is a model developed for simulations in the system level/energy
level.
The following shows an example of using the JMAG-RT loss map model block. In this example, the
JMAG-RT loss map model block is used as an electrical system combining motors and inverters
without modeling the components of the motor drive system individually.
The design of controllers is complete, and assumes that a current can flow according to control
instructions. The rotation speed and torque are provided as a control instruction to an electrical sys-
tem, corresponding losses and current values are output, and simulations including thermal systems
are run.
698
Notes (Loss Map Model)

• RTT files linking with JMAG-RT loss map models can be exported from efficiency map analysis
study results of the following applications:
• PM synchronous motor (3-phase or 6-phase)
• Synchronous reluctance motor (3-phase or 6-phase)
Efficiency map analysis studies (accuracy-priority) can handle motors other than the above.
However, even if RTT files are exported from the results of motors other than the above, the
RTT files cannot be linked with JMAG-RT loss map model blocks.
• RTT files exported from JMAG-Designer Version 20.1 can only be used in Simulink. They can-
not be used with circuit simulators except Simulink and the JMAG-Designer Circuit Editor.
Model Types and Signal Types (Loss Map Model)

There is only one type of JMAG-RT Loss map model block. The blocks are not categorized accord-
ing to model types or input signals.
Files to be Used (Loss Map Model)
File Name Description

RTT File (.rtt) File for storing the following data:
• Input parameter and analysis result (map data) of JMAG-
Designer, efficiency map analysis studies
RT_Simulink.mexw64
Linux 64bit:
RT_Simulink.mexa64
JMAG_RT_efficiency_map.mdl Simulink model file.
This file defines the JMAG-RT loss map model block.
This file is located in the Simulink folder of the JMAG-
Designer installation folder.
Note the following when handling the files in the above table:
• Place the above files in the same folder when executing control circuit simulation.
Parameters (Loss Map Model)

In some of the parameters, the values need to be specified in array.
Example of setting array values
RT data file Name of RTT file linked to JMAG-RT loss map model block
699
JMAG-RT
Machine type Select one of the following:
• [Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine (PMSM)]
• [Induction Machine (IM)]
• [Synchronous Reluctance Machine (SynRM)]
Hysteresis loss correction The correction factor for hysteresis loss that is output by the JMAG-RT
loss map model block.
When using RTT files exported from efficiency map analysis studies set
with one Iron Loss condition:
For example, if “3.0” is set, all hysteresis loss values stored in the RTT file
are tripled and output.
with multiple Iron Loss conditions:
Specify the correction factor with arrays for each Iron Loss condition. The
value at the beginning of an array is valid for the total value of the hysteresis
loss in all Iron Loss conditions. The total value of all Iron Loss conditions is
determined independently of the correction factor for the value of each
Iron Loss condition.
For example, if “3.0 2.0 1.0” is set, then the total value of all Iron Loss con-
ditions stored in the RTT file is output uniformly multiplied by 3.0. Simi-
larly, the value of Iron Loss condition 1 stored in the RTT file is output
multiplied by 2.0. The value of Iron Loss condition 2 is output as it is
stored in the RTT file.
MEMO Array size is determined according to the number of array dimen-

sions for the output port [Iron Loss (Hysteresis)]. The number of array
dimensions can be checked by using JMAG-RT Viewer to open the RTT
file currently being used.
Eddy current loss correc- The correction factor for eddy current loss that is output by the JMAG-RT
tion loss map model block.
with one Iron Loss condition:
For example, if “3.0” is set, all eddy current loss values stored in the RTT
file are tripled and output.
700
with multiple Iron Loss conditions:
Specify the correction factor with arrays for each Iron Loss condition. The
value at the beginning of an array is valid for the total value of the eddy
current loss in all Iron Loss conditions. The total value of all Iron Loss con-
ditions is determined independently of the correction factor for the value
of each Iron Loss condition.
For example, if “3.0 2.0 1.0” is set, then the total value of all Iron Loss con-
ditions stored in the RTT file is output uniformly multiplied by 3.0. Simi-
larly, the value of Iron Loss condition 1 stored in the RTT file is output
multiplied by 2.0. The value of Iron Loss condition 2 is output as it is
stored in the RTT file.
MEMO Array size is determined according to the number of array dimen-

sions for the output port [Iron Loss (Eddy Current)]. The number of array
dimensions can be checked by using JMAG-RT Viewer to open the RTT
file currently being used.
Input/Output Ports (Loss Map Model)
Left: PMSM and SynRM, Right: IM
Input
Speed (rpm) Command speed (rpm)
Torque (Nm) Command torque (Nm)
Output
Iron Loss (Hystere- Iron Loss condition hysteresis loss (W).
sis) (W) When using RTT files exported from JMAG-Designer efficiency map analysis
studies set with multiple Iron Loss conditions, the total value of all Iron Loss
conditions and the value for each condition are output with arrays. The
beginning of the array is the total value of all Iron Loss conditions.
MEMO Use JMAG-RT Viewer to open the RTT file currently being used to
check the order of the array content and the corresponding output quantity.
Array details are displayed in the [Loss Map Info] field.
701
JMAG-RT
Iron Loss (Eddy Iron Loss condition eddy current loss (W).
Current) (W) This value is output for PMSM or SynRM.
When using RTT files exported from JMAG-Designer efficiency map analysis
studies set with multiple Iron Loss conditions, the total value of all Iron Loss
conditions and the value for each condition are output with arrays. The
beginning of the array is the total value of all Iron Loss conditions.
Iron Loss (PWM Eddy current loss (W) in laminated steel due to PWM (pulse width modula-
Eddy Current) (W) tion).
This value is output for PMSM or SynRM.
• The loss calculated when the checkbox of [Add Approximate PWM Iron
Losses] is selected in the process of creating an efficiency map in JMAG-
Designer efficiency map analysis studies, is output.
When [Add Approximate PWM Iron Losses] is cleared, the value 0 is out-
put.
• When using RTT files exported from JMAG-Designer efficiency map anal-
ysis studies set with multiple Iron Loss conditions, the total value of all Iron
Loss conditions and the value for each condition are output with arrays.
The beginning of the array is the total value of all Iron Loss conditions.
Copper Loss (W) • PMSM and SynRM:
Only one value is output.
• IM:
Two values are output in one array. The first one is the copper loss of the
secondary conductor (cage) and the second one is the copper loss of the pri-
mary coil.
AC Copper Loss The loss calculated is output when the checkbox of [Add Approximate AC
(W) Copper Losses] is selected in the process of creating an efficiency map in
JMAG-Designer efficiency map analysis studies.
When [Add Approximate AC Copper Losses] is cleared, the value 0 is output.
Mechanical Loss When creating an efficiency map in JMAG-Designer efficiency map analysis
(W) studies, the value entered in [Loss Factor (W/k rpm)] of [Mechanical Loss] is
output.
Stray Loss (W) Stray loss (W) calculated from equivalent circuit.
This value is output for IM.
Current (A) • 3-phase PMSM or 3-phase SynRM:
Three values are output in one array. The order of output is as follows:
Current amplitude, d-axis current, q-axis current
• 6-phase PMSM or 6-phase SynRM:
Five values are output in one array. The order of output is as follows:
Current amplitude, d1-axis current, q1-axis current, d2-axis current, q2-
axis current
• IM:
The current amplitude is output.
702
Voltage (V) • 3-phase PMSM or 3- phase SynRM:

Three values are output in one array. The order of output is as follows:
Voltage amplitude, d-axis voltage, q-axis voltage
• 6-phase PMSM or 6-phase SynRM:
Five values are output in one array. The order of output is as follows:
Voltage amplitude, d1-axis voltage, q1-axis voltage, d2-axis voltage, q2-axis
voltage
• IM:
The voltage amplitude is output.
Adding User-specified Circuits to JMAG-RT Model Blocks

The [Add circuit] option allows user-specified circuits to be added to the JMAG-RT model block
equivalent circuit from a Netlist file (.cir). The added circuit will be solved together with the JMAG-
RT equivalent circuit.
Use this option in the following cases:
• To add resistor or inductance components to the equivalent circuit of a JMAG-RT model created
from a 2D FEM model for the purpose of 3D correction
 Motor types supported by this function

• LdLq model and Spatial Harmonics (differential) model of a 3-phase permanent magnet syn-
chronous motor (PMSM) (page 585)
• LdLq model and Spatial Harmonics (differential) model of a 3-phase synchronous reluctance
motor (SynRM) (page 585)
 Notes
• Only the circuit information to be added to the existing JMAG-RT model block should be
described in the Netlist file.
• Create a file that follows the SPICE Netlist file format. See below for details.
• The currents and losses of each component of a user-specified circuit added to the equivalent cir-
cuit of the JMAG-RT model block cannot be output from the JMAG-RT model block.
 The components that can/cannot be used in the user-specified circuit

• Components that can be used:
Resistor, Capacitance, Inductance
• Components that cannot be used:
Ground, Diode, Transistor, Power Source, etc.
 Netlist file (.cir) format

• Lines that start with “*” are treated as comment lines.
• “.End” must be added to the last line.
• The following symbols and options are not allowed:
• Successive lines “+”
• Analysis method. “.TRAN”, “.DC”, “.AC”, etc.
• Control. “.TEMP”, “.OPTION”, “.LIB”, “.INCLUDE”, etc.
703
JMAG-RT
• All terminals of a user-specified circuit must be connected to another terminal. Open terminals
are not supported.
• Do not use 0 for the terminal number. In the Netlist file, terminal 0 means ground, but user-
specified circuits containing ground cannot be added in this version.
• Do not duplicate component names in user-specified circuits. Component names that are the
same as those in the input JCF file used to create the JMAG-RT model in the user-specified cir-
cuit can be used.
• When [Use Neutral Point] is selected, write “.JMAGRT_USE_NEUTRAL_POINT”.
General form of each component

Component Form
Resistor Form: RXXX N1 N2 VALUE
(1) RXXX: Element name. Add R at the beginning.
(2) N1: Number of input terminal
(3) N2: Number of output terminal
(4) VALUE: Resistance (ohm). If 0 ohm is specified, an analysis error occurs.
Capacitance Form: CXXX +N -N VALUE <IC=INCOND>
(1) CXXX: Element name. Add C at the beginning.
(2) +N: Number of positive terminal
(3) -N: Number of negative terminal
(4) VALUE: Capacitance (F). If 0 F is specified, an analysis error occurs.
(5) <IC=INCOND>: Initial voltage (V); this value is not used in the JMAG-
RT model equivalent circuit because the voltage equation is not solved in the
first two steps.
Inductance Form: LXXX +N -N VALUE <IC=INCOND>
(1) LXXX: Element name. Add L at the beginning.
(2) +N: Number of positive terminal
(3) -N: Number of negative terminal
(4) VALUE: Inductance (H). If 0 H is specified, an analysis error occurs.
(5) <IC=INCOND>: Initial current (A); this value is not used in the JMAG-
RT model equivalent circuit because the voltage equation is not solved in the
first two steps.
Terminal numbers
The following figure shows the equivalent circuit of the JMAG-RT model block when the [Add cir-
cuit] option is selected. To connect the equivalent circuit of the JMAG-RT model block to a user-
specified circuit, use the terminal numbers shown in red in this figure for the user-specified circuit.
Note that the meaning of the terminal numbers changes depending on the connection method.
704
Left: Star connection, Right: Delta connection
Terminal
Star connection Delta connection
No.
0 Not available.
1 This terminal is connected to the output This terminal is connected to the output
port Iu of Simscape. port Iu of Simscape.
The current flowing between Iu and this When referring to look-up tables such as
terminal is used as the U-phase current flux and inductance during analysis, the
when referring to look-up tables such as flux total value of the currents flowing in the
and inductance during analysis. components connected to this terminal
with the input or positive terminal is used as
the U-phase current. For example, in the
figure below, the sum of the currents flow-
ing in C1 and L1 is used.
port Iv of Simscape. port Iv of Simscape.
The current flowing between Iv and this ter- When referring to look-up tables such as
minal is used as the V-phase current when flux and inductance during analysis, the
referring to look-up tables such as flux and total value of the currents flowing in the
inductance during analysis. components connected to this terminal
the V-phase current.
port Iw of Simscape. port Iw of Simscape.
The current flowing between Iw and this When referring to look-up tables such as
terminal is used as the W-phase current flux and inductance during analysis, the
when referring to look-up tables such as flux total value of the currents flowing in the
and inductance during analysis. components connected to this terminal
the W-phase current.
4 This terminal is the neutral point. This terminal is connected to the output
terminal of the U-phase resistor and the
input terminal of the U-phase coil.
705
JMAG-RT
Terminal
Star connection Delta connection
No.
terminal of the U-phase resistor and the terminal of the V-phase resistor and the
input terminal of the U-phase coil. input terminal of the V-phase coil.
terminal of the V-phase resistor and the terminal of the W-phase resistor and the
input terminal of the V-phase coil. input terminal of the W-phase coil.
7 This terminal is connected to the output This terminal is connected to the input ter-
terminal of the W-phase resistor and the minal of the U-phase coil.
input terminal of the W-phase coil. If [3: Table from JMAG considering PWM
carrier frequency] is selected, when referring
to the torque table, the current flowing
through the U-phase coil is used.
8 This terminal is connected to the input ter- This terminal is connected to the input ter-
minal of the U-phase coil. minal of the V-phase coil.
If [3: Table from JMAG considering PWM If [3: Table from JMAG considering PWM
carrier frequency] is selected, when referring carrier frequency] is selected, when referring
to the torque table, the current flowing to the torque table, the current flowing
through the U-phase coil is used. through the V-phase coil is used.
9 This terminal is connected to the input ter- This terminal is connected to the input ter-
minal of the V-phase coil. minal of the W-phase coil.
If [3: Table from JMAG considering PWM If [3: Table from JMAG considering PWM
carrier frequency] is selected, when referring carrier frequency] is selected, when referring
to the torque table, the current flowing to the torque table, the current flowing
through the V-phase coil is used. through the W-phase coil is used.
10 This terminal is connected to the input ter- This terminal can be used freely in user-
minal of the W-phase coil. specified circuits.
If [3: Table from JMAG considering PWM
carrier frequency] is selected, when referring
to the torque table, the current flowing
through the W-phase coil is used.
11- These terminals can be used freely in user-specified circuits.
706
Circuit Examples
• Example 1:
0.25 ohm resistor components (R1, R2, R3) are added to the star-connected equivalent circuit.
01 * example1
02 R1 1 8 0.25
03 R2 2 9 0.25
04 R3 3 10 0.25
05 .END
• Example 2:
100 ohm resistor components (R1, R2, R3) and 2.5e-4 H inductance components (L1, L2, L3)
are added to the star-connected equivalent circuit. If terminals 1 and 8, 2 and 9, and 3 and 10 are
not used, a short circuit is automatically assumed between each terminal.
01 * example2
02 R1 5 11 100.0
03 R2 6 12 100.0
04 R3 7 13 100.0
05 L1 11 4 2.5e-4
06 L2 12 4 2.5e-4
07 L3 13 4 2.5e-4
08 .END
707
JMAG-RT
• Example 3:
1e-6 F capacitance components (C1, C2, C3, C4) and a 100 ohm resistor component (R1) are
added to the star-connected equivalent circuit. The C1 component is short-circuited. To short
between terminals 1 and 8, use only 8.
01 * example3
02 C1 8 2 1e-6
03 C2 2 3 1e-6
04 C3 8 9 1e-6
05 C4 9 10 1e-6
06 R1 3 10 100.0
07 .END
• Example 4:
In the star-connected equivalent circuit, a 0.25 ohm resistor component (R1) is added between
the neutral point and the external circuit.
01 * example4
02 R1 11 4 0.25
03 .JMAGRT_USE_NEUTRAL_POINT
04 .END
708
Using JMAG-RT Models in PSIM

• PSIM Programs Required to Use JMAG-RT Models (page 710)
• Types of MagCoupler-RT Block (page 711)
• Adding MagCoupler-RT Blocks to the PSIM Model (page 712)
• Input/Output Nodes of a MagCoupler-RT Block (page 712)
• General RT Block (page 712)
• Other MagCoupler-RT Blocks (page 713)
Notes
• JMAG-RT models of all model types provided by JMAG can be used in PSIM.
• Linear solenoid
• Generic model
 Using the PMSM/SynRM JMAG-RT models

• The following models are not supported for synchronous reluctance motors in the current ver-
sion (These models cannot be created with JMAG-RT):
• Spatial harmonic (integral method) models
• To account for skew in a control circuit simulation, use the apply skew function of the JMAG-
RT Viewer to output the JMAG-RT model with skew and use that model for control circuit sim-
ulation.
 Using the WFSM JMAG-RT models

• JMAG-RT performs FEA with the assumption that the current is balanced in the coils.
For this reason, assuming that an RTT file for this motor is used in control circuit simulation in
a circuit configuration where the affects of return currents is large, the assumption of balanced
current may be invalid and sufficient accuracy may not be able to be obtained.
709
JMAG-RT
 Using the Generic Model JMAG-RT models

• When [Sin (1-phase)] (or [Sin (3-phase)]) is selected for JMAG-RT model creation, FEA is per-
formed under the assumption that the current is balanced in the coil set.
For this reason, assuming that a [Sin (1-phase)] (or [Sin (3-phase)]) RTT file is used in control
circuit simulation in a circuit configuration where the affects of return currents is large, the
assumption of balanced current may be invalid and sufficient accuracy may not be able to be
obtained.
PSIM Programs Required to Use JMAG-RT Models

Program Description
PSIM JMAG-RT models are supported in 7.1.2 and later versions.
• Use a version of JMAG-Designer 10.1.1 or earlier if you are using PSIM
8.0.7 or earlier.
• Use a version of JMAG-Designer from 10.1.2 until 13.0 if you are using
a version of PSIM from 9.0.1 until 9.3.2.
• Use a version of JMAG-Designer 13.0 or later if you are using PSIM
9.3.3 or later.
Notes
• PSIM 8.0.4 or later is required to use JMAG-RT models for the 3-phase
PM synchronous motor spatial harmonic (differential) models.
Compatibility between PSIM 9.0.1 or later and the RTT files output
from JMAG
• The JMAG-RT block contained in the file (.sch) created with PSIM
8.0.7 or earlier versions can be used. In this case, reference the XML file
exported from Designer 10.1.1 or earlier versions.
• The JMAG-RT block contained in a new file (.psimsch) can be used. In
this case, reference the XML file exported from Designer 10.1.2.
• The JMAG-RT block contained in an older file (.sch) cannot be used for
a new file (.psimsch).
MagCoupler-RT option The MagCoupler-RT option is supported by PSIM 6.2 or a later version.
A block for a JMAG-RT model is added to the PSIM library with this
option.


utable package (Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 Redistributable) from Microsoft is installed. Download
the redistributable package from the Microsoft website, and install to your computer.
• Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 Redistributable Package (x86):
• Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 SP1 Redistributable Package (x64):
710
 Setting the Set Path option

If JMAG is installed on the same machine as PSIM, specify the JMAG installation folder in the
PSIM Set Path option before executing the control circuit simulation.
The following shows an example of specifying the JMAG-Designer installation folder with the Set
Path option:
1. Execute [Option] > [Set Path] of PSIM.

The [Set Path] dialog is displayed.
2. Set two paths to [PSIM Search Path]: “JMAG-Designer installation folder” and “JMAG-
Designer installation folder\Solver\mod\mag\mod”.
When JMAG-Designer is installed with default settings, the path of the installation folder of
JMAG-Designer is “C:\Program Files\ JMAG-Designer”.
With this setting, the dynamic library (DLL) placed in the installation folder of JMAG-Designer
can be referenced when executing PSIM.
 Placing jmag_circuit_interface_64_10.dll
If the following conditions are met, add jmag_circuit_interface_64_10.dll to the PSIM installation
folder:
• JMAG and PSIM are installed on different machines.
• One of PM Synchronous Machine (RT) block, Linear Synchronous Machine (RT) block, Step
Machine (RT) block, or Linear Solenoid (RT) block is used.
If JMAG and PSIM are installed on different machines, add jmag_circuit_interface_64_10.dll to
the PSIM installation folder. These files are located in the JMAG installation folder. For example,
when JMAG-Designer is installed with default settings, the path of the installation folder for
JMAG-Designer is “C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer”.
When [PSIM] is selected as [Platform] when exporting a JMAG-RT model from JMAG-RT or
JMAG-Express, these files are copied to the same folder as the RTT file. You may add this dupli-
cated file to the PSIM installation folder.
Types of MagCoupler-RT Block

The following blocks are provided by PSIM for JMAG-RT models:
 MagCoupler-RT blocks
PSIM Version JMAG Model Type PSIM Block
-PSIM 9.0.0 PM synchronous motor, linear synchro- MagCoupler-RT PMSM Machine
nous motor
Stepping motor, linear solenoid MagCoupler-RT
PSIM 9.0.1- PM synchronous motor PM Synchronous Machine (RT)
Linear synchronous motor Linear Synchronous Machine (RT)
Stepping motor Step Machine (RT)
Linear solenoid Linear Solenoid (RT)
711
JMAG-RT
PSIM Version JMAG Model Type PSIM Block

PSIM 2021a- Blocks for all model types. General RT
• PM synchronous motor
• Synchronous reluctance motor
• Stepping motor
• Linear solenoid
• Linear synchronous motor
• SR motor
• Induction motor
• Generic model
Adding MagCoupler-RT Blocks to the PSIM Model

From the menu bar, select [Element] > [Power] > [MagCoupler-RT_Module] > (block name, e.g.
[General RT]) and place the block in the circuit of the PSIM.
Input/Output Nodes of a MagCoupler-RT Block

The input/output of a block can be set using the electric node and the rotor shaft node.
• Electric node:
Connect to a phase terminals of the main circuit.
• Rotor shaft node:
Connect to a mechanical module of the PSIM.
General RT Block
The General RT block can be linked to JMAG-RT models of all model types provided by JMAG.
Block Description
General RT Blocks included in PSIM2021a. Can be linked to the following JMAG-RT
models.
• Permanent magnet synchronous motors (3-phase, 6-phase)
• Synchronous reluctance motors (3 phase, 6 phase)
• Unipolar stepping motor (2 phase)
• Linear solenoid
• Linear synchronous motor (3 phase)
• SR motor (3 phase, 4 phase, 5 phase)
• Induction motor (3 phase)
• Wound field magnet type synchronous motor
• Generic model
712
Files Referenced by the Block (General RT)

When using the General RT block, the following files exported from JMAG are required:

RTT file (.rtt) This file contains the result data of FEA, such as inductance and electro-
magnetic force/torque.
When using a Generic model type RTT file, do not change the RTT file
name, as the name of the RTT file is described in the Netlist XML file.
Netlist XML file (.xml) This file defines the interfaces between the JMAG-RT model and the Gen-
eral RT block.
This file is required if you want to use a Generic model type RTT file.
For other models (such as PMSM and IM), this file is not required.
Force/torque correction This file is exported when the correction table of the current dependent
table file (.pa) torque/electromagnetic force is specified in the [RT Correction] tab of the
The same file name as the RTT file is used.
This file name cannot be changed because it is used by the RTT file.
Parameters (General RT)

Please contact Powersim Inc. for details.
Other MagCoupler-RT Blocks

This section describes the parameters when using the following blocks:
Block Description
PM Synchronous Machine (RT) Blocks for JMAG-RT models of 3-phase permanent magnet
synchronous motors
Step Machine (RT) Blocks for JMAG-RT models of 2-phase stepping motors
Linear Solenoid (RT) Blocks for JMAG-RT models of linear solenoids
Linear Synchronous Machine (RT) Blocks for JMAG-RT models of 3-phase linear synchronous
motors
From left, MagCoupler-RT PMSM Machine, Step Machine (RT),

Linear Solenoid (RT), Linear Synchronous Machine (RT)
713
JMAG-RT
Files Referenced by the Block

When using these MagCoupler-RT blocks, the following files exported from JMAG are required:

RTT file (.rtt) This file contains the result data of FEA, such as inductance and electro-
magnetic force/torque.
Do not change the RTT file name, as the name of the RTT file is described
in the Netlist XML file.
Netlist XML file (.xml) This file defines the interfaces between the JMAG-RT model and the Gen-
eral RT block.
A Netlist XML file needs to be specified to reference each block. PSIM
displays the terminals defined by the Netlist XML file and values set for
the JMAG-RT model as the default values.
Force/torque correction This file is exported when the correction table of the current dependent
table file (.pa) torque/electromagnetic force is specified in the [RT Correction] tab of the
The same file name as the RTT file is used.
This file name cannot be changed because it is used by the RTT file.
jmag_circuit_inter- This file is used in the MagCoupler-RT option of PSIM.
face_64_10.dll (for Win-
dows 64bit)
Note the following when working with the file in the above table:
• During control circuit simulation execution, put the RTT file, NetlistXML file, and the torque
correction table file in the same folder.
• In JMAG-RT, each file is outputted to the folder specified in the dialog [Copy to Circuit
Simulator] of the JMAG-RT Library Manager.
dialog.
RT and JMAG-Express. All of the files need to be updated if a model exported from an older ver-
sion of JMAG-RT is re-calculated with newer version of JMAG-RT or a control circuit simula-
tion may not run properly.
Parameters for the PM Synchronous Machine (RT) Block
 Notes
 Parameters
MEMO When correction factors are specified in the JMAG-RT Library Manager, the value specified
there is displayed as the default value for each correction factor in PSIM.
714
MomentOfInertia The inertia moment for a rotating machine (kg·m2).
The calculation diverges instead of converges if this value is set to zero.
MechTimeConstant The mechanical time constant (τ mech)
RU The U-phase resistance (ohm)
RV The V-phase resistance (ohm)
RW The W-phase resistance (ohm)
coef_inertia1 Correction factor for the inertia moment.
For example, setting this to “2.0” doubles all the inertia moment data.
For example, setting this to “2.0” adds all the inertia moment data.
coef_inductance Correction factor for the inductance.
For example, setting this to “2.0” doubles all the inductance data.
coef_flux Correction factor for the magnetic flux.
For example, setting this to “2.0” doubles all the magnetic flux data.
coef_torque Correction factor for the torque.
For example, setting this to “2.0” doubles all the torque data.
coef_magnet Change of a magnet grade.
This correction factor easily simulates the effects of magnets that have been
changed. This coefficient affects the magnetic flux and torque.
coef_material Change of a steel sheet grade.
This correction factor easily simulates the effects of materials that have
been changed. This coefficient affects the inductance, magnetic flux, and
torque.
turns_coil1 Correction value 1 for the number of turns in coil.
When specifying the number of coil turns for one phase in [turns_coil1],
the effects on the following physical quantities can be easily simulated by
changing the number of coil turns:
• Inductance
• Magnetic flux
• Torque
When the number of turns specified in the JMAG-RT Library Manager is
N0, and [turns_coil1] is N, these physical quantities are multiplied by N/
N0. For example, if the number of turns specified by the JMAG-RT
Library Manager is 20 and [turns_coil1] is 40, each physical quantity is
doubled (= 40/20).
The same number of turns specified in the JMAG-RT Library Manager
should be specified if correction by [turns_coil1] is not necessary.
MEMO If you are using an RTT file that does not contain the data of the
number of turns, the value of [turns_coil1] is not used in the calculation.
715
JMAG-RT
• The current when referring to the magnetic flux and inductance
• The current when referring to the torque
doubled (= 40/20).
MEMO If you are using an RTT file that does not contain the data of the
number of turns, the value of [turns_coil2] is not used for the calculation.
coeftable_torque_flag Correction setting flag for torque using correction table file (.pa).
Select this to use the current dependence correction table of torque.
Back emf Flag Flag for displaying back electromotive force.
1: Display the result in a graph.
0: Do not output the result.
Rotor Angle Flag Flag for displaying the rotational angle.
0: Do not output the result
The initial position for the rotational angle of the motor is set to the posi-
tion where the current phase is 0 (position the direction of magnetic flux in
the U-phase coil is the same as the d-axis direction). The initial position of
the rotational angle does not depend on the initial position of the FEM
model.
Speed Flag Flag for displaying the rotation speed.
Torque Flag Flag for displaying the torque.
Current Flag Flag for displaying the current flowing in the coil.
Offset angle (deg) The initial position of a rotational angle.
The initial position of a rotational angle is specified at the position that is
coincident with the d-axis direction and the direction of U-phase magnetic
flux of coil as default.
An offset angle can be set on a default position by specifying this parame-
ter.
716
Example
Parameters for the Step Machine (RT) Block

MomentOfInertia The moment of inertia for rotating machines (kg·m2).
The calculation diverges instead of converges if MomentOfIndertia is set to
“0”.
RA+ The A-phase resistance (ohm)
RA- The -A- phase resistance (ohm)
RB+ The B-phase resistance (ohm)
RB- The -B-phase resistance (ohm)
turns_coil2 Correction value for the number of turns in coil.
• The current when referring to the torque
doubled (= 40/20).
717
JMAG-RT
Rotor Angle Flag Flag for displaying the rotational angle.
Speed Flag Flag for displaying the rotation speed.
Torque Flag Flag for displaying the torque.
Offset angle (deg) The initial position of the rotational angle.
The initial position of the rotational angle is the position of the current
phase at 0 by default. The offset can be specified by setting this parameter.
Example
Parameters for the Linear Solenoid (RT) Block

coef_mass1 Correction factor for the mass.
For example, setting this to “2.0” doubles all the mass data.
coef_mass2 Correction factor for the mass.
For example, the mass data is added by setting this to “2.0”.
Mass The mass of the mover (kg)
Spring constant The spring constant (N/m)
718
DispLimitMax The upper limit of the motion range of the mover
DispLimitMin The lower limit of the motion range of the mover
RA The resistance of the A-phase coil (ohm).
turns_coil2 Correction value for the number of turns in coil.
• The current when referring to the magnetic force
doubled (= 40/20).
Position Flag Flag for displaying the displacement.
Velocity Flag Flag for displaying the translation speed.
Force Flag Flag for displaying the electromagnetic force.
Example
719
JMAG-RT
Parameters for the Linear Synchronous Machine (RT) block

Mass The mass of the mover (kg)
RU The U-phase resistance (ohm)
RV The V-phase resistance (ohm)
RW The W-phase resistance (ohm)
coef_inductance Correction factor for the inductance.
For example, setting this to “2.0” doubles all the inductance data.
coef_flux Correction factor for the magnetic flux.
For example, setting this to “2.0” doubles all the magnetic flux data.
coef_force Correction factor for the electromagnetic force.
For example, setting this to “2.0” doubles all the electromagnetic force
data.
coef_magnet Change of a magnet grade.
This correction factor easily simulates the effects of magnets that have been
changed. This coefficient affects the magnetic flux and electromagnetic
force.
coef_material Change of a steel sheet grade.
This correction factor easily simulates the effects of materials that have
been changed. This coefficient affects the inductance, magnetic flux, and
electromagnetic force.
coeftable_torque_flag Correction setting flag for electromagnetic force using correction table file
(.pa).
Setting this to “1” uses the correction table.
720
• Inductance
• Magnetic flux
• Electromagnetic force
doubled (= 40/20).
• The current when referring to the electromagnetic force
doubled (= 40/20).
Position Flag Flag for displaying the displacement.
Velocity Flag Flag for displaying the translation speed.
Force Flag Flag for displaying the electromagnetic force.
Offset Disp (m) The initial position of the mover.
The initial position specified in the FEM model is used. The displacement
can be offset by setting this parameter.
721
JMAG-RT
Example
722
Using JMAG-RT Models in Your Programs in C
You can use the JMAG-RT model in your programs in C.

The programs in C need to be created based on the program flowchart described later. A program in C can also
be created using a sample file that is provided with JMAG.
Simulation using programs in C
JMAGRT_DLL.dll is a dynamic link library (DLL) to control a simulation using a program in C.

• Procedure of Simulations Using Programs in C (page 725)
• Flowchart of the Program in C Using JMAGRT_DLL.dll (page 726)
• Creating a C Language Program (page 728)
• Creating Executable Files for Your Programs in C (page 738)
723
JMAG-RT
Notes
• The following model types of JMAG-RT models can be used in any C language program:
• Permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM)
• Two-phase stepping motor
• Linear solenoid
• Linear synchronous motor (LSM)
• SR motor (switched reluctance motor)


utable package from Microsoft is installed. Download the redistributable package from the Micro-
soft website, and install to your computer.
https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/cpp/windows/latest-supported-vc-redist?view=msvc-
170
724
Procedure of Simulations Using Programs in C

1. Create a JMAG-RT model (RTT file).
RTT files contain FEA result data such as inductance and torque/electromagnetic force.
RTT files can be created using JMAG-RT, JMAG-Express Classic, JMAG-RTViewer, and JMAG-
Designer.
To create an RTT file using JMAG-RT, please refer to the following page:
• “Creating JMAG-RT Model from a CSV File” on page 341
2. Create a program in C.
For details, see “Creating a C Language Program” on page 728.
3. Open the program in C created in step 2 with a text editor such as Notepad, and then
specify the number of steps, RTT file to reference, the drive type, the initial value, and
input to the JMAG-RT model.
4. Build the program in C in step 3 and create the executable file (e.g., .exe).
For details, see “Creating Executable Files for Your Programs in C” on page 738.
5. Place the files required to run the simulation in a single folder.
• RTT file in step 1
• Executable file created in step 4
• JMAGRT_DLL_64_17.DLL (for Windows 64-bit):
This is a dynamic library to run a simulation using a control program written in the C language.
Duplicate the files placed in the following folders:
• JMAG-RT:
(JMAG-Designer installation folder)\JMAG_RT\general
When JMAG-Designer is installed with the default settings, it is saved in the following
folder.
C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\JMAG_RT\general
IMPORTANT JMAGRT_DLL may also be updated when updating JMAG. When updating
JMAG through a service pack installation, duplicate JMAGRT_DLL again.
6. Double-click the executable file.
The simulation is run.
725
JMAG-RT
Flowchart of the Program in C Using JMAGRT_DLL.dll

Create a program that follows the flowchart shown below. The jmagrtCheckIronloss() and jmagrt-
GetNumberOfPhases() can be used as a function to divide the process when checking an inputted
RTT file other than the function described in the flowchart.
Start the analysis
Start JMAG-RT jmagrtInitialize("xxx.rtt", 1)
jmagrtSetInterpolationType(0) *8
Set the table interpolation method
jmagrtSetSkewParameter(1, 0, 30, 0, 2, 0) *7
Set the skew
jmagrtSetCorrectionOfFlux(1.0) *8
Specify correction factor jmagrtSetCorrectionOfMagnet(1.0) *8
jmagrtSetCorrectionOfSteel(1.0) *8
jmagrtSetCorrectionOfInductance(1.0) *8
jmagrtSetCorrectionOfTorque(1.0) *1, 8
jmagrtSetCorrectionOfForce(1.0) *2, 8
jmagrtSetCorrectionOfCoilTurn1(1.0) *8
jmagrtSetCorrectionOfCoilTurn2(1.0) *8
jmagrtSetCorrectionValue()
jmagrtSetInitialTime(0. 0)
Set the initial state jmagrtSetInitialCurrent(1, 0.0)* 3
jmagrtSetInitialDisplacement(0. 0)
jmagrtSetIronLossCalc() *5
jmagrtSetPWMFreq(10000.0) *6
jmagrtSetTime(t) t: Time
Specify a value for n step jmagrtSetCurrent(1, 0.0) * 3
jmagrtSetVoltage(1, 0.0) *3
To next step (n + 1)
jmagrtSetSignal(1, 0.0) *3
jmagrtSetDisplacement(disp)
jmagrtSetMagnetTemprature(300.0) *7
jmagrtSetCoilTemprature(300.0) *7
jmagrtExecute() *4
Run the analysis at n step
jmagrtGetCurrent(1) *4
Obtain the results at n step
jmagrtGetVoltage(1) *4
jmagrtGetTorque() *1
jmagrtGetForce() *2
jmagrtGetInductance(1) *4, 8
jmagrtUpdate()
Save the results at n step
jmagrtTerminate()
Termination processing
End the analysis
*1: This function can only be used when a PM synchronous motor, stepping motor, and a SR
726
motor is set.
*2: Can be used for a linear solenoid and linear synchronous motor.
*3: Specify only the number of terminals.
*4: Can only be used for an electric signal type.
*5: This function can only be used when a PM synchronous motor and iron loss information
is set.
*6: This function can only be used when the specifications from *5 exist and the input volt-
age signal is PWM.
*7: This function can only be used for a PM synchronous motor.
*8: This function cannot be used for induction motors.
727
JMAG-RT
Creating a C Language Program

• Sample C Language Program (page 728)
• Functions in JMAGRT_DLL.dll (page 728)
• Function Details (page 730)
Sample C Language Program

The sample C language program is saved in the following folder:
(JMAG installation folder)\JMAG_RT\general
When JMAG-Designer is installed with the default settings, it is saved in the following folder:
The sample describes DLL file names to be loaded into the code. Rewrite the DLL file name
depending on the environment to be used (“JMAGRT_DLL_64_17.DLL” for a 64-bit machine).
• Example: Line 61 of PMSM LdLq.c
/* Load DLL */
if((hInstDLL=LoadLibrary("JMAGRT_DLL.DLL"))==NULL)
abort();
Notes
The following functions must be specified:
• jmagrtInitialize
Initialize the program
• jmagrtSetCorrection***
Specify the correction value for the magnetic flux and magnets
• jmagrtUpdate
Save the data for the current step
• jmagrtTerminate
Terminate the program
The order of the following functions cannot be changed:
• jmagrtInitialize
Initializes the program
• jmagrtSetCorrection***
Specifies the correction value for the magnetic flux and magnets
• jmagrtSetInitial***
Specifies the default values of each physical quantity such as current and voltage.
Functions in JMAGRT_DLL.dll
 Functions to start JMAG-RT

jmagrtInitialize(char*rtt_file_name, int interface_type)
//Specifies the path to the RTT file and the drive type
728
 Function for setting the table interpolation method

jmagrtSetInterpolationType(int interpolation_type)
//Set the table interpolation method.
 Function that sets skew

jmagrtSetSkewParameter(int rotor_skew_type, int stator_skew_type, double
rotor_skew_angle, double stator_skew_angle, int rotor_skew_steps, int
stator_skew_steps)
//Sets parameters to account for skew.
 Functions to set correction factor

jmagrtSetCorrectionOfFlux(double value)
//Specifies the correction factor for flux linkage of a magnet.
jmagrtSetCorrectionOfMagnet(double value)
//Corrects the grade of a magnet.
jmagrtSetCorrectionOfSteel(double value)
//Corrects the grade of a steel sheet.
jmagrtSetCorrectionOfInductance(double value)
//Specifies the correction factor for inductance.
jmagrtSetCorrectionOfTorque(double value)
//Specifies the correction factor for torque.
jmagrtSetCorrectionOfForce(double value)
//Specifies the correction factor for electromagnetic force.
jmagrtSetCorrectionOfCoilTurn1(double value)
//Specifies the correction factor (1) for the number of coil turns.
//Specifies the correction factor (2) for the number of coil turns.
//Applies each correction value to a model.
 Functions to set initial status of a model

jmagrtSetInitialTime(double time)
//Specifies the start time of an analysis.
jmagrtSetInitialCurrent(int terminal_id, double current)
//Specifies the current value at the start time of an analysis.
jmagrtSetInitialDisplacement (double disp)
//Specifies the position of a mover at the start time of an analysis with the angle or dis-
tance.
 Functions to set the input value for each step

jmagrtSetTime(double time)
//Specifies the time for each step.
jmagrtSetCurrent(int terminal_id, double current)
//Specifies the current value of a terminal for each step
jmagrtSetVoltage(int terminal_id, double voltage)
//Specifies the voltage of a terminal for each step.
jmagrtSetSignal(int terminal_id, int signal)
//Specifies the current flow status of a terminal for each step.
jmagrtSetDisplacement(double disp)
//Specifies the position of a mover for each step with the angle or distance.
729
JMAG-RT
 Functions regarding iron loss data process

int jmagrtCheckIronloss()
//Checks whether or not an inputted RTT file has information on iron loss.
int jmagrtSetIronlossCalc()
//Calculation using iron loss is valid.
int jmagrtSetPWMFreq(double freqency)
//Specifies settings for PWM frequencies which is required when running a calculation
using iron loss on a motor driven by PWM.
 Function regarding temperature

jmagrtSetMagnetTemprature(double magnetTemprature);
//Specifies temperature for magnets during motor drive.
int jmagrtSetCoilTemprature(double coilTemprature);
//Specifies temperature for coils during motor drive.
 Functions regarding SR motors

int jmagrtGetNumberOfPhases()
//Returns the number of phases for coils when the inputted RTT file is for a SR motor.
 Functions to run an analysis for each step

jmagrtExectute()
//Runs an analysis for one step to calculate the current (or voltage) and electromagnetic
force (torque).
 Functions to obtain the analysis results for each step

jmagrtGetCurrent(int terminal_id)
//Obtains the current value of the specified terminal
jmagrtGetVoltage(int terminal_id)
//Obtains the voltage of the specified terminal
jmagrtGetTorque()
//Obtains torque.
jmagrtGetForce()
//Obtains electromagnetic force.
jmagrtGetInductance(int coil_id1, int coil_id2)
//Obtains the inductance between two coils.
 Functions to save the analysis results of each step

jmagrtUpdate()
//Saves the data of the current step.
 Functions to terminate an analysis

jmagrtTerminate()
//Terminates any open memory.
Function Details
 Functions to start JMAG-RT

jmagrtInitialize(char*rtt_file_name, int interface_type)
Function Specifies the path to the RTT file and the drive type
730
Argument rrt_file_name: Path to the RTT file

Interface_type: Drive type
1: Voltage signal input, 2: Current signal input
Return value None
Description This command must be specified. The following processes are executed by this com-
mand.
1. Obtains the RTT file (rrt_file_name) and drive type (Interface_type) as a parameter.
2. Obtains the motor type (ModelType) from the RTT file.
3 Determines the number of input terminals from the motor type and drive type.
4. Creates an object (Calc_Eq) based on the motor type.
 Function for setting the table interpolation method

jmagrtSetInterpolationType(int interpolation_type)
Function Set the table interpolation method.
Argument interpolation_type: interpolation method.
=0: linear interpolation.
=1: cubic interpolation.
Return value 0 = Successful execution
Any value other than 0 = error
Description Linear interpolation is specified if this function is not used to specify the interpolation
method.
 Function that sets skew

jmagrtSetSkewParameter(int rotor_skew_type, int stator_skew_type, double
rotor_skew_angle, double stator_skew_angle, int rotor_skew_steps, int stator_skew_steps)
Function Sets parameters to account for skew.
Argument rotor_skew_type/stator_skew_type: Skew type of rotor/stator
=0: No Skew
=1: Linear Skew
=2: V Skew
=3: Step Skew
rotor_skew_angle/stator_skew_angle: Skew angle (deg).
rotor_skew_steps/stator_skew_steps: Number of steps for skew. Used only when
rotor_skew_type/stator_skew_type=3. Specify a value higher than 2.
Return value 0 = Regular execution.
Other than 0 = error.
Description This function can only be used for PM synchronous motors.
It needs to be called before the jmagrtSetCorrectionValue function.
When this function is not used, it will be calculated as “no skew.”
 Functions to set correction factor

jmagrtSetCorrectionOfFlux(double value)
Function Specifies the correction factor for flux linkage of a magnet.
Argument value: Correction value for flux linkage of a magnet The default value is 1.0.
731
JMAG-RT
Return value None
jmagrtSetCorrectionOfMagnet(double value)
Function Corrects the grade of a magnet.
Argument value: Correction value for the grade of a magnet. The correction factor is used to take
into account the effects when a magnet is changed.
This coefficient affects the flux linkage of a magnet, torque, and electromagnetic force.
The default value is 1.0.
Return value None
jmagrtSetCorrectionOfSteel(double value)
Function Corrects the grade of a steel sheet.
Argument value: Correction value for the grade of a steel sheet. The correction factor is used to
take into account the effects when a material is changed.
This coefficient affects the flux linkage of a magnet, torque, and electromagnetic force.
Return value None
jmagrtSetCorrectionOfInductance(double value)
Function Specifies the correction factor for inductance.
Argument value: Correction factor for inductance.
Return value None
jmagrtSetCorrectionOfTorque(double value)
Function Specifies the correction factor for torque.
Argument value: Correction factor for torque.
Return value None
Description This command can be used for a PM synchronous motor and stepping motor.
jmagrtSetCorrectionOfForce(double value)
Function Specifies the correction factor for electromagnetic force.
Argument value: Correction factor for electromagnetic force.
Return value None
Description This command can be used for a linear solenoid and linear synchronous motor.
Function Specifies the correction factor (1) for the number of coil turns.
732
Argument value: Correction factor (1) for the number of coil turns.
With this setting, the effects of changing the number of turns is taken into account.
This value affects the inductance, flux linkage of a magnet, and electromagnetic force.
If the number of turns does not need to be corrected, specify the number of turns of
the original motor.
Return value None
Function Specifies the correction factor (2) for the number of coil turns.
Argument value: Correction factor (2) for the number of coil turns. The default value is 1.0.
With this setting, the effects of changing the number of turns is taken into account.
This value affects the inductance, flux linkage of a magnet, and electromagnetic force.
If the number of turns does not need to be corrected, specify the number of turns of
the original motor.
Return value None
Function Applies each correction value to a model.
Argument None
Return value None
Description Even if the correction factors are not used, this function is necessary.
 Functions to set initial status of a model

jmagrtSetInitialTime(double time)
Function Specifies the start time of an analysis.
Argument time: Initial time (s)
Return value None
jmagrtSetInitialCurrent(int terminal_id, double current)

Function Specifies the current value at the start time of an analysis.
Argument terminal_id: Terminal ID. Enter “1” for setting the terminal 1
current: Initial current (A)
Return value None
Description This command needs to be set for each terminal.
jmagrtSetInitialDisplacement (double disp)

Function Specifies the position of a mover at the start time of an analysis with the angle or dis-
tance.
Argument disp: Angle (deg) or distance (m)
Return value None
733
JMAG-RT
Description This command specifies the initial angle for a PM synchronous motor and stepping
motor.
This command specifies the initial position for a linear solenoid and linear synchro-
nous motor.
 Functions to set the input value for each step

jmagrtSetTime(double time)
Function Specifies the time for each step.
Argument time: Time (s)
Return value None
jmagrtSetCurrent(int terminal_id, double current)

Function Specifies the current value of a terminal for each step
Argument terminal_id: Terminal ID
Enter “1” for setting the terminal 1.
current: Current value (A)
Return value None
Description This command needs to be set for each terminal
jmagrtSetVoltage(int terminal_id, double voltage)

Function Specifies the voltage of a terminal for each step.
Argument terminal_id: Terminal ID
Enter “1” for setting the terminal 1.
voltage: Specifies voltage between the specified terminal and Ground component of a
PM synchronous motor and linear synchronous motor.
Specifies the voltage of a terminal for a stepping motor and linear solenoid.
Return value None
jmagrtSetSignal(int terminal_id, int signal)

Function Specifies the current flow status of a terminal for each step.
Argument terminal_id: Terminal ID.
Enter “1” for setting the terminal 1
signal=0: Switch is open. signal=1: The current is flowing.
Return value None
jmagrtSetDisplacement(double disp)
Function Specifies the position of a mover for each step with the angle or distance.
Argument disp: Angle (deg) or distance (m).
Return value None
734
Description This command specifies the initial angle for a PM synchronous motor and stepping
motor.
This command specifies the initial position for a linear solenoid and linear synchro-
nous motor.
If the position is not set, the initial position specified for jmagrtSetInitialDisplacement
is used.
 Functions regarding iron loss data process

int jmagrtCheckIronloss()
Function Checks whether or not an inputted RTT file has information on iron loss.
Argument Cannot be specified
Return value 0= Inputted RTT file does not have information on iron loss.
1= Inputted RTT file has information on iron loss.
Description A calculation using iron loss is not run when the “jmagrtSetIronlossCalc” function is
not executed, regardless that there is information on iron loss in the RTT file.
int jmagrtSetIronlossCalc()
Function Calculation using iron loss is valid.
Return value 0 (constant)
Description A calculation using iron loss is not run when this function is not executed, regardless
that there is information on iron loss in the RTT file.
A calculation using iron loss is not run when there is no information on iron loss in the
RTT file, regardless that this function is executed.
The “jmagrtCheckIronloss()” function can be used to confirm that there is iron loss
information in the RTT file.
int jmagrtSetPWMFreq(double freqency)

Function Specifies settings for PWM frequencies which is required when running a calculation
using iron loss on a motor driven by PWM.
Description The calculation cannot run properly when PWM frequencies are not set using this
function, when running a calculation using iron loss on a motor driven by PWM.
 Function regarding temperature

int jmagrtSetMagnetTemprature(double magnetTemprature)
Function Specifies temperature for magnets during motor drive.
Argument mangetTemprature: Temperature of magnet
Description This function can be called in each step.
int jmagrtSetCoilTemprature(double coilTemprature)

Function Specifies temperature for coils during motor drive.
Argument coilTemprature: Temperature of coil
735
JMAG-RT

Description This function can be called in each step.
 Functions regarding SR motors

int jmagrtGetNumberOfPhases()
Function Returns the number of phases for coils when the inputted RTT file is for a SR motor.
Return value Number of phases for coil
Description JMAG-RT supports 3-phase, 4-phase, and 5-phase SR motors.
 Functions to run an analysis for each step

jmagrtExectute()
Function Runs an analysis for one step to calculate the current (or voltage) and electromagnetic
force (torque).
Argument None
Return value None
Description The initial position needs to be set for each step in the case of electric signal input.
This setting is not necessary for a current signal input.
 Functions to obtain the analysis results for each step

jmagrtGetCurrent(int terminal_id)
Function Obtains the current value of the specified terminal
Return value Current (A)
Description This command can be used at each step for electric signal input.
This command cannot be used for a current signal input.
jmagrtGetVoltage(int terminal_id)
Function Obtains the voltage of the specified terminal
Return value Voltage (V)
Description This command can be used at each step for electric signal input.
This command cannot be used for a current signal input.
jmagrtGetTorque()
Function Obtains torque.
Argument None
Return value Torque (Nm)
Description This command can be used for a PM synchronous motor and stepping motor.
jmagrtGetForce()
Function Obtains electromagnetic force.
Argument None
736
Return value Electromagnetic force (N)

Description This command can be used for a linear solenoid and linear synchronous motor.
jmagrtGetInductance(int coil_id1, int coil_id2)

Function Obtains the inductance between two coils.
Argument coil_id1, coil_id2: Coil ID.
Enter “1” to obtain the first coil data.
Return value Inductance (H)
Description This command cannot be used for electric signal input.
For a PM synchronous motor and linear synchronous motor, the relation between
coil_id and each phase is shown below.
coil_id = 1: U-phase, coil_id= 2: V-phase, coil_id = 3: W-phase
For a stepping motor, the relation between coil_id and each phase is shown below.
coil_id = 1: A+ phase, coil_id= 2: A- phase, coil_id = 3: B+ phase, coil_id= 4: B- phase
 Functions to save the analysis results of each step

jmagrtUpdate()
Function Saves the data of the current step.
Argument None
Return value None
Description This command must be used to confirm the analysis at each step.
When this command is executed, the following is performed.
1. Save the data of the current step as the previous data.
2. Save the previous data as the data of the pre-previous step.
The following data is saved.

• Time
• Current
• Magnetic flux
• Inductance
• Mechanical angle
 Functions to terminate an analysis

jmagrtTerminate()
Function Terminates any open memory.
Argument None
Return value None
Description This command must be used when an analysis is complete.
737
JMAG-RT
Creating Executable Files for Your Programs in C

Build the program in C and create an executable file.
• Files to be Used (page 738)
• Creation Procedures (page 738)
• Debug Procedures (page 739)
Files to be Used
Files required for creating the executable file are as follows:

JMAGRT_DLL.dll Dynamic-link library for JMAG-RT.
Save location: (JMAG installation folder)\JMAG_RT\general
C language program C++ program created by users.
Sample file save location: (JMAG installation folder)\JMAG_RT\gen-
eral
Creation Procedures
In this explanation, the project name is “rt_run”. Any name can be specified when actually creating
the file.
1. Start Microsoft Visual Studio 2022.

2. Create a new project.
The procedure shown here is an example. For other steps, please refer to the following pages:
https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/visualstudio/ide/create-new-project?view=vs-2022
i. Select [Create a new project] in the start window to display the [Create a new proj-
ect] dialog.
ii. Select [Empty Project] and click [Next].
iii. In the [Configure your new project] dialog, enter “rt_run” in [Project name].
iv. Click [Create].
3. Select [Release] in [Solution Configurations] in the toolbar.
4. From the menu bar, select [Project] > [Property] to display the [rt_run Property Pages]
dialog.
5. Click [Configuration Properties] > [Linker] > [General] and specify the JMAGRT_DLL.dll
save location in the row of [Additional Library Directories].
JMAGRT_DLL.dll is saved in the following folder:
(JMAG installation folder)\JMAG RT\general
When JMAG-Designer is installed with the default settings, it is saved in the following folder:
738
6. Click [OK].
7. Drag and drop the program created previously into [Source Files] in [Solution Explorer].
The program is added under [Source Files] of [Solution Explorer]. Related header files are also
automatically added to [External Dependencies] in [Solution Explorer].
For details on program creation methods, see “Creating a C Language Program” on page 728.
8. Double-click the program under [Source Files] in [Solution Explorer].
9. Perform program coding as needed.
10.From the menu bar, select [Build] > [Build rt_run].
The program is built, and the executable file (rt_run) is created.
Debug Procedures
1. Create a debug version of the created executable file.
2. Enter the following command into the command prompt, and run Visual Studio 2022.
devenv (created executable file name)
3. From the menu bar, select [Debug] > [Start Debugging].

4. Perform debugging after the executable file runs.
739
JMAG-RT
740
JMAG-RT Viewer
JMAG-RT Viewer Overviews
A JMAG-RT model is a dataset of control circuit simulation parameters (coil flux linkage and inductance, resis-
tance etc.) that is extracted from FED analysis results of motors, etc. and edited. This dataset can be exported as
a RTT file.
Using blocks linked to the JMAG-RT model (RTT file) in the circuit simulator, makes it possible to run high-
speed control circuit simulation with consideration for nonlinear magnetizing properties and position depen-
dency, as if using the finite element method.
In JMAG-RT Viewer, input information and motor specifications used when creating the JMAG-RT model can
be checked as well as using the JMAG-RT model to create torque-speed curves and efficiency/loss maps.

• JMAG-RT Viewer Functions (page 744)
• License for JMAG-RT Viewer (page 748)
• Conversion to New Format (when JMAG-Designer 10.4 or earlier was used) (page 749)
743
JMAG-RT Viewer
JMAG-RT Viewer Functions

JMAG-RT Viewer has the following functions.
• Displaying JMAG-RT Model Basic Information (page 744)
• Displaying FEA Result Value Maps Using JMAG-RT Models (page 744)
• Displaying Maps of Efficiency Map Analysis Studies in JMAG-RT Model (page 744)
• Creating and Displaying Torque-Speed Curves and Efficiency Maps Using JMAG-RT models
(page 745)
• Applying Skew to JMAG-RT Model (page 746)
• Adding Equivalent Iron Loss Resistance Tables (page 746)
• Exporting MAT Files for MATLAB/Simulink FEM-Parameterized Block (page 746)
Displaying JMAG-RT Model Basic Information

The following information can be confirmed for JMAG-RT models (RTT files).
• Input information when creating the JMAG-RT model
• Specifications of the motor used
• Type of result data output to the JMAG-RT model
For details, see “Checking Basic Information of the JMAG-RT Model” on page 760.
Displaying FEA Result Value Maps Using JMAG-RT Models

It is possible to draw maps of FEA result values with JMAG-RT Viewer when using JMAG-RT
models of the following motors.
• LdLq models, and spatial harmonic (differential) models of PM synchronous motor and synchro-
nous reluctance motor:
Note the following:
• FEA result value maps cannot be drawn for JMAG-RT models that possess [Spatial Har-
monic (differential) model] result values and the [Drive Type] is [Other].
MEMO The following parameters are set when creating JMAG-RT models with JMAG-RT.
These parameter settings cannot be changed with JMAG-RT Viewer.
[Spatial Harmonic (Differential) Model], [Spatial Harmonic (Integral) Model], [LdLq Model],
[Drive Type].
• Induction motors
For details, see “Displaying JMAG-RT Model FEA Result Value Maps” on page 768.
Displaying Maps of Efficiency Map Analysis Studies in JMAG-RT Model

When map data obtained from JMAG-Designer efficiency map analysis studies is added to the
JMAG-RT model, a map can be displayed from this map data.
For details see “Displaying Maps of JMAG-Efficiency Map Analysis Studies in JMAG-RT Model” on
page 773.
744
Creating and Displaying Torque-Speed Curves and Efficiency Maps Using JMAG-RT
models
You can display torque-speed curves and efficiency maps with JMAG-RT Viewer when using
JMAG-RT models of the following motors:
• PM synchronous motors and synchronous reluctance motors
In addition, d/q phase current-speed curves (N-Id/Iq), current amplitude-speed curves (N-Iam),
iron loss maps (N-T-IronLoss) and copper loss maps (N-T-CopperLoss) also can be displayed.
For details, see the following pages:
• “Settings for Creating Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps” on page 796
• “Displaying Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps in Map View” on page 806
• “Changing Speed Curves/Maps Displayed in Map View” on page 808
• “Exporting Speed Curve/Map Reports and Images” on page 811
• “Exporting Speed Curve and Map Data Tables” on page 812
 Displaying torque-speed curves and efficiency maps that account for iron loss
When creating torque-speed curves and efficiency maps that account for iron loss, iron loss data
must be output to RTT files.
• When using JMAG-RT, select [Allow Iron Loss] in the [Create] tab of the setting dialog of each
motor to generate RTT files with output iron loss data.
• When using JMAG-Express and using versions of JMAG-Express from June 2011 and later,
RTT files with output iron loss data are generated.
When using RTT files that do not possess output iron loss data, torque-speed curves and efficiency
maps that account only the coil Joule loss are created.
 PM synchronous motors and synchronous reluctance motors, JMAG-RT model types

and the accuracy of each function
There are three varieties of the PM synchronous motor JMAG-RT models;
• LdLq models
• Spatial harmonic (differential) models
• Spatial harmonic (integral) models
There are two varieties of the synchronous reluctance motor JMAG-RT models;
• LdLq models
• Spatial harmonic (differential) models
Inductance data used when creating JMAG-RT Viewer torque-speed curves and efficiency maps will
differ depending on these types.
Corresponding relationships between model types and the inductance data used is as follows:
Inductance data used for torque speed curves and

Model type
efficiency maps
LdLq model Distribution information using current and phase
dependent values
745
JMAG-RT Viewer
Inductance data used for torque speed curves and

Model type
efficiency maps
Spatial harmonic (differential) model Dependent on current and phase, as well as distribu-
tion information using values averaged in the
mechanical angle direction
LdLq model + spatial harmonic (differential) Dependent on current and phase, as well as distribu-
model tion information using values averaged in the
Spatial harmonic (differential) model + spatial Dependent on current and phase, as well as distribu-
harmonic (integral) model tion information using values averaged in the
LdLq model + spatial harmonic (differential) Dependent on current and phase, as well as distribu-
model + spatial harmonic (integral) model tion information using values averaged in the
The above “LdLq model + spatial harmonic (differential) model” refers to the result data of both
LdLq models and spatial harmonic (differential) models output to RTT files.
Files such as these are created when the checkboxes for both [LdLq model] and [Spatial Harmonic
Model] are selected in the JMAG-RT library manager [Select Motor Model] dialog.
MEMO For information on LdLq models, spatial harmonic (differential) models, and spatial harmonic
(integral) models, see “Checking Basic Information of the JMAG-RT Model” on page 760.
Applying Skew to JMAG-RT Model

When a skew is applied to the JMAG-RT model, the JMAG-RT model can be output as a new
model. Using a JMAG-RT model with skew eliminates the need to account for skew when running
a control circuit simulation.
This function supports the following motors of the JMAG-RT model:
• Three-phase PM synchronous motor:
However, RTT files that do not contain spatial harmonic model (integral) data are not supported
by this function.
See “Applying Skew to JMAG-RT Model” on page 788.
Adding Equivalent Iron Loss Resistance Tables

By using additional tables, harmonic iron loss can be accounted for in control circuit simulations.
• Three-phase/six-phase PM synchronous motor
• Three-phase/six-phase synchronous reluctance motor
• Three-phase/six-phase induction motor
See “Adding Equivalent Iron Loss Resistance Tables to JMAG-RT Models” on page 790.
Exporting MAT Files for MATLAB/Simulink FEM-Parameterized Block

Data described in pre-existing RTT files can be exported to the MathWorks MAT file format (.mat).
Data loaded into MATLAB from MAT files can be used with FEM-parameterized PMSM blocks.
746

• Three-phase PM synchronous motors:
The result data of spatial harmonic differential models must be included.
For details, see “Exporting MAT Files for MATLAB/Simulink FEM-Parameterized Block” on page
793.
747
JMAG-RT Viewer
License for JMAG-RT Viewer

The functions of the JMAG-RT Viewer are licensed in different ways.
Function Description
Displaying JMAG-RT model basic No license is required.
information
• Displaying FEA result value maps One of the following licenses is required to render torque-
using JMAG-RT models speed curve, Ld map, and Lq map.
• Displaying maps of efficiency map • License (JMAG-RT-Viewer)
analysis studies in JMAG-RT model • A free license separately issued through JMAG website
• Creating and displaying torque-speed (https://www.jmag-international.com/)
curves using JMAG-RT models
However, if you have the efficiency map license (JMAG-RT-
• Exporting MAT files for MATLAB/
EFFICIENCYMAP), you can use these functions without
Simulink FEM-Parameterized block
having to obtain the above license.
If both the license (JMAG-RT-EFFICIENCYMAP) and the
free license are valid, the free license is consumed first.
Creating and displaying efficiency A paid JMAG-RT-EFFICIENCYMAP is required.
maps using JMAG-RT models To obtain it, please contact your distributor or sales represen-
tative.
Applying skew to JMAG-RT model No license is required.
Adding equivalent iron loss resistance A paid JMAG-RT license is required.
tables To obtain it, please contact your distributor or sales represen-
tative.
748
Conversion to New Format (when JMAG-Designer 10.4 or earlier

was used)
The format of the RTT file (.rtt) was changed in JMAG-Designer version10.5. To use an older for-
mat file with the JMAG-RT Viewer, it is required to convert it to the new format using the RT
Library Manager, as described below.
IMPORTANT When converting a RTT file to a new format, the calculation data generated
when the relevant file was created needs to be in the JMAG-RT Library Manager (JMAG-RT base
model). Conversion is not successful when only a RTT file is available.
Conversion Procedure
1. Start the JMAG-RT Library Manager bundled in JMAG-Designer 10.5 or later.
2. Select a JMAG-RT motor model from the [RT Model Library] list in the main dialog that
is set to [Created] in the [Data Status] column and click [Modify].
A message asking if you want to edit the current data is displayed.
3. Select [No] in the dialog and dialog to set each model type is displayed.
4. Confirm the information for the JMAG-RT model file displayed in the [Data Information]
tab.
5. Select [OK] and a message asking if you want to update the RTT file is displayed.
6. Select [Yes] and a report file is displayed on the screen whether or not updating the data
has succeeded or not.
Confirm the error message that is displayed explaining the error if it occurs.
7. Copy the JMAG-RT model to the working folder for the circuit simulator.
The RTT file that is created to the working folder is converted to the new format.
When Using Data Created with JMAG-Express

JMAG-Express supports the new format of the RTT file from version 1.00.3001 or later. The RTT
file created in the older versions of JMAG-Express cannot be converted to the newer format. To use
the JMAG-RT Viewer with these files, please re-calculate using JMAG-Express version1.00.3001 or
later.
749
JMAG-RT Viewer
750
Using JMAG-RT Viewer
This chapter describes the operations, input parameters, and precautions when using the JMAG-RT model
(RTT file) output from JMAG-RT or JMAG-Express with JMAG-RT Viewer.

• Starting JMAG-RT Viewer (page 752)
• Screen Configuration of JMAG-RT Viewer (page 753)
• Menu of JMAG-RT Viewer (page 756)
Checking JMAG-RT Models and Applying Corrections

• Importing a JMAG-RT Model (RTT File) (page 759)
• Checking Basic Information of the JMAG-RT Model (page 760)
• Displaying JMAG-RT Model FEA Result Value Maps (page 768)
• Displaying Maps of JMAG-Efficiency Map Analysis Studies in JMAG-RT Model (page 773)
• Applying Corrections to JMAG-RT Model FEA Result Values (page 774)
Editing JMAG-RT Models

• Applying Skew to JMAG-RT Model (page 788)
• Adding Equivalent Iron Loss Resistance Tables to JMAG-RT Models (page 790)
• Exporting MAT Files for MATLAB/Simulink FEM-Parameterized Block (page 793)
Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps

• Settings for Creating Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps (page 796)
• Saving Settings for Creating Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps to Files (page 805)
• Loading Settings for Creating Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps from Files (page 805)
• Displaying Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps in Map View (page 806)
• Changing Speed Curves/Maps Displayed in Map View (page 808)
• Exporting Speed Curve/Map Reports and Images (page 811)
• Exporting Speed Curve and Map Data Tables (page 812)
Specifications
• Motor Control Information (page 814)
Operations without GUI (command line execution)

• Running from the Command Line (page 819)
Licenses
• Setting the License Check (License Waiting Function) (page 829)
751
JMAG-RT Viewer
Starting JMAG-RT Viewer

• Running from the Windows Menu (page 752)
Running from the Windows Menu
 Windows 10
1. Click the Windows button.

A menu is displayed.
2. Click [All Apps].
The [Apps] screen is displayed.
3. Click the application software icon.
JMAG-RT Viewer window is displayed.
Starting from the Command Line

Examples of JMAG-RT Viewer is listed below.
MEMO For details on JMAG-Designer startup command options, see “Screen Configuration Edition”.
 Windows (using command)
1. Execute the command to run JMAG-Designer.

If the JMAG-RT Viewer installation folder is set to “INSDIR”, execute the following command.
(INSDIR=C:\Program Files (x86)\JMAG-RT Viewer22.2, etc.).
cd $INSDIR
rtviewer.exe
MEMO File paths with spaces need to be enclosed with double quotation marks (").
752
Screen Configuration of JMAG-RT Viewer

The screen configuration of JMAG-RT Viewer is as follows:
Main Window Option Window
Main Window of JMAG-RT Viewer

The main window is the one which is displayed first after the application started.
 Basic information of RTT file

When a RTT file is imported to the JMAG-RT Viewer, the following information in the file is dis-
played in the main window.
• [Title] • [Output Info]

• [Info] • [Description]
• [Motor Info]
For details, see “Checking Basic Information of the JMAG-RT Model” on page 760.
MEMO RTT files can also be “drag and dropped” onto the main window to open them.
MEMO If the RTT file is output from JMAG-RT, the same information as displayed in the Informa-
tion tab of the RT Library Manager is displayed. For steps to import the RTT file, see “Importing a
JMAG-RT Model (RTT File)” on page 759.
MEMO Click displayed at the top of each output port row to expand the items of the row in [Output
Info]. Clicking closes the row of each item.
 [Model Type]
[Model Type] is activated when PM synchronous motor (or synchronous reluctance motor) RTT files
that possess the result data of multiple model types are opened in JMAG-RT Viewer.
Select from the following:
753
JMAG-RT Viewer
• [LdLq]
• [Spatial harmonic (differential)]
FEA result value maps, torque-speed curves, and efficiency maps are displayed using the result data
of the model type that is selected here.
 [Apply the Correction File]

Selecting [Apply the Correction File] at the bottom of the main screen and specifying the correction
file enables previewing of each result value after corrections.
For details, see “Applying Corrections to JMAG-RT Model FEA Result Values” on page 774.
Detailed Settings for the Option Window

When [More] is clicked, the main window is expand to show the detailed setting option window. In
this window, the parameters required to display the torque-speed curve and the efficiency map are
set.
The following parameters can be set in the window.
• [Inverter Rating] • [Leakage Inductance]

• [Motor Control] • [Temperature Correction]
• [Coefficients] • [Skew]
For details, see “Settings for Creating Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps” on page 796.
MEMO When there is no valid license for the torque-speed curve or efficiency map, [More] is disabled.
MEMO The types of settings that can be specified, can vary depending on the motor.
For details about each parameters, see “Settings for Creating Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency
Maps” on page 796.
Map View Window

The map view window opens when selecting commands (except some commands) in the [Tools]
menu and the [Table Value] menu in the JMAG-RT Viewer main window. Displays a graph for
speed curves and maps.
To enlarge a graph, click [Zoom] on the toolbar, and then drag the range to be enlarged on the
graph. Click [Zoom] again to set the zoom ratio back to default.
Clicking on the graph displays the values of the horizontal axis and vertical axis (left) of the current
position, and clicking on the map displays the values for the vertical axis (right) at the bottom of the
dialog.
754
Map view window (Efficiency map)
In the map view window for [Torque-Speed Curve] or [Efficiency Map], torque speed curves/effi-
ciency maps are displayed in the left side of the window, and parameters used for outputting torque
speed curves/efficiency maps are displayed on the right side.
The percentage of operating range is displayed to show how much of the efficiency is acquired in the
entire operating range of the efficiency map.
After displaying the torque-speed curve in this window, the graph can be changed to the d/q cur-
rent-speed curve (N-Id/Iq) or to the current amplitude-speed curve (N-Iam). Also, it is possible to
change the efficiency map to the iron loss map (N-T-Iron loss) and to the coil loss map (N-T-Coil
loss).
For display items, see “Changing Speed Curves/Maps Displayed in Map View” on page 808.
755
JMAG-RT Viewer
Menu of JMAG-RT Viewer

• Menu of the Main Window (page 756)
• Menu of the Map View Window (page 758)
Menu of the Main Window

The following commands are available from the menu.
 [File] menu
Command Description
[Open] Opens the RTT file.
[Open Setting] Loads previously saved settings for the detailed parameters saved in an XML
file.
[Save Setting] Saves the settings for the detailed settings window to an XML file.
[Display JMAG- This command is activated when the RTT file exported from JMAG-Designer
Designer Efficiency efficiency map analysis studies is loaded.
Map] This opens the map view window and display the map based on the map data
of the RTT file. For details see “Displaying Maps of JMAG-Efficiency Map
Analysis Studies in JMAG-RT Model” on page 773.
[Apply Skew and Save This command is activated when RTT files of the PM synchronous motors are
As] loaded.
This applies skew to JMAG-RT model, rename the RTT file and output. For
details see “Applying Skew to JMAG-RT Model” on page 788.
[Add Equivalent Iron- This command is activated when RTT files that have iron loss table data
loss Resistance Table are loaded.
and Save As] This adds equivalent iron loss resistance tables and filter harmonic induc-
tance data to JMAG-RT models, then exports those JMAG-RT models
with new names. For details, see “Adding Equivalent Iron Loss Resistance
Tables to JMAG-RT Models” on page 790.
[Export File for MAT- This command is activated when the RTT files of three-phase PM synchro-
LAB/Simulink FEM- nous motors have been loaded.
Parameterized Block] Data described in pre-existing RTT files is exported to the MathWorks MAT
file format. For details, see “Exporting MAT Files for MATLAB/Simulink FEM-
Parameterized Block” on page 793.
[Exit] Terminates the JMAG-RT Viewer.
 [Tools] menu
Command Description
[Torque-Speed curve] Displays the torque-speed curve with the settings in the detailed setting
option window. This is the same as clicking [Torque-Speed curve] .
[Efficiency map] Displays the efficiency map with the settings in the detailed setting option
window. This is the same as clicking [Efficiency map] .
[Language] Changes the display language. English and Japanese are supported.
756
Command Description
[Temperature Unit] Changes the unit of temperature used for the temperature correction of the
coil and magnet in the detailed setting option window. The options are Kelvin
(K), Celsius (deg C) and Fahrenheit (deg F).
Each value set in [Base], [Coefficient], [Max], and [Min] are automatically
converted when the unit in temperature is modified.
[Efficiency Map Changes the calculation region (motoring and generating) in an efficiency
Range] map. The positive region for torque is only calculated when [Motor Only] is
selected. The positive and negative region of a torque is calculated when
[Motor + Generator] is selected.
The calculation time is shorter when [Motor Only] is selected, as compared to
when [Motor + Generator] is selected.
[Efficiency Map Range] can be set when a RTT file for a PM synchronous
motor (or synchronous reluctance motor) is imported. The setting cannot be
specified for files that are set for an induction motor.
 [Table Value] menu

Displays FEA result value maps output to RTT files.
Select results to be displayed. Details of each result value are described in “Displaying JMAG-RT
Model FEA Result Value Maps” on page 768.
 [Help] menu
Command Description
[Help] Starts the JMAG-RT Viewer Help.
[Registration Key Allows the setting of the license key for displaying the torque-speed curve. The
Update] license key can be requested from the JMAG website. When this command is
selected, the [Registration Key Setup] dialog opens. Enter your [E-mail
address], [Expiry date] and [License Key] in the dialog to set the license.
[About] Displays the version information of the JMAG-RT Viewer.
757
JMAG-RT Viewer
Menu of the Map View Window

The following commands are available from the menu.
 [File] menu
Command Description
[Export] Exports the torque-speed curve or the efficiency map to a report (.pdf ) or
to an image file (.bmp, .jpeg, .png, .tif ). [Export] in the tool bar can also
be used to export the image. For details, see “Exporting Speed Curve/Map
Reports and Images” on page 811.
[Csv Export] Exports the data of the torque-speed curve or the efficiency map as CSV for-
mat file. For details, see “Exporting Speed Curve and Map Data Tables” on
page 812.
[Print Setup] Sets the properties for printing reports and images.
[Print Preview] Displays a preview of the page for printing.
[Print] Prints a report of the torque-speed curve or the efficiency map to the
selected printer. The function is the same as [Print] in the tool bar.
[Close] Closes the map view window.
 [Display] menu
Command Description
Switch display item Switches display between torque-speed curve and efficiency map. For details,
see “Changing Speed Curves/Maps Displayed in Map View” on page 808.
[Set Color Range] Sets the rendering range for map diagrams or gradation. See “Displaying
Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps in Map View” on page 806 for
details.
758
Importing a JMAG-RT Model (RTT File)

RTT files (.rtt) can be opened from the JMAG-RT Viewer menu or by dragging and dropping into
JMAG-RT Viewer.
MEMO For the notes, see “JMAG-RT Viewer Functions” on page 744 and “Conversion to New Format
(when JMAG-Designer 10.4 or earlier was used)” on page 749.
Operation from the Menu Bar

1. Select [File] > [Open] from the menu bar.
2. In the [Open] dialog, select the folder where the file to open is located.
3. Select the file or put the file name in the [File Name] box.
4. Click [OK].
Operation by Drag and Drop

1. Dragging the RTT file and drop on the main windows of JMAG-RT Viewer.
759
JMAG-RT Viewer
Checking Basic Information of the JMAG-RT Model

Basic information of JMAG-RT model (RTT file) can be displayed in JMAG-RT Viewer.
The content displayed will differ depending on the type of program used to export the JMAG-RT
model (JMAG-RT, JMAG-Express, JMAG-Designer Efficiency map analysis studies) and the ver-
sion of these programs.
[Title]
The title of the JMAG-RT model described in the RTT file is displayed.
[Info]
Information when creating the JMAG-RT model is displayed.
JMAG-RT model JMAG-RT loss map model

• [Version] • [Efficiency Map: Creation Data]
• [Creation Data] • [Efficiency Map: Input File Name]
• [JMAG Version] • [Efficiency Map: JMAG Version]
• [Output Source]:
Displays the name of the program that
exported the displayed RTT file, such as
[JMAG-RT Library Manager] and [JMAG-
Designer].
• [Preparer]
• [Input File Name]
[Motor Info]
The following information is displayed:
 Body/rated value
This is information added by users responsible for creating RTT files. These values are not used as
input values in FEA for RTT file creation.
Rotating machines
• [Weight (Wg) (kg)] • [Rated Speed (Nrat) (rpm)]
• [Shaft Length (m)] • [Rated Output (PWR) (kW)]
• [Diameter (m)] • [Rated Current (Irat) (A)]
• [Inertia (Ina) (kgm2)] • [Rated Voltage (Vrat) (V)]
760
Linear motor, linear solenoid

• [Weight (Wg) (kg)] • [Rated Speed (Nrat) (m/s)]
• [Rated Output (PWR) (kW)]
• [Rated Current (Irat) (A)]
• [Rated Voltage (Vrat) (V)]
 Type ([Motor Info: Type (MTR, TYPE)])

PM synchronous motor (or synchronous reluctance motor) RTT files may contain multiple types of
result data. In the [Motor Info: Type] field, users can check which type of result data that an RTT
file opened in JMAG-RT Viewer possesses.
Type Description
[(PMSM. LdLq)] This is displayed when RTT files possess LdLq model result data.
The following result data is output for LdLq models:
• d-axis and q-axis inductances that possess current dependency and cur-
rent phase angle dependency.
Because only the sine wave components of motor electromotive force wave-
forms are used when calculating Ld and Lq, the influence of harmonics due
to slots cannot be confirmed.
[(PMSM. Harmonic [Dif- This is displayed when RTT file possess spatial harmonic (differential)
ferential])] model result data.
The following result data is output when spatial harmonic (differential)

model [Drive Type] is [Sine Wave Drive]:
• Flux linkage, inductance, and torque that possess current amplitude
dependency and current phase angle dependency
The following result data is output when spatial harmonic (differential)

model [Drive Type] is [Other]:
• Flux linkage, inductance, and torque that possess current dependency
The influence of harmonics due to slots can be confirmed. Inductance can

be obtained with sufficient accuracy even when magnetic saturation is con-
siderably strong.
[(PMSM. Harmonic This is displayed when RTT files possess spatial harmonic (integral) model
[Integral])] result data.
The following result data is output for spatial harmonic (integral) models:
• Flux linkage and torque, that possess current amplitude dependency and
current phase angle dependency
• Currents that possess magnetic flux dependency
The influence of harmonics due to slots can be confirmed. Flux linkage can
be obtained with sufficient accuracy even when magnetic saturation is con-
siderably strong.
[PMSM_6-Phase] Displayed for six-phase motors.
Six-phase motor RTT files possess the result data of spatial harmonic (dif-
ferential) models.
761
JMAG-RT Viewer
 Input values when creating RTT files

This is information used as input values in FEA for RTT file creation. Items displayed will differ
depending on the motor type.
Three-phase PM synchronous motor and three-phase synchronous reluctance motor

• [d-axis Offset Angle (deg)]
• [Resistance (ohm)]
• Skew parameters:
The skew parameter is only displayed for skew applied JMAG-RT models that are output from
the skew apply function of JMAG-RT Viewer.
[Rotor Skew: Type], [Rotor Skew: Angle], [Rotor Skew: Number of Steps], [Stator Skew: Type],
[Stator Skew: Angle], [Stator Skew: Number of Steps]
• [Axis Type]
• Flux:
[Flux: Angle Resolution], [Flux: Current Resolution], [Flux: Phase Resolution]
• Inductance:
[Inductance: Angle Resolution], [Inductance: Current Resolution], [Inductance: Phase Resolu-
tion], [Inductance: Zero-phase Current Resolution]
• Torque:
[Torque: Angle Resolution], [Torque: Current Resolution], [Torque: Phase Resolution], [Torque:
Zero-phase Current Resolution]
• Iron loss:
[Iron Loss Data], [Iron Loss: Current Resolution], [Iron Loss: Phase Resolution], [Iron Loss:
Rotation Speed]
Six-phase PM synchronous motor and six-phase synchronous reluctance motor

• [Winding Type]
• [Coil Resistance (Rcol) (Ohm)]
• Skew parameters:
The skew parameter is only displayed for skew applied JMAG-RT models that are output from
the skew apply function of JMAG-RT Viewer.
[Rotor Skew: Type], [Rotor Skew: Angle], [Rotor Skew: Number of Steps], [Stator Skew: Type],
[Stator Skew: Angle], [Stator Skew: Number of Steps]
• [Axis Type]
• Flux:
[Flux: Angle Resolution], [Flux: Coilset1: Current Resolution], [Flux: Coilset1: Phase Resolu-
tion], [Flux: Coilset2: Current Resolution], [Flux: Coilset2: Phase Resolution]
• Inductance:
[Inductance: Angle Resolution], [Inductance: Coilset1: Current Resolution], [Inductance: Coil-
set1: Phase Resolution], [Inductance: Coilset2: Current Resolution], [Inductance: Coilset2:
Phase Resolution]
762
• Torque:
[Torque: Angle Resolution], [Torque: Coilset1: Current Resolution], [Torque: Coilset1: Phase
Resolution], [Torque: Coilset2: Current Resolution], [Torque: Coilset2: Phase Resolution]
• Iron loss:
[Iron Loss Data], [Iron Loss: Coilset1: Current Resolution], [Iron Loss: Coilset1: Phase Resolu-
tion], [Iron Loss: Coilset2: Current Resolution], [Iron Loss: Coilset2: Phase Resolution], [Iron
Loss: Rotation Speed]
Stepping motor
Linear solenoid
Linear synchronous motor

SR motor
Three-phase induction motor

• [Number of Turns]
• [Stator Resistance (ohm)]
• [Rotor Resistance (ohm)]:
Rotor resistance converted to the stator side. Values at each slip frequency.
• [Stray Load Loss (ohm)]
Six-phase Induction motor

• [Number of Poles]:
The number of poles before changing (2p-poles when the number of pole pairs is p).
• [Number of Poles_Switch]:
The number of poles after changing (4p-poles when the number of pole pairs is p).
• [Number of Turns]
• [Stator Resistance (ohm)]
• [Rotor Resistance (multiplication 1) (ohm)], [Rotor Resistance (multiplication 2) (ohm)]:
Rotor resistance converted to the stator side. Values at each slip frequency.
The former is the value before changing the number of poles (value under 2p-poles), and the lat-
ter is the value after changing the number of poles (value under 4p-poles).
Wound-field synchronous motor, generic model

• [Phase Resistance (ohm)]
• [Field Coil Resistance (ohm)]
763
JMAG-RT Viewer
 Calculation result values output to RTT files

These are displayed for the RTT files of PM synchronous motors (or synchronous reluctance
motors).
These are either the values calculated when an RTT file was created, or alternatively, the values
added by the user using the correction function after creating the RTT file.
Item Description
[Permanent Magnet Flux Value Ψ a of magnetic flux linking the coil for the dq coordinate system.
(Wb)]
Ψ a is calculated with the following formula:
Ψa = Ψf × (3 ⁄ 2)
Ψ a : Magnet magnetic flux value (Wb) described in the JMAG-RT

model
Ψ f : Maximum value (Wb) of the armature flux linkage due to perma-
nent magnets per phase
[Inductance Type] Displayed for RTT file for three-phase synchronous reluctance motor
(LdLq model).
• [Static Inductance]:
Displayed when lookup table in version 21.0 or later format of JMAG
Designer is output to the RTT file.
When the RTT file for [Static Inductance] is used in a circuit simulation,
it can be calculated more accurately than the RTT file for [Differential
Inductance for Ld].
• [Differential Inductance for Ld]:
Displayed when lookup table in JMAG-Designer version 20.2 or later
format is output to the RTT file.
When the inductance map is displayed from [Table Value] > [Induc-
tance], the static inductance (based on the format of JMAG-Designer
Version 21.0 or later) calculated using the flux linkage table in the RTT
file is used.
[U Phase Leakage Induc- Displayed for three-phase motors.
tance (H)], [V Phase
Leakage Inductance (H)],
[W Phase Leakage Induc-
tance (H)]
764
Item Description
[Ld (H)], [Lq (H)] Displayed for three-phase motors.
• LdLq model:
An average value is computed from all the data points in the Ld, Lq table
that have dependence on the current amplitude and phase of the stator.
• Spatial harmonic (differential) model:
The 3 x 3 inductance matrix with dependence on the current amplitude,
phase, and mechanical angle of the stator is converted into an Ld, Lq
table having dependency on the current amplitude and phase of the sta-
tor, and an average value is computed from all the data points in the Ld,
Lq table.
For RTT files containing both LdLq model data and spatial harmonic (dif-
ferential) model data, the average value of the spatial harmonic (differen-
tial) model is displayed.
These values are used for control circuit simulation when the [LdLq (Con-
stant)] option is selected for the parameter [Accuracy Type] in the JMAG-
RT model block in Simulink.
[Averaged d1d1 Induc- Displayed for six-phase motors.
tance (H)], [Averaged The 3 x 3 inductance matrix with dependence on the current amplitude,
d1d2 Inductance (H)], phase, and mechanical angle of the stator is converted into an Ld, Lq table
[Averaged d2d2 Induc- having dependency on the current amplitude and phase of the stator, and
tance (H)], [Averaged an average value is computed from all the data points in the Ld, Lq table.
q1q1 Inductance (H)],
[Averaged q1q2 Induc-
tance (H)], [Averaged
q2q2 Inductance (H)]
[Geometric Angle Differ- Displayed for six-phase motors.
ence between Star connec- This value is calculated from the following procedure:
tions (elec.deg)]
1.Magnetic field analysis is performed for one electrical cycle with six ter-
minals open (no load).
2.FFT is performed on the U1-phase flux and the U2-phase flux as the
analysis result of Step 1 to extract the fundamental wave phase.
3.The fundamental wave phase of the U1-phase flux is subtracted from the
fundamental wave phase of the U2-phase flux.
[Harmonic Filter Induc- This is displayed when reading RTT files with equivalent iron loss resis-
tance (H)] tance tables added. See “Adding Equivalent Iron Loss Resistance Tables to
JMAG-RT Models” on page 790.
[Stator Leakage Reac- Displayed for three-phase induction motors.
tance (ohm)], [Rotor
Leakage Reactance
(ohm)], [Exciting Suscep-
tance (S)]
765
JMAG-RT Viewer
Item Description
[Stator Leakage Reac- Displayed for six-phase induction motors.
tance (multiplication 1)
(ohm)], [Stator Leakage
Reactance (multiplication
2) (ohm)], [Rotor Leakage
1) (ohm)], [Rotor Leakage
2) (ohm)], [Exciting Sus-
ceptance (multiplication
1) (S)], [Exciting Suscep-
tance (multiplication 2)
(S)]
 Winding Specifications
If winding parameter values are output to the RTT file, those values are displayed.
Winding parameters are used to approximate AC copper losses during control circuit simulation;
they are not used in the FEA to create the RTT file.
• [Conductors in Slot Height] • [Conductor Height (m)], [Conductor Width

• [Conductors in Slot Width] (m)], [Conductor Diameter (m)]
• [Number Of Slots Per Phase] • [Core Stack Length (m)]
• [Averaged Slot Width (m)] • [Conductivity (S/m)]
• [Conductor Type]
 Input Value of RTT File in Efficiency Map Analysis Studies When Creating Map Data
When map data obtained from JMAG-Designer efficiency map analysis studies is output to the
RTT file, the input values used to create the map data is displayed.
• [Efficiency Map: Add AC Copper Losses] • [Efficiency Map: Mode]

• [Efficiency Map: Coil Temperature (K)] • [Efficiency Map: Number of Poles]
• [Efficiency Map: Motor Control] • [Efficiency Map: PWM Losses: Carrier Fre-
• [Efficiency Map: Table Correction] quency (Hz)]
• [Efficiency Map: Creation Mode] • [Efficiency Map: PWM Losses: DC Bus Voltage
• [Efficiency Map: Speed Divisions] (V)]
• [Efficiency Map: Torque Divisions] • [Efficiency Map: Add PWM Losses]
• [Efficiency Map: Magnet Temperature (K)] • [Efficiency Map: Resistance (Ohm)]
• [Efficiency Map: Max Current (A)] • [Efficiency Map: Voltage Limit]
• [Efficiency Map: Max Voltage (V)] • [Efficiency Map: Table Correction]:
This item is displayed only by the number of
• [Efficiency Map: Mechanical Loss Factor (W/
correction tables for loss, efficiency, and AC cop-
krpm)]
per loss that are set in map data.
[Output Port Info]

When any output port is set in the RTT file, that information will be displayed.
Any output port can be set for PM synchronous motors, synchronous reluctance motors, linear sole-
noids, linear synchronous motors, wound-field synchronous motors, and generic models.
766
• Output port number and its value • [Component]

• [Target set] • [Calculation]
• [Type] • [Reference Resolution]:
• [Coordinate system] [Inductance] or [Torque]
[Loss Map Info]

When map data obtained from JMAG-Designer efficiency map analysis studies is output to the
RTT file, the map data information is displayed.
• Hysteresis Loss Table:
When hysteresis loss is output from the output report of the Simulink block, the hysteresis loss
table is used according to the order displayed here.
• Eddy Current Loss Table:
When eddy current loss is output from the Simulink block output port, the eddy current loss
table is used according to the order displayed here.
[Comment]
Comments added to the RTT file when the RTT file is created are displayed.
767
JMAG-RT Viewer
Displaying JMAG-RT Model FEA Result Value Maps

Display a map of FEA result values listed in a RTT file.
PM synchronous motors and synchronous Induction motors:

reluctance motors: • Primary resistance
• Torque • Secondary resistance
• inductance • Primary leakage inductance
• Flux linkage • Secondary leakage inductance
• BackEMF • Excitation susceptance
• Iron loss • Iron loss resistance
Notes
• When the FEA result values included in JMAG-RT model are constant, the result value map
cannot be displayed.
• When using a JMAG-RT model to which a correction file is applied, a map of the corrected
result data is displayed. For details on correction files, see “Applying Corrections to JMAG-RT
Model FEA Result Values” on page 774.
• The correction factors specified in the [Corrections] tab of the JMAG-RT motor settings dialog
when creating a JMAG-RT model are not taken into account when calculating N-T curves or
efficiency maps in the JMAG-RT Viewer.
• The RTT file with the following settings has iron loss result data.
(1) When taking iron loss into account when creating the RTT file.
(2) When the loss table is added to the RTT file by using the loss table application function of
JMAG-RT.
(3) When both (1) and (2) are performed.
• The iron loss data added using the loss table application function of JMAG-RT is used to cre-
ate the iron loss (speed-current amplitude) map of the RTT file in (3).
• In addition, the RTT file of (2) or (3) has the result data of user-specified physical quantities
such as current phase, bus voltage, carrier frequency in addition to iron loss, rotation speed,
and current amplitude.
• When an iron loss (speed-current amplitude) map is created from the RTT file of (2) or (3),
physical quantities that are not used as axes of the current phase, bus voltage, carrier fre-
quency, etc. are averaged.
• The result data of LdLq models, spatial harmonic (differential) models, and spatial harmonic
(integral) models are output in either singular or multiple for PM synchronous motor RTT files.
The result data of LdLq models and spatial harmonic (differential) models are output in either
singular or multiple for synchronous reluctance motor RTT files.
The table below shows the types of result data that can be used when displaying maps.
Types of result data output to RTT files Result data available for maps
Ld, Lq Ld,Lq
Spatial harmonic differential (sinusoidal drive) Spatial harmonic differential (sinusoidal
drive)
768
Types of result data output to RTT files Result data available for maps
Spatial harmonic differential (other drives) Spatial harmonic differential (other
drives).
However, only the induced voltage map
can be displayed.
Ld, Lq + spatial harmonic differential (sinusoidal drive) Ld,Lq or spatial harmonic differential
(sinusoidal drive)
Ld, Lq + spatial harmonic differential (other drives) Ld,Lq
Spatial harmonic differential (sinusoidal drive) + spatial har- Spatial harmonic differential (sinusoidal
monic integral drive)
Ld, Lq + spatial harmonic differential (sinusoidal drive) + Ld,Lq or spatial harmonic differential
spatial harmonic integral (sinusoidal drive)
MEMO For information on LdLq models, spatial harmonic differential models, and spatial harmonic
integral models, see “PMSM/SynRM JMAG-RT Model Type (LdLq, Spatial Harmonic)” on page 435.
Procedures
1. With a RTT file imported, select a physical quantity under the [Table Value] menu in the
JMAG-RT Viewer main window.
The map is displayed.
For details on the PM synchronous motor (or synchronous reluctance motor) result values, see
“Viewable Result Values” on page 770.
MEMO To zoom in on parts of the Ld map and the Lq map, click [Zoom] on the toolbar, then
click and drag a rectangle for the region to zoom.
2. The axis can be changed in some of the maps.
Axis other than θ can be changed in the following table:
• Iron loss table for three-Phase PM Synchronous Motor (or three-phase Synchronous Reluc-
tance Motor):
(Iam, β, Speed, Iron loss) or (Id, Iq, Speed, Iron loss)
• Inductance table, torque table and flux linkage table for six-phase PM Synchronous Motor
(or six-phase Synchronous Reluctance Motor):
(Iam1, β1, Iam2, β2, θ):
• Iron loss table for six-phase PM Synchronous Motor (or six-phase Synchronous Reluctance
Motor):
(Iam1, β1, Iam2, β2, Speed, Iron loss)
MEMO In the flux linkage table, the amplitude of the fundamental wave is output to the θ axis. In
the inductance and torque tables, averaged data is output to the θ axis.
Parameter:
Specify the axis of the map from the following parameters:
• [Fixed Axis Type]:
This option is displayed for six-phase PM Synchronous Motors (or six-phase Synchronous
Reluctance Motors). Select one of the following:
769
JMAG-RT Viewer
• [Fix the phase angle difference Δβ]:

The current amplitude of one coil set is always the same, and the phase difference Δβ is
fixed.
• [Specify the operating point directly]:
The value of the axes that are not selected as map axes are fixed.
• [Graph Axis]:
Select the axes to use in [X-axis] and [Y-axis].
There are some combinations of axes that cannot be selected. For example, when [Fix the
phase angle difference Δβ] is selected, a combination of β1 for the X-axis and β2 for the Y-
axis cannot be selected.
• [Fixed Values]:
If you selected [Fix the phase angle difference Δβ] in [Fixed Axis Type], specify the value of
phase difference Δβ.
If you selected [Specify the operating point directly] in [Fixed Axis Type], specify the value of
axis not selected for the graph.
Also specify the axis value that is not selected for the graph of the iron loss table of three-
phase PM Synchronous Motor (or three-phase Synchronous Reluctance Motor).
Click [Update] to change to the specified axis.
Viewable Result Values
 LdLq models of PM synchronous motor and synchronous reluctance motor

Menu(s) Result value Description
Iam-Beta-Ld d-axis inductance and q-axis Inductance value (d-axis, q-axis) defined by the
Iam-Beta-Lq inductance (current amplitude- axes for amplitude and phase.
phase)
Id-Iq-Ld d-axis inductance and q-axis Value obtained by interpolating values at each
Id-Iq-Lq inductance (d-axis current ampli- point from inductance values (d-axis, q-axis)
tude - q-axis current amplitude) defined by the axes for amplitude and phase.
Iam-Beta-Torque Torque (current amplitude- Value obtained by calculating torques at each
phase) point by using inductance values (d-axis, q-
axis) defined by the axes for amplitude and
phase as well as magnet magnetic flux.
Id-Iq-Torque Torque (d-axis current ampli- Value obtained by calculating torques at each
tude - q-axis current amplitude) point by using inductance values (d-axis, q-
axis) after being converted to Id, Iq axes as well
as magnet magnetic flux.
Iam-Beta-psi Flux linkage Ψ (current ampli- Value obtained by calculating d-axis flux link-
tude-phase) age (LdId +Ψ) and q-axis flux linkage (Lq, Iq)
using the inductance values (d-axis, q-axis) after
being converted to Id, Iq axes as well as magnet
magnetic flux Ψ and converting to the maxi-
mum amplitude.
Iam-Beta-psid Flux linkage Ψd (d-axis current Value obtained by calculating d-axis flux link-
amplitude - q-axis current ampli- age (LdId + Ψ) at each point using inductance
tude) values (d-axis, q-axis) after being converted to
Id, Iq axes and magnet magnetic flux Ψ.
770

Iam-Beta-psiq Flux linkage Ψq (d-axis current Value obtained by calculating q-axis flux link-
amplitude - q-axis current ampli- age (Lq, Iq) at each point by using inductance
tude) values (d-axis, q-axis) after being converted to
Id, Iq axes as well as magnet magnetic flux Ψ.
BackEMF Induced voltage (speed - mechan- No-load induced voltage for U-phase calculated
ical angle) from magnet magnetic flux defined by the
mechanical angle axis. Maximum speed is
10,000rpm, or the maximum speed of the iron
loss map, and is divided into 11 sections.
Iam-Beta-Speed- Iron loss (speed - current ampli- The sum value of the hysteresis loss value and
Piron tude-phase) eddy current loss valued defined by the speed,
current amplitude, phase axes.
Id-Iq-Speed-Piron Iron loss (speed - d-axis current This map is displayed only for three-phase
amplitude - q-axis current ampli- motors.
tude) This value is obtained by interpolating the sum
value of hysteresis loss and eddy current loss
defined by the speed, current amplitude, phase
axes.
 Spatial harmonic (differential) models of PM synchronous motor and synchronous

reluctance motor
MEMO For RTT files containing zero-phase sequence current data, the inductance, torque, flux linkage,
induced voltage, and iron loss are displayed for a zero-phase sequence current of 0 A.
Iam-Beta-Ld d-axis inductance and q- Mechanical angle average obtained after convert-
Iam-Beta-Lq axis inductance (current ing the inductance value defined by current ampli-
amplitude-phase) tude, phase, and mechanical angle axes to the dq
axis.
For six-phase motors, the following Ld and Lq maps
can be displayed.
(1) Ld1d1, (2) Ld1q1, (3) Lq1d1, (4) Lq1q1,
(5) Ld1d2, (6) Ld1q2, (7) Lq1d2, (8) Lq1q2,
(9) Ld2d1, (10) Ld2q1, (11) Lq2d1, (12) Lq2q1,
(13) Ld2d2, (14) Ld2q2, (15) Lq2d2, (16) Lq2q2
Id-Iq-Ld d-axis inductance and q- Value interpolated from inductance values (d-axis,
Id-Iq-Lq axis inductance (d-axis cur- q-axis) for the currently displayed amplitude and
rent phase - q-axis current phase axes.
amplitude) For a six-phase motor, the following Ld and Lq maps
can be displayed.
(1) Ld1d1, (2) Ld1q1, (3) Lq1d1, (4) Lq1q1,
(5) Ld1d2, (6) Ld1q2, (7) Lq1d2, (8) Lq1q2,
(9) Ld2d1, (10) Ld2q1, (11) Lq2d1, (12) Lq2q1,
(13) Ld2d2, (14) Ld2q2, (15) Lq2d2, (16) Lq2q2
Iam-Beta-Torque Torque (current ampli- Mechanical angle average of torque values defined
tude-phase) by the current amplitude, phase, and mechanical
angle axes.
771
JMAG-RT Viewer

Id-Iq-Torque Torque (d-axis current Value interpolated from the torque values defined
amplitude - q-axis current by the currently displayed amplitude and phase
amplitude) axes.
Iam-Beta-Ψ Flux linkage Ψ (current Basic wave component when performing a discrete
amplitude-phase) Fourier transform (DFT) on a U-phase interphase
flux linkage in the mechanical angle direction.
Iam-Beta-Ψd Flux linkage Ψd, Ψq (d-axis Each point on the map of the Id, Iq axes is calculated
Iam-Beta-Ψq current amplitude - q-axis as follows:
current amplitude) 1.Interpolate flux linkage of the U-phase, V-phase,
and W-phase at each point, and obtain the d- and
q- axis flux linkage values using the dq transforma-
tion (absolute transformation).
2.Obtain the mechanical angle average of d- and q-
axis flux linkage values.
For six-phase motor, the values of the flux linkage
(d1, x1, x2, and q2) axes can be displayed.
BackEMF Induced voltage (speed - No-load induced voltage for U-phase calculated from
mechanical angle) magnet magnetic flux value defined by the mechani-
cal angle axis. Maximum speed is 10,000rpm, or the
maximum speed of the iron loss map, and is divided
into 11 sections.
Iam-Beta-Speed- Iron loss The sum value of the hysteresis loss value and eddy
Piron (speed- current amplitude- current loss value defined by the speed, current
phase) amplitude, phase axes.
Id-Iq-Speed-Piron Iron loss This map is displayed only for three-phase Motors.
(speed- d-axis current This value is obtained by interpolating the sum value
amplitude- q-axis current of hysteresis loss and eddy current loss defined by the
amplitude) speed, current amplitude, phase axes.
772
Displaying Maps of JMAG-Efficiency Map Analysis Studies in JMAG-

RT Model
When map data obtained from JMAG-Designer efficiency map analysis studies is added to the
JMAG-RT model, the map can be displayed using the map data.
Procedures
1. Load the RTT file and select [Display JMAG Designer Efficiency Map] from the [File]
menu of the JMAG-RT Viewer main window.
Each map is displayed.
You can switch between maps for display using the command in the [View] menu of the Map
View window.
The type of maps that can be displayed and the definition of physical quantity are set in accor-
dance to JMAG-designer efficiency map analysis studies. For details on JMAG-Designer effi-
ciency map analysis studies, see “JMAG-Designer Help”.
773
JMAG-RT Viewer
Applying Corrections to JMAG-RT Model FEA Result Values

In JMAG-RT Viewer, FEA result value corrections written in RTT files can be applied, mapped and
previewed.
Notes
• This function supports RTT files for the following motors:
• Three-phase/six-phase PM synchronous motor
• Three-phase/six-phase Synchronous reluctance motor
• Three-phase Induction motor
• If applying corrections, the correction file (.csv) needs to be made manually by writing the cor-
rection value in the regulated file format. For details about the correction file format, see “For-
mat of Correction File” on page 776.
• Old formats of correction files ($RT_Correction_LdLq, $RT_Correction_BackEMF, $RT_Cor-
rection_Flux) cannot be used for versions later than 13.0 or 13.1.
• If applying corrected result values in a RTT file in a newly created file, this cannot be done in
JMAG-RT Viewer. Use JMAG-RT.
• Total flux linkage corrections cannot be used with inductance corrections or magnet flux-linkage
corrections.
Procedures
1. Prepare a correction file (.csv).
For details about the correction file format, see “Format of Correction File” on page 776.
2. Select [Apply the Correction File] on the JMAG-RT Viewer main screen.
3. Click [Browse] in [Correction File].
4. In the [Open correction file] dialog, specify a path for the correction file created in Step
1.
5. Click [Open].
When opening a RTT file in JMAG-RT Viewer, corrections apply to that file's results values. If
the file is not open, corrections will be applied to the result values of RTT files subsequently
opened.
Physical Quantity That Can be Corrected and Correction Types

The following corrections are possible.
 Addition
Set the physical quantity of the correction target. This supports the following physical quantities:
774

Leakage inductance correction Specify the cor- Three-phase (or six-phase) leakage
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_U rection value for inductance *1
leakage induc-
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_V
tance of the coil
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_W
(H).
*1 Correction will be run as if leakage inductance is connected to each phase in series.
 Multiplier
Set the correction value (correction ratio) multiplied to the physical quantity of the correction tar-
get. This supports the following physical quantities:

Inductance correction Specify the correction value d-axis inductance, Three-phase (or
($RT_Correction_Inductance) for current (A), phase (deg). q-axis inductance six-phase) induc-
tance
Torque correction Specify the correction value Torque
for current (A), phase (deg). - *1
($RT_Correction_Torque)
Magnet flux-linkage correction Specify the correction value Magnet flux-link-
-
($RT_Correction_MagFlux) for current (A), phase (deg). age
Total flux linkage correction Specify the correction value d-axis inductance, Three-phase (or
($RT_Correction_TotalFlux- for current (A), phase (deg). q-axis inductance, six-phase) induc-
Linkage) magnet flux-link- tance, magnet flux-
age linkage
Iron loss correction Specify the correction value Hysteresis loss, eddy current loss
($RT_Correction_Ironloss) for the revolution speed
(rpm), current (A).
*1 Torque is calculated by the torque formula based on the voltage equation.
Induction motor
$RT_Correction_Resistance_Sec- The correction factor for secondary conductor resistance.
ondary Set the correction value when the primary axis is the slip fre-
775
JMAG-RT Viewer

$RT_Correction_MagnetizingIn- The correction factor for magnetizing leakage inductance.
ductance Set the correction value when the primary axis is the slip fre-
$RT_Correction_LeakageInduc- The correction factor for primary coil flux leakage.
tance_Primary Set the correction value when the primary axis is the slip fre-
$RT_Correction_LeakageInduc- The correction factor for secondary conductor flux leakage.
tance_Secondary Set the correction value when the primary axis is the slip fre-
Format of Correction File

Create correction files (.csv) in accordance with the following formats.
Three-phase PM synchronous motor and three-phase synchronous reluctance motor
 Format
• Do not fail to input the following on Row 1 “$RT_Correction_Start,” and on the end row put
• [PMSM]: Three-phase PM synchronous motor
• [SynRM]: Three-phase synchronous reluctance motor
Row 4 • When specifying a constant value:
(type of correction), (correction value)
(type of correction), (number of table rows), (number of table columns)
776

• [$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_U]:
Addition correction of inductance in U-phase coil (constant)
• [$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_V]:
Addition correction of inductance in V-phase coil (constant)
• [$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_W]:
Addition correction of inductance in W-phase coil (constant)
Multiplier correction of inductance (table)
Multiplier correction of torque (table)
Multiplier correction of magnet flux linkage (table)
Multiplier correction of total flux linkage (table)
Multiplier correction of iron loss (table)
Specify correction values for constant.
table.
777
JMAG-RT Viewer

• For multiplier correction of inductance (current amplitude (A), phase
(deg)):
$Iam/Beta, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
• For multiplier correction of torque (current amplitude (A), phase (deg)):

$Iam/Beta, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
• For multiplier correction of magnet flux-linkage (current amplitude (A),

phase (deg)):
$Iam/Beta, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
100.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
200.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
300.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
• For multiplier correction of total flux linkage (current amplitude (A), phase
(deg)):
$Iam/Beta, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
100.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
200.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
300.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
• For multiplier correction of iron loss (revolution speed (rpm), current ampli-
tude (A)):
$N/Current, 10.0, 20.0, 30.0, 40.0, 50.0, 60.0
100.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
200.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
300.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
End marker * Fixed
 Sample 1: Addition correction of inductance (constant)

$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_U, 0.01
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_V, 0.02
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_W, 0.03
$RT_Correction_End,
778
 Sample 2: Multiplier correction of inductance (table)

$RT_Correction_Inductance, 3, 6
$Iam/Beta, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$RT_Correction_End,
Six-phase PM Synchronous Motor and Six-phase Synchronous Reluctance Motor
 Format
• [PMSM_6Phase]: Six-phase PM synchronous motor
• [SynRM_6Phase]: Six-phase synchronous reluctance motor
Row 4 • When specifying constant values:
(correction type), (correction value)
(correction type), (axis 1 physical properties), (axis 2 physical properties), (axis 3
physical properties), (axis 4 physical properties), (axis 5 physical properties)
779
JMAG-RT Viewer

Inductance multiplier correction (table)
Torque multiplier correction (table)
Multiplier correction for magnet flux linkage (table)
Multiplier correction for total flux linkage (table)
Iron loss multiplier correction (table)
Specify correction values for constant values.
For table specifications, specify the number of physical properties of each axis
for tables specified in the 6th and subsequent rows.
For example, in this scenario, each axis (I1, Beta1, I2, Beta2) in an inductance
correction table has the following values.
• I1 axis: 10, 30
• Beta1 axis: 0.0, 90.0
• I2 axis: 10, 20, 30
• Beta 2-axis: 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
The number of physical properties of the I1 axis is 2, the number of physical
properties of the Beta1 axis is 2, the number of physical properties of the I2
axis is 3, and the number of physical properties of the Beta2 axis is 6. In accor-
dance with this, enter “$RT_Correction_Inductance, 2, 2, 3, 6”.
The number of axes in correction tables will differ depending on the physical
quantities where correction values are applied, similar to the following:
• Inductance, torque, magnet flux, total flux linkage:
4 (I1 axis, Beta1 axis, I2 axis, Beta2 axis)
• Iron loss:
5 (I1 axis, Beta1 axis, I2 axis, Beta2 axis, Speed axis)
780
Row 5 $RT_Correction_AxisOrder, (Axis 1), (Axis 2), (Axis 3), (Axis 4)

• When physical quantities where correction values are applied are inductance (or
torque, magnetic flux, total flux linkage):
$RT_Correction_AxisOrder, Iam1, Beta1, Iam2, Beta2
$RT_Correction_AxisOrder, (Axis 1), (Axis 2), (Axis 3), (Axis 4), (Axis 5)
• When physical quantities where correction values are applied are iron loss:
$RT_Correction_AxisOrder, Iam1, Beta1, Iam2, Beta2, Speed
The title row for each axis.
Specify the physical properties of each axis for tables specified in the 6th and
subsequent rows in order. The meaning of each physical property is as follows:
Beta1: Current phase of coil set 1 (deg)
Beta2: Current phase of coil set 2 (deg) or the current phase difference of
coil set 1 and coil set 2 (deg)
Speed: Rotational speed (rpm)
Items used as axes in each corrected table will differ depending on the physical
quantities to be corrected.
781
JMAG-RT Viewer

Enter the contents of the correction table declared on the 4th row.
• Enter the physical property values for each axis in ascending order.
• Data after this row has a nested structure with the first axis as the outermost
part. Shown below is the data structure of correction tables for axes 1 to 4.
Axis 1 value 1
Axis 2 value 1
Axis 1 value 1
Axis 2 value 2
Axis 1 value 1
Axis 2 value 3
Axis 1 value 2
Axis 2 value 1
Axis 1 value 2
Axis 2 value 2
...
Example:
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis/4thAxis, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 90.0
$3rdAxis/4thAxis, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7,
20.0, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7,
...
Enter the value of the 1st axis after [$1stAxis].

$1stAxis, 10.0
Enter the value of the second axis after [$2ndAxis].
$2ndAxis, 0.0
For iron loss correction, enter the value of the 3rd axis after [$3rdAxis].
$3rdAxis, 0.0
782
An example of the 3rd axis-4th axis table (or the 4th axis-5th axis table) is
shown below. The number of rows in this example is “3”, and the number of
columns is “6”.
• For inductance (or torque, magnet flux, total flux linkage) multiplier correc-
tions:
The 3rd axis is the current amplitude of coil set 2 (A), and the 4th axis is the
current phase of coil set 2 (deg).
$3rd/4th, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
100.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
200.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
300.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
• For multiplier correction of iron loss:

The 4th axis is the current phase of coil set 2 (deg) and the 5th axis is rota-
tion speed (rpm).
$4th/5th, 10.0, 20.0, 30.0, 40.0, 50.0, 60.0
100.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
200.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
300.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,

End marker * Fixed
 Sample 1: Additional correction for inductance (constant)

$RT_Correction_End,
 Sample 2: Multiplier correction for inductance (table)

$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis/4thAxis, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 90.0
$3rdAxis/4thAxis, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7,
20.0, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7,
30.0, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7,
$1stAxis, 30.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis/4thAxis, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
783
JMAG-RT Viewer
10.0, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7,

20.0, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7,
30.0, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7,
$1stAxis, 30.0
$2ndAxis, 90.0
$3rdAxis/4thAxis, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7,
20.0, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7,
30.0, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7,
$RT_Correction_End,
 Sample 3: Multiplier correction for iron loss (table)

$RT_Correction_Ironloss, 2, 2, 3, 3, 6
$AxisOrder, Iam1, Beta1, Iam2, Beta2, Speed
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis, 0.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis, 30.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis, 60.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 30.0
$3rdAxis, 0.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 30.0
$3rdAxis, 30.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 30.0
$3rdAxis, 60.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 50.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
784
$3rdAxis, 0.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 50.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis, 30.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 50.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis, 60.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 50.0
$2ndAxis, 30.0
$3rdAxis, 0.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 50.0
$2ndAxis, 30.0
$3rdAxis, 30.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 50.0
$2ndAxis, 30.0
$3rdAxis, 60.0
$4thAxis/5thAxis, 0.0, 300.0, 600.0, 900.0, 1200.0, 3600.0
0.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
360.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$RT_Correction_End,
 Sample 4: Inductance multiplier correction (table) and torque multiplier correction

(table)
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis/4thAxis, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 90.0
$3rdAxis/4thAxis, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7,
20.0, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7,
30.0, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7,
785
JMAG-RT Viewer
$RT_Correction_Torque, 1, 1, 3, 6
$1stAxis, 10.0
$2ndAxis, 0.0
$3rdAxis/4thAxis, 0.0, 30.0, 60.0, 90.0, 120.0, 360.0
10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
$RT_Correction_End,
Three-phase Induction Motor
 Format
• [IM]: Induction motor
Row 4 (type of correction), (number of table rows), (number of table columns)
• [$RT_Correction_Resistance_Secondary]:
Multiplier correction table for secondary conductor resistance (Ohm)
• [$RT_Correction_MagnetizingInductance]:
Multiplier correction table for magnetizing leakage inductance (H)
• [$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_Primary]:
Multiplier correction for primary coil leakage inductance (H)
• [$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_Secondary]:
Multiplier correction for secondary conductor leakage inductance (H)
table.
786
Row 5 or later Correction tables

• Multiplier correction for secondary conductor resistance (Primary axis
10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
• Multiplier correction for magnetizing leakage inductance (Primary axis

10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
• Multiplier correction for primary coil leakage inductance (Primary axis

10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
• Multiplier correction for secondary leakage inductance (Primary axis (row):

Slip frequency (Hz), Secondary axis (column): Primary current (A)):
10.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
20.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
30.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
End marker * Fixed
 Sample 1: Multiplier correction for leakage inductance (table)

$RT_Correction_MotorType, IM
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_Primary, 3, 6
0.25, 1.0, 1.01, 1.02, 1.03, 1.04, 1.05
10.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6
100.0, 2.0, 2.2, 2.4, 2.6, 2.8, 3.0
$RT_Correction_LeakageInductance_Secondary, 2, 4
$SlipFrequency/Iam, 0.1, 1.0, 10.0, 100.0
0.25, 0.99, 0.98, 0.97, 0.96
100.0, 0.95, 0.94, 0.93, 0.92
$RT_Correction_End
787
JMAG-RT Viewer
Applying Skew to JMAG-RT Model

Skew is to tilt the motor stator or rotor to the axis direction to control torque ripple.
In a simulation using the JMAG-RT model, skew effects can be reflected in the look up table of the
JMAG-RT model created from an FEM model without a skew. In JMAG, this is referred to as
“Applying Skew”.
A skew can be applied to the LdLq model of PM synchronous motors and the spatial harmonic
(integral) model when control circuit simulation is run in MATLAB/Simulink and when the effi-
ciency map is displayed in the JMAG-RT Viewer. However, a skew cannot be applied to spatial har-
monic (integral) model of three-phase PM synchronous motors, when the efficiency map is
displayed in the JMAG-RT Viewer.
Therefore, to apply a skew to spatial harmonic (integral) model with three-phase PM synchronous
motors, use the following function. Since the model with a skew is saved as a new JMAG-RT model,
using this new JMAG-RT model in control circuit simulation will allow skews to be accounted for
even in spatial harmonic (integral) model of three-phase PM synchronous motors.
MEMO For details on skew settings for map view in JMAG-RT Viewer, see “Settings for Creating
Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps” on page 796.
Notes
• This function supports JMAG-RT model (RTT files) for the following motors:
• Spatial harmonic (integral) model of three-phase PM synchronous motor
• Supports not only applying a skew to the rotor or stator but also applying skews to both the rotor
and stator.
• In this method, a skew is expressed by stacking and averaging numerous cross-sections which are
created corresponding to the skew angle based on the results of a JMAG-RT model (torque, flux
linkage, inductance) generated using a model without skew.
• This method accounts for simple skews. 3D effects due to skew are not accounted for with this
method, so the results are not completely consistent with when a JMAG-RT model created from
a 3D model with skew is used.
To strictly evaluate the effects of a skew, creating a JMAG-RT model using a 3D model with a
skew is recommended.
• This function cannot be used to apply a skew to a JMAG-RT model with a skew already applied
to it.
Procedures
1. With an RTT file loaded, select [Apply Skew and Save As] in the [File] menu from the
1. In the [Apply Skew and Save As] dialog, set the destination and name for the RTT file
after the skew is applied in the [RTT File After Applied Skew] box.
2. Select the checkbox for [Publish] when adding skew settings information to the RTT file.
The values of each skew parameter can be confirmed by selecting the checkbox for [Publish]
when the RTT file with skew settings added to it is loaded to the JMAG-RT Viewer.
3. Specify skew parameters.
788
Specify the following parameters for both rotors and stators.

• [Skew Type]:
• [No Skew]
• [Linear Skew]
• [V Skew]
• [Step Skew]
•
Left: Linear skew of a stator, Center: V-skew of a stator, Right: Step skew of a rotor
• [Skew Angle, deg]:

Enter the angle for a full model with a mechanical angle (angle difference between top face
and bottom face). The counterclockwise direction in relation to the rotation axis will be posi-
tive. A negative value can also be entered for the skew angle. If the skews of the rotor and sta-
tor are facing a different direction, enter a negative value for the skew angle of one side.
• [Number of Steps]:
This parameter can be specified when [Step Skew] is selected in [Skew Type].
Enter the number of skew steps. The value must be 2 or more.
4. Click [Output].
The calculation is processed and the RTT file with skew setting is output.
789
JMAG-RT Viewer
Adding Equivalent Iron Loss Resistance Tables to JMAG-RT Models

Equivalent iron loss resistance tables and filter harmonic inductance data can be added to RTT files
and exported with new names.
For control circuit simulations that use JMAG-RT models with equivalent iron loss resistance tables
and filter harmonic inductance data, harmonic iron loss can be accounted for.
Notes
• This function supports RTT files for the following motors:
• Spatial harmonic (differential) model of three-phase/six-phase PM synchronous motors
(PMSM)
• Spatial harmonic (differential) model of three-phase/six-phase synchronous reluctance motors
(SynRM)
• Three-phase/six-phase induction motors (IM):
Only RTT files created from JMAG-RT of JMAG-Designer Version 22.0 or later are sup-
ported.
• Iron loss result data must additionally be output to input RTT files.
• In the current version, RTT files that include equivalent iron loss resistance tables can be used in
the following software:
• JMAG-Designer
• Simulink
Procedures
1. With an RTT file loaded, select [Add Equivalent Ironloss Resistance Table and Save As]
from the [File] menu in the main JMAG-RT Viewer window.
1. In the [Add Equivalent Ironloss Resistance Table and Save As] dialog, in the [Rtt file after
Applied Ironloss Equivalent Resistance Table and Harmonic Filter Inductance] box, spec-
ify the save destination and the name of the RTT file after adding the table.
2. To add equivalent iron loss resistance table settings information to the RTT file, select
[Publish].
When [Publish] is selected, filter inductance values can be checked when RTT files with equiva-
lent iron loss resistance tables added are loaded into JMAG-RT Viewer.
3. Set the input current file (.csv) and calculation parameters.
For RTT files of six-phase IMs, set the input current file and the calculation parameters before
(for 2p poles) and after (for 4p poles) changing the number of poles, respectively.
[Input]
• [Input Current File (CSV)]:
Create a CSV file that describes the time-dependent phase current table and specify that CSV
file here. For CSV file formats, see “Electric Current Point Sequence File Format” on page
791.
790
• [Specify a Read Starting Row], [Starting Row]:

When CSV files contain header rows, select [Specify a Read Starting Row] and specify the
row where the time and phase current data description starts in [Starting Row].
[Setting]
• [Iron loss (W)]:
This is displayed when the RTT files of PMSMs, SynRMs, or IMs are loaded. For PMSMs or
SynRMs, enter the average value of one electrical cycle. For IMs, enter the average value of
the primary current for one steady-state cycle.
• [Offset angle (deg)]:
This is displayed when the RTT files of PMSMs or SynRMs are loaded. Enter the difference
between the d-axis direction and the U-axis (the direction of the magnetic flux due to the U-
phase current) at the time 0.0 s in mechanical angle (deg).
• [Slip frequency (Hz)]:
This is displayed when the RTT files of IMs are loaded. Enter the average value of the pri-
mary current for one steady-state cycle.
4. Click [Output].
Electric Current Point Sequence File Format
 Format
Three-phase motors (PMSM, SynRM, IM)

Column ID Description
1 Time (s).
• PMSM, SynRM:
A current table for one electrical cycle is required.
• IM:
A table for one steady-state cycle of the primary current is required.
The current value of each phase in the first row and the current value of each phase in the
last row must match for each phase.
2 U-phase current (A)
3 V-phase current (A)
4 W-phase current (A)
Six-phase motors (PMSM, SynRM, IM)

Column ID Description
1 Time (s).
A current table for one electrical cycle is required. The current value of each phase in the
first row and the current value of each phase in the last row must match for each phase.
2 U1-phase current or A-phase current (A)
3 V1-phase current or B-phase current (A)
4 W1-phase current or C-phase current (A)
5 U2-phase current or D-phase current (A)
6 V2-phase current or E-phase current (A)
7 W2-phase current or F-phase current (A)
791
JMAG-RT Viewer
 Example 1: Three-phase motors

0, 10.0, 10.0, 0.0
0.001, 10.0, 10.0, 0.0
0.002, 0.0, 10.0, 10.0
...
0.1, 10.0, 10.0, 0.0
 Example 2: Three-phase motors

In this example, the first row is used for the table header. Therefore, [Specify a Read Starting Row]
must be selected. Enter “2” in [Starting Row].
"Time, s","U-phase current","V-phase current","W-phase current"
"0","0.0693534600911","0.0693532902733","-0.173599292669"
"8.68055555556e-5","-34.9084122758","33.3533756911","3.37000812352"
"0.000173611111111","-40.9622560612","37.0256071858","10.2641262927"
...
"0.0166666666667","0.0693534600911","0.0693532902733","-0.173599292669"
 Example 3: Six-phase motors

0, 10.0, -10.0, 0.0, 0.0, 10.0, -10.0
0.001, 0.0, 10.0, -10.0, -10.0, 0.0, 10.0
0.002, -10.0, 0.0, 10.0, 10.0, -10.0, 0.0
...
0.1, 0.0, 10.0, -10.0, -10.0, 0.0, 10.0
 Example 4: Six-phase motors

In this example, the first row is used for the table header. Therefore, [Specify a Read Starting Row]
must be selected. Enter “2” in [Starting Row].
"Time, s","U1-phase current","V1-phase current","W1-phase current","U2-phase current","V2-phase current","W2-phase current"
"0","0.0693534600911","0.0693532902733","-0.173599292669","0.0693534600911","0.0693532902733","-0.173599292669"
"8.68055555556e-5","-34.9084122758","33.3533756911","3.37000812352","-34.9084122758","33.3533756911","3.37000812352"
"0.000173611111111","-40.9622560612","37.0256071858","10.2641262927","-40.9622560612","37.0256071858","10.2641262927"
...
"0.0166666666667","0.0693534600911","0.0693532902733","-0.173599292669","0.0693534600911","0.0693532902733","-0.173599292669"
792
Exporting MAT Files for MATLAB/Simulink FEM-Parameterized

Block
Data described in pre-existing RTT files can be exported to the MathWorks MAT file format. Data
loaded into MATLAB from MAT files can be used with FEM-Parameterized PMSM blocks.
MEMO For details on the MATLAB/Simulink FEM-Parameterized PMSM block, see The MathWorks
Inc. website (https://www.mathworks.com/help/physmod/sps/ref/femparameterizedpmsm.html).
Notes
 Supported motor types

• This function supports the following motor RTT files:
• Three-phase PM synchronous motors
• Result data for spatial harmonic (differential) models must be included.
• The following settings need to be made in the JMAG-RT Model Library Manager when
creating RTT files:
• In the [Information] tab, under the [Resolution] group, [Publish] is selected.
• In the [Create] tab, [Torque setting is same as inductance] is selected.
 Data output to MAT file

• The following data is exported to MAT files:
• The name and created version of the RTT file used to create the MAT file
• Phase resistance (ohm)
• Number of poles
• Magnetic flux tables (Wb) and those axes, and torque tables (Nm) and those axes.
For RTT files with [Drive Type] set to [Sine Wave Drive], the axes are current amplitude (A),
mechanical angle (deg), and current phase (deg).
For RTT files with [Drive Type] set to [Other], the axes are U-phase current (A), V-phase
current (A), W-phase current (A), and mechanical angle (deg). The values of U-phase cur-
rent, V-phase current, and W-phase current in the RTT file of [Other] are common.
• Fundamental iron loss table (W) for stator and those axes.
This table is output when the RTT files with [Drive Type] are set to [Sine Wave Drive] and
have iron loss data. The axes are current amplitude (A), current phase (deg), and speed (rpm).
For RTT files containing zero-phase sequence current data, the values at zero-phase sequence
current 0 A are output to the MAT file.
• Even when corrections are applied to the FEA result data of RTT files in JMAG-RT Viewer, the
corrections are not reflected in the data output to the MAT file.
• When correction tables are added to RTT files with the JMAG-RT library manager, data reflect-
ing the correction tables are output to the MAT file.
 Advance preparation
To use this function, MATLAB must be installed on the machine used to output the MAT files.
In addition, the following environment variables must be set on the machine used to output the
MAT files. For procedures on setting environment variables, refer to the “Overview Edition”.
793
JMAG-RT Viewer
Environment
Description
variable
Path The full path of the folder where MATLAB is installed. An example is shown below.
C:\Program Files\MATLAB\R2021b\bin
Procedures
1. Load an RTT file into JMAG-RTViewer, and select [File] > [Export File for MATLAB/Sim-
ulink FEM-Parameterized Block] from the menu bar.
2. In the [Export File for MATLAB/Simulink Parameterized Block] dialog, specify a save des-
tination for the MAT file in the [Export Folder] box.
3. Select the version for the MAT file to be exported with the [MATLAB Version] list.
4. Click [Export].
Procedure for Using MAT Files in Simulink

An example of the procedure for using an MAT file created from an RTT file is shown below.
 When using a MAT file created from an RTT file with [Drive Type] set to [Sine Wave
Drive]
1. Start MATLAB/Simulink.
2. Navigate to the calculation folder where the MAT file is located. Double-click the MAT
file to load the MAT file into MATLAB.
The data loaded from the MAT file is displayed in a table format in the MATLAB Workspace.
3. Select [FEM-Parameterized PMSM] from the Simulink block library, and place it in the
Simulink circuit window.
4. Right-click the FEM-Parameterized PMSM block in Step 3, and select [3-D Flux Linkage
Data].
5. Select [A-phase flux linkage as a function of peak current magnitude (I), current advance
angle (B), and rotor angle (theta)] for [Flux linkage data format].
6. Select [Q leads D, rotor angle measured from A-phase to D-axis] for [Park's convention
for tabulated data].
7. Assign Workspace variables to the number of pole pairs, the vector selection, table
selection, phase resistance, etc.
 When using a MAT file created from an RTT file with [Drive Type] set to [Other]
1. Start MATLAB/Simulink.
2. Navigate to the calculation folder where the MAT file is located. Double-click the MAT
file to load the MAT file into MATLAB.
The data loaded from the MAT file is displayed in a table format in the MATLAB Workspace.
794
3. From the magnetic flux table, create a table of partial derivatives of the magnetic flux
with current is created using the MATLAB function ee_calculateFluxPartialDerivatives().
4. Select [FEM-Parameterized PMSM] from the Simulink block library, and place it in the
Simulink circuit window.
5. Right-click the FEM-Parameterized PMSM block from Step 4, and select [4-D partial
derivative data].
6. Assign Workspace variables to the number of pole pairs, the vector selection, table
selection, phase resistance, etc.
795
JMAG-RT Viewer
Settings for Creating Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps

You can display torque-speed curves and efficiency maps with JMAG-RT Viewer when using
JMAG-RT models of the following motors:
• PM synchronous motors and synchronous reluctance motors
Notes
 PM synchronous motors and synchronous reluctance motors

• For RTT files containing zero-phase sequence current data, torque-speed curves and efficiency
maps are created for zero-phase sequence currents of 0 A.
• When JMAG-RT models possess [Spatial Harmonic (Differential) Model] result data and the
[Drive Type] is [Other], fixed values are used for inductance, etc.
• When JMAG-RT models possess the result data of both [Spatial Harmonic (Differential) Model]
and [Spatial Harmonic (Integral) Model], [Spatial Harmonic (Differential) Model] data is used
to create efficiency maps.
MEMO The following parameters are set when creating JMAG-RT models with JMAG-RT. These
parameter settings cannot be changed with JMAG-RT Viewer.
[Spatial Harmonic (Differential) Model], [Spatial Harmonic (Integral) Model], [LdLq Model],
[Drive Type].
Procedures
1. Click [More] on the main window.
The window expands to show the detailed setting option window on the right side.
2. Set each parameter.
• [Efficiency Map Range] can be set when a RTT file for a PM synchronous motor (or syn-
chronous reluctance motor) is imported. The positive and negative region of a torque can be
calculated in [Tools] > [Efficiency Map Range] > [Motor + Generator] from the main win-
dow of JMAG-RT Viewer. The default value is [Motor Only].
• The short title in brackets shown with the parameter, i.e. Vmax with Max. Voltage (Vmax), is
used as the label in the report (.pdf ) of the torque-speed curve/efficiency map. For exporting
the report of the torque-speed curve/the efficiency map, see “Exporting Speed Curve/Map Reports
and Images” on page 811.
• Parameters can be exported to an XML file. For exporting parameters to the file, see “Saving Set-
tings for Creating Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps to Files” on page 805.
Parameters for PM Synchronous Motor and Synchronous Reluctance Motor
 [Inverter Rating]
• [Max. Voltage (Vmax), V]:
motor.
JMAG-RT Viewer calculates the N-T curve and efficiency assuming a space vector modulation
796
method. Therefore, when the amplitude of the motor phase voltage is set to Vph, the motor is
controlled within the range of √3 × Vph <= Vmax for a star connection. For a delta connection,
the motor is controlled within the range of Vph <= Vmax.
Inverter circuit
• [Max. Current (Imax), A]:

When the amplitude of the motor phase current is set to Iph, the motor is controlled within the
range of Iph <= Imax for a star connection. For a delta connection, the motor is controlled
within the range of Iph × √ 3 <= Imax.
 [Motor Control]
Select [Basic Control] when using only a single control method. Select [Detailed Control] when
using different control methods for every revolution speed.
MEMO The value defined in a RTT file is used as the default value for [Max. Speed, rpm] in [Basic
Control], [Speed, rpm] in [Detailed Control], and [Max.Current, A] in [Detailed Control].
[Basic Control]
Select [Control Type] and enter a value in [Max. Speed]. The following are the types of control
methods:
• [id=0 (id=0)]
• [Max. Torque/Current (MTPA)]
• [Max. Torque/Flux (MTPF)]
• [Max. Efficiency (ME)]
• [Max. Power (MP)]
• [Moment of Force (PF=1)]
• [Flux Weakening (FW)]
For details, see “Motor Control Information” on page 814.
[Detailed Control]
Specify a set of combination in a table between [Speed, rpm], [Control Type], and [Max.Current, A]
as required.
• [Speed, rpm]:
Enter the value for the upper limit in revolution speed when using [Control Type] and [Max.
Current, A].
• [Control Type]:
The options are the same as [Basic Control].
797
JMAG-RT Viewer
• [Max.Current]:
Enter the maximum current that can be tolerated in inverters.
The [Speed, rpm] column should be sorted in an ascending order. The order of rows in a table can
be modified using and . Rows can also be deleted by using .
MEMO The maximum voltage set in [Max. Voltage (Vmax)] under [Inverter Rating] applies to the
entire cases registered in a table.
 [Calculation Resolution]
To specify a calculation resolution, click to check on [Calculation Resolution] to set following:
• [Current Divisions (Idiv)]
• [Phase Step (βdiv), deg]
• [Speed Interval (Ndiv), rpm]
Finer calculation resolutions improve the accuracy of the torque-speed curve and the efficiency map
but increase the calculation time.
 [Correction Coefficients]
Specify the correction value (multiplier) for the physical quantity if required.
• [Coefficient of Inductance (Lcof )]
• [Coefficient of Iron Loss (Hcof )]
• [Coefficient of the Magnet Flux (φcof )]
If the iron loss is not considered when creating the JMAG-RT model, the effect is not included in
the calculation of the Torque-Speed curve/Efficiency map even [Coefficient of Iron Loss] if an Iron
Loss correction is specified.
 [Leakage Inductance]
Specify these values when accounting for leakage inductance during N-T curve calculation and efficiency
map calculation. Leave it at zero when it is not being accounted for. The problem will be solved as if the
coil with the specified leakage inductance value is connected in series with the coil of each phase when a
value other than zero is specified.
The default value for each parameter is the value described in the RTT file.
Three-phase motor Six-phase motor

• [U Phase Leakage Inductance (H)] • [U1 Phase Leakage Inductance (H)]
• [V Phase Leakage Inductance (H)] • [V1 Phase Leakage Inductance (H)]
• [W Phase Leakage Inductance (H)] • [W1 Phase Leakage Inductance (H)]
• [U2 Phase Leakage Inductance (H)]
• [V2 Phase Leakage Inductance (H)]
• [W2 Phase Leakage Inductance (H)]
• Select [None] when temperature correction is not specified.
• Select [Coil Only], and then specify each item under [Coil Temperature] when correcting tem-
perature for coils.
• Select [Magnet Only], and then specify each item under [Magnet Temperature] when correcting
temperature for magnets.
798
• Select [Both (Same Temperature)], and then specify settings for the entire items under [Coil
Temperature] and specific items under [Magnet Temperature], to run temperature correction on
both coil and magnet using the same value as temperature during motor drive.
• Select [Both (Different Temperature)], and then specify specific items under [Coil Temperature]
and [Magnet Temperature], to run temperature correction on both coil and magnet using differ-
ent values as temperature during motor drive.
The calculation of the entire combination for coil temperature and magnet temperature during drive
is run when [Both (Different Temperature)] is selected. Calculation in (N+1) x (M+1) case is run
when the number of divisions in temperature for coil is N and the number of divisions for magnet is
M.
Correction factors
Specify [Base (Tcb)] and [Coefficient (Kc)] based on the following correction equation when run-
ning temperature correction:
R ′ = R ( 1 + α ( Tr now – Tr base ) )
R' : Resistance after correction (ohm)
α : Temperature correction factor of coil (ppm/K). The range of the coefficient is 0.0 and
over. Default value is 3810 ppm/K.
Tr now : Coil temperature during motor drive (temperature during analysis) (K).
Tr base : Base temperature of coil (K). Default value is 293.15 K.
k
F ′ = F  1 + --------- ( Tf now – Tf base )
 100 
F ' : Magnetic flux of magnet after correction (Wb)

F : Magnetic flux of magnet before correction (Wb)
k : Temperature correction factor of magnet (%/K). The range of the coefficient is -100.0
- 0.0 (negative). Default value is -0.11%/K.
Tf now : Magnet temperature during motor drive (temperature during analysis) (K)
Tf base : Base temperature for magnet (K). Default value is 293.15 K.
Specify also the temperature during motor drive from [Min (Tcrs)], [Max (Tcre)], and [Divisions
(Tcdiv)]. For example, specifying 280 as [Min], 310 as [Max], and 3 as [Division], runs a calcula-
tion with the temperature during drive as 280, 290, 300, 310.
• The default values for [Base] and [Coefficient] are those described in the RTT file.
• The more the value in [Division] is increased, the more the calculation accuracy is increased for
torque-speed curve and efficiency map. However, the calculation time would require a large
amount of time in proportion to the number of divisions.
• Set the same value for [Min] and [Max] when specifying zero for [Divisions].
799
JMAG-RT Viewer
• The unit for temperature can be changed in [Tools] > [Temperature Unit] from the main win-
dow of JMAG-RT Viewer.
 [Skew]
Skew is to tilt the motor stator or rotor to the axis direction to control torque pulsation.
A JMAG-RT model created from a model without skew is handled as a JMAG-RT model created
from a model with a skew when setting each parameter in the [Skew] tab.
Notes
• Not only applying a skew to only the rotor or stator but also applying skews to both the rotor
and stator is supported.
• In this method, a skew is expressed by stacking and averaging numerous cross-sections which are
created corresponding to the skew angle based on the results of a JMAG-RT model (torque, link-
age flux, inductance) generated using a model without skew.
method so the results are not completely consistent with when a JMAG-RT model created from
Creating a JMAG-RT model using a 3D model with a skew is recommended when you wish to
strictly evaluate the effects of a skew.
• In JMAG-RT Viewer, you can apply skew to a JMAG-RT model and then export it as a new
JMAG-RT model. For details, see “Applying Skew to JMAG-RT Model” on page 788.
Parameters
• [Skew Type (Rsty)], [Skew Type (Ssty)]:
• [No Skew (Noskw)]
• [Linear Skew (Lskw)]
• [V Skew (Vskw)]
• [Step Skew (Stskw)]
Left: Linear skew of a stator, Center: V linear skew of a stator, Right: Step skew of a rotor
• [Skew Angle (Rsag), deg], [Skew Angle (Ssag), deg]:

Enter the angle difference between top face and bottom face for a full model. The counterclock-
wise direction in relation to the rotation axis will be positive. A negative value can also be entered
for the skew angle. If the skews of the rotor and stator are facing a different direction, enter a
negative value for the skew angle of one side.
• [Num Steps (Rsst)], [Num Steps (Ssst)]:
Enter the number of steps for step skew when [Step Skew (Stskw)] is selected as [Skew Type].
Enter a value higher than 2.
800
Parameters for Induction Motor
 [Inverter Rating]
• [Max. Voltage (Vmax), V]:
motor.
When the amplitude of the motor phase voltage is set to Vph, the motor is controlled within the
range of √3 × Vph/√2 <= Vmax for a star connection. For a delta connection, the motor is con-
trolled within the range of Vph/√2 <= Vmax.
• [Max. Current (Imax), A]:
When the amplitude of the motor phase current is set to Iph, the motor is controlled within the
range of Iph/√2 <= Imax for a star connection. For a delta connection, the motor is controlled
within the range of Iph/√2/√3 <= Imax.
 [Motor Control]
Enter a value in [Max. Speed, rpm].
• The control method setting is fixated at [Max. Power (MP)] when an induction motor is speci-
fied. For details about the Notes regarding the motor control information, “Motor Control
Information” on page 814.
• Multiple control methods cannot be combined and used when an induction motor is specified.
• The default values for [Max. Speed, rpm] in [Basic Control] and [Speed, rpm] in [Detailed Con-
trol] are the values described in the RTT file.
 [Coefficients]
Induction motors are modeled in T-type equivalent circuits using analysis values of a constraint state
and a synchronized state. Each machine parameter is positioned on an equivalent circuit as indicated
in the figure below:
T-type equivalent circuit for induction motor

x1: Primary leakage reactance (ohm), x2: Secondary leakage reactance (ohm),
r1: Primary resistance (ohm), r2: Secondary resistance (ohm),
g0: Exciting conductance (S), b0: Exciting susceptance (s), s: Slip
The machine parameters shown in the figure above is displayed in the main window of JMAG-RT
Viewer.
801
JMAG-RT Viewer
[Correction Coefficients]
Correction factors: Correction values:
The default value for all correction factors is 1.0. The default value for all correction values is 1.0.
• [Secondary Resistance (R2cof )]: • [Additional Primary Leakage Inductance (LsIadd)
Enter the correction factor to the resistance of the (H)]
cage. This value only affects the secondary resis- • [Additional Secondary Leakage Inductance (LrI-
tance of the equivalent circuit, not the inductance. add) (H)]
• [Primary Leakage Inductance (LsIcof )]
• [Secondary Leakage Inductance (LrIcof )]
• [Exciting Susceptance (b0cor)]
• [Exciting Conductance (g0cof )]
[Calculation Resolution]
When setting a calculation resolution, select [Calculation Resolution], and specify the following
parameters:
• [Current Divisions (Idiv)]
• [Slip Interval (Sdiv), deg]
• [Speed Interval (Ndiv), rpm]
The calculation accuracy increases for the N-T curve and efficiency map when resolution is more
precise. However, the calculation time would require a large amount of time in proportion to the
number of divisions.
802
 [Resistance Temperature Correction]

Temperature correction is available for the resistance of the primary coil (stator coil), the secondary
conductor (rotor coil) and the cage.
• Select [None] when temperature correction is not applied.
• To apply the temperature correction only to the primary coil, select [Primary Coil Only] and set
each item in [Primary Coil Temperature].
• To apply temperature correction only to the secondary conductor and cage, select [Secondary
Conductor Only] and set each item in [Secondary Conductor Temperature].
• To apply temperature correction to both and to use the same temperature for both, select [Both
(Same Temperature)] and set all items in [Primary Coil Temperature] and some items in [Sec-
ondary Conductor Temperature].
• To apply temperature correction to both and to use a different temperature for each, select [Both
(Different Temperature)] and set the items in [Primary Coil Temperature] and [Secondary Con-
ductor Temperature], respectively.
The calculation of the entire combination for each temperature during drive is run when [Both (Dif-
ferent Temperature)] is selected. Calculation in the (N+1) x (M+1) case is run when the number of
divisions in temperature for stator coils is N and the number of divisions in temperature for second-
ary resistance is M.
Correction factors
Specify [Base (Tcb)] and [Coefficient (Kc)] under each setting based on the following correction
equation when running temperature correction:
Correction equation for coil and cage:
R′ = R ( 1 + α ( Tr now – Tr base ) )
R' : Resistance after correction (ohm)
α :Temperature correction factor of coil (ppm/K). The range of the coefficient is 0.0 and
over. Default value is 3810 ppm/K.
Tr now : Coil temperature during motor drive (temperature during analysis) (K).
Tr base : Base temperature of coil (K). Default value is 293.15 K.
Specify the temperature during motor drive from [Min (Tcrs)], [Max (Tcre)], and [Divisions
(Tcdiv)] for coils and conductors/cages. For example, specifying 280 as [Min], 310 as [Max], and 3
as [Division], runs a calculation with the temperature during drive as 280, 290, 300, 310.
• The unit for temperature can be changed in [Tools] > [Temperature Unit] from the main win-
dow of JMAG-RT Viewer.
• The default values for [Base] and [Coefficient] are those described in the RTT file.
• The calculation accuracy is increased for N-T curve and efficiency map when the value in [Divi-
sion] is increased. However, the calculation time would require a large amount of time in propor-
tion to [Division].
• Set the same value for [Min] and [Max] when specifying zero for [Divisions].
803
JMAG-RT Viewer
 [Skew]
Skew is to tilt the motor stator or rotor to the axis direction to control torque pulsation.
A JMAG-RT model created from a model without skew is handled as a JMAG-RT model created
from a model with a skew when setting each parameter in the [Skew] tab.
Notes
• Applying a skew to the rotor is supported. Applying a skew to the stator is not supported.
• Linear skew can be applied. V-skew and step skew can not be applied.
• When this function is used, JMAG-RT model leakage inductance is corrected in accordance with
the specified skew angle.
method so the results are not completely consistent with when a JMAG-RT model created from
Creating a JMAG-RT model using a 3D model with a skew is recommended when you wish to
strictly evaluate the effects of a skew.
Parameters
• [Rotor Skew Angle (Rsag), deg]:
Enter the angle difference between top face and bottom face for a full model. The counterclock-
wise direction in relation to the rotation axis will be positive. A negative value can also be entered
for the skew angle.
804
Saving Settings for Creating Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps

to Files
The parameters set in the detailed settings can be exported to a file (.xml).
1. Select [File] > [Save Setting] from the menu bar in the Map view window.
2. In the [Save xml file] dialog, specify the file name to save in the [File name] box.
3. Specify the location to save the file.
4. Click [save] to save the file.
Loading Settings for Creating Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps

from Files
The parameters for the motor control settings can be imported from a previously saved file (.xml).
1. Select [File] > [Open Setting] from the menu bar in the Map view window.
1. In the [Open setting file] dialog, select the folder where the setting file to import is
saved.
2. Select the file or put the file name in the file name box.
3. Click [Open].
805
JMAG-RT Viewer
Displaying Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency Maps in Map View

1. To display the torque speed curve, select [Tool] > [Torque Speed Curve] from the menu
bar on the JMAG-RT Viewer main window.
To display the efficiency map, select [Tools] > [Efficiency Map] from the menu bar on the
Or, click [Torque-Speed Curve] or [Efficiency Map] from the JMAG-RT Viewer
main window.
The map view window is displayed.
Map view window (Torque-speed curve)
MEMO The phase resistance used to calculate torque-speed curve is the value set in the [Resistance
(PSIM/RT-Viewer)] box of the [Data Creation] tab in the JMAG-RT Library Manager.
MEMO The stray load loss is calculated as zero, when using RTT files for induction motors, that is
exported from JMAG-Designer Version 12.1 and earlier or JMAG-Express.
2. Click the left mouse button with the mouse pointer on the graph to display revolution
speed, torque, and efficiency values at that position.
3. The temperature during motor drive can be changed using the slider bar under [Tem-
perature Correction] when temperature corrections for the magnet or the coil is set.
MEMO The minimum. maximum and number of steps shown for the temperature slider bar are
determined by the settings for the minimum and maximum temperatures in the [Temperature Cor-
rection] on the option window.
4. Select [Display] > [Set Color Range] in [Map View] to specify each setting in the [Set
Color Range] dialog, when modifying the rending range or gradation for efficiency maps.
The following settings can be specified in the [Set Color Range] dialog.
• [Min. Value]/[Max. Value] for [Speed, rpm], [Torque, Nm], and [Efficiency, %]:
Specifies display area for each color bar. Click [Default] when specifying the settings to
default values.
806
MEMO The items that can be specified in [Min. Value]/[Min. Value] vary based on the type of
map that is displayed.
• [Gradient]:
Select from either [Purple-Red], [Blue-Red], [Grayscale], and [CMR].
MEMO The [CMR] display setting is used for printing efficiency maps.
5. Click [OK] when specifying settings is complete in the [Set Color Range] dialog.
807
JMAG-RT Viewer
Changing Speed Curves/Maps Displayed in Map View

After drawing the torque-speed curve in this window, the diagram can be changed to the d/q cur-
rent-speed curve (N-Id/Iq) and to the current amplitude-speed curve (N-Iam).
Also, it is possible to change the efficiency map to the iron loss map (N-T-Iron loss) and to the coil
loss map (N-T-Coil loss).
1. Click [Torque-Speed curve] or [Efficiency map] from the JMAG-RT Viewer

main window.
The map view window is displayed.
2. Click [Display] on the menu bar and select the type of the diagram.
Output Items for PM Synchronous Motor and Synchronous Reluctance Motor

The results for the following items can be displayed by switching the map view.
Graph (2 axes) Map graph (3 axes)

• N-T (Torque-Speed curve) • N-T-Efficiency (Efficiency map)
• N-Id/Iq (d/q Current-Speed curve) • N-T-IronLoss (Iron loss map)
• N-Iam (Current Amplitude-Speed curve) • N-T-CoilLoss (Coil loss map)
• N-T-Coil/IronLoss (Coil loss/Iron loss map)
• N-T-Id (d axis current map)
• N-T-Iq (q axis current map)
• N-T-Iam (Phase current amplitude map)
• N-T-ILd (d axis current/inductance map)
• N-T-ILq (q axis current/inductance map)
MEMO For six-phase motors, the following Ld and Lq maps can be displayed.
(1) Ld1d1, (2) Ld1q1, (3) Lq1d1, (4) Lq1q1, (5) Ld1d2, (6) Ld1q2, (7) Lq1d2, (8) Lq1q2, (9) Ld2d1,
(10) Ld2q1, (11) Lq2d1, (12) Lq2q1, (13) Ld2d2, (14) Ld2q2, (15) Lq2d2, (16) Lq2q2
 Definition
Notations are as following.
• N : Revolution speed (rpm)
• T : Torque (Nm)
• Id : d axis amplitude (A)
• Iq : q axis amplitude (A)
• Iam : phase current amplitude (A). The phase current amplitude output through JMAG-RT
Viewer is defined with the following formula.
2 2
Id + Iq
Iam = -----------------------
3
---
2
• Ld : d axis inductance (H)
• Lq : q axis inductance (H)
808
 Calculation formula
Efficiency and power are calculated with the following formula.
Efficiency
Spatial harmonic (differential) model
• When operating as a motor:
Efficiency = 100 × Power ⁄ ( Power + IronLoss + CopperLoss )
• When operating as a generator:
Efficiency = 100 × ( Power + IronLoss + CopperLoss ) ⁄ Power
LdLq model
• When operating as a motor:
Efficiency = 100 × Power ⁄ ( Vd × Id + Vq × Iq )
• When operating as a generator:
Efficiency = 100 × ( Vd × Id + Vq × Iq ) ⁄ Power
Power
Power = ( 2 × π × N ) ⁄ 60 × T
Each of the designations used in the formula have the following meanings.
Efficiency : Efficiency (%), Power : Power (input) (W), N : Revolution speed (rpm),
T : Torque (Nm), IronLoss : Iron loss (W), CopperLoss : Copper loss (W),
Vd : d-axis voltage (V), Vq : q-axis voltage (V)
 Notes
• The value on the N-T-Id/Iq or N-T-Id/Iq in the map view window is Ld/Lq or Id/Iq. It is differ-
ent from the value which is shown when [Ld map] or [Lq map] is displayed from the main win-
dow.
Output Items for Induction Motor

The results that are displayed can be switched for the following items in map view for induction
motors.
Graph (2 axes) Map graph (3 axes)

• N-T (torque-speed curve) • N-T-Efficiency (efficiency map)
• N-Efficiency (efficiency-speed curve) • N-T-Slip (slip frequency map)
• N-Slip (slip frequency curve) • N-T-I (current map)
• N-I (current curve) • N-T-CopperLoss 1st (primary copper loss map)
• N-CopperLoss 1st (primary copper loss curve) • N-T-CopperLoss 2nd (secondary copper loss
• N-CopperLoss 2nd (secondary copper loss map)
curve) • N-T-StrayLoadLoss (stray load loss map)
• N-StrayLoadLoss (stray load loss curve) • N-T-LossAll (total loss map)
• N-LossAll (total loss curve)
809
JMAG-RT Viewer
 Definition
Notations are as following.
• N : Revolution speed (rpm)
• T : Torque (Nm)
• Slip : Slip frequency (Hz)
• I : Electric current (A)
• CopperLoss1st : Primary copper loss (W)
• CopperLoss2nd : Secondary copper loss (W)
• StrayLoadLoss : Stray load loss (W)
• LossAll : Total loss (W)
 Calculation formula
Efficiency and power are calculated with the following formula.
• Efficiency
Efficiency = 100 × Power ⁄ ( 3VI cos ( φ ) )
• Power
Power = ( 2 × π × N ) ⁄ 60 × T
Each of the designations used in the formula have the following meanings.
Efficiency : Efficiency (%), Power : Power (input) (W), N : Revolution speed (rpm),
T :Torque (Nm), I : Phase current (effective value) (A), V : Phase voltage (effective value) (V), cos ( φ ) :
Power factor
 Notes
• The stray loss curve and stray loss map is not outputted, when using RTT files (.rtt) for induc-
tion motor outputted by JMAG-Designer Version 12.1 and earlier or JMAG-Express.
810
Exporting Speed Curve/Map Reports and Images

Reports for torque-speed curves and efficiency maps can be exported to PDF files. Or, images for
torque-speed curves and efficiency maps can be exported instead.
1. Select [File] > [Export] from the menu bar in the map view window.
2. In the [Export File Name] dialog, select the file type from the [Save as Type] list.
The type of the files that can be selected are as follows:
• PDF file (.pdf )
• SVG file (.svg)
• Image file (.bmp, .ico, .jpeg, .png, .ppm, .tif, .xbm, .xpm)
3. Enter a file name in the [File name] box.
When the [Image file] is selected as the file type in step.2, specify the file name with the exten-
sion of the image file type (i.e. motor.png).
4. Specify the directory to save the file.
5. Click [Save].
MEMO In the report file, the parameters used to calculate the graph are also listed in addition to the dia-
gram. Labels in the list corresponded to the short title on the detailed setting option window.
MEMO The value specified by the slider bar under [Temperature Correction] in the map view window,
is exported to “Tmr,” “Tcr,” and “T2r” of a PDF file.
811
JMAG-RT Viewer
Exporting Speed Curve and Map Data Tables

Graph table data such as torque speed curves and efficiency maps can be output in CSV file format.
• Exporting Speed Curve Tables (page 812)
• Exporting Map Data Tables (page 812)
Exporting Speed Curve Tables

For speed curves, in addition to revolution speed and output items (torque and current), control
modes at each revolution speed are also output.
1. Select [File] > [Csv Export] from the menu bar in the map view window for speed curves.
2. In the [Save csv file] dialog, enter a file name in the [File Name] box.
4. Click [Save].
Exporting Map Data Tables

For maps, the values of the vertices for each grid are output to a file.
1. Select [File] > [Csv Export] from the menu bar in map view window for maps.
2. In the [Csv Export] dialog, set the grid resolution.
For both the [Horizontal Axis] and [Vertical Axis], set the following parameter to specify the grid
resolution.
• [Min. Value]
• [Max. Value]
• [Divisions]
3. Click on the right side of the [CSV File] box.

4. In the [Save csv file] dialog, enter a file name in the [File name] box.
6. Click [Save].
7. In the [Csv Export] dialog, click [Save].
CSV file format for maps

The first column of the CSV is the horizontal axis of the map, and the second line is the vertical axis
(left) of the map. For an efficiency map, the first column is revolution speed, and the second line is
torque. The control method is output to the last column only for efficiency maps.
812
Revolution speed Torque
Example CSV file of an efficiency map (Opened in Microsoft Excel)
MEMO An empty column is output for a cell without a value for the map.
813
JMAG-RT Viewer
Motor Control Information

• Algorithm for Calculating Revolution Speed - Torque Characteristics and Notes (page 814)
• Algorithm for Calculating Efficiency Maps and Notes (page 814)
• Notes Regarding Motor Control and Limitations of Motor Control (page 815)
Algorithm for Calculating Revolution Speed - Torque Characteristics and Notes

• The N-T characteristics are calculated up to the revolution speed that can be driven in the maxi-
mum current value based on the specified electric current control method.
• The upper limit for revolution speed, constraint current value, and constraint voltage value can
be defined as the constraint condition.
• The calculation ends at the revolution speed that cannot be set with the constraint condition.
• The calculation is based on the current vector which maximizes the efficiency or output for each
revolution speed which may cause the torque to be non-consecutive. This occurs when the con-
trol methods are [Max.Efficiency(ME)] or [Max.Power(MP)].

• In addition to torque being calculated, dq axis current, and phase current amplitude are also cal-
culated.
• When using RTT files that possess the result data of both LdLq models and spatial harmonic
(differential) models, which model result data to use can be selected.
In these circumstances, average values are used for mechanical angles.
• When N-T characteristics are calculated using RTT files that possess the result data of both spa-
tial harmonic (differential) models and the spatial harmonic (integral) models, it is the spatial
harmonic (differential) model data that is used in calculations.
MEMO The model information used from the RTT file can be confirmed in the [Type] column in
[Motor Info] of the main window in JMAG-RT Viewer.
 Induction motors
• In addition to torque being calculated, efficiency, slip frequency, current, primary copper loss,
secondary copper loss, stray load loss, and total loss are also calculated.
Algorithm for Calculating Efficiency Maps and Notes

• The maximum efficiency point for each operating point in the internal area is acquired when the
revolution speed - torque characteristics is obtained.
• For efficiency maps, the inside portion of the revolution speed - torque curve is controlled by
“maximum efficiency control.”

• Torque, copper loss, and iron loss at each operating point are obtained by gradually decreasing
the current amplitude value from the value at the maximum torque obtained for each revolution
speed and assigning current phase.
814
• When using RTT files that possess the result data of both LdLq models and the spatial harmonic
(differential) models, which model result data to use can be selected.
 Induction motors
• Torque and copper loss at each operating point are obtained by gradually decreasing the current
amplitude value from the value at the maximum torque obtained for each revolution speed and
assigning slip.
Notes Regarding Motor Control and Limitations of Motor Control

This section explains the motor control techniques and their limitations.
In this section, following notations are used.
• L d : d axis inductance (H)
• L q : q axis inductance (H)
• Ψ a : magnetic flux with no load (effective line flux) (Wb)
• R a : phase resistance (ohm)
• I d : d axis current (A)
• I q : q axis current (A)
• I a : effective current (= i d2 + i q2 )
MEMO The relationship between the effective current value I a and the maximum current specified
as a JMAG-RT Viewer parameter I max is expressed in the following equation.
• For a star connection:
I max = I a × 2
---
3
• For a delta connection:
I max = I a × 2
id=0
For the specified current, the d axis current i d to is controlled so that it is 0. This means that the
current phase is 0 degrees. In this case, i d and i q are expressed as eq. (1).:
 id = 0

 iq = Ia when operating as a motor ........................................ (1)

 iq = –Ia when operating as a generator
815
JMAG-RT Viewer
Max. Torque/Current
For the specified current, the current phase is controlled so as to maximize the torque.
The current phase β to be controlled is expressed as in eq.(2).
2 2 2 4
–Ψa I a ± Ψ a I a+ 8 ( L q – L d ) I a
sin β = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
2
- ..................................................... (2)
4 ( L q – L d )I a
Note that β is in the range ( 90 ≥ β ≥ – 90 ) when operating as a motor, and in the range
( 270 ≥ β ≥ 90 ) when operating as a generator.
In the case where L d = L q , this technique is identical with the “id=0” control technique.
Max. Torque/Flux
This control method selects among several conditions which generate the same torque, for the one
which minimizes the linkage flux. i d and i q are as expressed as in eq.(3).
i = –Ψ a + ΔΨ d
-------------------------
 d Ld

 2 2
 Ψ 0 – ΔΨ d
 i q = ----------------------------- when operating as a motor ........................... (3)
 Lq

 2
Ψ 0 – ΔΨ d
2
 i = – ---------------------------- - when operating as a generator
 q Lq
where,
2 2 2 2
–Lq Ψa ± Lq Ψa + 8 ( Ld – Lq ) Ψ0
ΔΨ d = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ................................................. (4)
4 ( Lq – Ld )
2 2
Ψ0 = (L d i d + Ψ a ) + ( L q i q ) ..................................................................... (5)
and when L d = L q , these expressions derives eq.(6).
 Ψa
 i d = – ------
Ld
-


i = Ψ ------0- when operating as a motor ................................ (6)
 q Lq

 Ψ
 i q = – ------a- when operating as a generator
 Lq
816
Flux Weakening
The flux Weakening control varies the phase of the current for a constant current amplitude so that
the voltage is lower than the limit voltage for a specified current. i d and i q are as in e.q. (7).
 2 2 2 2  2 2  V om 
2
 L Ψ
d a ± L q aΨ + ( L q – L ) L
d  q a  ω  I – ---------
 i = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
 d ( L
2
– L
2
)
 q d
...................... (7)

 i = I 2 – i2 when operating as a motor
 q a d
 2 2
 iq = Ia – id when operating as a generator
• V om : induced voltage limit (V)
where
V om = V am – R a I a ............................................................................................. (8)
• V am : terminal voltage limit (RMS) (V)
When L d = L q , these expressions derives eq.(9).
2
 V om
--------- – Ψ 2a – L 2q I a2
  ω 
 i d = -------------------------------------------------
 2L d Ψ a
 ..................... (9)
i = I 2 – i2 when operating as a motor
 q a d

 i q = I a2 – i 2d when operating as a generator
MEMO V am is calculated from the following formula using [Max. Voltage (Vmax)] used in [Inverter
Rating].
V am = V max ⁄ 2
V max : bus voltage (constant) (V)
817
JMAG-RT Viewer
Moment of Force 1
For a given current, the current phase is controlled so that the moment of force is 1. i d and i q are
expressed as e.q.(10).
 2 2
i = Ψ a – Ψ a + 4 ( L q – L d )L q I a
-------------------------------------------------------------------
 d 2 ( Lq – Ld )

 2 2
........................ (10)
 iq = Ia – id when operating as a motor

 2 2 when operating as a generator
i
 q = – I a – i d
When L d = L q , eq.(11) is derived.
2
 –Lq Ia
 i d = --------------
 Ψa
 ....................... (11)
 i = I 2 – i2 when operating as a motor
 q a d
 when operating as a generator
 i q = – I a2 – i 2d
Max. Efficiency
For the specified current, the current phase is controlled so that the efficiency is maximized.
Max. Power
• For PM synchronous motors and synchronous reluctance motors, the point at which maximum
torque is reached is searched for while transforming the current amplitude and current phase.
• For induction motors, the point at which maximum torque is reached is searched for while trans-
forming the current amplitude and slip.
818
Running from the Command Line

The JMAG-RT Viewer can also be controlled from the command line.
Either to display the JMAG-RT Viewer window with RTT file and settings already loaded or to cre-
ate a report or image file directly without displaying the GUI.
1. Start a command prompt and input the commands to run the viewer as described
below.
Or a batch file (.bat) can be created the commands.
The syntax is as follows:
Syntax
# > "path to the rtviewer.exe" "path to the rtt file" [--property name = value]
Example1:
#> rtviewer.exe new_mtr600_Iron.rtt --in="sample.xml"^
--out="./tests/exportwh500.png" --width=500 --height=500
Example2: Adding the equivalent ironloss resistance table to the RTT file
\>rtviewer.exe mtr600_Iron.rtt --added_ironlos_table^
--current_input_csv="input.csv" --out="new_mtr600_Iron.rtt" --ironloss=10.5^
--offset_angle=30
Example3: MAT File Export for FEM-parameterized PMSM Blocks

\>rtviewer.exe mtr600_Iron.rtt --export_file_for_simulink^
--output_folder="D:\DataFolder"
MEMO To create a batch file, save the command above as a text file. Then change the extension to
*.bat and then double click it to run.
MEMO To set the command, the line should be set in a line. To continue to the next line, specify
“^(hat)” at the end of the line.
819
JMAG-RT Viewer
Properties That Can be Set from the Command Line

The properties that can be set from the command line are as follows:
• Type:
PMSM: PM synchronous motor, SynRM: Synchronous reluctance motor, IM: Induction motor
• Phases:
(3): three-phase, (6): six-phase, (3/6): three-phase and six-phase
 Basic settings
property Type and
Type Flag name Description
name Phases
*rttfile String RTT file (without options) Common
in String Setting file (.xml)
This file is explained in the export pro-
cedures in “Saving Settings for Creat-
ing Torque-Speed Curves/Efficiency
Maps to Files” on page 805.
The [More] button in the main window
of JMAG-RT Viewer is selected when a
setting file is specified.
out String Full path of output RTT file (.rtt)
correct_file String Full path of correction file (.csv)
subout String The export file for [Efficiency and
Operation Range] that is displayed in
map view.
The file can be exported when the type
is “Map” (EfficiencyMap or IronLoss-
Map).
model_type Flag Model to use PMSM/
LdLq LdLq model SynRM
HarmonicDiffer- Spatial harmonic (differential) model (3)
ential
DesignerEfficien- Loss map model
cyMap
 Preferences
property Type and
name Phases
language Flag Language
Settings specified previously are used
when this setting is not specified.
ja Japanese
en English
820
 Add Equivalent Ironloss Resistance Table and Save As

property Type and
name Phases
added_iron- Flag Flag for adding the equivalent ironloss PMSM/
loss_table resistance table to the RTT file SynRM
input_cur- String Full path of Input current file (.csv) (3/6)
rent_csv IM(3)
publish Flag Publish flag
csv_start- Int Number of read start line of the input
ing_read_line current file
ironloss Double Iron loss (W)
offset_angle Double Offset angle (deg) PMSM/
SynRM
(3/6)
slip_freq Double Slip frequency (Hz) IM(3)
input_cur- String Slip frequency for 2p-pole (Hz) IM(6)
rent_csv_2p
csv_start- Int Full path of Input current file (.csv) for
ing_read_line_ 2p-pole
2p
ironloss_2p Double Iron loss for 2p-pole (W)
slip_frequen- Double Slip frequency for 2p-pole (Hz)
cy_2p
input_cur- String Full path of Input current file (.csv) for
rent_csv_4p 4p-pole
csv_start- Int Number of read start line of the input
ing_read_line_ current file for 4p-pole
4p
ironloss_4p Double Iron loss for 4p-pole (W)
slip_frequen- Double Slip frequency for 4p-pole (Hz)
cy_4p
 Export File for MATLAB/Simulink FEM-Parameterized Block

property Type and
name Phases
export_file_- Flag Export MAT Files for FEM-parameter- PMSM/
for_simulink ized PMSM Blocks flag SynRM
output_folder String Full path of the MAT file (.mat) to be (3)
exported
821
JMAG-RT Viewer
 Maps and graphs

property Type and
name Phases
type Flag Type of FEA Results Value Map/Torque
Speed Curve/Efficiency Map
Map of JMAG-RT FEA
RttLdMap Inductance map (Iam-β-Ld) PMSM/
RttdqLdMap Inductance map (Id-Iq-Ld) SynRM
RttLqMap Inductance map (Iam-β-Lq) (3)
RttdqLqMap Inductance map (Id-Iq-Lq)
RttTorqueMap Torque map (Iam-β- torque) PMSM/
RttdqTorqueMap Torque map (Id-Iq- torque) SynRM
(3/6)
RttFluxLinkage- Flux linkage map (Iam-β-Ψ) PMSM/
Map SynRM
(3)
RttdqFluxLink- Flux linkage map (Iam-β-Ψd) PMSM/
agedMap SynRM
(3/6)
RttdqFluxLink- Flux linkage map (Iam-β-Ψq) PMSM/
ageqMap SynRM
(3)
RttBackEMFMap Induced voltage map PMSM/
RttIronLossMap Iron loss map (Iam-β-Speed-Piron) SynRM
(3/6)
RttdqIronLossMap Iron loss map (Id-Iq-Speed-Piron) PMSM/
SynRM
(3)
RttdqFluxLink- Flux linkage map (Iam-β-Ψd1) PMSM/
aged1Map SynRM
RttdqFluxLink- Flux linkage map (Iam-β-Ψd2) (6)
aged2Map
RttdqFluxLink- Flux linkage map (Iam-β-Ψd1)
ageq1Map
RttdqFluxLink- Flux linkage map (Iam-β-Ψd2)
ageq2Map
RttdqLd1d1Map Inductance map (Id-Iq-Ld1d1)
RttLd1d1Map Inductance map (Iam-β-Ld1d1)
RttdqLq1q1Map Inductance map (Id-Iq-Lq1q1)
RttLq1q1Map Inductance map (Iam-β-Lq1q1)
RttdqLd1q1Map Inductance map (Id-Iq-Ld1q1)
RttLd1q1Map Inductance map (Iam-β-Ld1q1)
RttdqLq1d1Map Inductance map (Id-Iq-Lq1d1)
RttLq1d1Map Inductance map (Iam-β-Lq1d1)
822
property Type and

name Phases
RttLq1q2Map Inductance map (Iam-β-Lq1q2) PMSM/
RttdqLd1q2Map Inductance map (Id-Iq-Ld1q2) SynRM
RttLd1q2Map Inductance map (Iam-β-Ld1q2) (6)
Graph of JMAG-RT Viewer
TorqueSpeedCurve N-T (torque - speed curve) Common
IdIqSpeedCurve N-Id/Iq (d/q-axis current - speed curve) PMSM/
IamSpeedCurve N-Iam (phase current amplitude - SynRM
speed curve) (3/6)
EfficiencySpeed- N-Efficiency (efficiency - speed curve) IM
Curve
SlipSpeedCurve N-Slip (slip frequency - speed curve)
ISpeedCurve N-I (current - speed curve)
StatorCopperLoss- N-StatorCopperLoss (stator copper loss
SpeedCurve - speed curve)
RotorCopperLoss- N-RotorCopperLoss (rotor copper loss
SpeedCurve - speed curve)
StrayLoadLoss- N-StrayLoadLoss (stray load loss -
SpeedCurve speed curve)
LossAllSpeedCurve N-TotalLoss (total loss - speed curve)
823
JMAG-RT Viewer
property Type and

name Phases
Map of JMAG-RT Viewer
EfficiencyMap N-T-Efficiency PMSM/
IronLossMap N-T-IronLoss SynRM
CopperLossMap N-T-CoilLoss (3/6)
IronCopperLoss- N-T-Coil/IronLoss
Map
IdMap N-T-Id (d-axis current map)
IqMap N-T-Iq (q-axis current map)
IamMap N-T-Iam (phase current amplitude
map)
LdMap N-T-Ld (d-axis inductance map) PMSM/
LqMap N-T-Lq (q-axis inductance map) SynRM
(3)
Ld1d1Map N-T-Ld1d1 (d1-axis inductance map) PMSM/
Lq1q1Map N-T-Lq1q1 (q1-axis inductance map) SynRM
Ld2d2Map N-T-Ld21d2 (d2-axis inductance map) (6)
Lq2q2Map N-T-Lq2q2 (q2-axis inductance map)
SlipMap N-T-Slip (slip frequency map) IM
IMap N-T-I (current map)
StatorCopperLoss- N-T-StatorCopperLoss
Map
RotorCopperLoss- N-T-RotorCopperLoss
Map
StrayLoadLossMap N-T-StrayLoadLoss (stray load loss
map)
LossAllMap N-T-TotalLoss
Map of Efficiency Map Analysis Studies
EfficiencyMap N-T-Efficiency Common
PowerFactorMap N-T-PowerFactor Common
(3)
PowerFactor1Map N-T-PowerFactor1 PMSM/
PowerFactor2Map N-T-PowerFactor2 SynRM
(6)
OutputMap N-T-Output Common
CurrentAdvance- N-T-CurrentAdvancedAngleMap (cur- PMSM/
dAngleMap rent phase map) SynRM
TorqueRippleMap N-T-TorqueRippleMap (3/6)
LossAllMap N-T-TotalLoss Common
IronlossMap N-T-IronLoss
HysteresisLossMap N-T-HysteresisLoss PMSM/
EddyCurrentLoss- N-T-EddyCurrentLoss SynRM
Map (3/6)
PWMEddyCur- N-T-PWMEddyCurrentLoss
rentLossMap
824
property Type and

name Phases
CopperLossMap N-T-CopperLoss Common
StatorCopperLoss- N-T-StatorCopperLoss IM
Map
RotorCopperLoss- N-T-RotorCopperLoss
Map
SlipMap N-T-Slip (slip frequency map)
ACCopperLoss- N-T-ACCopperLoss Common
Map
MechanicalLoss- N-T-MechanicalLoss
Map
FdMap N-T-Fd (d-axis magnetic flux Map) PMSM/
FqMap N-T-Fq (q-axis magnetic flux Map) SynRM
(3)
Fd1Map N-T-Fd1 (d1-axis magnetic flux Map) PMSM/
Fd2Map N-T-Fd2 (d2-axis magnetic flux Map) SynRM
Fq1Map N-T-Fq1 (q1-axis magnetic flux Map) (6)
Fq2Map N-T-Fq2 (q2-axis magnetic flux Map)
IMap N-T-Iam (phase current map) Common
IdMap N-T-Id (d-axis current Map) PMSM/
IqMap N-T-Iq (q-axis current Map) SynRM
(3/6)
VMap N-T-Vam (phase voltage map) Common
VdMap N-T-Vd (d-axis voltage map) PMSM/
VqMap N-T-Vq (q-axis voltage map) SynRM
(3)
Vd1Map N-T-Vd1 (d1-axis voltage map) PMSM/
Vd2Map N-T-Vd2 (d2-axis voltage map) SynRM
Vq1Map N-T-Vq1 (q1-axis voltage map) (6)
Vq2Map N-T-Vq2 (q2-axis voltage map)
x_axis_type Flag X-axis of FEA results value map
Iam Current amplitude (A) PMSM/
Beta Current phase (deg) SynRM
(3)
Iam1 Coil set 1 current amplitude (A) PMSM/
Beta1 Coil set 1 current phase (deg) SynRM
Iam2 Coil set 2 current amplitude (A) (6)
Beta2 Coil set 2 current phase (deg)
Id1 Coil set 1 d-axis current (A)
Iq1 Coil set 1 q-axis current (A)
Speed Speed (rpm) PMSM/
SynRM
(3/6)
825
JMAG-RT Viewer
property Type and

name Phases
y_axis_type Flag Y-axis of FEA results value map
Iam Current amplitude (A) PMSM/
Beta Current phase (deg) SynRM
(3)
Iam1 Coil set 1 current amplitude (A) PMSM/
Beta1 Coil set 1 current phase (deg) SynRM
Iam2 Coil set 2 current amplitude (A) (6)
Beta2 Coil set 2 current phase (deg)
Speed Speed (rpm) PMSM/
SynRM
(3/6)
clamp_type Flag Fixed axis type of FEA results value map PMSM/
FixedDeltaBeta Fix the phase angle difference Δβ SynRM
FixedPoints Specify the operating point directly (6)
delta_beta Double Phase angle difference Δβ (deg) of FEA PMSM/
results value map SynRM
(6)
fixed_point1 Double Fixed value 1 (A/deg/rpm) PMSM/
SynRM
(3/6)
fixed_point2 Double Fixed value 2 (A/deg/rpm) PMSM/
fixed_point3 Double Fixed value 3 (A/deg/rpm) SynRM
(6)
width Double Width of image Common
Valid for export Torque-Speed curve/
Efficiency map to image file.
height Double Height of image
Valid for export Torque-Speed curve/
Efficiency map to image file.
haxis_min Double Minimum of horizontal axis for grid
resolution
Valid for export Efficiency map to CSV
file. If not specified, set automatically.
haxis_max Double Maximum of horizontal axis for grid
resolution
haxis_div Double Number of division of horizontal axis
for grid resolution
file. If not specified, set 10 as default.
826
property Type and

name Phases
vaxis_min Double Minimum of vertical axis for grid reso- Common
lution
vaxis_max Double Maximum of vertical axis for grid reso-
lution
vaxis_div Double Number of division of vertical axis for
grid resolution
file. If not specified, set 10 as default.
efficien- Flag Calculation range for efficiency map PMSM/
cy_range Settings specified previously are used SynRM
when this setting is not specified. (3/6)
motor Motor only
motor_generator Motor + generator
torque_min Double Set color range: Minimum value of Common
torque
torque_max Double Set color range: Maximum value of
torque
Setting is determined automatically
when it is not specified.
speed_min Double Set color range: Minimum value of rev-
olution speed
speed_max Double Set color range: Maximum value of rev-
olution speed
when it is not specified.
color_min Double Set color range: Minimum value for set- Common
tings such as efficiency and iron loss
Specifying the minimum value of an
item varies based on the type of map.
color_max Double Set color range: Maximum value for set-
tings such as efficiency and iron loss
Specifying the maximum value of an
item varies based on the type of map.
when the maximum value is not speci-
fied.
gradient_type Flag Type of color gradation
purple_red purple - red
blue_red blue - red
gray_scale gray
cmr CMR
827
JMAG-RT Viewer
property Type and

name Phases
papersize Flag Size of print. Common
Valid for printing Torque-Speed curve
or Efficiency map to PDF.
A4 A4
Letter Letter
828
Setting the License Check (License Waiting Function)

The function ends with an error if no license is temporarily available, such as when the license is
used by other users and the function is used.
The calculation can be suspended until the license becomes available by changing the environment
variables by setting [JMAG_LICENSE_CHECK_WAITING] in JMAG-RT Viewer.
MEMO The process is in “running” sequence while waiting to use a license.
 Notes
• The [License Waiting Function] is valid when [--out] is included in the command as an argu-
ment running from the command line.
Example: A command that has the argument [--out] included.
\>rtviewer.exe motor.rtt --in="sample.xml" --out="./jmag/N-T-Eff.png"
• The [License Waiting] function is invalid when operating from the GUI (operating from the
graphics window).
 Setting Environment Variables

Set environment variable “JMAG_LICENSE_CHECK_WAITING” when using the License Wait-
ing function. For details about detailed setting methods of environment variables, see “Overview
Edition”.
Environment variable Description

JMAG_LICENSE_- Set “1.”
CHECK_WAITING A regular process (ends with an error when a license is insufficient)
when “0” is set.
829
JMAG-RT Viewer
830
INDEX
Symbols B
.dxf 276 Back emf Flag

.jcf 276 JMAG-RT 716, 717, 719, 721
.jproj 276 Back to Original Geometry
.pa 588, 632, 713, 714 JMAG-Express Classic 222
.pdf 811 Base coil temperature 695
.rtt 272, 587, 618, 625, 631, 643, 650, 664, Base Field Coil Temperature 680
671, 687, 713, 714, 749 Base Stator Coil Temperature 679
.svg 811 base_1st_coil temperature
.xml 713, 714 JMAG-RT 655, 667
base_2nd_coil temperature
JMAG-RT 655, 667
Numerics base_coil temperature
JMAG-RT 646
1st current loss
base_coil_temperature 599, 621, 628, 638
JMAG-Express Classic output item 250, 252
base_magnet_temperature 600, 621, 638
2nd current loss
Basic Information
JMAG-RT 438, 477, 485, 495, 509, 519,
532, 556
A B-H curve
JMAG-Express Classic 175
Accuracy Type Boolean for Regions
JMAG-RT 589 JMAG-Express Classic 218
Add circuit 602 Boundary Edge
add_1st_leakage_inductance 656 JMAG-Express Classic 212
add_2nd_leakage_inductance 656 Brush Motor
Advanced Settings JMAG-Express Classic 136, 202, 313
JMAG-RT 447 Brush Width
all JMAG-Express Classic 203
JMAG-Express Classic 164 Brushless Motor
Apply the Correction File JMAG-Express Classic 189
JMAG-RT 345, 351 Brushless Motor (IPM)
JMAG-RT Viewer 774 JMAG-Express 21, 120
Applying JMAG-Express Classic 135, 308
Corrections to RTT File Result Values 774 Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/IPM)
Area of single coil region JMAG-Express 21, 121
JMAG-Express Classic 169 JMAG-Express Classic 135, 310
Average Back Yoke Flux Density Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/SPM)
JMAG-Express Classic output item 246 JMAG-Express 21, 122
Average Gap Flux Density JMAG-Express Classic 135, 310
JMAG-Express Classic output item 246 Brushless Motor (SPM)
Average Teeth Flux Density JMAG-Express 21, 121
JMAG-Express Classic output item 246 JMAG-Express Classic 135, 309
831
JMAG-RT 596, 635, 715, 720

C
coef_force
Calc in Designer JMAG-RT 720
JMAG-Express Classic 278 coef_inductance
Calculate Rotation Angle from the Number of Poles JMAG-RT 596, 634, 715, 720
JMAG-RT 512 coef_inertia1
Calculation Mode JMAG-RT 715, 717, 720
JMAG-RT 463, 481, 489, 501, 512, 525, coef_inertia2
544, 567 JMAG-RT 715, 717, 720
Calculation Resolution coef_magnet
JMAG-RT Viewer 798, 802 JMAG-RT 598, 636, 715, 720
Capacitance 692 coef_magnet temperature
Category JMAG-RT 600
JMAG-Express Classic 172, 173, 175 coef_magnetizing_inductance 656
Center Angle coef_magnet_temperature 622, 628, 638
JMAG-Express Classic 221 coef_mass1
Changing JMAG-RT 718
Type of the Torque-Speed Curve / Efficiency coef_mass2
Map 808 JMAG-RT 718
Characteristics Menu coef_material
JMAG-Express Classic 156 JMAG-RT 598, 636, 715, 720
Characteristics tab coeftable_torque_flag
JMAG-Express 38 JMAG-RT 716, 720
JMAG-Express Classic 148, 238 coef_torque 636, 657
Circuit Property JMAG-RT 597, 715
JMAG-Express 102 Coercive Force
JMAG-Express Classic 191, 199, 201 JMAG-Express Classic 176
coef_1st_coil temperature Coil Connection
JMAG-RT 655, 667 JMAG-Express Classic 200
coef_1st_leakage_inductance 656 Coil Layer1 & 2
coef_2nd_coil temperature JMAG-Express Classic 210
JMAG-RT 656, 668 Coil Pitch
coef_2nd_coil_resistance 656 JMAG-Express 100
coef_2nd_leakage_inductance 656 JMAG-Express Classic 190, 197, 202, 207
coef_AC_copper_loss 679 Coil Property
coef_AC_copper_loss (from winding conductor JMAG-Express 96
settings) 599, 655 JMAG-Express Classic 177, 189, 196, 198,
coef_coil temperature 646 200, 202, 207
Coil Resistance
JMAG-RT 600, 628
coef_coil_temperature 621, 638 JMAG-Express Classic 178, 181
Coil width
Coefficient of coil flux 693
Coefficient of Field Coil Temperature 680
Comment
Coefficient of flux linkage of Field Coil 676
JMAG-RT 556
Coefficient of flux linkage of Stator Coil 676
Commutator Bar Pitch
Coefficient of Material 677
JMAG-Express Classic 202, 207
Coefficient of Stator Coil Temperature 679 Complex Correction
Coefficient of Torque 677 JMAG-RT 470, 472, 505, 506, 547, 548
Coefficient of torque/EM force 693 Configuration of a FEM coil of Field Coil
Coefficient of user specified parameter 694 JMAG-RT 537
Coefficients of coil temperature 695 Configuration of a FEM coil of Stator Core
coef_flux
832
INDEX
JMAG-RT 537 JMAG-RT Model from user prepared data 341

Configuration of FEM Coil Csv Export
JMAG-RT 444, 478, 487, 496, 511, 521 JMAG-RT Viewer 812
Connection Type Current
JMAG-RT 595, 634, 675 JMAG-Express Classic 192
Constraint JMAG-Express Classic output item 254, 255
angle 216 JMAG-RT 479, 511
chamfer 217 Current (Ld, Lq)
coincident 217 JMAG-RT 446, 447
concentric 216 Current (Spatial Harmonics)
distance 216 JMAG-RT 447, 538
fillet 217 Current Flag
fixation 217 JMAG-RT 716, 718, 719, 721
horizontality 217 current signal input
parallelity 216 JMAG-RT 623, 630, 640, 648, 660, 662,
perpendicularity 217 669
radius/diameter 216 Custom Materials
tangency 217 JMAG-Express Classic 175, 176
verticality 217
Constraint tab
JMAG-Express Classic 149, 215 D
Contact Voltage Drop
Data File List
Copper loss JMAG-RT 339
d-Axis
JMAG-Express Classic output item 243, 249,
250, 252, 253, 254, 255 JMAG-Express Classic 213
Copy Subcircuit File DC Voltage
JMAG-RT 339 JMAG-Express Classic 201, 203
Copy to Default Template
JMAG-RT 339 JMAG-Express 120
Correction Coefficients JMAG-Express Classic 308
Default Value
JMAG-RT Viewer 798, 802
Correction Factor JMAG-Express Classic 220
Delete Regions
JMAG-Express 99
JMAG-Express Classic 174, 181 JMAG-Express Classic 220
correction factor Density
JMAG-Express Classic 188 JMAG-Express Classic 175
Correction tab 187 design comparisons
JMAG-Express Classic 147 JMAG-Express 71
Create Coil End JMAG-Express Classic 148, 239
design sheet
Create JMAG-RT Model JMAG-Express 76
JMAG-Express Classic 148, 238, 240
Designing
Create Region
motor model 226
Dimension line option
Create tab
JMAG-RT 443, 478, 487, 496, 511, 520,
Dimensions tab
535, 557
Creating JMAG-Express 37, 85
2D motor model (JMAG-Express Classic) 138
Direct Correction
a model for JMAG-RT using the command Line
387 JMAG-RT 470, 471, 505, 526, 547, 548
833
Displacement per Period of Electrical Angle Efficiency Map

JMAG-RT 496 JMAG-RT Viewer 806
Displaying Efficiency Map Range 757
Maps of RTT File Result Values 768 Electric Conductivity
Torque-Speed Curve / Efficiency Map 806 JMAG-Express Classic 175
DispLimitMax electric signal input
JMAG-RT 719 JMAG-RT 603, 622, 629, 639, 647, 658,
DispLimitMin 661, 668, 680, 682, 683, 696
JMAG-RT 719 Enable the Setting of Resolution
Distance between slots JMAG-RT 479, 498
JMAG-Express Classic 169 End Ring
Do not leave result files JMAG-Express Classic 165
JMAG-RT 464 End Ring Section
Do Not Output Distribution to Result File JMAG-Express Classic 165
JMAG-RT 464 Enter Motor Information
Do not show this window in the future JMAG-Express Classic 273
JMAG-Express Classic 143 environment variables 829
Do Not Use Adaptive Analysis 204, 206 Equation
JMAG-Express Classic 195, 199, 201, 203, Back EMF constant (JMAG-Express Classic)
208 254
Drive Coil current density (JMAG-Express Classic)
JMAG-Express Classic 203 247, 251, 253, 255
Drive Circuit 204, 205 Coil width (JMAG-Express Classic) 170
Drive tab Copper loss (JMAG-Express Classic) 243, 249
JMAG-Express 37, 102 Cross-section area of the wire (JMAG-Express
JMAG-Express Classic 146, 191, 199, 201, Classic) 177
203, 204, 205, 208 Cross-section area of the wire (JMAG-Express)
Drive Type 97
JMAG-RT 497 Effective cross section area of end ring (JMAG-
Express Classic) 165, 167
Effective cross section area of end ring (JMAG-
E Express) 88, 89
End ring circumference (JMAG-Express Classic)
Eddy current loss correction 700 165
Edit Current Template End ring circumference (JMAG-Express) 89
JMAG-Express Classic 302 Exciting inductance (JMAG-Express Classic)
Edit in JMAG-Designer 251
JMAG-Express Classic 303 Iron loss correction factor (JMAG-Express Clas-
Edit Menu sic) 173
JMAG-Express Classic 152 Length of a single coil (JMAG-Express Classic)
Edit Phase 169
JMAG-Express 101 Length of end winding (JMAG-Express Classic)
JMAG-Express Classic 190, 197, 200 169
Editing Mass of coil (JMAG-Express Classic) 241
templates (JMAG-Express Classic) 302 Number of turns of the coil (JMAG-Express
Editor tab Classic) 178
JMAG-Express Classic 150 Phase current amplitude (JMAG-RT Viewer)
Effective Section Area 808
JMAG-Express Classic 167 Phase resistance (JMAG-Express Classic) 178
Efficiency Raised length of coil (JMAG-Express Classic)
JMAG-Express Classic output item 242, 248, 170
250, 252, 253, 254, 255 Resistance value in between end ring bar
(JMAG-Express Classic) 165
834
INDEX
Resistance value in between end ring bar Film Thickness

(JMAG-Express) 89 JMAG-Express 98
Slot fill factor (JMAG-Express Classic) 180 JMAG-Express Classic 180
Slot fill factor (JMAG-Express) 99 Flux Integral Model
Torque constant (JMAG-Express Classic) 245, JMAG-RT 435
254 Flux Weakening 817
Voltage constant (JMAG-Express Classic) 246 motor control (JMAG-RT Viewer) 817
Volume for a model (JMAG-Express Classic) Folder
169 JMAG-RT 478, 486, 496, 510, 520
Wire cross section area (JMAG-Express Classic) Force correction point sequence file 632
247, 251, 253 Force Flag
Equation of Motion (PSIM only)
JMAG-RT 719, 721
JMAG-RT 468, 480, 488, 500, 512, 523 Friction Factor
Evaluating
JMAG-RT 593, 619, 626, 633, 644, 654,
JMAG-Express Classic 138, 238 666, 674, 691
Evaluation Results
Excitation susceptance G
JMAG-Express Classic output item 251
Exciting inductance GAP (Gap Length)
JMAG-Express Classic output item 251 JMAG-Express 86
Executing JMAG-Express Classic 164, 165
Gap Type
analysis using third-party job management sys-
tems 421 JMAG-Express Classic 164
Exporting Geometry Parameter Set List
evaluation results for circuit/control simulation JMAG-Express Classic 235
(JMAG-Express Classic) 271 Grid Resolution
motor model 276 JMAG-RT Viewer 812
Report of Torque-Speed Curve/Efficiency Map
811 H
Tabular Data of Torque-Speed Curve / Efficien-
cy Map 812 Half of the Center Angle
Externally Excited Synchronous Machine JMAG-Express Classic 221
JMAG-Express Classic 136, 204, 314 HEIGHT
JMAG-Express 86
F
Height
Factor JMAG-Express Classic 169
JMAG-RT 594, 619, 626, 633, 644, 654, Help Menu
666, 675 JMAG-Express Classic 159
Factor (lamination factor) Hidden Edges
material setting 92 JMAG-Express Classic 212
Features Hysteresis loss correction 700
Field coil resistance I
JMAG-RT 674
Field Coil tab id=0
JMAG-Express 37 motor control (JMAG-RT Viewer) 815
JMAG-Express Classic 146, 204, 205 Import DXF File
Field Current 204 JMAG-Express Classic 291
File Menu Importing
JMAG-Express Classic 151 RTT File 759
835
Setting File of Parameters for Torque-Speed JMAG-RT Model Creation

Curve / Efficiency Map 805 JMAG-Express Classic 139
Include Entities on Copied Regions JMAG-RT 334, 341
JMAG-Express Classic 214 JMAG-RT Viewer 743, 751
Inductance 692 JMAG_RT_2_mono_step 622
JMAG-RT 451, 479, 540 JMAG_RT_2_mono_step.mdl 618
Inductance Ld JMAG_RT_2_mono_step_Ein.mdl 618
JMAG-Express Classic output item 245 JMAG_RT_2_mono_step_Iin 623
Inductance Lq JMAG_RT_2_mono_step_Iin.mdl 618
JMAG-Express Classic output item 245 JMAG_RT_2_mono_step_Vin 623
Induction Motor JMAG_RT_2_mono_step_Vin.mdl 618
JMAG-Express Classic 196 JMAG_RT_eesm Block 680
JMAG-RT 515, 617, 624, 631, 642, 649 JMAG_RT_eesm_Iin Block 683
JMAG-RT Viewer 801, 809
JMAG_RT_eesm_Vin Block 682
Information tab
JMAG_RT_generic 696
JMAG-RT 438, 477, 485, 495, 509, 519,
JMAG_RT_generic_Ein.mdl 687
532, 556
Input Item JMAG_RT_generic_Vin 697
JMAG-Express 97 JMAG_RT_generic_Vin.mdl 687
JMAG-Express Classic 177 JMAG_RT_IM 658, 668
Input/Output of JMAG-RT Model Block 603, JMAG_RT_IM.mdl 650, 665
622, 639, 647, 658, 668, 717, 722 JMAG_RT_IM_6phase_Ein.mdl 650
Insulation Thickness JMAG_RT_IM_6phase_Iin.mdl 650
JMAG-Express 98 JMAG_RT_IM_6phase_Vin.mdl 650
JMAG-Express Classic 180 JMAG_RT_IM_Ein.mdl 650, 665
Inverter Rating JMAG_RT_IM_Iin 660, 669
JMAG-RT Viewer 796, 801 JMAG_RT_IM_Iin.mdl 650, 665
Iron Loss JMAG_RT_IM_Vin 659, 669
JMAG-RT 523 JMAG_RT_IM_Vin.mdl 650, 665
Iron loss JMAG_RT_lsm 639
JMAG-Express Classic output item 243, 249, JMAG_RT_lsm.mdl 632
250, 252, 253, 254, 255 JMAG_RT_lsm_Ein.mdl 632
JMAG-RT 456, 542 JMAG_RT_lsm_Iin 640
Iron Loss Correction Factor JMAG_RT_lsm_Iin.mdl 632
JMAG-Express Classic 173 JMAG_RT_lsm_Vin 640
Iron Loss Equation JMAG_RT_lsm_Vin.mdl 632
JMAG-Express Classic 176 JMAG_RT_pmsm 603
Iron loss equivalent conductance
JMAG_RT_pmsm.mdl 587
JMAG_RT_pmsm_6phase_Ein.mdl 587
JMAG_RT_pmsm_6phase_Iin.mdl 587
J JMAG_RT_pmsm_6phase_Vin.mdl 587
JMAG_RT_pmsm_Ein.mdl 587
jmag_circuit_interface_32_10.dll 714 JMAG_RT_pmsm_Iin 606
jmag_circuit_interface_64_10.dll 714 JMAG_RT_pmsm_Iin.mdl 587
JMAG-Express 17 JMAG_RT_pmsm_Vin 605
JMAG-Express Classic 133 JMAG_RT_pmsm_Vin.mdl 587
JMAG_LICENSE_CHECK_WAITING 829 JMAG_RT_solenoid 629
JMAG-RT 324 JMAG_RT_solenoid_Ein.mdl 625
JMAG-RT Library Manager 494, 509, 532, 556 JMAG_RT_solenoid_Iin 630
JMAG-RT model 271 JMAG_RT_solenoid_Iin.mdl 625
JMAG-RT Model Block 619, 633 JMAG_RT_solenoid_Vin 629
836
INDEX
JMAG_RT_solenoid_Vin.mdl 625 Line Current (Amp)

JMAG_RT_SR3.mdl 643 JMAG-Express Classic output item 252
JMAG_RT_SR3_Ein.mdl 643 Line Voltage (Amp)
JMAG_RT_SR3_lin.mdl 643 JMAG-Express Classic output item 243, 249
JMAG_RT_SR3_Vin.mdl 643 Line Voltage (RMS)
JMAG_RT_SR4.mdl 643 JMAG-Express Classic output item 243, 249
JMAG_RT_SR4_Ein.mdl 643 Linear Solenoid 483
JMAG_RT_SR4_lin.mdl 643 JMAG-RT 483
JMAG_RT_SR4_Vin.mdl 643 Linear Synchronous Motor 493
JMAG_RT_SR5.mdl 643 JMAG-RT 493
JMAG_RT_SR5_Ein.mdl 643 Linking
JMAG_RT_SR5_lin.mdl 643 JMAG-Express 45
JMAG_RT_SR5_Vin.mdl 643
Links tab
JMAG_RT_synrm.mdl 588
JMAG_RT_synrm_6phase_Ein.mdl 588
Lower Width
JMAG_RT_synrm_6phase_Iin.mdl 588
JMAG_RT_synrm_6phase_Vin.mdl 588
JMAG_RT_synrm_Ein.mdl 588
JMAG_RT_synrm_Iin.mdl 588 M
JMAG_RT_synrm_Vin.mdl 588
Machine type 700
JMAG_RT_wfsm.mdl 671
Magnet Temperature
JMAG_RT_wfsm_Ein.mdl 671
JMAG-RT 628
JMAG_RT_wfsm_Iin.mdl 671
Magnetization Pattern
JMAG_RT_wfsm_Vin.mdl 671
JMAG-Express 94
JW_MAG_DPL 326 JMAG-Express Classic 174
JW_MAG_FQ 326 Magnetization Pattern (Parallel)
JW_MAG_TR 326 JMAG-Express Classic 211
Magnetization Pattern (Radial)
L JMAG-Express Classic 211
Magnetizing current
Label JMAG-Express Classic output item 250, 252
JMAG-Express Classic 220 Magnetomotive force
Lamination factor JMAG-Express Classic output item 243, 250
JMAG-Express Classic 169 Magnets
Layers JMAG-Express Classic 176
JMAG-Express 100 Main Window
JMAG-Express Classic 181 JMAG-Express 31
LdLq Model JMAG-Express Classic 144
JMAG-RT 435 JMAG-RT Viewer 753
Lead Angle Map View Window
JMAG-Express Classic 203 JMAG-RT Viewer 330, 754
Leakage Inductance Mass
JMAG-RT Viewer 798 JMAG-RT 626, 633, 718, 720
Length of a single coil Material Type
License Materials tab
JMAG-Express 24 JMAG-Express 37, 90
JMAG-RT Viewer 748 JMAG-Express Classic 145, 171
License Waiting Function MATLAB/Simulink 272
JMAG-RT Viewer 829 Max. Efficiency
837
motor control (JMAG-RT Viewer) 818 Motor Control

Max. Power JMAG-RT Viewer 797, 801, 814, 815
motor control (JMAG-RT Viewer) 818 Motor Diagram tab
Max. Torque / Current JMAG-Express 38
motor control (JMAG-RT Viewer) 816 JMAG-Express Classic 147
Max. Torque / Flux Motor Information
motor control (JMAG-RT Viewer) 816 JMAG-RT 438, 441, 477, 478, 485, 486,
Maximum Current 495, 509, 510, 519, 532, 533
JMAG-Express Classic 201 Motor Model
Maximum Inductance JMAG-Express Classic 142
JMAG-Express Classic output item 253 Mutual inductance
Maximum of Slot Fill Factor JMAG-Express Classic output item 245
JMAG-Express 99
N
Maximum Revolution Speed
JMAG-Express 84 Name
Maximum Torque Netlist XML File 713, 714
JMAG-Express 84 Number of Bars
Mechanical Angle Resolution Number of Coils
JMAG-RT 454 JMAG-Express Classic 181
MechTimeConstant Number of coils 691
JMAG-RT 715, 717, 718, 720 Number of parallel coils in one phase 691
Menu
Number of Phases
JMAG-RT 511
JMAG-RT Viewer 756
Number of Poles
Minimum inductance
JMAG-RT 443, 478, 511, 520, 535
Number of Secondary Conductor
Model Dimension
JMAG-RT 520
Number of series coils in one phase 691
Model Divisions
Number of steps 602
JMAG-RT 520
Number of Strands
Model tab
JMAG-Express 98
Modifying
Number of terminals 690
information of a template (JMAG-Express Clas-
Number of Turns
sic) 302
Moment of Force 1 JMAG-Express 98
motor control (JMAG-RT Viewer) 818
Moment of Inertia
JMAG-RT 593, 619, 644, 654, 666, 674, O
691
MomentOfInertia Offset
Motion Range Offset Angle
JMAG-RT 487 JMAG-RT 594, 620, 646, 675, 716, 718
Motion tab Offset Disp
JMAG-RT 468 JMAG-RT 721
Motion Type Offset Displacement
JMAG-RT 595, 634, 655, 667, 675 JMAG-RT 634
Motion type 646, 692 Offset position 692
838
INDEX
Option Window JMAG-Express Classic 234

JMAG-RT Viewer 754 Preview tab
OUTD (Outer Diameter) JMAG-Express Classic 149, 221
JMAG-Express Classic 164 Primary current
Output Items JMAG-Express Classic output item 250, 251
JMAG-Express Classic 241 Primary leakage reactance
JMAG-RT Viewer 808, 809 JMAG-Express Classic output item 251
Output Port Primary resistance
JMAG-RT 442, 534, 557 JMAG-Express Classic output item 251
Product
P
Property
Parallel Number] 96, 189, 196 JMAG-Express Classic 154
Parameter Name PWM frequency
JMAG-Express Classic 220 JMAG-RT 674
Parametric evaluation
JMAG-Express Classic 138, 258 R
Part Scale
JMAG-Express Classic 219 RA
Partial Model JMAG-RT 719
JMAG-Express Classic 276 RA-
Parts JMAG-RT 717
JMAG-Express Classic 209 RA+
performance graph JMAG-RT 717
JMAG-Express 72 Raised length of coil
JMAG-Express Classic 148, 238, 239, 240 JMAG-Express Classic 170
Phase Current (RMS) raised length of coil
JMAG-Express Classic output item 243, 247, JMAG-Express Classic 170
250, 251, 253 Rated
Phase Order JMAG-RT 522
JMAG-Express Classic 190, 197 Rated Current
Phase Resistance JMAG-Express Classic 203
JMAG-Express 97, 99 Rated Power
JMAG-Express Classic 178, 181 JMAG-Express 84
Phase resistance JMAG-Express Classic 162
JMAG-RT 674 Rated Revolution Speed
Phase Voltage (RMS) JMAG-Express 84
JMAG-Express Classic output item 243, 249 JMAG-Express Classic 162
Phases RB-
Platform RB+
JMAG-RT 338 JMAG-RT 717
Position Flag Rectangle
Power Redo All Calculations
JMAG-Express Classic output item 242, 248, JMAG-RT 464, 481, 489, 501, 513, 525,
250, 252, 253, 254, 255 544, 568
Power factor Reference Correction
JMAG-Express Classic output item 243, 248, JMAG-RT 470, 472, 505, 506, 547, 549
250, 252, 253 Reference Entity
Preset Sizing JMAG-Express Classic 221
839
Region Chamfer JMAG-RT 589, 619, 626, 633, 644, 651,

JMAG-Express Classic 217 666, 672, 690
Region Fillet RT data file 699
JMAG-Express Classic 217 RT_simulink.dll 650
Region Mirror Copy RT_Simulink.mexw64 618, 625, 643, 650
JMAG-Express Classic 218 RT_Simulink.mexw64 (for Linux 64bit) 587, 618,
Region Radial Pattern 625, 632, 643, 650, 664, 671, 687, 699
JMAG-Express Classic 217 RT_Simulink.mexw64 (for Windows 64bit) 587,
Register Rotor Geometry 671, 687
JMAG-Express Classic 235 RTT file 587, 618, 625, 631, 643, 650, 664,
Register Stator Geometry 671, 687, 713, 714
JMAG-Express Classic 235 RU
Register Template to Database JMAG-RT 715, 720
JMAG-Express Classic 188 Running
Register to Database characteristics evaluation (JMAG-Express Clas-
JMAG-Express Classic 228 sic) 238
Requirement tab from the Command Line 387, 819
JMAG-Express 37, 84 parametric evaluation (JMAG-Express Classic)
JMAG-Express Classic 145, 162 258
Resistance 692 simulation using C language program 421
Resistance of 1st coil (ohm) 666 RV
Resistance of 2nd coil (ohm) 666 JMAG-RT 715, 720
Resistance of coil 692 RW
JMAG-RT 619, 626, 633, 644 JMAG-RT 715, 720
Resistance of coil (ohm) 593
Resistance of stator coil 654
S
Resistance Temperature Correction
JMAG-RT Viewer 803 Sample Time
Resolution JMAG-RT 594, 620, 626, 634, 645, 654,
JMAG-RT 441, 478, 486, 496, 510, 520, 667, 675, 691
533, 556 Saturation
Resolution (current) material setting 93
JMAG-RT 488 Saving
Resolution (position) Settings for Parameters for Torque-Speed Curve
JMAG-RT 487 / Efficiency Map to a File 805
Revolution Speed Secondary leakage reactance
JMAG-Express Classic 199, 201, 203, 208 JMAG-Express Classic output item 251
JMAG-Express Classic output item 254, 255 Secondary resistance
Revolution speed at current JMAG-Express Classic output item 251
JMAG-Express Classic output item 255 Section Area
Revolution speed at Phase Current (RMS) JMAG-Express Classic 166
JMAG-Express Classic output item 247 Section Type
Rotation speed 646, 655 JMAG-Express Classic 166
Rotation speed (rpm) 595, 667 Select Region
Rotor Angle Flag JMAG-Express Classic 293
JMAG-RT 716, 718 Selecting
Rotor skew angle (deg) 657 Templates 224
RT Correction tab Self-inductance
JMAG-RT 469, 482, 491, 504, 513, 526, JMAG-Express Classic output item 245
547 Send to JMAG-Designer
RT Data File JMAG-Express Classic 279
840
INDEX
Series / Parallel 691 JMAG-RT 626, 718

Series Number 189, 196 SR Motor
Set Coefficients Manually 646, 655, 667, 675 JMAG-Express Classic 136, 200, 313
Set coefficients manually 693 JMAG-RT 507, 617, 624, 631, 642
Set Color Range Star / Delta 691
JMAG-RT Viewer 806 Start Angle (Teeth)
Set Name JMAG-Express Classic 292
JMAG-Express Classic 214 Starting
Set skew option 601, 657 JMAG-Express 28
SetCoefficientsManually JMAG-Express Classic 142
JMAG-RT 595, 621, 627, 634 Starting current
Sets JMAG-Express Classic output item 251
JMAG-Express Classic 214 Starting impedance (Imaginary)
Setting Type JMAG-Express Classic output item 251
JMAG-Express 98 Starting impedance (Real)
JMAG-Express Classic 179 JMAG-Express Classic output item 251
Simple Settings Starting torque
JMAG-RT 446 JMAG-Express Classic output item 251
Simulink 631 Startup Window
Single-phase Induction Motor JMAG-Express Classic 143
JMAG-Express Classic 136, 198, 312 Stepping Motor
sizing function JMAG-RT 475
JMAG-Express Classic 231 Stray Load Loss
Sizing Menu JMAG-RT 522
JMAG-Express Classic 156 Switched Reluctance Motor
Sizing Parameter JMAG-Express Classic 136, 200, 313
Skew
JMAG-RT Viewer 800, 804 T
Skew angle 602
Skew type of rotor 601 Table data interpolation type
Skew type of stator 601 JMAG-RT 600, 622, 629, 639, 647, 657,
Slit Width between Segments 680, 695
JMAG-Express Classic 203 Target Entities
Slot Diagram tab JMAG-Express Classic 214
JMAG-Express 38 Target Entity
Slot Fill Factor Target Regions
JMAG-Express 99 JMAG-Express Classic 210
JMAG-Express Classic 180 Targeted Value
Slot Side Diameter JMAG-Express 84
Soft Magnetic Materials Teeth Position
Source type 691 Temperature
Spatial Harmonic Model JMAG-Express Classic 174
JMAG-RT 435 Temperature Correction
Specify Filter Inductance (H) 592, 652 JMAG-RT 469, 482, 491, 504, 513, 526,
Speed Flag 547
JMAG-RT 716, 718 JMAG-RT Viewer 798, 806
Spring Constant Template Editor Window
841

Template Menu turns_coil2 (Turnsin_coil2)
JMAG-Express Classic 154 JMAG-RT 620, 645
Template tab
U
Template Window
JMAG-Express 29 Unit
Terminal resistance Universal Motor
JMAG-Express Classic output item 254 JMAG-Express Classic 136, 207, 316
Three-phase Induction Motor Universal Motor Power Supply
JMAG-Express 21, 122 JMAG-Express Classic 208
JMAG-Express Classic 136, 196, 311 Updating
Three-phase PM Synchronous Motor RTT file 428
JMAG-RT 430, 530 Upper Width
JMAG-RT Viewer 796, 808 JMAG-Express Classic 166
Tool Menu Use AC copper loss resistance 592, 653, 673
JMAG-Express Classic 157 Use auto angle resolution setting for saving time
Torque
JMAG-RT 453
JMAG-Express Classic output item 242, 248, Use half electrical angle periodicity
249, 252, 253
JMAG-RT 451
JMAG-RT 455, 480, 541
Use Iron Loss 666
Torque constant
Use IronLoss
JMAG-RT 672
Torque Correction 588, 713, 714
Use Loss Table
Torque Flag
JMAG-RT 591, 651, 690
JMAG-RT 716, 718
Use phase symmetry
Torque setting is same as inductance
JMAG-RT 450
JMAG-RT 450, 539
Use PWM source
Torque-Speed Curve
JMAG-RT 674
JMAG-RT Viewer 806
Use temperature correction 633, 666, 690
Translation Speed
JMAG-RT 672
JMAG-RT 634
Use the Parameter of Another Constraint
T-type equivalent circuit
Use Torque Coefficient File
Turns in coil 694
JMAG-RT 597
turns in coil2
Use torque coefficient file 635
JMAG-RT 717
Use zero phase sequence current 452
Turns in Field Coil 678
Use_Temperature_Correction
Turns in Stator Coil 678
JMAG-RT 590, 619, 626, 644, 651
Turns/Slot Fill Factor
JMAG-Express 97
JMAG-Express Classic 177 V
Turns/Wire Size
JMAG-Express 97 Velocity Flag
JMAG-Express Classic 177 JMAG-RT 719, 721
turns_coil1 View Menu
JMAG-RT 598, 636, 715, 721 JMAG-Express Classic 154
turns_coil2 Voltage (120 deg)
JMAG-RT 598, 637, 716, 719, 721 JMAG-Express Classic 194
turns_coil2 (Turns_in_coil2) Voltage (Sin)
842
INDEX
Voltage Application Start Angle

Voltage Application Width (Mechanical Angle)
Voltage Constant
voltage signal input
JMAG-RT 605, 623, 629, 640, 648, 659,
662, 669, 682
Winding
JMAG-Express 100
JMAG-Express Classic 189, 197, 198, 200
Winding Diagram tab
JMAG-Express 38
Winding System
Winding tab
JMAG-Express 37, 96
JMAG-Express Classic 145, 177, 189, 196,
198, 200, 202, 205, 207
Wire current density
JMAG-Express Classic output item 247, 251,
253, 255
Wire Diameter
JMAG-Express 98
Wire Size
JMAG-Express 98
Wire Size/Slot Fill Factor
JMAG-Express 97
Wound-field AC Synchronous Machine
Wound-Field Synchronous Motor
JMAG-RT 530
843
844

Express RTRTViewer

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Express RTRTViewer

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Express RTRTViewer

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

JMAG Version 22.

About This Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

JMAG-Express 21.2 Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Starting JMAG-Express 21.2 and JMAG-Express 21.2 Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Getting Started with JMAG-Express 21.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Adding Evaluation Items and Re-Executing Characteristics Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Design Parameters in JMAG-Express 21.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Evaluation Results in JMAG-Express 21.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

JMAG-Express 21.2 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Response Table Creation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

JMAG-Express Classic Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Basic Operation of JMAG-Express Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

JMAG-Express Classic Design Parameters and Template Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

[Winding] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Designing Motor Using JMAG-Express Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Evaluating Motor Characteristics in JMAG-Express Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Evaluating Motor Performance Using Maps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Using Data Created in JMAG-Express Classic in Other Software Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Using Data Created in Third-party Software in JMAG-Express Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Managing the Database and Editing Templates in JMAG-Express Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

JMAG-Express Classic Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

JMAG-RT Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Creating JMAG-RT Models with JMAG-RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Settings and Notes for Creating JMAG-RT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Generic Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

Overview of Simulations Using JMAG-RT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

Using JMAG-RT Models in JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

Using JMAG-RT Models in a Commercial Circuit Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

Using JMAG-RT Models in Your Programs in C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723

Functions in JMAGRT_DLL.dll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728

JMAG-RT Viewer Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

Using JMAG-RT Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751

Physical Quantity That Can be Corrected and Correction Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

 Topics in This Chapter

JMAG-Express Types and Comparison

The following is the function comparison table:

Function JMAG-Express JMAG-Express Classic JMAG-Express Online

Function JMAG-Express JMAG-Express Classic JMAG-Express Online

Types of Motors Supported by JMAG-Express

• Brushless Motor (IPM) • Induction Motor

 Brushless Motor (IPM)

 Brushless Motor (SPM)

 Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/IPM)

 Brushless Motor (Outer Rotor/SPM)

 Function correspondence table for each motor

O: Supported, -: Not supported

Induced Voltage Evaluation

Motor Design Using a Template

Motor Design Using the Sizing Function

Motor Characteristic Evaluation

License Required to Use JMAG-Express

 Topics in This Chapter

Starting and Quitting JMAG-Express

Starting from the Command Line

 Windows (using command)

1. Execute the command to start JMAG-Express

 Linux (using command)